Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
XilBIL ART
OF TH
4ei.Mismis^^^ s^sss^n^iis s^^Jim^'Si
Xo.
,*! ^.
• ^
♦ •
A
NEW SPANISH GRAMMAR;
.. .OR, THE
ELEMENTS
*
' ' ' OF THB
SPANISH LANGUAGE:
CONTAINING
An Easy and Compendious Method to
Speak and Write it correctly :
with several useful Remarks od the most particular Idioms, and
Fundamental Rules, shewing how to make Use
of them, both m Speaking and Writing :
The Whole extracted from the best Observations of Spanish
Grammarians, and particularly of the
^ Royal Spanish Academy of Madrid:
TO. WHICH IS ADDED ^ <^
■
An ENGLISH GRAMMAR,
For the Use of Spaniards. ..^- r-^"
' , '. : . -■ V
' rv J 7
By H*" S*^ JOSEPH jELflNO. a
rf— *
A NEW EDITION; r '[ 5
^ •■'
Carefully Revised and Improved, *
By RAYMUNDO DEL PUEYO, M. A.
Neparva arcrseris : ine^t sua gratia parvn. Dam.
' ■ ' ' ■
XOJVDOJV;
PRINTED FOR F. WINGRAVE, IN THE STRAND,
SUCCESSOR TO MR. NOURSE;
by T. C Haimrdf reterborati«li<ou(t, Flcec>ttreet,
1814.
TSE KFW T«Rir
PtUIC Ue&ABY {
9667a7A
n w
9 1938 . L
f > ■■'.; i^ \JLfy
PROliQ^O Ai- IaSCTQB.
vl^ tuna, sin auda porque eraxk eiegos los que sin
Uegar d penetrarla, intentaron dibuxarla. £sta
Siism^ ce^uedad ti^nen algunos de ]o3 m^cboa, qu^
esean iapreipder los idioma3 cxtrangeros, quienes
Uevados de la corriente de su loca presunipcion, no
(|uieren adoceuarse ^ l^s reglas de uti m.^esitro
idoneo.
Pocos habra que nieguen la utilidad de la Gra-
matica, si se considera como medio indispensable
para aprender alguna, Lengua extrana. Pero
muchos dudaran tal vez que sean necessarios todos
los rudimentos de eHa, pareciendoles suficiente el
conocimiento que quissa teadrah de la Latina>
No lo pensaban asi los Griegos ni los Romanos :
pues, sin embargo de que para ellos eran tan co-
munes la Lengua Griega y Xaiina como para cada
uno lo es la suya propria, tenian gramaticas y es-
cuelas para estudiarlas, conocian la iifiUdady aecesi*
dad del uso; pero conocian tambien que con-
venia perfeccionarle con el arte. Si asi lo practi-
cabaii estas nacipnes qqjjL las LenguA^ n^^vas
quanto mas lo deben practicar los que hoy desean
aprender l^s e<3i:ti:aQa& ?
Perdoname, lector mio, si tc hablo con esta cla-
ridad; pues h^ encontrado con algunos de mis
« /
PREFACE.
IT wis tisuai with the ancients to paint Fortanft .
. without eyes ; no doubt because they who so
jittenipted to represent her were too blind to pene*^
' trate the motives tipoh \Vhich she afcted : the same
" mdy be said of those, who desire to cultivate att
acquaintance with foreign languages, but who,
from too much confidence in themselves, are above.
- stibiiiitting to the Rulei 6f Graitifriar, and to a
Mistei*, ho^eter <](ualifi^ he liiay bte.
Fe^ mii deny the utility of GramrtfJir, when
Ihd^ Cx>dstder it a^ indi^^en^ably necessary fot
learhing a Foreign Tongue; but many seein td
doubt the necessity of studying its particular rudi-
ments, from an opinion that a previous knowledge
6f the Latitt iWl of itself sufficiently answer their
The ancient Greeks and Romans, however, were
of a different opinion ; for, although the Greek
a*A Lrftitf Lattgoigis wei*6 as cothmorf to them as
every terhaCuflaY feriguage is to its respective
ftilSWtfy they had, notwithstatiding, Grammars and
ptXAic schbbk for the sole purpose of studyiftg
fReittf. Thej>^ t^ell knev^ the necessity and advafl-
&gi^ of practice, but at the satte tinfie they v^etb
, it^tf^ible that art and study arc necessa^ to perfec-
tion^ If these enlightened peopfe applied With so
much 'labour to their native tongues, how rnnch
more necessary is it to those who desire to learn a
foreign one at this day ? ,
• /
lT*f readdi- \fHI pardotf ihy s^a*.\t4^ 'wUVt «»
Aikcb sincerity ; but in the course o^ icvn e,tw^<yj-
i}
PROLOGO AL LECTOR,
discipuloS) que, teniendo por fejudez pueril el su-
[estarse d ]as reglas, que prescribe la Gramatica,
lan querido imediatainente componer, sin saber
todavia el orden, y conciierto, que deben tener enire
si las partes de la oracion, 6 la sintaxis particular
del idioma, que se proponian aprender. Pero que
es lo que acontece a estos tales? £n lugar de an-
helar aladelantami^nto, pierden el dinero y la pa-
ciencia, aburren a sus maestros, y al cabo de algun
tieitipo, se hallan muy atrasados del progresso^que
sin duda hubieran hecho, si se hubiessen sometido
de bucna fe baxo la instriicion del zeloso maestro.
Los rudimentos de la Gramatica, son la Have que
abre la pu^rta a su inteligencia, ella nos hace ver el
maravilloso artificio de la lengua ; en ensenandonos
de que partes constan sus nonii>res, definiciones, y
oficios, y como se juntan y enlazan/para formar el
texido de la oracion.
Sobre ninguna de estas cosas se hace reflexion
antes de entender el arte: y asi es difficil que sin el
hablemos con propiedad, exactitud, y purezia.
' Con esta intencion he procurado^ quanto mis
tareas cotidianas me ban permitido, corregir laGra-
matica de Del Pino, 6 por mejor decir, compoherla
de nuevo. Pues rara palabra he observado en ella, '
que no haya merecido mi correccion, u abolucion
total, substituyendo otra propia en su lugaf, acor-
tando muchos dialogos verdaderamente indignos de
la estampa, y del oido discipulo inocente que los
estudia.
Tres Editiones de la Gramatica Espanola, 6 Ingle-
sa ban sido publicadas en esta ciudad de Londres,
^or
PREFACE.
ment as a professor^ I have met with many, who,
regarding subjection to the Rules of Grammar as a
puerile task, have beei; desirous of composing even
without knowing the order and connection between
the different Parts of Speech, or the particular Synr
tax of the language which they intended to learn.
But what is the consequence of such conduct? In-
stead of making any progress, they throw away
their time and money, distract their teachers, and,
at the end, find themselves very far fromLthe im-
provement which they would have undoubtedly
made if they had submitted themselves to the in-
structions or an intelligent master.
Grammar is the key by which alone, a door Can be
opened to the understanding of speech. It is Gram-
mar which reveals the admirable art of language,
which unfolds its various constituent parts, its
names, definitions, and respective offices, and un-
ravels, as it were, the threads of which the web of
speech is composed.
These reflections seldom occur to any one before
his acquaintance with the art; yet, it is certain, that
without a knowledge of Grammar, it is very diffi-
cult to speak with propriety, precision, or purity.
To obtain this end, I have, as far as the multipli-
city of my avocations have permitted me, corrected
Del Pino's Grammar of the Spanish Language ; or,
to speak more properly, composed it a«ew, as there
are few words which it was not necessary to cor-
rect or entirely expunge, and substitute in their
place others more proper, especially in the dialogues,
many of which I have b^en under the necessity of
considerably curtailing, as unworthy of the press
and the ear of the uninformed student.
Three Editions of a Spanish and English Gram*
mar have been published in London; viz. by Ste-
i Lm
PROLObO At LECTOR.
pdt Esiiyetts, Fineda, y Del Pliio ; liabefHos qui
toddd estbs aiithores fueron e^lratigetod. Nb ob-
«atitCj este tiltimb tetiii dlgtitii idea de la Letigua
E^paSola: pero Com6 para publicar un tal libfo, h6
sdlameiite sd tequiefe, que daiithbf sea nati<roenel
idiottla qU6 piiblica, sitio tambieti gt&tAatico d& am-
bas lebguas, ptopia, y Latitia. Ko es de tnafaVillat,
C^t lad edicciones anteriores a esta hayail edtado
lianas de etrores : incotnpletasf, y faltas entera-
iliente tatitd del accento, dattio de la verdadera pra-
fiunckebn EspaSola para \6^ que desman apreudeif
ei^ta hermdsa lebgua. ,
- ~ .
tfhtf de los j)Utit6S pi*lucif)ral6d, qde tflcbOs Stf-
tliores ddxaroti tn ei trttero, y eh que coiisfirte la par Cfe
esselicial d6la SyMtaiisJ def la Gramatlcafi^pafioia M
sabet, pfopo^tciofie^ pideitt despues de ^iatgttiicrd vet-
bos, y otras partes de la oracion ; p*fa esteffn, tfre Be
valido de la Gramatica de la Academia de Madrid
At la qual h6 e^ttfabido ntd ffsta a1p!rab)etrca que
wdetto en tres coluimtas ; dri fa ptimetiL pcfjkga los
vef bos, y palabras ^u6 f igetf pftptjiflcioti i tn k $e-
gUftda kis pffeposfcJdtoes fegrd* ; y fttt k t^rfcera
las palabras regidas de las preposiciones. Con lo
quar kpettas'habf a darfa afguna iohft el reglmeit de
q<re tx> se ptteda iaftV a pritfiera vffta.
' la Oramatica que attorst te 6<Vezcb eS(S bleti eor-
fegfda, rei^iirta, y tfiuy aufrt6«tada. Pot efla {)i*6»-
ftieto ittstruif te eti pnw ttewptf si coti dtfcifrdatf it
sugetares k su6 f udiwttitos. Vatd
No qok tan^ilath' parv?^ fofi^diat GramniililSc^s elenftahta.
-Non qwa nlag^ ak op^te odrfsonbilte^avocaUbUs di&cernere,
easgvd in semi vblicalium numerum mutdrumque partiri : sed
PREFACE.
X
vens, Pineda, and Del Pino. It is sufficiently
known that ^1 t^esi authors werp foreigners. This '
last indeed haa some notion of the Spanish Lan-
guage ; but as, for an undertaking of this nature,
U is requisite not only that the language should be
that of the Author's own Qative country, but that
he should be intimately acquainted with the idioms,
both of his own, and of the Latin Language, it is
not at all surprising that the former editions have
been so replete with inaccuracies ;* that there
s]t|U[)uld have been so many omissions iind so mapy
errors, both in the accent and in the true pronun-
ciation of the Spanish : it mpst also be confessed,
that this is prejudicial to those who are desirous of
l^fijning this beautiful language.
One of the principal points which these authors
have omitted, and whien constitutes a great part of
the Spanish Syntax, is the government of prepo*
sttions by y^rb^, aipd o\h^t parts of sp^echr To
remedy thi^ in^ep^v^ftiewx, I h^ve availed mys^tf
oi the Grammar lately published by the Spanish
Academy of Madrid, froip which I have extracted
an alphabetical list, divided into three columns:
in th^ fiirst I have placed the verbs, and wordi^
which govern the prepositions ; in the second, the
prepositions governed : and in th^ third, the words
governed by the prepositions ; by the *Iielp of
which there can hardly be any doubt respecting
the government of the prepositions, which may
pot be easily solved at first sight
The Grammar which I nm ojBer to thip Public,
is revised, corrected, and considerably improved ;
and I flatter myself, U^at h^ who attends diligently
to its rules, will make great progress in a short
tiifie., V^le.
»
q|^^ inter iora velut taqri huju^ a d^^bjus, apparabit nnilta
rfDi|nv(^ili(a#t qui^ ^^ iBodp aci|t4 ingenia piierilia, sed
exercere altissiinain quoque eruditiontm ax: ^cvtivu^'ca ^omx*
»ii
CONTENTS.
I
PARTI. '
Chap. Pace
I. — Of Grammar y and its Parts . . • 1
•II. — Uf Letters, and their Pronunciation 6
III. — Of the Declension of Articles and Nouns ... 11
lyf.—Of Verbs 18
PART II.
I.— Cf Syntax .133
II.— Of muns r 136
III. — Of the Construction of Nouns Substantive . . 141
IV. — Of Pronouns and their Constructiofi 145
v. — Of Ferbs and their Construction • . 152
VI. — OfPr^sitions 167
Vn. — Of Adverbsj Conjunctions, and Interjections . . 171
Observations to serve as a Supplement to the Syntax . . 195
PART III.
A lAstofYjLnBS in Three Columns. The first contains
> the Words which govern the Preposition ; the Second,
tie Prepositions governed ; and the Third gives an
Example of the Words which ar^ governed by the
Prepositions 1
PART IV.
A VqcabulAry, containing such words as most frer
quently occur in common use . . ')' 41
PART V.
Familiar Phrases and Dialogues • . 74
Select Fablesy with useful examples of mercantile Cor-
responde/icCf selecteafrom the most approved Authors,
in Spanish and English 157
NuiBVA Gramatica iNGiiESAy/^ara /bs Espanoles 181
THE
ELEMENTS
OF THE
SPANISHGRAMMAR.
PART I.
CHAR i.
Of Grammar, and its Parts.
*
BECAUSE a great many are not versed in the
Latin tongue, I thought it necessary to begin
by the Explanation of Terins used in Grammar;
which being well knoven, there is no difficulty to
understand Grammar.
DEFINITIONS.
Grammar is the art of speaking and writing a
language correctly.
The Spanish Grammar, as all other Books, is
composed of words, all words are composed of let-
ters, and all letters are either Vowels or Consonants.
Vowels are fiv/e. A, E, I, O, U; they are so
called, because they form a sound of themselves;
the other letters are called Consonants, because
they form a sound with one of the vowels.
AH words are either a Noun, Pronoun, Verb,
Participle, Preposition, Adverb, Conjunction, In-
terjection, or Article.
Many words joined together make a sentence or
proposition -, as, Peter is my friend.
(LIB -..
. ^
S The ELEMENTS of
A Noim is a thing we see or feel, or of which wc
may form a discourse : as the earthy a table^ a looking-
glass.
Nouns are of iwo sorts, Substantives and Adjec-
tives.
A Noun Substantive is so called, because it sub*
sists of itself, and signifies something alone ; but the
Noun Adjective must be joined to another noun,
to have a meaning ; as, a black horse. Horse is the
Substantive, and bkick the Adjective.
A Noun Substantive is either proper or common;
proper, as Alexander^ Frederic^ GeorgCy Mary^ Lon-
' dotty Madrid: common, as mngy lordy man, womanj
tablCy &c. ,
All proper Names are declined in Spanish with
these particles, dfe, a; but the Common Nouns
are declined with the articles e/, la and lo.
The use of Artidcs is to shew of what gender, of
what number, and in what tase the novms are. There
ard three Genders, Masculine, Feminine, and Neu-
ter ; and only two Numbers, Singular and Phiral.
The Ncmn^ hive six Cas€s,'the Nominative, Geni-
tive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, and Ablative.
The Nominative Case names the thing, or the per-
son ; as the sun shines. The sun is the Nominative.
The Genitive Case shews that either one thing
proceeds from another, or belongs to it; as, the
coach of the King ; the water of the river.
The Dative gives ; as, I give a book to my master.
To my master is in the Dative Case, because I give
the book to him. ,
The Accusative Case is governed by the Verb
' Active; as the King loves the English. The EngJisk
are in the Accusative Case, because they are go-
verned by the' Verb Active, love.
The Vocative calls ; m Peter, cojne hither. Peter
is in the Vocative Case, because I call him.
The Ablative takes away from ; I took it from
John. From John is in the Ablative Case, because
the thing is taken from him.
Observe,
-•/
the SfanisA Grammar.. 5
Ob^erye^ that in the Spanish tongue the Nomina-
tive is not distinguished from the Accusative, nor
the Genitive from the Ablative, unless it be by the
sense; because the Article of the Nominative Case
is like that of the Accusative, and the Article of
tbe Genitive does not differ from that of the Abla*
tive, as you may see in. the Declension of Nouns.
All nouns are either Masculine or Feminine; the
Masculine takes the article e/, and the Feminine the
article la^ the Neuter takes the article to.
.]^ A Pronoun is a word which is used in the place
oFa Noun Substantive : as, for example, give me^
givls Him, give us. Me, him, us, are in the place of a
proper Noun Substantive, viz. John, Paul, Peter.
Pronouns are of six sorts, Positives, Demonstra-
tives, Personals, Interrogatives, Relatives, and Inde-
finites ; as you may see in the Declension of Pronouns.
A Verb is a word that shews either a being, or an
action, or apassibn ; as for example, to lie good, to
beat, to be beaten. To be] good shews a being ; to beat
shews an action ; and to be beaten a passion.
If the action remains in its subject, then the Vetb
is neuter, or reciprocal ; as, I sleep, duerrm; I re-
joice, me aiegro:
A Verb has five Moods, m. Indicative, Impera-
tive, Optative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive; and six
Tenses, which may be reduced to three, viz. Present,
Fast, and Future.
The Indicative shews either the thing or person;
as, the sun shines, el sol lucea^ I speak, yo habb.
The Imperative bids ; asj Speak to me, habla me,
or habla a mi; Come hither, ven aca.
The Optative wishes; *as, God grant that I may
speak to-the King, guiera Dies am hable al Rey.
The Subiunctive is so called, oecause it is placed^
under a conjunction ; as, Vhen I have received my
money, I will pay you, quando haya recibido mi
dinero, pagari a vm.
And the Infinitive determines no circumstance
of time ; as, To speak, hablar ; to love, amAr.
B 2 The
4 The ELEMENTS of
The Tenses are, the Present Tense, the Imperfect,
the Preterperfect Definite, the Preterperfect Inde-
finite, the Preterpluperfect, and the Fut<ure.
The Present shews, that either a person or, thing
is present; as My master teaches, mi maestro ense-
na.; The spring brings forth flowers, la primavera
produce fiores.
The Imperfect shews that the action is interrupted ;
as, I did dance when my father entered into my
chamber, baylabaquando m padre entroen mi aposento.
The Preterperfect Definite shews, that either thU
action is passed above a day, or that it is determined
by, some circumstance of time; as. The great Fre-
deric conquered all Saxony, el gran Fredirico con-
(juistS toda la Saxonia ; I spoke yesterday to the
King, habUayer con el Rey.
The Preterperfect Indefinite shews that the action
is past, without signifying any circumstance of
time; as, I have spoken to the King, he hablado at
Rey: But if it marks any circumstance of time,
either it is of the same day, or a Pronoun Demon-
strative goes before it ; as, I have spoken to-day to
the King, he hablado oy al' Rey ; I have suffered
much this year, he padecido mucho este ano.
The Pi^terpluperfect Tense is so called, because
the action, bemg entirely past, cannot be interrupt-
ed; as, I had danced when my father entered into
my chamber, havia baylado quando mi padre entrb en
mi aposento.
The Future Tense shews the Time to come; as I
will rise to-morrow, me4evantare manana.
All Verbs are conjugated ; that is, they have se-
veral terminations ; as, I love, thou lovest, &c. we
shall love, yo amo^ tu amaSy nos amaremos.
There are three Persons in the Singular, and three
in the Plural, viz. I, thou, he ; we, you, they : yOy
fUf el ; noSj voSy ellos.
T}ie Singular denotes one thing, or drie person, and
the Plural more than one; as, a 7nan ; there is the
Singular: Two men or more; there is the Plural.
The
the Spanish Guammaii. 5
The Participle is so called, because it is derived
from a Verb; as, loving, amantCy is derived from
the Verb, to love, amir:
There is one Active, which is always ending in
ante or ente^ m Spanish, and in ing in English ; as,
flmfljw/e, loving; rfom/ew^e, sleeping.
And another Passive, which is ended in ado in the
Verbs of the first Conjugation, and in ido in those
of the secoijd and third: as you may see in the
Conjugations of Verbs,
^ There are four Auxiliary Verbs in Spanish^ To
have, tener or haver; and to be, ser^ esfar. They are
so called, because they help to conjugate airother
Verbs, as you may see in the Conjugation of Verbs.
An Adverb is a word which is joined to a Verb,
and either increases or diminishes its action or pas-
sion; I love virtue ^re«^^ ; I am littk loved of you.
Greathf increases the passion of love towards virtue,
zwd little diminishes your love towards me.
A Conjunction is a word which joins sentences
and words together ; as, I have seen your father
and mother, he visto sn pad?^e y su madre de vm.
A Preposition is a word which is put before a
Noun or l^ronoun ; as. Under tlie bed, deb&xo de la
cama\ In your chamber, en su aposento\ With me,
conmigp,.
An Interjection is a word which discovers some
sudden emotion of the mind ; as, Alas'! unhappy
that I am, ay ! desdiehado de mi ; Ha ! how cruel you
are, ay ! que vm. es cruel.
An Article is a- Particle, or a little word which
serves to shew of what gender, of what number,
and in what case is a Noun ; they are fifteen in all,
vii, el, la, lo, del, de la, de lo, al, a la, a lo, hs, las^ de
los, deltas, a los, a las*, as you may see in the De-
clension of Nouns.
B 3
^
< tf
The ELEMENTS of
CHAP. il.
Of Letters^ and ttteir Proxunciaiion.
THE letters of the Spanish language api twet)ty-
eight, viz. i
A, B, C, CH, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, LL, M,
N, N,0, P, Q, R,S,T, U, V, X,Y, Z.
They are pronounced thus :
(ty be, ce, chCj de^ e, e/e, ge^ ache, iy jet A, or ijdta, kHy
elCy e/jfe, em€y ene, ene, o, pe^ qu, or cw, trtf tsse^ te^ u
'ooc&lf V consonanie, equis, y griega, zeds dr zeta.
■ The reason why the Spanish tongue is so hard to
be pronounced by Englishmen^ is, because the JEng-
lish pronounce their vowds otherwise than the
Spanish.
He then that will pronounce well tlie Spanish
tongue, ought to pronounce wel^ these Vowels,
A, E, I, O, 0.
"^ aw, a, ee, o, oo.
As for the Consonants, there is not so much diffi-
culty; they are pronounced in the A^tfmVA tongue
as in the English, except //, G, H, X, Z, J, f , and n,
which are peculiar to the Spanish language.
Of Vowels.
A is pronounced as above ; and as the English
pronounce it in these words, law, all, call, Jail; as
Madama, ama, llama.
E is always pronounced as the English pronounce
it in these words, benefit, relation.
/ is pronounced as the £w^/i,yA pronounce their
double ee, in these Words, steel, sleep, steep.
* These Italic letters denote' the similar sounds in English of the Vowels in
Spanislu
O is
I
the SipANiek Grammar, 7
is pronounced as they pronounce it in these
words, more J stone, stare ; as oig^^ olivo. '^•
U is pronounced as they pronounce oo in these
ii^ords, good^ cook, cooL
Y is pronounced as two ee ; as ayud&rf to help ;
Mffino, fast
%♦ When two Vowels meet together in Spanish
words, t'hey must be pronounced distinctly, ^Lsamai-
ndr, caer, acaecir, &c. When there are twQ ee in a
word, both are aisp plainly and distinctly pronounc-
ed; as creiVy to believe; Iter, to read, ^.
Of Consonants.
B. This letter is pronounced as in other languages,
closing the lips, as in the English word bay.
C, before the letters e, i, is pronounced like an s\
as cidrOj a cedar-tree ; ciervo, a stag ; cien ciento, an
hundred. When before a, Oj t/, it is pronounced as
k ; as, cabalb, hprse ; cofre, trunk ; cuUbra, snake ;
culantro. coriander.
When h follows the letter c, it is pronounced as
in the English, m^ch^ mucho; chiW, 7iifio 6 niha.
Upon the f, formed with a small dash under it, I
am of opinion, with the Royal and learned Academy
oiF Madrid^ that it is superfluous in our language;
and as such its use must be avoided, placing the z
in its stead in every word where f used to be. But
as jp is found in old Spanish authors^ I think it pro-
per to acquaint the curious, tha^t its pronunciation
is near the same as that of c, when before e, i, be-
cause g was invented to supply the combination in
-the Vowels a, t>, w. Z is pronounced almost as the
English pronounce the double ^.
D has the same sound in Spanish as in the other
languages, without exception.
^is pronounced always as in English; but it
must be observed, that the Spaniards never use two^
^^in their writings^
G is only guttural before the Vowels e, i, y, as
in genero^ sort ; gigante, giant ; but g before the
. B 4 Vowels
^.4
8 The ELEMENTS of
Vowels tf, 0, w, is not aspirated, but is pronounced
asmEnglishy as, gallo, acock; g-oiier/^o, govern-
ment. When g comes before w, then it is pro-
nounced as in ignorar, to be ignorant of ; ignotOy
unknown; magnanimoy magnanimous.
H is generally so lightly aspirated, that in many
words it can scarce be perceived; as in hablhr^ to
speak ; harriiroy carrier. jEf after c is pronounced
as in English; cheese, qtcesso ; much, mucho, Sfc»
K. The Spaniards make use of this letter only
in conformity to the etymology of the words de-
rived from other languages, and is pronounced as
in English.
Z and //. The single / is pronounced in Spanish
as in English ; but the double // is pronounced as
in Itnlian^ glj or // in French, which sounds as if
an i was after the first / ; as in llevcir, Ihrar, vasaU
lo; read lievAr, liorar, vasalio. L is never doubled
in the end of words. >
My Ny N. MsLtid n are pronounced as in English ;
but this tiy called con tildcy or e/Je, is pronounced as if
it had an i after the «; as in Senor, Sir; mana, dexte-
rity ; read Senior, mania. But the proper sound and
pronunciation of this letter wants a master, and can^
not be explained so well by writing as by hearing.
Py Q, Ry are pronounced as in other languages,
and as in English.
Sy T, Z. S and z are always pvononncedin Spanish
. strongly, and as two ss in English. T has the same
pronunciation as in English.
X is aspirated as the jotay J y in the beginning of
words ; as in .varam, juice, ^c. But when the a^ is
followed by a Consonant in the middle of the words,
then it must be pronounced like an s; as, excitiry
to excite ; excomulgdry to excommunicate ; e^vhere^
davy to disinherit, fsfc.
%
I
Whea
4
M^ Spanish Grammar. 9
When you have read all these rules, take every
Consonant one after another, and join them with
every Vowel thus :
Ba, be, bi, bo, biu
Ca^ cc, ci, CO, cu.
Cha, che, chi, cho, chu.
Da, de, di, do, du.
P^y fe, fi, >, fu.
Gua, gue,gui.
Ha, he, hi,
, J(^^ >, jh
La, le, li,
Lla, Ik, Hi,
Ma, me, mi,
,Na, ne, ni,
Na, ne, ni.
Pa, pe, pi,
QtiOf que, qui.
Ra, re, ri,
Sa, se, si,
Ta, te, ti,
. Va, *ce, vi,
Xa, xe, xi,
.. Za, ze, zi.
Observe, that though you have good and clear
rules to read well the Spanish tongue, yet no man
will ever be able to obtain by himself its true and
perfect pronunciation, because the true "pronuncia-
tion of a language depends more upon the ear than
upon rule ; therefore, I advise to take a good mas-
ter for some' months.
Of Accents.
The Spanish have two accents, the Grave (^)and
the Acute 0. The Grave descends obliquely from
the left to the right, and is used in the Spanish tongue
on the Vowels ^, e, }, o, u, when they make a sense by
themselves, and upon the syllable before a short one.
The accent called Acute descends from the right to
the left, and serves to prolong the pronunciation ; as
wonttttics.^
go,
1
•
ho.
hm
lu.
llo,
llu.
mo,
mu.
no.
nu.
no,
nUi
po,
pu.
ro,
ru.
so.
su.
to.
tu.
vo.
vu.
xo.
xu.
zo.
zu.
Hk.
10 The ELEMENTS of
montages, liighlander ; baylo^ he danced ; baylar&^ ht
wili dance : and to denote the quantity of the syl-
lable; as, c&ntaro, pitcher ; cahtdra^ I would sing;
cantardy he will sing ; libro, a book ; libro, he dis-
charged or gave a bill.
Of Points.
Because a language is better understood when it
is well pointed, therefore we ought not to neglect
it in writing.
There are eight sorts of points, the Comma (,)
which makes distinction betMeen sentences and
propositions ; the Colon (:), which cienotes the end
of a phrase, its period being not quite finished ; the
SemicQlon (;\ which does not much differ from the
Colon; the Point Jinal Qy which ends a Period, as
you may see in this example :
When I saw you, I was very, glad; but -my joy
endedy as soon as I heard of the death of your father .
The Point of Interrogation (?), which is placed after
a question ; as,« From whence do you come ? and the
Point of Admiration (!), which shews an astonish-
ment; ^s, Good God I is it possible ! Alas! &c.
A Parenthesis, thus, ( ), serves to separate a clause,
without which the speech may have a perfect sense,
to the end that it may be more plain; as, vi a mi
amigo (estp se quede seareto) quien era triste ; I saw
my friend (that must be secret) who was dull.
Dieresis ('* ) is a Greek \eord, called by the Printers
crema, and signifies a severing or division, andserves
to separate two Vowels, which might be joined* in
one syllable, and to note that both are . to be pro-
nounced plainly, arid with distinction ; and this
mark is to be put oni the ii ; as, eloqiiente^ eloquent ;
Jreqilente, frequent ; and this only in the word&
\>rhere ^ is pronounced openly.
Of the Capital Letters.
Capital Letters are always used in the beginning
of my writing, paragraph, pej;iod, or speech; after a
^i&e Spanish Grammar. i)
final point ; in all the proper nam€& of penons^ pro-
vinc^Sy kingdoms^ districts, cities, towns, villages,
mountains, rivers, fountains, d^cand in all tides of
honour,' dignity and authority ; as King^ Priuce^ &c.
Of Etymology.
Tiie best of those authors who have treated on
Etymoldffy in a regular order and method, was St.
Isidore of Seville, whose rules have been adopted by
the Royal Academy of Madrid; and I followed them
too in the new English and Spanish, and Spanish and
-Ewg-Z/^A Dictionary, which I have lately printed,
aiid to which I refer the reader.*
Of Numbers.
In Spanish, as in other languages, there are two
Numbers ; viz.
Singular, speaking of one thing, or one person.
Plural, speaking of more than one.
When the Noun ends with one of the.:J^owels, a,
€, i, 0, u, the Plural is formed by adding only an s to
it; as,- casa, house ; casas, houses ; hombre, man ; horn-
bres, men; alheli, gilliflower; alhelis, gilliflowers;
caballo, horse; cabalbs, horses; espiritu, spirit; es-
pirituSj spirits. But when the Noun ends with ixy, '
or,a Consonant,, then the Plural is made by adding
es to the Singular ; as from ley, law; leyes, laws;
verdad, truth; verdades, truths, S^'c.
* A new edition of this 'Dictionary, with considerable Improvements, has
been published by Mr. Baretti.
CHAP. III.
Of the Declension of Articles and Nouns.
Of the Spanish Articles.
^ TTilERE are three Articles in 'the Spanish Ian-
^uagc, as in tHe Latin, viz. the Article Mas-
culine, Feminine^ and* Neuter, The Article Mascu-
line is el, and is made use of before Nouns of the
— ■ «
IS TAe ELEMENTS of
Masculine Gender; the Article Feminine is la, and
is put before Nouns of the Feminine Gender ; the
Neutral Article is fo, and is usually placed before
Nouns Substantives formed from Adjectives ; for
there are no Neuter Nouns in Spanish^ they being
all either of the Masculine or Feminine Gender.
Declension of the Masculine Article.
Singular Number. Plural Number.
Norn. e\^ the Norn Aq%, the
Gen. del, or deel, of the Gen, de los, of the
Dat, a el, or al, to the Dat, a los, 7^ the
jfcc. el, the Ace, los, the
AbL del, or de €.\,from the, Abl, de Xos^from the.
Feminine Artick,
Singular Number. Plural Number.
Viom. la, the Nam, las, the
Gen, de la, of the Gen, de las, of the
Dat, a ia, to the Dat, a las, to the
Ace. la, the Ace. las, the
AbL de \dL,from the. AbL de hs^from the.
Neuter Article.
Nominative , lo, the
Genitive, ' de lo, of the
Dative, a lo, to the
Accusatvue, lo, the
Ablative, de \o,from the.
JExamples :
I I
A Noun Masculine declined with the Articles.
Singular Number. Plural Number.
■ «
JVel Rey, the King Los Reyes, the Kings
G deUrdeel Rey, oj the King De los Reyes, of the Kings
D a el, or al Rey, to the King a los Reyes, to the King^s
Ac el Rey, the King, Los Reyes, the Kings
A del, or de el Rey , from the De los Rey es,yr^m the Kings
King . .
A Noun
the Spanish Grammar.
13
A Noun Feminine with the Articles.
J'lural Number.
Las Reynas, M^ Queens,
Singular Number.
A^ la Reyna, the Queen
G de la Reyna, 0J the Queen
De las Reynas, of the Queens
jD a la Reyna,- to the Queen a las Reynas, to the Queens
Ac]a. Reym,' the Queen Las Reynas, the Queens
A de la Rey na^rowj the Queen De las Rey nas,yr£;OT the Queens^
Thus are declined all the other Nouns Masculine
and Feminine with the Article. Nouns Proper arc
never declined with the above Articles.
Example of Adjectives made Substantives with the
. Article Neuter^ lo.
Nominative^ lo hermoso, that which is handsome.
Genitive^ • de lo hermoso, 0/ that which is handsome.
Dative^ k lo bermoso, to that which is handsome.
'. Accusative^ lo hermoso, that which is handsome.
Ablative, de lo hprmoso, from that which is handsome.
All the Adjectives may be used in this manner
as Substantives, in \S\^ Spanish language, adding the
Article lo before the Masculine Gender.
Observe^ That the Vocative has no Article, and it
is designed so, 6 hombre^ O man ; 6 Fedro^ O Peten
% .
O/'PllONOUNS.
Proflouns are words used instead of names or
nouns, to avoid the repetition of thepi.
There are six sorts of Pronouns, viz. Personals,
Possessives, Demonstratives, Relatives, Interroga-
tives^ and Indefinites.
Of Pronouns Personal.
These are called Personals,or Primitives, because
they express the person or thing before named,
There are three Pronouns Personal ; 3/0, 1 ; tu^ thou ;
^/, he ; or ella^ she.
TU
14 Tifee ELEMENTS qJ
The first is declined thus :
Nom^ yo, / r Norn, nos, or mosotros, W
Gen* de mi, of me -^ \G^;z. de nos, of us
Dat. a mi, to me S < Dat^ a nos, to us
Ace. me, me* E J yf cc. oqs, z<j
!<f ^/. de vcL\Jrom me. V. /^i/. de nos^ from us.
The second Persotmt declined:
Nom. tu, M^a rNom, vos, (5r vosotros, ^^
Gtf/f, de ti, of thee -^ VCtf^. de vos, of ye
Dat. . a ti, to thee ^ I Dat. a vos, to ye
Ace, te, thee E J ydfcr. vos, >«
^^/, At iXyfroffi thee„ KAbl. de voi^Jrom ye^
The third Personal:
Norn. e\, he » g f*-^^^* ellos, M/?;?
Gtf«. dee), of him ^ l G^». de ellos, of them
Dat. a el, to him . < Z)^/* a ellos, to them '
Ace. le, or lo, Aim. ^ I Ace, les, ^r los,*Mei» ",
^W. de el^Jrom Aim. 5 v^i/. de ello8,/rf>»i Mtfwz.
• rNom. ella, jA^ ^ r JViyw. ellas, M^j^ •
§ \Gen» deella^ of her ^\Gen. de ellas^ of them
^ J Dat, i eHa,>^ A<fr . < Dat a ellas, /^ them
^ J ><cc. la, her ^ i -^rc, las, them
c3 L/f i/. de ella,yr^»* her* E v^^/. de ellas,yr^m them.
The Personal Reciprocal, common to both Genders, is
declined thus :
Gen. de simismo, or si misnla, of himself or of herself,
Dat. a- si mismo, or a si misma, to himself^ or to herself
Ace, se, himself, or herself.
Abl, desi mismo, or de si mi8ma,yrt?»i himself, or from herself.
Observe, that nosotros atnd vosotros make nosbtras
^d vosotras in the Feminine Gender.
Of Pronouns Possessive.
They are so callecj, because they are derived from
those above-mentioned, and denote possession. There
are three of these Pronouns answering to the three
persons, viz, mio, mine; tuyo^ thine ; ^wj/o, his ; nuestro^
our; vuesiro, your; su, their; with their Feminine
Gender,
the Spanish Grammar. \5
GtnAtr.mia^ tuya^mya^nuestray^ouestra^su. It must be
observed that thtstl^vorioxxvi^^miOytuyo^suyOyBxt never
placed before Substantives ; and so it cannot be said,
mio librOy but mi lihrOy nfiy book ; tu librOy thy book ;
su libra, his book. Thus may you see, thatwi, tUytu,
are always, used before Substantives of both Genders,
for the singular; and miSy tus^ sus, for the Plural.
Mioytuyo, suyOy is only made use of in questioning,
answering, affirming, or denying ; as will be ex-
plained by examples and rules in the Syntax.
Of Pronouns Ikmonstrative.
There are three principal Demonstratives; the
first is este, this ; the second, ese, that ; and the third,
aquely that. But observe, that este shews the thing
or person that i^ just near or by us; and ese shews
th« thing that is a little farther, or near the per-
son ; and aquel shews what is very distant from the
person who speaks, or is spoken to. .
These Pronouns are declined thus :
Masc.
, f Nom. cste
^ 1 Gen. de este
gtj< Bat. a esle
.5 I Ace. este
"^XaH. deeste
Masc.
estos
de estos
^ estos
estos
de egtos
Fern. Neut.
Masc.
esta
de esta»
a esta
esta
de esta
Fern.
estas
de estas
a estas
estss
de estas
Fern.
esa
deesa
a esa
esa
de esa
esto
de esto
a esto
cf&to
de esto
This
Of this
Toijiis
This
From this
(No Neut.)
Neut.
eso
de eso '
^ eso
eso
de eso
These
Of these
JO these
These
From these
That
Of that
To that
That
From that
Nom^
-» 'iV *^i' ■■ . . .
a
16 The ELEMENTS of
Masc. Fern. (No Neut.)
Nom. esos esas T\os£
^ Gen, de esos de esas Of those
% -^Pat. a esos ^ esas To l/u)se
Ace, .esos esas Those
Abl, de esos de esas From those*
Mmc, Fern. Neut,
; Nom. aquel aquella aquello That
Gen, de aquel de aquella de aquello (7/ Mi7/
Dat, a aqucl a aquella a aquello To that
Ace, aquel aquella aquello That
AbL de aquel de aquella de aquello From that
Masc. Fern.
ffom. aquellos aquellas Those
Gen, de aquellos de aquellas Of those
Dat. a aquellos . a aquellas * To those
Ace, aquellos aquellas Those ,
Abl. de aquellos de aquellas Frorn those.
m
Observe, that from the Pronouns este^ ese, are
formed agueste, aquesta, aquestOy and aquese^aquesa^
aqueso. They are made use of only by poets, instead
of este or ese, and signify the same; . but in prose
,they are too low and obsolete.
The words otrOy otra, are often joined to estt and
e^e, taking oif the last e ; as, estotrOy estotra^ esotro^
e^otra. , Example, Estotro homhre, this other man ;
estotra muger, this other woman ; esot7^o hombrey
that other man; esotym muger y that other woman.
There are two other Pronouns, which have only
a Plural Number, as signifying two, which SLreambos
and entramboSy both. To the first of them is ofteu'
added a dos, tbaitiSy ambos ^ doSy both together; and
entrambos imports much the same.
Pronouns Relative and Interrogative.
Que is interrogative, and signifies K;Atf/ ; it has
no Plural ; it is common to both Genders.
Quieny who, is also interrogative, making ^mef/^e in
tlie Plural : it is likewise common to both Genders.
Qual
tke Spanish GhAMMAfc. 17
QjO^ IsigliiSes tvhieh ; ad, quai de tltoi f which of
th^m^ It makes ^oife^ in tl^ Plural^ being commoil
tb both Gendek^.
The Pronoun cuyo^ cuya, whose, is either interro-
gative or relative, making ci^^of, cuyas, in the Plural ;
as, Pedro, cuyolibrd tengo^i^ Peter,- whose book I
have ; or cuya es esta phima ? whose pen is this ?
Observe, that the s^id foiir Pronouns, que qukfiy
cwjfOf and \fiia^ are ake relatives; asy eihvmbre que he
t)i9to^ theAian whom I have seen; elsufetoquien lo(Sc^
the person who says it; ellieycuyopalacioeshtrmoso;^
the King whosle palace is handsome. When qiial is
rdative, then e/, U^ and lo are joined to it, as signify-
ing who ; but /o^fia/ii& expressed by thexvhkk. Tfaes€
two joined together are declined as follows :
JV^0ff3. el qual la qual loqual Wkichjor wht
€H. At tl qdal die la qm\ tde lo qual Vf which
Dat. &^ (qilal a. la qttftl a lo qobl Tc tohieh
Ace. el *qual la mti, • lo qiial Whitk
AbL de el qual de fa qual de 16 qual From which
Plur. Masc. Fern. (No Plur.J
Nom, los quales las qnales Wktch
Gen. delotfquafes de-las quaks v Of which
Dat. aids quales a las qualeb To which
Ace. Iqs quales las quales Which
Abi. (ibi'Os^u^le^ de bs 1q[t!i:ale5 From kvhkh
Observe, thatwh^n the word quiera is ad^ed to
quie^y or qtial, it quite alters the meaning ; quien-
fmera sijgnifying whoever, or any person ; an^quaU
*fukra atiy one^ whether man^ or woman, or thing.
•Q/* Pronouns Indefinite
The Impertect or Indefinite Pronouiis are these ;
&lgun»^ an^Tkr, some; mngnm, ninguna, non^; algi^
TOmethifig ; vada und^ every one ; cada^ each ; na^ky
Mbody; otrdy atra, another; fa/, such ; tanto, so
lAuch; ftm>3^0/ how much ; mucAo, mt/cAa, itiueh,
o!r tnkny ; fulanoj or zwtano^ such oiie; todo^ toda,
alL
18 T/ze ELEMENTS of
Observe, ih^it cada, algo^ nadie,Julano, SindzutmWy
have no Plural ; but the others make their Plural
by .adding an Sy or e^ to the singular.
I ■■■■■■ I I I ■■■ > i.i I M
CHAP. IV.
Of VERBS.
A Verb is a part of speech that signifies to be,-
•^ to do, or to suffer; as, ser hombrCy to be a man ;
amo; Ilove;*;^^? amadOy I am loved. It is conjugated
through Moods and TAises. By Moods, the Verb
is changed according to the circumstances ; as, yo
hablOy I speak, is the Indicative; habla tu, speak
thou, the Imperative, &c. Tenses are the distinc-
tion and variation of times ; as, venia, I was coming ;
vine, I came, S^c.
Verbs are divided into personals (so called be-
cause they have Persons), as yo amo, I love ; tu
a/maSy thou lb vest, 8^c. and Impersonals (because
without persons) as, convienCy it is convenient;
constUy it is plain.
The Personals are divided into
Active,
Passivey
Neiitevy
Reciprocal
Active signifies to do ; as, enstnhry to teach ; &/r,
to read ; and may be made passive by the auxiliary
Ve^b seVy and, the Participle Passive of the Verb;
as, ser ensenado, sot ensenadoy &c.
Passive signifies to suffer; ^Sy soiamido. But note,
that in the third Person Singular, and the Third of
the Plural, they are conjugated not only with the
Auxiliary ^er, but even with the Particle ^e; as, Dios
es am&dOy or T>ios se ama, God is beloved ; bmno es que
la virt^d sea halladby or se halle en tin PrincipCy it is
good that virtue be found in a Prince; que los buSnos
sian ami^doSy or se ameny that the virtuous may be
loved. By which you may see, that the Participle
Passive is yariedf in the Conjugation of this Verb,
saying, 2fo soi amddOy nosotros somos amados.
Neuter,
'' the Spanish Grammar. 19
Neuter, properly, is, that which signifies neither'
Action nor passion; as, colordr^ to colour ; coloreary
to recover a colour, or to give colour ; correr^ to run ;
assentir, to assent. This verb makes a perfect sense
by itself, in which it differs from the active ; as,
duermoj I sleep ; nieva^ it snows.
The Verb Active says the same thing in the Ac-
tive and Passive Voices ; as, yo amo a Dios^ or Dios
€s amado de mi, which cannot be said by the N'euter
.ina like manner.
The Neuter is either Substantive, as, ser to be, or'
absolute (so called for its making a sense by itself)
by action, as blasphcm&r, to blaspheme; llueve, it
rains; oj* by passion, as colorear, ennegrecer.
The Verb Reciprocal is that Avhich returns the
sense backward, and is conjugated thus; apercibirse,
to be prepared or provided for ; me apercibo, I pre-
pare myself; te apercibes, thou preparest thyself;
and always has the Particle se in the Infinitive.
Notey That in the Spanish language one Verb may
be made active^ passive^ neuter, <iu(\ recipy^ocal, by the
different senses that may be applied to it ; as acosta?',
to put one in his bed, is active^ and is made passive
by the Verb Auxiliary e^^^V, and the Participle Pas-
sive; as, estoi acostado, I am put in my bed, or I lie
down. When it signifies to follow one's party or
,opmion, or to declare partially for a Prince, it is
neuter ; as, Pedro dexddo elservicio de Francia, acosto a
hparte de Espana^ Peter having left the French ser-
vice, enlisted himself in the Spanish service; and
when it signifies to come near to a place, as, acostajf*
se aquij to come near to this place, then it is reci-
procal; as, si te acuesias aqui, te mat are, if you come
near to this place, I will kill you.
Some of the Verbs are regular (so called for their
being/ confined to rules), and others irregular (so
called because they have no rule) ; but as their jrre-
gul^rity is various,sometimes in the Present Tense of
the Indicative; in the Preterperfect, Future, in the
Imperative ; Preterimperfects, and Future of the
s \ .
iW The ELEMENTS of
Optative, and otherwise in their Participlts; I mall
take care to mention it in the Conjugations,
Of Conjugations.
There are three Conjugations in the Spankk
tongue, viz.
1. in &r^'\ ram&ry to love.
2. in er, \^%\ rtspwder^ to answer.
3. in ir, J Ksubiry to go up.
. So that the Spanish Verbs are to be looked for ftl
the Dictionaries by their Infinitives.
Of Moods.
The ]\loods are six, as in Latitij viz^ the InScdtvdtj
or that which shows or declares ; the Imptratvoe, or
that which commands ; Optative^ or that Whiclii
wishes, or desires; Subjunctive^ which supposes
something ; Potential, or that by which somethitig
is expected; and. the Infinitive^ which leaves all un-
determined.
Of Tenses.
The Tenses, which are the Times of action or pas-
sion, are three properly, viz. the Present, the Past,
and the Time to come ; and with those made by
circumlocution, are ten in the Indicative Mood, viz.
the Present, Preterimperfect, three Preterperfects, ;'
the Pluperfect^ and four Futures ; and in t tie Opta-
tive Mood there are nine, viz. the Present, three
Preterim perfects, a Preterperfect, two Preterpla-
perfects, and two Futures.
Of the Indicative Mood.
The Present Tense of all Conjugations of Regu-
lar Verbs is formed by changing 4r, /r, or ir, of the
Infinitive into o ; as from amar^ say &mo; from fe/r,
Uoi from cumplir^ cimph. This Tense extends it-
self to a future tiine ; as, maiiana es dia defiesta^^ to-
morrow is a holiday.
The Preterimperfect of the first Conjugation is
Armed by chansmgar into dba; as fromamir. amiba.
the Spanish G^avmar. g\
\ difd love^ w I wa$, loving ; and in. the second a^d
third Conjugation it is formed by changing /r and ir
in^ta Uf; as Scorn, perd^r^pcrdia ; ^mpedirj ptdUf.
The first Fr^terperfiect of the first Conju8;ation is*
Hiad^ by changing ir into / ; aS| amir, ame ; but of
the second and th^rd Conjugations by changing ir
aihd ir into i^ as perder^ pcrdij pedir^ pedi. This l^ense
is called Dejinite^ because it is. a time perfectly past
tejid^ expressed as $uch ; as, el mh pasado hable can el,
t spQ^e with him last inpnth.
Thie second Perfect of all the Conjugations, is
formed of the Auxiliary Verb Aat?/r, and the Parti-
ciple Passive of thp Verb treated of; as, hi habUdo,
I h^ye spoken ; hi perdido, I have lost ; hipedido, I
have asked.
The third Perfect is formed in the same manner, .
as, huve habWdOy &c. but not so frequently used in
Spanish as the other two.
Note^ That these two latter are called Preter:per-
iccts Indefinite, for their time is not determined ; as,
h hi habl&dOy I have spoken to him ; but we do not
say when. Sp that the difference between the first
Preterperfect and the others is, that the former should
express time, and the latter not ; besides that the
first eictends itself farther than the others (which are
referredkto time hut lately past.) You may say, k
habU dps mhsi hOj I apoke to him two years ago ; but
you^ cannot say, k hi habUdp dos anos /ei, I have
^kea to htm two years ago ; because hi habldjdp^
does, only extend to a time so lately past, that it sip-
pears to nave something of the presient. These are
f^alerds observations, which I advise the reader to
attend to, in onder to avoid the frequent equivoca-
tion& that happen in speaking and writing.
The Preterpluperfect thus : havia hablado, havia.
perdidoy havia pedido^ I had spoken, lost, Sgc.
The firfiit Future is formed of the Infipitive, adding
i after the r of the prsseiiit Infinitive ; as of hablar,
adding «, say hablari ; from pcrdir^ perderi ; from.
C3 |«ciiT>
•22 The ELEMENTS of •
pedir^ pedire ; putting always the accent on the last
letter. ' • •
The second Future with the Auxiliary A<?, tengo,
or deboy and the Innnitive Mood 'with fife before it ;
as, he, or tengo de cf^r, I am to give; debo de dar, or
debo dar, I am obliged, I mtjst give;
The third thus : ha%^re de habtar^ I shall be obliged
to speak, &^c^
The fourth (wnich properly is the second Pre ter--
pluperfect) thus : havia de hablar^ 1 had, or 1 was to
speak ; kavias de hablar^ &c.
Of the Lnperative.
The Imperative is made of the third person of the
present Indicative Mood, and of the present Opta-
tive; as, aina tu, love thou: ame el, let him lovej
pierde tu, lose thou ; pier da el, let him lose, &;c.
So that the third person^of the Indicative is the se-
cond of the Imperative, and the third of the Impera-
tive is the first of the, Optative, the second Plural
is formed from the Infinitive, by changing r into d;
as of qmar^ say amad^ love ye ; perdevy perded ; pedir^
pedid, ^ i
Of the Optative^ Potential, and Subjunctive Moods.
The Optative, or that which wishes or desires, has
always an Adverb annexed to it; as, oj^ala, o si ple-^
guiesse a Dies, would to God, I pray God, or God
grant ; aunque, no obstnnte que, sin embargo que, al-
- though, notwithstanding.
The Po/ew^m/ properly has no signs in Spanish,
but in English it has these, can, may, might, could,
should, ot ought, which arc equal to Xht^t Spanish
expressions, puede ser que, es menester que, as some
' authors will have it. ^
The Subjunctive has always some Conjunction
annexed to ii; as^ si, como^que, quando, if, as, that,
when; as como yo arfle^ as I may love; but the
Tenser are all afike in these three Moods.
the Spakish Gbammaiu ^ 23
a
The Present of the Optative is 'formed from the
Present of the Indicative, by changing o into e in
the first Conjugation, and into a in the second and
third Conjugations; as from amp^ say a7ne^ from^
pierdoj* pierda^ pido, pida. .
• The first and second Preterimperfectsare formed
from the first person of the Preterpeifect of the In-
dicative: as, from ame in the first Conjugation,
changing ^ into ara or ase^ is made amara^ am&st.
In the second and third Conjugation^ add to the
Preterperfect ha or ise ; as from perdi^ perdiera^ per-
diese, from subi^ say subiera^ subiese.
' The third Preterimperfect is formed from the
Infinitive, adding ia; as from amaj\ say amaria ;
fro\n fc/r, keria ; from subiry subiria.
Observe here, that these Tenses havfe two ways to **
explain the second person plural ; as, amariadeis^ or
amaraisj amassedeis^ or amasseis, amariadeisy oTama-
rials ; and so in the other two Conjugations.
' Observe likewise, that these three Tenses difi^er
from one another, rightly speaking; though there
is such a confusion in explaining them, that there
is hardly any difference made by the Spaniards.
Some authors adapt them to the three Moods, viz.
aniara to the Optative, amasc to the Subjunctive,
and amaria to the Potential ; as oxalayo amara la
virtUd, God grant that I might love virtue ; comoyo
amase a DioSy el vie amaria, should I love God, be
wbuld love me.
Other authors, as Tominque^ Cesser in Gram. Rud.
and Villalba, ai;e of opinion, tliat amara denotes the
disposition of a thing, or the readiness for an action;
amase, the beginning of it ; and amaria the possibi-
lity To obtain it; or, as Terebio says, the first Imper-
fect is a Tense of motion ex quo, from whence, and
jelates to the medium ; as de los veintepessos lediera
diez para comprarse un vestido„ of the twenty pieces of
eight, I would give him ten, that he might buy him- .
self a suit of cloaths : the second a Tense Medium,
or in quo ; as como le hallase hacienda lo que dhe^ as I
BbouJd 6nd him in tloing what lloVdVivm^ ^.w^^^^^
$4^ Thif ELEMENTS oj
hffmPi I wpuld do, it, if ^q \ytii4^ ^f g99d.
: Qn? tbitig is c^r t^in amidst ^]\ tjh«i§^ tb^t wif^H^f . ,
eww, aroZet ^c. follow t^e IWQ fia-jt ?it?teafi«>p9i1w!^«^
and the third Imperfect Teos^ i^ ui^e^. hy w^ pf
interrogatioiii pr suspension, s^yW& ^i^ ?• f/i. e|/o,
"^011111 yovi do thi^ ? Oqufi Urn b%^i(n j^o ! O ^j^
I cpuid da it well \ or with d,
Th^ Pre^perfect is forpi^ fro^i t\i& Au:iFil^^fy
Ye^fb Aa-j^^r, wd the Participle Pj^siycj thus : ^PJ/^l
qniido^ haya perdido, hojfopedido^ Y^hen, 1 I^ive lo,V9fi^
7be fir^t Pluperfect thus( : hfit^q V^^A^^ y(\^tL
The second, hwQk^ avi^dg, >)^bf a I b^4 l^^v^d.
T^ firs^ pMtt^e is ^ad^of tb^ first JEVe^ri^mpfsr-
fect by pliauging a i^^^p cj si^%^an^q^ m^^i per-
di4my p^rdi^vci pidi^ra^pidi^ve ; w^U the s^^^ie ^pi^ent;
on all tl^e syllabi^,
The secoud !^utu]f& of tl^^ &VS(% l^m^if^t, by
changing ra intp re, a^4 \h^ Pfifti^e ^as^jyei ^
frpoi k^xfi4m amifdji^^ i^ ift tl^efutur^^joi^'fc <iffli4^(;!^
1^ "^bf^t tb^re are nin/^T^ses. i^ the Qptati yf^^ Mop4
z% well ^s in tbe Subjuipictiis? ai^4 ?Qtig^ntj4-
Of the Infinitive Mood.
Tbp Infinitive signifies to ^^ ti? si^ff(?r>. or to l^e,
%pd liii^ Mood has nei^b^ Ni^iiiiiber, ^erspn^ ;ior
Nominative Case before it ; as, am&ny \q, Ipye ; p^i;^
dfi^x to los^e ; p^dir, to asl^.
Wb^n two Verbs coiji^e tipge;\b#r wi*tw^ any
Npuiina,^ivp Case betweei^ ^Qf^ tbe^ th|e lattep
if^ill bi^ in the In^itiye A^ood ;. ^4e^ cprtndir^ X
desirf to le^rn { and pf^p^ti^ies; ^1^ Infinit^iy^ sup*
plies tbp Nominajtive Cas^-; ^ ^m^i^ ^.jPiio^Jlhqqhf
bien ql pr^o^fnp, son. lo^^ ios q^t/^ipmfk^ ^^' ^
Chmti4ripA9 lo^vp Cpd^^^^ci W dp gO€>4. toour n^iglsr
hour, ^re Ujie twp prinpip^li 9fi^yD^ of ^ Ch^istiajft-
Aftci^ntly, vhen &, ^ fc% ^s^ /fl,% w«r§ add.«d %q
the I^finitiye, tt(eu r wa& pft?« cbi»ge4 iBrtP ><? ^9
amfiUeiov amSrle, p^^lle^ for perderle, decille fpr de-
cirk^ to love hini; to lose him^ to tell him ; bu^ it ^
now out of use. fi^t wl^en me, te, se, noSy &a fok
low th^ Infinitive iaxmediately^ then they arei pro-
nounced as, mono&yHaJblesi; as, decirle^ dpciraelo^Sic,
Of the Auxn^iARY Verbs.
Auxiliary Verba take tj^eir etymology of the Jjatim^
awsiliumy UHxifio, help ; so called because they are
wsmted for^ aipd help to, the Conjugation o| pthqe
Verbs. There are wxiliary or helping Verbs \n a^
the living languages^and ii^ the Spanish tber&are mor€|
thjMi in any other ; 9&,poder^ tenSr, solevy ir, ^c. withb
out which ur-e cannot rightly explain the meaning o$
some seoteaces; bjut theref are three principal, vi2^,
Ji^r (instead oif, which we use likewise the Y^r^
terUv) to hj^vei; est&r and ^r, to be, The two^-st
serv^ foiT the Active, Neuiter, and Reciprocal Verbs $
havir serves ^Iso foi[ thp Passive Yeris in thei?^
coxQpound Tenses, aa in the Freterimperfect, Pliv.
perfect, <^c.^aud the VerU j^> *serves for Paissiye^
V^hs ; w^^ as the other Verbs cannot be coxi^ugate^
without tbese^ we tbi&k it proper to begin M^itb
A G?irieTrdl
26
The ELEMENTS of
t-
«0
iJC3
'2
in
O
IS
>
e a
CB C C
his -J .2
8 1???
v s s a
h. ^ «V MS '
5 « fc.fe
'^ - -
*g "fl *fi
S «•='
• tf) Ob on
•j5 flo a> ••3
«
• « •
^ 0» «
e
2
Si
S
s
CQH> —
an
^ 0» C3
V
Si
w
1
a
JL.
s
d
.S3
•a
8
.§
I 4
e a a
(8 V «
• "3 .;? J? •»
$A. S 8 8
sag
O
o
= s
a o ^
v « g
* " •
M
H
09
£§ B
.0) CB <^
V
0)
• in4 W CO
eg
/^
P
o
o
>
M
<
p.
G o a
a ^ tt
»- k b
• ••• ••• OB
w « ce 'S
B A^ CO V .b
Qj 0^ 9k ^
*S S S 5
& sag
« *j- »c »S
^ W la 1^
i« -
Oh c« ce C«
«W %M ««■
S (0 0) '^
£ IS (" S
5 ^ ^ •*
CO .2 .2 S
^m im l^
• • •
IFH d «
ii t 2 8
^si i- S
s
5 *«*
I ^ BO v«>
•u • •• •
^ CJ5 • 4)
'-« 8 45
. a 0)
"t: « ^
J3 '•WA.^
, Qi • • •
^ r- 0» CO
•
3
J8
ft.
t!-^ J
_« xtf *"*
t
^ rf^
•
^ C» CO
C
o
IS
hi o
n
• • •
^ 0» CO
•
tl
•
1. .
>
■ M
O
•>«
s a"
t
•^•tct
B
P
s
s
ctt
.a
»^*5
(8
j^ 2
•*m »
u m
e
1 i
a
2
^ .rt
• ••
*^" -
4) es
et
U W
1.
Oi <«
^
44 - ■«
M
s2 a
ctt
i? sis
la
M
2
««>
cc^
• v«
'VA^^
•
:^o
C
s
«k
^
w>
«A
K^
»«
.^ -T
•k
^%§
8
? 5
a
> M>
^
4^ ' V
«
«= -?
•t
4) S
•»
« • a>
10
V %o •
C9
•
• •
0» CO
c
9>
• ^2
o
a
;3
S,
8
a
£
8
a
V
I.
2
2
«
2
M>
2
a
3
a
•I
4>
5
vU
t
C O
*« sS
bo **
— •"*
c'Sb
Is
IT'S
I- CB
*s ^
CO •'a
-r2
•« 2
2 8
9 O
bO'iS
(S «
^ s*
^^
<§•
4>
"^
« CO
&
the Spanish Grammak. * 27
Of the AxjxiLiARY 'Verbs.
The Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb hav^r> To hate^
Indicative Mood.
Present :
Sing. Plur.
yo he / have |nosotro8<7rnoBh6mos, or havemos Wehave
tuHas TA^tt ^aj/lvosotros^rvoshavcis Ye have
cihkHe has jellos ban They have
Prcterimperfect :
{havia I had
havias Thou hadst
havia He had
{haviamos We had
haviais Ye had
havian They had
First Preterperfect :
fhuvc I had
Sing. < huvistc Thou hadst
l^huvo He had
* rhuvimos We had
Plur. < huvisteis Ye had *
^huyieron They had
Second Preterperfect :
fyphe ^ r I have had
Sing. •{ lu has / i Thou hast had
r \, r havido S^'l'^^Vv
fnos nemos i \ We have had
Plur. < vos haveis \ f -^^ ^^^^ ^^^
t,cllos han ^ They have had
The third Preterperfect, 3foAwt?//?flfi7iVfo, is not usdd
in Spanish.
Prcterpluperfect :
f havia ^ / have had
Sing.-lhdiVizs J i Thou hadst had'
(^havia f , ^ 1 J He had had
. r havfaios > *^*V^^^ ^ We had had
Plur. i haviais \ I Ye had had ^
\ havian y v- Tkty hai had
^
First Future : .
Cr'bavr6 i jifca// or wili hqiye
Sing.. < havras Tkcu shah or zz/t// have
r havr^mos Jri; jAa// or 2z;t7/ A ji;^
Plur. < havreis lf< xAo// or will have
(jihavdin TAe*^ shall or zr;27/ Aattf
The otbei; Futures are, ^ ^
Second F. yo he de havec / must have
Third hs^vrc 'de haver / shall be obliged to, have
Fourth havia de haver / was to have.
f The Imperative Mood.
«. ^ fhayastu Have thou
{hayd^ps no& Let us h^ye
havedvos Have ye
hiyzn ellos . Let them have.
<
Optative and Subjunctive Mood.
Present :
Oxala, plega a Dios, Gomo;
; f h4ya ^
Sing. < hiy^« V That / may Aavtf
Ihiiya J
fhay&mos ^
P/iir. < hay aia > That we may have.
Three Preteriinpe]:{€€ts :
riMi^viera huvi^se h^vrfa \ThfUs Imght^
Sing.< hu,viei»ifr huvieses h^rrjas \tifuld, or
^buyicra huviese h^vm j shquld have.
rhubidFamos hubiesemos h0briamos^ Thfilwe
jP/iir.4 hubierais hubi6seis 'havriais ym^A/» could^
^hubi&raw hubiisen havjfao j ot:s,hfifiJjiififi%^
Preterperfect :
hiya
hiyas
hayiisk
hayao,
* This ImpecotWe if not DOi%m use ; and that of the V^rl^ iMtr i» iii6d
TNfO
rrcicrperiect :
ik That I'hadf ^t have had.
r^d9 <
/ / Tha^ we haVe had'^kc
fht Spanish GrAkmar. 89
Two Freterpltlperfects :
fhnviera, or huvi^ae. • . . havido • . Ifor'ihat I
Singi. havi^ras, or huvi^ses . ' mL had^ &c»
jt,4iavi^ra9 or havitse
tThuvfiraiiios, ^rhuviesemos
Flur. < hflvidrais, or huvieseis
t-hv^^ran, or buviesen
• • • . First Future :
.fhuviere • • • If ot whtn I shall kave^ ino^
' Sing*< hnvi^rea,
i.liuvicre
f huvi£renios
Plur.< huviereis
V^huvieren
Second Future :
{huviere harido •• ^or when I shall have
huvi^res had,8cc. '
huviere
{huvi^reoios
liuvierelf
liuvicren,
Infinitive Mood.
Pres. haver To have
Ptff* haver havido To have had
Fut. ' hay6t de haver To have hereafter
Gerund^, havi^ndo Having
Partic. havido Had
NotCy That the Spanish Academy has changed
haver into haber ; but as this is again'^t the practice
b9th of iittcieiit and modem authors, I thought
proper to conjugate and retain haver.
The other AtLriliary Verbs ^ estar and s6r. To fe
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
Sing. J*yo est6y yo s6i / nm,
tu eft(&s lu ires Thou art
esti el ^s . He is \
fnosest^mos nos i6mo% We are
Plur.< vos cstiis vos s6is Ye are
lellos cstin ellos son ' They art
• lei
tt«!u«-
^vj. s_.
30 The ELEMENTS of
Prcterimperfect : \
' }:'■■■
^yo estaba • yo 6ra I was
Sing, <iu csi^bas tu eras * Thou vmst '.. .'
C el estaba el era He was- ' '•;..:.
C nos est^bamos nos frames fVe wer€ '.':'; ,<
Plur, < vos estabais vos e r^is Ye were- '••/*'■ i • •.
f ellos estaban ellos dran They iuit &/,/',''.
lirst Preterperfect :
r cstiiv^ fui
Sing, < estuviste fuiste
C estuvo fue
/ have been- ; .. "• "V
Thou hast keen' \.:
He hath been . • :
C estuvimos fuimos
P/ttr. J estuvisteis fuisteis
^estuvieron fuiron
We have beeth • • ''
Ye have been '- . '•*
They have been:, .-' ..
Second and Third Prdterperfect :
r h6 or hiive estado he or huve sido ^ r >, * .
Sing, < hfe ^r huviste estddo has or huviste sido > r g-
( hi. or huvo estado hd or huvo sfdo , > ' *:
-hemos or huvimos estado hcmos or ^
[huvimos sido I
,p, i haveis ^r huvisteis estado haveis i7r \we have
** [huvisteis sido I ^^^w, &C«
-\
h&n or huvi^ron estado h^n or \
[huvieron sido
Preterpluperfect :
^havia estido havJa sido I had been^ &c<
•Szw^. < ha vias estado haviassido
( havia estado havia sido
'{ haviamos estido haviamos sido
P/ur. < haviais estado haviaissido ^ ^
( havian estido havian sido ^
First Future :
^cstare sere I shql/ or wili be, 8cc*
S^ng,<e&t^Ti$ seres
C estara ser£
, i estaremos sercmos
P/ar.< estar^is serais
festardn seran
« Second Future :
he or tengo de estir he de ser / must be, &c.
hasdeestar has de ser *
ha de cstir ha de ser, 0c,
, X • Third
' the Spanish Grammar. 31
Third Future :
hzvTi de cstar, oY sir I shall ie obliged to ie, &c.
' • : Fourth Future :
havia de estir, or sex 1 had to be^ or I was to be. &c«
Imperative Mood.
^- festdtu se tu Be thou
^^^^' \ estc el sea el Let him be
. i estemos nos seamos nos Let us be •
P/ttr.Jestdd vos sed vo« Be ye
( esten ellos seati eJIos Let them be.
Subjunctive Mood.
^i, or comOy or oxala^
Ct^xi sea If^ or when I am^ 8cc»
Stng. < est^s seas
( este «6a
rest^mos sedmos • ^ i
P/2<r.< este is seais
( esten isean
Three Preterperfects :
/-estu^i6ra, cstuviese
r ^^r estaria
Sin^^K ^^"vi^^^^is, estuvi^ses,
-. \ ^ esturias
1 e^tuviera, estuvicse,
^r estaria
fuera, fuese, -^
seria I If I was ^
^fueras, fucses, \A should^
serjas i would be^
fuera, fuese, j &c,
seria
/-esta<«pgramos,estuviesetnos, | fueramos,
estariamos [fu^semos, seriamos / If we were.
I cscariamos |^iues(
J estuvi6rais,^stuvieseis,
Plurr\ ^estariais
I estuvieran, estuvi^sen,
est^rian
, seriamos / Ifwewi
fuerais fu&eis, \ should^
seriais i would, or
fu6ran,fucsen, J could be.
, serian
Preterperfcct :
5hayaestado faaya sido If or when I have
—£,' vhayasest&do hayas sfdo been, 8cc.
(h^yaestddo haya sido
_ r hayamos estida hayimos.sido
Plur, < hayiis estddo faayais sido
(^hiyanestado h^yan sido
Tvc"sX
\
\
54 The ELEMENTS df
First and second Ptetciipluperfect :
t hubi^ra or Imbi6se estido or sido If or i^en t
^ing, ^ hubiek^s i>r nubieses nai been, &c«
(, hubi6ra ^r hubi6»e
r Imbiera*mos or hubieistemos
]Piur. } hubi6rais cr bubi^seis
( hubieran or hubieseh
First Put«^ : *
r-csturierc fu^re If I shdll or should be ^ or
Sing. <esi}x\\€Te% fuercs when I hadlnten.
restu^ere. fuere
i estuvi6remo8 fu6reinos
P/^r. < estuvi^reis fuereis
(estuvi^i^en fu6ren
Second ]^uture:
5hubie re estido 4yr lido WktH I ^kall or should have
— .^- .hubieres been.
^liubiere
^hubieremos *
Plur, < hubiereis ' . ' >.
^hubieren
or quando havre, estido ^r ^do
Infiiiitive Mood.
Ptes. esJtar ser To be
• , Perf. Iiav6r csi4d6 haver sido To have been
Fid. . liAv^r dfe estdr h^,x^ A^ sit To be hereafter
Gerunds estando si6ndo Beifig
Part. estado sido Been
Observations upon the Verbs ser and esctar.
There is a considerable difference between these
Verbs estir and ser^ both signifying to be. In English
there is no word to distinguish them. Ser signifies
the proper and inseparable essence of athing, its qua-
lity or quantity ; as, sir kombre, sir valitntey sir alto^
sir ckico; but estdr denotes a place, or any adjunct
' quality, as, estdr en LondriSj to be in London ; est&r
con sal^dy to be in health ; est&r enfermo^ to be sick*
So est&r is used to express and denote any aflPection or
the Spanish Ghammae. 33
passion of. the soul, or any accidental quality of a
thing; as est&r emj&do^Xjo be angry ; est a mesa es buena,
pero est&mal hecha, this table is good, but it is badly
made; where you may see the essential being of the
table expressed by the Verb s^r, and the accidental
one by the Verb estdr.
Of VERBS.
Verbs are divided into Personals and Impersonals.
The Personals are subdivided into Active and Pas-
sive, Neuter and Reciprocal.
A Verb Active expresses the action of doing or
transacting any thing, or else it expresses a passion ;
as, ensenar, to teach ; amary to love ; and is- made
Passive by the addition, of the Auxiliary Verb sh';
as, sot esehado^ &c.
ANeuterVerb is that which signi6es neither action
Bor passion : as, asseritir, to assent ; carrery to run.
The Verb Reciprocal is that which returns its own
action upon its agent or Nominative ; as acost arse, Sec.
Tht Spanish tongue hath three Conjugations, viz.
1. in ar;\ icant&r, to sing,
2. in er ;\ as, <respondi?\ to answer,
3. in ir ;) (recibir, to receive.
Example of the Jirst Conjugation of Regular Verbs in ar.
Indicative Mood. ,
Present :
, fyo canto I sing
Sing. '< tu cdhtas 'Thou singest
^.cl cinta He sings .
' " Tnos cantanpos We sing
Plur. < vos cantais ^ Te sing
|.ellos cantan They sing
Imperfect:
Cyo cantaba
Sing. < tu cantabas
lei cantaba i w »• t .^^ « ^
Plur, -^ V08 camabais
ello5 canraban
1. 1
94
J
7 have sungt &c.
The ELEMENTS of
First Preterimperfec^ :
{yo cant£
tu cahtaste
el cam6 \ r ^ o
f no. cantimos W'^H'^-
Plur. < vof eantastels
^ellos cant£roQ
Second Perfect :
«
{yo he cantido "^
tu has cantido
el ha cant&dp
rnos.hembs cantido
Plur. < vos haveiB cantido
^.ellos dian cant&do
Pluperfect:
{yo havia
tii havias
rnoJhav&mos ^c«i,ii^o, I had sung, &.z,
Plur. < vos haviius •
I ellos havian
First Future
'yo cantare ,
tH cantaras
>t?T^^€mo. )I shall or mttnng^&c,
Plur. < vos cantariis |
\jA\o% cantarin J
Second Future :
yohe or iingo de cantdr
... 1 '.£ J- cantar
{yo he or tengo de canti
tu has or ti^nes de cant
el ha i>T tiene de cantar
Tnos h^mos or tenemos de cantar
plur. < vos hav^ig or teneis de ^nt4r
tellos han or ii6nen de cantSr
/ viill sing^ or
> I must sing^ov
I am to sing ^
1
Third Future :
'yo havre
tu havras
:1 havra
fnos havr£mos
Plur. < vos bavr^is
^teiJos havr4h . ^
^de cantafi / shall U obliged to
singi &c.
lEc^xn^Sck
S5
Hie Spanish GainHAii.
Fouith Future :
Cyo havia
Sing. < tu haviM
Plut. < V08 baviais*^
X^Ilos havfau
Imperative Mood.
0- fcinta tu Sing thou
^"^* 1 c^nte cl Let him sing
r cant6mo8 nos Ltt us sing
P/«r. < earned vos Sing ye
V^cintenellos^ Let them sing*
Optative and Subjunctive Moods; with their signsi
oxaia, aunquiy would God, although.
Present Tense:
^0 came \
u c&ntes I
Although I
did singt or /
Plur.
Plur. < vos canteis |
(^ellos canten J
Three Preterimperfecti.
> cantara, cantase, cantaria
canfiras, cantdses, cantarias
cantdra, cantase* cantaria
nos cantdramosy cantii emos, caiita-\ could^ 1 should
[riamofl or / toould
vos cantdrais, cantdseis, cantariais sing^ Sec*
ellos cant&ran, cantasen, cantarian j
Perfect:
} haya
bayas
biya
Tnos faayamos
P/ur. < vos hayiis .
(.ellos hayan
. First and Second Pluperfect :
jo hubi«ra pr hubiese \
Sing. ^ tu hubicras ^r hubiescs f Although /
hubiera or hubiese . K^^^^j^A ,^^j ,^„g
rnoshubieramos(irhubiesemo& I &c
,Plur» < vos hulnerais or bubi^seis I ^ *
1 ellos bubieran or bubiesea J
cantMo, Although I have sung^ Sec.
• ■ V
36 27<e ELEMENTS «f
Titit Future :
rcant£re 1 '
Sing. < cantares >Mhoug& I shall sing, 8cc.
{nos cantaremos^
vos cantireis % Although we shall sing, &c.
clips camaren . 3 ■ -
Second Future :
C hubiere \
Sing. < hubi6re8 ff
i hubierenuM / ^*"^^^^* Although I shall have sung.
Plur* < hubi^reii I
Chubieren )
Indicative Mood.
Pres. cantor To sing
Perf. hav6r cantado To have sung
Fut. haver dc cantar To be obligea to sing
Gerund, cantindo Singing
Part. cantado Sung.
jar All Regular Verbs, whose Infinitive is termi-
nated in ar^ are conjugated in the same manner as
cant&r.
Regular Verbs in ^r.
Apartir/ to Sit aside
alfanar, to smooth
ayun^Fy to fast
apeldr, to call
aceommodar, to adjust
aprovechir, to profit
arrastr^r, to drag
araenazar, to threaten
afrentir, to affront
aventurar, to venture
amedrantSr, to put in fear
alzdr, to take up , '
at^r, to tie
azotar, to whip
alumbr^r, to light
alabir, to praise
alquiiar, to let
adelantir, to forward
smmitf to encourage
alejir, to set at a distance
accuser, to accuse
aparejdr, to make ready
acabir, to finish
araparar, to protect
apeir, to alight
abordir, to board
arrebatdr, to snatch
arrancdr, to tear up
aroansar, to tame
ayudar, to help
amar, to love
adorar, to adore
Besar, to kiss
borrir, to blot out
baildr, to dance
bambale^r^ to totter
barajar, to shuffle at. cards, tti
quarrel or embroil.
tke Spanish Gbahhah.
57
Comprar, fo buy
cantdr, to sing
cenar, io sup
contestar, to contest
curdr, to cure
cortdr, to cut
cab£r, to dig
cazir, to hunt
caminar, to travel^ to walk
cansar, to tire
callar, t9 be silent
condenar, to condemn
criar, to breed
casar, to marry '
conform^r, to conform
Dispar^r, to discharge
disfamar, to defame
desafi^r, to challenge
desarraigar, to root up
desamparar, to forsake
despreciar, to despise,
dexar, to leave
desnuddr, to strip
domar, to tame
danzar, io dance
desenganar, fo undeceive
despaVilar Ja vda, to snuff' the
candle
despaviUr los ojos, to awake
despojar, to strip
Echar, to put out
cspantdr, to frighten
estimar, to esteem
enchanter, to enchant
* esternudir, to sneeze *
empenar, to engage
entrir, to come in
embi&r, to send
€;{iojir, to anger
escaramti^ak', to skirmish
)ensanch£r, ta widen .
Fiir, to trust
fabricir, to manufacture
facilitar, to facilitate
falsificar, to falsify
fatig^r, to tire
iomentkr, ioyoment
^nar» to gain
gast^r, to spend
galant^r, td- court
goberniir, to govern
guardir* to keep
gloriir, to glory
Hallir, tojind
hun&r, to steal
honrar, to honour
habldr, to speak
Injuriir, to revile
iffnorir, to be ignorant
Jurar, to swear
Llamar, to call
llor^r, to weep
levantir, to raise
Iav4r» to wash
lisonge£r, to fatter,
Matir, to kill
mancbar, to stain
mandar, to command
menospreciar, to undervalue
maltrat^r, to misuse
mirir, to look
Nadar, to swim
narr^r, to relate
naturalizar, to natiiralize
navegar, to sail
Olviddr, to forget
oje^r, to ogle, to look over
observar, to observe
ocultar, to conceal
Pelear, tofght
pag^r, to pay
passe^r, to walk
procur&r, to procure
porfidr, to contend
Rehusar, to refuse
reculir, to draw back
rezar, to pray
rctirdr, to retire
Separar, to separate
saquear, to plunder
sud^r, to. sweat
sitiar, to besiege
Tartamude^r^ to iiaiMMX
I tapir, to covtT
S» ani^ ELEMENTS ?f
Irregular Verbs in &r. .
Ddr, from dire, Latin, To groe.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
yo doy -jjf '^^
7X<?tt givest
He gives .
!nos ddmos ?F(? ^z w
vos diis Ye, give
elloi ddn 7Xir)f ^2 w
Preterimperfect :
yo ddba, &r« / did give (as in Regular Verbs»^
First Preterperfect :
yo di -• I gave
Tho
dfste Thou gavest
di6 -Hi? ^flt^iff
fnos dimes We gave
Plur, ^ vos disceis Ye gave
(,ello» di^ron TA^^. ^avtf
Second and Third Perfect :
yoAk or hnvi dMo, ^c. I have given^ 8cf^
. Pretcrpluperfect :
yo havia d4do, &c. I had given^ &c.
• First Future :
;yo dar£
tu dar^
r nos^^remos f ^ 'halt give, ot I tailigivt, &c.
Plur. < voftdateis
( ellos dar^n
Second Future :
yo he de d^r or tengo de d^r, / will give^ or must give.
Third Future :
yo havr£ de dir, / shaH be obliged to give.
Fourth Future :
yo havia de d^r, / was to give.
Imperative Mood.
^. fdfi tu Give thou
' *^"^^'\d6el . Lethimpve
i^emos nos Let us give
ddd vos Give ye
ddn ellos Let them give
ITiin I mghi.
.could^ should^
or would give.
ik$ Spanish Grammar. 39
Subjunctive Mood^.with the signs, camo, oxali, 8cc.
Present Tense: *
70 de (as in Regulars) ff^en I do give, 8cc.
, Three Imperfects :
Tyo cli6fa, diese, darfa
-•^V^^* \ dieraSy dieses, darias
f^ diera, diese, daria
C dieramosrdiesemos, dariamos
flur^ < dieiais, dieseis* darfais
l^ dieran, diesen, darian
Pretcrperfect :
yo hiya dido, 0r, Qc. When I hadgiven^ &c.
First and Second Preterpluperfect :
yo hubiera or hubiese dido, Irhen J had given.
First Future:
/ Cyo dicre
Sing. < tu di6res
(I'd?-- ('^*«^^*-''*'«'^^'
Plur. < vos diereis
^eilordieren
Seeond feature :
yo httbi£re dido^ tSc. When I shall or will have given.
Infinitive Mood
. Present, d&t To give
Perfect, hav^r dido To have given
Future, haver de dir To give hereafter
Gerund, AknAo Giving
Part. Passive, dddo Given
The Irregular Verb contar, To count.
Indicative Mood.
Present:
Ycucnto I count
Sing. < cuentas Thou countest
( cuehta He counts
C contSmos We count
Plur. < comiis Te count
(^cuentan They count
Imperfect (as in Regulars*}
contiba, &c. I did count.* .
contib9$
40 The ELEMENTS of
Ffrst Perfect :
Ccomi I counted
Sing. < com^ste Thou^ &C4
t bont6*
rcont^mos .
P/iir. < cont^steis*
(contdron
Second Perfect :
h^ cont&do 1 have counted^ &c.
has contddo, Sc.
Preterpluperfect :
havia cont^do / had counted^ &c,
havias cont^do» &c.
First Future :
contare "^
contar^s
contar^ ^ . j ^^ ^^ ^ .^^ g^
i DOS contaremos ' *
Plur. < vos contar^is
(ellos cbntdran
Second Future :
he de contdr / must county &c.
Third Future :
havr£ decont&r / shali be obliged to county &c* .
Fourth Future :
havia de contdr . / was to county &c.
Imperative Mood.
«• fcu^ntatu Count thou
o* ^^cu6nte el Let him count
L comemos nos: Let us count
P/ttr. < cont^d vos Count ye
^ cuenten ellos Let them count.
Optative and Subjunctive Moods.
Present :
Tcu^nte. "1
Sing. <cu^ntcs >/c^a«/, &c.
t cuente, £s?^. J
The Three Imperfects :
^ont&ra, contuse, contaria, / did county &c. (as in Regulars.)
Preterperfect :
haya comedo, ^c. I have counted.
Two Pluperfects :
hubi^ra (ir hubi^se cont^do, / had counted*
hubieras or hubieses cont^do, t^c. (as Regulars.)
tht Spanish Grahhar.
41
First Future :
yo contsure / shall count
yo hublere contado
tu hubi^rcs, fi?c.
{
cont^res
contdre, ^c, (as in Regulan.)
Second Future:
/ will have counted, &c. (as in Regu*
lars.)
Infinitive Mood.
cont&r To count
hav6r contddo To hqve counted
haver dc contar To count hereafter
contando Counting
comido Counted
The irregularity of the following Verbs, conju-
gated as the Verb contiVj consists only in changing
the of the penultima into we in the three Persons
Singular, and third Plural of the Present of the In-
dicative, Imperative, and Subjunctive Moods.
Present^
Perfect,
Future,
Gerund,
Part. Pass.
Injinitive.
^ acostdrsei
apostdr,
acord^f,
consoldr,
desoIUir,
degoIl£f,
encontrar,
esforzir,
forzar,
. hollar,
mostr^r,
provir,
resoilir,
soltar,
sonar,
tostar,
volir.
to go to bed
to wager
to remember
to comfort
tojlay
to behead
to meet
to strengthen
to force
to trample on
to shew
to try
to breathe
to let loose
to sound
to toast
Pres. Ind.' Preterperfect^
acu6sto acoste
apuesto
acuerdo
consuelo
desuello
degnello
encueritro
esfuerzo
fuerzo
hu611o
muestro
prudvo
resudio
su61to
sueno
tu4sto
vutio
apost^
acprd6
(Console
desolle
degolle
encontre
esforze
forze
holle ^
mostre
prove
resolle
soke
sone
tostc
vole
tofy
(t^ Observe, that the greater part of the Verbs
having the Vowel o in the peuultima, and ending
in ir, are Irregulars.
The Verbs whose Infinitives end in cAr^ terminate
the first person of their first Preter^^erfeclVxv q\ie,^\v^
IJL.
4S The ELEMBInTS of
the third Person Singular and Plural of the Impera-
tive in que and quen^ as also the persons.of the pre-
sent of the Subjunctive ; as, ^
arranedr, to pluck out embarcSr, to embark
bolcar, ,. to overturn secir, tv dry
tocdr, to touch abarc&r, to undertake
atacar, to attack ahorc&r^ to hang^
m
The Verbs whose Infinitives end in gar are termi-
nated, in the persons and tenses above mentioned,
in gue and gum ; as, ,
pag&r, to pay rogdr, to pray
apagdr, - to extinguish agregar, to aggregate
embargir, to. seize reg&r, to water
To the Verbs having an e in the penultima of ,
the Infinitive Mood, we must add an i before the
said e in the three first persons Singular, and the
third of thq Plural, in the Present of the Indicative;
Imperative, and Subjunctive ; as,
Indn Suhj.
aceit£r, to succeed aci^rtp acierte
ccrrar, to shut cierro ci^rre
confessar, to confess - confiesso confi^sse
The Verb tf^irfflfr, to go, is irregular in the first
Perfect of the Indicative Mood, ,and Imperfects
and Future of the Subjunctive Mood; .and it is a
general rule, when the first Perfect of the Indicative
Mood is irregular, that the Imperfects and Future
of the Subjunctive follow the same irregularity as
in the Verb andar.
•
tst Preterperf. isi Imperf. Subj. Fut. Subj.
andiive « anduyiera anduvi^re^ £^^* .
.V anduviste asduvieraSy &c.
and6vo
anduvimos 2d Imperf.
anduvisteis anduvi^se
anduvi6ron anduvi^ses, &c.
Of
\ .
the Sfak;«b Guammak. ^ : 4$
Of the Verbs Passive.
The Verbs Passive are formed from the Active,
by adding the Participle Passive to the Auxiliary
Verb, as in the Indicative.
' Present : •
r^^y "V C I am loved *
Sing. ^ eres V am&do-< Thou art loved
cs J y^He is loved
s6inosl fWe are loved
^' Plur, -^ 86ys >amados< Ye are loved
,8on y \ They are loved.
And so throaghout the other Moods and Tenser
Of the Reciprocal Verbs.
• The Verbs called Reciprocal . have all the Pro-
noun rafter the Infinitive Mood, as librar-se.
- ' ^ Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
ryomelibro ''^
^^^S* \^^ ^® libras t
Plur. < vos libr^is vos 'I
f -ellos se libran J •
Imperfect:
Sinelibrdba Y
te librabas I
se libraba \ w j-jr ir ^
(BOS libribamos f / '^"^f"' *»-J'"^' ^<^'
- Plur. -? yosiibrdbais
( se libriban
' First Preterperfect :
Tmelibre
Sing. < te librdste
Plur. < vos librasteis
{ se libriron
• _
Second Perfect:
me be librido » If^^d ^y^^lft &c.
' p^ ha& librido, C<rc.
And
44 The ELEMENTS of
I
And so in all the Tenses and Moods but is
The Imperative.
«. C libra te "^
^'"S- Jlibrese f
>Iibremos nos ^ Free thou thyself^ &c.
.libr^d vos
t libren se
Of Verbs Impersorial belonging tothejirst Conjugation.
Some of the Impersonals are Active^ some PassJ^c.
The Active are conjugated in this manner :
Nevdr, To snow.
Indicative.
Present^ ni^va * // snows
* Imperfect^ nevaba , // did snow
-' ist Perfect^ nev6 It snowed
td& Qd Per/, ha or huvo neva4o It has snowed
Pluperfect f , havia n6vado It had snowed
Future^ ncvar4 It will snow
m
And so on, putting only the third person in every
Tense and Mood. In this manner are conjugated
the following :
atronar, to thunder ahumar, to smoak
grs^niz^r, to hail constar, to be plain, or clear
heldr, to freeze importar, to import, to be neces-
relampaguear,^/^ lighten sary
The Passive Impersonals are conjugated, by add-
ing the Particle se before or after the Verb \ as,
Indicative.
Pres. se notd It Is noted
Imperf. se motaba It was noted
si ha not4do } ^' ^"^ '""' «"''''
Pluperf. se havia notddo // had been noted
Future, se notara , // will be noted
And so in the other Tenses and Moods.
Observe, that all the Verbs, except the Regular*
Passive, may be conjugated by the Auxiliary Verb
esta^r.
fZi(; Spanish Grammar. 45
estaVj and the Gerund of the other Verb, through
all the Moods and Tenses; as,
Indicative.
Pus, estdy hablando I am speaking
estis hablando Thou art speakings &c.
Impierf. est^ba hablindo / was speaAing^ &c.
Perf. estiive hablando / have bten speaking.
The same must be observed in the two other
Conjugations in er and ir.
Second Conjugation of Regular Verbs.
Indicative.
Present :
yo vendo I sell
ndes Thou s el lest
snde lie sells
nos ven demos We sell
Plur. ^ vos vendeis Ye sell
ellos v^nden They selL
Imperfect :
yo vendia . / did sell
tu vendias Thou didst sell
vendia He did sell
C nos vendiamos We did sell
Plur» < vos vendiais Ye did sell
f ellos vendian They did sell.
First Perfect:
i yo vendi Isold
Sing. < tu vendiste Thou sold
< el vendi6 He sold
fnosvendimos We sold
Plur. -? yo% vendistcis Ye sold .
^ ellos vendieron They sold.
Second and Third Perfect :
C yo he or huve
Sing. < tu has or huviste
t el ha or huvo^ [vendido, I have soliC
nos hemos or huvimos ) &c.
Plur. ^ vos haveis ^r huvisteis
ellos han or hubi^ron
Pre-
\
%6 The ELEMENTS of
Preterpluperfect :
Tyo havfa
Sing, < tu havia
< nos haviamos f vendido/? Aai ««, 8cc.
IPlur^ < vos haviais
( ellos havian
r
Future : . •
ryovendcr6 \
Sing. < tu vcnder^s I
( iT/ndfr W ' ''''" *»' ""'^^ ''"' *^-
P/«r. < vos vender^is
\ ellos venderin
Imperative,
^ o • 1^ venda el i^/ him sell
C venddmos nos ■ Let us sell
Plur, < vended nos . Sell ye
t vendan ellos Lft them sell.
. Optative and Subjunctive Mopdi^
Present :
^ Cyo venda.
Sing. < tu vendas
r noi veJdarnds } ^ "^^ "''• ^«=-
Plur. ^ vos vendais
i ellos vendan
Imperfects : -
r yo vendi^ra, vendi^se, venderia \Icould^
5t;?^« < tu vendi^ras, vendieses, venclerias , I should^
f^el vendiera, vendiese, venderia I or
S nos vendieramos,vendi£sea)os, vender lamosf would^
vos vendierais^ vindieseis, venderiais I seli^
ellos yendieran, vendi^^en, vendefian J >. &c.
Prfsterpcrfsct :
. yo haya vendido, / have sold^ &c.
' Preterpluperfect :
yo hubi6ra or hubi^se vendido / had sold, &c.
FIrtt .
Mtf Spanish Geammar.. 47
\
First Future :
C yo vcndi^re
«J/«^, < tu yendi^res
elvcndi^re ) I shall ot mil stlt,
nos vendieremos i « '
Plur. -l vos vendiercis
ellosf vendieren
Secbfid Future:
yo hubiire vendidq / shall have sold
tu hubieres, &c\ Thou shall have sold^ &c»
Infinitive' Mood.
Present^ vender / To sfU ■ ^
Ptrftct^ haver vdhdfdo To have sold
Future y haver de veqdfr To ^ell'hertafteT ,
Gerund^ vendiendo Selling
Part. Pass, vendido Sold. .
After tjie same manner are conjugated all the
other Regular Verbs of the second Conjugatiou
•ending in ir ; such are the following :
acbmeter, tif attack esconder^ to hide
^ver, to drink emprend6r» to undertake
barrer,' to sweep , met^r, to put in
correspondlr, tc correspond ofend^r, to o^end
comer, to eat prometer, to promise
corr^r, to run respondcr, to answer
conceder^ to grant reprehender, to reprove
cometer, to commit ten^r, to fear
dev6r, to qwe .
Of Verbs Irregular of the Second Cotyugatum in 6r.
caber, to be contained trah^r, to bring
hacer, to do, to make ten^r, to have or to hold
pod6ri to be able saber, . to know^
poner, to piit or to place ver, to see
querer, to will or to love - '
Corrugation
48 TA4? ELEMENTS of
Conjugation of the Verb cab6r, To be contained.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
ing. < tu
tel
yo quepo "n
Sing. ^ tu cibcs
cabe
rnoscab6nios ) I '^m contained, 8^c.
Plur. ^ vos cab6is
( ellos caben
Imperfect :
cabia / was contained
cabias, l^c. Thou wast, &c.
Perfect :
i ciipe "^
Sing. < cupiste
(ciipo
C cupimos
Fluu -J cupisteis
( cupieron
Second Perfect:
he huve or cabidO I have been containe4^tcc*
Pluperfect :
havia cabldo I have been containedi &c.
First Future:
/ have been contained, &c.
C cabre .
Sing* < cabr^s
(cabra
^ r cabremos
Plur. < cabre is
^ cabran
/ shall or will be contained^ &c»
J • ,
Imperative Mood.
Plur I ^^^^ ^^ ^^ '^^^ contained
* L quepa el Let him be contained
C quepdmos Let us he contained
Sing, < cabed vos Be ye contained
i qu6pan ellos Let them be contained.
Subjunctive and Optative Mood.
Present :
yo qu6pa I may be contained
tu quepas Thou^.&c.
Imperfects :
' I would^
'could, or
shdutd be
Uontdined^ &c.
* 'Iipperfects :
{cupi^ra, cupiese* cabria ^ ')
cupi^ras, cupieses, cabrias
cupietfa, ''cdpffe, * cabri^
fcupieramos, cufi6stmo$t\HbitStA6s
Pluri < cupierais» cupi6seis» cab'i-fiis *
^cupieranx^cupfcs^n/cabriiih )
/ \ Pfirfect :
Mya cabido I have iein cohained^ &Cf
hiyjfi cabido; "{^r*
Pkiperfect: '-
hubiera or hubiese cftbidb^ gfc. I had been contained^ &c.
¥irst Tuture': ,
Tyo cupicre . . I shall or zoiine contained^ &c.
Sing. < tu cupieres
(elctipi&e
£ nos cupi^remos • Tf^e thdll^ &c.
Phir, 2 vos cupi^reis
^ellos cupiereo
Secpnd Future :
yo hubiere cabijo / shall haiue been coiitainA^ &c.
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ cabit To Ve contained
Perfect, ^ tetv^Bi* cAfiJb To hht^e tick contained
Future^ hav^r at c&ber r<? ^^ cbiiiainei hereqfteY
Gerund, cAhtaiib Beifk^ contained
Part. Pass, xihito CbMdthid.
The tm^\M Vcrh hacft, to So, c(r h make.
Ittdteativfe Mood. •
5yo hago' / do'ol t ^dte
ml^th Thoii idist iA Htitkesl
« bate . He ddti
!ms 6acehi8§f We^k
yoafeac^ls nOT . ,
cUoshackn Thtjfio:
,E Imperfect:
48 rA« ELEMENTS of
I
Conjugation of the Verb cab6r, To be contained.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense:
C yo quepo "^
Sing. < tu cibcs
t el cabe
> / am contairud^ &c.
y
C nos cab6mos
Plur. }. vos cab6is
( ellos caben
Imperfect:
cabia / was contained
cabias, l^c. Thou wast, &c.
Perfect :
i ciipe ^
Sing* < cupiste
(cupo
/ hav€ been contained, &c»
C cupimos
Fluw -J cupisteis
( cupieron
Second Perfect:
he huve or cabidO I have been contained^tcc*
Pluperfect :
havia cabido I have been contained, &c.
First Future :
C cabre ,
Sing^ < cabr^s
( cabra
^ r cabremos
Plur. < cabreis
(^ cabr&n
/ shall or will be contained^ &c»
J • .
Imperative Mood. .
Plur / ^^^ ^^ ^^ '^^^ contained
* L quepa el Let him be contained
C quepdmos Let us he contained
Si«^. < cabe d vos Be ye contained
i qu6pan ellos Let them be contained.
Subjunctive and Optative Mood-
Present :
yo qu6pa I may be contained
tu quepas Thou^.&c.
Imperfects :
« >
\
Iqiperfects:
pcupi^ra, cupiese^ cabria ^ ^
' / would^
*couldt or
^skdutd be
Uontdined^ &c.
Sing. < cupj^ras, cupieses, cabrias
{[.cupietfa/xtipffe/ cabria
JTcupieramos, cupi6scmo$itiihit&nids
Pluri < cupi£rais» cupi6seis» catii'fiis
^cupieranx^cupfes^n/cabri^h )
Perfect : >
hiyz cabido / have iiih cohained^ &Cf
hiysfi cabido; "{^r.
Pkipcrfect : •
hubiera or hubiese cabidb, gfc. / had been contained^ &c.
¥irst Tuture": ,.
Tyo cupiere . • I shall otwitne contained^ See.
Sing, '^tucupieres
Celctipilfe
i nos cupi6remQ$ • We ihdll^ &c»
Ptur. < vos cupi^reis ^
^^fcllos cupiercD
Secpnd Future :
yo hubiere cabido / shall hai^e been co>itainSl^ &c.
Infinitive Mi5b'd.
Present^ cab'it To I'e contained
Perfect, ^ tev^Bi* tMi^o To hbVe tiek contained
Future, hav^r 4t c&bcr To be cbttiuinei hereafte)r
Gerund, cAMi\At Beifi^ jcbntained
Part. Pass, xihito Cbntathid.
The tmfutaf t^erh hacSr, fo do, bt h make.
Indicative Mood. •
!yo hago' I do ol t Jfcaf?
m l^t^ Tho'tt Mst St Mies't
tihtke . HedM
HBsRac^hta^ WkSik.
y«»8 6ac6ls Yi sf ,
elloshackn Tht^io:
,£ , Imperfect :
50 7%e ELEMENTS^
Imperfect :
/ did, or / did make, &c«
Sing.
Cyo hacia • .
ing. < cu hacias
^el hacia ,
Tnos haciamos . IVe did^ &c.
Plan < vos haclais
^eilos hacian
First Perfect:
f yo hize • • • / made^ &c.
Singn < tu biziste
( ei hizo
i nos hizimos • liP!? made, &c*
P/«h < vos hizisteis
( ellos hizi6ron
Second Perfect:
yo he hecho, / have done or made. See.
^ tu has hec^9 &c.
Pluperfect :
yo havia hecho / had done or made^ &c.
First Future: *
I
Syo hare • • / shall do or maie, &c.
tu har&s
el hara
i nos har^mos We shall^ &c.
Plur» < vos bareis
( ellos har&n
Imperative Mood.
^. /haztu Do ox make thou
^^^i^ \ hdga el Let him do or make
rhafl[afnos nos Let us make or do
Plur, < huced vos Let ye do or make ye
l^hagan ellos Let them do or make»
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
(que) yo haga / may do or make
tu bagas Thou, &c«
Imperfects :
' ^hiziera. hiziese, haria / ^
Sing. < hizi^ras, hizieses, harias f / should, could,
I hizi^ra, hiziese, haria I or would da
i hizi^f^mos, hizi^semos, hariamos / ; ct make, ^
Plur. 2 hizterais, hizieseis, Inriais 1 &c.
(.hizi^ran, hiziesen,harian j
Perfect f
the Spanish Grahmaiu 51
Perfect :
JO hiyalhecho / have made or doik^ &c.
Pluperfect: '■
yo bubiera or hubiese hecho / hadmade^ ^c.
First Future: ,
\
/ shall do or make^ &c.
{yo hiziere . .
tu hizieres
el hiziere
{nos hizieremos We shall do^ &c.
vos hizi^reis
ellos hizieren
Secqnd Fotiire :
yo hubiere hecbo / shhll have done or made^ &c*
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ hacer To do or make
Perfect^ hav6r hecho To have done
Future^ haver de hac6r To do hereafter
Gerund^ haciendo Doing or making
Part. Pass, hecho Done or made.
After the same manner are conjugated the fol-
lowing Verbs ; deshacer^ to undo ; contrahacir^ to
cqunterfeit ; rthdciVy to make again.
Tht Irregular Verb pod6r, To be abk.
The Indicative Mood.
Present Tenso:
C yo puedo I am able or / can
tStn^* Z tu pu^des Thou art able or thou canst
( elr pu6de He can or he is able
fnos podemos We can or we are able
vos pod6is Ye can or ye are able
ellos pudden They candor are able.
Imperfect :
C podia / could or was able
Sing. < podias Thou couldst or wast able
^ podia He could or was able
i podiamos We could 6r were able
>. Plur. < podiais Ye could or were able.
( podian They could or were able^
E a Tw^
42 The EL EM E.NXS of
First Perfect:
fo pude • • / could or kaxjtbeen aUe^Ac*.
( el pudo
C nos ;pudimos , W^g couldt . &c,
Plur. < vo^ pudisteis
« ( ellos pudi6fon
( el pui
f <
Second Perfect :
yo he podido / have been able^ &c»
tu hai^ podidoy ^c.r \ ■
Pluperfect .•
I
havia podido 1 have been able^ &c.
Juture :
C podr6 • • / shall or will be dble^ Sec
SiAg. <podrds
C>oaA
C p6dr)£mos We shall, 9cc:
Plur. < bba^6U '
15
,'■■
' Sujigunctive and Optative Moods.
Present :
(que) Tpueda • '• I may be able^ &c«
Sing. <pu6das -
r pod4mos • We may be able^ &c.
P/jir. ^podiitf^^^ I. K. . M
^ puedan
Imperfects :
5pudi6ra, ^udi6se, podria ^
pudi^ra. py lesi. Jodna [mos I ^ ^^. ^j^
C pudieramos, pudies^mos, podna- i .^ \ '
P/ur. } pudlfei'als; pudiesl6is, pbdriais ' 1
( pudi^ran, pudie^ii; pddkiah j
Perfect :
yo haya po4i.do, &c. * I have been abU, ^c*
^luoenect:
hubiera or ^ubi^^ C^^iC?* ^^* "^ ^^^^ ^^^'^ ^X^j PV^*
» ,
^ie ^SpAkish 'Grahhar. ^3*
First Future: , ,
{pudi^re • « rshall or mtl be able^ &c«
fpudipreipos • Wt snau. oic .
Flur. < pudiereis
^pudieren
,$econd Figure:
hubiere podido, &^. / skail have i€cn able^ &c»
* InHnitive Mood. .
Present^ pod«r ^^^ ;iv To he able ^ i^^. »>
Fetfec^^ havjtepQdfdio.^> To h^vcbeif^aii^j
Future^ h^Y^r- d|,j[^od6r TphabUi^nqfUr
Gerund^ ptiaidndo JB^/ff^ a^a?
Ptff/. PoJX. podido Been aSU,
TIfed Irregular Feri poii6r, Tii placed
Indicative Mood.
* - I
Present:
{yopongo / if^^
tu p6^^^ Tkoufilfl^st
P7«r. ^ Vos^pOTeis.,^, i^fW^^
^.dlos ponen i hey peace.
Imperfect: v .. .
ponia,^ '-»„ I Jidjflace^&,c»
ponias, &ir. ^ -
First Perfect: ,
^. toPm^ftt • i placed, i^c.
Stng. < tu pusitfte
i^cl puso t' ■ . , ,
«v rilq9 pifsimos « We placed, &,c.
Plur. < vos pusisteis , ;;,
tellos pusi^rcy?,^ _ . . , .
Second Perfect :•!•,,
. yo he puesto^ .; I have placed, 8tc.
tu has pu^sto, &e* '
Preterplupcrfect':' ;^ ,^^ ^
' havia pu6sto, &r» I had put, kc*
E3 Fvu^.
4S The ELEMIInTS of
the third Person Singular and Plural of the Impera-
tive in que and quen^ as also the. persons.of the pre-
sent of the Subjunctive ; as, *
arranedr, to pluck out embarcSr, to embark
bolcar, .. to overturn 8ecir» tv dry .
toc&r, to touch abarc&r, to undertake
atacar, to attack ahorc&r^ to hang^
m
The Verbs whose Infinitives end mgar are termi-
nated, in the persons and tenses above mentioned^
in gue and giien ; as, , ,
pagar, to pay rog&r, to pray
apagir, to extinguish agregar, to aggregate
embargary to^ seize reg&r, to water
To the Verbs having an e in the penulUma of ,
the Infinitive Mood, we must add an i befor? the
said e in the three first persons Singular, and the
third of thq Plural, in the Present of the Indicative,
Imperative, and Subjunctive ; as,
Ind. Subjn
acertir, to succeed aci^rtp acierte
cerrar, to shut ci6rro ci6rre
confessar, to confess > confiesso confi^s^se
The Ytxh andar^Xo go, is irregular in the first
Perfect of the Indicative Mood, and Imperfects
and Future of the Subjunctive Mood ; .and it is a
general rule, when the first Perfect of the Indicative
Mood is irregular, that the Imperfects and Future
of the Subjunctive follow the same irregularity as
in the Verb andar.
tst Preterperf. isi Imperf. Subj. Fut. Subj.
andiive « anduyiera anduvi^re^ &c.,
^ anduviste anduvieras, &c,
and^vo
anduvimos 2d Imperf.
anduvisteis anduvi6se
andavieron anduviises, &c»
the SpAsrjFftB GuAMMAR. ' 4S
Of the Verbs Passive.
The Verbs Passive are fonned from the Active,
by adding the Participle Passive to the Auxiliary
Verb, as in the Indicative.
' Present : •
soy "^ CI am loved *
Singn ^ eres > am&dox Thou art loved
C8 J i^^I^ i^ loved
s6niosl CWe are loved
^' Plur, ^ 86ys VamadosK Ye are loved
fion y \ They are loved.
And so throughout the other Moods and Tenses.
Of the Reciprocal Verbs.
The Verbs called Reciprocal . have all the Pro-
noun ^ after the Infinitive Mood, as librar-se.
^ Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
ryomelibro '^
. Sing. < tu te libras i
Plur. < vos libr^is vos •
^llos se libran
Imperfect :
iiie libr&ba *] .
Sing, < te librabas I
f se libraba \ , •• , r _.//••
- Plur. ^vosiibribais
( se libriban
First Preterperfect :
rme libre
Sing. < te librdste
Plur. < vos librasteis
( se libriron
• _
Second Perfect :
me be librido I freed myself &c
' tft has librido, Csrc.
KtA
44 Tke ELEMENTS (f
I
And so in all the Tenses and Moods but im
The Imperative.
o- C libra te "^
^'"S- I Hbre sc (
i libr6mos nos ^ Free thou thyself^ &c,
Plur. •^•Hbrid vos
( llbren se
I
r
Of Verbs Impersonal belanpng to thejirst Conjugation.
Some of the Impersonah are Active^ some PasslMfe.
The Active are conjugated in this manner :
Nevdr, To snow.
Indicative.
Present^ ni6va ^ // snows
" Imperfect^ nevaba // did snow
- ist Perfect 9 nev6 // snowed
%d & 3^ PtrJ. ha or huvo nevadlo // has snowed
Pluperfect^ . havia n^vado It had snowed
Future^ ncvar4 It will snow
And so on, putting only the third person in every
Tense and Mood. In this manner are conjugated
the following :
atronar, to thunder ahumar, to smoak
gn^niz^r, to hail constat, to be plain^ or ckar
nelir, to freeze importar, to import^ to be neces^
relampaguear,'/^ lighten sary
The Passive Impersonals are conjugated, by add-
ing the Particle se before or after the Verb } as,
Indicative.
Pres. se notd // is noted
Imperf se Motaba // was noted
^"^' sc ha notido } ^' ^"^ ^''» "'^"^
Pluperf se havia notido // had been noted
Future^ se notara , // will be noted
And so in the other Tenses and Moods.
Observe, that all the Verbs, except the Regulars
Passive, may be conjugated by the Auxiliary Verb
estdr ^
f^d Spanish /Grammar. 45
tstar^ and the Gerund of the other Verb, through
all the Moods and Tenses; as,
Indicative.
Pus. est6y hablando I am speaking
estis hablando Thou art speakings &c.
Imperf. est^ba hablindo / was speakings &c.
Ptrf. estuve hablindo / have been speaking.
The same must be observed in the two other
Conjugations in er and ir.
Second Conjugation of Regular Verbs.
Indicative.
Present:
yo vendo I sell
ndcs TAou sellest
vende He sells
i nos vendemos We sell
Plun < V05 vendeis Ye sell , *
(ellos v^nden TAey sell.
Imperfect :
** Cyo vendia . / did sell
Sing, < tu vendias Thou didst sell
I el vendia He did sell
C nos vendiamos JVe did sell
Plur» < vos vendiais Ye did sell
f ellos vendian Tkey did sell.
•*■ First Perfect :
C yo vendi I sold
Sing* < tu vendiste Thou sold
< el vendi6 He sold
X nos vendimos fFe sold
Plur, -? yos vendistcis Ye sold ,
^ ellos vendieron TAey sold.
Second and Third Perfect :
r yo he ^r huve
Sing. ^ tu has or huviste
ha or hiivtf (vendido, I have solJ^
nos hemos or huvimos ) &c.
Pliir. "^ vos haveis or huvisteis
ellos' ban or hubi^ron
46 The ELEMENTS of
Prcterpluperfect :
yo havfa
via 1 / /
Cyo havii
Sing. < tu havii
C el havia
i D08 haviamos f vendido/? kai sold, 8cc.
Plur. < vos haviais
^ellos havian
r
Future :
C yo venderf
S2«^. < tu vender^s
( iTcidtmosf ' '^-'' - -^' ^''^. ^'C.
P/ar. < vos vendereis
cellos vender^n
Imperative.
Sins I ^*°^® '" ' •^^'^ ^*^**
^ o • 1^ veoda el JUi Aim sell
C vendimos nos * Let us sell
Plur. < vended nos . Sell ye
( vendan ellos Let tkemselL
. Optative and Subjunctive Mopdiw
Present :
^ Tyovenda,
Sing. < tu vendas
norveJdamos }^'««yM&c.
Plur. < vos vendais
Cellos vendan
Imperfects :
Tyo vendi6ra, vendi^se, venderia \ / could.
Sing. < tu vendi^ras, vendieses, venclerias ^ j should,
(el vendiera, vendiese, venderia I or
.*- jiiji j:r j^ ' / tj
!nos vendi£ramos,vendi£sea)os,venderiamo8
vos vendieraisy vindi6seisy venderiais
ellos vendieran, vendi^^en, venderian
would,
sell,
&c.
• «
Pnsterpcrfict :
. yo haya vendido. / iave sold, &c.
. Preterpluperfect :
yo hubi6ra or hubi6se vendido / had sold, &c*
Firat
Mtf Spanish Geahmar. 47
t
First Future :
iyo vendi^re
Sing. < tu vendi^res
^€l vendiere . j ^^^ -^ ^
^ C nos vendieremos f * '
Plur. } vos vendiercis
^elloSvcndicren
Secbiid Future:
yo hubiire vendidq / shall have sold
tu hubieres, &c\, Thou shaU. have sold, &c»
Infinitive' Mood.
%
Present, vender ' To sfll "^
Perfect, haver vendfdo To have sold
Future, haver de veqd^r To ^ell' hereafter ,
Gerund, vendiendo Selling
Part. Pass, vendido Sold.
After the same manner are conjugated all tha
other Regular Verbs of the second Conjugation
•ending in ir ; such are the following :
acometer, to attack esconder^ to hide
bever, to drink emprend6r» to undertake
barrer^ ' to sweep met^r, to put in
correspond! r, tc correspond ofend^r, to o^end
corner, to eat prometer, to promise
corr^r, to run responder, to answer
conced^r^ to grant reprehender, to reprove
cometer, to commit ten^r, to fear
dev^r, to qwe „
Of Verbs Irregular of the Second Coiyugatum in 6r.
caber, to 6e contained trah^r, to bring
hacer, to do, to make tetdr, to have or to hold
pod6r| to be able ' 8ab6r, - to know^
poner, to put or to place ver, to see
querer, to will or to love - '
CotgugatVan
48 The ELEMENTS of
>
Conjugation of the Verb cab6r, To be contained.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
yo quepo >
c^bes
. ; ) I am contained ^ &c.
Sing. < tu c^bes ' |
C nos cab6mos
Plur, < vos cab^is
^ ellos caben
Imperfect:
cabia / was contained
cabias, ^c* Thou wast, &c.
Perfect :
C ciipe ^
Sing, < cupiste
(ciipo
/ have been contained, &c»
t cupimos
Flur» } cupisteis
(^ cupier<2n
Second Perfect:
he huve or cabid6 I have been contained^tcc^
Pluperfect:
havia cabido I have been contained^ &c.
First Future :
C cabre ,
Sing. < cabr^s
(^ cabra
* r cabremos
Plur. < cabreis
( cabran
/ shall or will be contained^ &c»
Imperative Mood. .
Plur f^^^^^^ Be thou contained
' \ V^^P^ cl Let him be contained
€ quepdmos Let us be contained
Sing, <cdh€d vos Be ye contained
f qu6pan ellos Let them be contained.
Subjunctive and Optative Mood.
Present :
yo qu6pa I'may^ be contained
tu quepas Thou^.&c.
« >
^ 'Iipperfects : '
•
Tcupidra, cupiese« cabria - ^
Sing* < cupl^raSy cupieses, cabrias J ' I would^
V.cupief^/'Ciip^fe, 'cabria ycouldt or
JTcupieramos, cn^\€%tmo%i^ilbA&A6iyskd'uld be
Pluri < cupierais, cupi6seis, cabrfafs j Uontdined^ &c.
^cupieran,^cupics<n/cabri^h J
Perfect:
biyB, cabido J have iein coiiained^ ScCt
hiya3 cabtdo;'&r.
Pkiperfect: ■
hubiera or hubiese cabido, &c. I had been contained^ &c.
^irst T'uture': ,
Tyo cupiere • • / shall or wilne contained^ &c.
Sing. < tu cupieres
t el ciipiSife
r nos cupi^remos • We ihdll^ &c.
Plur. 2 vos cupi^reis
^^fcUds cupieVcD
Secpnd Future :
yo hubiere cabido / shall have been co)itainSl, &c.
Infinitive Mo63.
Present^ cabit To Ve contained
Perfect^ tev6f cabldb To hhi/e Viek contained
Future^ haVfir it cSibcr To be cbhiainei hererfuY
Gerund^ csbi6tido Bei)ri^ contained
Part. Pass, xibido CbntaTnid.
The tm^utaf t^erh hacSr, to do, 6t h make
Indtcativfe Mood- '
PrtieHi i
Tyo hago' I do or I fkdfe
Sing. itMhitis ThoU i/Sfist iff atAkesi
fdbAte . Heddti '
5 Ms hacehl6§f IVt i§^
voS6ac61s Ykid ,
elloshacfen Thtjf lib:
50 2%c ELEMENTS^
Imperfect :
Tyo hacia • • / Jid^ or / did make, &Cd
Sing. < tu hacias
t.el hacia , '^•
r nos haciamos • 7F^ did^ &c.
^ P/irr. < vos haciais
V^ellos hacian
First Perfect :
Imade^ &c.
Tyohize • • •
Sing. < tu hiziste
( el bizo
nos hizimbs • JVe made, &c.
P/«h ^ vos hizisteis
( ellos hizi6ron
Second Perfect :
JO he hecho, / have done or made. Sec.
tu has hec^, &c.
Pluperfect :
yo havia hecho ^ / had done or made^ &c.
First Future:
/ shall do or m^ie, &c.
{yo hare . .
tu har&s
el hara
.«
i nos haremos We shall, &c.
Plur, < vos harcis
( etlos harin
Imperative Mood.
c- fhaztu Do or make thou
\ h&ga el Let him de or make
rhagamos nos Let us make or do
P/tir, < hc^ced vos Let ye do or make ye
l^hagan ellos Let them do or make*
Subjunctive and Optative MooidiS!.
(que) yo haga / may do or make
tu bagas Thou^ &c.
Imperfects :
' ^hiziera, hiziese, haria "^
Sing. < hizieras, hizieses, hartas [ I should, eould,
I hizi^ra, hiziese, haria I or would d0
i hizi^l^mos, hizi6$emo8, hariamos l\ otmahe, ,
Plur. < hizierais, hizieseis* Inriais I &c.
( hizi^ran» hiziesen, harian J
the Spanish Gbammaiu 51
Perfect :
JO haya*!hecho / have made or dowt^ &c.
Pluperfect:
yo hubiera cr hubiese hecho / had made, ^c.
First Future :
/ shall do or mate, &c.
{yo hiziere . .
tu hizieres
el hiziere
{nos hizieremos We shall de^ &.c»
vos hizi6rei8
ellos hizieren
Second Future :
yo hubiere hecho / shhll have done or made, &c.
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ hacer To do or maie
Perfect^ haver hecho To have done
Future^ haver de bac^r To do hereafter
Gerund^ haciendo Doing or making
Part. Pass, hecho Done or made.
After the same manner are conjugated the fol-
lowing Verbs ; deshacer, to undo ; contrahacir^ to
counterfeit ; rthdcir^ to make again.
> .
The Irregular Verb pod6r, To be able.
The Indicative Mood.
Present Tense:
C yo puedo 1 am able or / can
Sing. \ tu pu^des Thou art able or thou canst
( el pu^de He can or he is able
inos podemos We can or we are able
vos pod^is Ye can or ye are able
ellos pu6den They can-ox are able.
Imperfect :
C podia / could or was able
Sing. < podias Thou couldst or wast able
(podia He could or was able
€ podiamos We could or were able
Plur. < podlais Ye could or were abU.
Ipodian They could or xotrt Mt.
rim PSrfect :
fyo pdde .
el pijdo
Plur. < V
U
Sing.' .
1 pijdo
IT. '■? v6s pudistcU
( ello5 pudiS^n
Second Perfect :
yo he podido / have been able, &c.
tu haspodiiioi ^c.M',
Pluperfect .-
havla podido I havt been able, &&
■ Juture :
(pedr^ . . I shall 01 mil be able, &c
SiAg. <podris
f pfea^Kmos We shall, Sec:
' Suj^unctive and Optative Jioods.
^ Prcient :
(que) ^pueda . . 1 may be able, &c.
Sing. <pu^ai
( p>bd&'mos . We may be able. See,
Plur.^poiiU^'- '• '-■■■ • ■'
( pu^dan
Imperfects :
I, pudi^se, [
f padier . _
Sing, ^pudidras, pud.^ses. podrias I j ^^^^ ^^^^^
f pudieramos, pudiesemos, podria- I ,^ \
Plur. } pudierais, pudieseis, podriais
( pudi^ran, pudiefcb^, pOdilah j
yo baya po^ldo, &c. • ' I have been aklf, S^e,
' ' ^uperfect:
bubiera ff §«bi4»e £od(fg,"^c. X ha.vt been aJtfeS^
M^'SpAi^iSH'GRAMHAIU 53
First Future: , .
{pudi^re • « I shall or mtl be Me^ &c«
{pudifrem^ • Wt shaA^ &x«
\)U(liereis
.pudieren
.Second Figure;
*
hubiere podido, &c. I shall have been able^ &c*
* Infinitive Mood. .
( .
Present^ pod«r .\p j , To be able .• -v. . f
Perfect^^ bav.^cpod^jo .»> To have betKabU}
Future^ h^yAt. d^,jpod6r To be abU^ireafUr
Gerund^ ptiai6ndb Being able
Part. Pass, podido Been aile*
■,: *" ir.jT s
The Irregular Fer6/poii6T, Toputce.
Indicative Mood.
Present :
fyo pongo LP^^
Sing. < tu pg^^s. Thou ftlflQ^st
Plur. i vos^pgncie?.^,^, iS^fff f- '
^dlos ponen i hey place.
Imperfect:
ponia^ ' i, / didjplace^ &c.
ponias, 0r.
First Perfect : .;
^. fi^^Pm^f.t • I placed, 8cc.
Stng. < tu pusiite
i^cl puso »^
<^ filq^.piisimos « We placed, Bcc.
Plur. < vos pusisteis . j
tellos pusi^rc©;^ ....
Second Perfect :
/ yo he puesto^ / have placed, Stc.
tu has pu^to, &c. ^
Preterpluperfect':';, .^..^
havia puisto, &c» I had pui^ hx.
Ea "E^^^^
54 The ELEMENTS of
First Future :
yo pondr6 pr yjo ponre ^ / shall or will put; &c»
Secood. Future:
' he 4e poner , * ' ^ ^^^^ put^Scc.
Third and Fourth Futures :
havre de pon^r / shci/l be obliged to put
havia de pon^r I was to put.
Imperative Mood.
«i. J^<>T\ tu Put thou
"^' I po"g^ «• -t^^ A^^ /"^
{pong^mos nos X^/ us put
poned vos Pw/ ye
pongan ellos Let them put.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods. f
Present Tense : ,
(que) Tponga^ . . . I may put^ 8cc.
otng. < ponga^
(ponga ,
r pong^mos m • We i^ay put, &c.
Plur. < pongdis
^ pongan
Imperfects :
{pusiera, pusie^e, ponria, or pondria V
pusieras, pusieses, ponrias or pondrias
pusiera, pusiese, ponria or pondria
I should^
Plur.
Y pusi6ramos, pusiesemos, ponriamos or could,
I [pondriamosN would, or
j pusierais, pusieseis, ponriais ^r pon^f might putf
1[driais &c.
pusieran, pusiesen, ponrian or pon-»
(Adrian
Preterperfect :
haya puesto, . / have put^ &c.
Preterpluperfect :
hubiera or hubi^te puesto, I hadput^ &c»
First Future:
fpusiere • • / shall or will put^ &c.
pusieres '
pusi^re
C pusi^remos . fTe shall^ &c.
Plur. < pusiereis
(pu8i6ren
Secoad
\»
the Spanish GftAHHAR. 55
Second Future :
hubiere puesto 1 shall have put.
«
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ pon6r To put
Perfect 9 haver ptiesto To have put
Gerund^ poniendo Putting
Part, Pass. pu6sto Put.
After the same manner are conjugated the fol*-
lowing Verbs :
anteponer, to prefer itnponir, to impose
' conipQn6r, to compose or to mend propon^r, to propose
disponer^ to dispose repon^r, to answer^ to reply;
and any other Verb derived from poner.
The Irregular Verb querer, To will, to hvt, or to chme.
Indicative Mood.
Present Teijse:
o quiero / will or love
\x quieres Thou wiliest or lovest
\ qui^re He wills or loves
{nos queremos fFe will or love
vos querets Ve will or love
ellos qui^ren They will or love*
Preterimperfect :
fqueria x / did will or love
Sing. < querias 7%(7tf didst, will or love
(^queria He did will or love
{quer^amos ff^e did will or love
queriais Ye did will or love
querian They did will or love.
First Preterperfect :
{quise / willed or loved
quisiste Thou willedst or lovedst
quiso He willed or loved
fquisimos fTe willed or loved
Plur. < quisisteis Ye willed or loved
^quisiejron They willed or loved.
Second Perfect : .
he or huY# queridp,, J have willed ot (oued^ tiuc%
E 4 "SttXK*
5^, Th^, E.L^^^^^:,S of,
Preterplugerfect:
havia querido t Aad willed or Icved^ 8cq*
^ First Future:
Tquerre. , • f^shaUmUotlove^Scc.
Sing. < qiierraf •
r querr^pjps^ . Wc sMiS^.
Plur. < querreis
Second Future t
yo he de^uereir ^ / must will^Qi^Javc^ &c,
havre de quer^r . / shall be obliged io^ love^ &c.
Fourth. Futura:
havia de jquercr . / zons to love^ &c.
o \ quiera el Let him will or lovt
{querdmos nos Let us will or love
quex^d yo3 ^^ Will ye^ or 'y«>
Optatiye a^d Sabjunctive ,^iloip^.
Prcsepti Tense^;
(que), r quMrjL . . • / msy-ioi^^ Ac^.
ji»^. < quieras.
< quiera
5qu^ramos , • We may lope^ &^.
( ^uleran^
Thr^^ {imperfects:
quisi^ras, quisi^se^ , querrifis I / should^ -
quisiera, quisiese, querr^a I would^ or
{quisi$rarQ'pa«.xiuisii£8einos, querrian\os ft could (pve^
Iiui$ierais„iiuisii6seis,quernais I &'e<
quisicran,.quisi^sen,^uerrian J c
Pretergcrfect :
• yohajg^5[i^ejrjfl9,^, l ^ofl desired,fir,ipvf4, fee.
Preterplpper^ct;^
feiibi^ra pr hubiei^ qii^i^O I had desired ^^[oyg^^^^,
Fifii ^Future :
r»q9k46te> . . I shalttailtot'loveiSct.
Sing. < quisierea
fjquisierc
^ qaisierenios • We shalt^ &c.
Plur. < quisiereis
' tquisi6rcn
Second Future :
hublere qu6rido» &c* I skill be willing^ or shall lave, &*c, "
Ih^nitive Mood.
Pres. quer^r To will or to love
Preter. haver querido To have willed or loved "
Put. havcf dcqueror ' To will or ^o love hireaftet
Gerund, queriendo Willing or loving
JPart. queridp. Willed or loved.
The* Irregular Verb tra^r^ To bring*.
Indicative Mood. '
Proaent Tense : •
{yo4.Tayga • • / bring - .
tu tries * ^ TKim iringes^
el trie • IR biHngM,
{no$'traei&09< Wk bring
vos traeis Ye bring
ello&'inen > They brings
Preterimyerfeot .7
{traia ,. 1 did iring\
traiar Thou didst brings <
traia He didiring
f^aiamot . ff^ di-d bring
Plur. < traiais ^ Ye did brinjgr
^traian They did bring. .
, First Pudtefperfett :'
{traxe c^f truxe Ibr&ught* ^
iraxiste 4>r truxisto' • TM(^ broughttsi
trixo or tnixo H&'brought * ,
rtraximosj0rum«imo« • W^ brought' "
P/ttr..<irax{steis ^r truxtstm ' Te' brought',
\.traxcron or trux^roti «' Tlie^-br9U^kii
—
Si T^cELEMENTSy
Second Perfect:
he or huve traido / kave brougki^ &e.
Preterpluperfect :
havia traido / had braugkt^ ice.
First Future : v
C traere / shall or wiH bring
Sinf. < traeras Thou wilt brings &c.
( traerd He will bring
€ traer^mo's We will bring
.Ptur. < traere is ' Ye will bring
C traeriin They will bring.
Second Future <:
he dc traer, / must brings &c«
Third Future :
> havre de traer, / will be obliged to brings &c.
Fourth Future :
bavfa de tra^r. / was to brings &c.
Imperative Mood.
Sing, i'^'^ '"^ , ^/^!'V'T-
\irayga el Let him prtng
C trayearoos nos Let us bring
Plur» < tra<d vos Let ye bring
V traygan ellot Let them bring*
Optative and Subjunctive Moods.
>
Present Tense :
(que) (trayga • . • I may brings 8cc.
Sing, < traygas ^
'( trayga
i traygamoj^ • .^ We may bring, &c.
Plur. < traygais
(^ traygan
Preterimperfects :
C traxera, trax6se, traeria ^
Sing. < trax^ras, trax^ses, traerias I / would^
i traxera, trax6se, traeria { should,
C traxeramoSi trax6semos, traeriamos [ or could
Plur. < traxerais, traxeseis, traeiiais 1 bring, 8cc.
(tfax^rany traxisen, traerian J
the Spanish Grammau., $9
" ^ Prcterperfect :
i hayai traido, • . / have brought^ &c.
5f«^, < hayas
(haya
C hayamos traido, • We have brought^ &c.
Plur. } haydis
( hayan
Two Preterpluperfects :
i hubkra or hubiesc traido / had brought^ &c.
Sing. < hubieiras or hubi^ses '
(,hub]6ra or hubiese
t hubieramos or hubiesemos We had brought^ j&c
Plur. ^ hubierais or hubi6seis
( hubi^ran or hubiesen
First Future :
C traxere or trux^re • •, / shall Brings &c.
Sing, < trax6res ^r truxeres
C traxere or truxere '
i traxeremos or trqxeremos We shall brings &c.
^Ptur. < trax^reis or trux^reis
^ traxeren or truxeren
Second Future :
hubiere traido / shall have brought^ &c.
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ tracr To bring
Perfect^ hav6r traido To have brought
Future^ haver de tracr To bring hereafter
Gerund^ trai6ndo Bringing' '.
Part. Pass, traido Brought^
After the same manner are conjugated the Com-
pound Verbs, retraSr^ contrair^ to contract; dis-
ttaer^ to distract ; atrair^ to attract, S^c.
The Irregular Verb sab^r, To hear.
Iiidicative Mood.
Present Tense.
/ know ,\ *; i •
s^bes Thou knowest
s&be He knowest
. C nos sab£mos We know
Plur. < vos 8ab6is Ye know
{^ellos siben They know
— •• - ■ .
' /
Tsabiai' J did know
. ^i^g* \ sabiad ' Thou didst know
t saMa Be did know
i sabiamos We did know
Plur% < sabiais Te did know
t sabian They did know.
FiirSt Perfect :
Tsufle 1 knew
Sing. < supistc Thou knewest
(siipo He knew ^
£'supfiiiOs^ H^e kfiew
J^/ur. < 'supisteis Ye knew
(supieron Theykniio)
Second Perfect':
rh^ sabido ' I have known
Sing. < has^sabido Thoufiast known '
(^ ha sabldo H^ has known
^ hemos isabidb We have known
P/»r« < have i« sabido Tefiave^inown
(^ ban sabido * They have known!
• * ' '
Preterpluperfect :
r havU <7r bube sabido, • • I had known^ Bcc
Sing. < havias
C havia.
i haviamos sabido, . . . We hid knoion^ &6.
P/tfr. < hav^iais-
(havian'
First Future:
^ iiA\V Ishaltox'hjillkn'odi :
Sing. : < sabr&s Thou shall 6r' witi knoia '
Csabri He l^hall oT will knCw
rsabr^mos We shall ox will /inow
Plur. } safertis Ye shall br ivillkr^o^
^ sabran They shall or will know.
Second Futore :'
h^desab^r 1 must knotH^ BcU
Third Future :
havre de saber / tvill bt obliged to know.
Fourth Future:
havia de sab6r ' ' 1 wasWknowlt^.
s
' Imper/^^iy^ Mood.
^* iscpael UtMtnAnapf
I sepamos nos JUt us knQlU)
( s^pan'^ellos Let them Angm.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
(que) (s6pa . . • / may know^ &c.
Singt
Plur.
) rs6pa . . •
• ^ sepaS'
t.8cpa
i s^p&mos • • Wc may know^ Sffi;
V sepsis'
( s^pan
Th^ee Iinpesfect^ :
or should
Csupiera, supiese, sabria ^
Sing. < supierasy supi^ses, sabrias
( supiera, supi^se, sabria
t supieramos, supiese.mos, sabiiamos
Plur. < siipie.rais, supieseis, sabriais
f^supi6ran» supiesen, sabrian
preterperfect :
rjidydfabido • k ^ f j^vf known^ &.C.
Sing. < bayas sabido y
t h^ya sabido
C hayamos sabido • • We have knpwn^ &c.
Plutm < hayiis sabido '
(hay an saBido
Preterpluperfect :
^ hubj^a^r kifbi^^c sabido • • I h.a4 known^Scc.
Sing. < hubieras or nuDjise^
■ ^ hubiera or hubiese
C hubiiramos or hubiesemos • We had knotvn^ &c.
jP/?^r. 4l)ubiefais ^r bubi^seis
(hubi^ran or hubiesen
Fur^t Future :
!supie<-,i^ • » / shall or will inoWf &c*
supicfp
r supi^t^jodf); • We shall otr wifl know, 8cc.
Plur. ) supi^jr^ts
^ *^ ■-
6« Tke ELEMEl^^TS of
Second Future :
r hubi^re sabido • • / shall have khowjt^ &c.
Sing. < hubieres sabido
C hubi^re sabido
Shubieremos sabido We shall have known^ &c.
hubi^reis sabido
hubieren sabido
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ saber To knoto
Perfect^ . haver sabido To have known
Future^ hav^r de sab6r To know hereafter
Gerundt sabiendo Knowing
Part. Pass, sabido Knswn.
The Irregular Verb v^r, To see.
Indicative Mood,
* Present Tense :
ryoveo I see
Sifig, < tu v6s Thou seest
f el ve He sees
( nos vemot IVe see
Ptur. < vos veis Ye see
(. ellos ven They see
Imperfect :
C vcia / did seje
Sing. < vefas Thou ^idst see
i veia , * -^^ ^i^ ^^^
£ yeiamot We ^id see
Plur. < veiais^ Ye jiid see
y i veian Thlfy did see.
' Observe, that T;ffl in that Teijse is never iised,
although it is found in all the Spanish and English
Grammars. Vide^ in the first Perfect, is likewise
obsolete.
First Pretcrperfect :
, s rvi I saw
Singn ^ vistc , . Thou sawest
Cvio He saw
€ vimos , We saw
Plur. xvisteis Ye saw
(vicron Thty saw.
/ *
the Spanish Grammar. 63
Second Perfect:
C he visto / have seen
Sing. K.has visto Thou hast seen
i ha visto He has seen
i hernos visto IVe have seen
Piur. < have is visto Ye have seen
(^ ban vfsto They have seen.
Preterpluperfect :
{ havia visto, • • / had seen^ &c.
Sing, < havias
f havia
haviamos visto, . We had seen^ &c.
Plur* , ^ haviais
\
havian
1
First Future :
vere / shall or will see
Sing. -^ veras Thou shalt or wilt see
vera He shall or will see
i veremos We shall or will see
Plur. < vereis Ye shall or will see
\ verin They shall or will sec.
Second Future:
he de ver / must see
Sing. ^ has de ver Thou must see
ha de ver He must see
c hemos de v6r We must see
Plur. 2 haviis de ver Ye must see
( han de ver ^^y must see.
The two other Futures as atove in the other Verbs.
Imperative Mood.
e- f vc tu See thou
o* 1^ vea el Let them see
1 vt^^mos nos Let us see
Plur. ^vedvos See ye , ,
( yean ellos Let them see.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods. ^
Present Tense :
(9^0 C yo vca . . / may see^ &c.
Sing. < tu veas
(el vea
nos veamos . We may see, &c.
Plury -^ vos veiis
ellos vcan
■!
I couldt I'fvould^
364 Th£ E LiE M E.N T S of
Inaperfect : .
{vi6ra, viese, veria
vieras» vieses, verias
viera,vie8e, vcria
rvi^ramoSf'Viesemos, veriamos ^f I should see^ &c.
Plur. < yierats, viescis,'veriais
^ vi6ran, ' vi6scn, ^ vcri an
. Perfect :
rhaya . . visto, I have seen^ &ۥ
Sing. -J b4yas
(. h£ya
C hay^mos • vlsto, We have s^en^ ^c.
Flur. <hayii8
(h&yan
Pluperfect:
Y hubiera or hubiete • . ^ visto, / had seen^ &c.
Sing. < hubieras or hubieses
,f faubiera v^r Joubiese
C hub^amos or bubi&emos • visto, We had seen,
Plur. <h\xhieTdii or huhi€seis &c.
( hubi^ran or hubiesen
First Future :
r vie re • . • / shall or will see, &c.
Sing. < vi^rcs
/viere •
r vieremoa . • We shallot will see^ &c.
Plur. < vi^reis
/^vieren
Second Future :
rhubi^re . • • visto, I shall have seen. Sec.
Sing. <hubieres
- f hubiere '
f hubaeremos . . visto, We shall have seen. Sec.
Plur* •Jhubi6rei8
^hubieren
Infinitive Mood.
Pres. vet To see
, Petf. haver vfsto To have seen
Put. haver de ver To see hereafter
Gerund,-* viendo Seeing
Part. Pass, visto Seen.
Of the Verbs ending in cer.
The following Verbs, whose Infinitives end in cer^
are terminated in sco in the Present of the Indicative
the Spanish Grammar. 65
Mood in the first Person ; but all the other Persons
are conjugated without adding the s.
The third Person Singular of the Imperative
Mood ends in sca^ the first Person Plural in scamos,
and the third Person Plural in scan.
The Termination of all the Persons of the Present
Subjunctive Mood is as follows :
{sea
seas
sea
{scamos
sciis
scin
But in all other Tenses or Moods s is not used be-
fore c, although a great many of those Verbs are =
derived from the Latin; as you may see in the fol-
lowing List :
Adolec^r,
agraddcer,
amanecer,
apetecer,
to grow sick
to thank
to rise soon
to desire
Compadec^r, to pity
conocer, to know
crecer, to grow
Desfallecer, to faint
desvanecer, to vanish
Encarecer,
establecer,
enflaquecer,
empobrccer,
enriquecer,
endurecer,
Indicative.
Present
adolesco
agradesco
ainanesco
apetesco
compadesco
conosco
cresco
desfallesco
desvanesco.
encaresco
. establesco
enflaquesco
empobresco
enriquesco
endureecQ
engrandesco
to grow dearer
to establish .»
to grow lean
to grow poor
to grow rich
to grow hard'
engrandec6r, to magnify
cntrist^cer, to grow melancholy entristesco
ennoblecer, to ennoble ennoblesco
ensoberbec^r, to grow proud
emmudccer, to grow dumb
tojinish
to fail or die
to flourish
to strengthen
to favour
to deserve
io be born
Prettr perfect.
adoleci
agradeci
amaneci
apeteci
compadeci
conoci
creci
desfalleci
desvanesci
encareci
estableci
ehflaqueci '
empobrcci
enriqueci
endureci
engrandeci
entristeci
ennobled
ensoberbesco ensoberbeci
emmudesco emtnudeci
Fenecer,
fallec^r,
florecer,
fortalecer,
favorecer,
Merecer,
Naccr,
fenesco
fallesco
floresco
fortalesco
favoresco
meresco
nasqo
feneci
falleci
floreci
fortaleci
favored
0>a^-
G6 ,
Tke ELEMENTS 6/
1
Indicative.
Present Preterptrfect.
Obedec^r,*
to obey obedesco obedeci
Pad«^
tofted pasco paci
perecer.
to peHsh peresco f ereci '
pidee^r.
to suffer fadesto padeci
parecer,
to appear pareico pare(:i
Except frdrn this general rule vencirj to conquer, ,
which makes venzo^ wnci^ and dots not adihit of
the s, though derived from the Latin mncere.
CcHftigMi&n of the Verb Irteguhr .ten6r, tb haWy
€ft to hold.
Indicative.
Present Tense :
C ten^ / knve or hold-
Sing, <ii6nes Thou hdst
t tien^ ^ He hai
^ten6.rhcis Wehavt
Plur. <. teriSis Ye have
• ttienen They have.
Imperfect :
# Oenia I had
Sing, <^ teniae Thou hadsf
. (tenia He had
itenfamos We had
PUr. < tenjais re had
t tenian They had.
Preterperfect :
Ctuve ' I had
Sing. ^tnvniQ Thou hadst
t ttivo He had
, i tnvf mo« We had
Plur. < tuvisteis Ye had
t tuvi^eron They had.
Second Perfect : ,
he tenido / have had
Sing.' ^ tais tenido Thou hast had
he tenido, is^c. He has had^ &c.
Preterpluperfect :
Stijivla tCBido / had had
havias tenido Thou hadst had
havia lenido • Ht had had
C havIaiBOs tenido Wt had had
Plur. < h.aviais tenfdo Yfi had had
I havian tenido They had had.
rim Future:
( tendre ^ r 4enre / shall or will have
.Sing. < tundras or tenrds Thou shalt of will have
^ tendra or tenrd He shall or tvill have
€ tendriSmos or tenr£mos We shall or will have
Pluri < tendreis or tenr^ii Ve shall or mil have
( tendraft or tenran They shall or mil have.
Second Future :
he de ten6r I must have^ &c.
has de ten6r, &c.
Third Futi^re :
havia de tener, / was io haye^ jjcc.
havias de texjcr, £?f ,
Fourth Fiituie :
hayri de tem^r / shall if obliged ip hfve.
Imperative Mood.
5zW I^^^^ . fi^Tfie or hold ihu
^' \tenga,ei Lei him have
I ftengamos nos ^Let us have
1 Plur» < tened vos flave ye
(.tengan ellos Let them have.
' Optative and Subjunctive Moods.
(que) £ t6Dg^ . . . / t^^iy fiifpe, &c.
Sing. <{6tx^a$
Cteug^
( tenganaos . .We may have, &c.
Plur. -' tengiis
(t^Dgan
Preterimperftct :
5tuvi6ra, tuviese, tendria "\
^.,.^- . tuvieras, tuvi6ses,.tendrfas i I could,
i tuviera, tuviese^ teXKb*|a f should^ or
tuvieramos^ tuv^esemos, te^dri^ds f would hqve,
Plur. ^ tuviprais, tuyipseis, teijdiffiis \ ^c.
fwri^nru, tiivi&en, tendrlan . / '^
6S The ELEMENTS of
Preterperfcct :.
( haya tenido • • / have had or hcld^ &c.
Sing, shayas tenido
(.hdy a tenido
C hayimos tenido . We have had^ &c.
Plur. \ hay^is tenido
v. hayan tenido
First and Second Preterpluperfects :
!huvi6ra or huvi^se tenido, • / had had^ or held^
huvi^ras or buvieses &b.
buviera or huviese
rhuvieramos or huviesemos tenido, We had had, &c.
Plur. < huvi6rais or huvieseis
(^huvieran or huviesen
First Future :
Stuviere / shall have or hold
tuvieres Thou shalt have
tuviere He shall have
5tuvicremos fFe shall have
, . V tuvi6reis Ye shall have
^tuvieren They shall have.
Second Future :
< hubiere tenido, • • / shall or zoill have or hold.
Sing, <bubieres
. t hubiere
r hubieremos tenido • We sKall^ &c.
Plur, < hubi^reis
(hubieren
Infinitive Mood.
Present, tencr To have or to hold
Perfect, haver tenido 7!? have had or held ,
Future, haver de tencr To have hereafter.
Oerund, teniendo Having or holding.
Part. Pass, tenido Had or held.
Like this Verb are conjugated its Compounds
through all Moods and Tenses ; as, •
' mantener, ' to maintain, sostener, to sustain,
detener, to detain, conten^r,. to contain,
reten6r, to retain.
Of the Verbs in g6r.
«
The following Verbs, whose Infinitives end in^/r,
"form the Preseiit of the Itvdicativci Mood by chang-
the Spanish Grammar. 69
ing g into j ; the same change takes place in the
third Person Singular, and the first and third Persons
Plural of the Imperative Mood ; and through all
Persons, in both Numbers of the Subjunctive Mood.
Infinitive*
cncoger, to shrink
recog^r, to gather
acoglr, to entertain
escoger, to choose
coger, to catch
Indicative.
Present. Prtterperfect*
encojo encogi
rec6jo recogi
ac6jo acogi
esc6jo escogi
c6jo cogi
Of the Irregular Verbs with an o in the penultima^
or the last Syllable but one.
%
Conjugation of the Verb volver, to turn.
Indicative Mood.
«
Present Tense :
rvuelvo
Sing. < vuelves
f^vuelve
€ volvemos
Plur. < volveis
^vuelven
Svolvia
volvias .
volvia
C volviamos
Plur. < volvfais
t volvfan
I turn
Thou turnest
He turns
We turn
Ye turn
They turn.
Imperfect :
I did turn
. \ Thou didst turn
He did turn
'We did turn
Ye did turn
They did turn.
First Preterperfect :
Y volvi
Sing. < volviste
t volvi6
C volvimos
Plur. < volvistcis
r voiyicroR
F9
/ turned
Thou turnedst
He turned
We turned
Ye turned
They iurntL
%VL<S^
70 The ELEMENTS ^
I Second Preteiperfect :
J he vacho, •,.••/ have iuffadt &c.
t ha .
^ hemos (7r bavemos vueltOi • We have turned^ &c»
Plur. < haveis
than ^ .
Pretcrplup^rfect :
t havia vuelto, • . . / had turned^ &c.»
Plur. < havias
■ 't havia
Shaviamos vu^lto, • . We had turjneHf &c.
haviais •
Jiavi^n
First . Putuf e :
Tvolvere J shall or will turn
PlUr. < volveras Thou shah or wilt 'turn
t volveri He shall or will turn
C volv6rettios We shall or will turn
Sing, ^ volwcrcis Ye shall or will turn
(, volveran They shall or will turn.
Second Future :
he de volver / must turn
has de voIv^r Thou must turn, &c.
The 3rd and 4th Futures are as in tlie other Verbs.
Imperative Mood*
Stnp^ fvuelvetu -Turn thou
°' \ vuelvia el. Let him turn
f volvdmds nos Let us turh
Plur. <.volv6d vos Turn ye
V,vuflv^n*cllos Let us turn.
Optrftive and Subjunctive Moods.
Present:
(que) Tvuelva • • I may turn, '&c.
Sing, < vu61v§s
fvuelva »
Yvolvatt«)s . 'We may fufiii itc.
Plur. < volvais - ♦
C vue[Vah
Imperfea^ : ^
/'vcflvieia, volyiese, yolveria >
5if^. < yplvier^s, jrolvi6tes, volvcr^as 1 I cpuifl^
•;C vol vie ra, volvi^se, vol vena i shoutd^
(vxdvieraiDO^, volviesemos, volveriaroos
or would
tum^ &c.
P/tfr. t< volyierais, volviegcis, volveriaU
f^volvieran, vqlviesen, volverian
Pr«terperfect :
< bay a vuelto, . . . ^ / have turned^ &c.
Sing, < Myas
(.liaya
. 1 hayamos vuelto, . . We have turned^ &c.
Plur, < hayiis
- f^hayan
Two Preterpluperfects :
C hubiera or hubi^se vuelto, • / had turned, ^c.
Sing. < hubieras br hubieses
f bubiera or hubiege
r bubi^ramos or hubi^semos vwOioiWe had^ &ۥ
P/iir. < hubi^raisf or bubi^seis
( bpbieran 47r bubiesea '
First Future :
r volvi^re . . / shall or will turn^ &c.
Sir^g. \ volvi6re5
]f volyiere
jf volvieremos . We shall or will turntiLc.
Pl\ir, < volvjerds ^
r volvieren •
Second Future : *
rhubi^re vmelto, . • / shall or zoill have ti^rnedi
Sing. < hubieres &c.
^hubiere
fbjubiercmojs vu^Uo, . We shail^ ficp,
hubi6reis
hubierea, •
lufinitive Mood.
Pres. volver To turn
Per/. haver vuelto To have turned
Fut. h^ver de volver To turn hereafter
Gerund^ volvi^do Turning
Part. Pass, vuiho Turned
The foUowii^g Verbs ^e conjugated in the saW
manner as the Verb volvdr, by changing the o of the
,F4 ^\i\iX>C\\sv^
- *' - •
72 r//e ELEMENTS o/
penultima, or last syllable but one, into ue in the three
Persons Singular, and third Plural, of the Present
Indicative, Imperative, and Subjunctive Moods.
. -
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Present.
Present.
sol6r.
io use
suelo
Buela
coz6r,
to boil
cuezo
cueza
doler.
to grieve
dueio
duela
ol6r,
to smell
hu^to
huela
Observe
, that the following are
varied thus :
Indicatiije.
Subjunctive^
Present.
Present.
caer.
to fall ,
caigo
caiga
roer,
to grow
roigo
. roiga
val^r.
to be worth
valgo
valga
In the following Verbs an i is introduced before
the e of the last syllable but one, in the three Per-
sons Singular, and third Plural of the Present Indi-
cative, Imperative, and Subjunctive Moods :
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
/ .
Present.
Present
defender,
to defend
defiendo
defienda
hend<^r.
. to cleave
hiendo
hienda '
cerner.
to sift
cicrno
cierna
entender.
to understand
entiendo
eiitienda
heder.
• io stink
hiedo
hieda
perdcr,
to lose
pierdo
pierda
Of Verbs Passive of the Second Conjugation.
The Verbs Passive are formed in the same man-
ner as one of the first Conjugation, with one of the
Auxiliaries sirovestavy and the Participle Passive of
the Verb conjugated j thus :
Indicative Mood.
Present :
/ am loved
Thou art loved
He is loved
We arif loved
Ye are loved
They are loved.
Tsoi querido
Sing. < ^res qberido
\ es querido
•- rs6inos queridos
Plur. c s6is queridos
^son queridos
/Atf Spanish Grammar. 73
#
Pretenmperfect :
Tera qucrido / was loved
Sing. < eras querido Thou wast loved
(^era querido He was loved
{er^mos queridos TVe were loved
erais queridos Ye were loved
6ran queridos They were loved,
. Pluperfect :
. C fui or he sido querido ^
Sing» < fuiste or has sido querido > I have been loved^ &c.
^ fue or ha sido querido, G?r. )
And so in the other Tenses and Moods,
Of Verbs ReciprocaL
■ «
These Verbs are conjugated as those of the first
Conjugation; as,
Ofender se, To offend one's self.
Indicative.
Present :
r me ofendo / offend myself^
Sing. < te of^ndes TAoUf &c.
^ se ofende
nos ofendemos
Plur. -? vos pfendeis
se ofenden
Imperfect :
me ofendia • • / did offend myself^ &c.
Sing. Z te ofendias
( se ofendia
i no8 ofendiamos . We did offend ourselves^ &q.
Plur. < vos ofendiais
.rse ofendian
' ' Present:
me ofendi . . / offended myself^ &c.
Sing. -J te pfendiste /
se ofendid
inos ofendimos • We offended ourselves^ &c*
vos ofendisteis
se ofen4ieron
I
ing. y
t^:
■mim'd-i -jjihafcfcjfai '
/
74 ' TAc ELEMENTS^
Imperative Mood.
S'fKr f^^^^^^^^ ' Offend thou thyself . • *
' o • ^ ofenda se £et him offend himself
fofenddmos nog Let us ojffend ourselves ,
Plut* < ofend^d vos Offend y^ yourselves
^of6ndan se Let them offend themutti^s.
Observe, That the Persons may be doubled ; as,^^
mt oferidOj tu te ofendes ; or thus, ofendome^ofendeste^ .
ofinde se, &c, by putting the pronoun after the Verk
Of Verbs Impersonal.
The Impersonals of this Conjugation are,
Haver, To be there.
Indicative.
Present Tense :
► ' hay or no hay There is^ or there is not^ or there are.
Imperfects:
havia There was^ or there were.
First Prcterperfect : . ^
fau vo There was^ or there has hen.
Second Perfect :
ha havido There has be^n.
Pluperfect :
havia havido Thert had been.
Future :
havri There will or shall be..
Second Future :
ha de haver There must be.
And so v^ the other Futures.
Imperative;
haya Let it be. • *
Optative.
0xa]k que haya God grant ^hai-ther^ be.
Imperfects :
^e fauviera, huviese, or havru That there could^ wuld^ *
• \ or should he.
Perfect:
^oe liiya havido That there has been.
Pluperfect :
que huviera huvido That there had been.
Future :
quehiiviere • That there shair be*
Observe, That the Spanish Language expresses the
Impersonal Verbs as the Latin; but in English they
are obliged to add there or it ; and in French they
use the pronoun il, <^c.
Examples.
Hay mitcha gente en Lbndres^ there are a great
many people in London ; hav'ia tres cientos soldados
en el castillo^ there were three 'hundred soldiers in
the castle ; huvo muchas mugeres en la iglesia^ Iher^
were many women in the church.
Ser, To be, in what concerns the essence or qualities of
things. ^
Indicative.
. Present^ es, no es // m, it is not
Imperfect^ era It was
Per/ectf fue It has been
And so in the xither Tenses*
, Examples.
Es tiempo de leoantdr, it is time to go up; era
tiempo de ir, it was to gO ; fu^ noche^ it has been
night; ser& "i^rdM^ it ^iil be Uufe,
ft
76 TAtf ELEMENTS df
So the Verb sir is conjugated with tnendster ; sui,
Es menister hacer esto^ this must be done ; era
menister escriber, It was necessary to write ; j/o iria
si fu6ra )fnmisttr^ I would go if it were necessary.
The, Verb Impersonal plac6r, To please.
Indicative Mood.
Present^ place // pleases
Imperfect^ placia It did please
First Perfect^ P^^go It pleased
Second Perfect^ ha placido // has pleased.
Imperative. '
Plega Let it please^ &c.
Llov6r, To rain.
Llu6 ve // rains
Llovia It did rain
Llovio It rained
Ha llovido It has rained
Llovera . It shall or will rain.
Imperative.
Llueva, Let it rain*
Heder, To stink.
Hi6de // stinks
Hedla , // did stink
Hedi6 It stunk^ &c,
016r, To smell.
This Verb, as well as llover, changes the o into
ue in the Present Tenses,
Huele // smells
HoUa ; ItdidsmelU
Hu61a Let it smell
Que hue la That it may smell.
Acontec6r, acaec^r, To happen.
Acontecey aca6ce, // happens ^ &c.
Pertenecer, To belong.
Pertcnccc, h belongs^ &c.
the Spanish Grammar. 77
The Reciproeal or Passive Im personals are conju-
gated as the Verb /eer^e, To be read.
Se I^e or leese It is read
Se leia It was read
Se lei6 // has been read.
And so are conjugated sabersCy To be known.
Se sdbe, or sibe se It is known
Se sabi^f ^r sabfa se // zi/tfj known
Se ^lipo, (?r siipo se // has been known
Se sabra, or sabri se // z^zV/ be known.
Imperative,
S^pa se Let it be known.
Hac6r se, To be made.
Se hice // is made
S^ hacia It was made
Se hjzo // has been made^
Observe, That all the Verbs, Regular and Irre-
gular, of the second Conjugation, are, as well as
those of the first, conjugated in Spanishdi^m English,
with the Auxiliary Verb estdr^ To ie, and the
Gerund of the Verb ; as;
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
C est6y leyendo / am reading
Sing. < estas leyendo Thou art reading
t esti ley6ndo ' He is reading
C estamos leyendo ff^e are reading
Plur. < estdis leyendo Ye are reading
(^^aa leyendo - They are reading.
And so in all the Moods and Tenses, and likewise
in the Impersonals; as,
£sta lloviendo It rains
£st£ba. UovieHdo // did rain
Estuvo lloviendo It has rained^ or it was raining
Ha estado lloviendo . It has been raining
Havia estado lloviendo // had been raining
Estard lloviendo It will be raining.
' And so in all the Tenser.
OS
t8 The ELEMENTS^
Of Verbs Regular of the third Con/ugation i^ ir ; as,
Sufrir, To suffer.
Indicative Mood.
Present iTense :
fsufro I suffer
Sing* < fufrea Thou suffer est
\sufre He suffers
rsufritHos We suffer .
Pluu < sufris Ye suffer
\sufren ' They suffer.
Preterimperfect :
{sufria . . / was sufferings or / did suffer 9
sufrias ikc.
sufria
{sufriamos • We were sufferings &c.
sufriais
sufrian
First Preterperfect :
{suM • • • / suffered s &c.
sufriste
sufri6
{sufrimos .' . We suffer ed^ &>c.
sufristeis
sufri6ron
Second and Third Preterperfect :
{he or huve sufrido, • / have suffered^ &c. .
has
ha ^
{h^mos sufridoy . . . We have suffer ed^ &c»
have is
han
Preterpluperfect :
rhavia sufrido, • • I had suffer ed. &,€• -
Sing. < havias
l^ ha via 9
{haviamos sufrfdo, • W^ had sufferjed^ &c*
haviais
havian
First Future:
, Tsufrire . . . . / shall^ or will suffer ^ &€.
Sing. < sttfriras
Xsufnra
fsufriremof • • We shall^iLC.
Plur. Y sufrireis
tke Spanish Grammah. 79
Second Future :
Sht de luEKr # : I am to or I must suffer^
has de sufrir &c.
ha de sufrir
i h6ni6s de sufrfr ' . We are to^ &c.
Plur. < hav^is de sufrir
(hande sufrir
The Third and Fourth as in the other Conjugations.
Imperative Mood.
«. fsufrctu Suffer thou
^^^^' \ sufra el Let Aim suffer
' fsuframos nos Let us suffer
"" Plur. < sufrid vos Suffer ye
^sufran ellos Let Aim suffer^
Optative and Subjunctive Moods.
Present Tense:
^ fgue) t sufra . . . / may suffer, &c.
Stng* <sufras
Csufriftios • . We may. suffer, Sec:
Plur. < tufrdis
( sufran
Three Imperfecta :
Tsufriera, sufriese, sufrirfa n
Sing. < sufrieras, sufrieses, sufriraas J / migAt^
CsufricH, sufriese, sufriria f sAouTd^q
i sufri^ramos, sufri^semos, sufrirfamos C would suffer
Plur. } sufrierais, sufries^is, sufriri^s 1 &c,
\ sufriiran, sufriesen, sufririan J
, Pretcrperfect :
i haya sufri^o . . / Aave suffered, ice.
Sing. < h£yas
fhdya
haydmos sufrido • We Aave suffered, &c.
or
rhayar
Plur. < hayai
^ hayar
ais
an
First and Second Preterplup^rfect :
(huviera or huviese
Sing-. < huvieras or huvi^ses
\1
I Aad suffered.
(.huviera ^r huviese i f 'il^ ! ^^ sAould
C fauvieramos or huviesetnos r** ^^°^*\ kave suffered,
Plur. < huvierais or huvifisexs I j &c.
C huvieran or huvi^sen } v
80 Ti^e ELEMENTS of
First Future :
Tsufri^re . . 1 shall or will have suffered^
.S/«^, < sufrieres ^ &c,
(^ sufri^re
C sufri^remos • We shall, &c.
Plur. •? sufriereis
^ sufrieren
Second Future :
C huviere sufrido, . / shall or will have suffered^
Sing, ^huvi^res &c,
( huviere
C huviefemos sufrido, We shall, 8cc,
Plur. •? huviereis
(^huvieren
Infinitive Mood.
Present, sufrir To suffer
Preterperf. hav6r sufrido To have suffered
Future^ hav6r de sufrir To suffer hereafter
Gerund, sufriendo Suffering
Part. Pass. sufrido Suffered. .
Observe, That all the other regular Verbs of the
' third Conjugation are conjugated in the same manner
as the above Verb sufrir; such as, subir^ to go up ;
aburrh\ to molest; acudir, to come, to apply, 8gc.
The Participle Passive of the following Verbs is
irregular; viz. escrlbir^ to write; escrito^ written;
abrir, to open; abierto, opened; cubrir^ to cover,
cubi6rtOy covered ; descuhrir, to discover ; descubi^
irtOy discovered ; encubrir, to conceal s tncubierlo^
concealed, Sgc.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation in ir;
are, Venir, To come.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense:
5v6ngo I come
vienes Thou comest
viene He comes
venimos We come
Jvenimos
venis
vicnen'
Plur. < venis Ye come
They come.
l^xti^x-
, . the i^PAXlsB Gu^AttMAll. 81
Preterimperfect :
' f venia / did come
Sing, < veiiias Thou didst come
l^ venia He did come^ &c.
fveniarnds
P/ttrr < venias
^^venian
Ficst Prctcrperfect; ;
ryine I came
Sing. < veniste Thou earnest
(^vino He came
{ventmos We came
venisleis Ye came \
vinieron T^hey came.
Second and Third Perfects :
{he or hdve veaido, . . / have come, &c.
has
ha
fh^mos ventdo, • . . fPe have come^ &c»
Plur. < haviis ' '
^han
Prcterpluperfect :
fhavia venldo, • • ^ ^^^ come^ &c.
Sing. < havias
l^havia
rtiiaviambs' venido, . We had come^ &c*
Plur. < haviais
\,havian
First Future :
{yendre • . / shall^ or will come^ &c.
vendras
vendra
{vendremos • We shall, &c.
vendr6i^
vendriii
Observe, That formerly they used to say likewise
"oenre/m this first Future; bat it is only found in
old books now.
G StcoxA
<2 Tht ELEMENTS of
Second Future:
he de venir • • / must cvme, &c.
^ he de venIr • .
Sing. < has de v^nir
t ha de venir
i h^mos de venir . . JVe must come^ &c.
PluT. < haveis de venir
t han de venfr
The Third and Fourth as in the other Verbs,
Imperative Mood.
o. fventu Come thou
^"(S** i venga el Let him come
[vengamos nos Let us come
Plnr, < venid vos Come ye
tvcngan ellos Let tnem come.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
(que) C venga . . . / may come, &c.
Sing. < vengas
. (venga
^ vengamos . • tVe may come^ &c.
Plur. ^ vengais
^vengan
Three Imperfiects :
Tvlniera, viniese, vendria ' \
Sing. < vinieras, vinieses, vendrias § ^ ^^S^^t
t viniera, viniese, vendria ^could^ should
5vinieranios» vinieseroos, vendriamos I or would
« .«r . V vinierais, vinieseis, vendriais V come^ &c.
t vinieran, vini6sen, vendrian y
Anciently they used to say likewise in the third
Imperfect venria, but now it is quite obsolete.
Preterperfect :
hiya venido, , • . / have come^ &c»
Hng. «J h^yas .
haya
i faayamos yenido, . • We have come, j&c*
Plur. < hayiis
( hayan
First
(que)
Sin£.
/^e Spanish Ghammar. 83
First and Second Preterpluperfect :
5fauviera or huviese >» f
--„^. . huvieras 0r huvies^s I' I had come.
( huviera or huviese > venidoi ®^ ^ ^f^ould
have come^
i huvieramos or huviesemos
Plur. •^ huvierais or huvieseis
^ huvieran or huviesen
First Future :
C yinjere . . / shail or will come^ &c.
Sing. <.vini^res
f viniere '
C vinieremos . Wi shall. &c,
Plur. < vini^reis
^vinieren • .
Second Future :
i huviere venido, • ' • / shall have come, &c*
Sing. <huvicres
( huviere
i huvieremos venjdo, • fVe shall have epme, &c.
Plur. < huvi^reis
(huvi^ren
Infinitive Mood,
Pres. venir To come
Perf. haver venido To have come
Fut. haver de venir " To come heret^Ur
Gerund. viniendo Coming
Part. Pass, venido Come.
The compounds of this Vetb *otnir ate declined
in every respect, in all Moods and Tenses, as their
primitive; as revenir^ to return; convenir^ Xo agree;.
sobreveniTy to arrive; devenir, to become, which
make revetigOyConvengo, sobrttSingOy devingo^ in tire
Present of the Indicative Mood, &c.
The Irregular Verb decir, To say.
Indicative Mood.
Present :
C<lfg^ J say
Sing. < dices Thou sayest "
t dice He says
5dec(mps We say
^decis Ye say
/dicen They say . ^ ..
. G 2 1?\^U\-
-84 I%e? ELEMENTS of
. Preterimperfect :
rdecia t • Ididsay,&c»
Sing. < decias
( decia .t.
Cdeciamqs . Wi did say^ &c»
Plur. < deciais
(decian
First Preterperfect:
^d^xe I said y
Sing, <dixfste Thou saidst
(.d^o He said
C diximos Wc said
Plur. < dixisteis Ye said - . ,
X, dix^ron They said.
Seix>nd and Third PreterperCects :
C he or hiive dicho / have said
Sing. < has dicho Thou hast said .
t ha dicho ^e has said
C h^mos dicho ^ ff^e have said
' Plur. < hav^is dicho Ye have said '
t han dicho Thiy have said.
\
Preterpluperfect :
C havia dicho, • • • / had said, &c.
Sing, ^havias
^ havia
i haviamos dicho, . . IFe had said^ 8cc.
Plur. < haviais
Shavian
• First Future : '
r dir6 I shall or will say
Sing. X'dir&s Thou shali or wUt say
(^ dira He shall ox will say
{ diremos We shall ox-will say
Plur. ^ direis Ye shall or will say '
^ \ diran They shall m will say.
Second Future :
h6 de decir • . I am io say^ or / must say^ &€»
Sing. Z has de decir
i h€ de decir
mg. < has de decii
^ ha de decir
C h^mos de decir ; We are to. say^ &c*
Plur. < hav^is de decir
( han ^e decir
- 1
Ixft^ti^Uvc
rAp Spanish Grammai^ 9S
Imperative Mood. , •
«•_ ^ Cditii Say thou
• ^' idigaer .Let kirn s^y
Jdigamos nos Let us say
.decidvos Say ye
(.dl^anellos Let them say.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods. -
%
Present :
diga . . . / may say^ &c.
dfgas
.djga
dig&moi . • We may jay ^ &c.
{dig&mi
digais
digan
* Preteriroperfect :
Ydix^ra, dixese, diria \
Sing* < <ilixeras» dix^ses, dirias I I mighty
( dixera, dixese, diria I eoutJ^ t^ulJ^
, rdixeramos, dixesemos, diriamos / ox should say^
Plur. < dixerais, dix^seis, diriais I &c.
/^dix^ran, dixesen, dirian )
Preterperfect :
i haya dicho, • • / have said^ &c.
Sing..<hi,yzs
(haya
^ hayimos dieho, • We have said, &,c.
Pluu < hayais
(hayan
The two Preterpluperfects :
C huvi^ra or huvicse dicho, - . / hadjaid, or should
Sing. < buvi6ras {7r,huvi£s«s have said, &c;
t huvi^ra or huviese
C huvi^ramos or huviesemos dicho, We had said, &c.
Plur. < huvierais or huvieseis
f^huvi^ran or htivi6sen
First Future :
i dixere . • . L shall or will say, &c.
i ^ixere
CHxifemos « : We shall, &c.
JP/«r. < dix6reiif
C^dixcren
G 3 ^tcotv^
B6 TAe ELEMENTS of
Second Future :
fhuviere dicho, . • I shall have said ^ Sec »
Sing. < huvieres
Lhuviere
fhuvieremos dicho, • We shall ^ Sec.
Plur. < haviereis
I huvi^ren
Infinitive Mood.
Pres, dccir To say
Perf. haver dicho ' To have said
FuU hav6r de declr To have to say^ to say hereafter
Gerund^ ' dici6ndo Saying
Part. Pass, dicho Said.
Observe, that the compounds desdecir^ to unsay,
and contradecir^ to contradict, are in all points con-
jugated like decir ; but bendeciVy to bless, and malde-
qir^ to curse, make in the Participle Passive bendito^
blessed, and maldilo^ cursed. Formerly they said
hendecido and maldecido^ but it is now quite out of
use, and only said by country people, S^c.
The Irregular Verb ir, To go.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
v6i ^ S^
Thou goest
He goes ,
We go
They go*
Preterimpcrfect :
iba • . • 1 did go^Scc.
Ciba • . •
Sing. < ibas
(iba
ribamos . . We did go^ See.
Plur. <ibais
(iban
Ywix
the SPANISH Grammar. Vt
First Prctcrperfect :
rfui I went
Sing. < fuiste Thou wentctt
\iw He went
ffuimos We went
Plur. < fnisteis Te went
^fueron They went.
Second and Third Preterperfects :
or huve ido, .. / have gone^ &c.
Sing* -< has
ing. < has
{'h^mosido, • • . Wehave gone^icc*
'have is
^han
Preterplupcrfect :
fhavia ido, • • / had gone^ &c.
^ Sing. < havfas
(.havfa
{haviamos ido, • We had gone^ &c.
haviais
havian
First Future:
{iriE • • • I shall or will gOy &.C.
iris
iri
' firemos . • We shall, &c.
Plur. < ireis
i,ir&n
Second Future:
he de ir • • / am to go] or / must go, &c.
Sing.
\
I
f hede ir
ing, < has de ir
l^ha de ir
fhcmos de ir . We are to go, &c.
Plur. < have is de ir
^han de ir
The other two Futures as in the First Conjugation.
Imperative Mood.
o. fv6tu Go thou
' ^^""S' \viyael Let him go
I vayimos nos Let us go
Plur. < id vos Go ye
tviyan cllos ^Let them go.
G 4 ?>\x>%\ieL\^^
.jiA,^^.A.«A.(dtdHrikM^Mb*^k. 1 '' ^
* I
I •
88. The ELEMENTS of
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
C v4ya * . • / may go^ &c.
Sing, < viyas . . '
^ vaya
^'vayamos • i. We may go/ &c,
Plur: V vay&is
(^vfiyan * x
Preterimperfects :
r fuera, fu^se, iria • • . . / could^ should^ or
tSzn^, ^ fu^ras, fusses, irias would go /8lq.
(. fu6ra, fuese, iria
rfueramos^ fu6semos, iriamos We could, 8cc. •
Plur» < fuerais, fueseis, iriais -
(fueran, fuesen, irian '
Preterperfect :
rhayaido, . . I have gone, Scci
Sing. < hayas ,
Chaya . •
C hayamos ido, : We kai^e gone, $cc.
Plur. < hayais
thayan
Preterpluperfects : •
C huvtera or huviese ido, . • . / had gdne, or
Sing. < huvier^s ^ rhuvieses / should hazft
( huviera or huviese gpr^y &c.
C huvieramos or huviesemos ido, . Jre k(t'd, &c.
Plur. < huvicrais or huvieseis
( huvieran os huviesen
First Future:
C fuere . . . / shall or will go, &c.
• Sing. <fueres
X C fuere
ffu^remos ^ . We shall, itc.
Plur. < fuereis
^ f ueren
• Second Future :
^huviereido, .. . I shall have gone, 8lc.
Sing. < huvi^res
thuviere
^ C huvi^remos ido, . We shall have ^ne^ &c.
P/ttr. < hiiviereis
(huvieren
,1
the Spaihish Grammar.
Present^ ir ' ' * To £0
Perfect i hav6r ido Ta nave gone
Future, hav6i:^de ir To go hereafter
Gcrundt yendo Going
Part. Pass, ido Gone
The Irregular Verb oir, To hear.
Indicative Mood.
Presfeiit Tense.
•
roigo I hear
$ing. -^ 6ycs Thou hearest
^ 6ye He hears
i oimos We hear
Plur. < ois Ye hear
(^oy6n . They hear.
Prctcrimperfect :
/ did hear^ &c.
Sing.
89'
Toia • • • .
ing. < oias
tofa
We did hear, &c.
/•
roiamos • • •
Plur. ^oiaig
toian
First Preterpcrfect :
i 01 I heard
Sing. < oiste ' Thou heardest
f oy6 jy<f A^flr//
r oimos We heard
Plur. ^ oisteis '^e heard
\^ oycron They heard*
Second and Third Preterperfects :.
he or hiive oido, . / have heard^ &c.
iSin^. «{has
ha
r h^mos oido • • • Wc have heard^ &c.
Plur. } haveis
. * (tan
Preterpluperfctt :
fhavia oido, . • . / had ke4rd, &c.
havias
hayia
i havfamos oido^ » . We had hefird, &c.
Plur. < haviais
f havian
Y\\\\.
. ■■ i
90 TXe ELEMENTS of
\
t .
First Futere :
fqir^ . . • / shall^ or will hear^ &c»
oiris ^
oira
i oiretnos . • We skall^ &c.
Plur, < oir^is
(oiran
Second Future :
he de oir . . J must hear^ &c.
£ he de oir . •
Sing. < has de oir
( ha de oir
C hemos de oir . We must heat^ &c«
Plur. ■? have is de oir
(^ han de oir
The Third and Fourth as in other Verbs.
Imperative Mood.
«; foyeta Hear thou
^' Lojg? el Let him hear
{oigamos nosdtros Let us hear
Old vos6tros Hear ye
oigan ellos Let them hear.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
(que) Coiga . • . I may hear, 8cc.
Sing. <oigas
(oiga .
£ oigamos . • We may hear, &c.
flur. < oigais
toigan ,
Three Treterimperfects :
Toyera, oy^se, oirfa • . I mighty could,- should.
Sing. < oy^ras, oyeses, oirias or wouid hear, &c.
(oyera, oy£se, oiria
C oyeramos, oyesemos, oiriamos We might, &c.
P/fir* < oyerais, oyeseis, oiriais
(oy^ran, oyesen, oirian
Preterpcrfect :
C haya oldo» • . • / have heard, &c.
Sing. <h£yas
C hay&mos oido, • • We have heard, &c.
Plur. < hayiis
(biyan
the Spanish Giiammaiu 91
Preterpluperfects :
f huvi6ra or huvi6se oido, . . / kad heard^ or /
' Sing. < buvieras or huvieses have heard^ &c.
Q buviera or huvieses
i huvieramos or huviisemos oldo, We iad, &c. *
ftur. < huvierais or huvieseis
(huvieran or huviesen
First Future :
C oyere • • . / shall ot will hear, &c.
Sing. < oyeres ♦
foy^rc
C o^eremos • « fFe shall^ See.
Plur. <oyercis
(oyeren
** Second Fixture :
C huviere oido, • • . / shall haxfe heard^ &c.
Sing. < huvieres
^ huviere
C huvieremos oido, • • We shall^ Sec.
JPlUr. -^huviereis
(^huvi6ren
lufinitive Mood.
Present^ oir To hear
Perfect f haver oido To have heard
Future^ haver de oir To hear hereafter
Gerund^ oyendo Hearing
Part, Active^ oyente He who is hearing
Part. Pass. oido Heard.
The Irregular Verb hcrir, To wound, to strike, to hurt.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense : t ,
rhi^ro I wound
Sz;?^. <hieres Thou woundest .
t hiere He wounds '
C herimos We wound
Plur. < herii Ye wound
thieren They wound.
■ Imperfect :
t heria . , • . / did wound^ tec.
Sing^ < herias
/ t heria
heriamos . • We did wound, &c»
Plur. -Jhcriaii
herian
y
92 The ELEMENTS of.
• First Preterperfcct :
iheri •. • « I wounded^ Ike.
Sing. < heriste
( hirio
Sherimos • .We zvoundid, &c.
heristeis
hirieron
Secpncl Preterperfcct :
he herido / have wounded^ &c«
has herido, &Cm^
Preterpluperfect :
havia herSdOy £^r< I had wounded^ &c.
First Future :
^herire . . . / shall or will wound, &c.
Sing. < heriras
f^ heriri
. ^ rheriremos • • JVe shall, &.c.
Plur. <herireis
(herir&n
Second Future :
he dc herir, &c^ I must wound, &c.
The Third and Fourth as in other Verbs.
Imperative Mood.
«. fhicretu Wound thou
^* i^hieracl '■> Let^him wound
rhiramos nosotros Let us wound
Plur. < herid vos6tros Wound ye
(;,hieran ellos Let J hem wound.
Subjunctive arid Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
(que) rhiera . . . I may wound. Sac.
Sing. <hitos
{ birdmos . , We may wound, &c.
Plur, <hirais
(hie ran
Preterim perfects :
'{ hiriera, hiri^se, heriria. . .
Sing. < hirieras, hirieses, heririas
(hiriera, hiri^se, heriria-
Chii^l^riniot, hlriesernos,,heririamodf "' i^^uia
Plur. ^hjrj^rais, hiricseis, herirjais ; , I ®'^""^* ^^•
( hirieran^ hiriesen, heririan . J .
A
I could, should,
or would
«' -* 41
Fret|9rperfect ; /
Preterpluperfecti :
huviera or huvi6se herido, &c. I had or should have wounded^ *
• Tirst Future : ' . &c.
rhirjcre . . . I shall or will wound ^Scc^
Sing, < hirieres
^ hiri^re
C hiri6reraos . • . fFe shall^ &c.
Plur. < hiriereift « .
^hirieren
Second Future':
heri6re huvido, &c. I shall have zpoui^(£sd, &c.
Infinitive Mood.
Present^ herir . To wound
Perfect f haver herido To have wounded
Future^ hav6r de herir To wound hereafter
Gerund^ hiriendo Wounding
J^art^ Pass. herido Wgundedi
The Irregular Verb doruiir, To sleep.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense:
^ d u^mo / sleep
Sing. < ducrnics Thou sleefest
(^ duerme He sleeps
C dormimos We sleep
Plur. < doriti* Ye sUef^
^ duermen They sleep,
Preterkhpcrfect :
jf dormia / did sleep
Sing. < doriQ^as Thou didst Sh^ep
f^ dormia - He did sleep .
f dormiamo^ We did sleip
Plur. < doroiiais Ye did steep
Q dornuan Tkey did steep.
; First Preterperfect :
rdormi J slept
Sing. < dormiste Thou sUepsi ,
I durraio He slept
C dormimog We slept
Plur. < dormisteis Ye slept
fdurmieron Theysle/^.
I •
94 7)i<? ELEMENTS o/
Second and Third Preterperfects :
r h^ or buve dormldo, • / Aave slept^ &c.
Sing* J has
rh6ni08 dormido • , • We have sUpt^ &c.
Plur. } hav£is
(,han
Preterpluperfect :
C havfa dprmido, • • / had sUpi^ &c.
Sing. -? havfai
( havia
rhaviamos dorniido, . We had slept^ &c«
Plur. ^havlais
(havian
First Future:
C donnir6 • . / shall or will sleeps &c.
Sing* < dormiris
/ dormira
c dormiremos . Wcshall^Scc.
Plur. < dorniir6i§
(dormiran
Second Future:
f h6 de dormlr . . • I am to sleeps or /
Sing. < has de dormir must sleeps &c*
( ha de dormir
C h6mos de dormir • . fTe are to sleeps &c.
Plur. 1 haveis de dormir
' han de. dormir
The Other Futures as in the other Verbs.
Imperative Mood,
«• / du^rme tu • Sleep thou
^* \ duerma el Let him sleep
{durmamos nosotros Let us sleep
dormid vos6tros Sleep ye
duerman ellos Let them sleep*
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
{duerma . . / may sleeps &c.
duermas
du6rma
Sdurmimos . fFe may sleeps &c.
durm&is
duermatt
TUcce
the Spanish Grammar. 95
Three Prcterimpcrfccts ;
^durmi^ra, diirmiese, dormiria ^
Sing. < durmieras, durmieses,' dormirias
C durmiera, durmiese» dormiria
r durmieramos,durmi^ino8» dormiriamos
Plur» < durnii6rais« durmieseis, dormiriais
f durmieran, durmiesen, dormirian
/ mighty
wouldf
or should
sleep.
First Future:
{h^ya dormidoy • • / have slept, &c.
hiyas
haya
i hayimos dormido, • We have slept, &c/
/ had slift^
or / could,
or should
have sleptj
&c.
Plur. ^ hayais
(faayan
Two Prelcrpluperfects :
Shuviera or huviese ^
huvi6rag or huvieses I
huviera or huvi6se \ j^j-mj^Q
€ huvieramos or huviesemos
Plur, < huvi^rais or huvieseis
( huvieran or huvi^sea ^
# *
Second Future :
{durmiere • . / skall or zoill sleep, &c*
durmieres
durmiere ,
{durmieremos • ^ ihall^ &.c.
durmiereis
durmi^ren
Second Future :
{huviere dormido, • . / shall or will have
huvieres > slept, &c.
huviere
fhuvierenfios donhido, . • fFe shall, &c.
Plur. < huvi^reis
^,huvi6ren '
Infinitive Mood.,
Pres. dormir - To sleep
Perf. haver dormido' To have slept
Put. haver de dormir To sleep hereafter
Gerund, durmiendo Sleeping
Part. Active^ dorroi^nte Sleepers
Part. Pass. dormido Slept
The Irregular Verb morif^ To die.
Indicative' Mood.
Preaent Teme:
muero IJie
Sing. ■{ mains thou ^st
miiere He diet •
morimos ' We die
mat'u Ye die
niu^rep Tkey die.
Preterpcrfcct :
moria / did die
Sing. ^ morl^p ' Thou didjt die
moria He did die
moriaraos We did die
moriais Ye did die
morian They did die,
First Prelerpcrfect :
morf / died
Sing. < moriste Thou diedsl
' ' He died
morimos We died
morigtis . Ye died
murierpn They died.
Second Pr<eterper£ect :
muerto / am dead
Sing.
Sing,
ires muerto
Thou art dead
c> muerto
He is dead
s6mos muerto
We are dead
s6is muertos
Ye are dea4
son mu6rtos
They are dead.
Preterplupcrfect:
era muerto
I was dead
erasmu^no
Thou wast dead
era muerto
He was dead
iramos muertoi We were dead
erais muertos
Ye were dead
eran mufirtoi
They were dead.
Ffrst
'mure :
iiiarir£ . .
I shallot will die, &
morirSs
morirfi
moriremos .
We shall, 8cc.
morir^ii
morirfLn
the SiPANisH GaAMMAR. . 97
Second Future :
must die^ &c«
X The de morir . . . /
Sing* < h£s de morir
t^ha^ de morir
{h^nios de morir * . We must Jit, &c.
baveis de morir
han de morir
Imperative Mood.
«• ^ fihu^retu Die thou
^^"^' \ mu6ra el Let him die
{muramos nos6tros Let us die
mdrfd vos6tros Die ye
mu6ran eiloi; Let thiffi die.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
(que) fmuera . . . I may die ^ See.
Sing. < mueras
t.mu6ra
" fmurkmos /. . We may die^ Sec.
Plur. < murais
V^mueran
Three Imperfects :
{muriera, muri&e, moriria
muricras, rouri^ses, moririas A I could
muriera, muri£3e, moriria fshould^or
fmurieramos, muriesemos, moririamos Y would die ^
Plur. < muri6rais, murieseis, moririais \ . &c.
^murieran, muri6sen, moririan
Preterperfect :"
{sea muerto . . .* I am dead^ Scc»
seas
sea
{s6imos inuertos • . We are dead, &c.
seals
scan
Two Preterpluperfects :
{.fu^ra, fu6se muerto • • • ; / zvas dead, &c.
fu6ras, fu6ses
fuera, fuese
{fu6ramo8, fu^semos muertos • We were dead^ &c.
fuerais, fueseis
fueran, fu6sei;;i
» H ^irst
I
I .
^ FAe ELEMENTS.©^
First Fuwire!
< imiri^rt • . . / yftaU or ikill die^ &c.
iSiii^.<^murieres
(muriere
^tnuri^remos . • WtshitU-oxmilldie^icc*
Plur. < muricreis
(muri^ren
Second Faturi :
fuere muetto, &c. I shall be deadt &c«
Infiniti\re Mood. • , •
Present^ , morir To die
Perfect ^ s6r muerto To be dead
Future^ faav^r de ifiorir ^ To die hereafter
Gerund^ marie ndo Dying
. , Part.^Passive muerto Dead
The Irregular Verb servir, To seroei
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense :
5sirvo Iserve
_--o_.sirves Thouservest
(.sirve He serves
' i servimos fVe serve
P/«r.< servis Ye serve
(sirven They serve.
Pret^rinverfeot :
* (^ivia . . . I did serVit 8cc.
Sing. < servias
t servia
^ serviamos . • W^d did stPve^ &c«
Plur. < serviais '
^Servian
Tim Pr6t»rperf«ct :
^ servi . • . / served^ -ice.
Sing. ^ serviste
(.sirvio
• ^^sefvfmos . * Wt ser&ed^ ^<i%
Plur'. < servisteis
(sirvicron
Sedbid
the SpAinrsfi <jJU;MirA«. -^
Second Pretfipitrfiect :
{rh6 servido, • • « I have served^ tec.
Sing.<hk%
Ihi
liemos lervido, • . Wt hoot served, &c. '
liavei«
?han
Prcterpluperfcct :
fhavia ^ervido». .. ^ I had served. See.
\ iSiff^. < havias
\ ha via
{haviamos servido, • fFe had nrved, &c.
haviais
liavkn
First Future :
Tservire I shall or will serve
Sing. < serviris Thou shstlt or n;t7/ j/roe
(^ servira He shall or will serve .
Sservirecios #% jA^ or tidll 9erve i
•servireis Ye shati or will serve
servir&n They shall or toiH serve* '
Second Future :
\ ^he de servir, (ffc. J musi snut. &£•
Third Future :
havia de servir, &c. tfvas to serve, &c.
. ' Jouiih Future.:
havre de servir, &c. ^ I shall be oiiigediv eeme^icc^
Imperative MoodL '
«. fsirvetu Serve 4hou
•^'"^•^sirvael Let them serve
i sirvamos no&6tro3 Let us serve
Plur. < servld vos6tro8 Serve ye
^ wucan ellos LetJihMJiervf.
Subjunctive and Optative Moods.
Present Tense :
«
(we:) X^Srva • . . / may scrvt, &c.
^^»lg:•^ xirvas
it^irva
iT sirvamos . • Wk may sef^ftf^c.\
jP(iir«< drvais
}^4irvan
^^V3r3«
..^ '\.
1<J0 JAe ELEMENTS q/"
Three Imperfects :
Tsirviera, sirviese, serviria ,
Sing* < sirvi^ras, sirvieses, servirias i I might, could,
^^sirviera, sirviese, serviria f should or
r sirvieramos, sirvi^semos, servirjamos /" wouid serve^
P/ttr.< sir vie raisy sirvieseis, serviriais \ &c.
^sirvieran, sirvi^scn, servirfan
^ Pretcrperfect :
{biya lervido, • • 1 have served^ &c.
h4ya$
hiya
rbay^mos servido, . We have served^ &c,
Plur. < hayiig
i^hayan
Preterpluperfect : ^ .
rhuviera, huviese servido, . . / had or should
Sing. ^ huvieras, huvieses Aave served^ &c.
l_huviera, huviese
rhuvieramos, huvi^semos servido, . We had, &c.
Plur. < huvierais, huvieseis
^^huvieran, huvi6sen
First Future :
{sirvi6re . . . / shall or will serve, &c.
sirvieres
sirviere
{sirvi^remos . . We shall or will serve, &c»
sirviereis
sirvieren
Second Future :
huvicre servido, &c. I shall have served, Scq.
Infinitive Mood.
Present, servir To serve
Perfect, haver servido To have served
Future, haver de servir To serve hereafter
Gerund, . sirviendo Serving
Part. Act. sirviente He who serves
fart. PasSt sirvido Served.
I
the Spanish GKAMifAR. TOl
The foDpwing Verbs are conjugated after the
same manner a:s the^ Verb servir, through all th«
Moods and Tenses.
concebir to conceive seguir io follow^
gemir to sigh renir io scold
medir ' to measure vcsdV to dress .
pcdlf to ask relr to laugh
perseguir to prosecute
Observe, That seguir and its compounds make
^igo in the Present Indicative Mood^find siga^ sigas,
siga, &c. in the Subjunotive Mood.
The Verbs elegir^ Jingir^ ungiry tochuse^tofeien,
to anoint,'make dyo^Jinjo^ injo^ in the Present In-
dicative Mood ; and elija^ fi^j^i inj^^ in the Sub- .
junctive ancT Optative.
Salir^ to go out. Present Indicative, SAlgo, sales,
salCj salimoSy saliSySikn, Imperative, Sal^ sa^a, salgS-
moSy salidj s&lgan. Subjunctive and Optative, S&lga,
salgaSyShlga^salghmoSySalgdiSySalgan. The rest regular.
Cofiducivy to conduct. Cond^zcOy cond^cesy conducey
conducimosy conducisy condiicen. Preterperfect, con-
duxCy conduxisiCy cond&xOy conduximoSy conduxisteis,
cmiduxeron. Present Optative and Subjunctive,
CojiduzcGy condHzcaSy &c. Pretbrirfiperfects, Cow-
duxerUy conduxescy &c. Future, Conduxire. In the
same manner are conjugated
introducir to introduce traduclr to translate
reduclr to reduce product r to pro4uce
inducir to induce
Of Verbs Passive.
S6r oido, To he heard.
Indicative.
('56ioldo . . ^ lamheardy&c.
~ Sing.< eres oido
V es oido
Ss6raos oido« /. . We are heard^ &c.
SQis oidos
.««noidoi
^ H J \m^«i^^^N^
108 The ELEMENTS ef
Imperfect : \
CttzoiAo . . . t WU5 heardf 8cc»
A'»^.< eras oido
( era oklo
C frames oidos . . We were htard^ &ۥ
Plur, •? 6rais oidos
(^ranoidos
Preterperfect :
r fui 6ido • • / have been heard^ &c.
9in;^» ^ fufste oido
f foe cffifo
€ fuitno9 Oidos . We kaw beew heard, &c.
P/iiT.^ fafsteis oido»
f fn^ron oMos
And ID through alt the Tenses and Moods.
Reciprocal Verbs.
Irsc, To go (may.
The Indicative Mpod.
Present Tenge :
!flae voy /j^^ tf»;ay
te vas Thou goesi
se va Jffe goes
{110$ vitnos fTe go
OffTais J^^^<^
9< van They ;#.
Prewrpluperfect :
- Cme fba I did go
Sing* X te ibas TA<?» ^t^/ ^^
(se Iba He did go
Cnosibamos We didga
Plur. < OS ibdis Ye did go
( se iban They did go.
Preterperfect :
me fai I went
Sing, ^ te fuiste Thou wentest
se fue He weni
nos fuimos We went
went
They went*
Preterpluperfect : ] ,
me b^via ido / had g&ne^ &€# ' /
te haviaa ido^ &c. '
^ Tnos fuimos We
P/iir.< OS fuisteis Yt
\%^ fueron Jlii
the Saavjisq G^mmai^ IQS^
First Future :
{in€ irtf / skall of wiUga
te iras Thsu shaUoXf wilt go
se ira i/^ s halt or will go
fnos iF^mos WcshaJl or iv/// ^(i
&»^.|
P/ur.< OS ireig Ye shall or will go
\%t ir4n 7%^^ shallot win go.
Imperative Mood..
v^te Go tioH
vdya se Z^ ^t>« go
r vaysuno& noa Z^A us g4
Plur.< ido« / Go ye
l^y^ytaa se Xf/ /A^mi ga.
And so oa through the other TcBSies.
Iikpersonul Active .
Convenlr, To be convenient.
Indicative.
Present^ convi^ne h is conxjtnxeni
Imperfecta convenia // was convenient
Muiun^ coov^ndr^ It skajlliyxwHlibefowfinien^
Jmferativet, conying^ JUt i4 }e conveviienfe
* '
Aad so ivk the; third Person of the other Moods.
.Observe, That this verb convenlr is given here as
impersonal, only in this signification, of being conve-
nient ^ 01 proper ; for convenir, when it signifies /o
agree^ has all Us Persons.
Of the Impersonal Passives.
E^ribirse, Ta be written.
Indicative.
Present, escribe se Ji is written
Imperfecta escribia se It was zaritten
Sieona Perf. te H9 escnto / ^
rhperf. ■■ M havia cscrfto /; Aai i4tn wfitien
fimrn. «iwt>iri»e^ ft wW if mitpin. ^ .
H 4 KKv«t
"^
104 2i5tf ELEMENTS 0/
After the same manner are conjugated
Decirse, To be said.
Se dice or dice se // is said.
Referirse, To be related.
Se reficre or. re56re se , It is related, .
The Verbs of this Conjugation are likewise con-
jugated with the Verb estar^ and the Gerund ; as,
£si6i escribi^ndo / am writing
Est6i oyendo I am hearing
£st6i vmiendo / am coming
£st6i gimiendo / am sighing
Estoi refiriendo / am relating
■ I
And so through all the Persons, Tenses, and Moods.
Of Adverbs.
An Adverb is a part of speech indeclinable,
without Gendei\ Number, or Case, and serves only
to declare the number or circumstances of the ao-
tlon or passion.
Example. — When I say Amote tiernamentej I love
hitn tenderly, the word tiernamente, tenderly, ex-
presses the circumstance of the Verb amar, to love.
There are several sorts of Ad verbs expressing the
, quality, quantity of time, S^c. as may be seen in the
followilig list.
Adverbs Df Quality.
* These Adverbs are derived in Spanish^ as in Englishi
from the Adjectives, and are formed by adding mente
to the Feminine Gender of Adjectives of two termi-
nations, and to the other Adjectives of one termina-
tion; as from bueno^ buenCy good, take the Feminine
buSna, and add mente to it, you shall have the Ad-
verb buenamente^ goodly, with goodness. From the
Adjectives of one termination, the Adverbs are
formed by adding mente; as from jfacilj easy ; cruSi,
cruel ; feliz, happy ; facilmente^ easily : cruilmente^
cxnelly; felizmentey happily ; ^altamente, highly;
bxtenamente^
^//^ Spanish Grammar. 105
buenamentCy or bieriy well ; hermosamente^ handsome-
ly ; Jierctniente, fiercely ; ftrozmfntt^ ferociously 5
santamente^ holily, &c. _
Adverbs of Quantity.
Mucho
much
Mas
more
Poco
littU
Menos
less
Demasiado'
too much
Hario
enough
Observe, That harto and demasiado must agree in
Gender with the Substantives, though they are ad-
verbs; therefore you must say, Aflrr/fll/^wtf, water
enough ; demasiada paciencia, too much patience, <§*c.
Adverbs of Time.
Ah6ra
Ahier
Antehier
Antes
Aiin
A menudo
Entonces
Siempre
now
yesterday •
the day before
yesterday
before
yet^ even
often
then
always
Repentemente suddenly
Temprano early
Adverbs of Plage.
Hoy^
Manana
Mucho ha
Poco ha
Luego
NuHca 1
Jamas /
Quando
Mientras
Tarde
A la tarde
tO'day
to-morrow
long sincii^
lately
directly
never
Aqui
Alii
Ahi
Ad6nde
Aca
Aculli
De d'6nde
* De aqui
De all!
D6ntro
En^
Fuera
Si
Cierto
Ciertamente
En verdtd
here
there ^
int his place
where
hither
yonder
from whence
from hence
from thence
within
in
out
Deiante
Detras
Aparte
Arriba
Abax.o
Cerca
Cabe
Junto
EnWnte
Lex 6s
Encima
Debaxo
when
whilst
late
in the evenings
before
behind .
aside
above
below
near
close by
adjoining
facing
f^^ off
^ upon
underneath.
Adverbs or Affirmation.
yes Verdaderamente truly
' truly Tambietn also
certainly A'ntes father,
in truth
O^
106
The EL.EMENTS of
Op Dehying.
No
Ni4a
Una vez
Dos vecefi
Trcs veccs
no^ or not
nothing
Ni
Tampdco
neither
neither.
Of Number.
once
twice
three times
Miichas veces often
P6cas veces seldom^
Amenudo often.
Oxal^
Porque
Que
D6nde
Ad6nde
Of Shewing.
He aq«i behold hers.
Of Encouraging.
£a, ea pues make ther^.
Of Wishing.
would to God I O si
Of Asking.
if I could bt
why .
what
where
whither
De donde
Qu&ndo
Como
Acaso . •
from whence
when
how
perhaps.
Of Doubting.
Quizi perhaps \ Por ventura peradventure.
Of Order.
Prim^ramcntc firstly
after
D^spues
Alfin
C6mo
Casi
Mis
M^dos
Junto
at the end
Of Likeness.
Assi
Tan, tanto
Of Comparison.
Al c£bo at the end
Finilmente in fine
A lo ultimo lastly^ Sgc.
as ,
almost
more
less
together
M6jor
Pe6r
sd
so muchf &c.
better
worse
A mont6nes in heaps. .
Nottf That tbe Adjectives are sometimes takeft
as Adverbs, and then they retain the Masculine
Gender ; as Primero *ooj/ alLi, first I go there.
. ' ' Of
tht Spakish Grammar. 10^
Of Conjunctions.
A Conjunction is a part of speech that joins
words and sentences together. Some Conjunctions
are copulative, as uniting words, and connecting
the sense; others are disjunct! ve, dividing the sense,
and only joining the expressions ; others are condi-
tional^ shewing the causes of things; others ration-
al or conchistve, which some call coHective or rela-
tive ; and others adversative.
Conjunctions Copulative are y and /, signifying
and. Y\% put before alt words excepting those that
begin with i, before which you must put e ; as, lti$
Eqx^Sles e ingUses^ the Spaniards and the Eng&^h ;
hs Francises e ItaHanos, the French and Italians;
cxmo^ as ; tdmbien, also.
Conjunctions Disjunctive are, ni, neither; Soru^ '
or, either ; ^i, either ; as, yd esto^ yd aquellOy either
this or that.
Causative are, porqtii^ why, wherefore, Sgc -.
Conditional ^i, if ;* dado que^ granting that.
Exceptive ; sinoy if not ; mas, but ; otramente,
otherwise.
There are others of another sort ; as^ d lo menos,
at least ; aunque, although ; todavia, notwithstand-
ing, nevertheless.
Of Prepositions.
A Preposition is a part of speech most commonly
set before a Noun, a Pronoun, or Verb ; as, deldnte,
del Rfy, before the King, Sgc. ^
Thefolbwing Prepositions govern the Genitive Case :
Antes^ before; as, dntes del i^lo, before day-break;
antes de escribir, before writing.
Deldnte, before ; as, deldnte de Dios, before God ;
de mi casa, before my house. ^ ^ • ^
Dentro, within; as, dintro de la iglena, wHhi» ^
'the church.
^108 The ELEMENTS of
Detr&Sy behind ; as, det7^as del palacio, behind ihc
palace. -
DebaxOy or b&xo^ under ; as, b&xo 4e la mesa hay un
perrOy under the table there is a (Jog; est&ba-deb&xo
de un arboly qmndo llovio, \ was under a tree when it
rained.
Encinia, upon; as, encima del agua^ upon the
water ; encima (k la mesa^ upon the table.
Al derred6r,mor rededovy about, round about ; as,'
al derredbr de la ciudhdy round about the city ; esth-'
ban al rededorde treinta^ they were about thirty.
CVrc^, near; as, Rochester, est a circa de Londres,
Rochester is near London.
Acircay concerning, near ; as, yo he de hablar can
vm acerca de un negocio particular y I must speak with
you concerning a private affair; los dias acerca de
Navidddy son m^i frioSy the Days about Christmas
are very cold,' or near Christmas.
Fueray out, or besides ; est&vofuera toda la noch^y
he was out all night ; fuera de hto^ hay m^cho mdsy
besides this, tjhere is much more*
EnfrentCy over- against, facing; as, en f rente demi
casay over-against my house; enfr6ntede la iglesia,,
facing the church.
PliEPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE.
f
AntCy before, in the presence; as, ahier parecio
ante m\ yesterday he appeared before me.
EntrCy among, between ; as, hay tnicha diffe7^encia
entre los dos, there is a great deal of difference be-
tween them two ; entre los hombres, pocospiensan antes^
dehablary among men, few think before they speak.
SobrCy upon; as, todo loque iengOy sobre mi lo lUvo,
all that I have I carry upon me^ or about mc.
SegAny according to ; as, seg&n* las leyes del riino^
according to the laws of the kingdom. •
Hastdy until, jeven to ; as, me pasearSy hast a las quA-*
irp de la tarde/l will walk until four o'clock inthe
afternoon ; hastainafiana, till to-morrow ; iri con vm
HcLsta
//r^ I^PANisH Grammar. 10^
hMta Madrid, I will go along with you as far a«
Madrid^ even to Madrid.
tIAcia, towards ; as, vive hucia el rio, he lives to-
wards the river, about the river.
Por^ for, by, through ; as, haga vm estopor amor
de DioSf do this for God's sake ; encontre mi amigo
^tmndo pass&ba por la calle, I met my friend when I
passed through the street; lo harepormipaldbrapor
mi vida^ por mifi, I will do it, by mj word, by my
life, by my faith.
En^ in ; as, espero y creo en Dios, I hope and bci
lieve in God.
Contra^ against ; as, hahla mucho ahiSr contra el
gobiernOy he spoke a great deal yesterday, against
the government.
Of Interjections.
An Interjection is apart of speech that discovers
tlie mind to be seized or affected with some pas-
sion, fis of joy, pain, admiration, <§"c. '
To express mirth they make use in Spanish of
A ; ^s, A que bienjugaremos, Ah ! how we will play.
To express, admiration, *calga me Dios, God help
me!
To express pain or grief, Ay de mi! Alas for me !
^ Wishing, oxali^ would to God, <§t. O; as, O
Diosl O dolor ! O God ! Q pain, S^c.
I _ — — ^ — I — — - — - — — — - —..■----■
Observations upon some Spanish expressions
and phrases* i
ALL languages have some peculiar turns, which
* cannot he expressed by the same words in another
tongue ; therefore I thought proper to say some-
thing about those words and phrases found in the
Spanish tongue.
In the first place, the Preposition des is inseparably
from some words, and is never to be used but in com-
position, as signifying nothing by itself; bu| being
joined to another word, it denotes ^privaition of what
theother signifies ; thus, konra ia^honour,'and rfe^A(?nra'
-..-■-V • -\
lit) The ELEME;NTS ^
b dishoncMir, or disgrace; dkflky good ibftUne;4»-
dichay misfortune. Des has tibe same e£6ect» irhfia
joined with Verbs; «s, ^^c/r, to make, to do;
deshacer, to undo; armar^ to arm; desdrmtar^ to
disarm.
£9^ signi&es coimmonly tX as m co&iy in the iiouse;
en la ealle^ in the street ; but in ^ome cases, it hsA a
iv«ry ftarticular meaning ; as, estar en cuerpo, signifj-
ing literally to be in body ; but the true sense of it
is, to be without either a coat or cloak, for a man ;
and for a woman; to be without a veil ; so that the
body is more exposed to view without an upper
garment. Estar €w jnemas^ literally, to be in legs,
signifies to be bare-legged ; that is, the legs exposed
without stockings.
Estdr en carnes, verbally, is to be in flesh ; but the
truemeanii]^ of it is, to be quite naked. Estar en
cUereSy to be in skin, signifies also to be stark-naked. •
When this Preposition €w is before an Infinitive an
Spanish y then it is an English Gexund; sls amsiste en
hablarbkn, it consists in sipeakiujo: well; but when it
is found before a Gerund, sigiii£es after^ and id in
English ; as, en cen&ndoy after supper, or at supper ;
^en coyijesshndo la verdMySiiicr you confess the4^th.
En signifies also as soon ; as, en acabinda^ ir£, as '$oon '
as I have done, I will go.; emUspertindo^ me taoan^
tare, when I awake, 1 will get up.
Hidalgo is a gentleman, a man of goodbirth, teii^
a contraction of hifo de algo, son of something;iJmt
is, of a person of note, or ^Femitrkable for something ;
not for much money, which in Spain does not make ^
a gentleman, but for something JaonourablCj as vir-
tue, learning, wisdom, or courage.
Vue^tra merced is generally contracted into mied
and ustedes in speaking, and in writing expressed liy
these letters, V. M. and K M. S. This is a polite ex-
pression, being always used when any oiviUtgr is
Cihewn, the Spaniards never saying tu, thou, to one
another, excepting a master to a servant, a fafher
to Jeiis ;diildi«n^ a brother to his brother, ilgjc, TJ^e
common
M^ Spanish G& AM MAB. ill
^XMmncni word, tberefore, in discourse betireeh peo»
pie of fasfafon or good breeding, is usiidior vuisira
fHtrcid ; wbidi expression is like Your IVorship la
EngUdi ; for in speaking to a nobleman in Spain
they use vuistra Senoria^ contracted into* a^^,
yonr Lordship ; vttestra ExceUinda^ contracted into
tnsendOj for jfour Excdkncy^ &c.
There isanotber respectful way of speaking, which
is, by calling a man by his name, though speaking
to him ; as Sea servido dc sent arse el SeHor Don Juan^
May it please Don John to sit down, Sgc. where we
may observe, that the word Dan is peculiar to the
Spamshy and was formerly only given to Knights and
|)ersons of distinction ; but now it is very common.
SenoTy 16 like the Latin Dominus^ either &>Qr L»rd^
and therefore equivocal; for they say &' SeSior^ Yes,
Sir, to the least gentleman, as, we do^Sirr to the King^
and to^ny other ; y'Ct Senar isa Lord : for though in
speaking we say, Senor Don Juan, SeSor Don Fedro^
yet a letter must not be superscribed jilSenSr Don
Pedro, unless he be a Lord; because then it im-
<^ plies dignity, and in common speaking it does Hot ;
so in speaikiog to say, Es un Sdior, or Esi un gran
^enoTj implies tfhst he is a Lard, or a great Lord.
However, in tibe beginning of a letter we use
JIfm S^or ntioy without giving the title of Lord,
-but only meaning My good Master j <ov 'Good Sir*
Fuiino, futina, zuHno, zmtana, or their diminu-
Xwz%,fulmUhyfuknkOfiiC.Mt words used to signify
a person without name, as, when they say such a
ooe ; the two sBrst being used to express two dis-
tinct persons, ^sis, ^such a one and such a one. The
fii^t of >them is always used, if only one person be
apok43n of i and the second never^ but when there
is occasion to mention two. Tbey are Ukewise
used in the Feminine Gender.
Observe, Thi* most of the Adwrbs formed of
Cbe Adjectives, are turned likewise ixkSpamshhjsHbi^
FrepQsttion ^&m, and the Substantive ; s^feHzmentc^ .
happily, is the same as conftHci^d, with happiness.;
atreo'idamtntt^
TAe ELEMENTS of
t^dversity
Advertir, adverticlo, to advise
Aflpxar,
Agaviiiar,
Agravar,
Agraviir,
Agujero,
Agujeta,
Ah!
Amarsar,
Ahorrar,
Ahoyir,
Ahuecar/
Ahumir,
ISO
Adiva,' 6 adive, n kind of
. African dog
Adivas, a sort ^ a quinsey
in beasts
Adivinir,adivino,f^c. to fore-
tell
AdjetivOy. adjective
Advenedizo,. 2a, outlandish
Adveniiriiento arrival ^coming
Adventicio, adventitious
Adverbioy ' adveii?
Adverso, ^dreTsidid,, adverse A A\6ve^
to spare
to dig notes
. to kQllow
to smoak
Ahaiir, to. shape as a spindlt
Ahuyentar, to put to flight
sweet basil
Albahdca,
Alcahazdr^
Alcaravin,
Alcarav^a,
Alcoh6l,
Alfahar,
to put in a cage
a heron^ a bird
carraway-seed.
antimony
traitor
a potter^ s shop
to loose
to bundle up
to aggrdvate
to injure
a hole
a point
interjection^ Ho-^l
to make bitter
Ahembrido, da, effeminate
Al\prrojar/ to bolt
Aherrumbrirse, to decay by
rusting
Ahi, * there
Ahidalgada, da, gentlemanlike
Abijar, ahijado, to beget as a
- / son
Ahilirse, ^ to be starved
Ahincar, Jo thrust
Ahitar, to surfeit
Ahogar, to choak^ to drown
Ahombrddo, da, manlike
Ahondar, to deepen^ to dive
Ah6ra, preseritly^ how
Aborcarf *to hang
Ahorcajdrse, to set astride
Ahorcajadas, straddling
Ahora)£r» to put upon.the last
Ahormagirse, to l(e blasted by
heat
fi^\\i]^, any furniture or jewel ^
Albam^l,
Aiharaca,
Alhab6ga,>
Alhacena,
Alheli,
Alhena^
Alh6lva,
Alfdmbra,
Alh6rre,
Alhu^ema^
AliquaAta,
Aliqu6ta,
Aliviar,
Alk6rines,
AhorquiiUr^ to put forks un^
der a tree or plant
a porter
an outcry
. majericen
a cupboard
a gillijlotuer
privet [a plant!
fenigreei
a carpet
a running'teuef
lavender
aliquant '
aliquot
to ease
alkerms'
Almarraxa, a glass bottle full
of holes
Almogaraves, t^eterdns
Almobada, apillow, a cushion
Almohiiret sublimate mercury
Almohaza, a curry comb
Almotaz6n, a clerk of the
market
Almoxarife, almoxarifazgo, a
receiver of duty ^ &c.
Almoxaya, a sort of measure
Al6xa, mjetheglin or mead
Alpha, the frit letter in Greek
Eloqu6hte, . ' eloquent
Altivo, va, proud
,^iorn4r, to put in the oven Alv6rja, alverjon, a kind of
pease
Ainphisbina,flx^^ ofserpenf^
ReeapituT&ciony'
>v
■V. »*>
the SPAjafisn Gbammae.
ilec^itul£cioii| a fecapitula^
tiov
Ax^fhor^^ajigurein rhetoric
An^trophe, an inversi§n
ADheiir, to desire with great
vehemency
Aniversirio; 4inniversary
Antechinos., plate chased
Antcver, to foresee
Antip6phora, ajigurein the-
• , toric
Antibachio, a measure in La-
tin^ versus
Amiquado, da, old, obsolete
Antojera» any thing, put be-
fore the eyes
Antuviar, to strike, to surprise
Aovdr, to lay eggs
Aparvar» to make a heap
Aphicas, vetches, tares
Aphelio, Aphelion
Apheresis, ajigurein rhetoric
Ahqbachonido, da, idle, lazy
Ap6phasis, apophasis
Apophisis, apophysis
Apoplexia, apoplexy
Aprebender, £efc. to conceive
AprovecKir, to improve
Aquadrillar, to conduct a
squadron of soldiers
Aquartelir, to quarter soldiers
Aquatil, living in the water
Aqueducto, an aqueduct
Aqueo, watery
Archive, an archive
Arffavi£s80, a storpiiy shower
Ari8toI6chia hart wort (an
- herb)
a trident ; also
a bird
a sort of pease
asphaltos
a cupper
ahorse mill
Arrcxaque^
Arvexas,
Aspbalto,
Atah^rre,
Ath6na,
Atalvina, sfsort of hasty pud-
121
io dress
to fold together
to attract
to drag in a slip
to^cr0ss
ta dare
Avadarse, to become for dab Ic
Avah^r, to warm one's hands
by the breath
Avalorir, to raise the value
Avantil, an apron
Adelante, or m2^s\exos,farth€r
Atayiir,
Auvillac/
Atraher,
Atrahillar,
Atrav«isar,
Atreversc,
Av^nzar,
Av4ro,
Avasallar,
Ave,
Avechiico,
Avecinar/
Avecindarse,
Avejiana, .
Av^na,
Avcnen4r,
Aventajar,
Aventar,
Aventura,
Avergonzar,
Averia,
Averigudr,
Averso, sa,
Avestruz,
Avezir,
Aviar,
Ayido,
Avieso, sa,"
Avilant62
Avillanarse,
Avinagrar,
Avion,
Avisar,
Aviso,
Avisp^r,
Avispa,
Avist^r,
Avitdr,
AvitualI4r,
dingl A^iykr^
to go forwards
covetous
to subduf
a bird
an useless bird
to come near
to inhabit
hazeLnut
oats
to poison
to exceed
to Unnnow'
adventure
to ashame
average
to vtrtfy
(averse,
an 0^ trick
to use, inure
to make ready
covetous
cross
boldness
to. become mean
to grow sour
a martlet (a bird)
to give notice
advise
to prick
a tvasp
to see a distance
to fasten q table
to victual
to revive
Avolcti^o^
* «
■'..,**"*
■■ ■■ m ^*
122 •
Ayolehgo,
AvutJ^rda,
The ELEMENTS of
a grandfath€r\sVR\x\iiAoh\i)atdix^
estate Buhera, '
Axercai^
Axedr6z,
Ax6njos,
Axf,
a kind of heavy
■ bird
winter savory
chess
wormwood
a sort of pepper
Axudr, household furniture
Azahdr, orange or lemon
flower
Azemila,
Azemita,
Aziago,
Azolvir,
mule ofbaggagi
bran hread
unlucky
to obstruct
B
Bahara,
Bahia,
Bahorrina,
Bahuno, na,
Bahurrdro,
ag»shawk
a haven or bay
a mean, thing
mean^ low
a bird catcher
Barahunda^ tumult^ confusion
Barahustir,/^ make way among
weapons
Bax^l, a vessel
Baxioy a shoal
Baxar. &c. to come down
Bax6D, a bassoon
Benevolo, la, well affected
a hog
a loop-hole
Buho, an owl
Buhoneria, toys
Buxeda, a grove of box trees
Buxerias, toys
Buxeta, a small perfume box
lucky
the foreman in
rowing
rush
Bienhadado,
Bogavante,
Boh6rdo,
Boqui hundido, a mouth sunk
in
Boqui vcxdc, an idle talker
Borrixa, borage (an herb)
Bov6da, a vault
Bovlno, na, of oxen
Boz^dal, a grove of box-trees
Brivo, va, brave
Priva, an early fig
Br6ve, short
Bnixula, sea compass
C.
scaffold
a corpse
a sort of measure
a skull
bald
a cloven cane
a reed
a caravan
a grave ^ a great
pit
carraway-seed
to cavil
a box
a bolt
the neck
the herb sperage
Chemistry
the gout in tne
hands
the root skirret
Chiromancia, foretelling by
the hanas
Ch6va, " a jack daw
Chrisma, chrism
Ciervo, a deer
CiTCMnvdMvyto entrench round
Circunvecino, na, n^ighbour^
ing
civile courteous .
harpsichord
gilliflower
a spinnet
a wooden pin ^
a nail
Cadahilso,
Cadaver,
Cahiz,
Calav^ra,
Calvo, va,
Canahdija,
Canavera,
Carivana,
Carcava,
Carvi,
Cavilir,
Caxa, axon,
Cerr6jo,
Cerviz,
CWtva,
Chimia,
Chiragra,
Chirivia,
Civil,
Cl&ve,
Clave 1, \
Clavicordio,
Clavija,
Clavo,
Coacervar,
Cohcchar,
to heap^ U9
to briae
Cohered£ro,
the Spakish'. Gbahmar.
CoherederOy co-heir
Cohetey a sqtdb^ a cracker
Coholy a kind of mineral
Coliquar, to liquify
Gomprehender,/<7 comprehend
Concavo,
concave
Con$uelo»
CoDJetiira,
Conveni6ncia,
Conseqiiencia,
Conservar,
Contrahacer,
Contrah^r,
corafort
conjecture
convenience
consequence
to preserve
to counterfeit
to contract
Contravaldr, toentrenchround
Contravenir, to transgress
Contrav.eros, scollopped gar-
ments
Controvertir,
Convalecer,
Convecino,
Convenc^r,
Convcnir,
•Convers^r,
to controvert
to recover
neighbouring
to persuade
to agree
to converse
Convcrtir, to alter ^ to change
Convoq&r, to assemble
Convulsion, convulsion
Corc6va; crookedness
Corvej6H9 the joint of the foot
of a beast
Corv^ta, the curvet of a
horse
Corvillo,
a little crow
Corvina, i
I kind of sea-fish
Covacha,
a little cave
Covaohu^la,
the office of a se-
cretary of state
Coxln,
cushion
Coxo, xa,
halting
Cueva,
a cave or den
Cultivar,
to cultivate
-Curvas,
crooked timber
Curvo, va.
crooked
•
D.
Dadlva,
present
dedication
Dedkacion,
123
Deh^sa, pasture-aground
Delinqiientey malefactor
Depraver. to spoil
Derivar. to derive
Desahogar, to clear
Desahuciar, to give over
Desaviar, to lead out of the
way
Desavenir, to disagree
Desemparvdr, to gather into
heaps
Def babitudr, to lose a custom
Deshacer, to undo
Desharrapado, da, ' ragged
Deshebrar,/^ drawthethreads
out
Deshelar, to thaw
Deshinchdr, to unswell
Deshonesto, ta, indecent
Deshon6r, dishonour
Deshdnra, dishonour
Desnervar, to cut off the
nerves
Desovir, to spawn
Despavelar, to snuff the can*
dies
Pespavorido, da, frighten
Desquadernir, to unblini
Desquartizir, to quarter
Desquix&r, to tear trie jaws ^
Desservir, to disserve
Desvilido, da, unassisted
Desvan, a garret
Desvanecer, to puff up with
pride
Desvarar, to slide
Desvariar, ' to rave
Desvelar to over^watch
Desven^r, to cut the veins
Desventiira, misfortune
Desvergilenza, impudence
Desviar, to set aside
Devanar, to wind thready &c.
Devantal, an apron
Devastar, to make thin
Devordr, to devour
Dev6to,
^
124
Dev6to, ta,
Dexar,
Dibnxar,
Diliivio
Disolvir,
Distrah^r,
D^van
Diverge nte.
Diverse,
Dxvcrtir,
Dividir,
DiviesOy
Divino, na,
The ELEMENTS ef
EnhiMr, t§ thread
Enhocar, \ ^ to hoUow
Enhornar^ to set in the oven
Enquadernar, to bind
Enrehojar, to roll wax ih
pious^ devout
to leave
to draw
deluge
to dissolve
to district
divan.
divergent
divers^ several
to divert
to divide
a tumour
divine
2^visdr, 'to see at a distance
Div6rcio, divorce
Divulgir, to publish
Dixes, jewels
Sov^Ias, the upper stones of
t an arch
Dozdvo,
twelfth
E.
to* elevate
eloquent
embassy
to make red
Elevir,
£loqii6nte,
Embax^da,
Embcrroejec^r,
Einbravec6rse, to grow fierce
*^xamo\itc€x&t^to grow mouldy
Empavesir, to make ready for
fighting
Einpolvor£r,empolvorizdr, to
cast dust on a thing
Encaxlir, to fix or thrust
Encaxonar, to put in a box
Enclavijar, to fasten with pins
Encohelar, Infill with squibs
Encorvar, to crooky or curb
to put in a cave
grown lame
to enervate
to bind up
to put a spear
to cause loathing
to thread
to rear up
Encovir,
Encoxido,
' Enervir,
EngavilMr,
Ennastdr,
. Enhastidr,
Enhcbiar,
Enhestir,
Enroxecer,
Entrevcrar,
leaves
to grow red
to intermix
Entrqxar, to gather in a bar^
Envaynar, to put into tkescab^
bard
Envar£r. to make stiff
Envasir, to put in a vessel
Envcjccer, to grow old
Envenen^r, ; to poisafi
Envestir, * to invest
Enviciarse, to take an ill habit
Envididr, to ^m^.
Envilec£r, to make vile, mean
Envinar^ to mix wink
Envizcir', to lay bird Jim
Envoi ver» to pad up
Enviuddr, to be a widow
Enxavon^r, to soap linen, Seel
Enxalma, apannel
Enxambre, a swarm of bees
togro^
to-ar)
the fat of a hen
equestrian
equ\vocQ,l
a slam
Enxerir,
Erfxugar, .-
Enxundia,
Eqiiestrc,
Eqoivoco, ca,
Escfavo,
E^paravan, a heron (a bird)
Esparavel, asottqfndt
Esquadra, a squadrok
Esqaivo, va, disdainful
Estdva, the plough-handk
Evacuir,
Evaporir,
Eviaente,
EvitSr,
Excavir,
Executar,
Exercer,
Ex6|pito«
ExMnistOy ta.
to evacuate
tcr evaporate
evident
to atroid
to dig
to execute
to exercise
aHormy
dre^ned
ExbibiFi
, I
£xbibir,
Exhort^^
the SpAKiftH Grammar.
to ikev>
to exhort
£xido, agtoundoutoftown
iiT^txs^viirsOttogo out oftheway.
Favdr,
Faxar,
fervor,
Fixar,
Flexes,
FlqxediM*
FluxQ,
favour
to swathe
fervour
to fix
bows
looseness
flux
HalcoQ^
Halda,
G.
CSrallipivo,
Gavinco,
Gaveta,
G^via,^
Gavil^D,
Gavilla,
Gavion^
Gavi6ta.
Gaze la,
Gravir,
Graved^d,
a turkey-cock
dog^briar
a draw
the round top of
a mast
a sparrow-hawk
a faggot
a hand-barrow
a sea-gull
a wild goat
, to engrave
gravity
H.
Haba,
Habil,
HabiUir,
Habl£r,
a bean
able, apt^ learned
to dwell
to speak
Haca, hacanea, a nag ox geld-
Hacer, to make
.Hacha, an axe^ or hatchet
.Haci^ada, a country house
Hacfna^ a stack of wood
" s or corn
JIado, fate
Haiz/ the state of a placet
H^la^r, to cherish, or J^ter
• •
afaulcon
the skirt of a gar*
m^nt^ (3cm '
an osprey
breathing
to find
bread baked undet
the ashes
a hammock
hunger t famine
HaiQ^zes, a disease in hawks
Haropa, a quarrel-of bad
People
Hainp6n, na, pHff^cd up
Hanega, a bushel
Hoi finterjectionj halait
Halc6to,
Hilito,
HalUr,
Hallullo,
Hatn^ca,
Hambre,
Harapos,
Harbar,
Hardalear,
Harija,
Harina,
Harmonia,
Harnero,
Har6n, na,
Hirpa,
Harpir,
Harpeo^
Harpillera,
Harripi^zo,
Harr^'r,
Hartar,
Hasta,
HastidI,
H^stio,
Hato,
Haya,j
Haza«
Hazina,
KcbiUa.
Hebill^e
Hebra,
Hechizar,
Hechura,
rags^ clouts
to do in haste
i to skip
dust of meal,
flour^ meal
harmony .
a sieve with smalt
holes
a. lazy person
a harp
to cut the fact
a ^rag
a coarse clotk
a rag hanging-
to drive beasts
to satiny with food
a spear or pike
the inside cf
• , -M vault
a loathing
a flock, a herd
a hedge
a sowed field
a miser
a buckle
a set of buckles
a neealefuU of
thread
to enchant
fashion
Hed^r,
196
The ELEMENTS oj
Heder, to stink
Htlilr, to freeze
Heiioscdpio, a kindef spurgi
H^mbro, a female
Hemiitfchio, a hay' verse
HcBchir, to fill
Heno, hay
Henir, to knead dough
Herbage, grass, pasture
Herbato Vi^xKihiiu, kog.fennel
Herbolaiio, an herbal qt ba-
tanisl
HerediJ, inheritance
Herir, to wousd, or hurl
Hcrraino, brother
Herpes, the shingle
Herrada, a tucket
Hcrrami^nta, iron tools
Hcri;£te, a lag ofa'potnt, Sc.
Hervir, to boil
Hitico. consumptive
Hez, dregs of oil, wine, &c.
Hibierno,
HidSlgo,
Hydropesia,
Hiel,
Hi*rro,
Hi^do,
Hijo.ja,
Hila. hilacha,
Hilira.^
Hilandera,
Hilar.
Hincir,
Hinch£r,
Hincha,
Hiiii^sta,
Hin6jo,
Hipiir,
Hypocondria,
Hipoccca,
Hfrco,^
Hispanismo,
tlist6rico, ca,
Histdiia,
Hito, ta.
winter
gentleman
drtpsy
the gall
iron
the liver
a linl
a rani
a spinster
to spin
to Jasttn
to swell
hatred
broom
fennel
to hickup
hypocondiy
a morigagi
a he-goat
Hispamsm
hislerical
history
black haired
agrealjadi
the snout
H6bacho,
Hocici_
Hocino, a hook to lop trrei
Hog£za, a quarttrn ht^
Hoguera. a bonjfirt
H6ja, a leaf of a tree, ^e,
HojSIdre, puff.pastt
HoIgSrse, to si m^rry
Hollar, to tramph '
Hollejo, lhehuskofgrapes,^c.
Hotlin, /«/
H6mbrc, a wun
H6mbro, tktiUder
Homenige, kowtage
Homicida, murderer
H6iida, a sling to cajtstenet
H6ndo, -Jtip
HoneatidSd, kontt^
Honor, h6nra, kontmr
Hopa lihopalinda, »Mortaf
tmdti
to mag tht IwH
hrik
Hopelr,
H6que,
H6ra,
Horadar,
Horca,
Horc^te,
Hordiate,
H6niia,
Hormiga,
Horniigo,
H6rno,
Horrendo, da,
H6rro,
Horror,
Hortelano,
Hospitdl,
Hosteria,
Hostigir,
Hostilidad,
H6yo.
Hozir.
Hue ha,
Huebr^r,
Hudco,
te pierce, to hart
a fork, a gallows
a fork witA talo
tsho
an ant, a fitmre
a sort eftntss
am ovea
horrible
■Jr„
terror
gardener
hospital
to drive away
kostili!
a hole in Ike eari-
togrua
a box with a '•..
toplowlhef''n:
KuelB "
Huelfago, a s::ijf:: :t ii^z: Iz-miir rrsu .-a
Hu6Ua, ;.tf .-'2.-/ iT-snirj. :7t--:^ —
Hu6rco, ^ /:.f^ If-sr-:- - -rrjr-
Huero, ra, j^i.f -i; -ri f rr l--r.t::.:i.- - - --
Huerfano, na, z'-iui li-ff..- n.j
Hu^ra, hueno, tf«:':is'<r li- 2:^-1^: :. rrvr:*-^
■Hue so, A //tif iTi-iijii.:, .Tirir-is
Huesped, cnh:s: z-z rn^z Iir-nnr : -:. u^^
Huette, '2X I'n^ Iz— i-.ter-Lj.:!. n7*i..7fr^ .
Huevo, it f/r li.i.s-r r j— r-
Huir *-' " * zif f^^ "3" ^ ^»» '-^ •■-^-
Hule, f3r':-.?ifi .:z.'t "tLix— i.- - i-sir'
Humano, na, zzilzz 'i^'^rniL '•^
Humedo, da, iiw/ 'rt^-a.. jr
Hunailde, iiiL/'..; 'idhiit*-. r jr-
Humo, j-fLr^e
H umor. h u "s ; ^ r, :? w j 'f L
Huudir, :/ r-?.f
Hura, £.":•-: :f inrf Li— eiicla
Huracia, <s ni'n l;?i*ir
Hurano, na, r:>, i; j^- t -'x.' Lss*. « .:
Hurgar,
Hur6n,
Hurtar, r- "*r « »^
Htiso, fijr:t.-.-tf *
1« J. j, jgsf«& :;
Inadvcrtcncia, imizfrt^a^ Lssi.. .-'. •
IncoDseqlieste, t^T^ss^msmt .Lm*' "*'•'
iQConvencible, ff««a.^aj, or JLirr. -f.^-xTr
h: pfimimi - •«"'
Indev6to, ^ irrthgi^u: ' - *'-^'
Indivisible, tndtuuii:
Inhabil,
Inhere nte,
Inhibir,
Iniqiio, qiia,
Innavegable,
Innovar, irr*-
Intervilb, r- ^ '^^
Intervenir,
^-^i. -rr
t»j f ' •• '* ZL fm. S
if
I'UW
n
"iuttlf^
Inyadir;- «*^,»
Intalidv; ' f n^-
Invcctini, p^"^^
• <^iP:
128
M6ho;
Moiivo,
Mover^,
The ELEMENTS 0/
Pihu61a8, ~
Pisaverdc,
tnouldiness
motive
to move
N.
Nava, a plain
Navajo, a piece of fiat ground
.Navaja, " ^ razor
Nave, navio, a ship
Navidid, Christmas
Nervio, nerve
Nieirel, snow
NiVel, a level
Novdl, a new tilled ground
Nov6la,
Noveno, na,
Novietntre,
Novillo,
^ovilunio,
N6vio,
Objccion,
Objeto,
Obedi6nte,
Observ^r^
Obviar,
OUva,
Olvidar,
Ota,
Ovcja,
a novel
ninth
November
a calf
new moon
a bridegroom
O.
objection
object
obedient
to observe
to obviate
olive
toforget
a sed'Weed
a sheep, an ewe
P.
Polvo,
Prescrvir,
Prcvalccer,
Prcvaricir,
Prevenir,
Preveher,
Pr^vio,
Primavera,
Priv^r,
Prohibir,
Prohijir,
Prolix o,
Provecho,
Proveer,
Proveiur,
Prov6rbio,
Provide ncia^
Proyincia,
Provocdr,
Pr6ximo,
Pujavante,
hawksjes^er-
' a nui^fcp
powder^ dust
to preserve
to prevmlf
to prevmricaU
to prevtni
to foresee
previous
to deprive
toJorUi
tomdopt
tedious^ long
projt
to premde
to come from
aproverh
providence
province
to provoke
neighbour
a smith's outiria^
Q-
Parad6xa, a paradox
Pirva, a heap of corn threshed
Pavdna, ,
a sort of dance
Pav6«,
a great shield
Pavim^nfo,
a pavement
Pavito,-
a gull
Pavo, va,
a turkey
Pav6r, •
fear^ dread
Pdxaro,
a bird
Pcrpl6xo,
doubtful
P^rvertir,
. to pervert
Quad^mo, a sheet of paper ,
u^dra,
uadrado,
uadrdnte,
uadril,
uadriila,
ualidad,
Quantfta,
udndo,
uarenta,
uart^go«
Quart^U
uacterdn,
udtro,
Question,
Quixdda,
uecientei
u6ta,
tnjour
stable
a square
a quadrant
the hip
a gang
qualifj^
value, number
token
prty
A small horse
quarter
aqdlhtern
four
ifufstion
a jaw
quotient
a share
R. Rebixa.
the SpAiiisH Grammar.
189
R.
Rebdxa,
Rebelir,
Reconvenir*
Rehac^r,
Reben,
Rehenchir,
Rehundir,
Rehus^r,
Rcjoveneccr,
Relaxar,
Relevir,
Remover,
Renovir,
Reservir,
ResoWer,
Rcvclar,
Revendcr,
R<^veDtir,
R€ver,
Reverberar,
Rcvcrdecer,
Rev6rso, sa,
Reves,
Revestir,
Revezdr,
Revivir,
Revocar,
Revolcarse,
Revolver,
Rezelar,
Riv^l,
Ropavej^rOy.
Subleyar,
Sdbsequente,
Sujetar,
. abating
to rebel
to txpost
to make again
hostage
to fill again
to sink again
to refuse Su^ve,
to groti) younger
to rdax
to raise up
tp remove
to renew
to reserve
tp resolve
to reveal
to sell again
to burst
to revise
. to reflect
to grow green
again
reverse
the wrong side
to cloath
to take turns
to revive
to recall
to turn oneself
to make noise
to suspect
rival
old cloth broker
Severe, ra, sever^
Siervo, ^servanS
SUv^stre, fO^iU
Sobre hi?, the superficies
iSobre Ku6sso,a splint tnahprse
Sobre llevar, to endure
Sobre venir, to h^ppfin
Socav^r, to underjfii^
mild
to raise np
subsequent
to subj4Qt
T.
Saliva,
Salv4do,
Salvage,
Salvaguardia,
Salvia,
Salvir,
Siiva,
Seqilestdir,
ServilUta,
S.
spittle
bran of meal
savage^ wild
a safeguard
sagCf (an herb)
to save
aforest
to sequester
a napkin
Tahalf,
Tah6na,
Tahiilla,
Tahiir,
Talvina,
Taravillii,
T^fffiversar,
Texer,
Tixeras,
Todavia,
Traher,
Trahilla,
Trashogu^ro,
Trasvenarse,
Travieso, sa,
Troxe 6 trox,
a shoulder^U
a horse-mill
a piece pf ground
a sharper
a hasty pu.datng
the clacker of a
mitt
to €vadc
tfi weave
scissars
yet
Jto bnn^
a slip for a dog
the back of a
chimney
to come cut if
the veins
ponton
a granary
U.
Universidad,
Uva,
V.
Vaca,
Vacilar,
Vacio,
Vado,
Valle, ,
a for
university
grape
^ cow
to waver
empty
>tf rtver
oalley
ISO
Vale,
Valcr, *
Valcr6so, sa,
Vilido.
Valiente,
Valiza,
Val6f,
Vangu^rdiay
V4iio, pa,
Yalp6r,
V4ra,
Variar,
Var6n,
Vasialo,
Vaso
to be worth
courageous
favourite
full of spirit
a portmanteau
va'tue
the vanguard
vain
vapour
a yard
to vary
a man
a subject
a vessel, a glass
Vz&iigo^the stock ofavine^Sac.
Vasto, ta, dilated
Vaticinar, teforetel
Vaziila, a cupboard with plate
Vaya, joking
Vayna, scabbard
Vecino, na, neighbour
Vcdir, to forbid
Vedeja, a lock of hair
the ground of a
vineyard
an overseer
a pasture ground
by a river
The ELEMENTS of
farewell Veneer,
V^nda,
Yeduno,
Vced6r,
Vega,
Vchemcnter
Vchicylo,
Veinte,.
Vdfa,
Vela, '
Velesa,
Velio, ^
Vellocino,
Villdri,
vehement
vehicle
twenty
old age
a sail
toothwort
dawn
a fleece
a cloth of the
wooVs colour
Vellorita, cowslips [an herb)
Vell6so sa,
Velon,
VeI6z,
Vena,
Venahlo,
Ven^do,
Venajo,
downy
a brass lamp
light
a vein
a javelin
a deer
to conquer
afilUt
to sett
the vintage
poison^ vcn^m
to respect
to revenge
leave^ licence
ta come
an inn
advantage
a window
to How
a blast of wind
a blood-hound
, a cupping glass
winds
ventricle
great-bellied
Juck
a venturine (a
stone)
to see
a large plan
summer
a man who always
speaks the truth
great lungwort
/an herb)
vtrvein (an herb)
truth
green
the hangman
a patk-wmy
4 yard
a garden
shame
' tru^
to verify^
likely
a martlet (a bird)! Vcter,
Vender,
Vendimia,
Veneno,
Venerar,
Vengar,
Venia,
Venir,
Venta.
Ventdja,
Ventana,
Ventear,
Ventisca,
Vent6r,
Ventosa,
Ventosoj
Ventriculo,
Ventriido,
Ventriia,
Venturiiia,
V^r,
Vera,
Verdno,
VerSz,
■
Verlfdsc©,
Verbena
Verdad,
Verde,
Verdiigo,
Vereda,
Verga,
Vergcl,
Vercii^nza,
Vendico, ca,
Verificar,
Verisimil,
Ver6nicay fluellin (an herb)
Veros, a^weavy ornament
Verruga, . a wart
Vers^do, : versed
Versos, verses
Vertebra, vertebre
tosfilt
Vcrugo,.
Vertigo.
Vestigio,
Vcitfr,
Vibora,
Vihrar,
Vicario
Vicio,
Vicisitud,
Vfclima,
Victor^ar^
Vid,
Vida,
Vidrio,
Vi^jo,
Vi6ntre,
Viern6s
Vigilar,
yig6r, .
Vihu61a,
Vilipendidr,
Villa,
Vin^re,
Vinculo,
Vindicar,
Vino> .
Vina,
Violin*
Violar,
Violento, ta.
tie SpAiinn G&amuaiu
giddiness
a track
it) cloQlh^ to dtess
veteran
to vtx^ to trouble
a bladder
journey
a viper
to brandish
Vituperar,
Viduo,
Vivanderoj
Vai6la
Vitrificafj
Vitriolo : vitrtcl
Vitualla, victuals^ provisions
131
Pdrckmctkt
to vitrify
a vicar
vice
a change
a victim
to applaud
a vine
a life
a glass
old
belly
Friday
to watch
Vigour^force
a lute
to despise
a town
vinegar
a tie, a binding
to revenge
wine
vine
afiddle
to, violate
violent
violet
of a viper
virgin
virtue
small'pox
a chip
Vivar
Viveza^
Vivir,
Vizc6nde,
Vocablo,
Vocicion,
Voceir,
Volar, •
Violela,
Viperino, n3, -
Vtrgen,
Virtud,
Viruelaj
Virdta'
Visage, distortion of the face
Viscosidad, clamminess
Visiter, to visit
Visliimbre, a blazing light
W&o^ glimmering appearance
' Vispera, the eve tf a day
, Yista*
to repreaih
a zvtdower
a suttler to an
army
a coney^warren
sprightliness
- to live
a Viscount
a word
a vocation
to cry out
^ofly
Volcan, a burning mountain
Voltear,
Voluble,
Voluniid^
Volver,
Vomitar,
Voraz,
Votar,
Voz,
Vuelta,
Vulnerar,
to tumble
voluble
will or affection
to turn or return
to vomit
greedy
to vote, or to votu
a voice, or word
turn
to hurt or wound
Xabeque,
X.
a zebeci (a ioxi
of ship)
Xab6ni soap
Xacara, a sort of song
Xaco, a coat of mail
Xalma, a pack-saddle
Xal6que, ike south-west wind
Xarhuga, - a side saddle for
women
Xaque, a check at chess
Xaqu^ca, head-dch on one side
Xaquel, a chequer
Xdquima, a halter for a beast
Xar^be, a syrup
Xaramago, tvild
rape
Xircias,"/A<f rigging of a ship
sight, prospect \ Xerga, a sort of sac A.ciot^
K 2 7»Jti^:^'i^N
.1 .
124
Dev6to, U,
Dexar,
Dibnxar^
Diliivio
Di8olv6r,
Distrah^r,
D^van
Diverge nte,
Div^r&o,
Divertir,
Dividir,
DhuesOy
Divmo, na,
The ELEMENTS ^
EnhiKr,
Enhocar,
piouSt devout
to leave
to draw
deluge
to dissolve
to district
* . divan
divergent
divers^ several
to divert
to divide
a tumour
divine
Divis&r, ^to see at a distance
Div6rcio, divorce
Divulgdr, to publish
Dixesy jewels
Sovdas, the upper stones of
I an arch
Dozivo,
twelfth
E.
to* elevate
eloquent
embassy
to make red
ElevSr,
£loqii£nte,
Embaxada,
Embcrmejec^r,
Embravec^rse, to grow fierce
^ILvamohccix&Q^togrow mouldy
*Empaves^r, to make ready J^or
fighting
Empolvordr,empolvorizdr, to
cast dust on a thing
Encaxlir, to fix or thrust
" EncaxonSr, to put in a box
Enclavijar, to fasten with pins
Encohelar, Refill with squibs
Encbrvar, to crook^ or curb
to put in a cave
grown lame
to enervate
to bind up
to put a spear
to cause loathing
to thread
to rear np
Encov^r,
ErrcoxSdo,
* Enervir,
EngaviHar,
Enhastdr,
Enhastidr,
Enhcbiar,
Enhestar,
to thread
. ^ to hollow
£nhornar» to set in the oven
t6 Hud
to roll wax «t
leaves
to grow red
to intermix
Enquadernar,
Enrehojar,
Enroxecer,
Entrevcrar,
EntFQxar, to gather in a barH
Envaynir, to put into the scab'
bard
Envarir* to maAe stif
Envasir, to put in a vessel
Envcjcccr, to grow old
EnVcncndr, to poison
Envestir, * to invest
£nviciar»e, to take an ill habit
Envididr, to etkij.
Envilecer, to make vile^ metm
Envinar, to mix taint
Envizcir', to lay bird-Hme
Envolver, to pad t^
Enviuddr, to be a widow
Enxavon^r, to soaplinen^ &c^
Enxalma, a pannel
Enxambre, a swarm of bets
togreA
tow)
the fat of a hen
equestrian
equivocal
a slam
Enxerir,
Eirxugar, .-
Enxundia^
Eqiiestre,
Eqaivoco, ca,
Esclavo,
E^paravan, a heron (a bird)
Esparavel, asottofnet
Esquadra, a squadrok
Esqui vo, va, disdainful
Estiva, the plough^handk
Evacuar,
Evaporir,
Evid6nte,
Evit^r,
Excavir,
Executar,
Exercer,
Ex^ipito^
ExMnistOy ta,
to extacuatt
ta evaporate
evident
to atrnd
to xlig
to execute
to exercise
an tSTtny
drained
Exhibir,
\
/
r - • •■ •
THE
ELEMENTS
OF THE
SPANISH GRAMMA R^
PART II.
CHAP. I.
0/ SYNTAX.
TTHE Syntax, or Construction, is the order
-*- of words in a sentence, which is composed of
the nine parts of speech, or of some of them, wm.
of the » ^
Article,
Noun,
PRONOUN,
Verb,
Paijiticiple, I
Adverb,
Conjunction,
Preposition*
Interjection.
The essential parts of a sentence are, a Nomina-
tive and a Verb ; because in speaking something is
always said of another : as, Man is mortal, Ei hombrc
es mortal ; where you may 3ee, it is said of man that
he is mortal.
Order of the Spanish Ctmstruction in AffirnM-
twe Phrases.
1« The oblique cases, im, fe, le, or la, nas, ws, iesp
or fo^, are placed either before or after tfeft VeiVi,
K 3 ILiyasfi^^'
126
HeiMr, te stink
H^lir, tofreeze
He]iau:6pio, a kind of spur gt
The ELEMENTS oj
H6bacho,
Hoc ICO,
H^mbra, afetnale
Hemisttchio, a half verse
HcBchir, to fill
Heno, hay
Heriir, to knead dough
Herbage, grass, pasture
Herbito xi}Kjha.lM, hog-fennel
Herbolirio, an Aerial or bo-
Heredad, inheritance
Herir, to wound, or hurl
Herniano, brolhe
Herpes, the shinglt
' Herrada, a bucket
Herraoiiinta, iron tools
Jlcr^^te, a tag ofa'point, £?c.
Hcrvir, . to hotl
Hitico, consumptive
, dregs of oil, wine, &i
Hibicrno,
Hidilgo,
Hydropfisia,
Mi61,
Hierro,
Higado,
Hijo, ja,
Hila, hilacha.
Hil^ra,^
Hilanderaj
Hilar.
Hincilr,
Hiacbir,
Hincha,
Hini&ta,
Hm6jo,
HipSr,
Hypocondria,
Hipotcca,
Hirco,^
Hispanismo.
Hiii^rico, ca,
' Hisi6ria,
Hiio, la,
toi filer
gtntlemart
drgpsy
the gall
iron
the liver
son
a lint
a rank
a spinster
to spin
to fasten
to swell
hatred
broom
fennel
to hickup
hypocondry
a mortgage
a he-goat
Hisfanism
hitter ical
history
black haired
agreatjfde
the snout
Hocino, a hook to'lop trees
Hogiza, a quartern io^
Hoguera, a bonfin
Hoja, a leaf of a tree, (ifc,
Hoj5!dre, pyff-paste
HolgJirBe, to be merry
Hollar, to trample
Holiejfl, tkikuskofgrapes,i<jc.
Hollin, foot
H6mbrc, a man
H6mbro, shoulder
Homenige, homage
Hntnicida, murderer
H6nda, a sling to cast stones
H6ndo, 'daf
HoncRiidiid, hona^
Honor, h6nra, houimr
Hopa u hopaUnda, a sort of
tutdtk
to wag the tail
hide
hour
to pierce, to ban >
a fork, a galhms '
a fork with tulo
prongs
Iiarley-brotk
a shoemaker's last
an ant, a pismire
a sort ofrntss
HopcCr,
H6que,
H6ra.
Horadar,
Horca,
Horc^te,
Hordiate,
H6rma,
Hormiga,
Hormigo,
H6rno,
Horr^ndo, da,
H6rro,
Horr6r,
Horlclano,
Hospital,
Hosteria,
Ho»ig4r.
Hosdiidad,
H6yo,
Hozir,
Hiicha,
Huebr^r,
Hu6co,
horrible
■fi"
terror
gardener
hospi^L
• an inn
to drive aw^
hostility
' ho/e in the earth
to grub
a box' with a slit
to plow the land
hollow
HuclFigo.
Huelf&gOy a sickness in birds
Hu61U, . the track
Ha6rco. a bier
.HuerOy ra, addle- as an egg
Huerfano, na^ orphan
Hu^ra, huertOy an orchard
the Spanish Gbamhak.
Invehtir,
Invent&rioy
-HuesOy
Huesped,
Huir,
Hule,
Hum^no, na,
Hiimedo^ da,
Huniildey
Humo,
Hundir,
Hura,
Huracia,
Hurano, na,
Hurgdr,
Hur6n»
Hurtar,
Htiso,
Hutia,
a bone
an host OT guest
an army
an egg
tojly
burnished linen
human
damp
humble
smoak
humour ^ temper
to sink
a sort of scurf
a storm
coy^ disdainful
to stir
aferret
to steal
a spindle
a kind of rabbit
Invertir,
Investigir,
Investir,
Inveterido,
Inviolido,
Iovoc£r»
Invulnerable,
Inxerir,
Ingerirse,
^aharrar,
uventud,
ovial,
7udihuela»
187
to find out
Otventory
to invert
to look out
to invest
inveterate
inviolate
to call upon
invulnerable
to graft
to meddle with
to plaister
youth
gay ^ merry
a sort of bean
Lavandula.
Lav^r,
Laza.
Indev6to. ,
tndivisibley
Inhabil,
Iqberente,
Inhibfr,
Iniqiio, qiia,
Innavegible,
Innovar,
Intervito,
Intervene, .
Inyadir; -
Iniralidar,
Invectiva,
r'
I. J.
Inadvertencia, inadvertency
Inconseqiiente, inconsequent
laconvencible, tenacious ^ or
obstinatedin
his opinion
irreligious
indivisible
incapable
inherent
to forbid
unjust
innavigable
to innovate
an interval
to intervene
to irtvade
to invalidate
an invective
lavender
to wash
a lash for dogs
L^va, raising- of bad people
who ari without em-^
ploymentf soldiers
Levantar, to raise
Levinte, the East
Leve, light
Lexia, lye to wash
Liviano, na, lights inconstant
Lixa, the skin of the sealfisk
Llave,
Llevar,
Llover»
a key
to carry
to rain
M.
Mad6xa,
Mah6na,
Malevoio, la,
Malhech6r,
Malva,
Malvado, da,
Matalahuga,
a skain of thready
a sort of galley
nojgi
ill-affected
malefactor
mallows
; wicked
anise (an herb)
Mohatrar, to sell above price^
and ^y under
Mohino, na, . peevish
128
M6ho,
Motivo,
Mover r^
The ELEAIENTS of
Pibu61a8, '
Pisaverde,
mouldiness
motive
to move
N.
Nava, a plain
Navajo, apiece of JLat ground
.Navaja, ': a razor
Nave, navioy a ship
Navi()2d, Christmas
Nervio, nerve
Nieirel, snow
Nitel,. a level
Novdly a new tilled ground
Nov6la,
Noveno, na,
Noviembre,
NovJllo,
^ovilunio»
N6vio,
Objccion,
Objeto,
Obedi6nte,
Obscrvdr^
Obvi4r,
OUva,
Divider,
O^a,
Oveja,
a novel
ninth
November
a calf
new moon
a bridegroom
O.
objection
object
obedient
to observe
to obviate
olive
toforget
a sea-weed
a sheep f an ewe
P.
Polvo,
Preserver,
Prevalccer,
Prcvaricir,
Prevenir,
Preveher,
Pr^vio,
Primavera,
Priv^r,
Prohibir,
Prohijir,
Prolixo,
Provecho,
Proveer,
Provemr,
Prov6rbio,
Provide ncia,
Proyincia,
Provocir,
Pr6ximo»
Pujavante,
kawlsjesfts
' a nue^fop
powder^ dust
to preserve
to prevaik
to prevaricate
to preveni
to foresee
previous
to deprive
tojorbid
to adopt
tedious^ iffng
projt
to promde
to come from
a proverb
providence
province
to provoke
neighbour
a smith's outtrice
Parad6xa, a paradox
Pirva, a heap of corn threshed
i^avina, .
a sort of dance
Pavif,
a great shield
PiBvim6nfo,
a pavement
Pavita,
a gull
Pavo, va,
a turkey
Pav6r, •
fear^ dread
PdxarOy
a bird
Pcrpl6xo,
doubtful
Pervert ir.
. to pervert
Quad^rno,
u^dra,
uadrado,
uadrdnte,
uadril,
uadrilla,
uatidad,
Quantfta»
udndo,
uarenta,
uart£go«
Quart^C
ua]:ter6n»
udtroy
Question,
Quix^da,
~ uoci£nte,
u6ta,
Q-
a sheet of paper,
in four
stable
a square
a quadraut
the hip
a gang
quaUty
value, number
when
J^rty
A small horse
quarter
aqMrtern
four
fUfstiou
a jaw
qu9tieuf
a share
R. Rebixa»
the SpAlJisH Grahmab.
129
Reb^xa,
Rebclir,
Recaoveair»
Rehac^,
Refaen,
Rehenchir,
Rehandir,
Rehusar,
Rcjoveneccr,
Relaxar,
Relevir,
Remover,
Renovir,
Reservir,
ResoWer^
Rcvclar,
Revender,
Revendr,
R^vcr,
Reverberar,
Rcverdecer,
Rev^rso, sa,
Reves,
Revestir,
Revezir,
Revivir,
Revocar,
Revolcarse,
Revolver,
Rezelar,
Rivil,
Ropavej^rOy.
R.
ajkating
to rebel
to expose
to make again
hostage
to Jill again
to sink again
to refuse
to grow younger
to relax
to raise up
tft remove
to renew
to reserve
tp resolxit
to reveal
to sell again
to burst
to revise
to reflect
to grow green
again
reverse
the wrong side
to cloath
to take turns
to fexnve
to recall
to turn oneself
to make noise
to suspect
rival
old cloth broker
S€v6ro, ra, sever f
Siervo, 4Lserv(int
Silv^tre, mU
Sobre hd?, the superJickiS
iSobre Ku6sso,<2 splint makorst
Sobrc Uevir, to endure
Sobre venir, to h^fpfirt
Socavir, to undent^in^
Suive,
Sublevar,
Sdbffecjuente,
Sujetar,
miU
to raise $ip
subsefUfiHi
to subject
T.
Tahalf,
Tah6na,
Tahulla,
Tahiir,
Talvina,
TaravilLiy
Saliva,
Salv&do,
Salvage,
Salvaguardia,
Salvia,
Salvir,
Silva,
Seqilestriir,
ServiU^ta,
S.
spittle
bran of meal
savage^ wild
a safeguard
sagtt (an herb)
to save
aforest
to sequester
a napkin
a shoulder^k
a horse^mitt
a piece pf ground
a sharper
a hasty pudding
the clacher of a
mitt
to tvade
tfi weave
scissors
yet
io brine
Trabilia, a dip for a dog
Trashogu^ro, the back of a
T^rgiversar,
Texer,
Tixeras,
Todavia,
Traher,
Trasvenirse,
Travieso, sa,
Troxe 6 trox,
chimney
to come out of
the veins
ponton
a granary
U.
Universidad,
Uva,
V.
Vaca,
Vacil£r,
Vacio,
Vado,
Vallc, .
a for
university
grape
<a cow
to waver
empty
'."^a river
oalky
Vale,
ISO
Vale,
Valcf, •
Valer6so, sa,
V£Hdo,
Valicnte,
Valiza,
Val6r,
Vangu^rdia,
V4no, pa,
Vap6r,
V&ra,
Variar,
Var6n,
VasialOy
Vaso
to be worth
courageous
favourite
full of spirit
a portmanteau
value
the vanguard
vain
vapour
a yard
to vary
a man
a subject
a vessel^ a glass
Vastigo,/^^ stock of a vine, Sec.
Vasto, ta, dilated
Vaticinar, toforetel
VaziIIa, a cupboard with plate
Vaya, joking
V^^.yna, scabbard
Vecino, na, neighbour
Vcdir, to forbid
Vcdeja, ia lock of hair
Yedunot the ground of a
vineyard
an overseer
a pasture ground
by a river
vehement
vehicle
twenty
old age
T/te ELEMENTS of
farewell Venc6r,
Vccd6r,
Vega,
Veheracnte
Vehicylo,
Veintc,.
V.qcz,
Vela.
Velesa,
Velio, ^
Vellocino,
ViII6i-i.
a sail
toothworl
dawn
afleece
a clotk of the
wooVi colour
Vellorita, cowslips (an herb)
Vell6so sa,
Vel6n,
Vcl6z,
Vena,
Venablo.
Ven^do,
Venajo,
downy
a brass lamp
light
a vein
a javelin
u deer
to conquer
afilki
to sell
the vintage
poison^ vtn^m.
to respect
to revenge
leave, licence
to come
an inn
advantage
a zoindo9
to Haw
a blast of wind
a blood-hound
, a cupping glass
winds
ventricU
great' bellied
Jwk
a venturipe (a
to see
a large plan
summer
a man who alwayt
speaks the truA
great lungwort
/an herb)
tervein (an herb]
truth
the hanfwun
a path-za&y
4 yard ,
a garden
shame
' trup
to verify
likely
a martlet (ahird^lVeter,
Venda,
Vender,
Vendimia,
Vencno,
Vcncrar,
Vencar,
Venia,
Venir,
Venta.
Vcntdja,
Ventana,
Ventear,
Ventisca,
Vent6r,
Ventosa,
Ventosoj
Ventriculo,
Ventnido,
Ventrua,
Venturiha,
Ver,
Vera,
Verdno,
Vcriz,
Verb*isc0,
Verbena
Verdad,
Verde,
Verdugo,
Vereda,
Verga,
Vcrgcl,
Vercii^nza,
Vendico, ca,
Verific^r,
Verisimil,
Ver6nicay fluellin (an herb}
Veros, Cyweavy ornament
Verruga, a wart
Versado, : versed
Versos, verses
Vertebra, verteire
tosjpiir
VcmgOy
Venigo,
Vestfgio,
Veteran^
VexSr, .
Vexiga,
Viige/
Vibora,
Vihrar,
Vicario
Vicio,
Vicisitud,
Vfclima,
Victor^ar^
Vid,
Vida,
Vidrio,
Vi^jo.
Vi6ntre,
Viern6s
Vigilar,
Vig6r, ,
Vihu61a,
Vilipendidr,
Villa,
Vin^gre,
Vinculo,
Vindicar,
Vino> .
Vina,
VioHo*
Violar,
Violento,ta,
tie SPA'JjiSlI GftAMttAR*
Vitela
Vitrificafj
131
giddiness
a track
iv cio0ih^ to dtess
yeuran
to vtx^ to trouble
a bladder
journey
a viper
to brandish
a vicar
vice
a change
a victim
to applaud
a vine
alije
a glass
old
belly
Friday
• to watch
vigour^ force
a lute
to despise
a town
vinegar
a tie, a binding
to revenge
wine
vine
afiddle
to, violate
violent
violet
of a viper
virgin
virtue
small'pox
a chip
parchment
to vitHfy
Vitriolo : vitriol
Vitualla, victuals, provisions
Vituperar,
Vjduo,
Vivanderoj
Vivar
Viveza,
Vivir,
Vizc6nde,
Vocdblo,
Vocicion,
Voceir,
Volar, •
Violeta,
Viperino, n?, -
Vtrgen,
Virtud,
Viru^laj
Virdta'
Visage, distortion of the face
Viscosidad, clamminess
Visiter, to visit
Visldmbre, a blazing light
Viso, glimmering appearance
Vispera, ihe eve if a day
Yista>
to reproach
a widower
a suttler to an
army
a coney^warren
sprightliness
• to live
a Viscount
a word
a vocation
to cry out
Volcdn, a burning mountain
Voltear,
Voluble,
Voluniid^
Volver,
Vomitar,
Voraz,
Votar,
Voz,
Vuelta,
Vulnerar,
to tumble
voluble
will or affection
to turn or return
to vomit
greedy
to vote, or to voto
a voice, or word
turn
to hurt or wound
X.
Xabeque,
a zebeci (a dott
of ship)
Xab6n, soap
Xacara, a sort of song
Xaco, a coat of mail
Xalma, a pack-saddle
Xa]6que, the south-west wind
Xarhuga, - a side saddle for
women
Xaque, a check at chess
Xaqu^ca, head-dch on one side
Xaque 1, a^chequer
Xdquima, a halter for a beast
Xar^be, a syrup
Xaram^go, ^Hd rape
Xircias, the rigging of a ship
sight, prospect\Xcrg2Lt a sort of sackclQif^
• '
The ELEMENTS, Sgc.
332
XerfngUi a syringe
Xibia^ the cuUUJish
Xicara^ a dish for chocolate
Xilgu6ro, a sort of bird
X6goi, juice
Y.
Y6nnos,
bitter tares
Z.
Zahondar,^^ sink to the boiitm
Zahori, an hog^stye
Zanah6ria, a carrot
Z61o, %eal
Zelos, jealousy
Zinaza, • discovery
THE
!• ■■
ELEMENTS
OF THE
SPANISH GRAMMAR.
PART II.
CHAP. r.
0/ SYNTAX.
nPHE Syntax, or Constbuction, is the order
"*• of words in a sentence, which is composed of
the nine parts of speech, or of some of tnem,. vi».
ofthe
Article,
Noun,
PRONOUN,
Vkhb,
Paijiticiple, I
Adverb,
CoNJUNCTtON,
Preposition*
Interjection.
The essential parts of a sentence are, a Nomina-
tive and a Verb ; because in speaking something is
always said of another : as, Man is mortal, Ei hombrc
es mortal ; where you may 9ee9 it is said of man that
he is mortal.
Order of the Spanish Construction in Affirma^
tiw Phrases.
!• The oblique cases, iw, fc, fc, or fe, nos, Wi, les,
or las, are placed either before or aftec the Veib,
K 3 ^TL^m^^ft'
134 The ELEMENTS of
■ ■ * . ■
Example. — Pedro nic ama^ or ama me Pedro^ Pe-
ter loves me.
2. The i'entibncrbegihs. either with the Nomina^
tive or with the Verb; and, when the Pronoun Per-
gonal is the Nominative^ it may be omitted.
Example. — Est a malo mi hermdno^ jue alcampo^
^ly brother is siqk ; he js gone to the country, .
3. The Adverb is placed either before or after
the Verb ; but, when before, then the oblique case
must be put before the Verb.
Example. — Tiernamente me quiere mi padre. My
father loves me tenderly. .
• • • •
In Negative Phrases.
The Negation must be placed before the oblique
cases, and both of them before the Verbs.
Example.--— iVo me escribe mi amigOy My friend
,^peg npt: write to me, , '
Iff IfU€9?rogativ^ Phrases with or without a Negatum,
The Nominative must be put immediately after
the Verb.
Ex3.mple.":^JEsta mi hermano en casa ?^ Is my bro-
ther at hotme? No me quiere mi padr^f Poes not
my father love we f
Jn Phrases with a Relative, and without Intfrfo^
gation.
The Nominative and Relative must be placed'be* *
fore the first Verb; as, JJ/ homhre que quierq ^ dif^-
cfHoy the man whom I love is wise.
With an Interrogation and Negation.
. The sentence begins. with the Negation and the
Predicate, or that which is said of one thing ; as, Nq'
f^ bast ante grande la cosaque tengo ? Is liot tli house
J live iu la^e, enough? No a tfw, It is not so.
Observe,
jfAe Spanish Grammar. 155
Oljserye^ that the. Auxiliary; in the cora pound
' Tenses of the Verbs ^oes always before the Verb.
The Interrogation in Spanish is more kpown in
speaking, by the inflection of the voice, than by
tne note- (?), used in writing.
4
Of the usejofthe Articles.
. : The Article .must always agree with the Noun in
Geader and Number ; therefore the Article Mas-
culine^/ is put with the Nouns of the Masculine
Gender, and the Article Feminine la before Nouns
of the Feminine Gender. The Neutral ArUcIe to,
before an Adjective, changes it into a Substantive,
as was said before.
Zo placed before que, signifies what ; as, Haga lo
que quuiere, Let him do what he likes.
Lq qual signifies which ; as, Me mando tales y tales
cosas, lo qual se hizo luego. He ordered me such and
such things, all xvhich was dpne immediately.
When Ip is before or after a Verb, then it signi-
fies it or that ; as Lo hare, I will do it ; Haga lo.
Let him do it, or do that.
The Article is lyever made use of before proper
names pf men, women, gods, goddesses, saints ; of
months, towns, cities, villages. -
Example. — Carlos Terciro Rey de Espana, Charles
the Third King of Spain ; Jorge Tercero Hey da
Inglatera, George the Third King of England, &c.
wnere you must observe, that the Article is not used
before the ordinal number, when it is after the
name of a man or woman.
Observe, If an Adjective is before the proper
names escpressing some action, passion, or qualities,
then the Article is used before tnem.
Example^ — El valeroso Frederko, The' coura-
;eous Frederick ; Elomnipotente Jorge, The mighty
feorge,&c. •
The article is omitted in Spanish^ as it is in Eng-
lish^ before the Comparatives.
K 4 • llifasK5\a.
136 .The ELEMENTS of ^
Example. — Mas vjvimos^ mas aprendetMs^ The
longer we live^ the more we learn; Mas se dk
priissa^ menos se adeHnta^ The more haste, tbe'w6rse
speed.
When we speak of substances, or things in general,
asTof gold, silver, ^c. or of virtues, vices, passions,
arts, sciences, or plays, we always make use of th«
Article in Spanish^ though it be omitted in English.
Ejcample. — El oro y la plat a todo lo puiden^ Gold
and silver do all things ; Lanecessidad es madred&la
mvindony Necessity is the mother of invention; Dn
loirtitd no ptiide hallarse con el vicio^ Virtue caHtlot
agree with vice ; La Philosophiay es una ciencia miii
Hohle^ Philosophy is a very noble science ; Juguemosa
los naipes, Let us play at cards.
N
C H A P. II.
I
Of NouKs.
'OUNS are, as we have said, cither Substantives
or Adjectives. A great many Substantives,
and some Adjectives, may be made Diminutives in
Spanish, to represent the thing spoken ofas fi//fe/
or Augmetitatives, to represent it as greater,
]bimitiutives are made by adding to the Substan-
tives ending in o; or of the Masculine Gender, Ub,
ilOy icOf etej uelb^ or ejo ; and to those of the Feminine,
l//a, ita, ica^ eta^ ieia^ or e/a, taking off the o.
Example. — From libroj a book, are formed these
Diminutives, librilh^ librito^ librico^ librSte^ libruSto^
librejo ; and from fHesa^ a table, mesllla, mesita, mesica^
mesetd, mesuela.
Diminutives ending in ilb and //o, denotef cbil-
tempt ; as, Ubrillo, librejo^ a pitiful little book ; but
those ending in ito otico only denote smallness, slnd
sometimes kindness, as well a$ those ending in (te
the SpiiKiSH Gbammar. 137
wa&ino ; as, mpzete^ a young lad ; palomino^ a young
.pigeon.
' The same is likewise used in Adjectives ; as from
bonite; we say, bonico^'bonitilloj bonitico, a little pret-
ty*,- from gr&ndey grandecito, grayideciUo, &c. some-
what large ; and we form the Feminine by changing
the last into a ; as, bonitica, grandezica.
The Augmentatives, which represent the thing as
bigger or great without comparison, are formed by
adding to the Noun on^ ote^ or azo; as, hombre^ a
man ; hombron^ hombrott^ hombrazo^ a great strong
man ; perro^ a dog ; perron^ perronazo^ perrate, per-
rizOj a great mastiff or barn-dog.
Of Adjectives.
All the Adjectives ending in o make their Femi-
nine by changing o into a.
When the Adjectives primero^ first, buino^ good,
are before a Noun of the Masculine Gender, the o is
taken off; .and so we say, el primer hombre, the first
man ; un buen libra ^ a good book.
Of Degrees of Comparison.
In all the Adjectives there are three, degrees of
Comparison, ^
The Positive, which only denotes plainly what the
tiling is ; as, hermoso^ handsome ; docto^ learned, Sgc^
The Comparative is made by adding mas^ more,
to the Adjective ; as, mas ricoy more rich ; mas po-
dercso^ more powerful ; mas facily more easy ; mas
cap&Zy more capable, Sgc.
The Superlative is formed either by adding muy^
very, to the Noun Adjective, as, muy alto^ very tall ;
fhu^ utily very useful, Sfc\ or in the Nouns ending in
0, by taking off theo, and adding isimo for the Mas-
culine^ and Uima, for the Feminine ; as from docto,
le^tned, dottisim^^ dfictisimaiVery ItSLttied; from claro,
ckan ^tarisimOf eUtrisima^ very clear : but if the Pc-
sitive has another termimatioa than o, then, by only
138 /j7/d ELEMENTS ^
lidding '^^imo, ishna^ you make the Superlative .;^a3,
from vily base, ^'UisimOy vilisima^ very base.
Observe, that the following Adjectives make
their .Comparative in one word, without adding
fnas; and that it varies quite from the Positive,
though their Superlative is formed by the same
rules as expressed above.
Bueno, good ; mejory better ; bonisimo^ or aptimo,
very good ; or the best of all.
MalOy bad ; peSr, worse ; malisimoy or pesimo, very
bad, or the worst of all.
Grande, great; mayor, greater; grandisimo or
mawimOy very great, or the greatest of all.
Pequeno^ little ; menon^ less ; pequenisimo, or mimmo,
the least of alL
MuchOy much; mas^ more; muchisimo, most of alL
Pocoy little ; menoSy less ; poquisimOy the least of aU.
These two are without a Positive and Compara^
tive ; acdrrimOf may uberrimo, ma, very tenacious^
very fruitful.
Of Genders.
Nouns, in Spanish^ as we have said, are either
Masculine or Feminine ; since there is no Neutral
Noun. The only means of knowing the Gender of
Nouns is by their termination, as follows :
Nouns ending in a are generally of the Feminine
Gender; as, 7nesay a table; "ventana, a window;
pluma^ a pen, Sgc. You must except dia, a. day ;
planet Uy a planet; comet a, a comet; prophet a^ a.pn>
phet ; evangeli&tay an evangelist; poeta^ a poet; Je^
suita, a Jesuit ;: and other Nouns ending in a ber
longing to a man. Those derived from the Greek are "
likewise Masculine, as, dogma, a dogma; problema^.
a problem ; thima, a text ; systhema, a system ; mr
blima, an emblem ; paradbxa, a paradox.
. Nouns ending in e are generally of the Masculine
Gender ; as, dtente, a tooth ; monte, a mountain ;
inte, a being ; ^aUe, a valley ifuirte, a sort ; vUntre^
the belly ; accidinte^ an accident, ^c.
The
the Spanish Grammar. 1S9
TbC' exceptions are,- p^ ■ faith ;fuinte^ a fountain ;
llave^ a key; kche, milk; mente, the mind; torre^ a
tower/ pestCy plltgue ; artadej a duck ; aoe, a fowl ;
caile^i a Street ;• came, fleshy or meat ; corte^ a Prince's
court ; corriSnte, a current ;e^^ae, a species \frente^
the forehead ; gente, people ; m^ertej death ; mVw,
snow; wocAe, night ; . nubCj a cloud ; wat?tf, a ship ;
puente, a bridge ;» />tfr/e, part-; serpUntCy a serpent ;
lidbre, a hare ; ma?2S€d^mbrey''me€kness.
Nouns ending in r^, with a mute letter before it,
are. also of the Feminine Gender ; as, costimbre, a
custom ;..^flwg*re, the blood ; pes^iMmbrty grief; mu-
ckedimbrcy multitude, quantity; lumbre, fire, SfC.
But, these are excepted, cobre^ copper ; co/*re, a trunk ;
nombre^ a name; enxamorcj a swarm ; also- the names
of months, Septiembre^ OcHbre^ NoviembrCj Diciem^
br^y which are Masculine.
. Nouns ending in i are Masculine, w^hen they are
dented from the Arabiok ; as, alheli^ a clove gilli-
flower ; alkoli^ a granary ; zahori, one who pretends
to -see through the earth, stone walls, &c. But,
when such words come from the Greek, they are
Feminine; as, IrtasiySL rapture; syntazi, syntax.
Nouns ending in osltc of the Masculine Gender;
as, libra, a book; brazo, an arm ; vesiido, a garment;
espejo, a looking glass, <Spc. except mano, a band ;
TiiOj a ship.
Tlie Nouns ending in u are Masculine ; as espiri^
tUy spirit ; impetu, violence, Sgc.
Nouns ending in^ are Feminine ; as ley, law ; grey^
a flock ; except Rey, a King ; Vtrrey, a viceroy.
This is all that can be said about the Gender of
Nouns ending in Vowels ; now let us speak of the
Gender of Nouns that end in Consonants.
Nouns endingini/, are generally of the Feminine
Gender; ^s,facilidad, facility ; sagacidady sagacity;
habiMdd, ability, &c. except oesped, a turf; huespidy
an host or guest ; ardid, a stratagem ; adalid, a leader ;
almid, a sort of measure ; at&tid, a coffin ; laud, a
lute, which are Masculine ; ^Qirtnd^ virtue, and all
/
140 The ELEMENTS of
those that come from the Lqtm Noum ending in
/{{/p, are Feminine.
Nouns ending in I a,re Masculine ; as, arahdil^ a
roll or list ; pedema^ a flint; lebrel^ a greyhound ;
perexily jpdjsUy. You must except c4^ lime ; silj
salt: sendl, a sign or tokien ; carcelyS, prison ; Ai/^
the gall ; iwiV/, noiiey ; /w//, skin.
Nqui^ ending in n are Masculine ; as, carbon,
coal ; salmon^ salmon ; esturion^ sturgeon ; aturi^ Xwxh
ny fish ; arincon^ herron ; rincofiy corner ; goniofiy a
sparrow; abispon^ a waspjiSfC. except 5«Vw, the temple
of the head ; sartin, a frying pan ; and all wOrds
from the Latin ending in go ; as, imigen, an image,
from imago ; margen^ a margin ; also all the Nouns
from the Latin in tio or sio; as acciony action; pa^
sionj passion; r^^^i^, reason, <^c. are all Feminine. ' *
Nouns ending in rare Masculine; asaw^r, love;
dolor^ grief, pain ; temblor^ trembling ; alcazar, a pa-
lace ; ambir, amber, &c. except seg^r^ an ax ; florj a
flower; labor^ work.
Nouns ending in i^ are Masculine ; as, combes^ tl^
deck of a ship; pais^ a country or landskip; except
mieSy harvest ; tos^ a cough.
Nouns, ending in z, are for the most part Femi-
nine; as, jGwjs, peace ; wiw/s, childhood ; nariZjlhiQ
nose ; hdz^ a sickle ; luz, light ; sordez^ surdity ; in-
trepidez, intrepidity, S^c. except agraz, verjuice;
antifazy a veil to cover the face; almirSz, a mor-
tar; peZf a fish ; varniz, varnish ; tapiz^ a carpet ;
matizy a shadowing in pa,inting ; arroz, rice ; albor-
n6z, a Moorish coat
All Nouns signifying a male must be of the Mas-
culine Gender ; as DAque^ Duke ; Maries, a Mar*
quis ; Conde, a Count*; albacJa, executor of a
will ; but those denoting a female are of course
Feminine.
Observe, that there are Nouns used by authors
sometimes in the Masculine, sometimes in the Fe»
minine ; as. Arte, canity coloTy eclipse^ embUmaj fwrfri
irdm, margen, ofigen^ thima. The most constantly
theSTAvnn Grammar. 141
used of tbese, ir/e, canal^ eclipse^ embUma^ ihhna,
origen^Ktt mascalines : Colore ordinymar^ and m&rgen,
are common to both Genders. .
• I «
Ali^— — «***i— 1^1*— ■ » 1 1 * ■ I —^i— ^»XN
CHAP. III.
Of the Cortstrttction of Nouns Substantive.
TT'HE construction of Nouns Substantive is al-
most the same in Spanish as in English; that is,
when two Substantives come together, so that the
one depends on the other, then the latter is put in
the Genitive Case.
Examples. — La iglesia de DiaSj The churcb of
Gocf; lla vent etna del quarto^ T\\t window of the
room.
When several Genitives meet together, then the
Particle de is only put before the first.
Example. — Es professor de physica^ anatamia, geo-
graphiOy &c. He is a professor of physic, anatomy,
geography, 8sc.
Sonnietimes this Genitive is turned into an Ad-
jective.
Examples. — El ambr paterno^ Paternal love ; La
terniza matirna^ Motherly tenderness.
When two Substantives Singular are the Nomi-
native of a Verb, this must be put in the Plural.
Example. — Mi hermanoy mi pddre est An en el cam-
po, My brother and father are in the country.
If the Nominative is a collective name, the Verb
is always put in the Singular.
Examples. — La genre se aoiso^ The people were
advised ; Toda la cmdad assistio, All the city was
present*
us the ELEMENtS «f
Of the Construction ^ Adjectives.
1. Adjectives signifying desire, knowledge, ti*
membrance, ignorance, or forgetling, and such lik^,
require the Genitife after them, if a Noun folio wai;
and the present Infinitive with the Particle Zfe, if it
be a Verb.
Examples./— £^ mui ambiciiso de gtoriA^ He is very
ambitious of glory ; Estoy deseoso de'viajar^ I am
desirous of travelHng; Mi amigo es codiciosp de su
dinirOj My friend is avaricious of his money ; Esta •
gente es prSdiga de su vida^ These people are prodi«
gal of their life ; Pedro est a mtii deseoso de saber ^'Sj^
ter h very desirous of learning.
2. The Adjectives expressing attention, applica^
tion, or negligence, have en after them.
Examples.— jE^ cuidadaso en sus negScios, He is
careful of his affairs ; Es descuidado en todo^ He is
heedless of all ; Es mui atento en sus modos^ Hei»
very careful of his m^anners.
3. The Adjectives signifying worthiness or twi*
worthiness, shame, fear, joy, are followed by the
* Sign of the Genitive, de.
Examples. — Los pobres son dignos de eompission^
The poor are worthy of compassion; Los embus teros
son indignos de ateficion^ The cheats are unworthy
of attention ; Es vergonzoso de esta accion^ He is
ashamed of this action ; De nada es temerSso, He is
afraid of nothing; Es mui amigo de chrne^ He. is
very fond of meat ; Esta mui alegre de "ver me^ He vs
very glad to see me.
4. Tlie Adjectives expressing certainty, inno-
cence, capacity, doubt, jealousy, are also followed
by the sign of the Genitive,
Examples. — Es innocente de lo que leacusan^Jie is
innocent of what he is accused of; Esta vm cierto
de esto? Are you certain of it ? Pedro es capaz de
ensenar, Peter is capable to teach ; Es incapdz de ha^
X cerlOf.
the SfAMSH GllAUMAR. 145-
c^rhy He is not capable of doing it ; Es mui zcUso
de m mugeVf He is very jealous of his wife.
5. Nouns, Partitives, and certain Interrogativest
requiie the Genitive; as, algino^ nunguno^ uno^ qualr
quiSr^ printero^ seg/indo, Sec.
Examples. — JlgunOdejvosotfoSy Somebody of you;
ITno de hs dos^ One of the two; QmlQtdir de ellos.
Any of them ; De que se trata en Paris ? What do
they say in Paris? De quien habla vm? What do
you speak of.
6. Adjectives signifying fulness, emptiness, plen*
ty or want, require also dc.
Examples. — Lleno de disparates, Full of nonsense ;
Falto dejuiciOf Without his senses; Pais abundantc
de oro^ A country abounding in gold ; La tierraestd
llena de picaros, The country is full of rogues.
7. Adjectives whereby is signified profit, dispro-
fit, likeness,^ unlikeness, submitting or belonging to ^
something, govern the Dative Case.
Examples. — Esto es util a la navegacion, That is
Useful to navigation ;- Es prqt'echS^o a la saludy It is
good for health ; '4 todos es gustosa la noticia, These
news are agreeable to all ; Eslo es igual a xiquHlo^
This is equal to that; Es parecido a supadre^ He is
like his father ; Es kaldswRey, He is loyal to his
King; Molest o a iodosy Plaguing every body.
8. Adjectives expressing the length, breadth, or
tJiickness of any thing, must be in the Genitive.
Examples. — Esta ciudad tiene tres millas de largo^
This city is three miles long ; Qiidntos pies de alto
tiene aquilla tor re? .How many feet high is that
tower? ElpunQ es de dos varas de anchoy The cloth
is two yards wide.
g. Adjectives signifying experience, knowledge,
or science, require ew after them.
Examples.-r-£^ versado en libros, He is versed in
books; Este hombre esexperto wmedicina, This man
is
144 The ELEMENTS of
19 expert in physic ; Juan es mui perito en lanavega^
cion^ John is very skilful in navigation.
Of the Numerals.
. AH the Numerals govern the Genitive Case.
The Cardinals ; as, primeroy segindo, tercero^ &c.
aSj El primero de los Reyes^ The first of the Kings.
Distributives; as, De dos en dos^ Two by two, &c.
Partitives; as, cada uno^ alguno, unoy otro: Ex.
Vendra alguno de elks ? Will apy of them come?
Collectives; as, una dozena^ qmnzina^ &c Ex.
Una dozena de kuevos, A dozen of eggs.
Augmentatives ; as, lo doble^ lo tHple^ &c.
Universal; as, ning^no^nada, none, nothing: Ex.
Nada de esto quiero, I like nothing of this.
Of the Comparatives.
The Comparative is not made of the Positive in
S^anishy as in Latin and English^ but by adding moj,
more, or menos^ less ; whicn govern que^ signifying
than; in which all the force of the comparison coii-
sists : as, El todo es niaybr qui la parte^ The whole n
greater than the part ; Esto es peor que aquillo^ This
is worse than that ; Juan es mtnos rico qw Pedro^
John is less rich than Peter.
Mas and menos are also sometimes followed by
the Genitive, when they express a quantity, with-
out any particula?^ comparison; Ex. Es masdiscriio
de h que parice. He is. more wise than it appears :
Es menos sabio de lo que se piensa, He is less learned
than it is thought.
When the Articles e/, la, or lo, are placed before
mas ox menosy then they require the Genitive; as,
El mas astdto de los hombres^ The most cunning of
all men ; La mas discreta mug6r del mundo^ The most
discreet woman in the world ; £/ mas hermoso de
todo, The most beautiful of all.
t
tie Stxifisn GftAMMAH. 145
CHAP. IV.
()f Pronouns, and their ConJstruotion*
PRONOUNS, as we have said, are words substi-
tuted instead of Nduns, to express the person
or thing before named, and avoid a repetition.
There are several sorts of Pronouns ; viz. Person-
als or Primitives, Possessives, Demonstratives, Re-
latives, and lndefinitie^«
Of Personals.
Pronouns Personal express either the person who
speaks, to whom, or of whom one speaks ; as, yo^ I ;
tu^ thou ; e/, he ; elUiy she ; nosotroSy nosotras^ we ;
'vosotros, vosotrasy ye ; ellos, they ; or ellaSy they, speak-
ing of the Feminine.
Observe, that mismo, in the Masculine, and mi^ .
Tna^ in the Feminine, is added sometimes to these
Pronouns Personal, in order to give more strength
to the expression ; as,
1 . Yo tnUmo, my self ; j^o mismay myself, when a wo-
man speaks in the Singular, and nosotros mismos^ or
nasotras mismas^ ourselves, in the Plural Number.
2. Tu mismoy tu misnidy in the Singular, thyself ;
vosotros mismos; vosotrasmismaSf yourselves, for the
Masculine and Feminine.
3. EimUmOy himself, for the Singular Masculine ;
ellos mismoSj themselves, for the Plural.
4. Ella mkma^ herself, for the Singular Femi-
nine ; eUas mismas^ themselves, for the Plural.
5. Se, one's self, which has no Plural, and is CQua-
xnon to both Genders in Spanish as in English^ is
used in'fin indeterminate sense.
146 The ELEkENTS of
When the Verb expressing the action or passion of
a subject reflects the sense upon the same, then the
Reciprocals, iney /e, se^ and nos, os^ se^ are made use of
before or after such Verbs; and^i si tnismo, a si misma,
or a si mismos^ a si mismas, may be added before the
Verb and the said Reciprocals : therefore yo mismo^iu
misjno, &c. serve only as Nominatives to such Verb.
Examples^ — Mc amoy or me cimo a mi mismOy or a mi
mismUy I love myself; Te amasy or te amas a ti mUmo,
ov^ timisma^ Thou lovest thyself; Scama^ or se ama
asi mismo, or a si misma. He loves himself, or she loves
herself; Nos am&mos a nosotros mismos, or a nosotras
mismasy We love ourselves; os am&is d vosotros mis-
mds, or a vosdtras7nismaSj Ye love yourselves ; Seaman
M si mismoSy or a si mismas. They love themselves.
iV. jB. All Nouns or Pronouns, excepting the,
four Personals, i/o^ I ; tu, thou ; nosotros, we ; voso-
trosy ye ; belong to the third Person.
The first Pronoun Personal, yo, I, is either put be-
fore the Verb or not, because in Spanish the termi-
nations differ in the several Persons of Tenses.
The same may be said of the other Pronouns, ex-
cepting the third Pronoun, el or elltty he and she,
which are expressed in order to shew the, difference
of Gender of the Nominative,
We seldom make use in Spanish of the second Per-
son Singular or Plural, except through a great fami-
liarity among friends, or speaking to God ; also be-
tween a wife and husband to themselves, or when
parents address their children, masters their servants.
Examples — O Dios, s6is vos mi Padre verdad^ro,
O God, thou art my true Father ; 7u ires un buen
amigOy Thou art a good friend.
But when we speak in Spain to others than the
above mentioned, then, instead of tu and ^os, we
make use of usted in the Singular, and of ustedes in
the Plural, which are a contraction ofx)U€Stra mercidy
and vuestras mercedeSy you, your Worship, your fa-
vour, and are signs of the third Person. In writing,
mtTd
M^SpANiJSH Grammar. 147^
Usted is expressed by v. m. or v.m^. in the Sidgdlar^
and 's.'m^. in the Plural.
There are other contractions of titles made in
speaking, ^s^ussia for vuistra Senoria, ussencia for
vuistra Excdencia ; these are alsQ signs of the third
Person : therefore, the Verb following must be iii
the third Person Singular or Plural. '
Examples. — Como esta v. m. ? How do you do?
Van V. m. s, al campo? Do you go to the country ?
Buenosdias tenga v. m. Good-tnorrow, or Good- day ;
Buenas noches tenga v. m. Good night to you, Sir.
Observe here, that when an Adjective comes ^f-
ter vuestramerced, vuestra Scoria, Excelenda, Sec. it
does not agree in Gender with v. m^. xf^. A'", &:c. but
with the Persbn we speak to, or of.
Examples. — When to a man we say, w. m. rf. es
rnui bueno ; You are very good : F". Exd^. sia bieri
venido ; Your Eixcellency is welcome. When we
speak to a lady or woman, thus ; Es V. M^. muyher-
mosa^ You are very beautiful ; Son V. M^\ muy dis-
eretas, You are very discreet; Es F*. 5^ generosissi-
ma, Your ladyship is very generous.
Nos is generally used by the King, a Governor, a
Bishop, and a Notary in tneir writings ; as Nos man-
damoSyScc. We command; and then it signifies we
in English ; but nos before or after a Verb in Spanish
signifies us in English ; as, Nos ha concedido esta mer--
cid. He has granted us this favour ; He nos tiempo,
Give us time; No nos diga esto. Do not tell us this.
Vos is also applied to a single person, but only
speaking to inferiors, or between familiar friends, to
avoid the word thou, /w, which would be too gross
and unmannerly, as always made use of in speaking
to slaves^or dogs.
Sometimes vos loses the v, as in the second Per- '
son Plural of a Reciprocal Verb ; Ex. Vos os levan-
tdis tempr&no. You get up soon ; also before other
Verbs ; as, Yo os dare^ I will give you : Pedro os en-
tregard mi carta, Peter will deliver you my letter ;
Idos a otra parte, Go somewhere else.
. L2 , 1lo%
us The ELEMENTS of
Los and las^e sometimes construed with the fir^l^
and second Persons Plural ; as, Los que sonm J^spOr
nokSy amemo^ a nuestra pdtria^ We that are Spaniards,
let us love our country ; Las gue somqs casadas^ obe--
dezcamos a nuestros maridoSy vVe who are m^ried,
let us obey our husbands.
Miy tiy sif are used after Prepositions ; as, cerca de
mi, near to me ; para ti, for thee ; por si, by himself ;
but after con, with, the syllable g*<> must be added to
these Pronouns ; as, con migo, with me ; con tigo^
with thee? con sigo, with himself or herself.
Me, te, se, are joined to Verbs, and stand for the
Dative and Accusative Cases, as, Diome, He gave
me ; Deseo seroirtc, I desire to serve thee ; Anme^
He loves himself.
Tliey are also placed in the reciprocal Verbs; as,
irse, to go; passearse, to walk. Se before the third
person Singular of a Verb answers to the English Pas-
sive Impersonal ; as, Se dicCy It is said ; Se decia, It
was said, Sec. then the Verb has no determinate
Nominative, and piay be called Passive ImpersonaL
Observe, that the obhque Pronouns, fo, la, le, hs^
las, les, mcy te, se, nos, os, when placed after Verbs,
are joiried to them ; as, Amola, I love her ; Vik, I
saw him ; Hareloy I will do it ; Dirajne, He will tell
me? IrAse, He will go, (§'c.
Formerly, when le, la, les, tos, las, were joined to
the present Infinitive Mood, they changed the l^t
r into /, thus; amajle, instead of amarle, to love
him ; decille, instead of decirle, ;. and it is so found
in old books, but it is now quite out of ijse.
When the Pronoun is referred to a Noun Mas-
culine, then le must be made use of; and when to
a Noun Feminine, then la is used. When it hs^
reference to a part of a sentence or a clause, then
we use loj in the Neuter.
Of Possessives. ^
Pronouns Possessive are so called because tho^
express the possession : they are of two sorts^ w?.
Conjunctives and Absolutes.
The
^e Spanish Grammar. 14ft
The Conjdnctives have their name from their
being joined to substantives ; they are six, as we
hive daid ; mi^ my ; tti^ thy ; su, his or her ; nuistro^
nUlstra^ our ; vuestrOy vuistra^ you ; sti^ their. Su
signifies also its. Their Plural is made by adding
an s ; as misy tm, suSy &c. They are declined with
the Particles £/(? and ay and are applied to SubsUin-
tives Singular, as well as Plural.
Miy my, shows the f)ossession of the first Person
Singular ; tUy thy, that of the second ; and sUy his,
that of the third ; but su is always used in speaking
with usted) and so they never said tu librOy thy
book, but su libro^ putting the Pronoun of the third
Person instead of that of the second.
NuestrOy nuestrUy our, shews the possession of the
first Person Plural ; vuestrOy vuestrUy your, that of
the second ; and sUy their or its, that of the third; ob-
serving that su is also made use of in the room of
vuistrOy vufstrUy in the polite way of speaking.
Examples. — Tengo su librOy I have your book ; He
msto sus obrasy I have seen their works ; Sus qjos son
htrmbsosy y su boca agraciada. Your eyes are hand-
some, and your mouth graceful.
In these examples ^4? 2/j/^ is understood, or v?. m. s.
It is to be observed, that these Conjunctives must
always be put before Substantives, as in English.
Possessives are also called Absolute, because they
may go without a Substantive: there are six of
them, viz. mioy miuy mine; tij/Oy tuya, thine ; sHyo,
' sitfOy his or hers ; nuestro, nuistrUy ours ; vuistro,
"ouestray yours ; siyo, s&yOy theirs ; and their Plural
by adding an s tp the Singular.
The three Articles are sometimes used before
these Pronouns.
Examples. — Cuyo es,este sombrero ? es el niiay or
es tnioy Whose hat is this ? it is mine ; Este anillo es
el iniSOy This is my ring ; Esta plufna es la miay This
is my pen.
Zo midf to tuyOy h suyOy &c. signifies what is mine,
i 3 thine
150 The ELEMENTS of
' thine^ his ; but la mia, la fuya^ la suya^ signifies
iheci, thy^ 8cc.
Examples. — Saldre con lamia^ I will obtain it;
Saldri con lajuya^ He will obtain it; Con la tuya
addantCy Go on with your resolution.
Los mipSf los suyoSy &c. signify my relationSy my
friends^ my people ; as, Los mios no me quier^n^ My
parents do not like taie ; Vaya el con los suyos. Let
hjm go with his people, his countrymen, <^'c.
Of Demonstratives,
These Pronouns are called Demonstratives, be*
cause they serve to shew things or persons, and dc«-
termine their distance.
There are three Demonstratives in Spanish^ as was
already said, viz. esie^esta.esto^ this; eseyCsa^eso^ that;
aquel, aquella, aquellOy that : but there is this difference
between them, that le^/e denotes athing near the per-
son who speaks, ese a thing near him we speak to,
andaj//e/expresses something at a distance from both.
Examples — Kstapluma es burna^ This pen is good ;
Ese pais en que vive^ That country where you live ;
Aquelreino de Mexico^ es muipoblddOy That kingdom
01 Mexico is well peopled.
The same rule must be applied to the Feminine,
est ay esUy d^uella; and to the Neutral, estOy eso,
aquello'y and so of their Plural Number, estos^ essos,
aquHlos ; estaSy esasy aquHlas.
En estas y en estotras signifies in the mean whik,
and is the same 2ls entre tanto. En estOy by this, is
also used adverbially, to express that an action was
interrupted by something.
Aquely aquella^ are sometimes joined with the first
Pronoun Personal, yo or nos ; and then it stands for
the First Person, and gives more energy to the sen-
tence; as, Yo aquel qtce en tiempos pasddosy &c. I, the
very same who in former times, S^x. Yo aqueUa que
gozaba de tantos gustos^ I, the same woman who en-
joved so many pleasures, S^c.
Observe,
the Spanish Grammar. 151'
Observfe; that mismay misma, mismoSy mUniaSy may
Be joined with the three Pronouns Demonstratives,
estCf &C. in the Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter
..Genders. • ,
Examples.— jE^/tf misma flor quiero^ I like this
flower ; Ese mimio Ubro leo, I -read the very same
book ; Esto mismo digo^ I say the very same thing ;
Aquitto mismo hizo. He made the very same thih^.
Otro, otrUy afe also joined with the said Pro-
nouns; and then we say, estotro^.estiira; es6tro,
esbtra ; as, Estaban hablando da esto y dc estotro^
They were talking of this and that.
Of Relatives, Interrogatives, and Indefinites.
i. QuCy who, that, which, is relative, and may
have reference to any thing, either man, beast, Sfc.
as, El Ubro que tengo^ the book that 1 have ; El
hombro que *oeo^ The man whom I see ; El maestro
queensefia^ The master who teaches.
QuCy what, is also interrogative ; as, Que le ha su-
cedido? What happened to him? Que hSjnbrees estef
What man is this? Que dice vm? What do you say ?
Que serves also to express admiration ; as, Que
palAcio! que quartos! que gakrias! What a palace !
what rooms ! what galleries !
Qucj that, after a Verb, is a Particle governing
the following Verb ; as, Mandequeviniissey I ordered
that he should come.
Que, when used as a Particle Comparative, s^ignifies
than^ and as in English ; so we say, Esto es mejor que
estotroy This is better than the other ; Es tanto que
puede ser, Jt is as much as can be. We use to say
likewise. Que sea assi, que no sea^ Let it be so or not ;
Quelluevay o que no llueva, Let it rain or not.
Queis also causative, and stands for porque; as,
HagalOy queyo nopuedOy Let him do it, for 1 cannot.
2. Qualy which, is a relative expressing the quality
of things ; as, No sabimos qual es bu^no, qual es malOy
qual de este color^ qual del otrOy We do not know
L4 '^\\\0^
§'
152 The ELEMENTS qf
which is good, which is b^d^ which of this colour,
which of another.
GtjAal is sometimes a Particle disjunctive, and then
it signifies some\ as, Cantaban todcSy qualconvok
dulce^ qual con voz doliente,. All sung, some Willi a
sweet voice, and some with a dismal one.
Qjual is also comparative ; as, Qual es la mddrey tal
es la hija. Such as the mother is, such is the daugh-
ter. Sometimes it is distributive ; as, Qualsalta, qttal
cantOy qualricy One jumps, one sings, another laughs.
Qualy who, being joined to the Articles e^ /a, lo^
or los and tas^ is relative : it is also interrogative : as
Qual queire vfn? Which will you have of them ? Tal
qtial is also used to mean a little quantity of one
thing ; as, Tal qual libra tengOy I have a few books.
QjiieHy quieneSy who, is interrogative, and some-
times relative ; as, Quien es este hombre ? Who is
this man ? or, El Key, quien havia visto lo quepassiba^
The King, who had seen what passed. It is alsodis-*
tributive; as, Q,uien coge el.orOy quien la plata^ (fuien
los diamdntesy One gathers the gold, one the silver,
another the diamonds.
CuyOy cuyUy cuyos, cuyaSj whose, is interrogative^
and then denotes the possession ; as, Cuyo es este
c&ballo? Whose horse is this? It is also relative^ sig^
nify ing of whichy or whose ; as, E^e hombre^ eiiys»
delitosy son tan grandes^ &c. This man, whose critnes
are so great, ^c»
- 1 . I ~ [ • I — ' — ~'^' — "^
CHAP. V.
0/" Veebs, and their Constriicfioh.
TPHE Verb must always agree with its Nomink-
tive in Number and Person. When there are
two Nominatives Singular before a Verb, it must bfc
put in the Plural Number. When a Noun is col-
lective
' I
the SpaiJish Grammar. \ #58
lective the Verb requires the Singular ; not the Plu-
ral, Us \n English ;' so we say, La gente esia mrando^
People are looking. These are the general rules of
Concordance belonging to Verbs.
The Verbs are divided, as we said, into Per3onaU
and Ittipersonals. The first are so called, because they
generally express actions, passions, &c. of persoUB.*
There are in Spanish folir - sorts of Verbs Personal,
viz. ActivCy Passixky Netstery and Reciprocal.
The Actvce expresses an action upon something ;
as, Comop&n^ I eat bread. So the action of eating is
directed to bread, as to its object.
The Passive shews, that the person or thing spoken
of is the object of the action of another person or
thing; as, Dioses am&do, God is loved. But observe,
that there is in Spanish another way of making the
Passive, by adding the relative^e to the third Person '
Singular or Plural : Ex. Se ama a Dios, God is loved.
The Neuter properly is that which makes a per-
fect sense by itself; as, correr, to run; assentir^ to
assent ; blasphemhr^ to blaspheme, &c.
The Reciprocal is that which returns the sense so,
that the action or passion remains in its subj^ect; as,
amirse, to love oneself; perderse^ to lose oneself, ^c.
Observe, that in the Spanish language, the same
Verb thiay become actvoe^ passive, neuter, or reci-
procaly according to its different senses; as, acost&r,
to put one to bed, is active, and is made passive by
conjugating it with the Verb estar, and the Parti-
cle ttcostado ; ais, Pedro esta acostddo, Peter is in
bed. When it signifies to side, to take a party, to
Engage in a faction, then it is Neuter ; as, Todo el
pueblo istcosto a laparie de su Rey, All the peojile took
the party of their King. When the same Verb
signifies to come near one placie, it is a Reciprocal ;
as, Liaha tales golpeSy qm.nunca pudieron acostarse i
e/, He gave such strokes, that they neveir could
come up with him.
. The Verbs Impersonal Are divided into tw(^ the
Actives and Passives.
!54 The ELEMENTS of^ ^
• Ihb Actives are those which do not admit of per- '
sons, as, hel&r^ to freeze ; llover^ to rain ; because ;
you cannot say, hicl^ I freeze ; el llueve^ He rains. 1
The Passive Impersonals are formed in Spanish of the ]
third-Person Singular of the Verb made impersonal^ '
by adding the Particle se; and it is to be observed,
that we make more use of this way of expressing the ' ^
Passive in the third person, than by the Verbs Auxi-
liary *er and e^/4r, with the Participle Passive of the
Verb conjugated ' therefore se citenta is better for '
it is reported^ than es contado; as will be explained ''■
at large in speaking of their construction.
Of the Auxiliary Verbs^ Haber, To have, !Estar.
a7id Ser, To be, &c.
The Verb kaber is made use of to conjugate; alt
the compound Tenses of Verbs ; as, Yoheamado^yk
habla amadoy I have loved, I had loved. Sometimes
the Verb ten^r^ to hold or have, is used to conju- '
gate the compound Tenses; as, Yo tengo de ir al
campo^ I must go to the country.
Haber, signifies nothing by itself, it is only an
auxiliary Verb ; but the word tener in, Spamsh, ex-
presses the possession of something; as, Tengo di-
nerOf I have money, Ti^ne mucha habilid&d^ He has a
great deal of capacity.
Haber^ in account-books and trade, expresses
credit or discharge ; as, Yo he de haber en mUstra
cuenta cien pessos, I must have credit in our account
of one hundred dollars.
Haber is also taken impersonally inSpanish, and
it signifies in English^ there be ; as, Hai mucho aro
en Mej^icOy There is a great quantity of gold in
Mexico ; Habia mucha gente en la iglesia^ There was
a great deal of people in the church.
HabirsCj made reciprocal, is the same as to behaice,
to act; as, Se hubo el Goi^emador con tal discredon^
que todos te admiriron^ The Governor behaved with
such wisdom, that every body admired him.
Haber ^
the Spanish Guam mar. 155
HahiVy used as a Sdbstantive, means th^ xtftakh
<or stock; as Es hombre de haberesy He is a wealt^hy
man, a rich nran ; Virt&d^ Un&ge^ y habhy pocas veces
se encuintran juntos, Virtue, nobility, and riches,
seldom are found together.
Estar and sir, to be, must not be piade use of iil-
jdifferently, though in English there is no word to
distinguish between them. In iSJo^m^A their differ-
ence is very considerable, ser signifying or denoting
the essential and proper quality or quantity of a '
thing; as, ser buino, to be good ; ser malo, to be bad
^r wicked; sir grande, to be big; ser pequiho^ to be
little.^. But estar signifies an accidental quality or
quantity, and serves to denote the place where a
person or thing may be found ; Mi hermano est a en
Londres, My brother is in London ; Estari en casa a
las ires, I will be at home at three o'clock ; Adonde
est a mi relox? Where is my w^tch? Estd sobre la
mesa,' It is upon the table.
, Estar is also used to express the state of health ; as,
esidr malo or enjermo, to be sick ; estar bueno, to be
well. Therefore, in inquiring after a person's health,
we make use of the verb est&r, and never of ^^r; as.
Coma est d su padre? How does your father do r The
answer is, by repeating the Verb estar or not ; esti
bueno, esta malo, he is well or ill ; or bueno, malo.
Where it is to be observed, that bueno and malo do
not signfty good or wicked with the Verb estarj as
they dp with the Verb ser, but well or ill.
In short, estar is used to express any accidental
affection or passion of the soul ; Estehoynbre esta mui
triste^ This man is very melancholy ; Esta mui alegre,
He is very merry ; Estamuy enqjddo el Rey^ The
King is very angry. So. that, as was said, ^^r must
be made use of to denote the inseparable essence or
being; whereas estar implies accidents, as Mi ves-
tido es bueno, pero estS mal hecko, My cloaths are
goocl, but they are ill made; where you may see the
p^seutial Jbcing of the thing itself expressed by the
word
I5fe The ELEMENTS of
word es^ and the accidental fault of its being ill
made, linder the word est&.
Ser is likewise used to express the temper or ha-
bitual disposition of mind, and the condition of a
man in his nature ; as, Este hontbre es dt unginionm
apacible, This man is very good tempered ; il/i hifa
es muy diligSntCj My daughter is very diligent; M&
amigos son muy codiciosoSy My friends are very cove-
tous. But estdr only denotes the accidental affec-
tion of one's soul ; as, A vices esta akgrej a vecti
triste, He is sometimes merry, sometimes sad.
The Verb estar is also taken for to understand^ ilt
to attend; as Estoi en lo que vm. dice^ I attend to your
discourse, or I understand what you say. Some^
times it signifies to consist ; as, En esto estd la Hffi-
dtiltdd, The difficulty consists in this.
Eitdr is also the same as to bcHeve or to kopis; asi
Estoi en que vendra mi amigo, I hope my frieAd will,
come ; Esta en que es muy sdbio^ He believes he is very
learned. This Verb is also used to conjugatfe the
other Verbs chiefly expressing action ; as, Estdi kyin-
dOy estoi escribiendoy I am reading, I am writing, ^.
Estdry with the Particle a after it, signifies Vofc
ready ; as, est&r a cuentas^ to be ready to coiint ; estir
a ex&meny to be ready for examination.
The skme Verb, followed by the Particle de, ex- ,
presses to have the quality or property of what the
Noun means; as, estar de priessa, to be in a hurry;
estdr de casa, to be kept at home; estar de vUge, to
be ready to go on a journey ; estdr de v^V, deserving
to be seen ; estdr de oir^ deserving to be heard.
Estdr with the Preposition en, in, signifies tb it
present in a place ; denoting likewise the actual ac-
tion or passion expressed by Nouns or Verbs fol-
lowing; as Estoi en hacer esto, I intend to do thii;
Estoi en el camp'o, I am in the country ; Estoi eh H^i
'cerky i miist go arid see him.
Estdry with the Preposition//d?r^, denotes theificli-
sation of doing what the following Verbs expreSS,
t but
thf Spawish Gra^mav. 157
but \frithoutafujldeterminatiop;a8,£i$/^i/)k^^
dc LondreSy 1 have a mind to go and leave Lfmdtm.
Estdr, with the Preposition/?or, and the Infinitive
of the Verb following, means, that the thing ex-
pressed by the Verb is not yet done ; as, Esto est a
por escribir, This is not yet written ; Estoesta par
Umpidr^ This is not yet cleaned.
Est Arse, reciprocal, signifies ^o^/oy long, to delay;
as, Porque se esiuvo tantq? Why did you stay 90
long? We say also, EstdrsemuriSndo,estdrs€cayendf^^
estqrse dormien^o. To be dying, to be falling, to be
sljeeping.
Tnere are. a. great many other dictions wherein
' estar is used 3 as the following :
£lstar a la mano, to be at hand, to e:$:pres3 when
one thing is ready to be made use of, or when it is
near to one who wants it. .
Est&r & puntOy to be ready.
Estdr a raya, to be contained in the proper
bpunds and limits.
ilstir bien una cosa, is for a thing to fit, to suit
well ; as. Mi cdsaca me estd bien^ my coat Bts m^
very welL
Estdr de buena d de mala, is, to be ill or good tern*
pered or natured.
Estdr de esquima, is for two persons to fall out
together.
Estdr para ello, .0 estdr de gorja, to be merry, apcj
full of joy.
E^tir en ascuas, to b^e plagued or molested with
spine grief or pain.
Estdr en mano de Ano, to be in one s power, to de-
pend on one.
p^dr en prensa, is to be oppressed with grief, tp
he afflicted with the greatest anguish.
Estdr en si, en sujukio, is for one to have present
^hat he is doings and to fix his attention to it*
'^ ilstdr en todo, to know every thing; also to be very
careful and diligent in business.
Estarse
'♦
158 The ELEMENTS of
Estarst se en sus treces, to be headstrong^ to bcf
very obstinate and stubborn.
Est&rsobre uno^ to press one about some business,
to urge with vehemence and importunity.
Estar unosobre si, is taken for to be prepared for
the execution of any thing.
The above mentioned directions are the greatest
part of the several meanings given to the Verb
estdr in Spanish, which I hope will be very useful to
young beginners. Now we must alsof say some-
thing of the other Auxiliary, Ser, To be.
When ser signifies the possession of a thing, it
governs the Genitive ; as, La calle es del Rey^ The
street belongs to the King ; Esia casa es demipadre^
This house belongs to my father.
Sir de algino, expresses in Spanish, to follow the
opini6n or party of one, or to be his friend ; as Soi
todo de vm. I am yours ; Siimprefue de D. Enrique^
He followed always the part of Mr. Henry.
En ser is taken for a thing to be whole or entire
without any alteration or mutilation; as, Los gine-
f^os estan en ser, The goods are not sold.
Es quien es, signifies that a person behaves as a
gentleman, and that, by his actions, he deserves his
employments. It may also signify that a person is
wicked.
Of the Construction of Verhs Active^ Passive^ ^c
There are in the Spanish Verbs, but four simple
Tenses in the Indicative Mood, viz. the Present,
Preterim perfect, Preterperfect, and Future. The
Imperative has only the Present ; but the Optative
or Subjunctive has the Present, Three Preterimper-
/ects, and the Future. All the rest are compound
Tenses, formed by circumlocution.
The Present expresses the action done when one
is speaking ; as, ro me passeo, I walk ; Yo escrlbo ; I
write, fcfc.
Sometimes
the SiPANMH Grammar. 159
Sometimes the Present is made use of instead of
the first Preterimperfect ; SLSy Como iba caminindo, le
encuentray le desnAda^ y le at a d un arbol^As he was
'going, he meets him, he strips him, and ties him
to a tree.
You must observe likewise, that there is a differ-
ence between the first Preterimperfect and the others,
and it consists in this,that the former must express •
the time when an action passed, but not the latter;
besides, that the first extends farther than the others,
which refer to time lately elapsed. So you may say, Le
vi dosanos ha^ I saw him two years ago ; but you can-
not say Lo he visto dos anos ha, because he visto only
extends to a time so lately past, that it appears to
have something of the Present. This must be parti-
cularly observed, to avoid the frequent equivoca-
tions that may happen, in speaking and writing.
The First Future expresses only that one thing
shall be done ; as, Lo hare^ I shall do it ; but the
compounds imply an obligation to any thing; as,
He de dirkestOy I must, I am obliged to give him this;
as, I will give him this ; Havre de ir d Londy^es, I
shall be obliged to go to London ; Havia dehacer tal
cosa. He was obliged to do such a thi;ig.
The Optative in Spanish has always some signs
annexed to it, or rather some Conjunctions, as,
Oxala^ Sly pkgue a Dios, Would to God, I pray
God, God grant.
The Potential, has iiot signs in Spanish answering
to the English signs, are^ cany may^ might, could, and
should; though some Authors believe that pu^deque,
and e^ menister que, are the signs of this Mood.
The Subjunctive has always some Conjunction
beforfe it; as, si, comOy quando, que, &c.
The two first Imperfects of the Optative or Sub-
junctive. Mood are very often preceded by some of
the- Adverbs, como, que, quando, aAnque, &c. They are -
expressed in English, by the Auxiliary signs, could
and should ; as, Oxala amara la *oirtM, God grant that
you could love virtue ; Si el amase a Dios, t&mbien le.
amaria
160 The ELEMENTS of
amaria DioiSi Should he love God, God also would
love him ; Si trabaj&ra mdsy ganaria dinitOy If he
could work more, he would gain money.
When two Verbs come tqgether with or without
any Nominative Case, then the latter must be in
the Infinitive Mood ; as, Qjuiere vm. aprmder el
Ingles? Will you learn to speak English ; Pedra
deseamucho saber la geometr/a, Peter has a great de-
sire of understanding geometry.
, All Verbs Active govern the Accusative; as,
Quiero la musica, 1 love music : but if they are fol-
lowed by a proper name of God, man, or woman,
or any Noun expressing their qualities or title, then
it governs the Dative Ca$e; as, Amo al Rey^ Hove
the King; Hallaron a Juan en el camino, They
found John in the road.
All Verbs of gesture, moving, going, restipg, qr
doing, as also Verbs that have the word that goes
before, and the word that comes after, both be-
longing to one thing, require the Nominative aifcei
them ; as, Ped^^o vaerrado^ Peter goes on wrong; £/
pobri^ duSrme seguro^ The poor sleep without care.
Also the Verb of the Infinitive Mood has the same
Cases, when Verbs of wishing and tlie like coipe
after them ; as, Todo^ desean ser ricoSy Every body
wishes to be rich ; Antes quisiera ser shbio queparecer-
lOf I had rather be learned than be accounted so.
■
Verbs governing the Genitive.
Vttbs signifying grief, compassion, want, remem*
brance, forgetting, Sfc. will have the Genitive ; as,
Mepesamuchodelamttertedesu hermdno, I am very
sorry for the death of your brother ; Me compadeci
de stis desgrdciaSy I pitied him for his m isfortunes ; Este
hombrecarece dejuiciOyThe man is out of his senses; A^*
chsito de dinerosy I want money ; Perece dc hdmbre^ He
perishes with hunger. De is put before the thing
spoken of in discourse, as, Acuerdese de lo que pic
dixo,
MeSpAKi^H Gramuar. 161
cifiito, Remember what you said to me ; Mc ohide de
todoesto, All this I forgot
The Reciprocals of jeering, boasting, and distrust-
» ing, govern also the Genitive ; z,^jactarse^ gloriarse,
picarse^ descofifiarse, avergonzdrse, correrse^ &c.
Verbs governing the Dative.
All Verbs Active govern the Dative, as we have
said, only when the Substantive represents a person ;
as, Conozco a su amigOy I know his friend, S^c.
The following Verbs belong to this rule of the
Djitive :
Jug&r^ to play ; as, Juego a los naipcs^ I play at
cards ; JugarS a los ci^ntos, I will play at piquet ;
Jughr al axedrizy to play at chess, Sgc.
Obedecer^desobedeceryComplacer^agrad&7*\ zSyObedezco
a Diosy al Rey,, I obey God and the King ; ComplaciS
en todo ^ los sotdados^ In all he pleased the soldiers.
Mand&fy when it signifies to command an army,
company, <§t. require the Accusative; but when
other things, the Dative; as, Davila mand&ba los
cabdlldk, Davila commanded the horse ; Ei Gover-
nddor mandp d todos los citidadinos de rettrarii en sus
casasy The governor ordered all the inhabitante to
retire into their houses.
Ir^ to go ; as, Voi a Paris, I go to Paris ; Ire ma- •
R&na a vSr mi hermano^ I will go to-morrow to see .
my brother.
Jssistiry ayuddr, socorrer, to help, to assist; as
Ayudare al trab&jo, 1 will help to work. ^
Saluddry to sal uteisf greet: as, SalMa muycortes
i todos. He salutes very civilly every body.
Habl&r, to speak ;" llamar^ to c^ll ; satisfacer^ to
satisfy; servir, to serve ;favorecery to favour; desa-
jfiarj to challenge ; absoker, to absolve ; aconsejar^ to
give advice; amenazdr, to thtesLieu.
Verbs of pleasing, displeasing, granting, denyitfg,
. pardoning, as also all sorts of Verbs with these Parti-
cles /oor^or after them, will have the person in the
Dative Case, and often theiriiins in theAeciisative,
^^:A
162 TAr ELEMENTS of
The Impersohals, acontecer, suceder^ avenirj comx-
nh\ impQiHcir^ pertmecer^ placer^ and the like, wiU
often have a Dative, and an Accusative of the'pcr-
vson ; as, A mi me sucedio, It happened to me ; J elle
conviene^ It suit§ him, it is convenient for him; No
U import a A e/, It does not concern him, <^r.
Verbs governing the Accusative.
The Z«/i« Verbs wJiich govern the Accusative of
. the Thing, and the Dative of the Person, goveru
generally the same in Spanish; as, Escribai suher-
mano lo que digo, Write to your brother what I do
say; Dare el diniro a mi sastre, I will give the m'o-
ney to my taylor, Sfc.
Verbs of asking, teaching, arraying, and most of
the Transitive Verbs, have after them the Accusa-
tive Case of the doer or sufferer, whether they be
active or common ; and sometimes Verbs Neuter wiU
\have an Accusative of the thing; as, Goso saiud, I
enjoy ht^\th; Pido est a gracia^ rue go este favor ^ I aftk
this faijr^mr J Toca muy bien la jUiutay el violin^ &c*
He playB. very well on the flutie, the fiddle, 4*^.
Generally Active Verbs require an Accusative^
/yet they sometimes require a Dative, when tlie ac-
tion is directed to some person ; as, mdtar anno, to
kill one ; Itatnar a uno, to call one ; hacer bien, to do
good ; curdr una oifermad, to cure a sickness ; seguir
las ordenes del Rey^ to follow the King's orders ;
descubrir la verdady to discover the truth; ganar
viucho credit Oy to get a great credit.
Si^jTy to be, in the Infinitive, sometimes governs
• an 'Accusatives; z,s^Es bueno sir hombre honrddo. It
is a good thing to be an honest man ^ Que ridiculo es
ser orguUosol How ridiculous it is to be proud and
haughty ! -
Verbs governing ^ the Ablative.
Verbs Passive, and the greatest part of the Reci-
procais; require the Ablative with de or por; as, Fui
Hamddo del Key or por el Rey, I was called by the
JijB^; Me retire de la ciudddj I retired from the city;
tht Spanish Grammar. 163
but you must except these Reciprocals: acostdrse^
rtcqsiirsej^eutarse^ metSrse^introducirse^ &c. all which
must have the Ablative with the Preposition ew, in.
The price of any thing bought or sold, or battered, .
will have the Accusative, \v\\h par ; as, Locompro
porvienpesso^^ He bought it for one hundred dollars;
Me lo vendiopor nienos de lo quevm. dice^ He sold it to
m'€ for less money than you say; Troque mi hacienda
par unas caSas, I exchanged my estate for some houses.
Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, unload-
ing, will have the Ablative: as, EsCa tierra abinda
de trigOy This country abounds with corn ; Eijarrd
estAUeno de agtut^ The mug is full of water; Esta
cargado de miserias^ He is loaded with calamities.'
Verbs that signify receiving, distance, or taking
away^iraust have the Ablative; as, Recibi trcsciSntos
pessos de Juan, I received three hundred dollars of
John ; Sevilla dista ochenta leguas de Madrid^ Se-
ville is eighty leagues from Madrid.
Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, Sgc, will
have the Ablative with con ; as, Rino mas de una hora
con su hermdnoy He quarrelled more than one hour,
with bis brother; Peleo con la mayor valentia. He
fought with the greatest courage.
Lastly, take notice that the following rules are
always observed for the Verbs :
i. If the word governed by the Verb expresses a '
thing animate, it is put in the Dative Case, being
a" particular idiom of the Spanish ; as, Conozco & su
pddrCy I know his father ; Llamo d las tropaSy He
called the troops.
2. Verbs of motion to a place alu^ays govern the
Dative ; as, V6i a la comedian I go to the play : but
Verbs of motion from a place govern the Ablative
with the Particle de ; as, Vuitoo de lH campdhUy I
return from the country. If the motion or passion
is through, or for ^ thing, then the Verbs govern
the Accusative with j^or; as, Passari por Londres^ I
will come by the way of London ; Me han renido
por *cm. They scolded me for you.
- Ms a- ^^
164 The ELEMENTS oj
S. In Spanish, as in Latin, the Accusative Case t$
generally made use of to express a thing indefinite-
ly ; as, Lkvo todo h necessirio, I carry all that which
is necessary ; Hi trahido iodo su caudal, He brought
over all his riches.
4. The Verbs ver, to see, and mirar, to look, diflftr,
because ver required an Accusative; as, Verlo8ci6t&s
abiertoSy To see heaven opened, that is, to find the oc-
casion ; but mircir governs the Dative and Accusa-
tive ; as. Solo mira (i su provecho. He only aims at his
profit ; Vio Cesar una est&tua de Akx&ndro Magna, y
mirandola did un gran suspire, Caesar saw a statue of
Alexander the Great, and, looking at it, he sighed
deeply. When mirar signifies to take care of one,
thfen it governs the Accusative with por ; as. En todo
mropor *om.lri every thing I take care of you.
Of the Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive or
Optative.
When the following Conjunctions are in asentence
between two Verbs, the second is generally put in the
Subjunctive Mood : Ciue,para que,porque, aunque, bien
que,6xala, supestoque,puhtoque,dadoque, afin que, con
que, pues que, Sec. as yoa may see in these examples r
Es menester, es precise que venga, He must come ;
Era precise que vvniSsse, It was necessary that lie
should come; Me al^gro que hay a venido, I am very
glad he is come 5 No se para que pueda servir esto,
I do not know what this is good for ; Paraque venga,
In order that he may come. But observe, Xh^Xporque^
being interrogative or causative, does not require
the Subjunctive; as, Porque corre vm.? Why d^
you ruu?
Aunque, bien que, although^ govern the Subjunc-
tive Mood ; but before the Imperfect, it requiren
the Indicative ; as, Amique suplihdba tanto, Though
he entreated so much.
Oxala requires always the Subjunctive ; but su-
puesto que, dado que, &c. in some Tenses, govern the
Indicative; as, Ptcestg que venia d cabalb. Since be
the Spanish. Grammar. 165
came on horaeback ; Con que 'veudra maZana, So he
will c(^e to-'iDorrow.
The Impersonal Verbs generally govern the Sub-
junctive with que ; butWith this distinction : When
the Impersonal is in lliieipresent or future Tense of
the Indicative Mood, then it requues the Present of
the Subjunctive Mood ; but when the Impersonal, or
any other Verb taken impersonally, is in any of the
Preterites indicative, then it governs the Imperfect,
the Perfect, or Pluperfect of the Subjunctive,/ accord-
ing to the sense ; as, Importa mucho one el Rey vifl
todOi It is of great moment that the king may see
all ; Convino que el principefuesse con e/, It was con-
venient that the Prince should go with him.
'tht Present of the Subjunctive is likewise used
- when the Particlepor is separated from que by an Ad-
jective ; as in this idiom :por grande^por admirable,por
doctOypor sabio que sea^ Though he be great,admirable,
learned, S^C. Un enemigo^ porpequem^ que sea^ siempre
danay An enemy, though little, always hurts.
An Imperative often requires the Present, Preter-
imperfect or Future of the Subjunctive; as, Sea lo
que sea^ Let it ,be what it will, or, Though it be so ;
Suceda Ip qiie sucediesse^ Let happen what would ; Sea
lo quefuere. Happen whkt shall happen, at all events.
The Tenses of the SubjunctiveMood follow gene-
rally these ; luego que, quando, si, comOy aunque, &c. as,
I^uego que venga, saldremos a passear, As soon as he
comes, we will go and take a walk ; quando viniere^
^staremospromptoSyWhenhecotueSy we will be ready.
The Imperfects of the Subjunctive Moods are re-
quired after si, quando, aunque, bycomo, de gusto, con
gusto, de buena, b mala gaiia, d quan de gana, por ven-
tura, acdsOj &c. as, Oy como lo hariayo! How I would
doit ! De buena gana iria a Paris, I would go with
pleasure to Paris ; Por ventura seria el capAz de esto f
Would he be able to do this ? Acaso seenojaria, Per-
haps he would be angry for it.
Observe, thit p^es^ puesque^ aunque^ como^ <^uanoEo^
Ms 'accA
166 TAe ELEMENTS Y
and luegOy may also be construed with all th^ Tenses
of the Indicative Mood; as, Qudndo el Rey lo K)e
todo, no le etiganan, When the King sees every thing,
he is not deceived ; Luego que Ikgo, hable con et.
As soon as he canie, I spoke with him.
In Spanish there is not a general sign before the
Infinitive, as in English the Particle to ; but there
are several Particles used before the Infinitive, of
the same import as to in English^ and they are go-
verned by the preceding Verbs or Nouns. These
Particles are, a/para, de, cony en^poVy hasta^ de spues 4ey
and the Article eL when the Infinitive serves as
Nominative to another Verb.
1. Ay coming between two Verbs, denotes the
second as the object of the first ; as. La tardanza
de nuestras esperanzaSy nos ensena a mortijic&r nues*
tros deseoSy The delay of our hopes teaches us to
mortify our desires.
2. Para denotes the intention or usefulness ; as,
Para probar la paciencia sirve la adversidad. Ad verisi-
ty serves to try one's patience ; Lo hizo para motes-
tarmCy He did it on purpose to plague me. Par;ay after
an Adjective, denotes its object, it is also a sigu of
futurity ; as, A tin estamospara descubrir tacSusa^^
We are still to seek for the cause ; Esta prbmto pa-
tar obedecery He is ready to obey.
De is put between two Verbsy.if the first governs
the Genitive or Ablative ; and when the Substantive
or Adjective governs either of these two Cases, de ^
must go before the following Verbs ; as, Acabo deyer
a mi padrCy I havejust seen my father; ElenfadQy de
oirl&mecausaba sueno; Tired with hearing him, I fell
asleep; Es tiempo de irse. It is time to go away; . *=
Observe, that all these Particles are used in Spanish
before the Infinitive, on the same occasions wh^re
in Englisji tOy foVy o/, withy m, iilly after^ &c. are
placed before ,the Participle Present of the Verb ;
as, St divierte encazdr. He delights in hunting; Por
trabajdr mucho esta malOy By working too niuch he
• is
rte Spanish Grammar.^ 167
rs sicjc ; Pierdesu f tempo enpassear^ Hcloscs his time
in walking; Par robar te ahorvdron, For stealing he
• has been hanged.
" Sometimes the Infinitive takes the Article e/, when
it becomes the Nominal ve to the sentence; as, Ei
'dormir demasi&do no es saludabky Too much sleeping
is unwholesome ; el amaVy loving ; el cant hr^ singing;
where you may see it answers to the Participle Pre-
sent of the English that ^nds in ing, as in these
examples ;
Nunca se cansa de jugar. He is never weary of
playing ; Fueron a peleir^ They went to fighting ;
Venia de bebeVy He came from drinking ; He dt
irme^ sin despedirme ? Shall 1 go away without
taking my leave ?
p
€HAP. IV.-
Of Prepositions.
REPOSITIONS are Particles governing a Case,
some are separable, that is, they may be used
separately, as well as in composition ; some inse-
parable, and are only made use of with the words
of their composition.
- The Separables are a, al^ ante^ co% contra , de, en.
We will treat of each of them, and of their coii-
structjon, separately.
1. A governs the Dative Case; as, A Dios solo
€d6ro, I adore God only. It is also used to*denote
where one goes to ; as VSy a Londrh, I go to Lon-
don. A is also placed before an Infinitive, governed
by another Verb antecedent ; as, Vimos a passeAr,
Let us go to take a walk. ^ •
2. -4 is also used before many Adverbs, and ad-
verbial dictions, to express the nature of some Ac-
tion ; as, i sabiindaSj knowingly ; a iruicOy in ex-
change, or instead ; a sazon, at the time; a brdzo
pdrtmoy by force of both arms ; a todo brdzoymih
all oAe's strength.
M4 3. A
168 TAc ELEMENTS of
S. A is sometimes taken ins^tead of en^ in ; as, i
Wta de tal dictimen^ on seeing such opinioii ; aft
de hombre honr&do^ upon my honour. It is also used
for poVy by ; asi, S^or^ si sera este h dicha el moro en-
cant&do ? Sir, will this be perhaps the enchanted
moor ? insjtead of hacidf towards ; as, Seftie a ellos
con resoluciofij He went to them with courage ; Voir
vio la cara a los enemigos^ He turned his face to the
enemy.
4. Lastly, ^ is a Particle of composition, aqdex-
jpresses in Verbs the action of the Noun Substan*
tive or Adjective they are com posed of; as, acanalir,
to channel; ablandary to appease ; alar gar j to en-
large ; ahicar^ to lessen, S^c. from the Nouns canity
a channel ; blando, soft or peaceable ; .largOj l^ipg;
chicOy little.
Jnte, before, is frequently used in composition,
and expresses precedency, either of time, place, situ-
ation, or action ; as, anteceder, to precede; antecama-
ra^ anti-chamber; flfw^^ce^^^r, antecessor ; ^w^erer, to
foresee, S^Q. Ante or anti^ in composition, signifiei^^i^lgo
contrary to ; as, antechristOy antichrist ; antipapa, aji-
tipppe; antipodas, antipodes; anthnoniay antimony.
Con, with, is a Preposition expressing always in
composition, in the beginning of words, union Jo
action, passion, S^c. as, concurrir, to concur, to join
i^ something; C(?/2't?e/ifr, to agree ; coridescendir yXo
condescend, Sgc. Con, before wi, it, si, requires the
addition of go; as, Venga con migo, Come with me ;
JrS con tigo, 1 shall go with thee^ Habla con sigo,
HiC speaks with himself
Centra^ against, is an Adverb governing the Ac-
jCttsative.; itis also used in composition, and expresseji
contrariety or opposition ; as, contradecir, to contra-
dict ; contr^venir, to act against some precept or
order. When en is joined with contra^ it governs
the Genitive ; as, Ciue dice "om. en contra de esto f
What do you say against this ?
De, of, is u^d in composition before Nouns, Verba^
and Adverbs, when it changes their sigpification; jas,
from
/Ae Spanish Grammar. « 169
frompendencia^ a quarrel, depcndinciay ao affair ; from
poner^ to put, d^auir, to depose ; from fuiira, out,
defuira^ outwardly. This proposition goverqs also
' the Qeniti ve and Ablative ; as, La ley de Dios, The ^
lavf of God ; Vengo de Espana, I come from Spain.
Deserves also to shew the matter a thing is maoeof ;
isy un reUx deoro^ a gold watch ; una cam de maddra^
a wooden house. De is also made use of instead of
par ; as, Penso morir de vergUenza\ He was like to
have died with shame ; De mtedo lo hizo. He did it
through fear ; De is also put before the Infinitive in
Spanish^ when the English make use of their Partici-
ple Present in ing ; as, Cansado de camindr, se sentOy
Tired of walking, he sat down; Es hora de corner^ -
It 4s dinner time. De is also joined to words ex-
pressing time ; as, de madrugada, soon in the morn-
ing ; de diay by day ; dt noche^ at night; dt *veranOy
in the summer. De is also placed between two
Nouns, to enforce the expression ; as, el picaro de
mi mozOy my roguish servant ; la vcllaca de la ven-
ter a^ the waggish landlady.
JSw, in, being in composition, denotes growing or
making; aSyencarScer, to grow dearer; enjlaquecer^
to grow lean ; cngrandecer^ to miake greater, to mag-
nify ; entristecer^ to grow melancholy : ensoberbecei\iQ
grow proud, 8^c. En is sometimes put before Nouns
adjective, to make them Adverbs ; as, en particular,
instead of particular mente^ particularly ; en general,
for generalmente, generally, Sgc En is also used in
stead ofsobre, ; as. En su propria cabiza caeran las mal^
diciones. The curses will fall ugon his own head.
Prepositions inseparable are only used in couipo-
sitipn with Nouns and Verbs ; they are the fol-
Ipwing:
Ad] as, advenedizOy a stranger ; advertir, to 2kA'
veTthe ; adversidJd, adversity.
Am; as, ampdro, protection, shelter; amparddo,
protected, helped.
Co; as, cohabitdr, to live together; coheredero,
co-heir; co-operdr, to co-operate, S^c.
Com;
IT
I.*.
170 The ELEUEVirS of
Com ;, aSfCompararj to compare; amprometSr, to
compromise ; coinmutar^ to exchange.
DeSj before Nouns or Verbs, implies commonly
a privative or negative signification; as, desdichadoj
unhippy ; desacierto, mistake ; deshacdr, to undo';
d^engahai\ to undeceive.
I)is/\n composition, sometimes is negative, -as in
discordar, to disagree ; sometimes it implies division
or adversity; as, disponhy to dispose; distribuir^ to
distribute ; distwguir^ to distinguish.
Es^ as, extraher^ to extract: expeler, to turnoitt;
expediVy to dispatch.
Iriy in composition, has commonly a negalive'or
privative sense, denoting the contrary of the mein-
ing of the primitive word ; as, incapaz, unable, -itl*
capable; inaccioriy inaction, Sgc, but sometimes wf is
affirmative, as in !Latin, .
Observe, That in before r is changed into ir ; as,
irregular, irregular ; irracional, irrational : before /
into i ; as, ilegaly illegal, contrary to law ; ilimitddo^ un-
limited. Before w, iw is also changed into im ; as, *
immaterial^ immaterial ; immaculadoj spotless, S^c.
Oi; as, obtenSr, to obtain; obviar, to prevent.
Pre, in composition, marks priority of time, or
rank ; as, preceder, to go before, to precede ; prede-
cessor, an ancestor.
Pro ; as, proponer, to propose ; perseguir, to pro-
secute. '
Re is also an inseparable Particle used by the
Latins, and borrowed from them, to denote itera-
tion or a retrogrkdfe action ; as^ reedificar, to re-
build ; realzar, to raise up again.
Se; as, separar, to separate ; separado, separated.
So ; as, socorrer, to hel^ ; solicitdr, to solicit.
' Sub, in composition, denotes a subordinate de-
gree ; as^ subalternoj subaltern ; subdividir, to sub- .
divide, S^c?^
* See Observations on Prepos'tions, page 224, and a List of words whicb
govern Prepositions, and Prepositions governed.
CHAP.
/Ae ISpAkish Grammar* 171
: CHAP. VII.
(y Adverbs, Coirjunctions, fl/26? Interjections.
ADVERBS af quality, as was said before, aYe
formed by adding mente to the Feminine Gen-
der of Adjectives, as is done in English by the addi-
tion pf the syllable ly^ When two of these adverbs
are together in a sentence, mente is taken off from
the first of them ; as, Obro prudSnte y Jetizmente^
He acted prudently and happily.
The Adverbs in Spanish are placed in a sentence
cither before or after the Verb; but when the Ad-
verb is negative, then it must go before the Verb, to
avoid the two negations, which would, as in Latin ^
ijnake an affirmation. Thws/ixistesid of No veo a nadie,
you must say, A nadie veo, I see nobody ; Nada en--
tiend$ deesto, I do not understand any thing of this ;
Nunca le he visto, I have never seen him : but do not
say, Nq entiendo nada, nor No le he vis to nunca.
The principal Conjunctions used in Spanish are
either copulative, disjunctive, causative, condi-
tional, or exceptive.
Yj e, signifying 5w^, are Conjunctions copulative;
but with this difference, that y is used before all
words excepting those that begin with i, wnen they
. make use of e ; as, Los Franceses ,e Ingleses, The
French and the English ; Los Espanoles e Italianos,
The Spaniards and the Italians, <§x\ Como^ as, tarn-
hien, also, are likewise Copulatives. '
Conjunctions disjunctive are, m, neither, tampoco^
neither ; as.iViPerfro mVwflfw,Neither Peter nor John.
OorUj signifying, or, eiMer, are also disjunctive; as^
O rice o pobre^ either rich or poor ; De qualiflder color ^
b bianco^ o negro^ Qf-any. colour, either white or
black ; O redSndo « ovdlOy round or oval.
Observe, That u is required when the word be-
fore it ends with an o, and the word after begins
with the same Vowel, in order to avoid the bad
sound resulting from it.
«
178 The ELEMENTS of
Ya^ either, is also a Disjunctive; as, y4 e^/o, jfi
aquHlOi either this or that.
Causative ; as, porque^ why, wherefore.
Conditional ; as, si, if; dado qtie^ gi:anting that ;
iupuhto quCy supposing that;, and they govern the
Subjunctive Mood, as mentioned before.
Exceptive ; as, si noj if npt ; mas, but ; de ptro
modo^ otherwise, S^c.
There are also some other sorts ; as, a /o nienos^
at least ; aiinque, although ; todavia^ notwithstand^
ing, nevertheless.
Interjections are parts of speech that discover
the mind as affected with some passion, such as
jdy, pain, admiration, aversion, S^c.
To express joy, they say. Ha ! Ha ! Ha ! Ha \ ;
to express pain or grief, Ay! Alas ! Ay de mi ! A]sl%
for me !
O is made use of in Spanish to express several affec-
tions of the soul, viz. Of admiration ; as, O que h^r^
moso timplo ! What a handsome temple ! Of excla-
liiation ; as, O suma bondady O great goodness ! Of
compassion ; as, O que lastima ! What a pity ! Of
indignation ; as, O ruin hombre ! O base man !
O is also used ironically ; as, O que linda cosa ! A
fine thing indeed ! &a
Observations upon, the modern Orthography now
used and established by the Royal Spanish Aca-
demy.
The b is commonly confounded with the v in the .
pronunciation, which causes the greatest confusioi^
in the Orthography of these two letters ; therefore
jli is necessary to shew their difference, and, thei,r
true pronunciation and difference in writing.
jB.oughttobepronouncedonly by closing the lips,
and v by touching the superior teeth with the infe-
rior lip. The difference is sensible, yet by a certain
affinity or likeness between these two letters, \tl
speaking as well as in writing, there has always been,
the greatest confusion. Ntbrixasays, in his CastiUan
Orthography y
the Spanish Grammar. 175
Orthography^ that in his time, some people pould
scarce makcany distinction between these two letters.
Notwithstanding this, they anciently established
a certain difference between the b and v, though not
founded on the origin of words : in the beginning of
a word they usl:d the A, and at the end the v; and if
the word taken from the Latin had only one syllable
wrote with v, it was changed into b ; so from vespa
they used to write abispa: from vernice^ barniz ; and
from verr^rCj barter : but, if in the rocft there were
two syllables wrote with h^ the second was changed
into ^, as from bibere, bever ; but when there were
in the primitive word two syllables with v^ the se-
cond was changed into b ; as from vivere, they used
to write bivir.
The confusion of these two letters has not been
peculiar to our language, because the beth among
the Hebrews^ and the beta or 'bit a among the Greeks,
was pronounced as the V J: and, iri very ancient in-
scriptions, we find bixity instead ofvLvit; abe for ave,
and likewise vase for base, deviium for debitum.
Yet, with this confusion, we find, that, in some
circumstances, the difference between the b and v
lias been constantly preserved in writing; for the A
has always been made use of before the. / and the r,
as in the words, bbquh^ braviza. Likewise, at the
end of a syllable, the v has never been used in writ-
ing; therefore absolver^ abstinenciafibtenery obstdr^Bud
such words, have constantly been written with the
original b. For which reasons, in order to establisii
a true and necessary distinction in writing these two
tetters, the following rules have been made :
1, The b is made use^of in words in whose ori-
ginal there is a ^ ; as, beber^ from bibere; escribir^
from scriberCy Sec. Likewise, some words, though
writteli with a -t? in their etymology,, require the 5,
fbr the common and constant practice of spelling
them so; as, abogAdo, baluirte, borla^ buytre^ &c. If
the origin of the word is uncertain, the b has the
jprefercnce in writing ; as in bttlago^ bes&go.
S. The
166 The ELEMENTS of
and luegOy may also be construed with all the Tenses
of the Indicative Mood ; as, Quando el Ret/ lo w
todo, no le etlganan^ When the King sees every thing,
he is not deceived ; Luego que Ikgo, hable con el.
As soon as he came, I spoke with him.
In Spanish there is not a general sign before the
Infinitive, as in English the Particle to ; but there
are several Particles used before the Infinitive, of
the same import as to in English, and they are go-
verned by the preceding Verbs or Nouns. These
Particles are, a /para, de, con, en,por, hast a, d^spue^^le,
and the Article el, when the Infinitive serves as
Nominative to another Verb.
1. ^, coming between two Verbs, denotes the
second as the object of the first ; as. La tardanza
de nuestras espei^anzas, nos ensena a mortific&r nuis-
tros deseos. The delay of our hopes teaches us to
mortify our desires.
2. Para denotes the intention or usefulness; as,
Para prohdr la paciencia sirve la adversidad^ Adversi-
ty serves to try one's patience ; Lo hizo para moks-
tarme. He did it on purpose to plague me. Pdf^a^ after
an Adjective, denotes its object, it is also a sign, of
futurity ; as, Aun est dmos para descubrir la'ciusa^
We are still to seek for the cause ; Esta promto pa-
rar obedecer, He is ready to obey.
De is put between two Verbs^if the first governs
the Genitive or Ablative ; and when the Substantive
or Adjective governs either of these two Cases, dt -
must go before the following Verbs ; as, Acaho deeper .
i mi padre, I havejust seen my father; Elenf&dp, de
oirhrne causdba sueho; Tired with hearing him, I fell
asleep ; E,s tierhpo de irse, It is time to go away; . '''
Observe, that all these Particles are used in Spakfsh
before the Infinitive, on the same occasions where
in Englis/i to, for, of, with, in, till, after ^ &c, are
placed before ,the Participle Present of the Verb ;
as, Se divierte encazar, He delights in hunting; Por
trabajdr mucho esta malo^ By working too much he
• is
the SjPANiSH Grammar. 175
V
our language, foUovjripg tlie origin, requires the Cy
rather than the z.
4. The syllable co ipust always be written >vith a
c, except in some few words, which, according to
their original and usage, are spelt with a ^ ; as
quodtlbetOy quociente,
5. The syllable cu before a Consonant is expressed
with a c ; as, in cunUj cuno, cura^ cuyo j likewise when
it is followed by someVo wel forming a Diphthong, as,
in ciiajo^ cuenta, cuidado ; but observe, tliat several
words are excepted, which for their origin, and the
common use, must be written with a.f, as quandoy
qu&nto; and some with the syllable qiie as aqifeducto,
qiiestor, conseqiihitej question, and their derivatives.
The c followed by an /;, is a double letter in Spa-
nisk, as well as in English ; and in both languages
-ch is the sign of a sound, which is analysed into tsh ;
as church, muck, chiti, crutch : it is the same sound
that the Italians give to the c simple before i and e,
as citta, cerro,
Ch is sounded like k in words derived from the
Greek, as, chimera, chimica, machina, &c.and their de-
rivatives. These words must be written with ch, in
order to preserve the etymology to the eye, though
some erroneously write them with the syllable qui.
Ch is also pronounced as a k in these words : arch"
angely architector, aixhitrahe, and their derivatives.
The^ in Spanish has two different pronunciations;
the first is soft, when this letter is before the Vowels
a, 0, u, as in t\iQv^^oxdsgana,gota, gusto; ox when be*
, tween the g and the Vowels e, i, an u is found, as ja
guerra,guia,whtxt the w loses almost its sound, which
is the common pronunciation: therefore, when the w
after the g has its full sound ; as in the words agiiero^
vergiienza, then to dislingaish this pronunciation
from the other more in use, two points are put upon
the i^ as above, m the words agiiero and vergiienza. If
an / or r between the g and a Vowel, then it has a
8ofk pronunciation, as in the words gloria, gracia.
The second sound of the g* is guttural and strong,
•and
I.
176 7%e ELEMENTS ?/
and it is used only before the e and the i, forming;
the syllables ^e and g*i; which pronunciation is pecu-
liar to Spanish^ and quite different from other lan-
guages. The sound of the g before the Vowels e
and i may be cotifounded with that of the j and ad,
which are also gutturally aspired before the same
Vowels ; for the word gemido is equally pronoanced,
whether it is written with a g, with j, or with an x,
which causeis the difficulty of writing this word
with its proper letter. In order to avoid this con-
fusion, the following must be observed : •
When thiere is Sig in the origin of the word, then
the^ must be made use of in Spanish ; as in these
words ; gente^ gig&nte^ ingeniOj ingenuidad. The same
rule must be observed for the j and z, as in Ajo^ ba-
rajUy and infloxo, traxe^ rcduxe^ &c.
The h alone, without c before it, is not a letter,
but serves only as a mark of a very soft aspiration,
when followed by the Vowels, and so little sensible,
that it can scarcely be perceived ; therefore, some
grammarians were of opinion to omit it entirely, as
well in the beginning of words as in other syllables;
but it is necessary to preserve it, not only to shew
to the eye the origin of the word, but because its '
aspiration in some words is very perceptible, and ■
that the h has been constantly made use of.
The aspiration of the h is so sensible before the
syllable «e, that it comes very near to the sound of a .
g, as in huSvo, egg ; huesso^ bone ; which has caused
the mistake of those who erroneously write these
words and others with dig. The aspiration gf ' the
h is also sensible when it is between two Vowefo,
and it serves to distinguish their pronunciation
better, as in the word albahaca. Sec.
The/ used in the Latin words, or in the old Spa^
nishy is usually changed into //. In order to shew
when the h must be made use oi\ the following
rules ought to be attended to :
1. When the word begins with the syllable W(r, therf
tliteh must be put before, which on this occasion has a
I
the Spakish Grammar. 177
sort of guttural^ but soft sound. Observe, that we
preserve this use, as it comes from our forefathers,
who established it when then Vowel was confound-
ed with the «; Consonant, that they might in reading
distinguish i$evq from vc'oOy ^d ueso from veso.
S. The h must be written, according to the most
common and constant use, in all the words that have
thatcbaracter in theirorigin before some Vowel*, and
, have the same pronunciation, especially between
Vowels; as in the words honor, Iwra, almoh&za, zor
hurda.
3. All the words which in their Etymology arc
wrote with an^, and whose pronunciation has beea
softened, must be written with A, by changing the
J'y zs /iijo, from Jijo; hacerfxomfacir.
4. There are some other words in which they of
the origin has been changed intoy, and so common-
ly we pronounce^/rr(7, which conies fxomferrum^yil
from 7^7, &c. ; but several people pronounce these
words with an i Vowel, thus, hierro^ /liely and such
Nouns, placing an h before the i, to denote the sepa-
ration of the following Vowel, and likewise, because
the yof the. origin is usually changed into an k in
Spanish. In this variety of pronunciations, we mif^t
preserve the constant use of oup Orthography, which
is to write these words with hi.
Of the I and the Y.
The i is always a Vowel, and is nevqr used as a
Consonant ; the y was introduced in Spanish to serve
as a vowel in the words having a Greek origin;
which use did not last.
The^ in Spanish is sometimes a Consonant, some-
times a Vowel; it is a Consonant when before a
Vowel, as in the words playa^ shya ; for then the i is
never made use of. The^ is a Vowel, when preceded
by another Vowel forming a diphthong; as in ayrCy
alc&yde ; andyet this is not general ; for when the pro-
nunciation of the % is long, it must be always used, as
i n oido^paraUo ; 2x^ so likewise the distinction is easily
made between /<?j^, signifying /ow, atvd le'i^l \^^A,^^^^
170 7A^ELEMENTS 0/
Com ;, ^%compara}\ to compare; comprometSr, to
compromise ; coinmutaVy to exchiange.
DeSy before Nouns or Verbs, implies commonly
a privative or negative signification; as, desdichddOy
unhippy ; desacierto, mistake ; deshacer, to undo';
d^enganai\ to undeceive.
'Dis^m composition, sometimes is negative, as in
discordcirj to disagree ; sometimes it implies^ division
or adversity; as, disponer^ to dispose; distribuir^ to
' distribute ; distwguir^ to distinguish.
Esy as, extraher^ to extract: expeler, to turnoi^t;
expedir^ to dispatch.
Iriy in composition, has commonly a negative or
privative sense, denoting the contrary of the mean-
ing of the primitive word ; as, incapaz, unable/it^*
capable; inaccion^ inaction, Sgc, but sometimes wfis
affirmative, as in !Latin.
Observe, That in before r is changed into ir ; as,
irregular^ irregular ; irracional^ irrational : before /
into i ; as, ilegaly illegal, contrary to law yilimitddo^ un-
limited. Before w, m is also changed into im ; as, '
immateridl, immsiterml ; immaculado, spotless, ^.
Oi;as, obteneVylQ obtain; obviar^ to prevent.
PrCy in composition, marks priority of time, or
rank ; as, preceder, to go before, to precede ; pr^de-
cessoTy an ancestor.
Fro ; as, proponer, to propose ; perseguir^ to pro-
' secute.
Re is also an inseparable Particle used by the
LatinSj and borrowed from them, to denote itera-
tion or a retrograrflB action ; as^ reed'i/icary to re*
build ; realz4)\ to raise up again.
Sa; as, separar^ to separate ; separado^ separated.
So; as, socorrery to hel^; solicitary to solicit.
' Suby in composition, denotes a subordinate de-
gree ; as^ subalternoy subaltern ; subdividir, to sub-
divide, S^c.^
* See Observations on Prepositions, page 224, and a List of words which
govern Preposition?, and Prepositions governed,
CHAP.
♦•
/^^ Spanish GRAMMAtt. 18I
' with a^9 according to the origin of the words ; but
you must put two points upon the ii^ that the pro-
nunciation may be distinguished^ as in the words
qiiestiorvr^omtquente^ &c.
4. Though the syllable quo ought to be spelt al-
ways with c and o, yet, according to* the origin of
some words^ we use it in some occasions \ as in \ni^
quio, propinqiu)^ quociente, quodlibeto^Sic.
, The r in Spanish has two pronunciations ; one
soft, expressed by a single r, as in m^&do, breve; and
another hard, in which two rr's are used, as in,
barra^ barro^ cdrro^jarrOj &c. on these occasions :
I. In the beginning of a word two rrs must ■
never be used, because then the r is always pro-
nounced hard in our language ; as in the words
* razon, remo, ricoy romoy rueddy &c.
. 2. When the Consonants /, w, s, are before the r>
either in a single word or a compound one, this letter
must never be doubled, because then its sound is al-
ways strong ; as in enriquecer^ honrCy disreglado^ &c. .
- 3, The r after a b is always pronounced hard in
i:ompounds with the Prepositions ab^ ob, suby and^
yet is not doubled ; because the common use of our
language has followed the Ztf//» Orthograpl)y, as in
these word^, abrogar^ obrepcioriy subrepcion. It must
be observed, that excepting these cases, the. r is
liquid after i, forming but a sfyllable with the fol-
lowing Vowel; as in abreviiVy abrigo, obrizo^ brazo,
brSchdy brincOy br6ncOy br&to ; then the single r is
made use of, because the pronunciation is soft, ac-
cording to the general rule.
4. In the compounds of two Nouns, and those
made with the Prepositions pre, prOy the r is likewise
single in the beginning of the second part of the
compound, though its sound is strong; therefore,
according to the most constant practice, the follow-
ing words shpuld be written with a single r; viz.
-nianirqiOy cariredondo, prerogd(ivOy prorogdr; and
though it was in use to put a line in the middle of
the compounds, it is jiot necessary to know their
composition; therefore thi'S trouble vriaN \>t otciWX^^
N3 '"^'^'^
182 The ELEMENTS of
The s is, without any exception, pronounced
strong befoFC the Vowels, either in the beginning or
the middle of words ; and there is no particular ob*
servation to be made upon this letter, nor upon the
f, which follows it, and the u Vowel.
1. The© Consonant is used in the words that have
such letter in their origin, as voluntcid, vicio^ mda^
&c. as well as such words as have been constantly
spelt with a i?, though they have a i in their origin ;
as vizcocho, which comes from bis coctOy Latin; y ca-
latravdy from calatrabahy Arabic.
2. In some words the /of the origin has been
changed into *o ; then this last will be used in their
spelling ; 2iSy provecho, from prqfectus ; and its deriva-
tives or compounds, provechosOj appravechar, &c.
3. The V must be used likewise in some words;
though their origin is not known, merely because
they have constantly been wrote so ; as the following,
atrevidCy aUve, viga, vihueloj VirgaSj Velisco^ &a
4. Nouns Substantive and Adjective derived
from the Latin termination ivus^ or formed in their
imitation, should be spelt with a v according to
their origin, and the most constant practice; as
donaihOf moiivoy comitivCy cxpectativa^ privativaipen"
^ativo, &c. The same rule must be observed with the
numerals ending in'^vo, &va; 2iSy octavo, octieoay and
others like them.
The letter x has two pronunciations ; the first, de-
rived from the Latin, is when this letter soundi^ like
cs, as in exequias, extension, which happens not only
in the, words coming from this language, but like-
wise from those in the Greek, as, syntaxis, extasis.
Th6 second sound, which came from the Arabic, is
when the x has a strong guttural sound, like that of
the J before all the Vowels, and that of the^ before
eand i ; as in the words axuar, almoxarije, and other
Arabian words, in which we frequently make use of
theac. We pronounce also, and write, after tUesame
mariner, several words deri ved.from the Latin ; as, ex-
fmplo, exercicio, exercito\ though the guttural sound
is iwproperly adapted lo \Yvg x oil \)cv\% wicwati.
the Spanish Grammar. 183
This hard sound, though a Jittle softened, is given to
this ietterat the etfd oi words; as in carcaT, rclor^ dhy
abnorad&r; and though the^ should be made use of
itastead of the x, yet these words, and others alike,
must be written with this last letter, because ho
Spanish word ends with slj. From these observa- •
tions, the following rules are established :
1 . All the words that have an x in their origin,
must preserve the same in Spanish ; and when it is
sounded ^ke cs, there must be an accent circumflex
put upon the Vowel following, as a mark of its par- '
ticular sound ; as in exdmen^ cxdltacion, &c.
Observe, that the x in the middle of a word, fol-
lowed by a Consonant, is always pronounced like the
English, as in exiremOy expresar^ extinguir: wherefore
the circumflex. is not used, nor any other mark.
2. When the guttural sound is hard, the x must
be used, when it is found in the origin, and agree-
able to pse; as J lexdndria^ Jloxed&dy dixe^ trdxe. The ,
same rule is observed when the s of the Latin has
been changed into x guttural ; as xabon^ from sapo ;
intxerir^ from inserere, &c.
3. The' a: must also be made use of in words whose
origin is unknown, merely because they have been
usually wrote with this letter ; hsjaxdrdo, luxan^
quixddaj &c.
4. When a word ends with a guttural sound, the
X must be preserved, as well in the Singular, as in the
Plural; so from carcdx^ reloxy we form carcdxes,
relaxes.
When we spoke of the i, we made the proper ob-
servations upon the y.
The z in Spanish has a strong pronunciation before
all the Vowels; but as the c and the s have almost
the same spund before the e and thei,in order to make
a proper difference in spelling, the constant practice
and origin of wbrds must be attended to ; therefore
the following rules must be observed :
1 . The z must be used before the Vowels a, o, ti,
having then its particular pronunciation; as in
^ngdl^ zorzal^ zimo.
N 4 ^.^^^^x^
184 The i;^LEMJENTS of
2. Before the Vowels c, i, the z should not be usecf^
excepting when i t is found in the origin and preserved
by a constant practice ; as in the woid^zephiro^zi^na.,
3. In the words whose Singular end with %i z^ as'
piiZj veZj feliz^ wz^ hizy &c. though their Plurals
ending with the syllable ces could be wrote ^ike- >
wise with a z, preserving the same pronunciation ;
yet we use to spell them with ar, according to their
Etymology ; as paces, Jelicesy veces^ voces, luces ;
which musfrajso be observed in spelling their deri-
vatives and compounds ; 2ls paci/ico, apaciguar^Jeti'^
cidddy infelicidady lucido, deslucido, &c.
Of AccentSj and other Notes for the Prtmunciation.
The sounds of the letters have been already ex-
plained, and rules for the accent or quantity cannot'
. easily be given, as they are subject to several ex-
ceptions. Such however as I have read or framed,
I shall here propose.
Every word has but one accent upon the princi-
pal syllable, wherein the pronunciation is more pcr-^
ceived; this accent is called /7C2//e ; and those sylla-"
bles that are uttered with greater strength, are also,
called acute in Spanish, which is the same as long.
The accent of our trisyllables is frequently placed
on the penultima, and on the last syllable of the
words called acute, and upon the antepenultimti of
polysyllables, called in Spanish esdruxulos. It hap-
pens also that by joining to the words the Pronouns
mCy /e, se, /e, les, &c. called e/^c/i/ic/:^, the accent is
perceived on the fourth syllable, beginning to count
jrom the last.
Therefore a single accent is sufficient, placed up-
on the Vowel of one of the said three or four sylla-
bles, to mark the pronunciation. The accent used
for this purpose by the Royal Academy is the acute
*C)» because it is more easily formed, and has con-
stantly been used in Latin to denote the aicute; but
as it would be a very tedious, and likewise difficult .
task,in writing, the accent should be only put upon the
irord wanting it, accordlftg to live tollo>Kmg rules :
^^e Spanish Grammar. -185
I, No accent should be noted upon monosyllables,
because it is useless, excepting when they may be
confounded, either in their pronunciation, or in their
sense; in M^hich case the monosyllable pronounced
long nwist be accented, as in de^ se^ Tenses of the
Verbs rfjr, and ser^ to make a distinction of the Par-
ticle de^ and the Pronoun se. Tlie J^article affirma-
tive siy requires also an accent, to make a diflference
of the conditional si. ' The same mark should be
uspd likewise upon the Vowels a, e, ^ /?, when they
are Partides, hot in order to denote their pronun-
ciation, but in order to avoid their being uttered
with the preceding or following word.
In dissyllables, in Spanish) the most common accen-
tuation is upon the first syllable, as in boda, puedo ;
therefore these words do not want any accent, but
only when the last syllable is long, as alia, ba.v6.
- 3. The trisj^llables and polysyllables should not be
accented when their pen ultin)a is long, because this
is the most frequent and common pronunciation in
Spanish ; as in ventana^ disp6ngo^ &c.
4. When the antepenultima is long, it requires an
accent, as in the Superlatives, amaniisimo^acilisimo;
fSLud in the trisyllables or polysyllables called in Spa-
nish esdruxulos ; as, candido, barbarOy infrepido, &c.
5. Though the accent required in Spanish Ortho-
graphy is generally used upon the three last syllables
of the words; there are occasions in which,, by join-
ing to them some enclitick, the sound is perceived
upon the fourth syllable, which ought to be accent-
ed, in favour of foreigners, who are ignorant of our
pronunciation, as well as for the perfection of our
Orthography; as in these words, buscamelOy tray-
gamelOi dixoselo, &c.
6. When the word ends with an acute syllable, the
accent must be used ; as in the Futures, amare\perderfj
&c. but it is not necessary wheil the word is termi-
nated with ay, making a diphthong, because the last
syllable is always long ; as in the words, estoj/, virret/.
71 In the terminiations ea, eo, the first VqwcI is^ge-
nerally lohg, and makes by itself a sylUbVt^mXNx^vxX*
4
J
196 The ELEMENTS of
the following Vowel ; as in badea^ peUa^ aseo ; menJo ;
thtret'ore the accent must only be noted Upon words
excepted from the general rule, in which the two
Vowels make one syllable or diphthong ; as linea,
venirto.Sac. placing the accent on the penultima.
8. For the words ending in ia^ ie, io, and Ha^ve, uo,
a general rule cannot be given, on account of the dif-
ference in their pronunciation ; but it may be observ-
ed that an accent must be put upon the first Vowel of
these terminations when it makes a syllable by it-
self; as in vacie, varie, desvio, ganztia, excepHe^ contu
w/it?, which will serve to mark the separation of the
two Vowels in pronouncing, and to distinguish these ,
words from others of the same termination, whereia
. the two Vowels are pronounced almost together,
making a single syllable or diphthong; as in ciencia^ *
^eriCy operario^ promiscua.ateriguey antigzco; in which
there being no accent, it will be easily known how
to pronounce the two last Vowels.
9. Nouns terminated by some of the Consonants^
<?, /, w, r, Xy Zy have generally in Spanish their last
syllable long; as bondady badil, mechoriy *cal6r, reloxj
tmbriguez ; therefore it is useless to accent them,
excepting when their pronunciation differs from
that most frequently used, as in the words Jaci/, ^
canoTiy alcazar,
10. There is a particular rule for accenting the
words terminated with s. When in the Singular, their
last syllable is generally long; as in these words, Tha-
maSy Ginhy arnes^ amis, blandis, lanzos, quiros ; and the
proper ^o\ii\%Aragones, Portuguesl tranceSyMilan^s,
&c. So that only Nouns excepted from this rule
want an Accent, as dosis Junes ; biit, when the Nbiins
ending in 5 are in the Plural, the last syllable is al-
Wjays short, and generally the penultima is long;
therefore they should only be accepted when the two
last syllables are short, and the antepenultima long,
preserving upon this the accent of the Singular ; as
m virgeneSy volltmenes, candidos, intripidos.
1 1. Nouns accented, though an Adverb is made of
tbem by adding mtntt^ pieaetvcxve\tt\\\e\fc^%\l\eic
the SpAKisR Grammar. 187
accent ; BsJUciimentey pacijicamentey &c. The.same
may be said of Verbs, when, to formthe Plural, an n
is. added to the third Person Singu lar, or tiie syllable
mos or is to the first Person ; 2Aser&ny from sera\ and
amarimos amareiSy from amare. The saiiie must be
observed when any Pronoun Personal is joinetl to
the Verbs, as ensenomCy darete^ mandareos, quitarhise,
comerdnloSy &c because the pronunciation of the
word is not changed by these additions.
There are also in Spanish some letters or characters
whose pronunciation may be doubtful ;. therefore
the followmg notes must be made use of :
1. When the ch instead of following its general
pronunciation, must have that of k, to note this
sound, the accent circumflex must be put upon the
following Vowel, thus, chiron, chiromancia.
2. The same accent must be put upon the Vowel
following the x, when it is-not gutturally aspired and
pronounced as the English pronounce it; as in tx-
dcto^exiquiay eximio, exorcismOy &c. But observe, that
there are some Nouns where, in such case, the cir-
cumflex cannot be made use of upon the •Vowel
following the ch or the x, because, according to the
general rule, they require an«acute accent; as ohi--
mica, chimicOy htx&metro^ examen. *. ,
3. When the u in the syllables que, quo, gua^ gue, re-
quires to be pronounced, then two points called crerna
by printers, must be put upon the £/ ; as in these words,
question, Jreqiiente, agiierOy vergiienza, argiiir, Sec.
' Observe, besides all these rules, that the accent is
generally made use of upon the Vowel of the penul-
tima when it is followed by a single Consonant ; but
when this Vowel is followed bv. two Consonants, it is
useless to accent it; as ilustrey madrastra, ensenJnza;
because in these words the penultima is naturally
long; excepting from this rule the words whose two
Consonants are mute or liquid, because then the pre-
ceding Vowel is short ; as algtbra, drbitroy cAthtdrOy
fimbrCy li^gubrCy quadruple. The same accent serves
alsd to distinguish the several Tenses of a Verb ;
178 The ELEMENTS of
Preterite of the Verb Uer ; and jR^, a King, and
riij Preterite of the Verb rA>, to laugh, without any
note to distinguish the pronunciation or quality of
these words, and others alike. The y is also a Vowel
when it is a Conjunctive Particle ; as, Juany DiJgo,
John and James ; which has been practised more
than SOO years ago in printing and writing. Juan
Lopez de Velasco establishes it as a rule, in his Cos*
tilian Orthography^ printed in 1582. From the same
time the y is used instead of the capital I in the
beginning of proper Nouns. From these observa-
tions, the following rules are drawn :
1 . The^ must always be used in Spanish when it
serves as a Consonant before a Vowel, as in yiga,
yinquej ayino, rayo^ &c.
Observe, That there are some words which are
wrote, but by very few people, with a ^ ^ as yirvo^
from Jerceo ; and yirOy from //no, but the greater
number write these words, adding the syllable ,A^
thus, hih^Oj hieroj for the reasons adduced, when
treating of the h. In this variety of opinions, the best is
to followtbe common practice,and the more frequeiit
Use, which is to write these words with hi, because
it agrees more witji the nature of our language.
2. 'When the i is followed by another Vowel, and
is pronounced with it at once, making ia Diphthong,
it must be changed into^; as in Aoy, /ey, doy^ estoy^
comboy, muy^ ayre^akhyde^ reyna^ peynCy oydor; except
the words where you find the syllable ui, as in cwr
dado, descuid&r ; excepting buytrCy and the second
Persons Plural of the Verbs ; as am&isy amibais, viiff \
'visteisy viereisy and others, in which, though the t is
pronounced together with the Vowel oefor^ it,
must be used according to the common and con-
stant practice.
3. The Conjunction. ?fnust always be expressed
with a yy and never with an t ; as, Pedro y Pahh^
hablan y cantan. The y must likewise jbe used in the
beginning of words requiring a capital letter, as in
these words, YsUiy Yglesia, Ygnicio, &c.
In order to distinguish in writing the i from the
other
^ I
>Ad . Spanish ^Grammar. ** 189
diberCy bonitSj &a they must be written with a b ; and
if from a word written with a v, they must be wrote
accordingly; as, vacuOj valer^ vanOj vapor, vender^
venir, vida, which are derived from the Latin vacuus^
valerCj vapor y vendere, venireyVitg, ; for which reason,
all the Imperfects of the Indicative of the first Con-
jugation must be wrote with i, notVith v, as igno-
rant persons do frequently ; therefore say amiba, .
cantabUy hablabay oraba, because they come from the
Latin amabamy cane bam, loquebar, orabam.
It must be observed likewise, that .when in the
original word there is a p, Chen the by must be used,
not the V ; because from caput y conciperCy lupus, sa^
pitns, &c. come cabeza, concebir, lobo, sabio.
Therefore that barbarous 'distinction which ig-
nqranceonly introduced, that there must not be two
A-s or two vs in one word, ought to be entirely
avoided ; because, if they are in the root, thej' rpust be
made use of; as in barba, btbhy bdrbarOy vivacidad^
viviry jmvientey volver, &c. And, when the origin of
words is doubtful, the b must be- used rather than
the Vy the first being more agreeable to our manner
of speaking than the second.
The c, called cedilla, is now superfluous in the
language; therefoi'e the ^should be used iti its stead
in all words whatsoever, according to the constant,
practice followed by the best authors in printing
and writing in Spam.
Formerly the. Verb hacer^^s wrote with a ^r, but
now it is wrote with a c, according to its xool, fa-
cere ; preserving the same rule in all its derivatives.
3. Theg" being guttural only before e and i, it ought
to be usedonlyin the primitives and derivatives; such
are qfligiry cogir, cokgir, elegir, pi^otegSr, regir, &c.
"wxitiiig afiige, cage, colige,elige, protege, rige, with-
out being extended to the derivatives of j and x.
But, when the Infinitives in gSr or gir change er
or ir into a or o in the present, then the g is changed
into^*, that the true pronunciation of the Infinitive
may be preserved; so from Jingir, ^^yfi^gOyJinja;
frpm regir, rijo, rija, &c.
All
190 The ELEMENTS of
All words which, in their original, have, g^ ijjoxt^
are written in Spanish with j, not with x; as froin
bnge^ say kjos\ from tagus, tajo; from tegulajteja\
from coHsiliumy consejo ; from^AW, A l;o ; from metier,
mtjor, &c. In all the combinations of the Vowels,
and wheii thelnfiuitives end injir,thej must be kept
in all the Tenses without exception. These words,
nuigestady muger^traige^Scc. are excepted, for common
use has prevailed in keeping theg* instead of the j.
If the words have an x in their original, as texh%
exemplo, execucion^ perplexo, vexiga^ &c. it would ap-
pear ridiculous to write them with aj, and not. with
x; and it must be likewise observed, that when the
words have the letter s in their original, as caisa,
dexaVj xaboUj xemCy xigo, &c. derived from cap'sa, de-
sererCy sapo,- semipesy succus^ they are always to be*
written with an^r, and not withj.
Nouns ending with ^, as box^ balaxj reldx^ keep the x
in the Plural, as well as allthe Verbs which hav^e x in
the Infinitive Mood, are to keep it in all the Tenses ;
as from baxar^ dexar, say baxo^ baxaba, baxe^ icc^
Q^ is frequently changed into c in vulgar writing :
but the true rule is, to follow the original Latin, _
otherwise the derivation is obscured, and the pro-
nunqiation corrupted. From c, are formed cuqjo^ cu*
irda ; cuenta, &c. and from q^ qual, question^ qudtro,
quintOjScc.
It is an impropriety many fell into, to use the
Vowels e and i instead ofy and«/; but this irregu-
larity is cautiously avoided by all good writers^ and
exploded by the Spanish Acsidemy, the letter^ being
established to be always a Consonant in the Spanish
words, and the accent is always placed on the an-
nexed Vowel ; as, ayuda, help ; ayitno^ a fast ; airr^o,
rivulet or brook. Take care also not to put the y
immediately before or after a Consonant or at the
end of a Verb or othei: word, except the foirowitog,
¥i^j r^^, hueVy law, king, ox, S^c.
Observe, That the Spaniards^ in order to retain the
softness of the Laitin Consonant j, for want of aa ^
exact equivalent, change \\ mlo j| Cow^ouant ; as'
♦•
/^€ Spanish Grammau. 18I
^ with a qt according to the origin of the words ; but
. you must put Wo points upon the U^ that the pro-
nunciation may be distinguished^ as in the words
qUesiionj^conseqUente^ &c.
4. Though the syllable quo ought to be spelt al-
ways with c and o, yet, according to* the origin of
some wordsy we use it in some occasions \ as in lm«
quiOy propinquo^ quociente, quodlibeto^Sic.
". The r in Spanish has two pronunciations ; one
soft, expressed by a single r, as in m^Mo, breve; and
another bard, in which two rr's are used, as in,
barra^ barro^ cirro^'jarrOj &c. on these occasions :
1, In the beginning of a word' two rr% must
never be used, because then the r is always pro-
nounced hard in our language ; as in the words
' razon, remo^ rico, romoy ruedd, &c.
. 2. When the Consonants /, w, s, are before the r>
either in a single word or a compound one, this letter
must never be doubled, because then its sound is al-
ways strong; as in enriquecer^ honrCj disreglado^ See. .
- 3. The r after a b is always pronounced hard in
. f:ompounds with the Prepositions ab, ob, suby and
yet is not doubled ; because the common use of our
language has followed the Z^//» Orthograpliy, as in
these word^, abrogar^ obrepcioriy subrepcion. It must
be observed, that excepting these cases, the r is
liquid after A, forming but a syllable with the fol-
io wing Vowel; as in abrevi&ry abrigo, obrizo^ brazo^
brSchdi brincOy bronco^ brito; then the single r is
made use of, because the pronunciation is soft, ac-
cording to the general rule.
4. In the compounds of two Nouns, and those
made with the Prepositions pre, />ro, the r is likewise
single in the beginning of the second part of the
compound, though its sound is strong ; therefore,
according to the most constant practice, the follow-
ing words shpuld be written with a single r; viz.
^laniroiOf cariredondoy prerogdfivOy prorogdr ; and
though it was in use to put a line in the middle of
the compounds, it is not necessary to know their
composition : therefore thi^ trouble mUy be omitted.
190 The ELEMENTS of
All words which, in their original, have, g^ f,.or4
are written in Spanish with j, not with x; as froin
hnge^ say kjos; from tagus^ i^jo; from tiguhytgdi
from consilium^ consejo ; from^//W, hijo ; from meUorj
mtJQr, &c. In all the combinations of the Vowels,
and when thelnfinitives end in^'^Vjthej must be kept
in all the Tenses without exception. These words,
niagestady nmger,traig€^8cc. are excepted, for common
use has prevailed in keeping iheg* instead of the j.
If the words have an x in their original, as texcTj
exemplo, exccucion^ perpUxo, vexiga^ &c. it would ap-
pear ridiculous to write them with aj, and not. with
x; and it must be likewise observed, that when the
words have the letter s in their original, as casa^
dexar^ xaboriy xemCy xigo, &c. derived from ca/^tf, ife-
sererCy sapo^ semipcsy succus^ they are always tobc'
written with an\r, and not withj.
Nouns ending with x^ as box^ balax^ reldx^ keep the x
in the Plural, as well as allthe Verbs which hav^e x in
the Infinitive Mood, are to keep it in all the Tenses ;
as from baxar^ dexar, say baxo, baxabUy baxe, ico^ .,
(I is frequently changed into c in vulgar writing :
but the true rule is, to follow the original LatWy _
otherwise the derivation is obscured, and the pro-
. nunpiation corrupted. From c, are formed cuq;Oy cu^
irda ; cuentay &c. and from qy qual, question^ qtuitro,
quhitOy^Scc.
It is an impropriety many fall into, to use the
Vowels e and i instead ofy and«/; butthis irregu-
larity is cautiously avoided by all good writers^ and
exploded by the Spanish Acdidemyy the letter^ being
established to be always a Consonant in the Spanish
words, and the accent is always placed on the an-
nexed Vowel ; as, ayMciy help ; ayiinOy a fast ; arroyo^
rivulet or brook. Take care also not to put the jf
immediately before or after a Consonant or at the
end of a Verb or other word, except the foirowitog,
//y, rejfy bueVy law, king, ox, Sgc.
Observe, That the Spaniardsy in order to retain the
softness of the Latin Consonant j, for want of aa ^
exact equivalent, change it into y Consonant ; as'
the SpAHrim Grammar. I91
from adjuvare,Jacereyjefunare, they have made ayu-
d&r^ yQcir^ ayun&r^ kc. and yet, when they speak
Latin, they pronounce iam instead of Jam, iacerc in-
stead ofjacere. '
Of the Use of Double Letters.
The Vowels e and are often doubled in Spavish,
to come the nearer to the radical pronunciatichi ; a9
acreedor^ creer, leer, cooper ar, fo^r,,in which both
the Vowels are distinctly pronounced. It is, on the
contrary, wrong in some superfluously to add e in
words derived from the Latin ; as in fee, veir, in
^tead ofy?, ver.
The variety is greater in the use of doubling Con-
sonants ; but to avoid all affectation, and to speak
pmperly, it is to be observed, that c is never to be
doubled before the Vowels a, 0, w, or Consonants ;
therefore you must write, acaecSr^ acontecer, aconuh
daVy ocasion^ acttsar, acumular, aclamar, &c. ; but b^- .
fore the Vowels e and i, the c must be doubled in
words derived from the Latin^ as acceleriry accisso,
accento y Occident e ; excepting ^fcep/ir and ^Mced/r: be-
cause, though in their root they have two cc\ they
are* scarcely perceived in the pronunciation.
Xa/m .words terminating in c/i(> change the ^ into
' c, as accion, diccion, leccian, producciqn, to make their
derivation more potent.
M, and not w, is always used before b^m^p; as ,
in these words, ambiente, immortal, impSrio.
Words compounded of the Latin Prepositions in
and con follow the Latin rule of turning i/i into im,
and con into com ; as, immacula'do, immediato, imme-
tnoriii, immortal^ &c. commemurar, comm&cir, com--
fnutar, &c. in all which words the m is doubled ;
though in several other common words one m is lost,
as comircio, com/m, cominiori, &c. Some change im
into em, ^s emmascirado, emmagrecer,.emmudecer.
JVis likewise doubled in s.everal words compound-
^ed.with/7/i, en, in, con: zs annexion, annotar, connatw ^
ral, eonmxion, ennegrecer, ennoblecer, innato, innocente,
innovqr, &c. except anular, anuncidr, anillx^.
184 The E^LEMENTS tff
2. Before the Vowels €, i, the z sboald not be useif,
excepting when i t is found in the origin and preserved
by a constant practice ; as in the woTd^zephirOyzizAHa.^
3. In the words whose Singular end with ^ z^sls'
piz^ viz, Jiliz^ vozy liiz, &c. though their Plurals
ending with the s} liable ces could be wrote Jike- '
wise with a z, preserving the same pronunciation ;
yet we use to spell them with ar, according to their
Etymology ; as paces^ JeliceSy veces^ voceSy luces ;
which musfr-also be observed in spelling their deri-
vatives and compounds ; as paci/ico, apacigmr^felir
cidady itt/elicidadj lucidOy desliicido, &c.
Of Accents, and other Notes for the Prmunciatum.
The sonnds of the letters have been already ex-
plained, and rules for the accent or quantity cannot
easily be given, as they are subject to several ex-
ceptions. Such however as 1 have read or framed,
I shall here propose.
Every word has but one accent upon the princi*
pal syllable, wherein the pronunciation ismoreper-^
ceived; this accent is called acute; and those sylla-"
bles that are uttered with greater strength, are also,
called acute in Spanish, which is the same as long.
The accent of our trisyllables is frequently placed ,
on the penultima, and on the last syllable of the
words called acute, and upon the antepenultima of
polysyllables, called in Spanish esdruxulas. It hap-
pens also that by joining to the words the Pronouns
me, te, se, ie, les, &c. called encliticks, the accent is
perceived on the fourth syllable, beginning to count
from the last.
Therefore a single accent is sufficient, placed up-
on the Vowel of one of the said three or four sylla-
bles, to mark the pronunciation. The accent oised
for this purpose by theRoyal Academy is the acute
^Oi because it is more easily formed, and has con-
stantly been used in Latin to denote the acute ; but
as it would be a very tedious, and likewise difficult .
task,in writing, the accent should beonlyputupon the
word wanting it, according to. the following rules :
I. No'
the Spanish Grammar. ^93
. TEtymobgy iff the Spanishyr^ww the Latin.
There is so greatan affinity between the Latin and .
Spanish^ that' several words of the former are pre-
seryed in the latter, with the same pronunciation ;
but the greatest part are in the Ablative, as will
easily be observed in the following terminations:
. To make the Latin words Spanish :
1. The is changed into «^ as in the following ;
from cordUj cuerda ; from Jorum, ftiero : from haspes^
huesped] from porta, puerta; from mola, imila\
from sport a, tspuhtn, &c. .
2. The w is changed into o; as from/wrc«, horca;
from gulosus,gol6so; from ulmus, olmo; fTomstupaj
estSpa ; from musca, mosca, as well as in the first Per-
sons Plural of Verbs ; ffom amamus, amamos, &c.
' 3. The Diphthong e/M is frequently changed int6
; as from aurum, oro ; caulis, col; maui'Us, mora.
4. The e is also changed into ie ; as from ccrtus,
ct^rto; from servus/ sieno; from cervus, ciiroo;
from herba, hiirba ; from sinistra, sini6stra ; from
tQrra, ti^rra; from Jera^Ji^ra, Sec.
5. The e takes the place of i ; as from infirmus,
errfernio ; from lignwu, leho ; from sicus, seco ; from
signum, senal; from sinm, seno, &c.
6. . The b is also changed very frequently into />,
since according to Ciuintilian, they were often mis-
taken in the pronunciation formerly ; whicl>is very
probable, for both letters are uttered by the same
motion of the lips ; and the Germans in our times
still confound these two letters. The same Quinti'
' lian says, that the Latin word priges was anciently
used instead of briges; and so the Spaniards used to
put the b instead ofp; as from apricus, abrfgo; from
copra, cabra ; capillus^ cabello ; caput, cabeza ; caper e,
cabir ; opera, obra ; ^apox^ sabbr, &c.
7. The b is changed into d ; as from cubitus, coda ;
dubitare, dudor ; palpebra, parpados.
9. The c is put several times instead of the g. Ac-
cording toZ«Vforr,theyhav^ so great au aHinity^that
. O \\\^^
191 r^ ELEMENTS of
they may in some combtnations.be easily miatakes
one for another in pronouncing ; so from dico^ we
sdy digo ; from acutus^ agAdo ; from amcus^amigoi
from miea^ miga, &c.
9. CI is changed into //, with our peculiar pro-
fiunciation ;^ elamare^ llamar ; clavhj llAoe.
10- When the c in Latin is followed by t^ this
letter is changed into h ; as from cmctuSf cincho ;
^tuSy dicho; f actus ^ hecho; tectum, kcho; lUcta^
lucha ; node, noche ; tacte, leche ; octo, ocho ; pecttui
pecho ; and several others.
1 1 . The d of the Latins is also sometimes lost ; at
from caderCy cair ; fro m rodere^ voir ; from radhis,
rinfo 'y from excluderCy e^xcluir ; from audire. Sir.
1 2. They we have changed into A, only to soften
the pronunciation ; as fvoxnjilius^ hijo ; from JacerCf
haccTi {rom Jbrmosus, hermoso ; ivom faciendUj kadh
inda; from jervory hervor.
13; The g" is changed into i, when it is not pro^
nouBced ; as from regnumj reino. Sometimes it is '
quite left out; as from digitus^ dedo; from Jriguty
jrio ; from sagittal saeta ; from mgina, vaina, &c.
14. The J is placed instead of the /; as from at-
Uuniy qjo; articulus, art ego ; alienuniy ag6no i folium^
hoja ; eonsiliumj consego, &c.
15. The r is also changed into I ; as from arbores,
MoleSyCerebrumy celebro; periculumypeligro.
17. The ^ is sometimes added, sometimes taken
off; as from insula, isla; ruminarCy rumiar.; salm*
trum, salitre ; sponsus, esposo ; macula, mancha.
17. The double «« of theX^f^iwis changed in i§to-
nish into our ^; as from annus, ano ; and sometiiiies
the same happens to the single n, and mn ; as fromi
aroma, arana, autumnus^* otSno ; Hispania, E$pAnai
damnum, daSio -, mnea, vina. As this sound of thesi»
proper to the, nation, they have adapted it accord-
ing to their language, or for the difficulty they
found in^ pronouncing as the Latins did.
1 8. The J9 is changed very often into a doable U,
when in the Latin word au /is found after /^; a»
from
the SFANIStt dRAMttAtt* 1^5
fmik pkga, lUgiii; j)lancfM, Udntb; planus^ llano,
plenuSf lUno; phrOy lUro; pbsvia, llivia.
19. TTie q is changed into g ; as from aJiquis, aU
gino > from antiquus, antiguo ; from aqua, agua ;
from aquihtj iguila.
SO. The t is likewise altered into tf ; as from Catena,
cadim;fvomfatum, hado ; latus, lado; natare, nadar ;
pietas, pied&d ; pater, padre ; mater, madre, &c.
Observe, that these alterations are not general in
all the words, but are used in several, because on
some occasions, the Latin word is preserved, with*
out any mutilation or variation.
It 11 very much in use in Spanish to change letters,
or to add to the Latin words, w^hen there is an / or
r after b, in order to sofWn the pronunciation ; as
from admirabilis, laudabili^, admirable, laudable.
The termination of the other words ending in
His, in Latin, is il in Spanish; as from Jacilis, fhcil^
from debilis, debit; from JinaliSy Jin&l ; from mate-
rialis, material.
It would ht endless to pretend to shew all the
affinity between the Spanish and the Latin, the main
body of the former being derived from thc'latter^
with only such small difference as may easily be
conceived from what has been said above.
Observe besides, that we add an e in Spanish be-
fore ^if or sp iti Latin V/hen these two letters begin
the word J as from strepituSy estrepito ; from stoma-
sChu^, estSmago ; from specutari, especular ; from spec-
tacutum^ espect&culq ; &c.
iSewraZ Observations to ser%)e as a Supple^
ment to the Syntax.
Of the Article.
THE Definite Article is made use of only be-
fore Substantives, as it has been said, and
never before Adjectives, except those used sub-
stantively with the neutral Article h ; as lo buino,
io hilrmiso, lo grande, &c.
O g "XVx^
190 The ELEMENTS of
All words which, in their original, have, g^ f,.orY,
are written in Spanish with j, not with x; as froin
Umge^ say Ujos; from tagus, tajo; from tigulUytejai
from consilium, consejo ; iwmJiliuSy hijo ; from metier,
mtJQr, &c. In all the combinations of the Vowels,
and when thelnfinitives end inJ^V,thej must be kept
in all the Tenses without exception. These words,
niagestady muger^traige^Scc. are excepted, for common
use has prevailed in keeping ihe^ instead of the j.
If the words have an x in their original, as texcTj
exemplo, exccucion^ perpUxo, vexiga, &c. it would ap-
pear ridiculous to write them with aj*, and not. with
x; and it must be likewise observed, that when the
words have the letter s in their original, as cflxar,
dexar, xabon, xeme, xUgo^ Sec. derived from cc^a, ife-
sererCy sapOf semipesy succuSy they are always to bC'
written with an^r, and not withj.
Nouns ending with x^ as box^ balax, relax, keep the *
in the Plural, as well as allthe Verbs which have x in
the Infinitive Mood, are to keep it in all the Tenses ;
as from baxar^ dexdr, say bdxOy baxabUy baxS, ico^
(I is frequently changed into c in vulgar writing :
but the true rule is, to follow the original Latin, _
otherwise the derivation is obscured, and the pro-
nunciation corrupted. From c, are formed cuqjoy cu^
Srda ; cuenta, &c. and from q^ qual, question, qu4tro,
qu&ntOySic,
It is an impropriety many fell into, to use the
Vowels e and i instead ofy andt/; butthis irregu-
larity is cautiously avoided by all good writers^ and
exploded by the Spanish Ac2iAtmyy the letter^ being
established to be always a Consonant in \ht Spanish
words, and the accent is always placed on the an-
nexed Vowel ; as, ayMa, help ; ay^no, a fast ; arriyo^
rivulet or brook. Take care also not to put the jf
immediately before or after a Consonant or at the
end of a Verb or other word, except the foirowitog,
ley, reyy bueVy law, king, ox, (^'c.
Observe, That the Spaniardsy in order to retain the
softness of the Latin Consonant j, for want of aa ^
exact equivalent, change it into y Consonant ; as*
from
the SpA)rij9H Grammar. I91
from adfuvarefjacerefjefunare^ they have made ayu-
dar^ yQcir^ ayunhVy &c. and yet, when they speak
Latin, they pronounce iam instead of Jam, iacerc in-
stead ofjacere. '
Of the Use of Double Letters.
The Vowels e and are often doubled in Spamsh,
to come the nearer to the radical pronunciatichi ; a9
acreedor^ creer, leer, cooper ar, loor, /in which both
the Vowels are distinctly pronounced. It is, on the
contrary, wrong in some superfluously to add e in
words derived from the Lafin ; as in fee, veir, in
^tead ofy?, ver.
The variety is greater in the use of doubling Con-
sonants ; but to avoid all affectation, and to speak
properly, it is to be observed, that c is never to be
doubled before the Vowels a, 0, u, or Consonants ;
therefore you must write, acaecer^ acontecery aconuh
d&Vy ocasidrif acttsar^ acumuUr^ aclam&r, &c. ; but b^- .
fore the Vowels e and f, the c must be doubled in
words derived from the Latin, as accelerir, accisso,
accentOy Occident e ; exceptingflcep/irand^Mced/r; be-
cause, though in their root they have two cc\ they
are- scarcely perceived in the pronunciation.
Latin .words terminating in ctio change the t into
' c, as accionj diccion^ leccian^ producciony to make their
derivation more potent.
My and not n, is always used before bytn^p; as ,
in these words, ambientCy immortaly imperio.
Words compounded of the Latin Prepositions in
and con follow the Latin rule of turning i/i into im,
and con into com ; as, immacula'doy immediatOy immc-
mori&ly immortal^ &c. commensurdry comm&ciry com'-
iimthry &c. in all which words the m is doubled ;
though in several other common words one m is lost,
as comircio^ comim, cominiony &c. Some change im
into emy as emmascaradoy emmagrecery. emmudecer.
JVis likewise doubled in s.everal words compound-
^ed.with an, ew, iw, con : as annexiony annotdry connadm-
rdly eonmxiony ennegrecer, ennoblecery innatOy innocentCy
mnov4r, &c. except anuldry anunciar. anillo.
The
190 The ELEMENTS of
All words which, in their original, have, g^ t,,or/,
are written in Spanish with j^ not with x\ as from
UmgCy say kjos; from tagus^ ^^o; from tigula^ /eyaj
from consilium^ consejo;ivomjilius^ hijo\ from metior,
tntjor, &c. In all the combinations of the Vowels, ^
and when thelnfinitives end inJ^V,theJ must be kept
in all the Tenses without exception. These words,
mages fady nmgerjr&ge^kc. are excepted, for common
use has prevailed in keeping theg* instead of the j.
If the words have an x in their original, a3 texhs
eximplo^ execucion^ perplexo, vexiga^ &c. it would ap-
pear ridiculous to write them with aj, and not. with
x; and it must be likewise observed, that when the
words have the letter s in their original, as coxa,
dexdVf xabon^ xeme^ xigo, &c, derived from capsa^ de-
sererCy sapo^ semipesy succuSy they are always to be*
written with an j?, and not withj.
Nouns ending with ^, as boxy balax, reldx^ keep the*
in the Plural, as well as allthe Verbs which have x in
the Infinitive Mood, are to keep it in all the Tenses ;
as from baxar^ dexdr, say bdxOy baxaba, baxe. Sec*
Q is frequently changed into c in vulgar writing :
but the true rule is, to follow the original Latin^ .
otherwise the derivation is obscured, and the pro-
. nunqiation corrupted. From c, are formed cuajjoycu*
erda ; cuentay &c. and from qy qualy question^ qudtro,
qudntOyScc.
It is an impropriety many fall into, to use the
Vowels e and i instead ofy andf/; but'this irregu-
larity is cautiously avoided by all good writers^ and
exploded by the Spanish Ac^idemyy the letter^ being
established to be always a Consonant in the' Spanish
words, and the accent is always placed on the an-
nexed Vowel ; as, ayMciy help ; aifinOy sl fast ; arroj/o,
rivulet or brook. Take care also not to put the y
immediately before or after a Consonant or at the
end of a Verb or othejc word, except the folfowing,
le^y rexfy bueVy law, king, ox, Hgc.
Observe, That the Spaniardsy in order to retain the
softness of the Li^tin Consonant j, for want of aa «
exact equivalent, change ii into^ Consonant ; as'
from
I
the Spanish Grammar. ^95
■ • * , ■ »
"Etymology of the ^i^zxnsh from the Latiii.
There is so great an affinity between the Latin and
Spanish^ that' several words of the former are pre-
serfed in the latter, with the same pronunciation ;
but the greatest part are in the Ablative, as will
easily be observed in the following terminatioiis :
; To make the Latin words Spanish :
1. The is changed into uf, as in the following ;
from corda^ i:uerda ; from Jorum, ftcero : from hospes^
huesped] from porta^ puerta; from molay tm^la;
from Sparta, espuerta, &c. .
2. The u is changed into o ; as from/urea, horca ;
from gulosus, goloso; from ulmus, olmo; f roiri stupa^
est6pa ; from musca, mosca, as well as in the first Per-
sons Plural of Verbs ; f»om amamus, amamos, &c.
' 3. The Diphthong tfM is frequently changed int6
; as from aurum, ore ; cauUs, col; maurus, moro. "
4. The e is also changed into ie ; as' from cartas,
ciifto; from servus,* sih^o; from cervus, ciiroo;
from herba, hierba ; from sinistra, smUstra ; from
te,rra, ti^rra; from Jera^Jera, Sec,
. /}. The e takes the place of i ; as from infirmus,
enfcrnio ; from lignum, leho ; from sicus, seco ; from
signum, serial; from sinus, seno, &c.
6. .The b is also changed very frequently intop,
since according to Quintilian, they were often mis-
taken in the pronunciation formerly ; whiclxis very
probable, for both letters are uttered by the same
motion of the lips ; and the Germans in our times
still confound these two letters. The same Quinti-
' lian says, that the Latin word priges was anciently
used instead of briges; and so the Spaniards used to
put the 3 instea'd of/;; as from apricus, abrigo; from
capra, cabra ; capillus, cabSllo ; caput, cabeza ; caper e,
cab^r ; opera, obra ; sapo^, )mb6r, &c.
7. The b is changed into d; as from cubitus, codo ;
dubitare, dudbr \ palpebra, parpados.
9. The c is put several times instead of the g. Ac-
cording to iiwVforf, they hav? so great au alfinity, that
O they
191 The ELEMENTS of
they may in some combinations be easily mi&taketf
one for another in pronouncing ; so from dico^ \(re
say digo ; from acutus^ agAdo ; from amcus^atnigoy
from miea^ ^iga^ &c.
9. Cl is changed into //, with our peculiar pro*
Bunciation ^ clamare, llamar ; clavis^ IWoe.
10. When the c in Latin is followed by ty this
letter is changed into h ; as from cinctus, cmcho ;
dktus^ dicho; Jacltis, hecko; lectutn, lecho; lutta^
lucha ; nocte^ noche ; lactCj leche ; octo, ocho ; pectwi
pecho ; and several others.
11. The d of the Latins is also sometimes lost ; as
from caderCj cair\ from rodere^ roir\ from raSui,
rayo ; from excludere^ ejxcluir ; from audire^ 6if\
12. ThejTwe have changed into A, only to soften
the pronunciation ; as fvomjilius^ hijo ; from Jacerff
hacer ; from formosuSy hermoso ; from facienda^ ftad*
inda; from jervor^ hervor.
13; Tlie g* is changed into i, when it is not pK>-
Bounced ; as from regnumy reino. Sometimes it is '
uite left out; as from digitus^ dedo; fvoxn Jrigtu,
rio ; from sagitia^ iaeta ; froni vagina, vaina^ &c.
14. The J is placed instead of the / ; as from al*
Hum J qjo\ articulus, art ego ; alienum^ ageno ifotiufttj
hoja ; eonsilimny consego, &c.
15. The r is also changed into / ; as from arboreSf
Moles, cerebrum^ celebro; p€riculum,peligro.
17* The ;iis sometimes added, sometimes taken
off; as from insula, isla; rwninare, rumiar,; sal ni'
irtim, salitre ; spqnsus, esposo ; macula, mancha.
17. The double WW of the jLtz^iw is changed in l^a^
msh into our ^; as from annus, ano ; and sometimes
the same happens to the single n, and mn ; as froni
aroma, arana, autumnus^' otono ; Hispania, EspAna^
damnum, daSio -, vinea, vina. As this sound of the wis
proper to the, nation, they have adapted it accord*
ing to their language, or for the difficulty they
found in pronouncing as the Latins did.
1 8. The JKJ is changed very often into a doable U,
ifrben m the Latin word au /is found after j^; as
from
the SpANIStI (JRAH&IAtt. 195
fmta pk^Of ttig^m J>lanctu3^ lldntb\ planus^ llano ^
plethiSj Udno; plcrOy ilSro; phtoia, llivia.
19. The q is changed ihta g ; as frotn aUqms^ al-
gino } from antiquus^ antlguo ; from aqtM^ agua ;
from aquila, iguila.
SO. The t is likewise altered into cf ; as from datenOj
tadina ; from fatum^ hada ; lattis^ lado ; natare^ nadar ;
pktas, pied&d ; /wifer, padre ; mater ^ madre^ &c.
Observe, that these alterations are not general in
all the words, but are used in several, because on
some occasions, the Latin word is preserved, with*
out any mutilation or variation.
It is^ very much in Use in Spanish to change letters^
or to add to the Latin words, w^hen there is an / or
r after ^, in order to sofKn the pronunciation ; as
from adnUrabilis^ laudabili^, admirable, laudable.
The termination of the other words ending in
iliSy in Latin, is il in Spanish; as from Jacilis, f&cil,
from debits, debit; from Jinalis, Jin&l ; from mate-
rialiSi material.
It would be endless to pretend to shew all the
affinity between the Spanish and the Latin, the main
body of the former being derived from thc'latter^
with only such small difference as may easily be
conceived from what has been said above.
Observe besides, that we add an e in Spanish be-
fore 5if or ,jp in Latin when these two letters begin
the word j as from strepitus, estrepito ; from stoma*
xhu^, estomago; from speculari, e6pecular ; from spec-
taculum^ espect&culq ; &c.
■ '
jSewraZ Observations to serine as a Supple-^
ment to the Syntax.
Of the Article.
'IpHfi Definite Article is made use of only be-
* fore Substantives, as it has been said, and
never befor6 Adjectives, except those used sub-
stantively with the neutral Article h \ as lo buino,
io hirmiso, to graifde, &c.
02 't^^\^
I9l The ELEMENTS of
they may in some combinations be easily mi&takeif
one for another in pronouncing ; so from dico^ yft
say digo ; froni acutus^ agAdo ; from amictiSfafnigo ;
from miea, fniga^ &c.
9. Cl is changed into //, with our peculiar pro*
Bunciation ^ clamare, llamar ; clavisy llAve.
10. When the c in Latin is followed by ti this
letter is changed into h ; as from cinctus, cmcho ;
dictus^ dicho; Jacltis, hecho; lectutn, lecho; luJcta^
lucha ; noctCy nocke ; lacte, leche ; octOy ocho ; pectwi
pecho ; and several others.
] I . The d of the Latins is also sometimes lost ; as
from caderCf cair\ from rodere^ roir\ from raSui,
rayo ; from excluderty ^xcluir ; from audire^ oir.
12. ThejTwe have changed into A, only to soften
the pronunciation ; as fvomjilius^ hyo ; from JacerCf
hacer ; from formosuSy hermoso ; from facienda^ Iuu>
inda; from jervoTy hervor.
1^. The g is changed into i, when it is not pK>-
Bounced ; as from regnumj reino. Sometimes it is
J[uite left out; as from digitus^ dedo; from Jrigtu,
rio ; from sagitiaj saeta ; from imgina^ vaina^ &c.
14. The J is placed instead of the /; as from^/*
Hum, ajo; articulusi art ego ; alienumy ageno iJoGumj^
hoja ; eonsilimny consego, &c.
15. The r is also changed into / ; as from arboreSf
Moles, cerebruniy celebro ; periculuniy peligro.
17. The w is sometimes added, sometimes taken
off; as from insula, isla; ruminare, rumiar,; sal fd'
trtim, salitre ; sponsus, esposo ; macula, mancha.
17. The double WW of the jLtz^iw is changed in Spa*
msh into our n ; as from annus, ano ; and sometimes
the same happens to the single w, and mn ; as fromi
arama, arana, autumnus^'otono; Hispania, EspAna\
damnum, daSio -y vinea, vina. As this sound of theSi»
proper to the, nation, they have adapted it accord*
ing to their language, or for the difficulty they
found in pronouncing as the Latins did.
18. The J6 is changed very often into a double U,
ifrben in the Latin word au / is found after j^; a»
from
the SpANisti (JRAH&irAii. 195
fmta pkiOf lUg^i; J^lanctM, ildntb; planus^ llano,
pkmiSf Udno; phro, lUro; phtoia, lUvia.
19. The q is changed iiita o* ; as frotn aUqmSj al-
gino ; from antiquus, antiguo ; from aqua, agua ;
from aquila, iguila.
SO. The t is likewise altered into d\ as from datena^
cadina ;fromfatumj hado ; latus, lado; natare^ nadar ;
pktas, pied&d ; pater, padre ; mater, madre, &c.
Observe^ that these alterations are not general in
all the words, but are used in several, because on
some occasions, the Latin word is preserved, with*
out any mutilation or variation.
It i$^ very much in Use in Spanish to change letters,
or to add to the Latin words, w^hen there is an / or
r after h, in order, to soften the pronunciation ; as
from admrabilis, laudabili^, admirable, laudable.
The terminatidti of the other words ending in
ilis, in Latin, is il in Spanish; as from Jacilis, J^cil,
from debiH/^, debit; from Jinalis, Jin&l ; from mate-
rialis, material.
It would be endless to pretend to shew all the
affinity between the Spanish and the Latin, the main
body of the former being derived from thelatter^
with only such small difference as may easily be
conceived from what has been said above.
Observe besides, that jve add an e in Spanish be-
fore 5if or spiti Latin when these two letters begin
the word j as from strepitus^ estrepito ; from stoma-
xhu^, estSmago; from speculari, especulAr ; from spec-
taculum^ espectaculp ; &c.
« '
Set^eraZ Observations to ser%}e as a Supple-^
ment to the Syntax.
Of the Article.
'IpHE Definite Article is made use of only be-
* fore Substantives, as it has been said, and
never before Adjectives, except those used sub-
stantively with the neutral Article h \ as lo buino,
Iq hirmiso, lo grande, &c.
62 "Wx^
196 The ELEMEKTS of
This Article is never used beifive the Pronounf,
except before the Possessives Relative, tnio, tuyOy
suyo^ nuestro^ vuistro. suyo^ and before the Relatives
que and qual, as well as' before the Infinitive, when
made a Substantive before the Pronouns . Posses-
sives; as in these examples; *
, Pedro es tu amigoy tambien elmw^ Peter is thy friend
as well as mine; Mi casay la tuyaestan coniiguaSy My
house and thine are very near ; Mimugery Id suyu s^n
amigas^ My wife and his are good friends; Guidari
de vuestros caballos comode los nuestros, I will take care
of your horses as^of ours ; Me mquieto de mis negocios
yno de los ^'uestrcs, I mind my business, and not
youra ; Das de comer a tus hijos, y el a las suyos. You
maintain your children as he does his own.
The improper Pronouns, w«o, una, otro, otra, que,
qital, require likewise the Definite Article, when
used as Relatives. Ex. LI uno es hombre de bieny
el btro es un picaro, One is an honest man, and the
other is a^ rogue; Elunoes mas docto qUe el otro. One
is more learned than the other ; Del qual habldis, del
padre 6 delhijo? Who do you speak of, of the father
or the son ? Lo mio y lo tuyo dividen los mejores ami-
gosy Mine and thine parts the greatest friends ; El
comer y el beber miwho^ destruye la saludj Over-eating
and over-drinking destroy health.
There are also some Adverbs preceded by the
Neutral Article lo, as the following: Lo mejor que
j)udiere, The best I will be able ; Lo menos quefuerc
possible. The less it will be possible; En lo quetUcc
hay lo mas ylo menos, There is more or lesstn what
you say ; Digame elquandoy elcomo, Tell me when
and how.
Of, the Use and Concordance of Nouns.
It is a general rule in Spanish, as well as in Laim,
that the Adjective must agree with the Substantive
in Gender, Number, and C^sej 2ls, Dios todopode-
roso, God Almighty; El hombre sabio, The learned
man; La muger indiscrita, The indiscreet woman, Sgc.
This
9
s * •
/itf Si»A^iSH Grammar. ' 197
This js verjg easily ^understood, especially by.tbose
Avho know Zft/w; but it is not so easy to know
when the Adjective ought to be put before the Sub-
stantive, and when after ; therefore I will endea- .
vour to explain it as near as possible.
1. Participles, taken adjectively, mu!^ go after
Substantives ; as, una casa derribada^ a demolished
house y una iglesia consiruida^ a church built; una
plaza sitiida, 2L besieged place; un general vencido^ a
general overcome.
2. Nouns of colour follow the same rule; as,
bianco^ . w\i\it \ negro^ black; Colorado^ incarnado,
red; verde, green ; amarillo^ yellow; azul, blue. Ex.
Un vestido bianco^ a white dress ; un sombrero negro^
a black hat; medias color adas, red stockings ;.c//w/?a
verde^ a green waistcoat, (^c.
3. The elemental qualities; as, caliJnle,hol;frio^
cold ; seco, dry; humedo, damp ; templado, temperate. -
Ex. Jguacdliente, hot water; tiempojrio, cold wea-
ther; Una seca, dry wood ; aire AM»2^^,a.damp air, S^u
4. Nouns of measure ; as, largo^ long ; corto^ short ;
^iwcAo, wide; estrecko, narrow; alio^ high. Ex. l/n
vestidO' largo^ a long dress ; una capa^corta^ a snort
cloak ; una chupa ancha^ a wide waistcoat ; un zap&io
estrichOy a strait shoe ; unatorre alta, an high tower.
5. Nouns of blaming or praising, expressing good
countenance, presence, or bad quality ; as, ^idio, wise;
prudent€ypTaQQut : perfeclo, perfect ; ^oc^c^, learned ;
Aerm(?^o, handsome ;yz>7, faithful-; viciSsOy vicious;
cqjOy lame; abominable, ahoimnable. Ex. Unamuger
prudinte, eipTiidtntwomm; obra.perfecia, a perfect
Work ; un estudiantt dodo, a learned scholar ; un Rey
sabio^ a wise King ; una donzelln kermosa, a handsome *
girl ; un criadojiely a loyal servant ; un hbmbrt vicioso,
a vicious-man ; un cabdllo cqjo^ a lame horse; una
vida abominable, an abominable* jife, S^x.
6. The names of nations follow also the same rule ;
Mia polUica Italiana, Italian politics; la graveddd
jE^j^flfwo/a,Spanish gravity; la ligeriza Franc^a, Frenc^
levity ; la generosid^d Inglisa^ EngUsVi gej^txo^xVv
03
t
*
19« The ELEMENTS of
horruchiraAkm&na^ German drankeane^js; to which
^ou uiust add Nouns ending in ico ; as, paiacio mag-
nificoj a magnificent palace ; m hombrejanti^tico, a
fantastic man, ^c.
The above rule is not general ; • there are several
exception^ and occasions, when Adjectives es^press^
ing praise, blame, good or bad quality, not only
may go before the Substantives, but ought also ab-
solutely to precede them ; therefore I shall give ^
list of the Adjectives 'subject to this alteratioQj^
and give examples afterwards.
Bucfiy buinoy buena, fnaloy tnah, good, bad,
LindOj lindat handsome.
FeOj fea^ ordinary, ugly.
Falgo^ falsGj false.
GrandCy great ; jo^cetif young ; pobre^ poor.
Bicd, ric<jfj rich ; *cerdadero^ verdadira^ true.
J gradablCs pleasing ;bizdrro, biz&rrdy gallant'
Poderosoy poderosa, power^l ; valUnte^ brave.
Firme,, 6rm; unicoj mica, only.
'ExBmplcs.rr^Hemos cofnido una buena perdiz, We
have eat a good partridge ; La perdiz que himos cfh
tnido era muy buena^ The partridge we hav^ eateQ
was very good.
He hablado con un mal hombre^ I have spoken with
a wicked man; Elhombre con quienhe hahlAdoesmuy
tnaloy The man I have spoken to is very wicked.
La Reyna de Inglaterra es una linda princ^ssa, Tho
Queen of England isa very pretty princess; La Reyna
de Inglaterra e^ una princessa muy linda. The Queen
of England is a very pretty pri<)cess ; Quefea mugir
es la Duquessa de / What an ugly woman
is the Ducjiess of ...,.! La Duquessa de « . .
ViuyfeOj The Duchess of . , . is very ugly*
Falso ataque, a false attack ;Jalsa br&yayfausse braye,
(a term of fortification signifying a small mount of
^arth, four fathoms wide, erected on the le^n)und
"^ foot of the rampart ;) una mula falsa, a vicious
: un JaUo picaro, a treacherous cheat ; Este
es muy falso. This man is very ^Is^; ungran
I
the SPANISH Qravhab. 199
B^, a great King ; El Rey es muy grAnde, The
King is veiy. gneat.
Uh Prittcipejaoen man^esto mucho vaUr^ A young
Prince shewed great courage ; Nopcleis con este sol^
Mdojffoen^ Do not fight with this young soldier. .
Es unpobre hombre^ It is a poor man ; Qncpobre
sakUdo ! What a [pitiful soldier 1 El fic^ dc Mar-
ruecos es un Principe tnuy pobre^ The King of Mo-
rocco is a very poor Prince.
Un rico mercadir^ a rich merchant; un corner^
cidhte rico dc den milpessos^ a tradesman worth one
hundred thousand dollars.
EiS un verdddero picarOj He is a true cheat ; Juan
£s muy verdaderOj John is a man of great veracity.
La Reynaesuna Princissa agradabk^ The Quee^
is a very agreeable Princess ; or La RSyna es una
agradabk Princissa.
El Infante es un bizarro Principe, Tlie Infant of
Spain is a fantastic Prince : Pedro es muy bizirro^
Peter is very gallant.
El Prindpe de Brunswick es un vaU^nte generAl,
The Prince of Brunswick is a great general; or. El
Principe de Brunsfwick es un general muy valiinte.
Ufidjirme resoUcion, a firm resolution; tUrra
Jiirme, the main land:
El inico remedio es este, The only remedy is this;
La muirte es mi remSdio icnico^ Death is my only
remedy.
Of Adjectives taken substantively.
There are two sorts of Adjectives used in Spanish
as Substantives: some only to diversify the lan^
guage, and some to abbreviate it, putting the at«
tribute of a Noun instead of the Noun itself.
The Adjectives v;en/ad(fro, tmeifalso, false ; buSno^
good ; mahf bad ; possible^ possible ; impossibky impos-
sible ; are of the first class ; because when I say, Dii
en b verdaderOf He ascertained the truth ; accus&do
de crimen defalso, accused of fotgery ; lo bueno del
cuentOy the best of the aflair ; lo malo de todo esto, the
worse of all this; Aoc/r lo possible, to malce what is
possibk; tentir loinfKMibkiU^trj N?WxW\mY^i^i^c^
200 The ELEMENTS of
tbeo VQrdadiro is putinstead of truth ;falso^ for false-
hood ; bueno, for goodness ; malo^ for badness ; possU
bkj for possibility; iwpowJWe, for impossibility ; be-
cause, though it is not -usual to say, lajnaldaddetbdo
esto, the badness of all this ; hacer la possibilidAd^ to
make the possibility ; tcntarld impossibilidad^ to try
the imposssibility; yet, all this is expressed when
the "Adjective is used substantively ; though it could
be said in another manner ; as, hacir todojo gue es
possible, to make all that is possible ; tentar ain lo
que es impossible^ to try yet what is impossible. But
as all Adjectives cannot be made use of in this
manner^ custom must be followed.
The number of Adjectives used instead of Sub-
stantives, whereof they are attributes, is very great;
they are of two sorts ; some made use of instead'of
things, and others instead of persons.
The first are honesto, honest; util^ useful ; agrada-
ble, agreeable ; as, Lohonesto se dehe prejerira 16 uiil ■
y a lo agradable. That which is honest is preferable
to what is useful ^nd agreeable. Lo honestOyidl^ and
agraddble, are taken for an honest, useful, and agree-
able thing. They say also, lo alto de una tOrre^ the
top of a tower, <!^'c. *
Adjectives representing persons follow alwaystKe
Gander of the person they speak of; therefore we
say, Elsabio de nnda se espanta, A learned man won-
ders at nothing ; Undcasada ha devbsendr lasleyes del
matrimonio, A married woman musti)bserve the laws
of matrimony. For the same reason, we use to say,
ioi escogidos, the elect people ; los predesiinddos, the
predestinate people ; bs condenddos, the damned.
Lastly, the Adjectives are also used substiintively
with some Verbs, especially with the Verb prdciarse^
to boast of-; as, Seprecia de sabioy He boasts of being
learned , Seprecia de valientCy He boasts of being va-
liant ; Picase degerieroso. He pretends to be generous.
Of Adjectims as Covipdratites.
If we attend -td the word comparative hi all the
extension of its signification, w6. ought to join to the
^ ■■'-'.., Adjectives
the Spanish Xjtrammah. 201
Adjectives Comparative all those shewing parity or
disparity, erther by themselves, as igual^ equal ; desi"
gudly'\xTie({M2X ; conf6rme^ conform ; diferente. differ-
ent; or by the help of some Adverlis ; as, Es grande
como tUy He^is as great as thee : El uno es tan vali-
enie como el otrOy The one is as valiant as the other. It
is not in that sense that I speak here of Adjectives
Cpmparative, but only of those meaning coippari-
son of quantity, either by themselves, or by the help
of the Adverbs masymovt ; or menos, less.
According to this principle, I say, the first are ;
viejoTy better ; peor^ worse i-fnenoVf less ; which have
been taken from the Latin : the second are, all the
Adjective Positive admitting of the junction of the
. Adverbs mas, more ; menoSy less ; mejor, better ; /;eor,
worsf; and menor^ lesser; which are Comparatives
by themselves, as well as grande, great; pequcnOf
little; andgenerally all the Nouns made a Compa-
rativie of by adding tnas, more, ormenos,\ess; which
become then Compound Comparatives.
On all thfise occasions, in order to join the first
term of Comparison with the second, the Particle
que is made use of; as, El ^inoesmejor que la cerveza.
Wine Is better than beer ; Za jiivre es enfermed&d
ntenor que la jreste. The fever is a distemper less than
the plague; Pedro es mas grande que Juan, Feter is
greater than John ; El perro es mas pequeno que el
leony The dog is less than the lion.
\ Observe, that the Adjectives superior and inferior^
do not admit of mas or menos before tl?eip, because
they include in themselves the Comparison; where- ,
fore they require not que before the second term,
but the Particle a ; as, El uno es inferior a el otro.
One is inferior to the other ; El otro es superior ^
este, The other is superior to this.
■ *
' Of Adjectit^es Superlative.
'The Spanish language has entirely retained from
the Latin the manner of forming one of its Super-
latives; I say one^ because there ate Vwo vi«5^ .^
SOJ The ELEMENTS of ^
expressing it ; the first by placine the Adverb^ nn^
very, before the Adjective ; as, Es may docto. He is
very learned ; the second by adding Uimo to the
Adjective ; as^ J^^ doctisimo, He is very learned.
Observe, that there are also Adverbs formed of
these last Superlatives; as from amantisimo^ comes
amantUimamente ; from benignisimo, benignUima^
tnente: from belUsimo, bellUimamente^ handsomely.
When there is a comparison made, then the Ar-
ticle e/, the, is piit before mas^ more; as, Es el mas
i&bio de todos los hombresy He is the most learned of
all men ; Es la mas linda mugir gue sepueda ver^ She
i^ the most pretty woman that one can see.
Of Numbers.
I have already, in the beginning of this Grammar,
mentioned the Numbers ; but now I shall escplain
the use of them in speaking; observing, that theic
are five sorts of Numoers : the first are the Cardioida
. or principals, osyunoy one ; das, two ; ires, three. Sic.
the second Ordinals; SLS^primero, first; segindo, se*
cond ; tercero, third ; decimo, tenth ; vighimo, twen-
fieth ; trigesimo, thirtieth ; centesimo, hundredth ;
fniUsimo, thousandth. 3. The Collectives.; as una
dozina, one dozen ; una quinzena, one fifti^n ; una
weintina, one twenty, S^c. 4. The Distributives ; as^
el quinto, the fifth part ; el pctivo, the eighth part,
^c. 5. The Augmentativess as,e/^&/^, thedouble;
* el triple, the treble.
The three last of these' numeral Nouns are al-
ways Substantives, and the two first Adjectives; as,
un hombre, a man ; dos hombres, two men ; 8fC. una
iDUjg(r, a woman ; dos mugires^ two women, Sgc. cl^
primer dia, the first day ; el segHndo dia, the second
day; el tercero dia, the third day, S^c. laprimirasC'
m&na, the first week ; la seginda sem^na, the second
week; l& tercira semina, the third week, ^c. But
as there is no rule without an ^s^eeption, they are
•Di^etimes made use of as Substantives) as you shall
seq in the fdlowimr observatioiis,
1. All
theSvAvriBii Grammab. 203
1. All TSouhs of the Ordinal Numbers are Sub«
stantives, when they are used alone without any
other Substantive ; as in this sentence, Tret esia
comprehendiflo dos wees en siisy there is twice three
in six ; where you may see, that ires and sets are
employed substantively, apd not adjectively; as en
una i)izj one time ; wherein viz is the Substantive ;
and una the Adjective.
g. All Nouns of Number are also taken as Sub-
stantives, when preceded b^ an Article; as elcinco
fie bastaSf the five of clubs ;jug&r 4 los cihUos, to play
at piquet ; or when they are with another Noun,
{is, un sietCy a seven. They say also, un ciSnto de
manzAnas, one hundred of apples ; dos cientos de cas*
ttmaSy two hundred of chesnuts.
When they speak of the hours, they say in English^
^' I arrived at one^ at two o'clock ;" but in Spanish we
say onlv d la una^ a las das, i^las treSy a las quatro^
Bcc. andf so on till twelve, when they say, a las doze
del duij or 4 las doze de la noche^ at noon-day, or at
midnight ; which is not only used for the hours, but
also to express the days of the month, or to date
any act; as, LUgo a qu&tro de Mayo, He arrived the
fourth of May; or, Londrisy Diziembre viinte de
1765, London, the £Oth December, 1765; yet the
Cardinal Number is used when the Ordinal is with
a Substantive ; as, MuriS el dia cinco de JgSsto, he
died the fifth of August
0/the Ablative Absolute.
The manner of speaking called by Grammarians
Ablatives Absolute has been carefully preserved by the
S^aniards'ux their language, and with great reason,
funce it is one of the shortest and most handsome
idioms they have from the Latin, as you may see in
these examples : Acabida la comida, se fui a caza,
A£ter dinner he wait a hunting ; which is better
than if thi^ were to say, despues de comSr, after din-
ner ; therefore, instead of saying, Elnegocio hamindo
sidopuisto m contiderAcion, sentenmron los juices, it is
better
204 - r//e ELEMENTS 0/
better to say, La cosa puesta en delibeiricifin^ los juices
sentenciaron. After considering the affair, the judges
gave their verdict. It is also more elegant to sa^. La
hatMla ganada, se 7*mdio la plaza^ The battle being
gained, the place surrendered, than Despues que la
bafallajuesse gdnaday After the battle was gained;
Of the First Pronoun Personal.
The first observation we must make upon this
Pronoun is, that it is common to both Genders,
and is always declined with the indefinite Article,^
and dCf as we shall see in the examples. ,
The second, that instead of liaving two first Pro-
nouns Personal, as in other Languages, they have
only one in Spanish^ as well as in English j which is j/o,
I ; placing it immediately before or after ; as, yo soy,
Jam; ygkago, I make; yo can to, 1 sing; or interposing
a Particle ; as Yo os ass eg wo que no le conSzco, \ asr
sure you that I do not know him. But you mustol>-
serve, that this Pronoun^/o is seldom made use of be-
fore the Verb ; for the variation there, as in the ter-
mination of each person, renders it useless; except
on some occasions, Which I am going to explain.
The Pronoun ofyo is used before the Noun and
titles of a noble person ; as, Yo Don Pedro de J/^-
' dSzay gohernadbr de Cadiz, &c. I Don Pedro de
Mendoza^^ governor of Cadiz ; Yo Catalinu de Bena-
mdes^ Duquesa de Gandia, Sec.
When yo ought to be put after the Verb^ which
should be in the Interrogations, then it is never made
use of; so when in English they say. Where am I ?
What shall I say ? in Spanish, we must say, Adonde
estoy? Quedird? When in a parenthesis, it mu«t be
made use of; as, Los Catalanes (ledLve yo)fueron
reheldes, The Catalans (said I to him) were rebels. \
'When one is of an opinion contrary to that of an-
other, this Pronoun jyo is always expressed, as well as
in the sentences where the second or third Pronoun
Personal is made use of before the Verb ; as, Tu
qidhes baylir, y yo jugA):^ Thou desirest to dance,
arid
* ^J6^' Spanish GaAkMAR. 90S
aud Itoplay; TuvasA Parisj p yo 6 Landres, Thou
goest to rarJs, and I to London ; Pedro cantaj y yo
lloro, Peter sings and I cry ; Vos leveriis^ yo. no.
You. shall see him, I not ; that is, I shall not s^e
him. Yo is also used when an absolute command
is given ; as, Yasoy quien os manda hacer esto, It is I
who order you to do this.
You must observe that the above rules serve also
for the Pronouns of the second and third Person.
The first Pronoun Personal is very differently used
in the Dative, because sometimes they make use of
mCj sometimes of mi ; as, Pedro se me entrego, Peter
surrendered to me ,** JDio me un regalo. He gave me a
preisent. ,
They use also mi instead of ;we, when this Pronoun
is governed by some Adverb or Preposition; as,
Trab&ja "para mi, He works for me ; ^ Ha hablido
contra mi, He spoke against me, Sgc. As the above
rules serve as well for the second as for the first
Personal, I will speak of the third.
Of the tJdrd Pronoun Personal.
The third Pronoun Personal is not, like the first and
second, of both Genders, there is one Masculine,
el, he, and the other Feminine, ella, she, for the
Singular; ellos, they, for the Plural Masculine, and
ellas, they, for the Plural Feminine ; for which last
there is no distinction in English, being expressed by
they, as, well as the Pronoun Masculine. After this
observation, I will shew the use of this Pronoun.
Its most common use is before the Verb it go-
verns I as, El ama, He loves ; Ella lee. She reads ;
and then nothing is placed between them, except
some Pronoun or negative Particle; as, Else passea,
he walks ; Ella no le quiere, She does not love him ;
Ellos sefueron, They went away ; Ellas no lo dLreron,
They (speaking of Women) did not say it.
But you must observe, that this Pronoun, as well
as the firsl and third, is- usually left out, excepting
when two Pronouns of different Persons are met
within
jOe} tht ELEMENTS of
within the same sentence; as, To Uo y H escribe^ \
read, and he writes ; EUa vaipasseary tuHaygUsia^
She goes to take a walk, and thou goest to church ;
VosStros queriis manddr,y illos no qmiren obedecer^ Ye
like to command^ and they will not obey; Nostras
k?enimos temprino, yMIas tarde^ we (men) came sooti|
and they (women) came late.
Of Pronouns Possessive.
The Pronouns mi^ tu, stiy my, thy, his, ate Aiade
use of with a Substantive only, as in EfigUsh ; a%
Dime mi sombrero ^ Give me my hat ; Manda h M
cri&do^ Command thy servant ; Obedice i su padrt^
He obeys his father; Embiamemispistolas, Send me
my pistols; ConsSroa tus vestidosj Preserve thy
cloaths; Miguil despricia h sus amigoSy M ichaisl de»
spises' his friends; where you may observe they have
only one termination in the Singular and Plural.
In J?/?^/i^^ the third Pronoun Possessive is divided
into three, viz. Aw, Aer, and its\ but all these aree&-
pressed in Spanish^ by su ; as, Desulibro dmi hermima^
Give her book to my sister ; Port la Have en su agu- .
jero. Put the key in its hole ; which is observed
as well in the Singular as in the Plural Number.
The Pronouns mio^ tuyo, s^yo^ mine, thine, his, or
thei r,are made use of,either to answer questions about
property; ^s^CuyoesestecabAlio? Whose horse is this?
Mioy mine, S^c. or with an Article, to represent a Sub-
stantive mentioned before ; as, Tu padre y elmio^ Thy
father and mine ; Mi m&dre y la tuya. My mother
and thine ; Tuhermhnay la 5Wy«,Thy sister and his ;
Tus amigos y los mios, Thy friends and mine j ifcftr
plumas y las tuyas^ My pens and thine ; Tus camlwas
y las suyasy Thy shirts and his ; Nuistra casa y ktvti^
estraestan vecinas^ Our house and yours are near; Vth
estros soldadosylos nuistrospele&ron^ Your sold iers and
ours fought; Vos queriis a vuestros hijos, y ellos ^ los
sfh/os. Ye love your children, and they love theirs.
What mujst be more particularly taken notice of is,
that these Pronouns become Substantives on twooc-
* casions:
I
, the S^AXisH GiiAXttAft. tOf
casibns ; the fifs^ bv putting the Neutral Article h
before thein ; as, Lo mio, that which is mitie (my ^
property) ; h tu^Oj thy property ; lo suyo, his proper^
ty ; . as^ Lo tnioy lo tuyo han causado muertes^ robasy in*
cendios a millares de millonesj What is mine, and what
is thine, has caused thousands of millions of murders,
robberies, and fires ; A cada una lo suyo^ To every
oiie his property. But observe that it has neither
Shigular nor Plural, Masculine nor Feminine.
The other occasion when thesePersonalPossessives
become Substantives, is when they are used in the
iPiural Masculine ; as, los mlosy los tijfoSj lossujfosj losnu"
istrosjosvuestrosy lossHyos^ which signify n^parentSf
thy parents J &c. or my soldiers^ myjriends, &c. expres-
sing persons with whom we are united, either by
friendship^ relation, or party : so they sa;^ in Spanish
vety concisely, Yoy bsmios, I and my friends ; Tuy
los tuyosj Thou and thy friends ; Ely los suyos^ He
and his friends ; Nosotros y los nuSstroSj We and our
friends ; VosStros y los vuistros^ Ye and your friends ;
EUos y los suyoSy They and their friends ; and thi»
Pronoun can never be used but to signify this.
Of Pronouns Demonstrative.
ThePronouns Demonstrative are three in Spanisht
as we have said in the Declensions ; the first is estt^
esta^ estOj and signifies this; the second, e#e, esa^
esOy that; the third aquil^ aquella, aquillo^ which si^'*
nifies likewise that ; but with this difference, that
este and €$e is made use lo denote any thing or pet-
ion present, or which may be seen ; but aquel is em*
ployed to express what is far remote, and at the
greatest distance ; so they say, esta pluma, this pen ;
eseespejo, that looking-glass ; aquellaciudad de Par'is^
that city of Parrs. But observe, that €sa\% used in
writing to any person to express the place or town
wherein he lives ; as, He hahlado en esa (ciudad) con
muchos amigos^ I have spokeninyour city with many
friends ; Hay en esa muchas fabricas^ There .are in
your town many manufactures. Este and aquel are
also used in comparisons, either of men or things; and
then e«fe signifies the last thing or person spoken of;
and
208 The ELEMENTS of
and aguel the first ; as Carlos fue grande^ Fredirko
omBiaSso ; este valient e^ aquH poderosOy Charles was
great, Frederick ambitious; the fii^t powerful^ the
last courageous ; where you may see, that este re- «
presents Frederick, and dquel Charles.
Jqwl is used also to shew contempt; as, Que
quiere aquel kornbre ? What does that man desire ?
Aquelhombre es unpicaro^ That man is a rogue.
Of Interrogatives,
The Pronouns interrogative are^we, what; quien,
who; and qualy which, as we have explained it in
the beginning of this Grammar.
The first thing to be observed is, that que is either
Masculine or Feminine, Plural or Singular; as, Qui
hombre es este ! What man is this ? Quemuger esestaf
What woman is this? Que hombres son esios ?. What
nienare these; Que mugeres so7i estas? What women
are these ?
This Pronoun is so much used in Spanish^ that I
think it necessary to explain here all its several sig-
nifications. ^
It is used as a Substantive; and signifies what^
what thing ; sls, Que lesuccedio? What happened to
him? Deque se quexa? Of what does he complain?
De qui sirve la razbn con el ? Of what avail is rea-
son with him ? Sometimes f we signifies what for}, as,
A que vino? What did he come for? A que tanto
ruidof What so great a noise for? It is also used
with Prepositions; as, Con que sc mantiene? What
does he maintain himself with? En que passu su
tiempo? What does he spend his time in? De quStt
hace esto? From what is this done P
Qtiien, who, is always used to denote a person in
the Interrogation, and never any thing else; as,
Quien es ? Who is there? Quien ba hechoesto ? Who
has made this? Quien eselpintor del Ret/? Who is
the King's painter?
Qualy which, is made use of on the very same oc-
casions 2is in English; with only this difierence, that' ^
there is the Plural, quales; but it is common to both '
Genders ;
theSfAtfUB Grammail SOQ
Oenders; as,i^ies el nias alto de estosdqs ? Which
is the tallest of these two m^n? Qptflks son las ma$
hertno^as de esias mugeres? Which are the most
handsome of these women ?
Of Relatives.
•
The Pronouns Relative are, que^ who; elquak
which; c«j/o, whose; though some grammarians
count ten of them, these four only deserve that
name ; the others being indefinite, I will speaTc of
tli^m afterwards.
The Pronoun ywr, who, is relative when it follows
a Substantive ; as, El hombre que as habloy The man
who spoke to you ; La muger que quereis. The wo-
man you love ; La desgracia que le acaecio^ The mis-
fortune that happened to him. This Pronoun, as a
Relative, expresses generally persons and things ani-
mated or not ; as, Un hombre que habla^ A man who
speaks ; Una muger que llord^ A woman who cries ;
Un pcrro que ladra^ A dog that barks ; La dama que
€twais, The lady you love ; Laespada que lUvas^ The
sWord you wear ; La casa que vendio vm. The house
you gold ; La cama en que duermOy The bed I lie in.
On several other occasions, where- there is rela-
. tion» the Pronoun que is not used, huXquien^ ox el
qualy to express Persons ; and they only put el qual^
speaking of things not animated, or of beasts, with-
out ever making useof ^2<ie;; in such circumstances;
as^ El hombre de quien^ or Del qual es hijo, The man
whose son he is; Elcab&Uo del qual me sirvOj The
borse I fide upon ; La razon de la qual me vali, Tlie
reason I made use of.
Of Indefinites:
There are two sorts of Pronouns Indefinite; the
first are those used to denote only persons ; the se-
cond, those that serve to denote persons as well ^s
things. The first are, quien, 9Ji^ie, the last, ninginOj
none; atro^ another; cadauno, every body; cada,
ieacb; ci^r/o^ certain ; mistno, sanie; algiino^ some ;
ialf such ; todOf .^U ; -,■ qualquiir, inrhatever.
P * Among
210 The ELEMENTS of
Among all these Pronouns, some have only one
termination, and are common to all Genders ; as,
quieriy nadie, cada^ tal; the others have two termina-
tions, that is. Masculine and Feminine; ^SyfiingiinOf
otroy cada uno^ cierto^ misjno^ alg&no^ todo.
Amongst those of one termination, and common
to both Genders, there are three without a Plural,
viz. nadie^ cada; hwlquien and f^/ have their Plural,
tales and quieneSy common to both Genders. All the
others with two terminations have likewise their
Plural; but you must observe, that the Plural of
qualquiira is irregular, and makes qualesquiera. ]
, All Pronouns Indefinite are affirmative, excepting
ningAno and nadicy which are negative ; as, Alginod^
esios sold&dosy Some of these soldiers ; Cada Rey cuida
de sus estAdoSy Every King takes care of his states;
QfiienesvirtuosOy mtrece sir alabado^ Who is virtuous
deserves to be praised ; cierto persmage, a certain
great person ; Otro diavendre, I will come- another
day ; Mucho vino perturba la razon^ A great deal of
wine disturbs the sense : Cada uno se retiro. Every
one went away ; Ningitna muger puede resistir a la
vanidad, No woman can resist pride ; Ella misma vwto.
She came herself; Alg&no de ellos me habloy Some of
them spoke to me ; Muchos se resolvieroHy Many took
the resolution ; Tal me podria hablar^ Such a bne
could speak to me ; Todo hSmbre que quiere ser^esti-
madoy debe vivir bieriy All men who desire to be in
esteem, must live well; Ningun hbmhrede bienpuide
decir estOy No honest man can say this.
The above are examples of all the Pronbuns In-
definite ; but we will treat of each in particular, for
the better intelligence of the reader.
Of all the Pronouns, quien is certainly the most in-
definite; it is a Substantive, and declined without
the Indefinite Articles a and de ; it has the property
of being sufficient to two terms of relation, as well
as the Indefinite que ; as, A pesar de quien quisUre re-
mtir mCy In spite of any who intend to resist me ;
H^bla de esio a quien le quiere escuckar, He speaks of
this to any person who Vveai^ livav \ Tenia orden de
^ the SPAVUH GllAKItfAR. 211
prender ^ quienfassase por alia. He had the #rder to
.arrest any. person passing by ; Se dtspedia muy presto
de quien k havia htcho agrivio, He parted directly
from any person who had affronted him.
In all these examples, you see that quien has two
terms of relation, and two cases. In the first, it is
in the Genitive, with the term pesir^ that governs
it; in the second, it is in the Dative, hecanst kablir
governs the Dative, and it serves as a Nominative
to the Verb following; in the third, it is in the Ac-
cusative, as governing the second; and in the
fourth, it is relative to the Verb despedirsCj and in
the Ablative, being likewise the Nominative of the
Vei'b hacer.
Nadie is negative, as well in Spanish as in English^
signifying nobody ; consequently a negation ought
never to be put with the following Verb, which is
made negative by this Pronoun ; so you must not
say, Noama nadie el rndly but nadie ama el mhl^ No-
body likes pain.
When there is with the verb an exclusive Prepo-
sition, nadie must never be used, but algUno or al-
gunay as, Vivir sin aggraviar a algunOj To live with-
'out offending any body ; No depende de algino^ or
J)^ nadie depende^ He does not depend on any per-
son ; Nadie hay quien te ame ianto. There is nobody
who loves you so much.
The Pronoun Negative ningino, none, follows the
same rules; 2is,Ningunolo ha vistOy Nobody has seen
it ; Se fue soh, He went without any body, &c.
About the Pronoun otro there is only a little obser-
vation to be made, that it signifies another. Nobody
says, uhotro hombrey unaotra muger^ but otrohombre,
otra mugery another man, another woman.
The Pronoun cadUy each, is applied either to per-
sons or things; it has no Plural, and is common to
both Genders; as cada hbmbrey each man; cada
mughy each woman ; cada cabalhy each horse } cada
casa, each house. The Noun following cada cannot
on any occasion be put in the Plural Number.
When the numeral unoy one, is joined vr\U\ cada^
p 2 \Scvww
212 T/i^ ELEMENTS 0/
then uno must agree in Gender with the following
Substantive ; as, Cada undde estos soldados mtrict sir
premiado, Every one of these soldiers deserves to bfe
rewarded y Cada uno de estos cabaUos come una medilh
decebaddy Every one of these horses eats a measure
of barley ; Cada unade est as donzillas havia de set ca-
sidoj Every oiie of these virgins ought to be mar-
ried ; Cada una de est as casas tiene veinte quartos^
^ach of these houses has twenty rooms.
When cada uno is applied to persons, it has sothe-
finies a general and indefinite acceptation, signifying
either men or women ; as, Cada uno quiert sir esn-
madOy Every one likes to be esteemed ; Cada uno hfl
demorir^ Every person must die. Sometimes it is
«aid in a more limited acceptation^ signifying pro*
perly every person, ancl it signifies both man and wo-
man; as when a man or woman says, speaking of
one's self; Cada unohace la que se le antqja^ Evciy
one acts as he likes; Cada uno debe saber to que U
convienCj Every one must know what is conveniedt
to him. flxcept upon this occasion, that this Pro-
noun has always some reference to the term preced-
. ing or following it, having a distributive rather than
^ collective signification, wherein it may admit one
or the other Gender according to that of the term of
its relation ; as Todos le acometierony cada uno k dii
una punalada ', todas las mugires tom&ron lasarmas^ff
cada una peleo animosamente^ All the women took
up arms, and every one fought courageously.
Cierto, certain, is rather an Adjective than a Prb-
noun; only it must.be observed, that it agrees al-
ways with its Substantive in Gender and Number; '
as, cierto hombrCy a certain man ; eierta muger] a
certain woman. It is also used with things ; as,
Hs visto ciertos patios muy finos. I have seen cer-
tain cloths very fine ; Esta noticia es cierto, This
news is certain.
^ Mismo, same, sometimes is a Pronoun, and some-
times an Adverb; but I will speak of it here, consi-
dered as a Pronoun, and, in this quality, it has 8eV^
ral meanings ; because sometimes it denotes iiidin-
dual
the Spanish Grammar. 2J3
dual identity^ sometiqies it shews .parity or equali-
ty 5 and, at ottier tilnes, it serves to give more
energy to the expression.
In the two first acceptatiotis, denoted in Latin by
idem, this Pronoun is joined with any sort of Substan-
tives^ and must agree with them in Number and Gen-
der* It must be put immediately before the Noun,
ill the cases of identity, as well as of parity ; as, El
fhismo hombre me dLvOj The same man told me; Tiene^
siempre tos mismos criados^ he keeps always the same
servants ; Habita en la misma casa, He lodges in the
same house ; Dos kombres delmismo talk, Two men of
the same shape ; Dosjlores del mismo ol6i\ Two flow-
ers of the same smell ; Dos negocios de la misma im-^
part&nda^ Two affairs of the same consequence.
Sometimes \he Pronoun mismo is relative, and
must agree with the Noun Substantive of its rela-
tion, that is understood ; as, El hombre de quien me
hiblaSy es el mismo queyo te decia, The man thou speak-
cst of is the same I told you ; Su mode de vivir es
siempre el misn^Oy His manner of living is the same.
When the said Pronoun is made use of merely to
give more strength to the expression, it must agree
with its Substantiv-ein Gender and Number; as. El
Rey mismo estdbapresente, The Kinghimself was pre-
sent ; Dios la manda^y la razon misma lo requiSre, God
commands it, and reason itself requires it. On seve-
ral other occasions, sometimes it may be considered
as a Pronoun, and sometimes as an Adverb. Con-
sidered as a Pronoun, it answers to the Latin Pro-
» 90un ipsa ; but considering it as an Adverb, it an-
swers to the Latin Adverb etiam, or quin etiam, but,
on any of these occasions, it never has a relative.
Mismo is also frequently added to some other Pro-
noun, only by way of energy, and, then, it always is
a Pronoun. It is joined to the Pronouns Personal^
yo, I ; tUj thou ; el or aquely he ; ella^ she ; and with
. their Plurals ; as, Yo mismo lo d, I saw it myself ; Tu
mismo puedesjuzgarlOy Thou art able thy self tojudge
it ; El mismOy or e/4? mismu me hablo, He, or she spoke
P 3 to
214 7%e ELEMENTS of
to me himself orherself; Nosotrosmismos, or nos6ira$
-mismas cuidaremos de sus negocios^ We will take care
ourselves of your affairs; Vosotros misnws, or vosotras
mismas podeis acabarlo. You are able yourselves to
finish it; Ellos mismoSj or ellas mishias contribiyenasu
desdichCy They contribute themselves to their mis-
fortune. The same Pronoun is likewise used with
the Demonstratives, esie^ esse^ aquel, or estotroj essotro,
and tnust agree in Gender and Number with them ;
as, Esie mismo es^ This is the very same man; Esta
misma es^ This is the very same woman ; Esto mismo
esy This is the thing itself.
JUismo is also joined with the Fossessives, miOy tuyo^
suyOf after the same manner as above ; as^ Esj esta tu
casa? Lamia misma \ Is this thy house; It is itself.
And so in the answers made to any question.
OBSERVATIONS upon the Moods and Tenses
of' Verbs;
It is not sufficient to know all the Verbs of a lan-
guage. In order to speak properly one must be ac-
quainted with the rules of construction particular to
every language, according to its genius. The rules
lam going to give, are certain, and may be depend-
ed on by the reader.
All the Tenses of the Indicative Mood may, in ge-
neral, be employed without any Preposition or Con-
junction before them ; but they admit also of
some. Besides the Conjunction ^we*, those that may
be made use of are si^ comOy and quando^ with some
distinction in respect to si, because this distinction
is seldom used before the Future Tense, and then it
is governed by a Verb, meaning ignorance, doubt,
or interrogation ; as in tliese examples ; Ignoro si hk
de venir, I do not know if he shall come ; Dudo si
los enemigos passaran el rio, I doubt if the enemies
will pass the river; No preg^nto sipartir&, I do not
ask if he will set out ; No trdto de saber si lo har&y I
do not want to know if he will do it.
The
the Spanish Grammar. 215.
The Imperative Mood is always macfe use of,
without any Preposition, either in commanding, for-
bidding, permitting, entreating, or exhorting. The
Third Persons Plural and Singular are excepted, be-
cause, then, que always goes before, being preceded
by another Verb; as, Mdndo qut st*oaya^ 1 order him
to go away ; Qiuiiro que bayk^ 1 desire him to dance.
But when the third Persoli Imperative is not pre-
ceded by another Verb, then the particle que is left
out ; as, Haga esfo, Let them do this ; Fenga a Yni
casa, Let him come to my house.
The Condi tional, or, as i t is most commonly called,
the Optative or Conjunctive Mood, is certainly- the
less absolute of all ; because of the six Tenses of this
Mood, only the three last are used without being go-
verned by a Particle or Preposition. The three first
Tensed require always a Particle or Preposition, ex-
cept the Present ; before which, though que is not
expressed, it is understood, in sentences of wishingor
praying ; as, Dios la haga hueno^ Let G od amend him.
When the Particle que is used for one of these three
Tenses, or when it is alone, or docs follow another
Verb, it is joined with some other wordg. Qt/e alone
denotes wishing, praying, admiring, or refusing; as
Queyo muera, het me die ; or, Queyo me meta en estos
negociosy nohhfde hacer^ That I meddle with these
affairs, no, I shall not do it.
There are many words joined with que^ of which
we shall speak when treating of the Prepositions
and Conjunctions ; as, para que^ in order that ^ con
que, con ial que, como que, provided that, &c.
When que is between two Verbs, the last is not
always put in the Subjunctive ; because one cannot
say Creo que venga^ I believe becomes ; but Crioque
viene^ But when there is a negation, the Verb fol-
lowing que must be put in the Subjunctive; as, No
creo que vinga, I do not believe he will come ; No
si que haya venido todavia^ I do not know if he is
yet comt'j,No crioque vinga tan presto^ I do not be-
lieve he will come so soon.
P4 If
21(J The ELEMENTS of.
If the sfenttncc is interrogative, and fws oomet
between two Verbs, the last must be in the Sub»
junctive*; as Sabe vm. que se haga a$d? Do you
know that it is done so ? Aciso crSe que esto puida
serf Does' he believe that this is possible?
All the Verbs used impersonally with the Particle
qzie require the Subjunctive ; as Es menester que ven-
gay He must come; Es preciso quesemyUy He must
absolutely go ; Import a, conviene que esto se haga^ It
is convenient that this be done. You must only ex-
cept such sentences as express any positive assur-
ance or certainty ; as when one says, Es cierto que
wAze, It is certain that he comes; Es const Ante que
pagariy It is constanthe will pay. So you must say,
Creopienso, me im&gino, se que esth en su casa^ I be^
lieve^ I think, I know he is at home.
: From these observations, it follows, that all the
Verbs not expressing a posi ti ve belief, as estimOypUnsQ,
csrio^ but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, asto-
nishment, admiration, wishing, praying, intentioiiy
pretension, or desire,govern all the Subjunctive Moo^
after f Me; as Ignoroquehaya de *venir^ I do not know
if he will pome ; Diido que lo pueda, I doubt it be in ,
his power ; Me temo que muera^ I am afraid he will
Aie ; 'Meespanto qiielo quiera, I am astonished at his
wishing it ; Admiro que consiinta a e^so^ I wonder he
should agree to it; Deseoqueprospere, I wish he may
prosper; Le suplico que no memaltrate^ I fn treat him
not to abuse, me; Bretendo que me obtdezca^ I pre*-
tend his obeying me ; Quiero que venga, I desire liim^
to come. To all which you may. add 6a;ala^ an Ara-
hie word, signifying God grants which is used in
apanish before all the Tenses of the Opitative or Con-
junctive, as well as Plegue k Dios, May it please
God.; or, Pluguiesse a Dios, Might it please God.
When ^we is relative, and there is ii Verb in the Im*-
perative with a negative or an Interrogation before, it
governs likewise the Subjunctive ; as. No hay cosaque
me inquiite tanto, There is nothing that disturbs mc
more; Hay eo^a en elmundo^que mepuida dartantagust<^
Is there any thing in the World that may give me more
pleasqre ?
tfne Spanish Grammaa. 2:17
pleasure } Dele tantas razoncs que k putdanperstmdir^
Give him so many reasons that he may be persuaded.
As thelnfinitive denotes only something indefinite,
it may also be used in an absolute manner in these two
occasions ; the first, to express some general maxima ;
as, Saber vivir con sigo mismOy y con los ot ros es la mayor
cUncia de la mda^ To know ho w to live with one's self^
and with others, is the greatest science of life : Or,
in certain proverbial sentences; ^s, Decir 1/ Itaotitjon
dos cosa^y Saying and doing are two different things.
On several other occasions, the Infinitive is govern-
ed by Prepositions or Conjunctions ; as, Sin decirpa-
labrOj Without speaking a word : Where you may
observe, it is expressed in English by the Participle
Present ; as, Dhpucs de haver hablido assi^ After
having spoken so ; For haver sacado la espMa, For
having drawn the sword ; Para saber esto. In order to
know this; Forfalta de hacer reflexion^ For want of
reflecting ; Antes de hablir. Before speaking. The
Infinitive is also governed by Verbs ; as, Es menes^
ter remediar a esto, One^ must remedy this ; Debe
veniry He is to come ; Quiero casarme, I want to be
married ; Qfialquiera puede enganarse^ Any person
may deceive himself. .Or by Verbs followed with the
Partitfles a orde; as, Empieza a discurrir^ He begins
to reason : Se aplica a cutnplir con sus obligacioneSf He
is very strict in doing his duty. El Itey ha sido ser*
vido de nmndar^ The King has been pleased to order.
Or by Nouns with the Particle de and para; as Gana
de reir. Desire of laughing ; Deseo de vivir. Desire of
living ; Habilpar succeder^ Apt to succeed; Dispu^
esto a hacer bicn ; Inclined to oblige. »
The Gerund of any Verb active may be conju-
^ gated with the Verb est&r, to be, after the same
manner as in English ; as, Esioy escribiendoy 1 am
writing; Estoy leyendo^ I am reading; Est aba dormir
endoj He was asleep. Sometimes en is also put before,
then it signifies after in English, as, En havi^ndo
hec/tOy ire, As soon as, or after, 1 have done, I shall go,
but this Preposition is very seldom made use of be-
ioTQ the Gerund ; as will be easily observed.
Observations
V
■.k.
218 The ELEMENTS of .
Observatiom upon the Use of the Tenses of every Mood. •
After having treated of the Moods, we must now
speak of the Tenses of every Mood.
Of the Moods of Verbs, the Indicative is that
which has more Tenses, which are either simple or
compound ; that is, formed of the Verb, or of ij,s Par-
ticiple Passive, and the Auxiliary Verb //ar/r, to
have. But, as the Present Tense denotes only an in-
stant, it cannot be divided into several Tenses, and
therefore has only one single form ; as, AmOj\ love;
DesSoj I desire ; Soy^ I am ; He, I have, 6fc. But.the
Preterite or Past, which has only three 1 enses mLa-
tin, has five in Spanish, viz. two siinple, and three cowr'
pound. The first is commonly called imperfect, thatis,
a Tense not quite past, because it serves toexpressa
thing or an action begun, but not yet finished; itde-.
notes that the thing was present, in a determinate
past Tense; as Escribia quando llegb, I was writing
wh^n he came in. It is so easy to know thisTense^
that it does not want any more explanation*
But it is not the same with respect to tlie Preterim-^
perfect. All the Grammarians say, that this denptes
a past thing, in such a manner that nothing retnains
of the time in which it was doing ; but they do not
all agree about its denomination, because sbfne call
it Preterite Indejimte, and others Preterite Definite.
But, as I think it is rather indejinite than definite^ I
will give it the first name, because it is never made
use of but to express part of another day, and never
of the day present; as, Escribiahiir^l wrote yester-
day; but not Escribi esta mmana, I wrote this
morning. But this rule wants more explanation.
The Preterite Definite cannot be used in Spanish,
when speaking of one day, one week, one month, or
one year, if we are in that same day, week, month,
or year, we speak of: therefore, though you may say
very well. El dia de ahierfue mui Undo, The day of
yesterday was handsome; you cannot say; Nuestro
sigh
the Spanish Grammar. 21 9
^ighjue memor&hlpy Our age has been iricmdhible;
because, in the first example, the time they speak of
is entirely past, and in the second, it is not yet
elapsed, since we are in that same age we speak of.
The Compound Preterites are three; as, He
akhhdo^ I have loved ; Hltve amhdo^ I had loved ;
Hcpola amddoj I had loved. The second is not much
used, as we have said in the beginning of this Gram-
mar ; and there is no particular observation to be
made upon the others, no more than upon the other
Moods and Tenses.
How to make use of the Tenses of Spanish Verbs.
It is not sufficient to know the Tenses of Verbs ;
one must likewise be acquainted with the rules
which teach how to use them in Spanish^ where one
Tense is often put instead of another.
The Present is used instead of the Future, afterthe
same manner as in Latin ; as, Antequampro Murena
dicere incipiam is expressed in Spanish^ Antes que meem-
pene en hablar a favor de Muzena^ Before I undertake
to speak for Muzena, Priusquam de republica dicerein-
cipiam in Spanish signifies Antes que empiezed habt&r de
la republica, Before I begin to speak of the repubh'c.
It is by following the same idioms as its mother the
Latin^ that the Spanish language uses very often the
Future instead of the Present^ after the Particles si^
quando^Scc. as, Si or quando viniere,le recibire como debo,
If or when he comes, I will receive him as I ought ;
which is the same idiom as in Latin, odero, si pofero.
But, as using one Tense instead of another, or the
Subjunctive instead of the Indicative, depends on
the Conjunctions preceding the Verb, when I speak
of them the reader may observe these idioms.
Of Government of Verbs.
The Verb Active governs always the Accusative in
Spanish^ as well as in other languages. So they say,
Deseo la p&Zy I desire peace; Practico la virtM, I
practise virtue, Sgc. But you must observe, that the
1^£0 The ELEMENTS of
Particle i is always put before the Accusative, whca-
it means a person or reasonable creature ; as, Amb a
PedrOf I love Peter ; Imto a hi santcs, I follow the
saints ; JdSro i JDioSj I adore God. Yet sometimes
this Particle is used before inanimate things; as^
Los enemigos sitiiron a ^amur, The enemy besieged
Namur. But the use of the Particle ih not necessary
in this last circumstance, being a mere pleonasm.
The Verb Passive governs the Ablative ; as. La
virtid es ttrnhda de todos las hombres de bieriy Virtue is
loved by all honest men. You may also say as in
English, PortodoSy &c. By all, Sgc.
The Neutral Verbs generally govern theDativd;
as, Agradar al Reyy To please the King; Obedeciri
las kyeSy To obey the law ; Danar a su enemigOyTo hurt
the enemy. 1 said generally, because some Neutrals
having in themselves tl)e term of the action, never
f;overn any Noun ; as, obrir, to act; dormiry to sleep;
abUvyXjo speak;c^mi;7^r,to walk fast,and some pthers.
Though they contain in themselves the term of the
action, they govern the Ablative : as, Salir dt la cartel^
To go out of prison ; Huir de un lugar^ To fly from a
place, Habt&r de un negocioy To speak of an afiair.
Besides these Neutral Verbs, there are also two
other sorts: the first are those called Neutrals Passive;
as, arrepenttrsCy to repent ; acoi^darsey to remember;
whose Pronoun is in theAccusati ve,and the following
Noun in the Geni tive ; as. Me arrepiento de esto^ I re-
jpent of this ; Siempre me acordare de mis amigos, I will
always remember my friends. The second sort are
those Verbs which, from Actives, are made Recipro-
cals, by the addition of the Pronoun Personal, some*
times in the Accusative, and sometimes both in the
Accusative and Dative ; as, Imaginarse ciertas €Osa$
muyagradabkSyTo fancy very agreeable things ; Que-
mirse las dedosy To bum one's fingers ; Cort&rse la
fnanoy To cut one's hand ; Amarse i si mismoy To love
one's self; Quemdrse a si mismOy To burn one's self;
Mathrse a si mismOy To kill one's self But the Pas-
sive Reciprocals, a^, dedicarse, aplicarsCy are always
conjugated with the Pronoun Personal.
Aftet
tke Spanish Ouammar. 921
After the Verbs Substantive, sfr or estir, to be,
para is made use of, as well as a. The first is em-
ployed to denote the use or destination of any thing ;
as, Ese Cabalb espara vender ^ This horse is to be sold ;
Esta ptuma es para escnbiry This pen is to write
with. But the Particle a is used to denote only the
Action, without destination ; as, Elprimero a correr^
The first to run away ; El Ultimo i callar^ The last
to be silent.
Que is always made use of after the Verbs haver or
fewer, to have, or before the following Infinitives ; as,
Algotengoque decirosy I have something to tell you;
Que tiines que responder ? What have you to answer ?
He dqui curias que escribir^ There are letters to write;
Hay muchq que hacer^ There is a great deal to do.
The Particle ^ follows always the Verb ir, to go,
either before a Verb or before a Noun ; as, Vcy a oir
el sermon, I am going tohe^r the sermon ; Voy dcamir
en casa de m amigo, I go to dine at my friend's ; Fui i
Utiglesia, He went to church. The same rule servfes
also for the Verb venir^ to come, when it does not ex-
press motion ; as^ Vtngo apagdr, I come to pay ; vengo
a comer convm. I come to dine with you. But when
the Verbs venir and volver express some motion from
one place to another, they are followed by the Parti-
cle rfe; as, Vengode la iglesia, I come from the church ;
Vuelbo del campOy I return from the country.
Verbs denoting obligationor engagement, govern the
following Infinitive with the Preposition ^ ; as, Zc
obligari a hacer esto, I will oblige him to do it ; Le
precisare a sacir laespada^ 1 will force him to draw the
sword ; Leforzari a seguir mi dpinidn, I will compel
bim to follow my opinion. But the Verbs meamng
praying y entreating y orjorbiddingy govern the Infini-
tive without any Preposition ; as, Suplico le hacir mc
estegustOy He entreated him to dome this pleasure :
Ruigo teolviddr hpas&doy I pray thee to forget what
is pasit ; Meprohibio Iraki corte, He forbade me to go
to court. The Verbs ex pressing some order follow the
sim« rule ; as, El Rey me nmnda tomar las armas.
The
S22 The ELEMENTS of
The Kiug comrnands me to lake up arms. But it ,
is proper to observe, that the same Verbs govern
likewise the Subjunctive, when the Particle dis fol-
lowed by que; as, Me obliga a que haga esto, He
obliges me to do this ; MeprecUa a que me vaya^ He
forces me .to go away. The Verbs meaning entreat"
ingy prokihitingj or ordering, govern likewise the
Subjunctive with the Particle que only; as, Me
ruiga qu^ venga^ He desires me to come ; Me pro-
hibe que *oaya h la corte^ He prohibits me to go to .
court ; El Key me manda que le sirva^ The King cpm-
mands me to serve him.
§
Verbs denoting custom^ help^ obstination, preparO'
tioUy beginning J condemnation, destination, disposithn,
ei'kortation, inmtation, require only the Infinitive
with the Particle a; as, Acostumbrarse a dormir. To
be accustomed to sleep ; Ayudar a sembrar^ To help
sowing ; Obstinarse ajugar, To be obstinate at play ;
Prepararse a partir. To prepare to set out; Rmpt-
zdr a baylar. To beginto dance ; Condendr a tmqasir
ahorcddOj To sentence one to be hanged ; Le destino
a servir al Rey^ He destined him to serve the King ;
Se dispone a pagar susdeudas. He is preparing to pay
his debts; Me solicita a quebrantar tnipalibra. He '
desires me to break my. word ; Me convidd d cenar^ \
He invited me to supper.
Verbs meaning abstinence^ privation^ or end, have
the Infinitive with the Particle de ; as, Me abstingo '■
de beber vino, I abstain from drinking wine; Metk-
sacostumbro de cazdr, I lose the custom of hunting;
Acabo de comer, I have just dined.
The Verb ponersCj when it signifies to begin, must
have the Infinitive with the Particle a ; as, JPonerse
a llorir, To begin to cry. But when it signifies <a
meddle, it governs the Infinitive with the Particle
en; as. No me pongo en hacer esto, I do not meddle
with doing this* Meterse, to put one's sel^ has the
same signification, and follows the same rule.
There are some other Verbs, as, esmerhrse, to endea-
vour, empdidrse, to engage, which also require the
Infinitive
the Spaxish Grammar. 223
Inftni live with the Particle en; as, Me ismerarSen
hacer esto Men, I will endeavour to do this well. .
Verbs joined with a Noun which they govern
must have the Infinitive with the Particle de\ as,
Liceneia tengo de ir a Londres, 1 am permitted to go
to. London; Tengo gana de reir, I am inclined to
laiigh ; He menester de comer, I want to eat ; Veo una
cccAsion de hacer for tuna, I see an occasion of making
my fortune ; Me ha dido motivo de quexdrnie. He has
given me reason to complain ; Tuvo la desverguinza
deimultir me; He h^d the impudence to abuse me ;
Hallo los medics de enriquecerse^ He found the means
of growing rich.
Verbs denoting knowledge, science, believing, hoping^
confessing, protestation, affirmation, and the Verb
decir, to say, must have the following Verb in the
Indicative, preceded by que ; as, Se que es hombre de
bien, I know he is an honest man; Conazco que eras
inocenie, I am certain you was innocent ; Creo que se
burla de mi, I believe he makes game of me; Espiro
que meservira v.md. en est a ocdsion, 1 hope you will
serve me on this occasion ; Conjiesso que tengo la
culpa, I confess.. I am blameable : Afirmo que to ha
hechb, I affirm that he did it ; Digo quevendri, I ^ay
that he will come. But observe, that this rule does
not extend itself to all Verbs in all the Tenses, be-
cause those shewing believing and hoping, require
after them the Subjunctive, when t*hey are in the
Imperfect ; as, Creia que vendria, I believed he would
come ; Esper&ba que partiria, I expected he would
set out. When the same Verbs are accom panied with
a negative, they must be followed by the Subjunc-
tive with que; as, No creo que sia tan bueno, I do
iiot believe he is so good ; No espero que venga, I do
not expect he will come; No conjiesso que esto sia
assi, I do not confess* it is so ; No asseguro que sia
verd&d, I do not assure you it is true.
The above Verbs govern also the Subjunctive,
when thexvWjVwwfl/*^ precedes them ; as, Sisabesque
hiyadevenir. If you know that he will come; SijUz-
gas cries que lo puida hacir, If you believe he may
do
\
524 The ELEiMENTS of ^
do it ; Si esperas que te ayide^ If you hope he will
help thee ; Si amjiissa que hoy a hecho esto^ If he con-
fesses he has done this ; Si afirmas que sea verdadj If
you affirm that it is true. Though the Verbs after
4i are in the Indicative in the above examples, thqr
are likewise used either in the Indicative or the Pre^.
sent Subjunctive, and also in the Future Subjunctivi,
when it means something to come ; as, Si viniere k
perdmoSy If he comes, we shall see him; Si succedtire
assi. If it happens so.
The Verbs pensar, to think, estdr, to be, when it
signifies to understand, require after them the Infi-
nitive with en ; as, Pensaba *en hacer estOj I wa«
thinking about doing this y Estdy ai que se ha de
^hacer^ I. understand it must be done.
Observations on Puepositions. .
Of the Preposition a.
^ is a Particle indeclinable, serving in the compo-
sition of many Nouns, Verbs, and Adverbs^ of wmch
ifoften increases, diminishes, or changes the mean-
ing; as, arrodillarsCy to kneel down, a iteciprocid
Verb Neutral, which is formed from a and rodilki,
knee. Adinerado sUgnifies ricky havingra great deal
of money, and is made from a and dirtiiro, money*
Abixo is an Adverb, and signifies below ; and itas
composed of baxoy low ; and the Preposition i.
A is also put before the Infinitive of certa in Verbsj
without being preceded by any Noun, an d then it
may be changed into the Gerund ; as, A ^vtr loque
passa, quien nd dixera ? In seeing what pa sses, who
should not say ? It is the same to say, Vi^indolofuc
•passa.
A is also put before Infinitives preceded by anotfier
Verb; as, Ensemr a cantar^ To teach to sing;! Em-
pez&r a baj/lar, To begin to dance ; Pnwo chr hjwrhty
To provoke to swear. It is also placed tw etween two
equal
ihe Si'AiifiSH Gbammab. 325
eiqiial . numbers, .. to denote ord^r; as, Dos a das,
Two by two; Finiiron quatro d,quatro^ They came
four hy. four.
A is likewise made use of on several other ocea*
sions before Nouns.
Of the Preposition De..
This, as a Particle, is used as a sign of the Geni-
tive and Ablative Cases, as we have said in the be-
ginning of this Grammar. The several uses of de
in Spanish may be reduced to five; viz.
J . To denote the quality of a person or thing.
2. The matter a thing is made of.
3. To express the place from whence one conies.'
4. The manner of acting.
5. To denote the means or cause of a thing.'
Yet, in all these acceptations, de is rather a sign
of the Genitive or Ablative than a preposition.
Of the Prepositions En and Dentro.
The Prepositions en and dentro have very near the
same signification ; therefore they may sometimes be
used the one instead of the other ; as in this sentence,
Esta en el quarto^ or Dentro del quarto^ He is in the
room. But they cannot be always used indifferent-
ly ? as you may see by the following observations :
When you speak of a time past, you must always
use the Preposition en ; as. He kido las obras de Que-
vddo'en quinze diaSy I have reaJ tlie works of Que-
vedo in fifteen days. But when the action is 1:o be
done in a time to come, then you must put dentro,
and not en ; as, Ird a vir le dentro de ocho dias^ I
will go and see you this day se'nnight; El Rey
llegari dentro de tres semdnas, The King will come
in three weeks.
Dentro signifies properly within^ in English^ and
m, in, being used in tne same occasions and sense.
En is also sometimes joined with quanio ; as, En
quantoami, For what concerns me ; En quanto a este
Q negocioj
326 the ELEMENTS of
negocioy About this aifair; En quanta me emtidni^
As much as is convenient to me*
Sometimes tfie Preposition en signifies with in Eng^
lish ; as, And&ren segHro^ To go with surety ; Habl&r
en conjianza, To speak with confidence ; Pasteir en
bu6na comp&nla^ To walk with a good company.
Sometimes e» signifies, d$\ 2iSy En agradecimitlnio
de losjatores que he recibido, As an acknowledgment •
of the favours conferred upon me; Eh ^enal dc^
amist&dy As a token of friendship.
Of Antes, Delante, and Ante,
The Preposition antes serves to denote priority
of time; ^Sj Antes del deUvw^ Before the delude;
Antes de tres meses, Before three months. Prionty
of order or situation ; as^ Ponir una cosa antes dc la
otray To put one thing before another. Sometimes
it means preference, and signifies rather ; as Antes
morir que ser vencido, Rather to die than to be con-
quered. Rit it is not followed by the Particle di!^
as in all the other occasions, as well before a Noun
as before a Verb; as Antes del dia^ Before day;
Antes de itsCyhef ore go\ng.
Delinte, is also followed by the Particle de before a
Noun, and serves to denote the order or siUi^ioii
of persons and things ; as^ Delante demi casa^ Before
my house ; Iba delante de mi^ Be went be^F^ mt .
It means likewise the presence ; as Est&ha delante "
del Rey^ He was before the King ; Est& delinte da
Diosy He is before God, signifying he is de$d.
The Preposition ante governs the Accusative, and'
is only used iti law by notaries, <!^c. as, Antitni^ e*-
cribSno realy del n^mero, Sec. Before me, royal no* .
tary of the number, S^c. They never make use of
ante on any other occasion.
Of Cerca and Acerca.
The Preposition cerca serves to express pro^iimity:
of time, place, or a near disposition to any thii»g ;
and, in all these acceptations, it governs the Geni^
tive^
the SpAKisH G RAH MAI. %i7
tive, being follpwed by de before eitHer a Noud or
Verb ;. as, Ei Cereal mitUo dia^ It h near twelve ;-
EsU cercu dila pi^rta^ lie stands near the door;
Esti muy cerca demorir^ Hei^ dying ; NoestacerQU
de Hegiry He is not near to arrive,
Acerca is a compound of the Particle a and cerca^
signifying izi^y/, sonoetitrtei near} as, Acetta de esto
k dizey About this I told him ; Aderca de ir alU U r^-
pondiy About going there I answered him; Tient
fnucho eridito acerca del gowrnuder, He is in great
credit with the governor. JBy these examples you
may observe, that this Preposition requires al$o the
Genitive before a Noun or Pronoun, and the Parti-
cle de before the Verbs in the Infinitive.
Of the Prepositions Dqspues and Tras.
. Th^ Preposition dSspma serves to express posteriQ-
rity.of time, or inferiority of place ; so it is used in
opposition to the Prepositions a7ites and deUnte.
Ti^re isj notwithstanding, a difference, that before
the Nouns it may be used as well as a Preposition
of time or of order; but before the Infinitives it is
always a Preposition of time, followed by de. When
the Particle qtte is joined to it, then it denotes only
the time ; as, Despues del diluvio, After the deluge ;
jDespues de medio dia, After mid-day. It is a PrepO^'
sition of place; as, Su lugAr vi6ne despues del mia,
riis place comes after mine ; INb debe and&r sin9 des^
pues de mi^ He must go only after me. But when
despues governs by itself a Verb in the Infinitive, it '
is a Preposition of time ; as, Despues de peleir se re-
tirS, After fighting he retired. It is the same when
followed by que; as Despues que lo huvo hecfio. After
doing it
These two Prepositions tras and despues express
the same thing, and are used indifferently, on several
occasions; as, Despues de esto, or tras de esto^ After
this; Venia despms de mU or tras de mi^ He came af-
ter me. Only before Verbs tr^is not made use of,
because then it signifies besides.
Q2 . You
288 The ELEMENTS of
You must observe, th^it d^spuestrdSy oxdetr&s^ go^
vera always the Genitive before Nouns and Pro-
nouns; and the Infinitive with the Particle (fe,
when before a Verb.
Of the Preposition Con.
This Preposi tion signifies mithy and is of the great-
est use in the Castilian language ; it governs the Ac-
cusative, and denotes conjunction^ union, mixings ^as*
semblingj keeping company, mean, instrument, and
manner f Besides, it is used in other senses^ of which
I will treat afterwards.
Cltw expresses conjunction in the following exam-
ples; as, Casarunadonzillacon unhombre de bien^ To
marry a maid with an honest man ; Vivir Christicfna-
mente unos con otros, To live as Christians together;
Est&r bien con todos, To be well with every body-
It denotes mixing; as, Echdr pocovinagre cofi mucho
azeite, to pour a little vinegar with much oil ; Con-'
struir con arena y cat. To build with sand and lime.
It denotes assembling ; as, Ir con uno. To go with
one ; Entretenerse conalg&no, To converse with some-
body ; Comer con sus amigos, To eat with one's friends;
Estar con genie honrdda. To be with honest people.
It serves also to express the means by which some-
thing is done; as, Con el socorro de Dios, By God's
help; Con valor y animo. With courage and spirit ;
♦ Con mucho tiimpo, With along time; Con que quifres
remediar esto? With what will you remedy this ?
Con dinero todo se hace, With money all is done.
Lastly, it denotes the manner of doing something ;
^s, Habla con eloaiiencia, He speaks eloquently ; Con
digniddd. With oignity ; Con arrogincia. With arro-
gance; Responde con cord&ra, He answers with wis-
dom, (?rwisdy; Suffreconconstdncia, HesuiFers with
firmness.
Observe, that, when the two first Pronouns Per-
sonal, and the Reciprocal, follow con, you must say.
Con migo, not con me. With me ; con tigd^ With thee,
fon sigo. With himself.
. Entre
the Spanish Guahmar. 229
Entresigniits- between or amongj in English ; and
as it is never used in any other sense, there is no
particular observation to be made upon it.
Observations upon the Preposition Para.
One must take great care not to confound the
Preposition para with ppr^ both signifyingyj>r ; be-
cause each of them lias its particular use.
Para is put before Nouns, and it governs the Ac-
cusative, or before the Infinitive of Verbs, without
any Particle. But when it is before any other Mood
or Tense, que is joined to it.
This Preposition is used to denote the end or mo-
tive of doing any thing; as, Trabajo para el bien
p&blico^ I work for the public good ; Nada se fiace
para el estado, Nothing is done for the state ; Para
que tiene el hombre razon ? For what is man endow-
ed .with reason?
Para is also used to express the cause of doing
something ; as, liios crio eluniversopara elhombre^God
created the world for man. It denotes usefulness ; as
Un hospital para los pobresy An hospital for the poor ;
El dinero esfara gast&r /e. The money is to spend.
Para is a Preposition of time ; as. Me basta esto
para iQdo el ano. This is sufficient to me for ail the
year ; Se han unidopara siempre, They are united for
ever ; Para dos meses era poco, For two months it
was too little. These are the several senses of this
Preposition before Nouns and Pronouns. Let us
now see how it is used before Verbs.
*
The first use oi para before V6rbs is to shew the
intetition or purpose of doing something; as £/
hombre ha sido cri&do para amir a Dios^ Man has
been created to love God, El comer es necess&rio
para conservar la mda^ Eating is necessary to pre-
serve life: Todo lo hace para alcanzdr ,uh empleo^ He
does every thing to obtain, an employment..
Para serves likewise before Verbs to denote what
one is able to do in consequence of one's present dis-
position ; ^y Es bast ant efuirte para montar^ He is
strong
830 The ELEMENTS of
strong mK>uffh to ride ; Hario caud&l lUm para man-
tmSrse^ He nas means enough to maintaia himself ;
La ocasion e^ ilemasiadofavorable para dexarla esix^Sr^
The occasion is too favourable to let it slip. ^
This Preposition expresses also the 'capacity of
doing any tning;.as, Eshombrepara acbmtterle, He
is a man able to attack him ; Es hombre para resist^
irle. He is capable of resisting him ; No es kombre
para esto, He is not the proper man wanted for this ;
Es hombre p^Ura nada^ He is good for nothing.
Para is placed before Verbs in the Infinitive wilhr
out any particle or Preposition ; as, Para sir docia^
es menestJr estudiar^ In order to be karned,^ one must
study ; Para sir rico, se ha de trabajiry To be rich^
one must work. Que is joined to para before Xht
other Moods- and Tenses of Verbs; as, Para que sea
estomejor, In order to make this better ; Paraque Dias
nos bendiga, In order to obtain the blessing of God.
Of the Preposition Por.
The Preposition por signifies through, denoting
the efficient cause of a thing or an action, and the
motive and means of it. These are hs principal
Doeanings, though it is used on several occasions :
Sometimes it signifies by ; as, Por la gricia de
JDtQS^ By the grace of God ; Espana fue conquistida
por los Romamsy hs MoroSj Spain waa conquered by
the Romans and the Moors ; Por su descuido lo
perito todOf ^y his negligence he lost all ; Por este
midio lo lograra^ By this mean he will obtain it.
Por denotes the motive of an action ; Habla por
embidia. He speaks through envy ; Todo lo hace por
passion, He acts always by passion ; Castiga por
venginza o por colera, He chastises through veil*-
geance or passion.
Sometimes /w expvessejs^ the meass made use oi^
or contributing to soniething; ^Lkg&r a sus fines
por astddUy To come ta one's ends with or by crafti*
Qiess ; Jgr&da a toda^ por su prudincia^ He pleases
every body by his prudiance.:
This
\^
th$ Spanish Graiamab. SSI
This Preposition signifies also^^ and thr&ugk; as,
Lo hizopofftnii He did it for me \ Pdr el amir de Dioi^
For God's sake ; Passe est a mandnapar la caUe dC'
I passed this morning through the street of
«i4i**i«i
VinjApar tadcs los Reinos de la EwopUy He travelled
tbi^ugh all the kingdoms of Europe.
Of the Prepositions Mas ac&> This side ; MSs dHa, That
sidCy 01 further ; and Ademas^ Besides.
Mas aciy t and mas alia, are two Prepositions of
place, and goTern the Genitive ; as, Los qvie eilari mas
eiQh it les Pirineos^ Those who are on this side the
Pireneans; Los pueblos que viven mas alia dtlo^monr
Us, The people who live beyond the mountains.
AdemaSj besides* is a JPreposition denoting aug-^
mentathm or addition^ and requires the Geiiitite of
the Nouns or Pronouns following; as^ Ademas de
t^dojestOj Besides all this. When it is before Uie Iih
finitive of Verbs, it retains the Particle de; as,
Ademas de querer cantAr, aim queria baylar. Besides
singing, he desired also to dance. When any other
Mood than the Infinitive^s made use of, then
adimas is followed by the Particles deque ; as Ademas
deque me renia, me queria pegdr. Besides 3Colding, he
wanted to beat me.
Of the Preposition Debaxo.
The Preposition debajco, under, denotes \he time
and place, I say the time or denomination ofa reign
or government ; as, Debaxo del imperio de Augusto,
Under the empire of Augustus; Debdxo del consu-
Udo de Pompeyoy Under the consulate of Pompey;
Debaxo del reinddo de Jorge Segundo, Under the reign
of George the Second.
Debaxo, as a Preposition of place, is a great deal
more usedi, and marks out always inferiority of po-
sition ; as, Todo lo que hay debaxo de los cielos, All
there is under heaven ; Lo que hay debaxo de la t terra.
All which is under the earth ; Tenfr una almohada
debaxo de sus rodillas, To have a cushion under the
832 The ELEMENTS, 6^
knees ; Llair algo debixo dela capa, To eany some-
thing under the cloak ; Darmir deb&xo de un arbol^
To sleep under a tree.
This Preposition is also made use of in the fbl-
lowing sentences : El exercito esta debaxo dil cafkm
de la plaza^ The army is under the artillery of the
town ; Esto succedio deb&xo de mis venianaSy This hap
pened under my windows ; Los soldad^s que estan m-
pAxo de las armas. The soldiers who are underarms ;
Poniir una cosa debaxo . de Uave^ To put something
under the key ; Debixo del sello real, Under the royal
seal. Observe, that this Preposition governs always
the Genitive without any exception.
These are the principal observations that the li-
mits of this Grammar permit me to give upon this
most essential part of speech. But all these rules
will perhaps be sooner learned by the Reader, as
they stand exemplified in the Dialogues hereafter.
USTA
POTJBiifMllUft Oi? PRSPOSITIONS.
1
LiSTA d'e las Palabras que
x^jOi Prdj^ci6nes ; delas
Preposiciones regidas ; y
por via ih Ex^etiiTO), de libit
Palabras tegfdiitd de las Pre^
posiciones.
m A.
AbalaneAfse • *& lbs pe]lgr6s>
Abandon^rse ■• i • la 8u6rt6>
Abocdrse • con Ids' s&yan^
AbbohbtH&rsd • • de algo,
Abog^r, . • por . alguno,
Abbf(Mr una naye . d . con
otra,
Aborreclblifi . k • lad gented,
Ab6rir6cldof . de . todos,
AbrasfitHsfe • en • deseos,
Abdrse . a* . con . suit con-
fidantes,
Absten^rse . de • corner,
Aburidfir . dben * riqu^zas,
Aburrido . de . sU mala for-
tuba,
Abusar • de • la amistadj '
Acablir • dfe . venir,
Acaec^r (a]go)' . & . algfino,
Acaecer (algo) • en tal ti6mpo,
Acalordjrse . con . eri . la dis- -
pfita,
Acced^r • fi . la bpinion db
otrb,
Accessible • d . los preten-
di^ntes,
Acercll . db • este sucessoi
Acercarse . dbl ," peligro,
Acerc^rse . al . amigo/
Acercarse • db . la lumbre,
Acbrt^r . a . eon • la casa,
Acog6rse • 4 . algdno,
AcomodSi^e . cbh . aIguno»
Acomod^rse • al • dictamen,
de otro^
Acompafiarse . con . otros^
Aconsejarse de, con • sdbios,
A LIST, containing the
Words which govern the
Prepositions ; the Preposi-
tions governed ; andanExr
ample to the Words which
are governed by or govern
the Prepositions.
to fiuh on danget.
to abandon oneself to chance*
to confer xjoith one's relations*
to be chagrined mth anythingi
to plead Jhr any one.
to bring one ship to another*
hafefid to the people,
detested by aU.
to be inflamed with desired,
to open oneself to ones conjt^
danis.
to affstainfrom eating. .
to abound with ^ or in richiss*
xioeary toith one's Hljbrtune*
tti ahi^ejriendshif. *
to be just coftie^
something to happen to ariyonii
to ha^en at stick d time,.
to grow warm in a disputi^
to dicede to anoiHer^is.opinion^
accxisible to pr'ettndtrs.
about this busihessi
to approach the dinger*
to approach' a J'ri^na,
to sU by the fire.
tofindovAtheh\)use.' '
to have recourse to any one.
to settle onentlfwith any hfi6* .
to c6nfi)rm oneslslf to anothifr^s
opinion*
to keep company with otners.
to be advised by, wise men.
Acontecer • & • los incdutos, to happen to the unwary.
Acordinie • de' . algfina cosa^ to remember tiny thing.
♦ A
d
A New Spanish Grammab. ^.
Acorddrse • con . sua contr^-
riosy
Acostumbr^rse . d . los tra-
Acreditarse • de • necio,
Acreed6r . & . de • la con-
Mnza,
Acreed6r • de • algdno,
Actudrse . en • los negScios,
Acusar » 4 . aigHno,
Acusirse . de • las culpas,
Adelantdrse . a . otros,
Adem^ • de . eso,
Adherirse • a . la opinion,
de . otroy
Adolec^r . de • enfermeddd,
Aferrdrse • en . su opinion,
Aficionarse . a . le^r,
Aficionarse . de • algdno,
Afirmarse . en . su dicho/
Agino . de . verdad,
Agradecldo. . ^ • los bene-
ficiosi
Agraviarse • de. . algtino,
Agregdrse . - ^ . otros,
A'grio . al • gusto,
Agddo . de • ingenio,
Ahitarse • de • manjares,
Aborcaj4]rse . en . las es-
pi^das . de • otiro,
Ahorr^, • de • raz6nes,
Airirse . con • algiino,
Ajustirse « eon • algdno,
Ajust&rse . ^ .la razon,
Alabarse. •■ de . vali^nte*
Alargdrse • a . laciudad,
Alegrarse . de . algo^
Alej&rse • de . su ti6rra,
Aliment&rse • ccm . poco,
Alimentarsie « de . esperaoz4s,
Alinddr • con • otrahereddd.
Allan&rse .4
Alto « , de •
Am^ble '. de
Amancebdrse .
Atnante . "de
AmaSiarse . a
Amorofo • con
• lo jiisto,
cuerpo,
las gentes,
con . los
libros,
. . algo,
• escriblr^
« losstiyosi
to agree xvith an^s cpf orients*.
to accustom oneself to labour*
to prove oriels imnJoUy*
Hjoorthy of confidence.
any on^s creditor.
to acquaint oneself inith husinesSm
to accuse any one*
to accuse oneself of faults*
to advance others.
besides that.
to adhere to, ar^other's opinion.
* ■
to be ill. [nion.,
to be positive in one's otvn qpi-
to bejond ofreadini
to take an affection Jbr any one.
to affirm tvnat one nas said,
foreign to the truth*
grateful for ben^ts.
to be affronted loith any one*^
to unite oneself to others.
sour to the taste.
mtty or sharp.
to surfeit oneseff toithfboA
to get upon another's back*
to ware ^tsords.
to be angry xoith any body,
to make it up mth any one*
to be right,
to boast of bravery,
to hasten to the city,
to be rejoiced at any things
to leave one*s country,
to subsist upon little,
to feed oneself with hopes,
to be contiguous to another^s^
estaUm
to submit to what is just,
tall.
amiable to the people,
to be, fond if books*
a lover of something,
to be clever in writtng*
kind tvitk o^*s r^kkon^
GOVEBNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS.
Ampardrse
■
de
• algi^na,
cosa.
Ancbo. .
•
de
. boca.
And4r •
con
•
el tlempoy
Anddr .
•
de
capa.
Anddr •
en
• ■
pliytos,
. ti6rra,
Anddr
por
Anhel^r .
k
. por . inay6r
fortuna.
Antes .
de
•
• ah6ray
Anticipirse
•
i
. alguno,
Aovdr .
en
L •
el nldoy
Aparir .
en
I •
la manoy
Aparec6rse
•
4
. algunoi
Aparecerse . en • el camtno,
Aparejdrse • para • el tra«
bdxoj
Apart^rse • de • la occasion,
Apasiondrse • d • los libros,
Apasiondrse . de • alguno^
Apedrse • de • su opinion,
Apechugdr • con . por al-
guna oosa,
• con . paldb-
rasy
d • algfinacosay
de « lasent6ncia«
d • otro medio.
Apedredr
Apegdrse
Apeldr .
Apeldr •
Aplicdrse
Apoderdrse
Apostdr
Aprend6r
Apercebirse • de • armas,
Apetecible • al • gutto^
Apetecldo . de • niuchosy
Apiaddrse . de • los pobres,
d . los estddios,
. de • la ha-
cienda agena,
d • corr^fy
• d • leer,
Apresurdrse . -en • los neff6-
cios,
Apretdr . por • la cintura,
Aprobdrse . en • algiina
facultady
Apropiado . para . el oficio,
Apropinqudrse . d • algdno,
Aprovecharse • de .• la oca-
sion,
Aprovechdr • en . la Yirtiid,
to take possession efany thing.
toide'tnottthed,
to accommodate oneself to time,
to xualk tvith a cloak on*
to be litigious.
to be humbled.
to covet betterfortune.
before notv,
to anticipate any one*
to lay eggs in the nest,
to receive 'with the hand,
to present oneself suddenly he*
fore any one.
to present oneself suddemy on
the road,
to prepare for toork.
[outoif.
to separate oneself from the oc»
to be passionatelufond qf books.,
to be. enamoured with any one*
to change one's opinion,
to unwsrtake any. thing with
spirit,
to abuse any one.
to adhere to any thing,
to appeal from the sentence,
to nave recourse to other mea*
sures.
to provide oneself with arms,
desirable to the palate,
desired by many,
to have compasaion on the poor,
to apply oneself to study,
to usurp. other people* s goods.
to lay a trnger on a race.
to learn to read,
to he quick in business.
to take fast hold by the waisU
to be approved in any faculty.
adapted to the office,
to approach any one.
to seize the opportunity.
to improve in virtue.
A 2
A New Spanish Grammar.
Apto . pstra • el empleo,
Apurddo • de • m^dios,
Aqqietarse . en . la disp^ta,
Ard^r . eh . am6reS|
Ard6rse . en • quim^raSy
Armdrse . de . (>aciencia,
Arrebozdrse • con . algo,
Arrecirse . de . . firio,
Arreglarse . d . las l^yes,
Arrecostarse . d . alguna
co^a^
Arregostarse • d • alguna
cosa,
Arremet^r . d . contra . los
enemigofi,
Arrepeiitirse . de • loiDal
hecho,
Arrestdrse -• d « ud heche^
Arribar . d . ti^rra,
Arrimdrse . d • lapar^d,
Anincondrse . en • sa casa»
Arrogdrse (d)g6) . d . si
misitoo, ■
Arrbjdrae . al . pellj|ro>
Arrojdrse •' a « pelear,
Arrppdrse . coti : . captu^-
Arrostrdr . d • los pellerosy
Asdrse • de • c^lor^
Ascedd^r . d • olro empl^o,
As&gurdrse . db . los pel^
grosj
Asentfr . d • otro dictdmep,
Asesordrse . con> • ab«gddo^
Asocidrse . coo • i^vildo^
As]t(tir . 4 . l04 etif)§niii60^
Asistir . ea . a%ik)& COM^
Asoddrsis • cOb • otto,
Asomdrse . d . por . la
yontdnay-
Aspdrse . • d' ^^ gntos^
A^spero • • al'- . gu^to^
A'spero • en • las . paldbras,
AspiM^i^ • d • io^jW!&.c^MB^
Atdrse • &• • ufM^sola coBa>
Atdrse • en . inconyeni^nteSy
Atemorizdrs4^ • d6 • p6r . To
4U(& did^i
Atender . k • ift OMVer-
saciiSn,
Aten6rse • d \ Id ti&IJktQ^''
jiifor the emplof/fnenf^
exhausted of means,
to he quiet iit the dispute. '
td burn xmth love,
to he full qfquarrds.
to arm oneself voith patience,
to muffle oneself up in anything^
to be benumbed xjoith cold,
to conform to the latos.
to lean against any thing.
to he indined to any thing.,
to assaidt the enemy.
to repeM of an iU deSd.
to he enterpHxing in hn ddion.-
td offioe at land,
to lean agaifist the iJoaM:
to keep oneself immured,
to appropriate any thing to oive^
self,
to rim into danger,
to adMtee to ^ght.
to eotisr oneseXfiJoith doaths.
tojuce danger,
to'he seorehed mth heat,
to ascend to another employment,
to shdter oneself Jhym^ddriger^i
■
to meikt to <rm)ther*s option',
to seHk coundtfrom a latvyeTi.
to takif advice Jrbm ledrned mm. -
to CLS^ the side.
i<^ aeskt in any thing,
t&itMdaie oHeself tnitk dfidthtr*
id look tjkt at ike mndmjo.,
to he- exhausted mth roaring: .
rdnghioihe tnUtei
Ami in conversation.
to dlfp^ tty greater things.
t^4it efheselfto one thing afb^lt.
t&efrtkhM oneself in a dilemma*
tobeq/rtHd^what ii said:' '
to atteird to ttte con^erMtoh.
toke^tBihe ddeofMjety.
Government of Prjbpositions.
Atento • COD • ^am msjSreBf
Atestiguir • con .« o(ro»
Atindr • d, con • la dma,
Adodr • con • lo que se ha
» • de . dqclr,
Atoll4r . enlospant&DoSi
Atr^r (i|lgo) .a • Bi,
AtrangantSrse • con . hu6sos>
Atreverse • 4 • • cosas
grandes,
Atreverse , con *. los va-
li6nteiS9
Atribuir (algo) • & • otro^
Atribul4rse . en • . los
trab&xosy
Atropelldrse • en • las
acci6neS|
Atuf4rse • en .la con-
versacioDy
Atuf4r3e • de, por • pocQ^
Aundrse • con • • otro,
Au8ent4rse . de » Madrid,
Avecindrse . en . algun
pueblo,
Avenirse • con . otro,
Aventajdrse • 4 • otros,
AvergoDzdrse • & • pedir,
^ Avergonzarse • de • algo,
Averigudrse • con • alguno,
Avidrse . para • partlr,
Avoc&r(a]go} i • m.
Bs
Balanceir • & ^ talparte^
Balancedr • en . la duda^
Baldr • por • «^ dinero,
JBamboledr . en • lanmriSmBy
Bandrse • en • . agua,
Bardr • • en « tierra,
Barbedr • con • la par6d»
Bastardedr • de • sunatura-
l^za,
JBastarde&r • en * sus ac-
ciones,
^atall&r • con • losenemlffoSi
Baxar • 4 • . la cueva,
Baxdr .de.su autoriddd,
Baxir • b^ia • eLvalle,
respectful to one*s superiors,
to testify tmth cmother,
to hit upon the house,
to guess tohat ought to be said.
to stick Jast in bogs,
. to attract any thing to oneself,
to be choakea with bones,
to animate pneself to great
* things,
to dare the brave.
to attribute any thing to another,
to be afflicted mih labour.
to overhasten actions.
to take pet in, conversation.
to be affronted at a.trifie.
to unite oneself with another,
to absent oneself from Madrid*
to take up on^s abode in any
town,
to agree mthcinoiher.
to sain an advantage over others,
to be dshaxned at askit^^
to be ashamed qfany thing,
to agree wHh any one.
to prepare Jbr a journey.
a superior to call a cause from
an inferior court to his own.*
to hesitate on such a side.
tofiuotuate in doubt.
to wish for money.
to dance on the rope.
to bathe oneself in water.
to run a'ground.
to reach a wqU with one^schiru
to degenerate Jrom his nature.
to be degenerated in one's ac»
tions.
tojight with the enemy,
to go down to the cellar.
to recede from on^s authority,
to descend towards the vaUey.
6
A New Spanish Gbammab.
B4xo
de • . cu6rpo.
Benefice
• para • la saldd,
Blanco
• • de • cara,
Blando
. de . cort^za,
Blasondr
. de . vali^nte,
Biasfemar
• de . lavirtud,
Borddr (algo) • de . con .
•
piata,
Borddr
al • tanib6r»
Bostez4r
. de . hdmbre.
Bostezdr
. de . genealoela,
Bota .
. de • • vino,
B6to .
« de • . punta,
Bramdr •
. de . • c61era,
Boydnte
• en . la fortiina.
Bregdr
• con . . otro,
Bredr .
k . • chasco,
Brind4r
. con . regdiosy
Brindir
. 4 . la salud de
otro,
Bueno
• de . comer,
Bueiio
para . todo,
Buf4r .
. de . . ira,
BuUlr .
por .en • todas
partes,
Burlarse
. de • • algo.
hm in stature,
beneficial to the health,
of a white Jace.
of a soft skin,
to boast ofbraveiry,
to blaspheme against virtue,
to embroider any thing in or
•with silver^
to embroider on a tambour
JramCm
to gape through hunger,
to boast of birth,
a leathern jlask ofmne.
blunt.
to roar with rage,
to be fortunate,
to struggle tmth another*
to vex with tricks,
to offer presents,
to toast to another's healths
good to eat.
good for every thing,
to swell with anger,
to move in all parts.
to make a jest of any thing.
C.
CabSr
Caer
Caer .
Ca6r .
Caer .
Ca6r
Caer
Caer
Ca6r
Caer '.
€a6r
Caldrse
en
la mano,
i!/-.
en . tierra,
.en . . error,
en . lo que se dice,
en . . cu6nta,
en • tal ti6mpo,
de . lo alto,
k • . tal parte,
h4cia • el norte,
sob re . los enemlgos,
por • • pascua,
de • . agua^
Calentirse . k . el fu6go,
CalificUr (i . alg(ino) . de •
docto,
Calldr la verdid . d . otro,
Calumnidr k alguno . de •
injustOy
Caizirse . 4 . . algdno^
to be able to he contained in the
hand,
tofodl upon the earth,
to foil into a mistake,
to understand what is said..
to comprehend,
to fait out at such a time,
to foil from on high,
to foil on such a side,
to foil towards the north',
to foil upan the enemy,
to foil at Easter,
to wet oneself with water,
to warm oneself at the fire,
to qualify any one for a learned
man.
to conceal the truthjrom another.
to calumniate any one as U7ijust.
to lead another by the nose.
GOVEBNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS.
Cambiir . con . otro,
Cambidr alguna cosa • por .
otra,
Camindr • d . SevUla,
Camindr . para . Frdncia,
Camin^r . por • el monte,
Cans4rse . de . pretendGr,
Cansirse . con • de . el tra-
bdjoy
Capaz . de • cien arrobas,
Cap&z . de . hacer algo,
Cap^ . para • el empleo,
Capituldr . k . algiino . de
mal hombre,
Cai^drse • de . razon,
Casdr • d . una person^, 6 •
cosa . con • otra,
Catequizdr i, alguno • para •
el designio,
Causdr perjuicio • d • otro,
Cautivdr d alguno • con •
favores,
Cavdr la imaginicion • en •
algiina cosa,
Cazcaledr de una parte . d .
otra,
C^d6r (algo) . 4 . ptro,
Ced6r • 4 . la autoriddd
de otro,
Ceder (alguna cosa) . en .
fav6r de otro,
Censurdr (algo) . de . malo,
Cefiirse . 4 . lo que se pu6de,
Cerca • de • el paldcio,
Chancedrse • con . algdno,
Chapuzdr (algo) • en • el
agud,
Chico . • de • persbna,
Chocdr uno . con . otro,
Circumscriblrse • d . una cosa,
Glamdr . d • Dios,
Clamdr . por . din^ro,
Clamoredr . por • les muertos,
Comprometerse • con . al-
guno,
Cdrtdr la facultdd . d . al-
giino,
Cobrar din^ro . de • los
deud6resy
to exchange mth another,
to exchange one thing Jor an^
other,
to travel to Seville,
to travel to France,
to walk by the mountain,
to he tired of pretending,
to Jatigue oneself xoith the
labour,
capable of holding a hundred
gallons,
capable of doing something,
capable of the employment,
to impeach any one for being a
bad man,
to insid upon one*s opinion,
to couple one person or thing
toith another,
to suborn any one for one's pur*
pose,
to be prejudiced against another,
to overcome any one with fo»
vours,
to think seriously on any thing.
to go lounging about.
to yield any thing to another,
to yield to another's avihority.
to give up any thing in another^
fovour,
to blame any thing as evil,
to keep within boutids,
near the palace,
to joke with any one.
to sink any thing in the water,
small in person,
to dtive one against the otfkcr.
to cortfine oneself to one thing,
to pray God.
to cry outjor money.
to ring a peal for ike deaa.
to render oneself answerable to
any one.
to shorten another* s power.
to recover money foom debtors.
8
A New Spanish Grammar.
Coleglr (algo) • por, de .
]o anteced^nte,
Coligarse . con . algfino,
Columpidrse • en • el ayre,
Combatlr . con . otro,
Combatlr • contra , alguno,
Combing una cosa . con •
otra,
Comedirse . en . laspalabras,
Comenzdr . a . decir algo,
Comerse . de . envldia,
Conmutar algo • con , otra
cosa.
Compatible , con .laju^tioiay
Compettr . con . alguno,
Complacerse . de • algo^
Complac^r . 4 . otro,
CompoD^rse . de • bu6no y
malo.
Compon(;rBe • con . los
deudores,
Comprdr algo . ^^ de . quieo,
lo vende,
Comprehensible . al . en-
tendimientOy
Comprob&r algo • con • in«
strumentos,
Compromet6rse • en . drbitros,
CpmunldLr luz . 4 . otra parte^
Comunicar , con . alguno,
Conceblr algo . por . bueno,
Clonceblr aigo , en • el animo^
Conceblr alguna cosa • de •
tal modO)
Conced6r algo • $, • otro,
Conceptudr 4 alguno • de .
sabio,
Concertdr una cosa « con •
otra^
Concord4r la c6pia . con •
el original,
Concurrlr . & • algiina parte,
Concurrir . con • otros,
ConcurHr mucbos • en . an
dictam^n,
Condendr .4 • galeras,
Condenar • en • las costas,
Gondeiceoder • 4 . los
ru%08|
to conclude any thing JrQ0 the
antfifedent,
to make an alliance toith antf
to swing in the air,^ ^O^e*
to fight xjoith another^
tofigfit agaitist any pne.
to combine one thir^g t^tb A^'
Qther.
to be civil in words,
to begin to say qny thing-
to pine with envy*
to exchange on^ thing, with an^
otherm
compatible withjustipe,
to rival any one*
to be pleaded with ayiy things
to pleft^e another^
to oe made of good and bad.
to compound with debtors.
to buy any thing from the seller ^
comprehensiUe to the under"
standing,
to prqve any thing with instru'^
mentSm
to compromise by arbitration,
to communicate ligfit to another
part,
to commune with any one.
to conceive any thing as good,
to comprehend something,
to conceive any thing in such a
light*
to yield any thing to another,
to look ftpon any one as a wise
man^
to concert with one janother.
to make the copy agree with the
original*
to meet at ^ome p^ace,
to concur with others,
many to agree in one opinion*
to condemn to the galleys*
to condemn in the costs.
to condescend to entreaties*
GOVJERNMEN'T OF PREPOSITIONS.
Condescejoider • con . la
inst&Qcia,
CoiKdolerfie . de . los trabajos,
Con4uclr algo . i . Cadiz,
Con^M.clr alguna cosa • al
bien de otro,
Confabulate • con • loe con-
trarios,
Cgnfeder^rse . can • aJguno,
Conferlr uma COsa • con •
oCra,
Conferlr un puesto • i . al*
g6no,
Copfe^ la culpa • 9I •
juez,
Confesar^e . de • lospec4dos,
Confi^ridgiinacosa • a • otro^
Confi^r . . en • algo,
Copfi^ree • de . algdno,
Confinar un pals . con * otro^
Confindr alg^no • d • tal
parte,
Confirm^rse • en • au dic-
t&men,
Conformdre . con . el tiempo,
Conforoie . d • su opini6ny
Coi^rme . con • su volunt&d,
Confrontir una cosa • con •
otra,
Confundlrse . de • lo que
se ve,
Confundirse » en • sus jui-
ciosy
Congenidr • con . alguno,
Congracidrse • con • otro,
Congeturdr algo . por se-
fidles,
Congratuldrse • con • sus
amfgosy
Conjurdrse • contra • alguno^
Consagrdrse • d • Dios,
Consentlr . en . algo,
Consistlr • en . . algo,
Consoldrse • con . los siiyos^
Conspirdr • contra • alguno^
'Conspirdr . d • alguna cosa^
to condescend to the indaticei*
to be grieved with labour,
to conduct any thing to Cadiz,
something to conduce to OMOtlu/s .
good,
to converse mth one^s enemies.
to ally oneself to any one.
to compare one thing with an^
ether,
to place somebody in a post.
to cojifess one^s fault to the
judge,
to confess one*s sins,
to entrust another with any
thing,
to conjide in any thing,
to rely upon any one,
one country to lie adjacent to
another,
to confine any one to such a side.
to be confirmed in one*s opinion.
to conform to the times,
conformable to his opinion,
conformable to his will,
to confront one thing tuith an»
other,
to be confounded with what one
sees,
to be thrown into confusion.
to be congenial to any one.
to ingratiate oneself into an*
other s favour,
to conjecture any thing by
signs,
to congratulate oneself with
one^s ownjriends.
to conspire against any one.
to consecrate oneself to God.
to agree in any thing.
to consist in any thing,
to be comfitrted with .one's
Jrienda'.
to conspire against any one,
to aspire to any thing.
10
A New Spanish Grammar.
Const&r . por • testiin6nio8y
Constdr el todo . de • partes,
Consultdr algdna cosa • con
letrados.
Com umado . en • tal fa*
cultdd,
Contaminirse . con - • lo8
vlcios,
Contaminarse . de • heregla,
Con temporizer . con . algiino,
Contender . con . a]g(ino,
Contender . sobre . tal cosa,
Contenerse . en . pal^bras,
Cont^nto . de • vivir . en .
paz,
Contestar . £ .la pregtinta,
Contra6r una cosa . a . otra,
Contrapes^r una cosa . con .
otra,
Contrapon6r esto • a . .
aqucllo,
Contrapuntearse . de . pa-
IdbraSy
Contravenlr . & . la ley,
Contribulr . con . algo,
Contribulr • ^ . tal cosa,
Convalecer . de . la en-
fermeddd,
Convencerse . de . lo contr^rio,
Convenlr • con • otro, . en .
algdna cosa,
Conversdr . con • algiino,
Conveiitlr la hacienda . en-
dinero,
Convertirse . §l , Dios,
Convidar . a algiino con •
din6ro,'
jConvid^rse . d • los trabajos,
Convocar gente . ^ . junta,
Cooper^r • a . alglina cosa,
Corrcrse . de • vergii6nza,
Correspond^r • ^ . los bene-
flcios,
Correspond6rse • con . los
amlgosy
Cortarlafacultad .^ . alguno,
Crecer . en • virtudes,
Crecido . de • cuerpo,
Creer algo . por , fe . en . Dios,
Cre^rse • de • algtina cosa.
to appear by evidence,
the whole to be composed of parts,
to consult something xvitntearned
men*
to be consummate in any Jh'
cuUy*
to stain oneself with vices.
[heresy,
to contaminate onesep' with
to temporize with any one,
to contend with any one,
to dispvie upon a subject,
to be sparing in words
content with living in peace,
to answer to one*s question,
to contrast one thing to another,
to counterpoise one thing with
another,
to put this over against that.
to scold,
to transgress against the law.
to contribute any thing,
to contribute to such a thing,
to recover from illness,
to be convinced of the contrary,
to agree with another in any
thing,
to speak with any body,
to convert good^ into money,
to be converted to God,
to offer money to any body,
to be ready to work,
to convene a meeting,
to co-operate in any thing,
to be ashamed,
to be grateful,
to correspond withjriendi,
to lessen another* s power,
to increase in virtues,
tall, [/n God,
to believe something by Jaith
to be convinced of any thing.
Government op Pbepositions.
11
Cuchareteir . en
• todo,
Ciiidilr . de
algiino,
Culpar • d . .
al^fino,
Camplir . con •
algdno,
€ar4rse . de • algdna cosa,
Curtirse . al . • . ayre,
Curtldo . del .sol; . en . tra-
bdjos^
D.
Dar^algo .
. 4 .
algtino; por
yisto; de
s
col6r; de .
comer.
Dar
de
pal 08,
Dar
en
manias,
jykne
k .
. estudi4r,
Darse
al
diantre,
Dane
por
. vencido.
Debaxo
de . eso,
Deb^rdinero , 4 . algdno,
Deca^r . de . laautorid4d«
Declr algo . 4 . otro ; bien
una cosa . con • otra,
Declar4r8e . por . tal parti-
do; 4 . algiino,
Decl]n4r . 4 . h4cia . tal par-
te ; en . baxeza,
Dedic4r ti6mpo . al est^dio,
Deduclr algiina cosa . ddotra,
Defender « 4 . algiino,
Deferlr • 4 . otro dictamen,
Defraud4r algo . de ' . Fa au-
torid4d . de • otro,
Degener4r .de.su nacimi-
^.nto,
De]4nte . de algiino,
Delat4r8e • al . ju6z,
I>eleyt4rse . en, de . olr ;
con . la vista,
Deliber4r sobre • tal . cosa,
D6ntro • de • . casa>
Depend^r • de . algdno,
Deponer • 4 • algtino . de
8U empleo,
Deposit4r algo . en . algCina
parte,
to intermeddle in every thing,
to take care of any body*
to blame any body,
to discharge one*s obligation
with any body*
to be cured of any thing,
to tan by the air.
tanned by the sun; by labour.
to give something to any body ;
to sufjpose any thinv seenf
to frive colour; to give any
thing to eut.
to bent tvith a stick,
to be foolish,
to give, oneself to study,
to despair.
to surrender,
under that.
to be indebted to any body,
tojalljrom authority,
to say any thintr to another ; to
agree one thing^ with another.
to declare oneself for such a
party; to any body.
to approach towards any side ;
to abase*
to employ one*s time in study,
to infer one thing foom another,
to defend any body,
to adopt another s advice,
to usurp another s authority.
before any bodi
to accuse onest
to degenerate from one*s an-
cestors.
\u.
'If to a judge,
to please oneself with hearing;
with seeing.
to deliberate upon any thing,
within the house,
to depend upon any body,
to depose any body from his
employment.
to deposit any thing in any
place*
IS A Jffew Spanish Gbauuar. '
Deriv4r . de . alca autorid^d, to derive from anoih£r't au-
thority
Darreneg^ • de • algilna, to deteit any thing.
C088, rSody.
DetabHree ■ con . algdao, to have a difference mm any
Desabrocb^r^e > con . a\gO,ao, to manifest one't own teeret to
anatA^r.
Desagradecido . •! . bene- imgrate/ulfor benefifs.
ficio, [^another,
DeeahogdrEe ■ con . alglino, to communicate one's trouble to
Desapropiarse • de alga, to alienate any thing.
Desavenirse unos . de otroa, some to disagree viith others.
SesajuDarte - de . algiinti, to taie notice of any thing.
Doticia,
Descabez^rse • en . algdoa^
. en . algdoa ^
e . en . al-/ '"
g4na cosa, )
labour in vaiji.
Uescalabazarse
e4
la fatlga, to relieve oneself Jronijaligue,
Descantilllr . de . algdna to break off the comer of aajf
cosa, thing.
DcBcargirse . de . la culpa, to clear oneself Jrom imputed
guilt.
Descart^ne • de . algtin en- io exctue oneself from the
cirgo, (Jtargt.
Descender . & . los vaUes, to descend to the vaUies.
Descender . de - bufn lio&ge, to come of a goodjamilt/.
Setcolgjirfe . por , Jamu- to creep down the wall.
rilla,
DcKwIg^e • de -. los to descend/rom the mountains.
PflKolUne . eobre ■ otro, to surpass another.
De«coinpon.^ne . con . al- to ditagree with any one.
g<ii">i
DesCDnG&r de . algtioo, to mistrust any one,
Pcsconocido . & . los bene- ungrateful Jitr ben^t.
ffcioe,
Sescontar algo . de . algd- to dtscount one sum Jrom an-
na suma, other.
Descuid^rsc . de > au obli- to neglect his oMigalion,
gBci6n,
jDetdedne . de • lo dicho, to retract uAat one hat said.
Detdeclr . de . bu caractef) to deviate Jro»t one's eharaatr.
Desdeftine . de . ' alglinB, to disdain any thing.
coaa,
DeEpoblHrBe . de . gente, to depopulate.
Desembarazurse . de ■ To que to get rid of lumber.
eit6rtw,
Qescuibarcar en . el pu^rto, to land.
Government of Prepositions-
IS
t)e6enrreD4r8^ . en . viciM,
Deserter . del • regimi^nto,
JMs^er^r . de . la preten-
8i6n,
Deshacerse . & . trab^^ir,
Deshaz^rse . de • algo,
Desfalcdr'allgb . de . a)giiiui
cosdy
IHsgajarse . de • los monies,
DespeMrse . dfe . el mont^,
D^speHdrse . de . un vicio
en • otrO|
Despdjdr • de • la rop^,
B^pUes . de . legdr ; alguno ;
aTgo,
Desterrdr . ^ • algiino . de
iu p4tria>
Diitn24rse . de • enfado,
Devolv6r lat . ckntti . tit joJfei,
Dexdr . algo . 4 alg^irito ; en
nianrod;de • escfiblr,
Dis^f . un • p\iebl^ . de
otro,
Bistingnlr nub • de • otroy
Deismihtir : d • s^g^d,
D(teAii6ntirse una cosa . de
Desnuddrse . de . pa^iones
Despedlrse . de . alg^o^
TmphtiLt . £ • alg^Vio,
Be^yrtdr . del , .su6fio,
Despic^rse . de • laof^hsa,
Despos^Yse^ • ctm* . jftgiino,
Desprenderse . de . fdgo,
Despues . de . pasedr,
Desquiciir . i . dgtoO'd^
8U ptidfer^
Des^uitarse • de . lar perdfdst;
Destindr algo . panr . tal*
cosa,
Desvergonzdrse . con . al-
Besvi&rsre , del • camino,
D^vivtrse . por . algo,.
Detctil^rse . en . dJlSbdtaded^
DeterminSrse . i , partir.
to abanddn oneself to vices,
to desert Jrom a regiments
to despair of ones pretension.
to nark wth anxiety^
to get rid of something,
to take aixmy Jrom another
thing.
tofoUfrom the mountains.
toJqUJrvm the mountain,
tojaujrom one vice to another..
to strip naked*
after arriving j after any one;
after arhf tKhtg.
to banish any one from hts
country,
to consume oneself mith anger,
to let the cause devolve to the
judge.
to abandon any thing to any
b6dy; in'thehantt^i fa
leave offnnriting.
one- ttmm to be distant Jrofn
another,
to distinguish' one tHinj^ JhHit
. another^
to give any ofietheibr."
one thing to be separate Jrom
anwHeT,
td eonpcer otters passions,
to take ItcMs of any one.
to'dftoak^any one.
to amakejrom sleep,
to be revenged of an affront'.
tomtrHryany&nt.'
*oget rid (f sbjitithing.
afier walkmg.
to deprive any one of his au"'
' tlioriiy.
to ntdie ixpfot onis loss. '
to destine somtt/iin^'Jbr sUth
an end.
to take liberties mth somebody,
tolo^t dnt'^s v>ay.
tbbif anxious for sontetHing.
to be stopped by difficulties.
^out.
to take a resolution of setting
14
A Nem- Spanish Grammab.
D^tras • de . la diroa,
Devolver la causa • al juez,
«
Dex4r algo . 4 . algiino,
Dexir . de . escriblr,
Dex4r . en . poder . de • otro,
Diferente . de . otro,
Dlferlr algo . 4 . para .
otro tiempo,
Dign4r8e • de . conced^r,
algo,
Diman4r . de . algdna cos8>
Discernlr una cosa . de .
otra/
4 • algiino,
de . alabanza,
en . aprender,
• por . algo,
. . de • con
algiino,
de . los bi^nes,
. 4 algiina cosa,
sobre • algo.
De8frut4r
Digno
Dingente .
Digust4r8e
Di8gust4r8e
Disponejr .
Dispon6rse
Disput4r ,
Disenllr • de otro • dictam^n,
pisuadir 4 alg&no • de .
algiina cosa,
Distiogulrse . en • algo,
DiBtrah^rse • de . en • Ja
conversacion,
Dirertlrse • 4 • en • jugar,
Dividir alg6na cosa • de otra,
I
Dividir /en • partes,
Dividir . entre . muchos,
Dividir . jpor • mitad,
Dol^rse • de lo mal hecho,
I)ot4do . de » ci6ucia,
Dud4r . de . • algo,
Dur4r • hasta . por • tal ti^mpo,
Duro • de • entendimi6nto,
E.
behind the lady.
to let the cause devolve to the
judge.
to bequeath to any one.
to leave offijoriting.
deposit ivith one,
d^erentjrom another,
to defer any thing to another
time,
to condescend to grant any
things
to originate Jrom something,
to discern one thing Jrom an*
other,
to take profit from another,
ivorthy to bepraised.
diligent to. learn,
to be disgusted tdth any thing,
to be disgusted xjoith any one.
to dispose qfspods.
to be disposed to any thing*
to dispute on something,
to dissent from another* s opt'
nton.
to dissuade any one from, any
thing,
to distinguish oneself in any*
thing,
to toander in conversation.
to be diverted tvith play,
to divide one thing from an»
other,
to divide m parts,
to divide befiveen several,
to divide into halves,
to repent of a bad action,
endotved vjith learning,
to doubt any thing,
to last till such a time,
of a difficidt understanding*
Ech4r algo • en • por . ti^rra, to throto any tfiing on the earth.
Embob4r8e . de . en . con,,
algo, ' to be stupified mth anv thing.
Enibo8c4rse . ^n • el m6nte| to Ue in ambush on a niU.
Government of Pbepositions,
15
Embuilr alguna coca . en
de . con . otra,
Emmenddrse . de . en . algo,
Empapdrse . en . agud,
Empen&rse • en . por . algdno,
Enagendrse • de . algdna cosa^
Eaamorisc^rse • de • algtina
dam a,
Encalldr la nave . en . arena,
Eucardrse . d . con . algtino,
Encargdrse . de . algun ne-
g6cio,
Encaxdrse . en . por • algii-
na parte,
Enccnagarse . en . vlcios,
Encenderse . en . ira,
Encharcdrse » en . agua,
Encima . de . la . mesa,
Enfermdr . del . pecho,
Enfrente . do . la casa,
Enlazdr una cosa . con .* otra,
Ensaydrse • en • d . hac6r algo,
Ensefiar . i. . leer,
Entend^r . de . en . sus ne-
gocios,
Enterdrse • de . algtana cosa,
Entrdr n. en . algiina parte,
Entremet^rse . en • cosas de
otro,
Equivocdrse . con • en . algo,
Escap&rse . de , . pri8i6n,
Escarmentdr . de . algo .
en . cab^za ag6na,
Escond^rse . de • algiino
en . alguna p4rte, •
Escriblr cartas • 4 alguno,
Esculplr • en . br6nce, .
Excusdrse . de . haz6r algo,
Esmerdrse • en . algo,
^spantdrse .'de . algfina cosa,
Estampir . en . pap^l,
Estdr , §L . orden . de . otro,
Estar . de . . ' vidge,
Estdr . en , algtana parte>
Estar . por . para . partlr,
Estdralgo . por . suQcd^r,
to inlay one thing 'with another.
to correct oneself in any thing,
to be damp with xvater.
to take part Jor another*
to alienate any thing.
to Jail in love vaith any lady.
tq run a ship on shorey or on
the sands,
to fact another.
to charge oneself with ant/ bu"
smeu.
to busy oneself in any thing.
to be vicious.
to kindle teith anger.
to drink too much water.
on the table.
tq have a pain in the breast.
opposite to the house.
to tie one thing close to another.
to try to do any thing.
to teach to read.
to understand one^s busir.ess.
to be well informed with some"
thing,
to enter into any part,
to tneddle with another^ s affairs.
to mistake in any thing,
tq escape from a prison,
to take warning at. any thing at
another s expense,
to hide oneself from somebody
in any place,
to write letters to any one.
to engrave on brass,
to excuse oneself from doing
any thing,
to exert oneself in any thing,
to be terrified at any thing,
to print on paper,
to be under another's direction,
to b^ on a journey,
to be in some place.
to be ready to set out.
something to be near happening*
16
A Netif Spanish Gramm'ai?.
Esttechkne • con . al^ii&,
Estrelldfse uno . con . con-
tra . otrd,
Estribdr . en . • algo,
Excedir • eti • atgo . k • otro;
Exceptaar . 4 algiino • de .
algiina cosa,
Excluir . 4 • algmio . de •
algiina parte,
Exhortdr • i . algiiho . k
a%dna cosa^
^xittifr • 4 . algiino • de al-
gCiti empk^Of
Exonerdr . 4 • alguno . de
bH eArpl^')
Expeler . d . nl^^tko . de
cadaf,
Exp^rto . en la^ 16ye^,
ExtraK6r una cosa . de .
otra>"
Extravi&rse . de fa catr^
R
Facil . de . digerlr,
Falt&r . d . lai . paldbra,-
Fallfo* - • de . dinero,
Fastididrse • de . a)gt>,
Fati^e . eii « aigo^,
Fatigarse • por • algiina cosa,
Favordble .' d . parii ; todd^,
Favorec^rtfiJ' . de . algwi^nV
Fidrafgb r did ^ d . alfe<ino,
¥f%\ ;. ^ . cdH' . sua amlgosy
Ybtit . 6tt . lapai^d^y'
Flexfblii . d .la razon,
Fluctuar . ett: . ladiidav
Fortificdrse - • ct . algtina
. . palate,
Fr^n^u^ri^e . d . otro,
Frisdr tihd . ctfA . otfo,
Fu^ra . de . . cai^,
Fuerte . de .* condfcidn,
Fundidt^ . en . la raz6tiy
to make oneself intimate tBiti
any hody^
to dash Oneself against anothifih*
id he supported in any thing,
to' excel any One iH any thing,
td except any one from any thing.
to exclude any one from any'
place,
to exhort any one to something,
td exempt any one from his ohli"
gntions.
td dismiss any one from his
place.
id Hxpel any onefrorHthe ncnise.
sMtJed in tht laws,
to extrbct one thing from an»
other,
td detiatef^om oi/te's purpose.
easy to digest.
to fail in one*s ph)fnise>
tvanting money,
to 'be disgusted tmth any thing,
td he fatigued hy aiiy thing,
to long for something.
fatbUrabHp to dlh
tddifaU oneself tf any bddy.
to t fust any iking to any dn^.
felitMd to kis friends.
td Jix any thht^ in the tba^
pUdnt to rtaSon.' •
tdflttctuaie in douhf.
to strengthen Oneself dn 'tfittr
to open oneself to another.
to oe of the same genius voitk'
out of the house. V another*,
of a rough teifiper.
to Be founded trt reason.
Gurahr . d . cargo . de • otr(), to vUhe upon another^
GoVSmilllBKT OV PniPOSlTIQNS.
17
Gir&r • de • un* parte • &
otra,
Gir4r • sdbre udr eata d«
comerciOi
Oir4r r por • to! parte,
Gkunkrae • de . alffo,
Gorda • de • tiUe,
Goz&ir • de • algonacpsay
tiiradu&r algo • de-por .
buiSnOy
Grange&r la vokmtfid • d • de .
oirOf
Goard&rse • de • lo males
Guarec^rse . de • alg^aa cosa,
Guaf eotee • en . algiiiia parte^
6aaniec6r algika cosa . con
otra^
Guidrse • por # algiino,
Guiido . de • alg6ne,
Guind4rse . por • lapar^d,
GuBt&r « de • algo,
H41hI • para . en * k eifincia,
Habilit4r . & . udo « para
algiina cosa,
Habitar • con • alguno,
Haliit4r . en • tal parte,
•i}abitii4ne . 4 • en • alg^na
cosa,
Habl4r • en • de-aobre * al-
giina cosa,
|iabl6r . con^r * ^Igiiao,
"Hae^r . & • • todo,
Hae^ • de r vali^nte,
Haoer • por • algtino,
Hall4r alge . en . tai parte,
iiartirse de • coinida,
Halldrse « en r la^i^ta,
Hailftrse . 4 • en . If oa•l^
Henchir el cant4ro r de'%iia,
Herir . 4 . alguno • en • la
eatiBiaei6B,
Herldo • de » lainldrk,
Hinc4r8e • de • rooillaB,
Hennanir una ooia • con
otwi,
lierffr w putiblo ». de * en
to rmifrom we side to another.
to draw upon a commercial
haum^
t9 pedvm iw:k m ude*
to boast of any things
Jkt or huty.
to reUsk any thing,
to pronounce any thing as good,
to gain another's affection.
tm guard onesdfjrom emL
H take shelter frmn any thing*
to Sake skdter in any place*
to garnish one thing utith an*
ather.^
$0 piide oneself hy any one.
gmded by any one*
to descend by the kjooH.
to taste of any thing.
iitotr fir^ or in science*-
to enable any body fir wthf
ihng-
to dineU xvith any one.
to dtveU im such a place.
to accustom oneself to some-^
thing,
to spesA of any thing.
to speak mth, or fir any one.
to be ready ai any thing.
to pretend to courage.
to do fir any one. [place.^
to Jind any thing in such a
to gorge oneself wihfiod.^
to 00 present at thefeast.
tobe%n the house.
to Jill thepkcher mth ia)ater.
to hurt anyone in his r^utoHon.^
mounded by injury.
toJmmlddam.'
to make one thing agree mth
another^
to b^ itery populous.
B
^ -^tn^
18
A New Spanish Grakmab.
Hocidur en . alga,
Holgftne . con
Hulr . de
Human&rse . k
. de-en . algo,
algtino,
. algunacosa.
gumilldrse • k • algiino,
undlr algo- . en • el %ua,
I.
Id6neo . para . todo,
Igudl * 4-con « otrO)
Igual&r una cosa • con ^ otra,
Imbulr . 4 . algiino . en . de
algtinacosa,
Indpeler ialg&no * S » algiina
cosa^
Impelldo . de . lanecesaidddy
Impenetrable . k . losmas
perspicdces,
Impetrdr algo . ae . alg^ino,
Implic^rse . en r algOi
Impon^r penas . k algiino,
linpon^rse . en • algiin
h^choy
Import&r algo • de ^ otro
pais,
Importunado • de • ruegos,
Importundr . k . algiinO' .
con . pretensiones,
Impresionir . k . algiino..
de . en . algdnacosat
Itnprimlr algo . en • el
inimo,
Impr6pio • e-a • sueddd,
Impugndr algo . . 4 . otro,
Impugn^do • de-por . muchos,
Imputdr la culpa • k . otro,
Inaccessible . & . los preten«
di^ntes,
IncansSble • en • los trab&xos,
Inapedble • de . su opini6o,
Incapiz • de . rem4dio,
Inc^nte .en . sus tare^s,
Incidlr .en . culpa,
Incit&r . en • & . otro,
Indin&rse • k • lavirtiid.
io itumble at any inccfwot^
nience*
to rejoice at any thing.
tofiyjram any one.
to familiarise oneself to 'any
thing^^
to humble onesdfio any ene.
to plunge any thing . into the
water.
fit for any tMng.
equal to another,
to make one thing equal mth
another,
to instruct any one in any thing.
to compel any one to any tiling.
impelled by necessity,
impenetrable to the most penc"
trating^
to obtain any thing of any one.
ta intermeddle in any thtngm-
to impose penalties on any one0
to instruct oneself about any
action,
to import any thing Jrom an-
Gtker country^
importuned tioith intreaties.
to importune any one mth pre^
tensions,
to impress any one tvith any
. '. . tlnng.
to imprint any thing on tie
mind*
utAecoming his age.
to impugn any one in any thing*
impugfSd by many,
to impute the Jam to any one.
inaccessible to pretenders.
uwwearied mth toork.
obstinate in his opinion*
irremediable.
indefatigahle in his labours.^
to Jail into aJauU.
to incite any one to at^ things
to be inclined to virtue. .
Government OF Prepositions.
19
tndulr . en . el niimero,
Incompatible • con • el
mando,
Incomprehepsible • & • los
hombresy
Inconseqiiente • en • algo,
Inconstinte . en • alguna
GOsa»
Incon8t4nte . en . su proced^r,
Incorpordr una cosa • en •
■ con • otra,
Increlble para . 4 • muchosy
Incumblr • k • otro,
Incurr^ . en . • delitos,
Indecfso . en • . resolv^r,
Jndign&rae . con • contra .
algo,
JndisponSr . d • uno • con .
otroy
Inducir. • d . uno . . & • pecar,
Inductlvo • de • error,
Indultdr . 4 . algfino . de .
la pena>
Infatigdble . en . la guera,
Infl^cto . de . hereeia>
Inferior . d . otro . en . aigo,
Inferir • de • princfpios,
Inficion&dOy • de . viruelaSy
Infill • i . 8u amlgO)
Inflexible . & . la raz6ny
Influir . en . alguna cosa,
Informdr . k • algmio • de •
algo,
Infundir dnimo • en-d • al-
giino,
Ingrdto . d . lo8 fav6re8,
Inhdbil . para • el empl^o,
Inhabilitdr . d . algdno • para .
algiina cosa,
Inhibir al ju6z • de . en • el
conocimientOi
Insensible • d . las injdrias,
Insepardble . de • lavirtiid,
Insertdr algo . en • algiina
cosa,
Insinudr algo • d • algiino,
Insinudno • con • los pode-
r68os,
«
to include in the ntmber. .
incompatible xioith the command.
incomprehensible to men*
»
to he inconsequent,
unsettled in any thing.
inconstant in his proceedings,
to incorporate one thing toitk
another,
incredible to many,
any thing to be incumbent on
another,
to incur crimes,
undecided in resolving,
to be angry toith any thing.
to indispose one toith another.
to induce one to sin.
leading to error.
to pardon any one the punish*
ment.
indefatigable in toar.
infected toith heresy,
inferior to another in any
thing,
to infer from principles,
infected viiih the smaU-pox.
unfaithful to one's Jriend.
injlexible to reason. {thing,
to have an influence over any
to inform another of any thing.
to encourage any one.
ungratefidjor favours.
uj^for the employment.
to disable any one for any thing.
to inhibit any judge from taking
further information,
insensible to injuries^
insepardblefrom virtue,
to ingraft one thing on another.
to insinuate any thine to any one.
to insinuate oneseff into the
favour of the great.
B 2
90
A New Si^ANim GftAMMutt,
Insipidd • al • giMto^
Imivtlr . tn b a)g6fm€0Btt|
Inspir^r algo . d « otro,
Instruir&llg&tio ^ etk . idgHiim
cosa,
Interceder . con ^ algi&iio
Interes&rse . con . algiino
bbr . otrt>^
fntetnlhrse . en • con • al^iino,
Interndrse • en ^ ^g6i1EMtti^^
Interpol&T vnak C6sM • td»i •
otrasy
'^ V 4 as cosaa,
mandln,
parte,
de • pttr . h>8
Cdntr&rios.
en • ttd pttrt&>
Invertir dinero • en • otro uso,
Ingerlr un Bfbdl • ea • otro,
Ir de MadrH • & • h^cia •
Cadiz,
contra . alguno,
• por • • pan,
por .. el camino,
tras . de .. aig&no.
J.
Interpon^rse
Intervene •
Introdttdfise
Introducirse
Invadido •
Itivfilrndr •
Ir
Ir
Ir
Ir
Jactirse • de . alg^na cosa,
Jugiralgo ,. & . taljtriEgo,
Jugdr una cosa . con . otra,
Justific^rse . de . algfinacosa,
Junt&r ana cosa • & • con •
otra,
Juzg^r . de • a}guna cosa,
L.
Ladeir una cosa • 'k tal parte,
Ladedrse • i . ptropartido,
Lamentd,r8e • de . a]go,
Xanz&r algo • 4-contnr . otra
parte^
ikrijpid to ike taste*
to tmUi<m any thing.
ta imtpire any thing te another*
to inttrmct oTiy oneni «^ thing.
to intercdie 'mth Any iiinefbr
P^ iftterest onesdf mth any one
Jbr^^Mther.
to interest Meseifin Any thing*
^ t^eep iHHo another's Javours,
toiodkinto nny tkmg*
to iningle oneihingmth another.
to iht^ere'Kith any orii*
to tfi^iUnbene in thsnge.
io iHtrwiuce oneself to^is com^
manders*
io itarude meselfint&tmyfiai^
invaded ^ the tnetfnee*
io pass ike mnter in simh a
io c(hv6ert money to another use*,
toingr^ one tree on {mtfther*
^ gojvom Madrid to Cadbs* ,
to go against any body*
to gojbr bread,
to go in the isoay*
to go behind another.
to boast of any thing.
to stake mvney on such a game*
to mutch one thing mth another,
to dear oneself from imptd^
guik*
to Join one thing to^ or xxm an*
. other,
to judge of any thing.
to turn any thing on si^ n side.
to become a turncoat.
to complain of any thing*
to fush any thing to moiher
side.
GOYBWlil&HT QV PUBrosXTIQNS.
91
Laifo • . de • cu6rpa»
Largo • de . maooa,
Lastimdrse • con . una
piedra»
Lostimdrse , da • alg&nou
Levanter al{[<^ • ^ • del .
su^lot,
Libert4r * & « algi^io • de) •
peligroy
Libr^ • d • algtino • Hq .
Ligar una oosa « con . o^ra,
Lig^ro • de • pitia>
Limitdr las facuhddes • 4 .
Limitddo , de • talentoa,
Linddr una position t con •
otra.
Llev&rse . de • alguna pa9i6Q>
Ludir una ooaa • 09n • otng
M.
Manco • de . una mano,
Man4r agua • d^ }a fu^nte,
Manten^r conversadon • 4
• alguQO,
Mantenerse . de .' yerbas,
Maquinar « &X ^ sobre ^ al-
MaravilKjFse . de v a)gQ>
Matdrse . k * trabaidr,
Matdrse . per . conseguirafgo,
Matizdr . de . con • coI6re8y
Medidoo « de « esutura^
Mediir ^ ppr , alg^nQ»
Mejordr , de » fi^rt^nv,
Mejorir . 4 • algiinQ t en • ^
berencif,
Menpr , d^ • . ed^>
Menoa « de ^ • ciep
esciidos,
M erec^r • & oOp p de • ^JgAnp,
M ensurdrse « fio t laA accidnes,
Met^ din^ro , en • el cofre,
Melirse « 4 • g(>bern4r,
Met^ne . con • los que
mdndmif
Mflliriie • en . los peligrosi
talL
hnrtfid.
t^ hurt oneself against a ttone.
ia take pity on any one.
ia raise a»y thing up from the
ground,
to ddiver any we from danger.
tajreeany one from risk.
to tie one thing to another^
lightjooted.
<e iimit any one*sfacu^ie4*
^slender talents,
a possession to be adjoinvig to
onMer.
to ifi carried ainay by so^cpoir
sion.
io rub ofze thi»g against another.
nudrntd of one hand.
tiHifer springingfrom ajhuniain^
io ftiasntatn conversation ujith
tQ live upon herbs.
tothint: hardakqut qny thing*
to iSDOH^ at any thing,
to kiU oneself with labour,
to tire oneself^r any thing.
to shade with colours.
qfa middling ^atyare.
to intenrcecfejor any one.
f9i^^r^ne*s/oTtune.
i^ encreqse the inheritan^ ^
anyone*
. fcff tftq^^ art hf^ndred cr&m^
iQ mr^Jrm,any on^.
to, he cqMic^ jn one*s a^HS*
to put pioi(iey into, the. cf^f^. .
. to as^me government^
fq fl^f^^t}}|M thccpmmanders»
r
tQi^BQ^ ^mselfto dangers.
22
A New Spanish Grammar.
Mezclar una cosa . con otra,
Mezcl&rse • en . los ne-
goci6s,
Mirdr . de . . lexos,
Mir4r . 4 . . algdnOi
'Mirdrfie . en . algiina cosa,
Mirdr . por . algdno,
Moderdrse . en . las palabras,
Mof4r8e . de . algiinoy
Moj4r (algo) . en . el agua,
Molerse . 4 . trabaj4r,
Molido . de .el trabajo»
MoIe8t4r . 4 . algdno . con .
visitaa,
Molesto . 4 . Ids amigos,
Montar .4 . cafa^llo^
Mont4r • en . mula,
Mont4r . en . c61era>
Mor4r . en . pobl4do,
Morir . de . enfermed4dy
Morirse .. de . frio,
Morirse . por . conseguir
algo,
Motej4r . 4 . algiino . de
ignor4nte,
Motiv4r . 4 . algiino . con
raz6ne8,
Mov^rse . de • una parte 4
. otra,
Mud4r . de . int^nto,
Mud4rse . de • casa,
Monnur4r . de . algiiao>
N.
Nac^r . de . algtina parte,
Nac6r . con . fortiina,
Nac6r . p4ra . el trab4jo9
Nad4r • en '. el no^
Naveg4r .4 . rndiasi
Necesitar . de •• algo,
Neg4r6e . 4 « la comu-
mcaci6n,
Nimio • en • el'proced6r,
Ningiino . de . tos pre86ntes,
Niyel4r8e . 4 . lojusto^
Nombr4r . •4 . alg{ino -.
p4ra . el empire,
Not4r . 4 . algiino . de •
. mal 4Siiracter^
io mix one-thing tjoitk another,
to mix oneself in business.
to look at a distance.
to look at any one.
io he carefid in any thing.
to look for any one.
to he moderate in 'mrds.
to make game of any one.
to ive^ with tvater.
dofoUgue oneself mth tvorking.
tuorn out toith l(d)our*
to trouble any one uoith visits.
troublesome tojriends.
to get on horsebackh
to get on a mule*
to get into a passion.
to ehoell in apopulous fiace.
to die qf a sickness.
to hie starved mth cokL
io long for obtaining any end.
to censure any one as ignorant,
m
to persuade any one by reasons.
to movejrom one side to another.
to change the intention.
to remove.
to murmur against any one.
'to come from any part.
' to be born to a fortune,
to be horn to labour,
to stbim in the river.
' io sail to the Indies,
to be in-iiodnt qf something:
to deny onesej/ to company. -
over-nice in action. ^
none of the present,
to direct oneself by justice*
to nominate any one to the em-
ployment.
to note any one as a bad cha^
racier.
GOVESNMBNT OF PREPOSITIONS.
23
Notific&r alg6na cota . 4 to notify any thing to any one.
algiino;
O.
Obligor '• k . alg^nacofla,
Obstdruna . k . otro,
Obstindrse • ea . alg(ina
cosa,
Obten^r algtina gracid . de
algiino,
Ocultdralgo . k . de
algiinOy
Ocupdrse . en . estudi4r,
Ofenderse . con • dealgo,
Ofreo6r . algo . d . alguno,
Ofrec^rse . d . lospeligros^
Ol^r algo . & . otra cosa,
Olvlddrse . de . lo pasado,
Opindr . en • sobre alguna
cosa,
Opon^e « & . la empresa,
Oprimir . & « otro con el
pod^r,
Optdr • d • los empleoB,
Ordendrse • de . sacerdote,
Orillar . & . algiina parte.
P.
Pact4r alguna cosa . con otrO|
Pagdr • con • paldbras,
Pagdr • en « dinero,
Pag&rse . de • bu^nas ra-
z6nes,
Palade&rse • con • alguna
cota,
Pali4r algo . con . otra
coaai
Pdlido . de • semblinte,
Palmedr . 4 • algiino,
Par4r . en • casa,
Pac4r • & • lapu^rta,
Pardrse . con • alffuno,
Parirse ^ & « descwsar,
Pbrdrse • en • aleuna cosa,
P4rco . . en • la comida,
Paree^r • & • en • algiina
• parte.
to oblige any one to any thing.
to hinder any one,
to be obstinate in anything.
to obtain a Jai>our from any
« one.
to conceal any thing Jrom any
one.
to be occupied in study,
to be offended at any thing,
to offer any thing to any one.
to offer oneself to danger,
io Tuzve a different smell,
to forget the jmst.
to houl an opinion on any thing.
io oppose the undertaking
to oppress another by power.
to be a candidate,
to be ordained into the priest*
hood,
iodratotoanyside.
to make a bargain.
to pay with words.
to pay in cash*
to be satined with good reasons.
to flease the palate with any
thir^.
, to paUiate one thing with an--
other.
, pale faced.
io cheer any one with the hands*
io stay at home.
to stop at the door.
to stop with any one.
. to stop to rest oneself.
to stop at Jiny thing.
sparing in victutus.
to appear any where^
S4
d Ntm Spanish Gsamkar.
Participdr . de . aigdna cosa,
Particularizarse . con • al-
gdDO . en • algtina cosa,
Pardr • 4 • para m Fraicia,
Partlrse * ^ m Esp4ila,
Pa^tir .en • dos partes,
Partir • entre • los axnlgos,
Partir • algo • con .. otro,
Partir ,. por , mitlld,
I^^ *• de • Sevilla,
Pasdr . por * ^rboles,
Fasdr . 4 • Madrtd,
Pasdr de uaa parte » 4 • etra,
Pasir • eatre • monies,
Pasdr • por • el earning,
Pasdrse algiina oosa . de • la
Biem6ria,
Pase4nie con » otro,
Pase4rse . por • el prado,
Pecdr • de ..
Pecdr . en • algo,
Pedlr . algo • i * alg^o,
Fedir • con • juiticia,
Pedlr . de » enjusticiai
Pedir • por « Dids,
Fedir • por . algfino,
Pegiir una cosa • k • aJgdno,
Peg4r . contra • la pared,
Peldrse « por • algiina cosa,
Peligrdr • ea » algo,
Pelote^rse • eon « alg^no,
Pen4r .• en • laoiravida,
Pender » de « aigdna
COfiBf
Penetrir • hasta • las en-
P^tr^o • de. • dolor,
Pens4r • en • algo,
Perd^raigo > de • viala,
Perdersc *^ e^ * elcamkio,
Perderse • 4yi • el |ii%o,
Perccer • por « de « hatalm,
Peregrinir • por • dmando,
Perfumdr / eon » incieMo,
Permanecer • en . algtea
.pafte«
PermiUralgo .. 4 • algdnoi
io particijmU. Mny tUng t$ Mny
oncm
to partake of ani/ things
io be singular a^A ani/ one in
any thing.
ioHt^ffto FreenxM.
to set qffyrtm Spain*
to dpoide into tinoparit*
to Aare between jriends*
to share out any thing mik m^
to divide. [other.
to go beyond SemUe.
to pass between trees.
io goto Madrid.
to go from, one side io tmother.
to p€Us beltoeen mountaitts*
io pass by the road,
tojfi^rget any thing.
to take a mdlk mtk another.
to ^folk in the meadofvo.
to contmit a sin through ig^^
to hefauHiy in any thing.
to ask any thing j^om any ontm
to Msk uathjuOice*
io daim in latv.
toaskJbt'God^
to askjor any one.
to attach any thing to any one.
to fasten against the toaU.
to be anxious for smy thing.
to endanger tn mny thing.
to sdtffie mth any one.
to be punished in the other j^
to bang froMf or depend upon
amythsngp
topenetrate to the bowels.
penetrated tmth grief.
to tkini mpon amy things '
to imss sight of any ikmg.
to 4ose one's tmy. .
to ruin oneself xsith gamittg...
iopisish mth hunger.
to VBOMfer throm^hihewmitU
to 'psffumemth incense^ .
to remain in any placem
io permit any thing to anyone.
GOVBINMANT OF PREPOSITIONS.
25
Permut&r algiina COM • por
con . otra,
Perseguido • de • enemlgos,
Persever&r • ea • laresolu-
cion,
P^rsuadir algo • 4 • algiino,
Persuadirse • por • d-de . al-
giina cosa,
Fenuadine • de, por • las
ras^aes de otro,
Pertenec6r . d • algiino,
Bertreohdrie de • lo ne-
cesario,
Pesir • de • lo mal hecho,
Pes4do . en . la ooDvena-
Pescdr
Piir
Fkkr
doD,
con
por
con
red,
al^o,
fu^rza,
en algo,
Pintiparddo • i • algtino,
Flagarge • de * gi^os,
Planter • 4 • alg^no • en
alguna parte,
Plant^rge • en • Cadis,
Poblir . en • bu^n pu^sto,
Pobl&rse • de • gente,
Fonderiralgo • de • grande,
Poner • k • alguno • d .
oficio,
PoD^ralgo • en • alg^ina,
parte,
Pon^rse • & • eicribir,
Porfidr • con • algiino,
Portirse • con • decenda,
Posir • en . algiina parte,
Poseido • de • t6mor,
Postrine « en • catna,
Po5trdrse • 4 • loi pies,
• de • otro,
Preceder • i • otro,
Precedklo • de • alguno,
Precidrse « de • valiente,
Predpitdrse • de • algioa
parte,
Prefisiido • de • algdno,
Prcfeiir ana oosa • 4 • otra,
Pceguntdr i^o • 4 • alguno,
Pregunt^ • por • alguno,
Premldne • de • «lg(iiio,
io exchange one iUngJbr an^
pursued by enemies.
UperseZeinthereiobawn.
to persuade ani^ one of a tking*
to hejpersuaded of any thing.
to be persuaded by another's
reasons.
to belong to any body,
to beJumisheamth n
necessaries.
to repent of doing xorong.
dull in conversation.
to fish mth a net.
to long for any thing.
to prick ixith force.
to pique onesdfupon any thing.
Uke to any one in something.
to be plagued isith pimples *
to set any one in any place.
to be settled in Cadiz.
to settle in a good situation.
to be peopled.
to exaggerate any thing as great.
to put any one in business.
to put any thing any where.
•
to set oneself to toriting,
to be positive toith any one.
to ctmduct oneself %oith decency*
to lodge m anyplace,
possessed byfoar.
to be confined to one*s bed.
to prostrate oneself at another's
foet.
to precede another,
preceded by any one.
to pigfte oneself upon courage,
to ie precipitated from any pUoe.
pr^irred by any one.
to prefer one thing to another.
to ask any one any thing.
to inquire for or after somebody.
to be taken with my one*
20
A tiew Spanish Gramiiiar.
Prender • 4 • algdno,
Prender las plintsm • en .
ti^rra,
Precedido • de • otro,
Preocupdrse • de algo,
Prepararse • 4, para • algiina
cosa,
Prescindir . de • algo,
P^resentir algo • 4 • otro,
PreacDtdr 4 alguno • para .
algun puesto,
Preserver • 4 • algiino . de
al^na cosa^
Presidir • 4 • otro,
Presidldo . . de . otro,
Presidir . en . tAgda tribunal,
Prestdr dinisro . 4 . 6tro,
Pre8t4r la di6ta • para . la
salud^
.Preponder4r una cosa • 4 .
otra>
Presumlr . de . docto>
Preyalec^r . sobre • algiihoy
Prevenlr algo • 4 • alg{ino,
Prevenirse . de . lo nece-
84rio>
Prevenirse . para . algo,
.PriDg4r6e . en . algo,
Priv4r . 4 . algiino . de
algiina cosa,
PriY4r • con • algiino,
Prob4r . de . algiina cosa,
Proced6r . 4 • en • la elec-
cioD,
Proced^r . con . acu^rdo,
Proced^r algiina cosa . de .
otra,
Proced^r • contra . algiino,
Proce84r. • 4 . algiino ..
por . delltos,
Prdcur4r . por . algiino,
Proej4r • contra . las . olas,
Profe84r • en . religion,
Promet^r algo . 4 • alguno,
Promov6r • 4 . algtino • 4 .
otro empl6o,
Propa84rse » 4 « en • algiina
cosa,
Propon^ralgo • 4 . alguno,
to seize any one.
plants to take root in the earths
preceded by another.
to be prepossessed •with any thing.
to prepare onesetfjbr any thing.
to cut off from any thing.
to present any thing to another.
to present any one to an employ^
tnent*
to preserve any onejrom any
thing* ^
to preside ofoer another,
presided by another. .
to preside in any tribunal,
to lend money to another,
the diet to contribute for the
healths
to preponderate one thing over
another,
to set up for a man of learning,
to prevail over any one.
to advise another of any thing,
to provide onesey^ xioith neces'
saries.
to provide oneself for any thing,
to intermeddle in any thing,
to deprive any one rfany thing.
to be intimate tioith any one.
to taste of any thing,
to proceed to the election.
to proceed with circumspectiotu
one thing to proceed Jrom au'
other,
to proceed against any one.
to proceed against a man fotr
crimes.
. to procure for any one.
to raw against the voaves.
to profess in rdigion.
to promise any thing to any one.
to promote any one to another
. employnent.
to over'shoot one's mark tn any
things, or to be deficient %n
politeness,
to propose any thing to any me.
Government of Prepositions.
S7
PropoD^r . k . algiino . en
• el primer lug^r,
Prdporcionarse . para . algo,
Proporciondrse . a, con . las
fu^rzas,
Prorog4r el pldzo • ^ . al-
§uno,
Prorumplr . en . lignmas,
Prove^r la plaza . con . de .
viv6res,
Proveer empleo « en . al-
giino,
Provenir . de . otra causa,
Provocdr . 4 . alguno
. con . nialas paldbras,
Proximo . k . morir,
Pujdr . contra . la dificultid,
Pujir . por . algo,
Purgdr . de • sosp^cnai
to propose any one in tfie Jirst
place,
to Jit oneself for any thing,
to proportion eneself to oneU
strength,
to enlarge tJie time to any body.
to hurst intoiears.
tojurnish the fortress imth prO'
visions,
to pr&oide any body toith employ ^
went*
to proceed foom another cause,
to provoke any one by scurrilous
language,
at the point of death. ^^
to strive against difficuUie9k
to strive for any thing,
to dearjrom suspicion*
Quadr^ algdna cosa . d
algiinOy
Quadrdr . con . el encdrgo,
Qual . de . losdos?
Quebrantdr las piernas . d
. algfino,
Quebrantdrse . de . dol6r,
Quebrar el corazon • 4 . al-
giino,
por . anddr,
por • cobdrdcy
en • casa^
el sermon,
Queddr
Queddr
Queddrse
Queddrse . en .
Quej4rse . de
Quemdrse . de
Quern 4rse . por
Querelldrse . de
Querido • de
Qui^n . de
Quitar algo . 4
Quit^r algfioa cosa
ft
Quit^rse .
alffiinoi
alsiina
palabra,
algiina
cosa,
algiino,
todos,
ellos ?
algiino,
de .
algiina parte,
de • quknerafj
tofi any thing to any one.
to be Jit for the emphyment.
vMch i^the tvoof
to break any one*s legs.
to be V)om out toith grief,
to break any one*s heart.
to have to walkforther.
to stay back like a covkird.
to tarry, at home.
^to stop short, in a discourse^ to
\ remain hearing the sermon .
to complain of any cine.
to be offended toith any word.
to heat oneself for any things
to complain of any one.
beloved by every body,
vohich of them f
to take any thing foom any one.
to take any thing from anyplace.
to free oneself from whims*
88
4 New Spanish Grammar.
Rabi4r • de • hfinsbre,
Rabi&r • por . algo,
Ra^ algiina cota • de • otra,
Ballir las tripas . a . alguno>
Rebaxir alguna cantidad , de
• otray
Becavfir algo . de, con •
algiinoy
Baea6r • en • la eofer-
medddy
Beealcdrse • en • lodicho,
lUeat^rse • de . alguno,
Recetar medicina • i • para
algiinoy
Recibir . i • cuenta,
Recibiralgo • de • algdno,
Recibir • i . alguno . en .
casa,
Recibirse . de . abogado,
Recio • de • complexidny
Reclin&rse • en • sobre .
algo,
Reduir • i . algtitio • en •
algiloa parte,
Recobrdrse . de . la enfer-
medddy
Recog^rse • 6 • casa,
Recomend^r algo . 4
algdnoy
Recompens&r aggr&vios • .
con • benefioios,
Recoocehtrar algiina^ pasioa .
en • el pec^o,
Reconcilidrsa • con • los
eneraigoty
Reconvenir • 4 . algtino •
ocin 4 de • sobre « algiina,
cosa,
Recost&ife • en • laulla,
Recudir » & • elgdoo • con .
el suildoy
Red^ciralgo . 4 • lamiiM,
Eedonde4r<e • de • deddasi
Redund4r . en . benefick),
Reoiplaz4r • & , algiino • en
• 6u empl^Q,
to he^ very hungry.
to long for any thing*
to rasp one thing from another m
to importune any one.
to abate one sum from another*
to obtain any thing fr&m an"
other,
to rdapse into sickness.
to be firm in mhathas been said.
to be cautious qf any one.
to prescribe a medicine for any
one.
to receive on account,
to re^ve any thing from any
one.
to receive any one at home.
to be admitted as a counsellor,
of a strofig constHutionm
to lean upon any thing.
to shut any one up in anyplace.
to recover oneself from sickness.
to go home.
to recommend any thing to any
one.
to recompence varongs mih bene*
JUs.
to center a passion in the breast.
id be reconciled tioith the enemies.
to retort any one voith any
thmg.
to recline on the seat,
to pay any one his wages.
to reduce any thing to the hmlfi
• to pay the debts.
to conduce to the benefit.
to repUifie any one in his ef^phy'
ment.
Government of Prepositions.
S9
Referirse . & . algtana cosa^
Refocildrse .. con . algo,
Refugidrse . 'en . algiin pu-
Regldree . £ • lo justo,
Regode^rse . con . en al-
guna cosa,
Retrse . de . otro^
Remirdrse . en . algpioa cosa,
Rendirse . d . la lazdn^
Reneg^r • de • la religion,
Repartir algo • 4 . entre •
muchosy
Representdrse algiina cosa, •
a> en . la imaginacion,
Resbaldrse • de • his manos,
Reseotine . xle • algo^
Residir • de • asiento . en .
' alg^na parte,
Resolv6rse . 4 . alguna cosa,
Respond^r • 4 . la pregdnta,
Restdr una cantiddd . de •
otra,
Restituirse . 4 . su p4tria,
Result4r uno . de . otro,
Ret]T4r8e • 4 . de • alguna
parte,
Retra^rse . 4 • algdna parte,
Retroceder • &y liacia • Cal
parte,
Reyent4r . de . risa,
Reyent4r • por • hablaf,
Rerestirse . de . autoridad,
Revolc4r8e . e1^ . losTicios,
Revolver • 4, contra • h4cia,
aobre . el enemigo,
Reb4r algo .4 . id^no,
Rod4r el carro . por • ti^rra,
Rode4r • 4 • aigiinoportodas
partes,
Rogar algiina cosa • 4 « al-
Bmnp6r • por • aigdna
parte.
Romper • con • algiino,
fiozane . en • la conver-
saci6n,
Roz4rse una cosa • oob
otrdi
to refer oneself to any ihing,
to be refresh^ voith any thing,
to take Tffuge in any place.
to he right.
to delight oneself in any thing.
to make a jest cf another.
to examine oneself in any thing.
to yield to reason.
to apostatize Jrom religion.
to share any thing among many.
to represent any thing to on^s
own imagination.
to slip atvayjrom the hands,
to resent any thing,
to be settled in any place.
to resoboe upon any thing.
to answer the question.
to subtract one sumjrom another^
to return to one^s country,
one thing to result from another,
to retire onese^tOf or from any
place,
to take refug€ anywhere,
to recede towards such a place.
to hurst into laughter.
to hurst with qmking.
to be invested with authority,
to wallow in vice.
P> return to the enemy.
ia rah any Jhing from any one.
4o drive a cart.
to encompass any one on all
sides,
to ask any thing of any one.
to break in any place.
to^reak qff'with any one.
to stammer in conversation.
io nib one thing saUh anotlur*
30
A New Spanish Grammar.
S.
Sab^r .
Sacdr algo
a
pan,
de • a]g{ina
parte,
Sac&r algo • ^, de . la plaza,
Sacrificdr algo d, per
DioSy
Sacrific4rse . por . algdno,
Salir • 4 . alg^na parte,
Salir . de . alg^n peligro,
Salir • con . la preten8i6n,
Salter . de . el su^lo,
Saltdr • a, en . ti6rra^
Salvdr . 4 . algiino . de . el
peligro,
Sandr . de .la en-
fermeddd,
Satisfac^r . por . la injiiria,
Satisfac^rse • de • la deiida,
Segregdr k algtino . de . aU
g{ina parte,
Seguirse una cosa . de . otra,
Semejir ui\a cosa • d . otra,
Sentarse . en . d . la mesa,
Sentencidr . d . gal6ras,
Sentirse • de . algo,
Separdr una cosa . de • otra,
Ser • & . gusto . de . para •
otro,
Servir . de . mayordomo,
Servir • en . pal4cio,
Servirse . de • algiino,
Sincerirse • de • algo,
Sibeularizdrse • en • algo,
Sisar • de . la compra,
Sitiddo . de • enemigos,
Situdrse . en • alguna parte,
Sobrellevdr los trabdjos . con
• paciencia,
Sobrepujdr 4 algiino ^ en ..
la ci^ncia,
Sobresalir . en • lucimi-
6nto,
Sobresalir • entre • todos.
to taste like bread,
to take any thing from an^
place*
to take any thing tOj orjrom the
fortressm
to sacrifice any thing to^ or for
God.
to sacrifice oneself for any one.
to go out to anyplace,
to escape Jrotn any danger,
to obtain one*,s aim.
to leap from the ground,
to leap on the ground,
to save any one from danger,
to rec&oerfrom sickness.
to make satisfaction for an in*
jury,
to be satisfied for the debt,
to separate any one from any
side,
one thing to foUwo from an^
other,
to liken one thing to another,
to sit down to table,
to condemn to the galleys,
to be sensible of any thing,
to separate one thing from an-
other,
any thing to be of another's
pleasure,
to serve as a stexoard.
to be a servant in a palace,
to make use of any one.
to clear oneselffrom something,
to be singular in any thing,
to lessen the purchase,
besieged by enemies,
to station oneself in anyplace,
to undergo labours xjusth pa*
tience.
to surpass any one in learning.
to excel in splendour.
to excel amongst all.
GOTBINMENT OF PrBPOSITIONS.
31
Sobresaltdrse . de . algo,
Sojuzgado . de . enemigos,
Somet^rse .4 • alguno,
Sondr algiina cosa .en. tal
parte,
Sordo . k • las voces,
Sorprehender . d • algiino •
con . algiina cosa,
8orprehendido . de . la
bulla,
Sospech&r algiino . de algo,
Sospecboso • 4 • algnoo,
Sabdividir . . en • partes^
Subrogdr una cosa . en • lu-
gar . deotra,
Subir . de, sobre • 4 . algii-
na parte,
Subsistir • en . el dicta-
men,
Substituir en . el . empire,
Substitdir . por . algiino,
Substrah^rse . de • la obe-
di^ncia,
Suced^r, 4 algiino . en . el
empl^o,
Sufirir los trab4jos . con .
paci^ncia,
Sugeriralgo • 4 • algiino,
Sujet4r8e . 4 . algiino, 6 .
4 • algiinacosa,
Sumergir algiina cosa . en .1
algiina parte, >
Sumirse . en . aleiina parte, )
Sumiso . 4 • layolunt4d •
de . otro,
Supedit4do . de . los con-
■ tr4rio8,
Superior • 4 . los enemigos,
Superior . en . luces,
- Suplicdr . de .la sent^ncia,
Suplir . por • algiino,
.8uplic4r . por • algiino,
Surgir la nave .en . el*
pu6rto,
Surtir . . deviveres,
Susp^so . en • el 4yre,
Su8pir4r . por • el ni4ndo,
•.SusteQt4r«e . de • esper4ozaS;
to be started at any thing.
subdued by enemies,
to submit to any one,
to report any thing in such a
place,
deaf to the cries*
to surprise any one %oith any
thing,
surprised by the noise*
to suspect any one of any thing,
susp^ted by any one.
to subdixfiae itio parts,
to substitute one thing instead
of another,
to go up tOy Jronif upon any
place,
to bejirm in an opinion.
to stdtstitute any one in an em^
ployntenf.
to substitute for any one.
to mthdraw oneseff'Jrom suborn
^ dination.
to succeed any one in the em-
pHoyment*
to suffer troubles vnth patience.
to suggest any thing to any one*
to sw^ect onesdf to any one,
or any thing.^
to sink any thing in anyplace.
submissi'oe to another's toillm
suppressed by the enemies,
superior to the enemies.
Of a greater talent.
to petition against the sentence.
to supply for any one.
to entreat for any one.
to come to anchor in any port.
. to supply toith victuals,
iuspenckd in the air.
to.aspire after command
to sustain oneself "with hopes *
32
A New Spanish Grammar.
T.
Tach4r • 4 . a]g4Do . de •
ligero,
Tembldr . de . frio,
Temido • de . muchos,
Temeroso . de . la niuerte,
Teroible . 4 • los contrdrioA,
Templdrse . en . com6r,
Tener . k . uno . por . otro,
Ten^rse . en . pi6,
TeSiir . de • azul,
Tir4r . & . hacia • por • tal
parte,
Tirit4r • de • frio,
Tiudie^r . en . alguna cosa,
Tocdr . 4 . en . algiina
cosa,
Toc4do . de . loco,
ToBi4rslgo . en . con .
las man 08,
ToiB4r algo • de . tal modo,
Tor^lo • de . co^rpo,
Toni4r • de, 4, por . al-
giina parte,
Trabaj4r . en . aigfina cosa,
Traliaj4r . por • alguna cosa,
Trab& una cota . con .
otra,
Trab4rse • de • pal4bra8,
Trabmcine • en • las|>al4-
bras,
Trah^ idgo • de,'4 • alg4oa
parte,
Trans&rir algo , 4 . otro
tiempo,
TransfeiSr algo « en • alguna
perfiMSna,
Trantfigtuirse * en . otra
coaa,
Tran8fonn4r sigdnfL cosa . en
• otra,
Transit4r • por • algiina
Tran8pir4r . por • todas
pavtof,
Tranqporl^ a]g<iiia eota . 4,
de . algiina parte.
to accuse any one of levUi/mr
to tremble mth cold,
Jeared by many,
fearful of death*
dreadful to his enemies,
to be temperate in eating*
to take one for another,
to keep oneself on foot*
to dye in blue,
to drau) on such a sidSi
to shiver mth cold,
to fjoaver in any thing.
to touch upon any thing*
touched mth madness,
to take any thing in or mth the
hands*
io take any thing in such a
manner*
deformed in body*
to turn from^ to; by ^ch a
' side*
to toork in any thing,
to contend for any thing*
to join one thing mth another,.
to guarrd mth any one<,
to mistake one*s "words,
to draw any thing Jrom or to
any place*
to tranrfer any thing to anetker
ttme*
to transfer cny thing to mtyf
person*
to transform oneself into «n-
other thing*
to frantform one thing into
afwihfr-
#0 pass by any place,
"h transpire on every side*
to transport smy Mng to, or
jrom anyi^ace*
Government of Prepositions.
Si
I'raspafiido \ de . dolor,
Traspasir alguna cosa . a .
otro,
I'ransplantdr de una parte
en, ^ . otra,
Tratar . con . alguno,
Tratir . de . alguna cosa,
Trat^ . en . coraercios.
Travese^r . con . algiino .
en . algtina parte.
Triunfar . de • los ene»
mlgosy
Trocdr una cosa . con, por
otra,
Tropez^r . en . alguna cosa,
U.
Ultimo . de entre . todos,
Uncir los bueyes . a . el
carro,
Uniformdr una cosa . a, con
• otra,
Unlr una cosa . 4 . con . otra,
Unirse . en . entre . si,
Uno • de, entre . muchos,
Usar* . de . lasarmas,
U'til . para, a . tal cosa,
Utilizdrse . en . con . al-
guna eosa,
V.
Vacar , 4 . lostra^djos,
Yacidrse . por . de . alguna
cosa,
VaciI4r . .en . la conversacion,
Yacio . de • entendimiento,
Yagar . por . el mundo,
Yalerse . de • algtino,
Yaludr algo . en, 4 . tal,
pr^cio,
^anagloridrse . de algfina
cosa,
Yecino . al, del . paldcio,
Yel4r . sobre . algiina cosa,
Yenc6rse • 4 • alg6na cosa,
YencSdo . de . los contraries,
Yenderse . por . amlgo,
Yeng4rse . de alg6no.
transfixed toitk grief,
to transfer something to an"'
other-
to transplant jrom one place to
another,
to treat tmth any one.
ta treat of any thing,
to he in trade.
to behave improperly towards
any one in anyplace,
to triumph over the enemy.
to change one thing for an-
other^
to stumble on any thing.
the last of all.
to yoke oxen to the cart*
to make one thing uniform to
another,
to unite one thing mth another^
to be united together,
one amongst many,
to make use of arms,
useful for such a thing.
to make advantage of any thing.-
to cease Jrom wrk,
to be emptiedfoom any thing.
to VMnder in conversation^
addlc'headed.
to toander through the fjoorld.
to make use of any one.
to value any thing at such d
price,
to be pfuffed up with pride for
any thing.-
near the palace,
to watch over any thing,
to conquer onesetfin anything,
conquered by the enemy,
tojiignjriendship.
to rev^gc oneself on any one*
34
M l^w Si^AifiSti GHAMlfAir.
jUTenir • 6, de • por . aigiina
parte,
V^nlr • en • lo que otro
prop6he9
Venir . con . algiino,
Verse . ccm, • almno,
V^ise • en . mt&ra>
Vestir . & . la moda>
Vestftifie • de . seda,
Vigilar . sobre . los siibditos,
Violentdrse . en, 4 . algfina
cosa,
a, para
con
de .
en
TIdible
Vivir
Vivir
Vivir
Vivir
. todosy
algdno,
su oflcio;
tal parte,
sobre • la haz • de •
latierra,
Volfir • al . ci^o,
Volar . por . el ayre,
Volv6r . de, por, ^ . tal
parte,
Vdlvi&r . por . laverd&d,
Vot4r . en . elp!6yto,
Votdr • por . algunoi
ZabullSrse
2.
en . el agua,
Zafi^rse . de . alguno, o de
aigiina cosa,
Zambucirse . en r aigiina
parte,
Zampu^iflrse . en . el wa^
Zapate&rse . con • alguno,
Zozobr&r . en • la tonnenta,
to vorfie into another's proposals*
to cOine with another.
to be with any one.
to be in such a latitude or high
to drtss injashimi.
to be dothtd in silk,
to watch over the sv^ects.
to he violent in any thing,
visible to aU.
to live with any one,
to live by one's employment.
to live in such a ptace.
to live without cares.
tofiy to heaven,
tofiy in the air.
to return Jrom, by, to met «
place,
to uicfend, the truth,
to vote in the trid.
to wtejbr any onei
to plunge into the water.
to avow any one or any thing,
to hide oneself in any place.
to dice into the water.
to make a noise with any one.
ffo ie sunk in the storm.
[ 35 ]
ite
— U-JL
ttsmseammm
■■M
A VOCABULARY,
CcmtaiDiDg such Words as most frequently occur in
common Use^ and are therefore to be known first by
Beginners.
The parts of the human |
body. — Las partes del
cn6rpo hum^no.
LA cab6za, head,
Coronilla, crtmn of the. head,
mould qf^e head.
ybrehetM*
MoH6ra,
Frente,
Law^nesy
La or^ja,
Tenfilla,
C6j8,
Guinea del o]o,
ISA lagrim4l|
BiancOy
del ojq,
Cd^roy
Cogdte,
Hu^co de
la or^ja.
Timpano
del oidoy
Los parpad OS,
Las pestafias,
La nina del ojoy
tela del ojo,
inexlllay
boca,
eiizia»
l^euB>
nariZy
piinta,
de la nmiEi
Las vent^nas
de la uariZi
Los oafios
iielanarizy
}
tenpies.
ear.
gristle,
effe^roffo.
comer of
the eye.
ithiUof
ike eye.
brain,
behind neck,
hollow of
the ear.
drum of
the ear.
eye-lids,
eye^lashes.
eye'baU. '
JUm of the eye.
cheek,
mouth,
gum.
tongue.
joose.
fop of
■the nose.
dientesy
colmilloSy
Las mo^Iasy
£1 nervio
6ptico,
l&bioy
paladdr.
La quixdda;
cenrizy
}
nostrUs.
^ <lf
the nose. :|
# Q
Buca,
• carglmta.
Darriga^
mano,
mufi^ca,
palmade
la man0|
barba.
Las barbasy
costiUas,
Inglesy
juntd8>
de los dedoSy
Los dedos>
Dedos de los pies,
£1 gaznate,
senoy
pechoy
e8t6mago,
Pelo,
El Velio,
Cii^Uo, .
brazoy
codo,
8ob£co,
ombligOy
2
teHk.
eye-teeth.
grinders*
the optic
nerve.
Up.
palf*e.
jaw.
hinder part of the
neck.
nape of the neck.
throat.
belly.
hand.
wrist.
palm of
the hand.
chin:
beard.
ribs.
groins.
joints of
fingers.
fingers*
toes.
bosom.
breast.
stomach.
hair.
down.
net^m
arm.
e(4)Ow»
arm'pit.
bachhone.
navel.
56
A Nfw SPANISH Grammab.
La yema del
dedoy
una,
nalga,
rodlUa,
piema,
pantorilla,
espiniUa,
plaDta,
del pi6f
gargdnta
del pie,
piel,
£i pulgdr,
dedo indice,
dedo del
corazofi,
dedo anuldr,
dedo lueHique,
or auricular,
muslOf
jarrete,
tovilio,
pie,«
talon,
l.as espaldas,
Los honibroSf
ladoau
brawn of
thefinger.
nail,
buttock.
knee,
leg,
calf of the kg,
shin-bone,
sole of
thefoot.
> instep,
skin,
tkumb.
fore-finger.
middle
finger.
fourth-finger.
little
finger,
thigh,
ham,
ancle,
foot.*
heel.
back.
shoulders.
sides.
skulLr
}
— ■■<
2'he interior parts of the
* human body. — Partes in-
teri&res del cu^rpo hu-
inano.
}
muscle.
£1 mur^ciilo
uiiisculo,
nervio, nerve,
tendon, tendon, sinew.
La grasa, or gord(ira, fat,
membrdna,
vena,
anuria,
ternllla,
El hueso,
meollo.
La med61a,
£1 tu6tauOy
membrane.
vein.
artery.
gristle.
bone.
5
manrow.
£1 cascoy 7
La calavera, \
Las espinillas, sMn- bones^
La espaldilla, shoulder-bone.
canilla del brazo, arm-bone.
£1 hueso sacrOy or
la rabadHla,
}
£i esqnel^to,
coraz6n,
Los b6fesy
pulmones,
lividnos,
Elhigado
bazo,
Los riilones,
sesosy
£1 est6inagOy
La hoca del
est6mago,
Los lomos.
Las tripas,
Los intestinos,
L4 madre, la matriz, 7
£1 uiero, J
La vexiga,
sangre,
c6kray
. fl6ma,
£1 quilo,
La leche,
ssdiva.
rump'
bone.
skeleton.
heart.
lungs.
liver,
spleen.
kidneys^
brains,
stomachy
pit of
the stomach,
loinSm
guts.
intestines.
wombm
bladder.
blood*
choler.
phlegm.
chyle.
milk,
spittle.
The five senses, — Los cinco
sentidos.
La vista,
£1 oldb,
olfdto,
gusto,
tacto,
sight.
hearings
smell,
taste.
feeling.
Ages. — Edades*
La nitiez,
infancia,
puericia,
childhood,
infancy.
boyishness.
Part IV.
VOCABULABY.
37
XA:.ado1e8cencia,
javeiit6d>
vinlidadf
seoecliidy 1
vcjez,
adokiceney,
youth.
manhood.
old age.
Qualities of the hodjf.
Calidades del cu^rpo.
laaaliid,
fuerzsu
debiliddd,
hermosCira,
feald&d,
£1 garbOy
brio,
rico talle.
hsfith.
strength,
weakness,
beauty.
ugUness.
good presence.
sprightUness.
fine stature.
Defects in the human body*
— Defectos del cu^rpo
humano.
La fealddd,
Las arr^gasy
pecas,
. Ugafias,
Xa verruga,
£1 lunar*
La nolle en
elojoy
.Las cosquiUaSy
•La catarata,
ceguedad, or
xegu6ra,
magcfiray
El ci6go,
. tu^rto,
..coxo,
Jm cox6z,
£1 )iartani6dOy
.La €orc6va,
jBlcalvo,
romoy
estropeado;
tuUSdOy lame
drformity,
wrinkUs. -
Jreckles.
.blear eyes. .
,wart.
mole.
M pearl in
the eye.
HckHngs.
cataracts.
blindness.
leanness.
bknd.
one^yed.
lamei
lameness.
stammerer.
ctpokedness,
bald.
Jlat'nosed,
crippled.
of the limbs.
left-handed.
£1 bizcoy bis^»io, sqninting.
nianco, lame ofohehand*
mudpy dumb,
sordQy deaf.
Virtues and vices, good and
bad qualities of t?ien.-r-
Virtudes y vicios, buenas
y malas calidades de los
>I]ombres.
£1 recatado^ cautious,, modesim
di68tro,
d6c]l,
galdq,
simply,
ag^do,
▼ivo,
sutll,
chocarrero,
n^o,
asltito,
16co,
malicidso,
. temerdsO)
, espaotadizo,
valiente,
tonto,
fantdsticoy
embust^roy
gros6rOy
reboltoso,
bien cri^do,
cort^y
grave,
pmdente,
desvergonzado,
fogdso^ .
impertinente,
importCmo,
lig^ro,
Descuidado,
temerarIo>
. afible»
amigahle,
dextrous.
docile.
gallant.
dkarp.
^rightUf.
sublJe.
buffoon,
foolish.
crafty.
mad.
maltcious.
fearful.
easy to be
frightened.
brave.
stupid.
fantastical.
deceitful.
cloumsh.
mutinows.
well bred.
courteous.
grtMs.
discrete,
impudent.
impertinent.
troublesome.
light.
careless.
'" rash.
fjffdkie.
> friendly.
^'^ \jk
SB
A New Spanish Grammar.
EI hUtHTto,
EI trampdso,
chtM.
caritafifo^
chariMk'
inc«8tu6sOy
intet/iXUhtSd
casto,
thoHe.
ladrdo, .
thief.
constante.
ccustotit*
rat^ro.
pickpocket.
de^6io.
devout*
mentirdso.
fyar.
diligente.
diligent^
perjuro.
penurer.
perfidious.
m\,
fMhJul
perfido,
generdsoy
genenms.
pioftno,
pr^&tse.
bvHiildey
humble.
rebeide^
rebel.
misericordifisot
merciful.
sacrflego.
sacrilegious.
paciente,
patient.
traid6r, '
ifaitof'.
religi6so,'
religious.
malvadoy
perfidi&ks.
amhiri/ifttt-
mnbitioue.
emtoiue.
ptaud»
■ •• 1 <
anuri^olOy )
. iobetbio.
Qf eating and
Del corner
drinking. —
y beb^r.
hy|i6crila,
hyfoerite.
La cioikl^.
dinner.
jcobturde.
OOmUTm.
c^iwr, '
supper.
bdlgae^f^
idk.
£1 alinuerzo»
breakfast.
. Aldfo,
haughty.
La meri^nda.
luncheon^
cfai8hi6sOy
tale-bem^.
€olaci6iiy
eoHation.
•dulad6r,
flatterer.
£1 banqu^te.
tnterttdnment.
dealedi
fftelM.
combidddoi
gnest.
treaehere^.
combite,
feast.
delf^iradecido,
ungreiefml.
La haiiibre,
hunger. .
kbuni^o^
inhumane.
86d,
thirst.
intolent^
inaoient.
£1 borrachoy
drunkard.
liixUndsO)
lewd.
boen bebed6r, ^
good drinker.
porfladoy
. positive . .
butn appetito
I goodap^
, i petitK
fteTC86so,
sUthful.
Laft buenas ganas
pr6digo,
ptod^. .
£1 gkyt6D,
^mten.
VhtUi,
•AM.
p^n,
bread.
. iDi^ri^o, ^'vm if<^ women.
p^ bls^nco.
Ufhiie brmi.
. atrevido,
iM.
pi^n oaodial.
the whitek
coKrico^
pauionate. '
•
htimd.
.iabii6eo».
oiUraJifetnfs.
pkn biio.
brw»n bfUd.
.riagrCy
merrjf.
lUolkBte,
h^tiM.
.wii^^o.
arr&gamt.
p^ii fresco.
.indetftoy
uhrcMwte.
p^ii<totodo
whenCen
. 'SEaaMc^ ^ •
Jeiahms,
amfkrer.
• ^\ trfgo,
ht^idd.
adfiiterOf
- p^decent^no,
ryoWdhi.
rufi&ii,
• h^fUtn,
pibi de debdda.
iorkyVttkt.
matador.
murderer.
pAnd^a^na,
cuteh bteiii.
aaUead6r,
highwayman.
' p4ti de mijo.
millet b¥tiii.
julrad6r»
gwearek'.
pte die tuaiz,
•
Indian nrn
ita|uinoiddor»
tlanderet.
". ... '^
lMiinuirad6r,
cenkurer.
aarf^sftr.
p4ii de IdvaiMm
hreud*
Part IV.
VoCABVLAKY.
99
Is Wg6jtL de pdn,
Usenet,
cruwfb
daiusrh
tofta, take or Gi^^
rosea, frread made like a roll.
}
£t baflu6!o.
La «mpa9^d9»
ektne,
£1 cozf do,
•iMo,
««tOfl^dOy
JU carne frita,
carbondda,
pepiloria,
SlpicadiUoy
Lacecloa,
^pcmil,
jamftDi
c^fpneroy
lATaca,
£4^rdiro,
tero^ra,
£1 puerco,
cahritOy
Ia pi^raa de
£ji brazuelo de
caioierp,
lomo^
pedio,
l4M wanos de
^am^ro,
Lam^dade
tacnera,
a«adura»
aaldiicjl^a,
£l«ab;bich6iif
ta norcilla^
Uwganiza,
£1 pastel,
cddp,
Xa 3opa,
£1 pat^ge,
l^ papas,
Lm puches,
Slp^lOy
La came fiambre, cold airol.
}
■ ^fritter,
tftrt Okfjo^^
boiled meat.
roasted tneat*
stetofd meain
fried meat,
broiled meaU
giblets,
hash,
hung meat.
ham,
muttim*
beef.
lamb,
veal.
pork,
kid.
bacon^
mutton.
should^'
of mutton.
hin.
bre^i.
sheep's
trotters*
veal.
theplueh.
sausage.
bigsausage,
blood pudding.
Umgmmgen
fost^.
broth.
S0ap.
pottage*
any wtQj
jtUy'broiMk
lecbe,
nata»
Elsu^ro, '
La BiaiU^ca,
qu^so fresco,
reques6n,
cuajo,
La cusyada,
El hu^VQ,
La yema de
^uevo,
clara de hu^ve,
mUk.
cream>
whey.
buttern
cheese*
newcheeu.
curds^
rennet.
milk hardened
with rennet.
the egg.
theyfiUciff
amegf.
thewtfu
^ am egg.
eoft egg.
hard egg.
new egg'
ef^inthe
ihetL
El hu^vo blando,
huevo duro,
huevo fresco,
hu^TO en c&cara,
Si
hu^vo cQcido, boiled egg.
hu6vo as^do, roasted egg.
huevQ estrellddo, fried egg.
huevo hu^ro, adtUe egg.
bu^vo empoi- agg tvUh
l&do, a chkkn mi U.
haevos de the epaum
pescado, vfish>
huSvQ9 yolks of eggs stewed
mezidos, tcrtM wine and
couaps
and eggs.
butter^
egge.
omelet.
yolk§
in0
eugoT'
sweet effs
ep»n OHt.
seasoning,
brine.
P^er.
gtnger.
cloves.
bu^vos y tor-
rezoc^
bu^v98 re-
tortiUa oe bu^e
huhoe de
ialtriqu^ra,
Im bu^yos
bijliidoff,
EI mooaoiiento,
Ina sabiiQ^ra,
t^i^ «9p^Gias,
14 pimienta,
£1 ([epgibre,
Xm clavilloi,
40
A New Spanish Grammar.
La can^la,
na6z inoscdda,
flor de especie,
mQst42a,
£i a^p^,
vin^re,
azelte,
La saly
El az6car,
Los escabeches,
dulces,
almib&reS;
ainiibar,
confutes,
Las conservas,
mermel&da,
perdda«
alcorcillasy
pastillas,
naraDJdda,
}
cinnamon.
nutmeg,
mace,
piustard.
verjuice:
vinegar,
oil
salt,
sugar.
pickles
sweetmeats,
conserves.
sugar boiltd,
comfits
conserves,
marmalade,
pears preserved.
aniseed sur
candid
£1 tuiT6ny
barqutllos 6 sup-
plicacipnes,
bufiaelos,
La bebida^
ElviDO,
TWO puro,
vino Vuelto^
vino nioscatel,
vino tintOy
vino bianco,
. vinp al6que,
vino clar^te,
vinodulce 1 C
y picaute, J l
vino a&ejoy
vino lig^rOy
vin^^Bo,
malvasla,
agua pi§;
oranges.
sweetmeat,
sweet
Vaafers,
fvffs.
drink,
wine,
pure wine,
pricked wine,
muscadine
wine.
red wine,
white wine.
pale wine,
claret wine.
sweet and
sharp wine.
old wine.
a light wine.
a strong wine.
wMmsey.
nature of must
and wattr.
La h^z del \inOp ' wine lees.
l£i ajgiiardiente, brandy.
La'Oerveza, tecr.
sidVdv : fiyder.
a]6Ja, . mead, meth^lin.
El chocolate.
chocolaU^
t6,
teas
La iimon^da.
lemonade.
mist^ta,
anise brandy.
Eicai)^,
coffee.
Of Clothes, — De los ves-
tidos.
Paiio,
cloth.
Pa5o fino,
fine cloth.
Patio tundidp.
shorn cloth.
Grana, \
Escarlata, j
scarlet.
Raxa,
rash cloth.
Say^,
st^ckcloth.
Friza,
/rise.
£stame5a,
serge.
E8t6fa,
st^gf^.
Tafet^n,
teffety.
Raso; raso liso,
satin.
Tercio pelo,
velvet.
Damasco,
damask.
Broc4do,
brocade.
Gorgoi^n,
grogran.
Gasa,
gauze.
Lanillas,
drugget.
Cend^]^
crape.
Camel6te,
camblet.
Tela de oro.
cloth of gold.
Tripe,
shag.
Algod6p,
cotton.
Fusion,
fustian.
Muselfna,
musUn^
Lino,
fiax.
Lienzo.
linen*
Cambray,
eambrick.
Olanda^
holland.
Rudn,
French linen.
C^fSamOy
hemp*
Terlfz,
iickek.
Calicu,
calico.
Fi61tro,
feH^
Ang^o,
01ona» ^
cakvas.
sailcloth.
Bay^ta,
bays.
Lana,
p;oof.
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
41
EsUmbre,
S6da,
BocaOy
JoySy
HeblUa,
Alam^res*
Ojil.
Bordad^ra,
Bot6n»
Franja,
Flaeque^
Puntas, 7
Eocaxes, 3
Cinta,
List6o,
Pasamdno,
Kibete,
Sombrero,
Cppa del
sombrero,
Ala 6 falda.del
sombrero,
Torz^ 6 tren-
zilla,
Plttooage,
Boo^e,
worsted.
siik,
buckram.
mjeweL
a buckle.
loops on coats.
a button-hole.
embroidery.
a button.
Ugas,
Zap^toSy
Escacploes,
Chinelasy
Borceguiy
Botas«
PoMinaSy
KspuelaSy
garters.
shoes.
socks.
sKfpers.
a bsukinm
hoots.
spatterdaskes.
spurs.
Pu&08» 1
laces.
a ribbon.
a broad ribbon.
gold or nher lace.
an edging.
a hat.
the crown
of the hat.
the brim
of the hat.
the hat'
band.
feath^s.
a cap.
Gorro de nocbe^ a night-cap.
Gorra, an oldfashicmed cap.
^peniza, a sort of eeq^.
Mootera, a hunting cap.
Camlsa, a shirt.
Almilla, Chupa, a waistcoat.
CalzoDcillos»
Jub^n,
Manga,
Manga perdida.
drawers,
a doublet.
a sleeve.
a hanging
were.
FaldiiUas de jub6n, the skirts
of a waistcoat, &c
breeches.
Calz6nes,
Bal6na,
Corbatin, '
Cuello,
Col^o,
Aguj^la,
Fallfiquera,
Bolsillo,
Mediasy
a band.
a neckcloth,
a collar.
a buff^coat.
a point.
a pocket,
apursfi.
stockings. ;
Tabali,
Tiros,
Esp^da,
Daga,
Capa,
Casdca,
Goante,
Cefiidor
Pelfica,
Peluquio,
P^nu6]o,
la, 1
f6D, V
Ropa,
Rop6i
Bala,
Ropade
Jevant^r,
Pellico,
Zam&rra,
}
a shouUer-belt,
ajwaist'belt.
a sword.
a dagger.
a clolu.
a coat.
aglooe.
a girdle.
a round wig.
a bag wig.
a pocket kand-
kerchief.
a gown.
a mom^
inggown.
a shepherd's
jerkin.
For Women.— V^SL mu-.
geres.
«Io, 1
fia, S
Tocado,
C6fia,
£8c6fia,
M^tOy
Saya,
Vasquina,
Guardapies,
En^as,
Avantaly 1
Delantal, j*
Goarda s61,
Qtiita sol,
Rel6x,.
a head'dresSf a
cap.
aval.
a petticoat.
}
an upper pet"
ticoat.
an apron.
an umbrella.
a watcht
m^am
4f
A New Spanish Gaammae.
ManguitOy
Cotaia,
Camtsa,
MantiHa,
Bata/
Chapin,
ZartilloSy
Peodientes,
Oaigantikla,
BfanlUaSy
Braceletes,
tsbki.
a looking-glass*
a Utils Hx.
StOjfS'
Mfi.
ammUle.
agown.
melog.
ear-rings.
petukintS'
nscklaes.
}
hraodtts*
Calzaas,
Surt\|a% Anillos, rimgSi
PedreiiaSy precious stomes*
thread stockings^
combing cloih,
swaddling clouts.
arolitr.
phy-tking^.
acroiUs^
amwru*
PeBaleiy
Faza,
Jugu6teSy
Cuoay
Ama,
Dixesy
m^*
frmm^mmmn^-
[The beastSffowhf^fisheSffouits^ herbs, rootSj &c. that are
eatable, will be found under their respective names* — l40a
apimales, aves^ peces^ frutas, hieibas^ raices, ^c. cooies-
tibles, se hallar^D deb&xo de sua nombres reapectivo$«]
Beasts. — B^stias.
mansa, a tame beast*
B^stia fer6z> a wild beast.
CFan^do, cattle.
Qanida mayor, great cattle,
IViro, ahull.
IVrn^co 6 bez^rro, a sal/,
a heifer.
an ox,
ashetp.
an ewe.
a lamb.
a lambkin.
ICeroeraj
Bu^y,
Cani^ro,
Ov^ja,
Cord6ro,
Corderlco,
hum,
Bofrico.
Aaiio^
Buna, Boirfca,
Puerco,
Lacb6n,
Haca,
Bi&falo,
}
an ass.
asheass*
a hog.
a wOdboar.
a colL
.ahffala.
amars.
a young mare,
aherae.
a cairn
a staUieeK
a gelding.
Yegikcilla^
CaMUo,
Cametto,
Gilo,
Qaraff6o,
Gabdllo castr^o,
Gab^tk> «Bleiro, a stons'horse,
Cab^lo corredNor, a race- horse.
Cabillo de mauo, a led horse.
Cab^Uo de posta, a post-horse.
CabiUto de alquiier> a haek"
ney. horse,
CabiUlo rebelde, a resthe
horse.
Cab411o desbocddo, a hard*
mouthed horse.
Cabillo Iiiedr6s0y a starting
horse.
Cab^Uo tropezador, a stuus^
blimghjorse^
CabiUa que saciide, ajoUmg
. horse.
€ab4)]o asmdtico, a broken^
winded horu.
4SaMUo iad6mitOy a horse that
cannot bp
CftUOo bayo,
B^ Mstafio,
kiya oKAro,
Ba;o dorido,
VkAzo,
r, a ItaplMg
Hone.
a bag horu,
a Wmonhi^.
a bright bag.
a med hone.
Anzio rodUo, a d^pk grog.
' Xye Gol6r de gamtiza, tnam-
• cdow.
Altefin, a KtrtL
Aldzan tostado, a dark virrti.
Onklo, a ahiU and red tpot-
ted horae.
Bubicfia, a grtu hoftt.
Cabn, a the goat.
CabHio, a kid.
'CabtOD, B he goat.
Perro, « dog.
Pcrro de caza, a hound.
Ferra de mucatra, . a ntting'
SaboiWi a blood hound.
S5S,., } -'«"*'"<r-
Pena calUdo, a hotmd that
dtet not open well.
Pcrto boxo, tt terrier,
GlAgo, a greyhound.
LebT^I, a mrt qfJUret dogt,
remnhling grej/hounde,
common in Ireland.
■perto TeDl6r,
Perro de agua,
or lamedillo,
Perro de pBst6r,
a finder,
jt waler-
a ehepherd"!
dog.
« hon$e dog.
Perro veladdr,
Perillb de falda,
AIbdo u dogo,
Batiiudillo,
Pttro rapoR^ro,
or xatlo, ting dog Jar fo^
u.:^ hunting.
Ctbtiitt^ "l Hale dog ktpt
CoMufyo, / tfi a Aowe.
Cooejo, D rabbit.'
a lap-dog.
atnJtd^.
aminiet.
»m^ Mt-
FLART. 45
Hac^£a, a pad.
Halelo, a yovng mule.
Malo, a ho-mnk.
Mula, a the-mule.
Potra, a eoH.
PoUino, an an't eoU,
Ciervo, o ttag,
Ven^do, a deer.
Gamo, afeilom-deer.
Cadiorro de cier*o, afnm.
Hastas de ciervo, the homit^
adeer^
RaAM u [Hsddaa the track tf
de ciervo, the tteg.
CoDiatIi6ja, a teea^a.
Texon, a badger.
Gainiiza, o teildgoti,
Cabnt monies, a roewdt,
Gato de algalia, a eiod-eat
Dattm, a doe.
Ardilla, a mtirrel,
Elephaote, an iuphant,
Fuina 6 gardona, a martin.
Mono, a tnonktjf.
Gloiio, n 1^;
Arminio d AnniSo, on ermine,
Erizo, a hedge- k^.
Li^bre, a hare,
LfebreciUa, a leveret.
LiT6n, a dornunue,
R^ta, a rat,
Zorra d rap6s3, AjfM.
Rat6D, a mouu.
f opo, a moit.
Hi£cB, an J|ynui.
Leopjrdo, d leopard,
Lefin, a Ron.
Leooa, a Uoneaa.
Lconzillo, a li&a't ichth.
Lobo, a wolf.
Lobo tm'ii\, a fynx,
Oift, a bear,
OiUln, a bear'i cut-
Paadra^ . . apaUier.
BbinbceroDte, a rkiaocerot.
T«.«- ', "^^
JuTaui pd>:tco a mid
mont^, boar.
44
A New Spanish Grammak,
Naviyas u colmil- the tusks
los de javili, of a wild hoar,
Kavaj&l de the soil of a
javalif wild hoar,
Jabalioa^ a wild sow.
Creatures that creep on the
earth. — Anim^es que se
arrastran.
SerpieDte,
Seipiente alada,
Drag6n,
Aq)id,
Cul^bra,
Cocodrilloy
Ca^mdn,
Lagarlija, ^
SalamaDqu^sa, >
Lagdrto^ )
Vibora,
Yiborezrio,
a serpent.
ajlying
serpent,
a dragon.
an asp-
a snake,
a crocodile.
an alligator. I
a lizard*
Escarab^jo,
Carac6i,
Hotmiga^
Rana>
Grillo^
Revolt6n,
Pj6jo,
Li^odre,
Pu[ga,
Chiuche,
Langosta,
£scorpi6ny
Alacrdn/
Tarantula,
PolHia,
Mosca,
Abispa,
AbispoD,
\
\
a viper,
a young viper.
Amphibious creatures.'^ Aui'
ni&Ies amphibios.
Bivaro or a heaver or
ca8t6r^ castor.
Ntitria, or nutra, an otter.
Hipop6taiiio^ a river^hor^,
Tortuga, a tortoise,
Gal^pagOy a land tortoise.
Foca,^ sea-calf
i
Insects. — Saband i j as.
AraSa,
AraHuela,
Carc6ina,
Oruga;
Arador,
a spider'
a tittk spider.
a wood-worm.
a caterpillar.
a hand-jfform.
Abeja,
Moscon,
Moscada,
Zdnganoy
Aiosca de burro^
Cigarra^
Tah6n,
Lucerua or
lucierniga^
Marip6sa»
Vaquilla de dio», a lady-hird.
Zancudoy a gnat.
Eiixaniibre^ a swarm*
a toad'
a heetle.
a snail.
a pismire.
a/rog.
a cricket*
an insect that
spoils vines.
a louse*
a nii,
a,JUa,
a bug,
a locust.
a scorpion*
the tarantula.
a moth.
a fly*
a wasp.
a bee.
a great fly.
a drone.
godjfiy*
a grasshopper.
a hornet.
afire-'
a hulterfiy.
mim
Birds, — Aves»
Aguila,
Aguilucho^
Buytre,
£sni«rej6n,
Gaviiaii.
Mocbudo,
Halc6ny
Torzu61a,
Girifdhe,
Alcot^D,
S^cre,
an eagle*
an eaglet*
a vulture*
a merUn*
a sparrow-hawk.
a hom'OwL
a falcon.
a maUyakon.
a ger-falc<m.
a tanner,
dL sacr^*
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
45
uguciu,
[irio, "I
[cria, J.
[irla, 3
1
Garza,
Garz6tay
MMno,
Cu^nro, a
Corn^ja,
Caliodria,
Aguzanieve,
Canario,
Xilgu6ro,
MirlOy
Meria
Miria
Pioz6ny
Ruj Sefior,
Vefderdn,
Papag^yo,
Loro,
Col6iTa,
UrT^ca>
Grajo,
Murcielago,
ItfochuciOy
Curaaya,
Grajo,
Chota cabras,
A'oade,
Cerc^ta^
Chorlito,
Cuervo marlno,
Pato,
Ganso,
A'osar
A'osard
Cemlcaloy
Fulga,
Avion,
Gabiota,
Somorgujdn,
Choca, 1
Gallinaciega, y
Tordo,
Estomlno,
Codorniz,
Cap6n,
Gallo,
GaUiaa,
ro, 3
}
on heron^
a small htran.
akite»
crow or raven.
a rook*
a lark.
a wagtail.
a canary'hird*
a linnet*
a black'bird.
a chaffinch,
a nightingale.
a green-bird.
a parrot,
a magpie.
a daw.
an owl.
a hat,
horn opol,
a night raven.
a chough.
a goat sucker.
a wUd duck.
a teal,
a curUeu.
a cormorant.
a duck,
a goose.
a kestril.
a moor-hen,
a martin.
agull,
a diver.
a woodcock.
m
a starling.
a quail,
a capon.
acock.
a hen.
PoUo,
PoUa,
Pavo, \
Pava, I
Francbliii;
Fais^n,
Zorzdl,
Hortoldno,
Gorri6ii,
Perdiz,
PaI6ma,
Pich6D,
Palomino,
T6rtola,
Alci6oy
Golondrina,
Avestruz,
Cigiiiia,
Cudillo,
Cisne,
Pitiroxo,
GrulJa,
Pezpita,
Abuillo,
Orop^udola^
Venc^jo,
Abejar6co,
Abutarda,
TordolocOy
Pelicano>
Phenix,
Chirlo,
Pico verde,
Frailaillo,
Reyezueloj
Mergo,
a chicken,
a pullet.
a turkey.
a godwit*
a pheasant.
a thrush.
an ortolan.
a sparrow.
a partridge.
adwe.
a pigeon.
a young pigeon.
a turtle dove.
a king's fisher^
a swallow.
an ostrich.
a stork*
a cuckow.
a scoan.
a red-robin.
a crane.
a wagtails
a lapwing.
• a wUwaH
a martlet ^
a titmouse.
a bustard.
an owsd.
a pelican.
aphenh.
a woodpecker.
a green beak.
a plover.
a wren.
a puffin.
Parts
of a
de u
Pico,
Pluma,
namdza,
Ala,
Pe^olas,
Pe&ulas
:•}
Bird. — Partes
una Ave.
the beak.
ajeathmr.
the down.
a wing.
quills.
46
^ A«r Spani
iU GSAMMAtt
r».
ifcyw.
SudW.
• pikiiU
Cob
(*.i»/.
Silm6i).
lalmm.
Buchc,
(A^craw.
Tmct.,
trnO.
G«m, 1
US.!. {
Wow, er td&M.
Xlbifc
Tei«a,
nUnch.
BalMdilli,
fAeniflv.
AUu,
a tumg-Jith.
P«li6t»,
fhhw.1.
TnuaOa,
a cravip-Juh.'
Ert«P«lH.g.
U< tram.
a turbet.
Fii/ia
—Feces.
Partt of a Fish — Partes de
AbonHv
• Heal.
un
pel.
Sttaio,
S'
Btibo,
Men,
dmnntSjo,
m anthny.
mut.
• kiriel.
nMOtul.
a pit,.
• or,.
acaUmarjf.
Hocico,
E.pln»,
Conch.,
Hu^vog de pei
Leche,
Iteneitf.
«e%..
thetailei.
Ihcbma.
Ik Ml.
the hard row.
the lojt row.
l^lpiire, th
^mtkr'ithmb.
OMk muin
iwffi
' \'^
Trei,.-
-Aiboles.
Dondo,
.ji«-S«*.
Atnric^e,
•n •iH-ico^^ree.
Doradtilo.
rngM-M-
Alm^dro,
•••ta-nl.
LciifnUo,
.V*.
D>nu»,
• nn^M-iu.
LngOsU,
• Meter.
Onedo,
.cherry.
Ibturiiii.
• .(■•s™..
Cerfao,
a Aeert.cAerrw.
aom,
• ««%.".
CuliBo,
• cim«.
Hvi-V-^
.fcm»f.
cm™,
• etbwN.
Ortn, Osljoti
•.,,*r.
Membrillero,
• piW>.
I»>|>rf^
• lawfmjr.
Sefrtl,
« wnitoe.
• pramt.
PlhD^
«1»J«.
Ubo.
• »•«.
HignS»,
..yS:
S«d«
• imcterf.
Auifeifo
HnMipii,
.,H,T«i«.
Giwddo,
AWijo,
Jruhcoi.
Unto.
ItaMi.
Met]6ia,
MoiSl.
• •wOarv.
Bualho
dntdad.
Nlspero,
fmedii:
Mmv.-
amad^
Arellano,
akmlmu.
o«Wf«,
'"^^
»<f»,
<LwJma.
Mpo.
apohfpui.
2S„.,}
imalm.
lUy,
atMnt.
Aiekudie,
amUdiv,.
Lin,
• itau.
NmA)».
•tturttp.
Part IV.
VoCABtrLAllt'.
47
{
Alferdiigo,
Pcf8IK0|i
Penl,
Mantmio,
Altmo negro,
Akmo bianco,
CWro,
SabCico,
£D2ina,
Roble,
Camito,
EJimno,
Arze,
Haya,
FreimOy
Artbo,
1\exo>
Laord,
Aloorn6quey
Oliao,
Pino,
Pldntano,,
Saaze,
{
LtbruBca, *
Pam>
Mirlo, AfTa jliii.
apeack.
apbim,
B pear* I CastiUay
nil tspplt,
hlackpaplar,
white poplar.
a cedar •
an alder.
wUitme,
awallvme.
Myrflr.
curratU'tree*
an oak.
the comtf •
the cypreis.
ebony.
the maple.
ike heeeh,
the iK^.
the helm.
the yew,
laurel,
the cork.
^ebn.
pine or /ir.
Fruits. — Frutas.
AIberic6que,
Almendra,
Madrofio,
DurfzQo,
Gomda,
Cerfxa,
Castafia,
Citron,
Membrillo,
Scrva,
mui,
Higo,
Breva,
Aznfaifii,
Granada,
a plane. Liin6n,
, •^'ii^.t. Mora,
a willow.
Under.
Shmbs. — Matas.
Agno casto, agntu caetuB-
Aliso, the lote tru.
B^lMUno, the balsam.
Box, box'tree.
Madre selva, the honeysuckle.
Zarza ni6ro, the blackberry,
broom,
gooseberry-bush.
My.
butcher's broom
liquorice,
the pistachio'tree,
rosemary.
rose tree,
satin.
tamarisk-tree.
Hmiesta,
Uva eti^Da,
Adelpba,
BniBco,
Rcgaliz,
Alhocigo.
Romero,
Ros^l,
olnnna,
Tamariz,
Alfaefia,
VKa,
Ni6zpola,
AvelMna,
Nu6z,
Aaeitiina,
Naranja,
Oiru^la,
Cini^la pasa,
Pera,
Bergam6ta,
Manzdna,
Caniuesa,
Manz^na de
San Juan,
Aiel6n,
Bell6Ca,
Algarr6ba,
Alcap^rra,
Zarza mora,
Tamarindo,
an apricot.
an aimand.
a wild straw b erry.
a nectarine*
a chary •
a heart-'ckerry.
a chesnmt.
a citron.
a qumat*
wrmoe.
date.
thefirstfig.
a pomegranate*
a lemon.
a mulberry,
a medlar,
a htatl nitf •
a walnui.
an OfTiMf*
€tn orange,
aphtm.
a prune.
a pear,
a bergamd.
an' apple,
a pippin.
St. JoknS
apple.
a meum.
an Mom.
aearob,
a caper.
a blackberry.
tamarind.
PMon, thekemd of pine trees.
Uva, a grape
privet^ 1 Cascara de uatz, Sec. tlu shell
vine, \ of anuty &c«
ir
^a
Ai
A New Spanish Grammar.
Tela de granida, ^ ^Im of a
pomegranate.
FiiDp611o, the sucker^ or
sprout of a vine,
Sarmiento, a twig of a vine.
Y^ma de viTm, the bud of
a vine,
ZarcilloB de la vid, (he ten-
driis of a vine.
P^mpanoy a vine branch.
Eenuevo, a young shoot of
a vine.
Bacimo de uvas, a bunch of
grapes,
Pepita de la ova, a grape-
stone.
Pod^r, to prune a vine,
Cav^r, to Jay open the roots.
Kodrigdr, to prop a vine.
Ilodrig6D, the prop.
Terci4r kt to dig a third
▼iSa, time about a. vine.
to weed.
Raiz,
Hebras de ralz
Arraigdr,
a root.
the fibres.
of a root.
to take root.
Trouco, the trunk of a tree,
Renuevoy
Corteza del irbol,
Zumo,
Mobo,
Ramo,
Hoja,
Hueso de frfjta,
Moodadoras,
de friita,
Pez6D, .
logerir,
logerlr de
canutOy
logerto^
Pepita,
a sprig.
the bark.
thp sap.
the moss.
a branch.
aJeaf.
the stone of
fruit.
the parings
of fruit*
tie stalk,
to ingraft,
to inocu'
late.
^grqft.
the seed of fruity
Corn and its parts, — ^Trigos
y sus partes.
Trigo^ wheat.
Candialy
Trijso, rabioDy
Escandia,
Herreh,
Espelta,
Centcno,
Ceb^da,
Avena,
Arr6z,
Mijo,
Maiz,
Legumbres,
Alverj6n,
Garvanzos,
Arv^jas,
GuisaoteSi
Haba,
Lant^ja,
Altramoz,
Judia,
Cicercbas,
Cascara,
HoUejOy
the best wheats
red wheat.
bearded wheat.
meslin com^
. spelt*
rye.,
barleym
oats*
rice»
millet.
Indian wheat.
pulse.
a great vetch*
Spanish peas,
beans.
peas*
a bean.
a lentil,
a lupine,
French bean,
wild tares,
the shelh
the husk.
RootSy plants, and herhsr,-^
Rayces, plantas, y yerbas.
AX^DJO,
A'pio,
Ajo,
En^ldb,
Anls,
Alegria,
Armuelles,
Al£acb6fay
Esparrago,
Abr6taD0,
Acelga^
Bledo,
Bbitaja,
ZaDah6ria8,
Vol^za 7
Perifolio, j
Hongo, 1
Sela, J
Cbirivia;
wormwood.
celery^
garhck.
diU.
aniseed,
sesame,
orach or golden
flowers.
an artichoke.
asparagusi
southernwood,
white beet,
a bHte,
borage.
carrots,
chervil,
a mushroom,
aparmjf*
/
1
Part IV.
Cbicoria,
Eodlvia,
IBSamMtfy
Beraa crespa,
Brolon,
Colifl6r,
Calabiza,
PepinOf
Culaotro,
Catentrillo,
Perexll maridOy
Mastuerzo,
£8|^&ca,
Hinojoy
Hobl6n, •
VofcABUtAHY.
49
Lecfauga murci-
daa, 6 cerraca,
Lecbuga crespa.
iUccory^ aNMnr.
cauUJbmer.
a pumpkin.
a cucumber,,
coriander.
capillaire.
sOrtlphirr,
garden cresses.
sicatHon-
m
sptttna^e*
fenhtl.
hdps.
}
a cttbuage^
lettuce,
a curled
lettuce,
et twnip,
a turnip field*
an onion,
iorrd.
hag smret
pUfiky,
a kek,
purslain*
rampi&ns,
rocket,
rue.
Mage,
CriadiHa de tienra, a truffle,
Mejorina, sweet marjoram.
AgaricOy agarick.
Agrimoniaf agrimony.
Acibar, aloes,
ADg^lica, angelica,
Celid6niB, cehdine.
Bet6nica, betony.
Bistoita, anakewort.
Maosanilla, camomile,
CulaatriUo de pozo, maiden-
tuntm
NabliK
Cebolia,
Acetosa,
Aced^ra,
Rouiza,
Pcrexil,
Puerro,
Vcrdoliga,
Kuiponces,
Ruqu^a«
R6da»
Sieilvia,
C^^otdriBy centmy,
Verbasco, 1 wolf blade, or
Qordoiobo, j great hmg wort.
Hamapola, P^^PPJl*
Dictamo, dittan^.
Coniza 1 ^ .
palgwra, § J^^"^-
£l6b6ro» helkb6r€.
Tdrtago, spurge.
Oeo^idiia, gentian.
Camedreos 1 germmk*
• de aguy, J «/er.
6r4ma, dog's-graoe^
Hierba ptratera, houee-kek.
Belefio, htn-bane^
Marr6biOy hortkoundi
j Matricaria, ftterfem.
MalmS) maltowe.
Cor6na de rey, meliloL
ToroDgil, kahn.
Mercurial, nkrcmy,
MiJh6ias, 1 .,-, .,
CientoTnnmia, \ "^'V^^
CoraAmciliOy St, Jokn'o w&tt^
Of grassm
Nardo, epikmm*di
Tkb4co» tobaeeo.
Or^^^y wild Msmjaram.
Higo^ra, fig^ree.
Parict&ria. 7 fi-*
vidfioia, } r^ihtont.
Cepa caballo, 7 ground
. UrSa de asno, J tkietle..
, UonmdktB, P^P2/»
Rosa motAk^f f^^^V-
Pl^tano, f^antanc'
PoUpddio, polypody.
Hierba cidr^ra, briong:
PoMk>i pennwroftti,
Hii^biirb«» riuharU.
%u!igmhMet^ bhfodw&r^.
Sacriculi^ sHfktttf.
Satjrt6ii« ragwoft,
Saxifrigia, saxifirage.
Eflcabiteiy wabivus.
* D
k^ ni
50 ^
Eficamonea,
Cebolla
albarr&Qa,
Hierba cana,
Valeridna,
Verbena,
Tragoncia,
A Neto Spanish Gbammab.
seammony.
a wild
onton*
settfui.
grimndaeL
valerian.
•
vewoMH*
grasi'plantaiu^
AncOy 6 siete eu rama, upi'
foil.
Acantbo,
Branca unioa
Hierba gig&Dti
Ac6oito,
Ovas del mir,
Coladecabdllo,
Espliego,
Espigasil
Alhusima^ _
Amor del bortelano, 7 bwr-
Lamp&dos, 3 dock^
Rabacasy water^pardey*
Tarah6, 7 tamaruk
Tamaiiz sflvestrey 3 dumb.
la, J
hearsfiHA.
wolfshane.
sea-wetd*
hane^ail*
lavender^
Asatab&ca,
CalanuBto^
Cafia,
Dofiadilla,
CaSamoy
Lino,
Ciciitay
CominOy
Hi6rba de d^rro.
asarabacea.
cat-mint,
a reed.
mMefern!
hemp.
Jlax.
hemlock.
cummiUj
hart's.
fodder.
'. fern.
fumitory.
}
sffffroHm
Alazor,
Azafran,
Xabon^ra, eoaf-woriw
Alfiilfii, darml, or eockU.
Albahica 9wt€t basil
Hierbft buena, mint^
Serp61, wild thyme.
Tomillo^ thyme.
Uowers.'^TloreB.
Amar&ntOy
Aneni6na,
Jacinto,
Jasmin,
JunquiUa,
Acuc^na,
Maya,
Narciso,
Clavel, Clavellina,
Sauanumda,
Albeli,
Espada&a,
Coronida,
I Vellorfla,
Renlculo,
Rosa,
}
Hel^ho,
Palomilla,
AmQressecos, 7 ^j^^
T^o, danewort, dwarf -slder.
J6nco, rush.
Cemya, sow-thistle.
Mandr^gora, mandrake.
Terba mora, nightshade.
Correhu41a, knot-grass.
OrtSsa, nettle-
PiardUa bastard rhubarb.
Val^sa, pepperwort, dittander.
velvet^ftower.
anemone^
hyacinth.
jessamine.,
jonmiil.
a lily.
a daiM.
daffodil.
a pink.
gilUflower.
fUigfkAMT.
blue bottle.
a cowslip.
ranunculus.
a rose.
Cien hojds, a large sort of rose,
Taravilla, marigold.
Gira861, sun-flower.
Tulipan, a tuVp.
Volljta, a violet.
Cap6Uo, a roH bud.
—r-
Colours. — Colore's.
Mor&do,
Color de aurora.
purple*
aurora.
colour*
Blanco, white*
Col6r de ladrillo, brick colour*
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
51
As^cdflttei
Az^ tttrqul,
Columblno,
Cetrlno,
blue.
light blue.
aarkblue*
dove colour.
lemon colour.
Cd6r de gam^za, light i/eUow.
C<A6rde cereza, juamot.
Color encendido, Jlame colour.
}
Color de fuego^
Carmesi,
Fardoy
Ceniciento,
Amarillo,
Encarnddoy
Colorado,
Roxo,
Escarldta, Grana,
Leonadoy
Kegro,
Anaranjidoy
Azeitunddo,
Color de rosa,
Benn6jOy
V^rde,
Matlz de
col6re8,
Col6r de mdr,
Jire colour,
crimson.
grei/.
ask cSour.
yeUow.
red.
scarlet.
tatoney.
black.
orange colour.
olive colour.
rose colour.
reddish.
green,
the shade
colour.
sea green.
Parts of a Kingdom. —
Partes de un reyno.
PrOvlncia,
Ciudady
Vffla,
Ald6a,
Lug^r^
a province-
a city,
a town.
a village,
a smaU place.
Parts of a City. — Partes de
una ciudad.
Casa,
Ti6nda,
Iglesia, Temploi
CaplUa,
Alt&r,
Paldcio,
Hospital,
Tribunal,
Arsenal,
Acad^mia,
Co16giOy
Calle,
Call^joDy
a house,
a shop,
a church.
a chapel,
an altar,
a palace,
an hospital.
Casa de la villa, or del ayunta-
miento, the toum house,
a court of justice,
an arsenal,
an academy,
a college,
a street,
an alley.
Calleja, Calleju61a, a lane.
Merc4do» a market.
Carnicerla,
Encrucijada,
Lonja, \
Bolsa, )
Cdrcely
MuroSy 1
Murallas, >
Puertasy
a butchery,
a cross noay.
an exchange.
a prison.
loalls.
gates.
FortificacioneSy fortifications.
Plaza, a square.
Plazu^la, a little square.
Of the inhabitants of cities.
— De los moradores de
una ciudad.
Nifio,
Muchacho,
Muchacha,
Mozo^ Mozlto,
Honobre,
Mug^r,
Viejo,
Vl^ja,
Coxo,
Manco,
Ci6go,
Sordo,
Zurdo,
Magistrddoi
Noble,
Hidalgo,
Caball^ro,
Tend6ro,
Mercad^r,
Comercidnte
Negociante
* D 2
a child.
a boy.
a girl.
a youth.
a man,
a too •nan*
an old man.
an old ijoomanm
lame of the legs.
lame of the hands.
blind*
deaf
left-handed.
a magistrate.
a nobleman.
a gentleman.
a knight^ or
genUeman.
a shopkeeper.
:;•}
a merchant.
66
A New Spanish Grammar.
Vulgaohoi J
Plebe, >
Caoalla,
Comeroia&tef
Mec&DicOy
Jornal^rOy
Labrad6r,
Labrad6ra,
the mob.
the rabble*
a tradesman*
a mechanic*
ajourneyman.
ajarmer*
a former* s toi/e
or daughter.
A\6e&nOf a country^man.
Alde&nsi a country 'Uboman.
FlcarOy a rogue.
EscldvOy a sMve*
Flat^o, a goldsfnith*
Libr^roy ' a bookseller.
Impre86r9 a printer
Barfo6ro, a barber.
Mercader de sed8> amercer,
Mercad^r, a tvoolien"
de palloi draper,
Mercad6ri a linen'
de li^DZO, draper.
Sastre, a taylor.
Costur6ra> - a sempstress^
a mantua^maker.
SombrererOy a hatter.
Calcet^roy a hosier.
Zapat€ro> a shoemaker,
BemeDddiif acobler.
HaiT^FO, a blacksmith.
Albeitar, aforrier.
Canrai6ro. a smith.
Lavai;!d4r;, a laundress.
Con94dre» > 'j -^
Birt6ni, J an,*dmfe.
But^roy a man-midmfe.
M6dico» a physician.
£mbuetero» a clieat.
Charlatan, . a quack.
CirujinOy a surgeon.
Saca mu4la8| a toath'drawer.
Siii6rO| a sadler.
Carpintero^ a carpenter.
Peon, a labourer.
Albanil, a bricklayer.
PiDt6ry > a painter.
Panad^rcQ':^^ a baker.
Camicfoo^ f a butcher.
Frut^ra, afruHeiMSr^
Verdul^rai an herb^wmtam
PMtel6ro, a paUty-cook.
Tabern^rOi a vintner.
Cenrez^ro^ .a bretver.
Meson^ro^ an inn keeper.
Relox^ro, a voatchmaker.
Pregon6ro» a crier.
Joy^ro, a jeweller.
Botic&rio, an apothecary*
Buhon^rO) a pedlar.
Vidri6ro, aglassier*
Carbon#rO) a collier^
Jardineroy a gardener.
Letrddo, a lawyer.
Procurad6r, a solicitor^
att^mtey.
Abog&dOy a counsellor at law.
Jaez, a judge.
Carce16rO| a jaiusr*
Verdugo, the hangman.
Cer^roy a uiax- chandler.
Ganapdiiy ^
Esportill^ro, > a porter.
Mandad^ro, )
Reraendon de > t.j
V«8tid0S, 5 " ^''=*«^
Tatarabu^lOy a grand fother's
grandfather.'
Bisabu61o> great grandfather.
Abu^lo, a grandfather.
Padre, fofher.
Madre, mother.
Hijo, asoTu
Hija, a daughter.
Ni6to, a grandson.
Bisni^to, a great grandson.
• Henn^Oy a brother.
: Cu!iado» a brother in latu^.
Padrastro, a stepfotker.
M adrastra^ a step-mother.-
Su%rOy the husband or
mfe*sfother.
Nu^ra, the 'wife of one* s son.
: Y^mo, the husband of one's
daughter.
Primo hermano, a cousin^
Tio,
german.
an uncle*
Part IV*
Vocabulary.
6B
PrimoK^ndOi a9econdcoudn,
VIbMoj a hu^ntL
Mttgbr, a w/e.
Nmoy a bridegroom*
N^im, a bride.
DespoB&dOy one betrothed*
Ahijadoy a godson.
Padrinoy a godfather.
Madrina, a godmother.
Coiiip4dre, » ahe and she
Com^re, > gossip.
Compafiero, a partner.
*Caiiiar4da, a companion.
Melliso, a twin.
Coihide^ a brother of the
same society.
•Cofradia, a guild or society.
Tert^lia, a dtw.
Comuniddd, a community.
Hnerfanoi an orphan.
Solt^ro, a bachelor.
HorederOy an heir*
Ayo, a tutor.
Curad6ry 41 guardian.
Vidda, a Hjoidam.
HermdnOy ajbfster-
de leche, brother.
HiJD de la piedniy exposito,
o echadizo, a foundling.
Kifio supu^sto, a Jake chim.
BastardOi a bastard.
Hijo de a natural
^nanciay son.
Dona6]la| a maiden.
Mug6r a married
cas&da, tooman.
Parida, a lying'in-vooman.
Ama de lecbe, a nurse.
Ama de llavesy a house-keeper.
Manc^ba, a concubine.
Of a Housey and all that be*
longs to it. — De una casa,
y todo lo perteneciente k
el!a.
Cai8y a house,
Solkr, the ground of a house.
Cimi^ntOy
Par6d,
Tabique,
P4tio,
Fechada,
the foundation.
atoall.
a light toaU.
a court or yard.
the front.
'\.
Alto, 6 anddr, afoor.
Portal, a porch.
Vent&na, a •mndoxc*
EntT^suelo, a Umfiuor.
Zaquizaml, or cielo, the ce&*
ing ; also the place between
the ceiling and the roof of
a house, a cock-lq/i.
DeBv4n, a garret.
Artez6n, an arched ceiling.
B6yeda, a vauTt.
Escal^ra, a stair case.
Escalon, a step.
Tej^do, a tiled roof.
Tejas^^ tiles.
Ladrillos, bricks.
Pizarras, dates.
Puerto, door.
Pasadizo, a passage.
Corr4I, a court-yard^
Trascorr^l, a back yard.
C4niara, a chamber.
Aposento,
Pi^za,
Quarto,
Est&ncia,
Antic4mara, an antichamber.
Requ^ra, a back-roomm
S&la, a hall.
Corred6r, a gallery.
Retr^te, a closet.
Estudio, a study*
Armdrio, } t ^
Albacini. i a cupboard.
Guarda ropa, a wardrobe*
A4o6va, an alcove,
Balcon, Mirador, a balcony,
Azot6a, the flat roof of a house*
Camaranchon, a eock'lqft
Torre, a fewer*
Bodega, Sotano, a cellar
Repoeteria, the butlers room.
Despensa, a nantry*
Cozina, a ititehen*
Caballerlza, the staUe^
a room*
...1^
riH
54
A New Spanish Grammar.
Perreriai
Falom&r,
GallinerOy
Jardin,
Parque,
a dog-kennel.
a dove-house.
a hen-roost,
a garden.
a park.
Privdda, Necesdria, the privy.
Coronilla del the top of the
edificiOy
Bipio,
Ripia,
Ala de
tejddo,
. Candl,
Umbral,
Bastidores de
la puerta,
Postigo,
Qulcios 6 gozneS)
Cerradura,
Candddo,
Pestillo,
Cerrojo,
Llave,
Ventanilla,
Picaporte,
Tranca de
puerta,
Guardas de
la Have,
<]Uifiuto de Have,
Vidri6ra,
. Rejas de
▼entaaa,
Escal^ra de
carac6l9
Rellanos, 6
lera,
bunding.
rubbish*
a shingle.
the eves of
the house,
the gutter.
the threshold.
the frame of
the door.
by-^door.
hinges,
a lock.
a padlock.
the bolt of a lock.
a bolt,
a key.
a little luindoui),
a latch,
the bar of
a door*
the voards
of a lock,
the pipe
of a ke
the glass (n d
xoindow,
the bars of
a voindow.
a winding
stair case.
mesetas de esca-
the landing-places
of stairs,
' Descdnso de the half
escal^ra, place of stairs.
Grada, Escalon, a step*
Escal^ra secr^ta, backstairs,
Viga, abeam.
Vig6n, the girder, or
main beam.
Tabla, a board.
Cruzeroy a rafter.
Ladrillor a orick.
Par6d maestra, the main ttofi.
Par^d de en 2 .1 . „
m^dio, $ ^f'^P^^rtywia.
Pared de cal a •voall of lime
y canto, and stone^
Tabique, a thin voall.
C&l, lime, or plaster.
Argaoiasa, mortar.
£nco8trad(irai the plaster
de pared, qfa voaU.
YesOt Jine vohite lime.
Jalb^gue, ijohite washm
Mesa, a table.
Banco, a bench.
SiHa, a chair*
SlHa de brdzos, an arm chair.
Tabur^te, a chair vaithout
back or arms to it.
Sitidl, a stool without a back.
Banquillo, a bench.
Caxa, a box.
Area, Arc6n, a chest.
Cax6n, a case qf dratoers.
Tirador, a drapter.
Escritorio, a cabinet.
Catna, a bed.
Lecho, bed.
Arraaddra or made- a bed'
rdje de la cama, stead.
Ci^lo de the bed's
cama, tester.
Cortinas da bed cur-
cama, tains.
Roda pi^s, the bases of a bed.
Tap6te, Alfombra, a carpet.
Sdbanas, . sheets.
Cobertor, counterpane.
Almoh4da8, pillovos.
Tapiceria/ tapestry.
Pintura, a picture.
Esp6jo, a looking glass.
Candelero, a candlestick.
Despabiladeras, sntiffers.
Arafia, a branch of crystal,
to hold many candles.
Yesca, . tinder.
. Paju61a, a match.
Pedernil, ajlint.
Eslabon, the steel to strike
JircxMh^
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
55
Colcbsi
a chamber-pot.
a matnus.
a quih to lay on
the ground.
Citre, a couch.
•Cama de viento, afield bed.
Tester a the bed's
de cama, head,
Coluniaas the bed
de cama, posts.
Xerff6D| a slram-bed,
Estera, a mat,
CaIeDtad6r a tnarm'
decama, in^'pan,
Chimen^ay a chtmney.
Ile8pirad6ro, o cafion the
de chimen6a^ Jiinnel of a
chimney.
MoriUos> hand-irons,
FueUe, bellows,
T^dzasy • tongs,
' Pali or Badil, a shovel.
Grodrda fu^go, a fender.
•Biombo, a screen*
Urgad6r, Atizador, • a pokier
Olla, a pottage pot.
Corerl^ray thepot4id.
Asa^ ^ the ear of a pot.
Fuch^rOf a pipkin.
Cachar6ny a ladle.
Cald^ra, a kettle.
S^lt'i ackaMdM.\
Tr6vede8, a trevet.
•Hornilloy a stove.
Homo, an oven.
Sart^n, a frying pan,
Cazo, a sauce-pan.
Cazu^Ia, a little pan,
Espumad^ra, a skimmer.
ParillaSy a gridiron.
Colad^ro, a sieve.
Rallo, a grater.
Mech^ra, larding-pin,
Asador, a spit.
Azeit^ra, Alcuza, an oil pot,
Vinagera, a cruet.
AlmJT^z, Mort^rOy a mortar.
Maao de mort6rO| a pesile.
Red6nia> a vtaL
Sumidero, a
C4ntarOy o pitcher.
Ba2$D, a dose-^tool paru
Albornia, a great earthen pan*
Herrdda. } i t^ •?
Cubo, J a bucket or patl.
Cuba, a tub.
Lexla, Coliida, lye.
XaboOf soap.
Levad^ra, letmen.
Rodllla, a coursc'doth.
Estropijoi a dishdout.
Pala del thepedof
homo, iKe ofoen.
Harlna, mealfjlour.
Salv4doy bran.
Art^sa, a tray.
Mant^les, a table doth.
Servill^ta, a napkin.
Aguamanll, a toaterjug.
Aliuofla, an earthen jug.
Toalla, a totod.
Plitos, plates.
Cuchilloy a knife.
T«ned6r, afork.
*Salero, a salt-cellar.
Plato, a dish.
Escudilla, a porringer.
Cuch&ra, a spoon.
Tajador, , a chopping block.
Jarro, a mug.
Taza, a cup.
Salvilla, a salver.
Fiasco, a/task.
Botella, a bottle.
Vaso de vldrio, a glass vessel.
Fuente, gran plato,* a basin.
Monda di^Dtes, > a tooth*
Escarba di^ntes, > picker.
Mayord6mo, a stexoard.
Trincbante, a carver.
•Secretario, a secretary.
Camar^ro, a chamberlatn.
Dispensero, a purveyor.
Gapell^D, a chaplain.
Limo8n6ro, an almoner.
Page, a page.
Lacajo, ajbotman.
Coch^rb, a coachman.
Mozo de cab&UoSi a groom.
»6
A New Spanish Grammar.
CAsUerlzOf
3odeguerOy
jCppinero,
jGk»lopin,
Aqio 4p casa, $
J
a gentleman
of the horse.
acup-bearer.
j0 sewer.
a butler.
ajalconer.
a cook.
a saMion.
, a porter.
the lancUord,
Gf country affairs.--^T)e las
cosas del campo.
a country heuse^
or farm house.
ajarmer.
a catv'ieeper.
a smne^heviL
a shepherd.
a scrip.
a shepherd prook*
a sting.
Alqueira»
.Vaquero, >
Porqu6ro,
Cayida,
JBonda,
Jfardio6r6, J «^«rrf«ter,
,(;^ad6r, a </i(gg:^r.
Vj^aderOi a vine dresser.
jLtidkO^ a plough.
^zJEidOy Azadon, a spade.
Jbabradory a ploughman.
j^^.d^l aradoy a phugh share*
JBastsrillo, ^ Aarrotv.
jSenibrad6r» a sofmr.
Escardaddr, a imeeder.
.Rpzad^Tf a "vnfieding hook.
.S^ador^ a reaper.
. Guada|i^9 « a scythe.
.TriUo» a>(;.
.HoTca» jajork.
.Bi^o, umnnofmngjan.
.Pescador^ ajishp'man.
jR^ barr^dera, a drag-net.
yara, calia afiihin^
pam pescar^ 1 00.
S^edalde
lacagi^y
Ca^(ad6r,
Ceb0,
Ltga,
J4u|a,
aJishing-hiMA*
a huntsman.
.^kffi**
^&o. \ ^ dayJUibauTer.
Asoero, a keep^ ffqi^ehm
PaysdpQy a coup^f^yfiift^.
Cainpo, 4^Jiel4.
Ti^rraentr^dos surcos, ariV/^e*
Surco, .( a^Jurrmo.
.Tr%o en yerbaj green Cffrn*
il^n-a ipc|i|lla» '. kn4u^tiUe4»
ColtaS. { . «^^'^-
CeirOy ^ rising grguni,
ValJ^y i3| va/&p^
Ablsmo, a bottomless j»f.
Zanja* ^ 4f^«
Laguna» ii Zaiir, or marshy
.PantaniOy a marsh,
LlaDura, a pfain^
Pefia, Eoea, a rock,
Pe&ascOy a great rock.
Despe^adero^ a precipice,
.Selva» a forests
Bosque, a 'oiood,
Esplanfida, a^ curious plain,
Mat9» a bush,
Zarza^ a bramble^
Eiptna* a thorn.
Prado, a meadow,
Verg^ly ajlower garden,
Hu^rta, an orchardm
Jardin, a Jtuit garden.
Era ( iardin}^ a bed in a garden.
Glori^ta, a bower.
Alm&ciga, a seed pita.
Bobeda de parraS; an arbour.
Laberynto, a labyrinth.
Grdta, a grotto,
.Casc4da» a cascade.
Fueolie^ ajbuntain.
Cbocro de a wt/ter
H^9 4pgii*
Part IV.
VqPAPVIiABT.
67
Fi)^4e' the vase qf^t^
S^eute,' Jburdain,
ManaiflzQf aU sorts of herbage^
Flanta, a plant,
Camino real, ihehigkooay,
Senda, Verj^da, a pqih.
Pig£da Rastro,
Cabalgadiira,
CarromatOy
Carro,
Ru6da,
Rayo de
(.laotM, ^
Cambasj >
Cubo de
. rueda,
£slaoa,
Cal^i
Litera,
Aodas,
(Joebe, Carr6za,
Ce«ta,
iUtttray Narria,
Canaeta,
Espu^rta,
Cbirrlon,
3an48ta>
Alf^ija,
Boka,
Coalil) Sacoy
JMfal^ta,
Talego,
Valija,
a track.
a saddle beast,
a waggon,
a cart,
& mheel*
the spqke <^
a taheti.
thefeUoes of
a vakeel,
the nave of
the wheeL
the axle-treep
the pin of a tvheel.
a diaise,
a litier,
the shafts,
a coach,
a basket,
a sledge,
ajlasket.
a dirt'basiet,
a dung'Cart,
a great hamper,
a iioaUet,
a purse.
a sack,
a portmanteau,
a bag,
a cloak bag.
Zurron, a budget or pouch.
Of the Church, and things
belonging to it. — De Ja
Iglesia, y cosas pertene-
cientes a ella»
Nave, the aisle of the church,
Cjmb6rio, Cdpola, the donte*
findeulo, a pinnade.
Cweop the chair.
&»pifla,
Atra,
3acri8tia«
Campaairio,
Camp^a^
gadajo,
JPila,
hopOf
Qonfyaoo^riOf
\
M diapd.
a desk,
the vedry*
the belfry.
ahelL
the clapper of
ihefowtm
a sprinkler,
a confession^
spat,
Tribiinay a tribune or gallery,
Ciment^rio, the church-yardm
Os^rio, the chameL
Aitir, an altar,
Frontdl, an antipendiunim
ArnatOy ornament*
Taberndculo, > the taker"
Sagririoi > nade*
Palio, a canopy.
Mantel del the altars
ahdr, cloth.
Mis41, a masS'book*
Sotdna, a cassock.
SobrepelliS) a surpliee.
lioquete, a short surplice,
BoDete» a (ftp.
Mitra, a mitre.
B^culo^ a crosier.
Patriarca, a patriarch,
ArzobispOy an archbishop.
Obispp, a bishop,
Obi8p4do, a hishoprick
Dioc6sis, a diocese*
Coa^ut^r, coadjuHor,
Sufragaiieo, suffra^.
Sacerdote, a priest,
Sacerd6cio> priesthood.
Diacbno, a eUacon*
ibiubdi^cono, a subde^con.
.Acdlyto, one that serves the
priest at the altar.
Lector, a reader.
Cl6rigo, a clergyman*
Prel^Qi a prehtgm
Ab&d, an abbot.
Abad6sa, . an abbess*
Abadia* tm abkey.
.CaD6Dig09 a canon.
D^&o> a dean.
58
A New Spanish Grammar,
Prev68te,
Arcedianei
Chantrcy
Maestro de
coroy
Cant6r9
Sacristin,
Prebend4dO|
Cara,
Parroquia,
Vicario,
Oficidl,
Proroot6r,
a provost.
an archdeacon.
a precentor.
the master of
the choir.
a singer.
a vestry keeper.
a prebendary.
the parson.
a parish.
a vicar.
an official.
a promoter.
Bncomienda, athmggiveji.
• in commendam.
Bautismo, baptism.
CoDfirmacion> confirmation.
Matrimonio, matrimony.
Comulg^r, to receive the
sacrament.
Ordenes sacrosi holy orders.
deremonia, a ceremony,
Kubricay the rubnc.
Ritual, a ritual.
Oficio divino, divine service.
Psalt^rioy the psalter.
Ftalmo, a psalm.
•Antiphonay antiphon.
•Lecctony a lesson.
Vers^te, a verse.
Serni6n, a sermon.
•MeditacioDy meditation.
OracioQ vocdl, vocal prayer.
•Oracion mental
• mentdl, prayer.
Predicdr, to preach.
Cathequi^dri to catechise. .
Enterr^r,
ISepultaFj ^
■Exoomuniony excommuni'
cation.
• Suspension, suspension.
Entredichoy an interdict.
Irregularidady irregularity.
Descomulgdr, to excommu-
nicate.
Cathedril, a cathedral church.
'CoQventuil, the church
of a convent.
Parroqui&li a parish church.
'■\
to bury.
Adviento,
advent.
Quaresma,
lent.
T^mporas,
ember-'meehs.
Vigilia,
an eve*
Ayunoy
ajaet.
Things relating to War.--^
Cosas pertenecientes k la
guerra*
Artillerla> artillery.
Pieza de artillerla, > ^ ^„^„^,
Cafion, 'lacannofi.
Tr^n de the train
artillerla, ^artillery.
Boca de tne mouth of
canon.
a cannon.
Fog6n,
the touch hcle.
Culdta del
the breech
cafion,
of a gun.
Curefia,
the carnage
afuste,
Cargdr,
of a gun.
to load.
Apunt4r,
to Unci.
Dispardr,
to fire.
Tiro de cafion.
a cannon-shot.
Desmontdr un
to dismount
cafion,
a gun.
Enclavdr un
to nail
cafion,
up a gun.
Culebrina,
a culverin.
Falcon^te,
a falconet.
Pedr^ro,
a patterero.
Ci^on entero, a tohote cannon.
Medio ca56n.
half cannon.
Petardo,
a petard.
Boniba,
a bomb*
Bombarda,
a bomb-ketch.
Mortero,
a mortar-piece.
Granida,
a grenade*
Mosquete,
Carabina,
a musket.
a carabine*
Escopeta,
a firelock.
Pi8t61a,
Bala,
a pistil,
a bullet.
P61vora,
povoder.
Mecha,
a match.
Pedem41,
afiint.
Flecha,
t
anarrom.
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
59
Dardo, a dart.
Javalina, a boar'Spear.
Hooda^ a sling.
ArcOf ' a bow.
Hacha de armas^ a battle»axe.
Lanza, a lance.
Alabarda, an halbert.
Partes^na, a partisan.
Pica, a pike.
Alfange, a scymitar.
Espdda, a stvord.
Pufio de la the handle
esp^da, of a stoord.
Pomp de la-* the pommel of.
Guarnicton de la— the hiU of
La hoja, the*blade.
Puflaly a poinard*
Bayoni^ta, . a bayonet,
Yelmo, Celdddi a helmet.
Daga, a dagger.
Moridn, a mornon,
Vis^ra, the vizor of an helmet.
6orj4Iy Gola, the gorget.
Petp, a breastpUite.
CorizsLy a cuirass.
Espald^r, the back-plate,
Cosel^te, a corslet.
Brazalete, armour for the
arms.
£6carcel6n| armour for the
miist to the thighs.
Inojeras, armour for the knees.
Broqu^l, a buckler.
Esc^do, a shield.
Adarga, a target.
Cota de malla, a coat of mail,
. General) a general.
Teni^nte a liwtenant'
generdly general.
Sarg6nto mayor a major^
de bat^Ua, general.
M^tredecampo,j^^„^,
Sarg6nto mayori a major.
Capit^D) a captain.
Teniente, a lieictenant.
Corn^tai a comet.
Alferezy an ensign.
SargentOy a serjeant.
Cabo de esqu&dra; a corporal.
QuadrillerOy
Soldddo,
Caudilloy
Tamb6r,
Pifano,
Trompeta,
Atabil,
a brigadier.
a soldier.
a chief
a drum.
ajvfe.
a trumpet.
a kettle- drum*
Soldado de k caballo, a trooper.
Soldddo de k pie, i ajbot sol'
InfaDte^
Granadero,
Dragon,
Pjqu6ro,
Mosquet6ro,
Fusilero,
Infantena,
Caballeria,
Artillero,
Bombardero,
Ingeni^ro,
Min6ro,
Gastador,
Centinela,
Vangudrdia,
dier.
a grenadier.
a dragooHm
a pike-man.
a musqueteer.
ajksileer.
the infantry.
the cawdr^
a bomfardier.
an engineetm
a miner.
a pioneer.
a centind.
the vanguard.
Cuerpo de batdlla, the main
body of the army.
Retagudrdia, the rear.
Cuerpo de the corps de
reserva, reserve.
Cuerpo de the corps de
guardia, guard.
Ala, the toing of an army,
Bata116n,
Regimiento,
Compaiila de
caballos,
Compafiia de
infanterla,
Hil^ra,
FUa,
E8quadr6n,
Mochilero,
Bagdgo,
Vivand^ro,
Partido,
Corred6reS|
Batidoresy
a battalion.
^ a regiment.
a troop of
horse.
a company of
foot.
a rank.
afle.
a squadron.
a soldier* s boy.
a baggage.
a sutler.
apftrty.
the forlorn hope,
discoverers.
Murallasy Muros^ wdls.
Alm6n8» a battlement.
Parap6t0| the parapet*
60
A New Spanish Grammar.
Castillo,
Fuerte,
Fortal^za,
Fortificacion,
Torre,
Ciudadela,
BaftU6n,
CortlDa, .
Media liina,
TroD6ra«
Terra plenoy
Caballero,
Rebelling
a casde*
ajmi.
afortress.
fortification.
a io^ooer.
c citadel.
a bastion.
a ctaiain.
an half moon.
loop hole.
a rampart.
a cavalier.
a ravelin.
Contra escarpa,- counter scarp.
Bar^rra, a barrier.
Falsa braga, ajausse braye.
Fosoy a ditch.
Repecho, a breast^tvork.
Garita, a centry^box.
.Casam4tay casemate*
Corredor, > S &'
JBstr4da ike covert
. Cttbierta> ^oay.
Ce«t6n» a gabion*
.£st4ca, a palisade.
JEleductOy a redoubt.
At;al4ya, a place to discovery or
the person tcho discovers.
ilantai a mantlet or cover
Jbr menjront the shot.
J'agfoa, fascines.
JdkA, a mine.
Contra-mina, a counter^mine.
TriDch6ra, a trench.
£1 reily the camp.
Vkuallas, provisions.
JMuniciones, ammunition.
£iso509 a recruit.
Pecor^ro, a marauder.
Cootra^marcha; acounter'
. march.
Escaramiiza, a sldrmish.
Balalla, a battle.
SidOf a siege.
Quart^l, quarter.
£ncamis4da, a camisado.
JSalida, a eally.
Batir, io baiter.
Breeha, a breach.
Esoaldda,, an escaktde.
Asalto, an auoidt,
Llaaiada,^ the chammde.
Q^itulacion, the capitulation*
.GuarnicioDy a gariiion.
Toc4r la caxa, to beat the drum.
LievBnt4r gente, to .ntfse men.
Pagir el i io pay the
flueldo, 6 el pre, S soldiers.
Baitr la to .scowr the
estrada, country^
Levant4r to raise m
el sitio, siege*
Marcher a banderaa foimmsA
desplegddasy vsith^fiying
colors.
Eef<»rz&r el to reinfiyrce
ezercito, the army.
Toc4r 4 to somma
recoger, retreait.
Entregdr una to surrender
plaza, a place.
Commercial terms. — Voces
mercan tiles.
engrosser.
to credit,
carriage.
Abarcad6r 1
MoQopolista, J
Abondr,
, Atiarreo, porta,
Acarreto (hilo), packthread.
Aceptar una to accept
Jelra, abtU.
Accion, stock.
Accion de empujar, hal^
o ticar, lage.
Acreedor, creditor; acreedor
hypotecario, mortgagee; el
que da' la hypoteca, mort-
gager; acreedor importttno,
4 xlun ; valista, o acreedor
por vale, credit or Jbr a bill.
. Aduana, custam^kouse,
Ajuste, bargain; ajuste de
euentas, a settlement.
Ala bu^lia, carried over.
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
61
Alnacen, siorehousCf ijoare^
house, magazine.
AlneBeda, sale b^ auction.
Alf«ilar, to hire,
itodbrdeliEi alarge^
esperanza, emchor.
A quien su to their
• pod'er hubiere, assigns,
Afbitracion, sentencia «m-
de jucces arbitros, pirage.
ArraSy o* dote, earnest money,
Arreodadbr, ajhrmer that
hires.
Arrendamiento, hiring
fjomnng.
Arrendar, tafarm.
Arriba, wrrvoal:
A^egurador^ insurer.
Asegurar, insure.
Asiento, ejitri/.
Ayeria, average.
Averia, j prinmge and
capa, hat money.
Balance, Balance^
Banco, bank.
Banquerov banker.
BanttOj chedp.
Bienes, goods ;: pro^
propio9, perty*
Bienes habidos goads had' or
y por haber, to be had.
Calabrote, a short cable,
Cambio, exchange ; change ;
negociarunaletra de cambio,'
to negociate a bill of exchange.
Capital, caudal, stock, capital.
Cargar el to increase the.
terapora1| heavy shotoer.
Garo, dear.
Carta, cuenta, biU.
Carta, letter ; porte de carta,
postage ; pwtador, postman ;
paquete de cartas, packet of
letters ; cerrar una carta, to
make up a letter i sellar una
carta, to seal a letter ; aobre
escrito de carta, direction i
maleta para cartas; mail.
Caudal; stock.
Caudti diestinado, fund.
Caxa> cash; caxera, cashier ^
cash-keeper; dineraen caza,
|< cash.
Libra de caxa, cash-booh
j Certificado, certificate.
j Certificar, to certify.
I Ciento, cent ; dos, 6 tres, Stc
por cientO; tivo, or three, ftc;
■ per cent.
Cobrador, receiver ; cobrar, to
receive; cobrador de sisa,
exciseman; de derechos de
muelle, vohar/uge, 8tc.
Comision, commisdon*
CompafierO; partner.
Compafiia, partnership.
Coropra; purchase; compra-
dor, buyer, purchaser;
comprador, o vendedor de
sccione8,jo66er.
Compromiso, compromise.
Comunicacion, intercourse.
Conocimento, biU of lading.
Consignacion, consignment.
Consume, consumption.
Contado, , ready
(dinero de} money.
Contenido, content.
Contrabandista, smuggler.
Contrabando, contraband.
Contrata de a charter party
fietamento, tfj^cight.
Contribucion, assessmenty
^ tribute.
Copia, copy.
Corredor, or Corredor de
oreja, broker; de cambios,
exaiange broker.
Correo, post-office.
Correspondencia, correspon"
aence.
Corresposdiente, correspo7i»
Corrrente, current.
Cbstumbre, custom.
Cr^dito, credit.
Cuenta, bill, accou?tt ; sumar
una cuenta, to cast up an
62
A New Spanish Grammar.
account; pedir cuenta, to
call to an account ; pagar ^
cuenta, to pay a part of an
account,
Dafiosy damages.
Data, dale.
Dar^ 6 dexar to let out the
d'flete, H}esseltnjreight.
Debaxo de under
cubierta, deck.
Derecho, duty, custom; dere-
chos de entrada, duty of
importation; dros de ex-
traccioD, of exportation ;
dros de muelle, noharfage;
cobrador de los droB del
mueUei toharfinger.
Derechos de mkarf'
embarque, age.
Descarga, unlading.
Descuento, discount ; descu-
ento por dinero de contado^
drawback.
Desembolso, disbursement.
Desempaquetar^ unstotioin^.
Despachar, to sell, send, diS'
patch ; despacbar un correo,
to send an express ; despa-
cbar mercaderiaSy to sell
goods; despacho de adua-
na^ clearance^ cocket ; des-
pacho^ expedition.
De todo DOS bacemos cargo,
«ue have taken due notice of it.
Deuda, debt; deudor^ debtor.
Diezmo, tenth, tithe; diez-
meroy tithe gatherer.
Dinero, money ; dinero conta-
do 6 de cont^do, ready mo'
ney; dinero cercenado, 6
cortado, clipped money ; di-
nero eh caxa, cash ; dinero
prestado, money lent.
Domicilio, domicil.
Dote, dowry i a woman^s
arras,. portion.
Dros municipales, towns.
Duplicado, duplicate^ copy
qfwriting.
Duefio,
Efectos,
EmboU6rio, 6
harpillera,
£mpe5o,
effects
wrap"
per.
pawn^ pledge.
Encima de la barra, at the bar*
Endosador, endorser*
Encargado de, agent for.
Eodoso, endorsement.
En testiinonio in testimo^
de verdad, nium veritatis.
Entrada, entry; dros de en-
trada, duty of importation.
Equivalente, equvoalent*
Escasos de des- heavi/
pacho, articles.
Escriblr^ to write; escritura,
hand'Writing^ bond, engage^
ment ; escritura de arren-
damiento, lease ; escritorio,
counting'hottse.
Estrenar, to hansel.
Exigencia, exigency.
Extraction, exportation.
Extracto, extract, abridgment.
Extractor, extractor.
Extorcion, extortion.
FsLCtOT, foctor ; factura, fac-
torisL^actory, invoice.
Falta, J'ault, want, error : fal-
ta de pagamento, non pay-
ment.
Fardo, bale.
Fardo pequeno, truss.
Feria, jfi^^^'
Fiador, surety, bail: mdor
hypotecario, mortgager.
Fiel medida, standard
6 peso, measure or weight.
Fixaderas ^files
para papeles, for papers.
Fletar, tofoeight a ship.
Flete, fodgnt.
Fletador, JreigMer.
Fondo, 6 caudal, 6
accion, stock.
Forcejo, struggle.
Ganador, gamer.
Ganancia, gain.
Part IV.
Vocabulary.
63
GanapeDi porter.
Gastos, chargeSf expences.
GineroB, goods.
GvMtdas, ctistoni'house offi-
cers f guardas vijeadores,
Hdes'ineny tide-xvaUers.
Gniesa 6 a heavy
mucha mar, sea.
Guarda de navio^ a tidesman.
Guia, a permit.
Hacienda rum, trash of goods.
safe I '-"pp--
HOo acarretOi packthread.
Hypoteca, mortgage.
Junta de hoard of
sanidad, heaUn.
ImportCi proceeds
Kquido, neat proceed.
Inaolventet insolvent ;
insolvencia, insolvency.
Interns, interest.
Introductor im-
de generos, porter.
InventariOi inventory.
Juez, judge.
Juez arbitroy umpire^ am*
traitor.
JuroSi interest.
Lacre, sealing-wix.
Lancha, a tighter.
Lanchada, embar- light'
que en lancha, erage.
Letra de cambio, a bill of ex*
change^ a draft; negociar
una letra de cambio, to ne*
gociate a bill of exchange;
aacar, 6 tirar una letra, to
draw a bill; acceptar una
letra, to accept a biU; pro«
testar una letra^ to protest a
UU.
Legajo, de a bundle
cartas, of letters.
Llbro de tienda, shop book ;
borradorcillo, small note-
hook for memorandums^ bor-
rador, a day-book; diario,
6 jomal, a ioumal; Kbro
mayor, a ledger; libro de
caxa, cash-book; copiador,
6 libro de copias de cartas, a
letter-book ; libro de mueatraa,
a pattern card.
Licencia, sufferance.
Losa yidriada, Dutch-^oare.
Maleta para cartas, mail.
Marchante, customer.
Marinero, seaman^:
Mercys?} Soods^^res.
Mercador vahokstde
per mayor, dealer.
Monopolista, monopolist.
Muelle, puerto, n)hairf.
Muelle, xoharf;^ derechos de
muelle, vomrfage; su co-
brador, ixiharfmger.
Negociante de generos ex-
trangeros, importer ; nego-
ciante, de acdones, a job^
ber.
Obl^a, a toq/er.
Obligacion, a bond.
Obligaciones, bills of lading.
Ofrecedor, bidder ;
mayor oferente, outbidder.
Orilla, txAarf
Pagar & cuenta, to pay on
account; fBgamento, payment;
falta de pago, non-payment;
pagar6, a promissory note.
Paquete, parcel.
paquete a packet of
de cartas, letters.
Para las Jbr the
costas de cost of.
Pedir to call to an
cuenta, euxount.
Perdidas, losses.
Peso bruto, gross tveight.
Peso limpio neat
de rey, fneight.
Pocb mas, there^
6 raenoSy about.
Petaca^ bundle^ hamper^
roU.
Poliza de policy of
segurbs, insurance.
Poner las co* to
64
A New Spanish Grammar.
sas en CMrden^ skm»
Portador, hearer ^ portador de
cartasi postman; porte de
cartasy postage*
Portei> porterage.
Precio, prieef rate ; &ubida de
precioy enhancement^ rise,
rtetaiOf premium, retonrd*
Prestamo, di- loan;
nero prestado, nume^ lent.
Primage parte de
fletes de navio> primage^
Promesay promise.
Protesta, protest.
Prote»tar, to proteist
una letra, a hUl^ or to note.
Protester una^ dos y tres y las
mas veces en derecho neee-
sariasy to protest in the most
effectual manner possible
agfiinst
Provecho,
Pimtualidad,
CluebradO;
qutebn^
Quese
dirA,
(s^uinquilleria,
OUintal,
Quitanxay
Becambioy
Reclboy
Regateafi
Eemeaa,
ReDl«^
Riquezai
RiesgOy
Bompcc solure
lacoitai
Ropaj,
Riun
hacienda,
Sacar las
meneaderiaSi
Sanode
quiUa,. ^
y costedosi
^Seguro,
SeOar ana
carta,
pr(^.
jmnctuiditj^.
bankrupt;,
bankrufitcv^
ivhich unll' he
mentioned.
hardware,
a hsindred tveighi.
reletise.
re^exchan^e*
receipt.
to cheapen.
remittance.
income.
weaWu
risk,
to break.
on the shore.
clothes*
§
trash
of goods*
to UH'
tight,
etaunek,
and strong.
insurance*
t^ seal
a Utter.
Ser de cuenta,
Sisa,
su cobrador.
Sobre eseriio^-
Sobreestante
de tierra^
Sobresterias,
Subhasta
almoneda,
Sumar una
. cuenta>
Subida de
precio,
Subscripcion,
subscribiente*
tomake g^aeL
exc$semMm
a direction^
land^
sufvetfOTm
demurrage*
&d>e by
auctWH*
to cast up
an account*
enhance^
mertt*
subscription^
subscriber*
Surgir, to come to anchor*
Talego de moneda, monet^bag*
}
tare^ irett*
a set rate*
assize*^
shop-keeper*
shop^bodki
s?iop^
book'
keeper*
cooferagifw
a dealer*
Tara,
TaxaeioD,
tasa^
Tendeto,
libro de tienda,
tienda,
Tenedor de
libro8>
Toneleria,
Trateote,
Negooiante^
Tratar,
trata, 6 negocio;
Tribute,
Trueque,
trocar,
Vendedor,
Valor,
Yigeadores de
rentas,
Una cumplida, las restantea
de ningun valor, one being
accomjmsheaj the others to
stand void*
Uso, usance*
Usura, usury: usorero, usurmr*
Xerra : especie de estera pam
enfundar generos, a mat*^
Noviga/ibn.— Nayigaciofi.
NaviOf Nave, Na«i^ a- tiip*
to deal; husineei
traffioH
trumtei
exchange^
to barter m
seller: rente, ssde^
«00fi&.
iidoi'
Part IV.
VoCABULABt.
65
NaviQ de
guerra,
Navio mar-
cbante,
NaTio lig^roy
Galera,
GaledzEi
Galeon, .
Gale6ta,
Fragata,
Saica,
Carraca,
Fusta,
Pindza,
a man of
wcr.
a mer-
chant ship,
a light vessel,
a gailey.
a galeas.
a galleon,
a gaUeot.
ajrigate,
a saick,
a carrack,
ajluie,
a pinnace
a canoe.
Bares de pftsage, a Jerry boat,
Can6ai
Firdgua,
G6ndo]a,
Esquife,
Baldndra,
Bergantin,
Barco,Bote,-
Barqueta,
Barquilla>
BattiU
Baxa»
Balsa,
Capitdna, *
Almir^ntay
Armdda,
o piragua.
a light ooat*
a skiff.
a sloop,
a brigantine.
a boat.
afloal.
the admiral,
the *oice'admiral,
afieet.
Flota, afieet of Merchant ships.
Esquddra,
Abordo,
Popa,
Pr6a,
Tart4na^
Brul6te,
Patdche,
Feltica,
Barca,
Sentina>
Lastre,
Mastil, A'rboly
A'rbol mayor,
G4bia,
Trinqu^te,
Mesana,
QuiUa del
drbol,
Vcrga, Entena,
a squadron
aboard,
the poop, stern,
theproxi) or head,
a tartan,
ajireship,
a petach,
ajducca,
a bark,
the tvell,
ballast,
the mast,
the main-mast,
the round top.
thefore-mast,
the mizen-mast,
the step of
the mast,
the yard.
£8trib6rd,
starboard.
Bab6rd,
larboard.
Govemar el navio,
to steer.
Barlovento^
nindxvard.
Sotavento,
leexvard.
Remolcar,
tototth
Escortar,
to convoy.
Vela,
a sail.
Vela mayor, the main sheet.
Vela de gdbia, the top-sail,
Juaii6te, the tbp-gaUant sail.
Vela de the mizen*
mesana, saiL
Vela de the fore"
trinqu^te, saiL
Cevadera, the sprit-saiL
Vela a shoulder of
latina, mutton'SaiL
Remo, an oar,
Pala de the blade of
remo, an oar,
TroD^ras^ the port-holes,
Ebopavefiddas, the nettings.
Gallardete, a pendant.
Banderola, ^fi^M^
Bandera, the colours.
Bri^Kula, the compass,
Punta de la proa^ tJte stem,
Puente, Cubierta, the deck,
Tillas, the haicJies.
Timon, the helm.
Quilla, the keel,
A'dcU) A'ncora, an anchor^
Am^rra, *)
Mardma, v a cable.
Cable, 3
Sonda, the sounding lead,
Pil6to, a jnlof.
Guardian, the boatstvainp
Marinero, a sailor^
Corsirio, > ^ - ±
ArmadoU » pr^^t'^r.
Cdmara, the great cabin,
Camarote, a cabin.
Tor men ta, (t tempest,
Borrasca» a storm.
Bonanza, foir toeather.
Calma, calnt.
Viento en the tvind
* E
66
A New Spanish Grammar.
Viento largo,
Coger el
viento,
Ir41a
bolina,
Irse 4 fondo.
Jitir tvind*
tojdi/ to
windward.
io tack upon
a toind,
to sink.
The year and its parts, S^c. —
El afio y sus partes^ &c.
Un alio,
Un mes,
Una setndnay
Una dia^
Una nocbe,
La mafianai
La tarda,
Una hora,
Un mtntito,
Un mom^nto,
La primavera^
£1 verano,
£1 otono>
£1 invierno,
La salida del
sol,
£1 ponerse del
sol.
La aurora,
£1 mediodia,
Media noche,
Un quarto de
hora>
Media faora,
Tres quartos de
'hofa,
Hoy,
Aver,
£1 dia antes
de ayer,
£l dia despues
de maSianB,
a year,
& YnovHh,
a fjoeeh
a day,
a night,
the morning,
the evening,
an hour,
a minute,
a moment,
the spring,
the summer,
the autumn,
the mnter,
the sun*
rising,
the' suH"'
setting,
the daxjon,
noon,
midnight,
a quarter of
an hour,
half an hour.
three quarters
of an hour,
tO'day,
yesterday,
the day before
yesterday,
the. day after
to-'morrou).
The months, — Los meses.
£n6ro,
•Febr6ro,
Marzoy
January,
February,
March.
Abril,
Mayo,
Jiinio,
Jiilio,
Agosto,
S^iedibre,
Oetubre,
Noviembte,
Diciembre,
April,
May,
June,
July,
September,
October,
November^
December,
The days of the week, — Los
4ias de la
sem^na.
Lunee,
' Mamday*
Martes,.
Tuesday.
Mierooles^
WediMsday„
Jueves,
Thursday.
Viernes,
Friday.
Sabado,
Saturday.
Domingo,
Sunday.
The holidays of the year, ^
Dias de 6esta del afio.
El primer dia del Neiio Years*
Aiio,
Dia de Reyes^
La Quaresma,
Las Quatro tem-
poras,
Domingo de
Ramos,
Viernes Santo,
Pascua de resurrec- Easter*
cion, day,
Pascua del Espiritu Whit"
Santo, sundau.
Dia de Difun- AW Souk*
tos, day.
Dia de todos los All Saints*
Santos, day.
Pascua de navidad, Christmas.
La Vigilia, the Eve.
day,
Ttjoelfth'day,
Lent,
the Ember'
iveeks.
Palm*
Sunday.
Good Friday.
-^Hp-
Winds, — Vientos.
Norte,
Sad,
north'toind.
south-mnd.
Part IV.
Vqcabulahy*
67
Este, >
Levante, >
Poniente,
Nordeste^
eQst-'uiind*
tvest'WincL
north east'Wind.
Norueste,
V^ndav^li
Sudeste,
Sudueste,
north •voest-mnd*
souih toest'Xmnd.
south east'Wind,
south xvest'toind.
^^w*
Table of Spanish Money. — ^Tabla de las Monedas de
Espafia.
La pieza mas pequena de moneda de Esjpana se llama Maruvedi
del qual resuUa la Tabla siguiente.
Cobre, 6 vellom
2 marayedices h(^en un
ochavo.
2 ochavos UB quarto.
2 quartos una mota, o
dos quartos.
Plata.
S{ quartos un Real.
1<)| diez quartos y medio y
medio maravedl, octava
part;e de un Peso duro.
17 quartos 2 reales.
9X\ quartos 2| reales.
S4 qiiivrtQS, ^ rqal^a 6 una
peseta.
42| quartos
85 quartos
170 quartos
5 reales 6 pe-
seta colunaria.
10 reales 6
medio duro.
20 reales, 6
un peso duro.
20
40
80,
160
reales
reales
reales
reales
320 reales
Oro.
escudillo de oro.
doble escudillo
de oco.
doblon de oro.
media onza de
oro, (x 8 duros.
una onza, 6 16
pesos daros.
Military words of Command. — Palabras de Manda-
afientos.
M^rcheOy
Formense, fa}l in:
AtencioD, attention.
A'rmas al horn- shoulder
bro, arms.
Fixen bayon^tas, fx bayonets
Pres6nten las
armas,
Apar6jen,
Fresenten,
Fuego,
AmSrcen,
C^rguen,v
Sdquen ba-
qu6ta.
present
arms*
make ready,
present,
^fire.
prime,
load.
draVD ram-
rods.
AtaquoQ, ram. dofcan cartridge.
jKsen el fu6go, cease fringe
march*
Alto, kali.
Linea ^ la iz- left into
qu6rda, linem
Conversion d la . righj^
der6cha, t/oheel*
Conversion d la lefi^
izqui^rda, toheeK
Conversion atras k la rtg^
derecha, backwards tioheeL
Conversion atras k la left
izqui^rda, backwards ivheeL
A la derecha, right
fr^nte, face*
A la izqul6rda, l^P
frente, face.
»b2
[ 68 ]
PART THE i'lFTH.
SeDtencias Cortas y Familiares^
Short and Familiar Phrases.
I. Acerca de pedir algo^
T £ suplico, le ruego, deme
vm. hagame el favor de
ddrme*
Traygame.
Se lo agradezco.
Xe doy las grdcias.
Vaya i buscarme la tal cosa.
Luego, en este instante.
Qnerido Sefior, hagame vm.
este gusto. C^^^-
Conc6dame, Sefiora, esjie fa-
Se lo suplico^
Se lo pidO'encarecidam6nte*
I. About asking any thing.
T Tray you, or pray give me,
be so good aa to give me.
Bring me, let me have^
I thank you for it,
I give you thanks.
Go and fetch me such a thing*
Presently, this moment.
Dear Sir, do me that hind"
ness. V^Javomr.
Dear Madam, grant me that
I beseech you. [tV.
I entreat or conjure you to do
H. Expresiones tiernas,
Mividff.
Mi queridoi 6 mi queridia*
Mi alma.
Mi duefio.
Mi queridi^, mi queridita.
Mi corazoncito.
Lumbre de mis ojos.
Ci^lo mio, niHa de mi alma.
Aija de mi corazon.
Angel mio.
Estrella mia.
II. Expressions of kind*
ness.
My life.
My dear.
My dear soul,
my love.
My little darling.
My little heart.
Dear sxJoeet heart.
My little dear.
My dear ChUd.
My pretty angel.
My star.
J |I>I«WI»
III. Jcerca de agradecer y
cumplimentar, y mostrar
amistad.
Viva usted muchos alios.
Le devuelvo las mas vivas
g(acia
s.
§
III. Of thanking and coo>-
plimenting, or |»bewing
kindness.
/ thank you.
I return you a thousand
tkanksi
Part V.
Familiar Phbases.
G9
Gustoso lo hare.
t)e todo mi corazon.
De muy buena gana.
Lo estimo.
Soj de Ym.
Soy 8u servid6r.
Su muy humilde servidor.
Vm. me favorece mucho.
Se toma vm. demasiado tra-
bajo y molestia.
No tengo ninguna en ser-
virle.
Es vm. muy atento, y muy
cort^s. [da vm, ?
Que desea vm. ? que me man-
Ordeneme con toda libertad
y fraoqueza.
Sin cumpliroiento.
Sin cerem6nia.
"Le amo de <;oraz6n.
y yo correspondo 4 vm. co-
mo debo.
Haga cuenta sobre mi.
Mandeme vm.
H6nreme con sus preccptos.
Tiene vm. algo que man-
dirme ?
No tiene vm. sino hab]4r.
Disp6oga de su servid6r.
Solo agudrdo sus preceptos.
Demasiado honor me ha'ce.
Dex6monos ^e cumplimien*
tos.
£ntre amigos honrados, se es-
cusan cumplimientos.
' Al Sefior Don— le beso las
manos. [_nes mias.
D61e vm. muchas expresi6-
No faltare.
Pongame vm. a los pies de
la Senora. [norita.
Muchas mem6rias 4 la Se-
Fase vm. adel^nte, le voy i
seguir.
Despues de vm. Caballero.
Se muy bien lo que le debo.
Vamos, Sefior, pase vm.
Lo har6 para obedecerle.
Fara 50I0 agradiirle.
/ tcill do it cheerfiMyM
With all my heart*
Heartily, uallingh/,
I am ooliged to you,
I am tJohSly yours,
I am your servant.
Your most humble servant.
You are very obliging.
You give yourself too much
trouble,
Ifind none in serving you,
■
You are very civile or kind.
What toill you please to have f
J desire you to be Jree Xvith
me.
Without compliment.
Without ceremony,
I hve you tvith all my heart,
I am heartily obliged to you.
Rely or depend upon me»
Command me, ^niflwef*.
Honour me xmth your corn-
Have you any thing to com*
mand me ?
You need but speak.
Dispose of your servants
I only luoit your commands.
You do me too much honour^
Let usjorbear compliments.
Between honest friends^ com^
pliments are useless*
Present or give my service to
Mr, Don .
Remember my love to him,
I mil not fail to do it.
Present my respectsy or rfwfy,
to my lady.
Remember me kindly to Miss.
Go b^ore, I am ready to foU
low you.
After you^ Sir,
I know well what I owe you,
Come^ Sir, go on,
I will do it to obey you*
To please you.
76
A New Spanish Grammar.
No soy amigo dc tantas ce-
remonias.
No soy cump]iment6ro.
£s lo mejof.
Tiene vtn. razon.
/ do not love so many cerenio-
nies.
I am not for ceremonies.
That is the best tvay.
You are in the right of if*
IV. Acerca de ajirmar^ ne-
gar, consenttr, &c.
£s verddd.
Es esto verddd ?
Demasiado verdad.
Para, tratir verdad.
£n efecto, es asi.
Quien lo duda I
No hay duda.
Creb que es asi,
Creo que no.
Dlgo que si.
Digo que no.
Apuesto que si.
Va que no.
' For mi vida.
A fe de caballero.
A f6 de honibre de bien.
For mi honor.
Cr6ame vm.
Se lo pucdo decir.
Se lo puedo afirmar.
Apost^ra algo.
Se burla -vm. ?
Habla vm. de veras ?
to digp muy de veras?
Lo adivin6 vm.
Lo acerto vm.
Bien le creo.
Se le puede creer.
£so no es imposible.
Pues, en hora buena.
Foco d poco.
No es verdid.
Aquello es falso.
Nada <\v "so hay*
£s incl( ito.
£s mentira.
£s uoa falseddd.
IV. Affirming, denying,
consenting; S^c,
It is true.
Is it true?
It is but too true.
To tell you the truth*
Really it is so.
Who doubts it ?
There is no doubt of it.
I dare say,
I believe not.
I say it is.
I say it is not,
J lay it is.
I lay it is not.
Upon my life.
As I am a gefitleman.
As I am an honest man.
Upon my honour.
Do believe me.
I can tell it to you*
I can assure you.
I could lay something.
DonH yottjestf
Are you in earnest f
J am in earnest.
You guessed at it.
You have hit the marJc.
J believe you.
One may believe you.'
j'hat IS not impossible.
Well, let it be so,
Sq/tly, fair andsofUy.
It is not true.
That is false.
There is no such thing.
It is a story.
It is a lie.
That is an untruth.
Part V.
Familiar Phrases.
71
Me burlaba» chanze^ba.
Lo decia de chanza.
Sea ea hora buena.
No tne opongo d ello.
Estamos de acuerdo.
Dicho y hecho.
No lo quiero.
/ did but Jest*
I said it tnjest.
Let it be so.
I am against it*
I agree to it.
Done.
I toiU not.
mm
V. Acerca de consultar,
considerar.
Que se ha de hacer ?
Que haremos ?
Que me dice vmd. que haga?
Que remedio hay para eso ?
Que partldo hemos de tooaar ?
Hagamot esto fi esto.
Hagamos una cosa.
Mejor serd que yo. . * .
Aguarde vm. un poco.
No seria mejor, «i ? . • •
Dexeme hacer. ^
Si estuviera en 8u lugar.
£s lo mismo.
Vieoe d sah'r d lo mismo.
V. Of consoltiug^ or consi-
dering.
What is to be done ?
What shall tve dof
What do you advise me to do ?
Whai remedy is therefor it ?
What course shall 'Sse take ?
Let us do so or so.
Let us do one thing.
It mil be better for meto,,»
Hold a little.
Wofdd it not be better tof,**
Let me alone.
Were I in your place.
It is all one.
It comes to be the same thing.
VI. Del comir y del Je-
ber,
Tengo buen apetito.
Tengo hambre.
Me muero de hambre.
Me parece que ha tres dias
que no he comido.
Coma vm. algo.
Que gusta vm. corner ?
Comiera un poco de qual-
qui6ra cosa.
Deme vm. algo de comer.
He comido bastante.
Estoy satisfecho.
Quiere vm. comer auQ mas ?
No tengo mas apetito.
Tengo sed.
Tengo mucha sed.
Me i»u6ro fie sed.
VI. Of eating and drink-
ing.
flwy
/ have a good appetite,
I am hungry.
I am almost starved,
' I fed as if I had eaten nothing
these three days.
Eat something.
What will you eat f
I would eat a little qf
thing.
Give me something to eai,
I have eaten enough.
I am satisfied.
Will you eat any more f
L have no more appetite*
I am dry or thirsty.
I am very dry,
I am almost deai with thirst.
7'i
A New Spanish Grammar.
Tengo ixiucha seel.
Deme vmd. de beb6r.
Viva vm. muchos anos.
Gustoso beberia un vaso de
vino.
Bcba vm. pues.
He bebido bastante.
No puedo beber mas^
Mi s6d est& apagada.
/ am *oery thirsty.
Give me some drink.
I thank you.
I could drink a glass of wine.
Drink then,
I have drank enough.
I can drink no more.
My thirst is quenched.
VII. Del ir, venir, moverse,
&c.
De donde viene vm. ?
A donde v4 vm. ?
Vengo de— Voy ^—
Suba, baxe.
Entre vm. saiga vm.
Pase vm. adelante.
!No se mu6va, no se men6e#
Estese ahi.
Accrquese de mi.
lletirese vm.
Vayase.
Vaya un poco atr^s.
Venga, venga vm. acd.
Aguarde vmd. un rato^
Espere, aguardeme.
No vaya tan de pri6sa«
\i vm. muy 4 priesa.
Quitese de del^nte de mi.
No me toque vm.
Dexe eso,
Porqu^ f
Asl 10 quiero.
Estoy bien aqui.
La puerta est4 cerr^da/
Ahora estd abierta.
Abra vm. la puerta.
Abra vm. la veil tana.
Cierre la vent^na.
Venga vm. por aqui.
Vaya vmd. por alia.
Pase vmd. por aqui.
Pase por all4.
Que busca vm. ?
Aue perdi6 vm.
VII. Of going, eomiDg,
stirring, ^c.
From •whence do you come ?
Where do you go?
I comejrom'^l am going tO'^
Come up, come doujn.
Come in, go out.
Come on.
Do not stir from thence.
Stay there.
Come near to me.
Get you gone.
Go your tvay, begone.
Stand back a little.
Come hither.
Stay a little.
Stay for me.
Do not go sojast.
You go too fast.
Get you out of my sight.
Do not touch me.
Let that alone.
Whyf
I tmll have it so.
I am ijoell here. •
The door is shut.
Not!) it is open.
Open the door.
Open the voindotv.
Shut the xvind&u).
Come this voay.
Go that tvay.
Pass this toay.
Pass that ivay.
What do you look for?
What have you lost ?
Part V.
Familiar Phrases.
73
VIIL Del hablar, decir, VIII. Of speaking, sayings
obrar^ 8Cc, doing, ^c.
Hable vm. alto.
Habia vm. muy baxo.
Con quien habla tid. ?
Me habla vm. ?
Digale algo.
Habla vm. £spa!i6I ?
JSabe vm. el Castell^no ^
Algo entiendo y hablo.
Que dice vm. ?
Que ha dicho vm. ?
No digo nada.
No he dicho nada.
Calle vm. la boca.
C411ome.
£lla no quiere callir.
No hace mas que habl4r y
charl4r.
He oido deck*, que
Me lo han dicho.
JjO dicen per ahi.
Todos lo dicen.
£1 Se&or A, me lo dixo.
Mad4ma no me lo ha dicho.
Se ledixo d vm.?
Se le dixo ella ?
-Quando lo oy6 vm. decir ?
Hoy me lo han dicho.
Quien se lo dixo ?
"No lo puedo cr^er.
Que dice 61 ?
Que dice ella ?
Que le ha dicho ?
^o me dixo nada. CS^^^
No me ha dicho noticia aL-
El Sefior B, me dixo nuevas.
No se lo diga vm.
Se lo dir6.
No se lo dir6.
No le diga vm. paMbra.
Se lo callare.
Callelo vm. bien.
Ha dicho vm. eso ?
No, no lo he dicho.
No lo dixo vm. ?
No lo han dicho ?
Que est^ vra« haciendo ?
?7eak Ifiud.
ou speak too loxjo.
Whom do ynu speak tof
Do you speak to me ?
Tell him something.
Do you speak Spanish ?
Can you speak Castilian ?
J understand and speak it a
What do you say? [^little.
What did you say ?
I say nothing,
I said nothing.
Hold your tongue.
I am silent.
She will not hold her tongue.
She does nothing but prattle and
tattle.
Ixvas told, that ■ ■
I toas told so.
They say so.
Every one says so.
Mr. A. told it me.
The lady did not tell it me.
Did he tell you so f
Did she tetl it you ?
When did you t^ear it ?
I heard it to-day.
Who told it you f
I cannot believe it.
What does he say f
What does she say ?
What did he say to you ?
He said nothing to me.
rr 7 1
He told me no news.
Mr. B. told me news.
Do not tell him that*
I will tell him.
I will not tell him.
Bay not a word. *
I will not tell him*
Do not teU him.
Did you say that ?
No, I did not say it.]
Did you not say so ?
Did they not say so ?
What are you doing ?
74
A New Spahish Grammar.
Que ha hecho vm. ?
No hago nada.
No he hecho nada.
Acabo vm. ? .
No acabo vm. ?
Que estd haciendo 61 ? *
Que hace eJla ? [vm. ?
Que quiere vm. ? que manda
Que es lo que le hace falta ?
Que pide vm.
Ilespondame^.
Porque no me rcspondc vm. ?
What have you dont?
I am doing nothing,
I have done nothing.
Have you done ?
Have you not done f
What is he doing ?
What does she do ?
What is your pleasure?
What do you tioant f
What do you ask f
Afisxver me.
Why 'u)on*tyou aminer me f
IX. jDe el oirj escuchar,
&c.
O'yga vm. Sr. Dn. N.
O'igo, Senor.
Me oye vm. ?
No le oigo.
No le puedo oirn
Habic mas alto.
Oy'ga, venga aca.
O^ygole.
Escuchole.
Estese quieto.
No haga ruido.
Que ruido es este ?
No nos podemos oir hablar.
Que zambra arma vm. all^ !
Me quiebra la cabeza.
Ma aturde vm»
Es vm. muj molesto.
IX. Of hearing, hearkea-
ing, 4rc.
J say Mr. N.
Yes, Sir,
Do you hear me ?
I do not hear you.
I cannot hear you.
Speak louder.
Hark yey come hither.
I hear you.
I listen or hearken to you*
Be quiet.
Do not make a noise.
What noise is this f [^speai*
We cannot hear one another
What a thundering noise you
You sivji me. [make there !
You make my head giddy.
You are very troublesome.
X. De el entender y com-
prehendir. '
Le cntiende vm. bien ?
Ha entendido vm. lo que ha
dicho ?
Entiende vm.lo que dice ?
Me entiendev m. ^
Le entiendo bien.
No le entiendo.
Entiende vm. el Espafiol '^
No lo entiendo.
X. Of understaading, or
apprehendiog.
Do you understand him xvell ?
Did you understand mhat he
said? [My^^
Do you understand «u£a/ he
Do you understand mef
I understand you %joeU,
I do not understand you.
Do you understand Spanish ?
I do not undertiand ii.
Part V.
Familiab Phrases.
75
Lo entiendo un pocb.
Lo entiendc el SeHor ?
No lo entiende.
Me ha entendido rm. ?
No le he entendido.
Ahofa le entiendo. [pfiesa.
Quando no habla vm. tan de
£1 no pronuncia bien.
Parece tartamudo.
Ne se le entiende lo que
dice.
J understand it a Utile: [iV ♦
Does the gentleman undetstatid
He does not understand ii*
Did you understand me ?
J did not undtrdand you.
Novo I underbtand you.
When you do not speak sojast.
He does not pronounce right.
He speaks like a stammerer.
One caniiot understand lohat he
utters.
«•*•
XI. Acerca de preguntdr. XI. About asking a ques-
Como dice vm. ?
Que es esto ? que hay I
Que se dice ?
Que quiere decir eso ?
Que quieren ellos decir ?
De que sirve at[ueUo ? a que
bueno ?
Que le parece ? que tal ?
A que yiene aquello ?
Digame vm. se puede saber ?
Se le puede preguntar ?
Qtie me pregiinta vm. ?
Como, Seflor?
Que se ha de haccr ?
Que desea vm. ?
Que gusta vm. ?
Lo que quisiere.
Suplicole me responds.
Porque no me resp6nde ?
tion.
Hotjo do you say ? [ter 9
Wholes this ? What is the mat*
What do they say ?
What means that?
What do they mean ?
To iohat purpose that? ivhat's
that goodjbr ?
What do you think ?
To what purpose did he say it ?
Tell mey mau one know ?
May one ask you ?
What do you ask of me?
JF/oto, Sir?
What is to be done f
What do you want?
What will you please to have ?
What you please ?
Pray do answer me.
Why dont you answer ine ?
1 1 n tfi I ttm
XII. Acirca de saber.
Sabe vm. eso ?
No lo se.
No se nada de ello.
Ella bien lo sabia.
Aqoso no \o sabia el ?
Supuesto que lo supiese.
No sabrd nada de ello.
Que ! no ha sabido nada ?
XII. Of knowing, or hav-
ing knowledge of.
Do you know that ?
I do not knctm it,
I know nothing of it.
She knew it well.
Did he not know it?
Suppose he knew it.
He shall know nothing of it.
What! didheknownomingoftif
76
A New Spanish Gbammar.
No supo jam^ de ei to.
Antes de vm. lo sabia yo.
£s asi, 6 DO ?
No qiic lo scpa yo.
He never knew any thing abqut
I knew it before you, [this.
h it so or not 1
Not that I know of.
XIII. De el coTtJOcer, olvi-
dar, acorddrse.
Lo conoce vm. ?
La conoce vm. ?
Los conoce vm. 1
Los conozco.
No los conozco.
Kos conoc6mos.
No nos conoc6mos.
No ie conoce vm. d ^1 1
Cr6o que le he conocido.
La he conocid«.
Nos hemos conocido.
Le conozco de vista.
La conozco de nombre.
£1 me conocia muy bien. .
Me conoce vm. 1
He olvidado su nombre.
Me ha olvidado vm. 1
Le conoce ^ vm. ella ?
Le conoce k vm. el Sefior 1
Parece que no me conoce.
Bien me conoce el Se^or 1
Yi, no me conoce.
Me olvido del todo.
Y^ no me conoce ella.
Tengo el hon6r de ser cono-
cido de i\,
Se acuerda vm. de eso 7
No se me acuerda, no me
acuerdo de ello.
Muy bien lo tengo presente.
XIII. Of knowing, or
being acquainted with,
forgetting and remem-
bering.
Do you know him ?
IJo you know her ?
Do you know them ?
I know them.
I do not know them.
We are acquainted.
We do not know one another.
Do you not know him I
J believe I knew him,
I knew her.
We knew one another.
I know him by sight,
I have heard of her.
He knew me very well.
Do you know me f
I have forgotten your name.
Did you forget me 7
Does she know you ?
Does t/te gentleman know you ?
It appears he does not know me.
The gentleman knows me well.
He knows me no more.
He quite forgot me.
She knows me no more.
I hare the honour to be known
to him.
Do you remember that ?
I do not remember it, I do not
recollect it.
I do remember it welL
XIV. De la edad, de la vi*
day de la muerte^ &c.
Que ed^d tiene vm. %
Que eddd tiene su herm&no %
XIV. Of age, life, death.
How old are you ?
How old is your brother 9
Part V,
Familiar Phrases.
Tengo veinte y cinco afios.
Tiene veinte y dos aiios.
Tiene vm. mas anos que yo«
£mpi6za a envejec6r.
Que eddd tendrl vm. !
£8t6y buenoy que es lo esen^
£st& vm. casado 1 [cial.
Quantas veces ha est^do vm.
casado 1 [vm.
Quantas mugeres ha tenido
Tiene vm. a^n padre y ma-
dre vivos ?
Mi padre muri6.
Mi mad re ha mu^rto.
Dos afios ha que perdi 4 mi
padre.
Mi madre se ha vnelto ^ casdr.
Quantos hijos ti^ne vm. %
Quatro tengo.
Hijos 6 hijas, var6nes 6 hem-
bras 1
Tengo un hijo y tres hijas.
Quantos herm^nos ti^ne vm. t
No tengo ninguno vivo.
Todos muri6rQn.
Todos hembs de morir.
Cada hora es un paso hdcia
ei tiimulo.
/ am Jive and twenty.
He is twenty-two years old.
You ate older than L
He begins to grow old.
How old may you be f
J am well, that is the chief
Are you married ? [thing.
How often have you been
married? [had?
How many wives have you
Have you father and mother
still alive ?
My father is dead.
My mother is dead.
My father has been dead these
two years.
My mother is married again.
How many children have you ?
I have four.
Sons or daughters, males or
femaks ? {daughters.
I have one son and three
How many brothers have you f
I have none alive.
They are all dead.
We must all die.
Every hour is a step tawhrds
death.
<■■ *»■
I
«**^
XV. De una Aya y su
Senorita.
£sta vm. aun en la cama ?
Duerme vm. ?
Despi6rte» que pesada es vm. 1
Es vm. muy dormiI6ua.
Ne esti aun despierta 1
Levantese Hg^ro. [l^rsel
Acaso es yd hora de le van-
Sin duda lo es.
Ah6ra darin las nueve.
£8t^ vm. levantada t
£st^ su herm^na levantada 7
Vamos, despache ym.
Porque no se da mas priesa ?
Cuidado. '
Se caer^ vm.
XV. Of a Governess and
a young lady.-
Are you in bed still.
Do you sleep ?
Awake, how heavy you are f
You are very sleepy.
Are not you awake yet ?
Rise quickly.
It is time to rise ?
So it is undoubtedly.
It is almost nine o'clock. .
Are yoii up t
Is your sister up?
Come, make haste.
Why do you not make haste f
Have a care.
You will fall
78
A New Spanish Gbammar*
For poco Sit cae.
Ac6rque<e de la lumbre.
Abfiguese bieo.
Se eofriard vm.
Ya est6y acalarrada.
Vistase lu6go«
Pcynese.
Pougase las medias.
C^lzese los zap^tos^
Tonie esla camisa Uanca.
Lavese las manos, )a boca, y la
cara.
Limpiese los dieiites.
Sus p6iDes 0sta.a svcios*
Acord6aeine la cotiUa.
Ayudeme vm.
Porqu6 no me asi4e ]
Acab6 VII). y4 %
Aun no.
Que pesada es vm.
piga sus oraciones.
Halile alto.
Empieze*
Vamos adelante*
Acabe vmd. [clones %
Adond^ estd su libr^ cie ora-
Traiga «u Bibb'a.
Bdsquela presto.
L6a vm. un capitulo*
A dond c aeab6 vm. ayer 1
Aqul me pare.
No tiene vm. bien su libro.
Lea poco 4 poco.
Deletr6e esa voz.
Vm. lee muy de prid^a.
Nq l^e vm. bien.
Le6 may despacio.
No aprende vm. nadal
No observa nada.
No estudia vm. .
No aprovecha nada.
£s vm. jnuy perezosa. ■
Que murraura vm. alii.
Vuelva ^ emp^z^r.
No sabe vm. su leccion.
Esta es su leccion.
D6me otra leccion.
Porqu6 me Labia vm. Ingles 1
You tvfre like tofM
Come near the fire.
Keep youreeij warm.
You will catch cold.
I have got a cold already »
J^resB yourself directly.
Comb your hair.
Put on your stockings.
Put on your shoes.
Take that clean chemise.
Wash your hands, your mouth,
your face.
Clean your teeth.
Your combs are fiot cUan.
Lace me.
Help me.
Why don't you help me f
Have you done ?
Not yet.
You are very tedious.
Say your prayers.
Speak loud.
Begin*
Go on.
Make an end.
Where is your prdyer'bpak 9
Bring your Bible*
Look for it directly^
Read a chapter. [day.
Where did you kme ^yeoiev^
Ikftqffhere. [well.
You doyuot hold your book
Read softly.
Spell f hat word.
You read too fast.
You do not read Uftll.
You read too slow.
You learn nothing.
You observe nothing*
You do not study*
You do not improve*
You are very idle.
What do you mutter there 1
Begin again.
You do not know your lesson*
This is your' lesson.
Give me another lesson* \me»
Why do you speak JSngUA to
I ■
Part V.
Familiar Phbases.
79
Hable vm. nempre EspafioU
Quiere vm. amorzdr 1
Que gusta Tm. para su almu*
erzo!
Corner^ Vm. pfin y manteca 1
Diga vin. lo que quiere mas.
Acabe de Almorz^r.
Almorzo vtn. yd 1
Tbrae su (ab6r.
Mu^itreme su lab6n
£so no est^ bu^o.
Behaga todo aquello.
Ti^ne una agCya bu6na I
Ti^ne vm. hilo I
Dexe su Iab6r.
Vaya d jugar un poco.
Yuelva i, trabajar quando liaya
jugado.
Vaya d pasedrse en el jardio.
No se calieote.
Vaelva presto.
£s bora de com^n
Sientese d la mesa.
Vamos, toDie vmd. una sitla.
Pongase la servilleta.
Adonde estdn su cueiiillo, su
tened6r y su cuchdra ?
Reze antes de empezar.
Coma vm. sopa.
Gnsta vm. cam6ro.
Quiere gordo 6 raagro 1
Le gusta la gordura ?
Le gusta d vm. saka ?
Digame su gusto.
Coma, no come vm.
He aqul una ala de polio.
Coma vm. p4n con su carne'.
Ha bebido vm.
Pida de beber.
£s esta carne sabrosa?
Quiere vm. comer mas ?
Ha comido vm. baslante 1 '
Le gusta el queso ?
Dl vm. lasgracias?
Vaya k bayldr.
Ha baylddo ?md. t
Speak always in Spanidt.
Will ^mt breakfast ?
What will you haw for break'
fast?
Will you have bread and butter ?
Say what you like best.
Make haste with your breaks
fast.
Have you breakfasted ?
Take your work.
Show me yomr work.
That is not right.
Do all that over again.
Have you a good needle f
Have you any thread?
Leave yout work.
Go and play a little.
Come to work again when you
have played.
Go and walk in the garden.
Do not overheat yourself.
Come agtiin quickly.
It is dinner'time.
Sit down to the tahk.
Come, take a chair.
Put your napkin before you.
l¥kere is your knife, your fork,
your spoon ?
Say grace before you begin.
Eat some soup.
Will you have some mutton ?
Will you have f at or lean ?
Do you love fat ?
Do you love sauce?
Tell me what you love.
Eat, you do not eat [chicken.
Here, there is the wing of a
Eat bread with your meat.
Have you drank ?
Call for some drink.
Is this meat good?
Will you eat any more ?
Have you eat enough ?
Do you like cheese ?
Give thanks.
Go to dance.
Have you danced?
80
A New Spanish Gramj^ar.
Ex^reitese bien.
Vaya, danze vm. un mioaete*
No danza vm, bieo.
Tengase derecba.
Levante la cabcza.
Haga la cortesla.
Mlreme vmd.
Que estd vm. niirando 1
Se fu6 su. maestro ?
Ha acabado vm. yi ?
Vaya alinra d cantor.
Lleve su libro coosigo.
Vaelva ^ trabajar quaiido baya
acabado.
Ha cantado vm. 1
Tiene leccion nueva 1
Cante vm. una arieta.
Cante vm. una cancion.
Canta vm. bouitamente.
Toque vm. el clave.
Abora la guitirra.
Su prima no vale nada.
£st^ su guit^rra templdda?
Sabe vm. templ^rla 1
Aun est^ destemplada.
No tiene vm. bien su guit^rra.
Yaya vm. d aprend^r el Es-
pafioL
Adonde est^ su gram^tica 1
Busque su libro.
Que leccion fidne vm.
Que di^logo ha leido I
Repita su leccioD«
No la sabe vm.
Nada ha apreudido.
L6a delante de ml.
No pronuncia vm. bien.
Aprendi6 vm. su leccion dc
mem6ria 1
No tidne vmd. memoria.
No estudia vm.
Que quiere para merend^rt —
para cenar 1
Venga d cenar.
No se engolosine en la frula.
£star4 vm. mala.
La fruta no le sienta bien.
Exercise yourself welt J
Come, dance a minuet.
You do not dance well.
Stand upright.
Hold up your head*
Make a curtsey.
Look at me.
What are you looking at ?
Is your master gone?
Have you done already ?
Go now and sit^g.
Carry your book with you.
Come to work again when you
have done.
Have you sung f
Have you a new lesson ?
Sing an air*
Sing a song.
You sing pretty well.
Play on the harpsichord.
Now upon the guitar, [things.
Your chant re I is good for no^-
Is your guitar in tune, 7
£>o you know how to tune it 1
It is yet out of tune.
You do not hold your gtdtar
Go and learn Spanish, [welL
Where is your grammar I
Look for your book.
What lesson have you ?
What dialogue have you read 9
Repeat your lesson.
You do not know it.
You have learned nothing.
Bead before me*
You do not pronounce well.
Can you say your lesson by
heart.
You have no memory.
You take no pains.
What will you have for your
luncheon I—for supper 1
Come to supper.
Do not eat so much fruit.
You will be ill.
Fruit is not good for you.
Part V.
FaMTLIAB PltBASCS.
91
Es liempo de acos^dW.
BiMniides^ Iu^gt>.
Reie.
LefanteM mafiana temprtno;
It is time fcr you logo to heiL
Vndtes$ yauradf fraadly.
Say your prayets,
Riie to-morrdw by fAMMr.
X!y t. Del poieo.
Hac^ mily bello tiempb.
Este dia darp y serSno con-
vidk al ps»6p.
No parece nu6e algiina.
Vatnos ii pasdir.
Vamos k tOitt&r el aire.
Quiere tUK dar una vaeHa t
Gusta vm. venir conmigo 1
Req>oiidkme, dlgame bi, 6 no,
Vamos pues^ oie gtista.
Le acompafiar^.
Adondeir^mos?
Tamos al Pa^ue.
VamoB a V6i. prddos.
Ir^moB en cMhe t
Como le gustdr^.
Yamonos 4 pi6.
Tlene vm. nkkfin.
£80 es saluddble.
S)B gada apetiiro, aridaodb.
Animo, vamos^ and^mos.
Por dondbir^dlos)
Por dondb qidsicre.
Por aqui d por all4.
Vamos por aqiit.
A mano dereclia, d la derecha*
A mano izquierda, & la 12-*
quierda*
Qtnere rm. it por llgiia 1
Adonde estS el barco?
Adonde esldn los barqu£ros1
Eiilr^ vM. en el barco^
Sdo atravesar^mos el rio.
La igak* est& may inafasa y
apacible.
Eifipifea'&'moVti'se.
Adondir <pAet^ vijb. deftmbar-
c&r, abordfrl'
Estamos cerca dc$ 14 orHla.
XVI. Of walking,
A is veryjlne weather,
niis dear e*d serene day in^
tiies to waik. [5f seen.
Hure is not the ka'sf elouet /#
Let us walk out.
Let us go and take (hi air.
Will you go and take a turn f
Will you come along with msf
Answer wf , te(l me yes^ or nom
Lei us go then, it pleases me^
I win accompany you.
Whither shall we go t
Let us goto the Park.
Let us go into the meadows*
Shalt we take a coack ?
As you please.
Let us go on foot.
You are in the right.
That ts good/or one's^healih\
Walking gets one an appetite*
Come come^/kt us walk.
Which way shdU we got
Which way you pHease.
This way or that.
Let us go this way. Iri^ht.
On the right hand^ or to the
On the left hand, or to the left.
Will you £0 by water T
Where is ike boat f
W^ere are the watermen t
Step into the boat.
We will Just cross the water.
The water is very smooth and
calm.
It begins to move.
Where will you landf
We are near the shore,
*F
8^
A New Spanish Geammar.
Para el barco.
Fas^mos la vista sobre estos
campos y prados.
Que verdiira tan hermosa 1
Eatos prados estdo ' esmaltados
con varieddd de flores*
Que prospecto tan beruioso 1
Este lugar es niuy ameno.
Los arbales echan flores.
Los rosales empi6zan i, ecbar
capullos. [rosas.
Aun DO est&n abiertas estas
Crece el trigo.
Prometen mucbo los panes.
Las espigas son muy largas.
Y6 el trigo esto niadfiro.
£sta es una bella llantira.
Estas s6mbras son muy apa-
Que todo tan hermoso ! [cibies.
Ma parece que est6y en un
paraiso terren&l.
No oye vm* la dutce melodla
delasaves?
£1 canto suave del niysen6r.
Aun no estamos en Mayo.
Anda Tin. demasiado presto.
No le pu^do seguir.
No.pu6do fr tan de priesa.
No me es posibte alcanzarle.
£8 vm. un podre caminante.
Le suplico ande un poco mas
despacio.
Descans6mos un rato.
N6 vale la pena.
£st4 vm. cansado 1
£st6y molido.
Acostemonos en la yerba.
Me temo que est^ nfimeda.
Como puede sir? no ha Ho-
▼ido.
Basta la humed&d de la nocbe.
Ni aiiin quiero sentarme en ^1
suelo.
Pasemos pues 6 esa selva.
Entr^mos en £se bosque.
Que sitio tan gustoso I
Que id6neo para estudiar I
Stop the boat.
Let U8 view these fields and
meadows*
What a fine green is here/
The meadows are enamelled
wiUi a variety offineflowers.
What a fine prospect !
This is a very jpleasamt air.
The trees are tn blossom-
The ross'bushes begin to bud^
Thetk roses are not blown yet.
The com comes up.
There is a good Aow of com.
The ears are very long.
The com is already rtpe.
This is a fine plain. [sant.
These shades are very plea^
How fine aU things are I
MetiUnks I am in an eOrtKly
paradise.
Do you not hear the sweet me*
lody of birds 1 [nigMingale.
TTte sweet warbling of the
It is not May yet.
You go too fast,
I cannot follow you.
I cannot go so fast.
It is impossible for me to keep
up with you.
You are a sorry walker.
Prtty go a Uttle slower.
Let us rest a little.
It is not worth the while.
Are you weary t
I am very tired.
Let us Ue down upon the grass*
lam afraid it is dmnp.
How can it be; it has not
rained. [euffident.
The dampness of the night ia
Nor would I set upon the
ground.
Let us go over into that woodf.
Let us go into that grove.
What a pleasant place f
Howfitforstwfyi
Part V.
Familiar Phrases.
S!i
He aqoi tref pas^os.
Que bien plantados estan estos
irboles !
Se iDclinan unos hacia otros.
Estos arboles, hacen bella
sombra. [da !
Qoe esp^ esi& esa arbole-
Los ikyoB del 861 no la pueden
peuetr^r.
He aqui bermosos huertos.
Hay mucba fruta.
Vto maozanas, peras, avell&oas^
guiodas. [tafias.
Antes quisi^ra nueces o cas-
Estos albaricoqoes y p^nigos
me bacen Tenir el agua &
' la boca*
Bien me comi^ra algunas de
estas curu^las, [guindds l
Qaanto cuesta la Sbra de
Ocbo quartos.
Compr^mos algunas.
M6 temo que nos mojemos.
Rep&ro que d tkmpo empiSza
I nublarse.
Volv^onos.
Empieza ^ ser tarde.
Se pone el s61. .
No corra ?m.
Aguardeme un poco.
Vamos, vamos« si estuTiire
cansado, descansar& c6nan-
do.
Y aun mejor en la cama.
XVII. Del iiempo»
Que tiempo hace I
Hace buen tiempo t
Hace m^l tiempo 1
Hace cal6r ?
Hace friol
Luce el 861 f
Hace bello tiempo.
Hace mal tienipp.
£1 tiempo est4 aeco, bume-
do» llu?iosby tempestuiso,
ventoso*
Here are three waike.
How well those trees are
planted!
They seem to kiss each other.
These trees make a fine shade.
[is.
How thick with trees that grove
The sun'beams cannot pierce
through them.
Here are fine orchards.
There is a great deal of fruit.
I see apples, pears, filberds,
cherries. [chesnuts.
I had rather have walnuts or
These apricots and peaches
make my mouth water,
I could eat some of those
plums.
What are cherries a pound f
Two-pence.
Let us buy some.
I am afraid we shaU he wet.
I see the weather begins to
grow cloudy.
Let us go back again.
It grows late.
The sun sets.
Do not run.
Stay for me a little.
Come J eomCf if you be weary,
you wiU rest yourself at
simper.
And yet better in bed*
XV IL Of the weather.
How is the weather?
Is it fine weather?
Is it bad weather?
hit hot?
Is it cold?
Does the sun shine ?
It is fine weidher.
It is bad weather.
It is dry, wetj rainy ^ 9/tcrmyy
or windy weather.
♦ F2
84
A New SPANISiH Gl^AMMAR.
£s tiempo inconfltante y var
riable.
Hace gran calor, mucho frio.
£1 tienipQ estd claro y sereoko^
Luce el 861.
Hace un tiempo obsciiro.
£1 cielo est^ carga4o de otibea.
Las Dubes son iQuy espesas.
Llu^ve ?
No, cr6o que no.
£n]pieza a llov^r.
Aiin no llueve.
Presto lloverd k cantaros.
Yd llu6ve.
Solo es un aguac^ro.
Pasar^ luego.
Me temo que tendr6ino8 dgua.
No tema vm. no tenga mi^do.
£« una nube que pasa.
Todo el dia llovera.
Mi^cho lo dudo.
Presto acabard de Hover.
Pongdnionos al abrigo.
No hay que tem^r.
Solo es agua.
Tiene vm. mi6do del &giia ?
Solo temo echir 4 ped^ mi
vestido.
Yd tenemos igua. [tiempo»
No debemos salir con este
Granlza 6 apedr6a«
Qraniza muy recio.
Ahora ni6va.
Que! nieva! [grandes.
Mire vm. que copos tan
Yela tambien.
No, que desy^la.
^Crio que yela muy fuerte.
Es yelo muy duro.
£1 yelo se d^rrite*
La ni6ve se bace figua.
Cae aguani6ve.
Corre una borrasca grande.
Atru^na. .
Relaropagu£a« .
Solo alumbran los rel&mpar
g08. .
Corre mucho viento.
Hace mucho dhre.
£1 Yiento viene muy frio.
It is unsettled and changficHU
•meather.
It is very hot, or very qoUL
It is dewr and sex^ne.ioeafh^.
Th^ sun shines.
It is dark uoeather*
b is cloudy, gU^omy v^eaJtker.
The clouds are very thiak*
Does it rain ?
No, I think not
It begins to rain.
It does not rain yet.
It imtt soon rain cats and dogs.
It rains already.
It is but a sh&iver.
It vdU be over presently,
I am afraid tve shall have rain*
Neverjeax.
It is only aJMn^^ cloud.
It tvSl rain auday.
I question it.
The rain mil soon be over.
Let us shelter ourselves.
There is nothing to fear.
It' is.notking but vocderj.
Are you afraid of ViaHer 9
I am only afraid ofspoUingmy
clothes.
It rains already. [«vmA^«
We must not go o^ lA such
It hails.
It hails, very hard*
Nam it sno/vos.
Does it sn&O) f
Look at those gMOtJIaies.
Itfreetes also.
Ao, it thavas.
I think i^fireexes very hard.
It is a hardjrost.
Thejrost is broken^
The sn&ao melts avm^/.
There is a sleet JaUmg.
It is a great storm.
It thunders.
It lightens.
One can see nothing bui the
fishes qf lightning.
7%e ^nd blovos very hffrd.
The mndis very AuKr.
The wind bhws cola.
II
Part V.
Familiar Prkasbb.
85
Se mud6 el vi«Bto«
£1 viento cte.
Fa86 la tonnenta.
£1 tiempo se aclira.
£1 ci61o empieza 4 adar&ne.
Se abre el tiempoi empi6za &
serenane.
Dividense las nubei^ desapa^
recen, j desfanecense po*
CO & poco.
Y4 vemos lucir el s61. ([Ieste«
Veo el arco iris, el arco cd-
£8 selial de buen tiempo.
Hace una neUina muy espesa.
No DOS pod^mos v^r.
He alll una nlebla que se le-
nuitak [p4rla*
Pero el s61 empieza a disi-
Es una Di6bla hedionda.
The xoind is changed.
The wind Jails.
'The Herm is over.
It clears up.
The sky begins to dear up.
It begins to be fair again.
The clouds divide^ or break
asunder^ and disappear by
degrees.
The sun begins to shine*
I see the rainbow*
his a sign of fair weather.
There is a wry thick mist.
We cannot see one another.
There is a fog rising.
But the sun begins to disperse
It is a stinking fog.
XVlII. Db la hora.
Que hora es i
V6a ym. que hora es.
Digame que hora es ?
Mo 8ab6 VOL que hora es ?
£s temprano.
No es tarde.
Nos volToremos & casa }
Hay bastante tiempo.
Solo es medio dia.
Escercadela una.
Ahora di6 la una.
£s la una j quarto.
£s la una y media.
Es la una y tres quartof .
Es cerca de las dos, 6 daran
las dos.
No he oldo el reldx.
Han dado las fteis.
Sonlassi6teal86].
Acaban de d&r las si6te.
La$i ocho han dado.
Certa de las diez.
Es cerca de hn doze de la
noche, 6 media nocbe*
Comolosabeviii.?
XVIII. Ofthetimeofthe
day,
Whato'dociisitf
See xbhat o'clock it is.
TeU me what o'clock itisf
Don't you know what o'clock it
It is early. [Uf
It is not late.
ShaU we go home f
Time enough.
tt is but twelve o* clock
ft is almost one.
It struck one just now.
It is a quarter past one;
Half an hour past one.
Three quarters past one.
It is near upon . two, or it is
upon the stroke of two.
I have not heard the clock.
It is past six.
It is seven by the sun.
It struck seven just now.
It has struck eight.
About ten o'clock.
It is even twelve o'clock^ or U is
even midnight.
Hew do you mm Uf
86
A New Spanish Grammar.
D4elrel6x.
Le oye vm. d4r ?
No creo que sea tan tarde.
Mire su rel6x.
Adelanta mucho»
Atraza.
No anda, e8t4 parado.
D6 le vm. cuerda.
Yea vm. que hora es al rel6x
de sol. [dan.
Los quadrantes no concuer-
La mano estd quebrada* [cioh?
Adonde estd su relox de repeti-
No lehalloy esti extraviado.
The clock strikes.
Do you hear it strike 9
1 think it is not so late*
Look atyouTWAch*
Jt goes toojixst.
It goes too dom.
It does not gOf it is thorn.
Wind it up.
See ^mhat o*dock it is hi the
mn^id. ^
The sun'dials do not agree.
The hand is broken*
Where is your repeater f
I cannot jind U^ a is out of the
way*
XIX. De las estaciofies del
am.
Que estaciones le gusta mas ?
La'^primavera es lamasagra-
dsrale de todas.
Toda Is natural^za se anima.
£1 tiempo estd muy templado.
Ni hace demasiado calor, oi
demasij^o frio.
Arden entonces todos los anl-,
males en am6r.
No hay primavera este aSio.
Los tiempos estan rebueltos.
Es un invierno moderddo.
Nada adelanta. [sada.
La estacion e&\Jk muy atra-
Ten^mos un estlo muy calo-
Oh ! que calor ! £roso«
Hace uh calor excesivo.
Que tiempo tan pesado !
No piiedo con tanto cal6r.
£s.t6y sudando, hecho agua.
Me liiu^ro de cal6r.
Jam^s tuve tanto ca]6r«i
£s muy bello tiempo para los
frutos de la tierra.
Tendremos mucho heno.
La cosecba serfi muy abun-
dante.
Hay abuud&ocia de frmflgs*
XIX. Of the seasons.
What season do you like best f
The spring is the most jhasant
of all.
Every thing smiles in nature.
The toeather is very mild.
It is neither too hot, nor i09
cold.
AU creatures then make love, or
are in love.
We haoe no spring this year.
The seasons ate (Ssordered.
It is a mUdmnter,
Nothing isjorooard.
The season is very backward.
We have a very hot summer*
Hoto hot it is i
It is excessively hot.
Oh I and tohat dose, or heavy
Kmeather {
I cannot endure heat.
I am all over in a perspralAon,
I am extremely hot.
I never fAt such heat.
It is very fine ineaiher for the
Jruits of the earth. \hay*
We shaUhave a great deal qf^
This harvest will be ptentifid^ :
There is abundance qf/ruit.
Part V.
Familiar Phrases.
87
Todos los &rbo]es han pro*
dQcido mueho. [^gua.
Nos K bsuff^ ..falta un poco de
La coseclia estd cerca.
£»piezaD & seg^r los trigos.
So ban segado los prado^,
£8 menester recoger lot panes.
Estdroox en la canfcuJa.
Fas6 ya el vera no.
£1 otofio, ia calda de las hojas
le hk sucedido.
La Vendimia se acerca.
Hermo^a ▼endimia tenemos.
Yendimiar^mos en tres 6 quarto
dias. [afio.
Los vinos ser&n buenos este
Las viSas han dado bien.
£1 vino 8er& barato.
£s preciso recoger los frutos
atrasados. [viemo.
Las manzanas y peras ^le in-
Los diss han acortado mucho.
Las mafianas son frias.^
£1 invierno viene acercando.
Muy presto es noche.
Las tardes jon largas.
£mpieza la lumbre a recrejr.
No roe gusta el inTiemo.
Los dias son xnuy bre?es.
Y4 no es de dia & las cinco.
No se v6 & las cinco.
£mpieza 6 anochecer & las
quatro.
Amanece & las siete.
No se sabe en que pas&r el
tiempo.
£ste invierno es muy frio> muy
&spero.
Se acuerda vm. del grande in-
vierno ?
Jamas vi invierno tan frio.
£mpiezan 4 crecet los dias.
Los dias son un poco mas
largos.
Casi no hemos tenido invier^
no. .
La primav^ra ya viene & re^-
gocijar la na^iraKia.
AU the treei areJiiU of fruit.
We toant a little rain*
Harvest time draws near*
The^ begin to cut doum the
corn.
The meadoms are mowed*
We must gft in the com.
We are in the dog-days*
The summer is gone*
Autumn^ the jail of ike leaves^
has taken its place.
Vintage dravas near.
There is a very fine vintage*
We shall gaiKer grapes in three
or Jour days*
Wine xjoiU be good this year.
The 'dues have born a good crop.
Wine toill be cheap*
We must gather tkejruits of the
latter season.
Winter apples and pears*
The days are very much short'
The mornings are cold* [^ened.
Winter comes and draws near.
It is soon night*
The evenings are long.
Fire begins to smdltvell*
Winter does not please me*
The days are very short*
It is no longer aay4ight at five
o^dock.
One cannot see at five.
The txxjilight begins at Jour*
The day breaks at seven*
One cannot tell how to spend
one's time.
This is a very cold, or very
sharp winter*
Do you remember the hard
winter f
I never saw so cold a winter*
The days begin to lengthen*
The days are a little longer.
We have scarce had any winter
at all*
The spring will soen revive
nature*
ee
A New Spanish Geammar.
XX. De la ida i la escuela. ipi. Of go^ to sch^^.
De donde viene vm. ?
Pe mi casa. De cftsa*
Adondtf v4 vm. tan de pricaa?
Voj 4 la esciiela. -
Venga conmigo.
Agudrde un poco.
Vamoiios, le i^iplico.
Porqu^ juega ym. andando i
1^0 ae entreten^.
Lkgaremos baatfiate presto.
Que hora es ?
Cerca de las aie^.
AuD no ha 4&do A reji6x.
Vamos k priesa, despaohikaos.
Quien viene por alii?
£a uno da nueatros condisci-
pulos.
Iremps los tres juntos.
From ^ence doytm tome f
From home.
Where are ^ougoins sojiutf
I am going to school.
Come along «udA me»
&ay a IHt^,
Pray let us go.
Why do you play as you go f
Ik) not loiter.
We shaU arrive time enough.
Whatoclodkisitf
It is almost seven.
The clock has not struck yet*
Let us make ha4e.
Who comes there f
It is one of our sc^oplfeUofoss.
Let us go together.
"mm
'mrr^f
Xkl. Ei^ h escmlu.
Sientese en sii lug^r.
Cuelgue 6u aqmbt^ro.
Adonde est& au libro ?
L6a su lecci6a*
Estiidie su lecci6n. rm^ia*
Aprenda 'sji li^ccion ip jne*
Kada hace sino jugfcr.
Le aDotar§.
Se lo dir^ d maestri.
Acabdvm.?
Aun no he acab^pc
Que e8t4 escribi^P^o ?
Escribd ml exercicjq.
Todo lo be escrjto.
Kb me mdeva.
Haga mp un poco i^p Ijjgjr,
Tiene bastantelug&r.
Vaya a^ris m\ poco*
Un poco m^ arrt{){^
AJgd TCkfLS ai^((xo.
Sirvase de darjUe un libro*
iiasta aond^ ctecimos r .
Hastaaqui, .
Quyalei^^lutarlaf
XXI. IntheacbooL
Sit in your place.
Hang up yai^r ^af.
Where tsyoiffkf^f
Read your lessm^.
Study your lesson*
Get your lesson by hearty
You do nothing outpiay*
Jxmll set youtgf*
I 'mU tell your madpr <fyou%
Have you donef
I have not done fjpt.
Wh(ft ifre j/QU^o^nfif^^^
I am vmtthg my exercise.
J(li(^ve ^iritt^» it oUp
Do not jog me.
Make a httkroomfos^m^
You have room enou^y ,
SU a liAUeJsrtifir^
A lit(le higher.
Ji little hwer.
Pray give me a took.
H&mfar do toe say f
Which is jfi^ ti^^ .
Part V.
Familiab Pheases.
89
A quien es este libro ?
Sabe yvh su lecci6n de me-
Aun DO. [moria?
Apanteme vm.
Ha de leerla tres veces*
Quien lo ha dicho ?
£1 sefior AAo mandiS.
Tiene vm. pluma y tinta ?
Escriba vm. su eKjereicio.
Le e8cribi6 vm. j^al.
Lea vm. su teccioD*
Diga su leccioQ.
Le azotardn.
Mer^ce vm. az6tes.
Porqu^ Uega vpi. tan tarde i
Tuve que hacer.
Que pegocio le detuvo i
A quo hora ae levant6 i
A Fas ochQ.
Porqu^ 86 levant^ tao tarde i
£8 vm. un flox6n.
Qued68e en su Aiio.
Qmtesc da mi lug&r.
Porqu6 me rempuja as! ?
Quien }e t6ca ?
No se enoje vm.
Me quexar^ al maestro?
Bigaselo, si quisiere.
Poco me importa. [quieto.
Sefior qo me quiere dexar
Me agarr6 el libro de las
Hace burja de mi. [jnanos.
Me tir6 de los cab^os*
Me da patddas.
Me empiija fuera de mi lugar.
No hay tal.
Que bulla es esta ?
Tomen este muobacho y deala
una mano de aaotes*
Sefior, perdonemi^ vm.
^upliQ(|le, Sefior, pftrdnneme
esta sola v6|i. [lante.
Portege- i^uea ncjor ea ade*^
Whose book is this f
Can you say your Utson by
Not yet. Iheart f
Do prompt me.
You must read U threetifMM*
Who said so f
Mr. A. desired it.
Have you pen and inkf
Write yMr exercise*
You have written it ill.
Read your lesson.
Say your lesson.
You will bejlogged.
You deserve to oejhgged*
Why do you come soTatef
I had some business.
What business kept youf
At t»hat time did you rise f
At eight o'clock.
Why do you rise so late f
You are a sluggard.
Keep in your ^ace.
Giiouiqf my place*
Why do you push me sof
Who touches you f
Do not be an^.
I mU comjdam to the mastefi .
Tdl him, if you toiU.
I do not care.
Sirf he wont let me alone*
He snatched away my book*
He laughs at me.
HepuUed me by the hair*
He kicks me.
He thrusts me out of my place*
I deny it.
What noise is this?
Take up this boy, and Jkg
him soundly*
Sift I beff your pardon*
Prayf &tr, Jbrgive me this one
time* [then*
Be a good bey for thejktwti
90
A New Spanish Gaammar.
Dialogos Familiares, Espafidles e logleses. —
Familiar Dialogues, Spanish and English.
Di&ldgo I. Acerca de salu- Dialogue I. Of saluting,
ddr^ 6 informarse de la aod ioqairing after any
sal&d^ one's health.
BUENOS dias, teaga vrnd.
Yo 86 log deseo d vm.
Buenas tardea d6 Dios & vm.
Buen&s Doches^ tenga vm.
Seryid6r de U8t6d.
Como e8t& ym« ?
Bueno, p«ra servir & vm.
Como va ?
Siempre al senricio de vm.
Y & vm. Se|ior» como le va i
Muy bien, gracias k Dios.
Estoy bueno para seryir a vm.
Yi^mos pasanao.
Me alegro mucho de v6rle.
Me alegro de v^rle con salud.
Agradezcolo infinito.
Viva vm. muchos aS^os.
Comb estd el Sefior su her-
mano ? CH^^ ^^ ^'*
Estaba bueno la ultima vez
£st& bu6no, gracias i Dios.
Cr6o que le v& bien.
Av^r noche est&ba bu6no.
Me alegro de eso.
Adondeesti?
En el campo.
En la ciudid.
En casa.
H& salldo poco hice.
Se alegrara de v6r & vm.
Celebrar4 mucho saber que
vm. goza de perfecta salud.
Vm. le favorece mucho.
Tambien 'encontrar& vm. con
el mas sincere reconocimiento.
Soy su servidor.
Como e8t4 la Sefiorlta ?
Estd bu6na. *
Cr6o que e8t& muy buena.
No esii muy bu6na« *
Est& algo maUta.
GOOD morrotOf Sir.
I tvish you the same.
Good ^ernoon. Sir.
Good night, Sir.
Your servant. .
Hoto do you dof
Very tv^, at your service.
Hoto are you f
Ready to do you service, [j/ou f
And yoUf Sir^ how is it xdtk
Very toell, thank God.
I am ioelly at your service.
Pretty tveU, so so.
I am very glad to see you.
I am glad to see you in good
hemh.
I most humbly thank you.
I am obliged to you.
How doeiyour orother do?
£saw him.
He was well the last time I
He is wellf thank God.
I hope he is wdl.
He was well last night.
I am ^ad of it.
Where is hef
In the country..
In town.
At home.
He is just gofne out.
He wdl be glad to see you.
He xjoiU be very happy to hear
you enjoy perfect health.
you are very polite.
You will also^ meet with a most
sincere return.
I am his servant.
Hon is'the young lady f
She is wdl.
I bdieve she is xoeU.
She is not well.
SheisiU.
Part V.
Familiar Phrases.
91
Ay^r mafSana estaba indis-
Hela aqui queVi^ne. [puesUu
SeHorita, a los pi^s de ▼m.
Scrvidora de rm. Sefior.
Como . ha est^do vin. desde
que DO la he visto ?
Siempre bien, gr^cias 4 Dies.
Como se halla.vm. ?
Muy bien.
Me da gusto de siib^rlo.
De cocazon \o 8gradezco«
Fero como le \k ahora ?
Asi, asiy pasando.
Ho he pasado buena noche.
JjO siento muchisimo.
Es un doldr.
¥o la compadezco mucho.
No puedo yo lisongearme
mucho de safud.
Que ha tenido vm. ?
Mi estdmago ha estado des-
compuesto. [por ahora.
Parece que est& vm. buena
A si asly para servir & vm.
Como estan en casa ?
£st4n nuestros amigos de la
corte, del campo, de la
ciuddd buenos ?
Todos estan buenos, menos
mi madre.
Que le duele ? [ ti6ne ?
Que mal, que enfermed4d
Ti^ne calenturai do]6r colicOy
tos.
Le du61e la cab^za.
Desde quando ?
Desde media noche empez6 &
padecer.
iUesieo que se mejore pronto.
Puedo yo servirla de algo i
Puede roandarme con toda
satisfaccion.
La Sefiora nunca ha dudado
del favor de vm. [vide*
Suplico a vm. que no me q1-
£so queda de mi cvfenta.
Ha mucho tiempo que estd
mala?
She tM» iU ytderdtt^ morning.
Here she is coming.
Madam^ lam your most kumilc
servant.
Sir, I am'your servant.
H&m have you been since I ioi«
you last f
Very weU, Sir^ thank God.
Ham do wufind yourselff
Quite weU.
I am pleased to hum it»
I thank you heariUy.
Buthowisitwithyounoiwf
Pretty uMy sOf so.
I twM a litUe out of order last
night.
I am very sorry Jor it.
That is very patnfidjbr me.
That pains me much.
I can t boast much in point ^
health.
What V)as the matter mth you f
My stomach toas a little out ^
order.
I hope you are nam quite to0&
Middling J at your service.
Haw doaUat your houset
Ourjriends at courts in ike
cowntry^ in town f areiheuaU
They are aU V)dlf except my
mother.
What ails herf
What is her compUini^
She has an ague, thechtdiCf a
cough.
She %as the head^iehe.
Since when? or h&m long since f
At midnight she tiMu seized
voith it.
Iv^sh her a speedy recovery.
Can I render her any serowef
She may conmand me vM
cofffidence.
She never doubted of ytmf
goodness.
jTbeg you voill not forget it.
Let that lie to my account.
Is it a long time that she has
b^ehiUf
I; .
9«
A New. Spju^isa Grammar.
Hb BftmuciiO*
Deseo que te m^ore.
La Sefiom sabe muy bien d
favor de vm.
Se alegrttri de T^r 4 mid.
Sojr muj senriddr Bujro.
Siento no ten^r tiempo de
verlm hoy.
Sientete rmi, on rtto.
De veras no pucdo.
Estd vm. moj de priesa ?
Volver6 maSnuu CP^'^^
No puede vm. esperar an
Tengo negocios urg^tes.
Solo vengo para aab^r como
estaban vms.
Binda vOi. mis resp^ctos 4 sa
hermana
Encomi6ndeme 4 mi SeRora 8U
tnadre.
Sua 6rdene8 seran puntnal-
m^nte obedecidas.
Digale wul <juanto uento 8ab&:
gu indi8po8ici6n.
Lohai4 siniaha.
Vaya vm. con Dioi* 1
Quede Tin. con Diog. J
£gtimo mucho esta vmttu
Buenas n6che89 Caball^ro.
Sefiorayfi la obedi6ncia de vmd.
Dial. II« Acerea del hahlar
JSspanoL
Aprende vm. el Espafiol ?
Si Seflori dgun tiempo hace.
To ne empCRo en apreaderlo.
Vm. bace muy bien.
Ei nna lengna miiy iitil, y
lienuottu
£• tambien may |paci6aB)
Uena de sal, y expresion;
M« ban dicfab tambien qua es
mas varoml, y ccqpioea que
laArancdMU
No dbitan^e la VtmofH^ es
'maidembda.
Si loft EspaBoles Imbieran
Nai very kmg.
Ivish herbetier.
She is obliged to y<nu
She toiU he glad to see you.
lam her most hunMe eenrnnf.
I am sorry I have not finte to
see her to-^day.
Sit damn a Ume.
Indeed I cannot.
You are in great haste f
I will come again to-morrow.
Pray cannot you stay a Uttlef
I have earnest hudness,
I onfy come to knom hov) you
are.
Present my sendee to your
brother.
Present my respects to the lady
your mother.
You may depend upon it.
TeU her I am sorry to knoto
shots tft.
JshaU not Jail to do it.
FarexoeUf Sir.
I thank you for this visit.
Goodnight, Sir.
Good night, Madam.
Dial. IL Of speaking
Spanish.
Do you learn Spanish f
Yes, Sir, I hO'^ learned it for
some time.
I endeavour to learn it.
You do very todl.
It is a very usefidand very fine
lanpMse.
It ts mso very vsitty, JM of
humour and expression*
I mm told it is also tftore
tnardy and copious than the
Fr&sch.
NdMcUhstanding, the French is
moreinfcuihims.
Had the Spaniards cuUh^lted
Part V.
Familiar Phrasal
93
cidtivado sn lengua como has
IngleseSi en estos dos ultimos
8i^ofl» m duda ^pie swia
miieho mas de modiu
Por. la superioriddd de su
diccion^ y la aoaridikk de
8u estilo.
Porque sit proauficiacJon no
tiene mas de 24 sonidos.
Porque cada letva se debe
pronunciar.
X sieiupre c<m el miBmasamde*
Porque lu pgammclaciott se
puede explicar suficiente*'
mente en una pagina de
duodecimo.
TamJiien se puede adquirir
con facilidad en madia hora.
No hay estudiante que en so
I ra, leccion no la pueda
con £icilidad disdnguir*
Estk en su poder con 8 lee-
clones, el leerla corrieiite«
mentey y con 20 entoMbn
gerfectamente qualqnier H-
CO con la ayuda del die-
cionario.
No tiene declinacton mo es*
para los prooiMnbres pep^
somdes;
No tiene mas de un verbo
auxtliar.
Casi constantameutaguarda la
nfttucal precedenda de las
palabras.
La preposicbn nanca se en«
cuentra sino ea delante de su
proprio>caso.
Todas sus irregularldadeS' «e
pueden con facilidad cov-
T^r.
Por esto la lengua Espaflola
ea la mas pr6pnapara isfinm^
derse por arte.
Y la fnas proporclonada pgrs
las Univ^sidadesi traUnos,
y comercio.
Toda su brillancez 8» descu-
bri6 en el siglo 1^.
Y entonces se hablaba mas
ibm langume oM^ikg Mngfuh
have in these tooo tati egHtmrieSf
9o dtmbk bia U uteM fe j^
nitefymoreinfiahionm
For lit mtfenorihf ff diction
and nfimm ff'il^
vrtmundatitmJioioidp
ttoentt^Jhwr sounds,
tkery ^plter is to h$^ jMi-
flounced, {smmd.
And sdnmfs mith thm same
Its pronunciation masf be: suf^
JkuHify eeqdained htr m dwo^
denmo>j3(sge»
It isaboeasSy ocgnirediH half
an hour.
There io no hapnei^ Aat t» Ite
Jirst lesson nuw not he JiBy
acfuamtedmiihit^
It is in his power, tuA eight
lessons, to readJktmUfyf and.
in fmenbf to wmerstand per*
fedly every bock, witk the
help, cfi a- dutifmfjr^
M hasino^dedemioni.butjir the
personal prowmne^
It has no mom than camauxF'
Uiary verh
It ha0^ idmost oonstantiu the
natural precedence ^ iMe
words.
The prepasitiem nemr being
placed but befbfe He: cnm
AH. its irrqpdaritief May be
easily corrected^
Thus the Spanish language: is
Aenmt pnpet ta be learned
bfj^aet.
It is the most proper^ ta^be
adeptftU^the univerniiet^ftm
trentieBj andjbr cammercem
All its brilliancy appeamd m
the leth century.
And it vm then more commonly
94
A New Spanish Grammar.
comiomieiktey qae oinguna
otralengua.
Lot autores EspafioleB de
aquel siglio hicieron enton-
cesy y aun bacen ahora asi en
▼erso como en prosa una may
brillante figura.
Ahora tambien hay muchda
libros nuevos. «
Efcritos en el reinado de
Carlos III.
Que yo no cito^ porque son
muchos.
Laprimera leccion me mo8tr6^
lo muy facil que es esta
lengua.
Por mi| yo gusto mucho de
ella.
Porque facilita nuestros me*
dios de formentar d mas
importante comercio que
poiseemos*
Digo el de EspaSa.
Pero no empieze ym« sin un
buen maestro.
Porque un mal habitono es
facu de dexar.
Se dice, que vm. habla muy
bien el EspafioL
Entiendole medianamente.
Que libros 16e vm. para apren-
der el Espanol ^
La Gramatica de Don •^——9 y
los Exereicios por el mismo
Autor.
Es^nktural de EspafSa^ y hom-
bre muy docto.
Leo tambien Gil Bias de San-
ftillana, y la historia de Ras-
selas, en EspaSol.
Porque no l€e vm. Don
Quix6te2
Mi maestro me dixo que no
era libro para principiante8«
Que raz6a tiaie ?
Porque hay en el muchos mo-
dos de habl&r obsol6tos y
antiquddos.
Que oiccionfirio tiene vm ^
spoken than any other hn-
guage*
The Spanish writers^ both in
verse and in prose of that
century made^ and yet make,
a very shining ^figure.
There are also nov) many nevj
vsorhs*
Written in the reim of Charles
III. _ -^
Which I do not quote^ becatise
they are very numerous^
The first lesson I had, con-
vinced me of the facUity of
this language.
For my part, I like Spanish
verymuch^
Because it facilitates our means
of carrying on the most tm-
portant trade ijoe possess.
I mean that imth Spain.
But do not begin it vdthout a
xneU qualified master.
Because an evil habit is not
easUy removed.
It is said, that you speak very
/\OQd Spanish,
understand it pretty fneU.
What books do you ready 'to
learn Spanish?
The Grammar of Don — ,
and the Exercises by the same
Author.
He is a native ofSpain^ and a
very learned man.
I read also Gil Bias of Santil-
lane^ and the story ofRassdaSy
in Spanish..
Why do you not read Don
Quixote?
My master told me this toas not
a book proper for beginners.
Whyf ^"^ -^ "^
Because it contains a great
many obsolete and old words
and idioms.
What dictionary do you make
use off
Part V.
Familiar Phrasss.
96
£1 de Baretti.
Que aprende vm. de memoria ?
Estddio algunas voces del
▼ocabuldrio.
Dlgame vm. como se llama
aauello ?
Creo que se llama<— — .
Muy bieD, y esto?
Perd no estudia vm. alguna
cosa adem^ del vocabularlo?
Si, Sefior, los exemplos de las
reglas de la gramdtica.
£1 libro de exerdcioSy frases
fiuniliares, y algunos dii-
logos.
V4 vm. aprendiendo blen.
Agradezco 4 vm. el que me
idiente.
Proniincio bien ?
Bellamente, lindamente.
Solo le falta mas exercicio.
Nada se adquiere sin trabijo.
Por poco que se aplioue vmd.
sabra muy presto el Espafiol.
Est6y coov6ncido de esto.^
Me han dicho aue vm. enten«
dia muy bien el Castell4no.
Quisiera que fu^e verdad.
Supongo que desea vm. sab6r
esta herm^sa lengua.
Lo h& de supon6r asl, porque
en efecto lo deseo.
Bien, le voy & ensefiar el
modo de habilir en poco el
Espafiol.
Se lo agradecer6 mucho.
£1 metodo mas facil para
aprend^r una lengua, . es
habldrla 4 meniido.
Pero para hablarla es me-
nester saber algo de ella.
Ya sabe vm. bastante.
Solo 86 algunas palabras de las
mas necessariaSy y algunas
sentencias breves.
Esto basta, para empezSr a
habldr.
The dictionary ^ BareUu
What do you get by hearth
I learn some words in the voca-
hdary.
Tell me a Jem: hom do you
caUthtaf
I believe they call c^— -^.
Very toellf and this f
But do you not study any thing
else besides coords 9
YeSf Sir^ the examples HoUeh
are laid dofomfor the rules of
grammar.
The book of exercises, /kmHiar
phrases, and some dialogues^
You learn very well.
I thank you for encouraging
me.
Do I pronounce xudl9
Pretty lodl, toell enough.
You only xvant a iStk more
pracHce.
There is nothing to he got
toithout pains.
With a little application you
wUl very soon team Spanish.
I am sensible of it.
Itoas told you were very learned
in the Spanish language.
I wish it were true.
I suppose you have a mind to
learn that fine language.
You ought to suppose U^Jbr in*
deed fhave a^reat mind to it.
Welli I am gmng to teach wm
the way to speak Spanish in
a short time.
You wiil much oblige me*
The easiest method to learn
any language, is to speak it
frequent ly
But to, speak a language, oni
must know someihin^r qfit^
You know enoueh of it already.
I know but a Jew words most
neceuary, and some littk
phrases.
It is enough to begin to speak.
06
A N€i0 SFAmBU Gbammar.
Si eso fuera asii prostn^sabriA
la lengua.
No teaga rm. duda de ello.
No entiende vmd. lo que le
.diga?
Lo eotiendo j comprehdftdo
muy bieru [en' kaM4r;
Pero tengo mucha dificohid
Na tengo £EU»lid4d en habliLiv
Etto viene con el tiempo.
Tengo cortedad de hablar
por no exponerme a decir
disparates.
No se en^lMe por esto*
Poca paciencia tengo.
Hace mucho tiempo que vm*
aprende?
Dos meses ha que empeze.
Es muy corto tiempo.
No le dice su maestro que
aiemprtf bdble?
Muj ^ roeniido me lo dice;*
Porque puea no quiere vuk
habldr ?
Con quien he de kabldv ?
CoB' todos los que le hablenw
Quisi6ra habl&r, pero no* me
atrdvo.
Cr6ani0 vrn; sea atreridO) lia-
ble siempre^ bien dmlU.
Sobre todo, no omita^ vmi
occaaioa^ de habkp si' la* en-
euetttrai
Hablindo en comt^ aprende-
n^aa^hablar.
Ma^rpensado vm. muy bien.
Seguir6 pues su oons^jo.
Har& vm* muy bieo.
Jfit tvere so, IshenddiHathifrt
time ham ihe longtutge.,
Do not doubt if.
-Do not you understand whtH I
9ftg to you f ' ^
I understand and compfekend it
very xvdt. [^speak*
But I find k very hnrid to
I h»c^ Hat the jad^y of
speetKtitff*
'not c&me^ in fk/te.
I am askttnted to taik^ as I f^it^
speak nonsense.
Do not be distoura^ hy f^bff.
I am a little impaitent*
Is it long since you begdttfi>
learn f
It is txoo months since.
That is a very short thne.
Does not your master fett wtu
that you must a¥03a!y» speaHf
He tells me so very often.
Why do not ye^ speak fheit?-
Who vM ybit haiit me speak
WUh aii those t^at speak to you.
Itoould'gladlyspeakf but-fdUre
noU
JBefiooe^ tntfi be cotifdknff. ttiwL
soeak^ well ot ill.
Above eiif ne^o^r omit any^at*
casion of spiking that ntrfy
ojbr.
It is by speakings that tloe fctf^i
iosfmki
Yovt^^fKOfud^'Oery rigM tl '
I shall Jbllow your (uMtieUfkH.
You xumdti very voelti
4i«-^kHrflilA*i
jmmtmmuuk >v mrm ftTT'-m
SUlL in. Pam Mlut
Inglks.
Sefior,;ftft<Tm« Espafiol?
Sl^SeSor, pam'Servidet; [vm;?
Be que parage de £spafia es
De Madrid, de Toledo, de
Dequeciudid? [Sevilla, (§-c.
Dikl. up: To' s0ea4 ttnjf-
Ifeh*
iStr, at^youaSpMUf^
Iksf, Sir, at youH* sei^Vk^.
What part of SpoSn Oi^goU^
Of Madridy ToM9i Sevm
Ofvohat city? [Ae.
Part V.
Familial Dialogues.
91
De Cadiz.
Quanto tiempo h£ce que esii
▼m. en Inglaterra ?
Hace mas de un afio.
Habla ym. Ingles ?
Hablo un poco.
Pero mas entiendo de Id que
hablo.
La lengua Ingl6sa es muy
dificiutosa para los Espa-
Sioles.
La £spa!i61a no es dificll para
los Ingl6se8%
Estoy persuadido de lo con-
trario.
Con dificuMd lo cr6o.
La experi^ncia nos lo muestra
todos los dias.
La pronunciaci6n de el Espa-
561 es mucho mas fi^cil que
la del Ingles.
Ellos pronuncian todas las le-
tras como las escriben.
Conozco 4 varies Ingl6ses que
. pronuncian muy bien eh
Castellano.
Ap^nas se podr4 hallar un
Espa!l61 entre ciento que
pronuncie bien el Ingl6s«
L<Ni Ingl6ses se comen la mi-
t4d de sus voces.
Dan un solo sonldo 4 tres 6
quatro letraff.
Pero en EspafSol cada letra
tiene su sonido.
De suerte que la dificultad
no parce igual de ambos
lados.
£1 Espafiol tiene la ventaja.
Y aim es menos para la gente
moza*
Porque los jovenes son como
cera blanda en que se ii
prime facilmente todo.
Of Cadiz.
How long hwtie you been in
England f
It is more than a year.
Do you speak English?
I speak it a little.
But I understand it better than
I can speak.
The English language is 'bery
difficidtjbr Spaniards.
The Spanish is not difficult to
Englishmen. '
I am persuaded of the contrary*
I can hardly believe it.
Experience shovos it us evety
day.
The pronunciation of Spanish
is a great deal more easy
than that of English.
They pronounce all their let*
ters as they torite them.
I knoxo several Englishmen
toho pronounce Spanish very
todl.
One can hardlu find one Spa*
niard in n Hundred toho can
pronounce English voeU.
The English dip most qf their
words.
They give a single sound to
three or four letters.
But in Spanish each letter
has its sound.
So the difficulty does not ap*
pear equal on both sidiSm
The Spanish has the adoan*
tage.
And yet it is less for young
people.
Because youth is like wue, on
nMch one may eatity imprtss^
any thing*
» G
98
A New Spanish Q^VfSfAR.
Di&l. VIII. Dd f»cer una
visita por la mahana.
Quien ^at^ «|ii I
Gente de p^^i ahra vi^d, li^
Aabnae estd tu wa^o. I
£sU^lacaina*
I>uernie vfyai
N6, Sefi6r, estd dispierito.
Estft ley^tado I
A(in DO ; quiere \m enUir en
8u quarto ?;.
A&i en la cama \
Me recogi. 4 i]\oche tan ^f4e^
<nie Ao me Wpo wp \e¥a$ir
tar'fdas preitb.
Qua Imo ruu de^uea de ce-
iafcr?
Comb pa^ TDBU 1^ no^ f
Jug^mp'a a'lqs najpe&
A'queju^gp?
J^^^oa. &.I08 £fepjU)s.
Luego nos foimos al bayle* .
Ha^te quehora se e^tavo tahI.?
HS^ media noch^^
A' que.IxQra 8^ aco8t6 vmd. ?
A| )a .iina.d^ la^^mche.
No estraiio que vm. se ley^te
tan tarde.
Que iiora pude^sir ?
Q^e hora le.pfurece que es ?
Han da^o la|s diez,
LevaDjteite Tmd* presto*.
Dar6mos una vuelta en el
pai;^ue .lu(sgo qu^ ei^6 ynif}^
vestido.
Bia/. VHL Of making a
mbraifi^ visit.
Who is thergf
Afriendy open Mif.c^OQr.
Where is your masierf.
H0JS u^sbeA
JOqes he^tfieeft.^%
No'f Sir, he tsatoake.
Nat yet; tioill yoM.^^Mto his
Are you in bed still f
I came to.b^ so htchgt mgldy
What diH y^ iitf^, qfier>.supppt f-.
Houo did you spendUe e'semnff
We played at card$-
What gqimti did yffupbx^M ?j "
H y u a garm^ tmck. inJUshion.
After that i/oe toent.toth^tUi*
TiU tohat-o'dogknerey^u Oerw^fL
Tillrtti^fve^
What tmidid ,yew( go Jo bedf
Aion^ in. tM nMnni9ig<^.
I do not tvpfMsifr you riatt^sa
late^
What is it o*clockf
What, o'eloqi i/a ym^take it ia
be?
Ip hofi^ struck ten*
BS>S€ immediatidyi*
We tvill go am take atumi
round, the Pari, tahat you.
are dressed.
I
, ?? AI W' ',
ii[»««^M»>
nua^IX. Ihlaimovz6r. Dial. IX. Of br^j^Uksiipg.
Quiere vm. almorzar?
Es tiempo de desayunarse ?
Que gusta vm. para su almu-
ferzo?
Will you breakfast?
Is it breakfast time?
What mil you havejor your
breakfast f
Part V.
f AWIilAR IDjAhOGVIii.
9^
Pan 7 mant^ca ?
Moll6tes calientet ?
Ledhe ? toet^tdas I dbocdldte ?
No^ todo eso es budao para
ni!io«.
Traiganos otra coMk
Gust^a vm«. de jam6ii?
Si^ UaigalO) que eottdxktaoi
un poco*
Ponga una scri^eta en Id
nesa, y d^noB pbitois^ cu-
chillos y tened6res*
Lav&los?a809.
J)^ un BS&saio al Se!k>r.
Tome vm^ una silla^^ y uehtese.
Acerqnea^ de la lumbre.
BibmbisxkUxffA, liatengo frio.
^ Gtolan rms* de hu^voii ftes-
cosT
Haii^d^ ekr ptosdod po^ agiiary
Qaite ese |»nto; [ofritod?
Coini: VIII4 sdlchiolkm
Probembs el vino-
Destape esa boWlUu
No tengo tirdbinom*
IXme^ de beb6r. *
Como le haHa vni; ? ^
Que le parece 4 vn^.f
Bs btibiOy no es'HUdo*
D^ de beb^r al Se&or.
Acfta de beb^. [brosbs.
I^oeme vm;
Tanto he comido, f^ no
Ubdre- gana^ kmedH ddu
Se burla voi. ? nada caai h&
comido.
Bread and hmtf ?
/fo^ loaves T
MUkf MisHf di\icolMi?
No; allthatisfffatchUdftn.
Bring HI MniBthMg eUt.
Shall 1 Mh^ the hamf
Yes, bring Iti t«^ voiU cut i
dice of it.
La^ a nupkht up&n that taBl^t
and mt ns platiSf ^i^i«^/
andjorks*
Rinse i^t gkufids.
Reddk ikt gi^tleman a sM*
Take a chair and sit d(Mi*
Sit by the fire.
1 akaU b^ 'okU here, I avnirtt^
cold 4 ■
Will you haife nm hid eg^f
Must they be btiUiid' orJriddP
Tdke thm di^ oftb^r
Eat soiM simdg^^
Let us tastt the tiditU.
Uncork that do^i
I have libeorkscrefHif^ - '■
OOfe me sdmMiing ib^Mnk.
tioiodo yoitUk^ itf
What d& ydu say to itf
It is goad, it- is n6t bad.
Give the gentlemari a glfUH of
I drank just fi'dw.- {yRnti
Yott do not eat'.
I have eaten s6' ntiiiihy thai' I
^havlih fe tm to XM
Do you jest?' gM MMt' dS^
scarcely any thM^j^.
» « ' ■> t* •*
J a » ^ ■ •■
PiaL Xk Antes de la coviida^ Dial. X. Before dinsen
£s ya tiemj^o de corner ?
Son' cercA de laif tied.'
Es bora de comer.
Se atra86 hoy la^comida hasta
ISs quarto.
Quiere \m. hac^r hoy peni-
t^dicia'coh nosotros r
Si vmSf ^(uter&'caA bidi; vengiil
& comer k mi casa.
*
Is it dm^ iMif
It is Ttetif thhe' (Pd^ ^
It is time to go to di^M^*
Dinner was put off' tO'day till
Jour.
Pray wiUifou take a;f^ of
dinner tmth us tO'day f
If yaw want a gobd appetiti
Jbr ywir supper^ cofne and
dine wttn fMf^
G 2 *
100
A Ntm Span'ish Grammar.
Ponjga la meMt el mantel.
Traiga la comida.
PoDga loa aaleros y los platos
en la meBa.
Lave, limple los vasos.
P6Dgak)8 sobre el aparad6r.
Corte uno8 pedacltos de p4n.
Pooga las siilas al reded6r de
la mesa, con sus almohadi-
Quien asiste 4 la mesa i [Uas.
Han venido todos los combida-
dos, dhuespedes?
AuQ no, algunos faltan.
Adpnde estdn los cuchiUos,
tenedpres y cucharas?
Estdn sobre el aparad6r.
Solo le he combidado pHra
goz4r de su compafiia.
Hard vm. penitencia.
Mande servir la comida.
Aiin no esta j^ronta.
Y4 estd la comida en la mesa.
Solo aguardan 4 vm* Seiior.
Toduron la camp&na.
Sientese vm. d la mesa.. .
Tome el primer aslento.
No pemutire que es(e sent^-
Aqui se sentara vm* [do alii.
En verd&d que no lo hare,
Vamosy dexemonos de cum-
plimientos.
Para que tanta qeremonia?
Mas dan^za se ha de usar en-
tre los amigos*
Vaya un poco mas atris^ que
tengamos lugar.
Bien cab^mos todos.
£s menester que quepamos.
Tenemos mas huespedes de
lo qiie pensdbamos.
Faltan aqui dos cubiertos.
Muchaphoy ve 4 bui^^ dos
servill^tas.
Lay the cloth*
Bring the dinner.
Set the sali'Cellars and plaieff
upon the table.
Rinse or xoash the glastes.
Set them upon the' iid^hoard.
Cut slices^ of bread*
Set the chatn round the fabler
and put cushions on them^
Who iioaits at. tabled
Are all the guests ov Jriends
come? .
'Not yety some are wanting.-
Where are the knivesj Jorks^
and spoonsf'
They are upon the side*board.
I invite you to dinner^ only fo
enjoy your good company.
I snau treat you mih. mean
Calljbr dinner. X^fore.
It is not yet ready^ : . j^iable.
The meat is already, on the
Siry they only iioait for you.
They have rung the beU. . -
Sa down to table.
Sit you doum in thejtrst jdaoe:
I wM not suffer. you to sk there.
You will sit dcfoon here. .
Indeed L shall not.
Let usjorbear compIimentSf I
pray. • [monies. 9
Why do you make Ho manycereT
Friends must live more Jredy
together.
Sit Jarthery and make a UMe
,iTOQm». .. .
There is room for aU. .
We nmst all Jind place.
We . have more company than
we thought we shoula.
Two covers are wanted. here,
^oyy go,andJetch two ui^ns,..
Dikl. XT. Comiendo.
Le gusta 4 ym. la sopa £ la
Francesa ? [hecho.
Si, como el caido est4 bien
' Dial. XI. At DidDen
. / -*
Bo you Icne French toupf
\made.
Yes^ provided the broth is welt
Part V.
Familiar Dialogues,
101
A mi^ d6fne vm. de nuestra
buina 6lla*
Venga un poco de p&n cas^o.
Tome wm. p&n bianco.
Mas quiero este.
Este p4n est^ moh6so.
Pero este es muy sabr68o.
Muchadio, danos p§n tierno.
Haspa este pin.
Quiere vm. la cortesa de en-
cima d la de debate ?
Gusta vm. de este cocido ?
Si vm. gusta.
Me servir^ 4 mi miimo.
Danos el plato.
Esta carne es muy substan-
ciosa.
Si creo.
No come rm. Seli6r.
Perd6neme vmd. que como
tanto como dos.
Que bu^nos principios!
Por mi, yo alabo este convite>
comiendo'bien.
Pero aiin no h4 bebido, vmd.
Muchachoy da de beb6r al Se-
fi6r.
Echa de beb^r.
Llena la copa.
Sen6ra» brindo por la de vm.
Buen provecho naga 4 vmd.
Yaya, Sefior 4 la salud de sus
amigos*
A' todos tm gustos.
A' SUB inclinaciones.
Mucho fav6r me hace vm.
Como balla vm. esta cerv^za ?
£s bastante bu6na.
Quiero prob4rla.
La hallo muy amarga.
Me quexar4 al cervez6ro.
Quite todo esto del m^dio.
Survan los segundos principios.
£i vm. buen bebedor y mal
comed6r. [bien.
No ve vm. que como y bebo
yamos» Sefior, coma vm. de
lo que gust4re iii4s«
No tengo apetito.
Give me some of our goad oUa.
Bring some household bread*
Take some tohite bread*
I love this better*
This bread is mouldy*
But this is very savory.
Boy, give us some nemo bread.
Rasp this bread.
Shall I cut you some of the
upper or under crust f
Shall I help you to some of this
boiled meat f
Ifyouplease.
I vaiU help myself.
Give us the dish*
This meat is very juicy.
I dare say it is*
Sir^ you eat nothing.
I eat as much as Pmo others.
What afinejirst course !
For my part, I commend this
treating by eatine vM.^
But you nwoe not drank yet.
Boyf gvoe the gentleman some
drink.
Fill some drink*
FUl the glass*
Madam, J drink your health. -
/ thank you. Sir*
Sir, to the honour qf your ac"
quaintance*
To aU that you hve.
To yoar indinations
You are very kind*
Honodoyou like that beerf
1 like U pretty wU*
Let me taste it*
I think it is too bitter*
I VfiU complain to the brewer*
Take a/way all these things*
Serve up the second course*
You are a great drinker and a
smaU eater* {vM*
You see I eat and drink very
Come, Sir, eat vAat you like
beet.
I have no appetite*
102
A Hm^ SriJsrisii Qjiivi^ ar.
Que le fWf!jf:0 de ^a 16ogu8
de bu6y, de el picadillo, del
gui^ado?
Quiere Tin. que le sirva 4e
estas perdiges, de eve c^poi)>
de lo8 poUo#9 6 gaUinetus?
Lo que i, vm. le gust&re.
Que quiere vind* iaa«« un ^6a
o una piern^ ?-
Bara mi es f odp uQp.
Coma vm. ajguuo^ ribanos,
para aguz6r el apptitp. .
Kc hay mejor oalaa que la
hambre.
Ya he comido dejmasiiadob
Denes mostaza, %
A donde e^t^ (e^I masta^erp i
Ya ve vm. que mesa tenemos*
No gastamos delica4essa.
Esto no se Uanoa corner*
TeqgQ muciia «ed»
Deme un vaso de vino.
Vamoa^ Sei|6r» por* la aalud
del ftey.
Vivaa dl Ei^ereita j la Aianilda.
Viva, el Duqu^i der-rr-
X4a . eoneapoudere poa mncbo
gusto.
Bebamos todos.
El vino es muy eKquisiJUi.
QuftL lat. le parece ^te paaid.
esta empaiiada de picboneis I
Sal^ muy bu^a y inujr. ^en
sazonada.
Sabe vm. Inneluv?
Trincbo medianan^ente* .
Le aeneir^ & vm.
Conozco lo que le gMa^
Acertar^ con 8u.guffl0u
A todos sieve vm^ jiaeobudt
da si' muinio*
Quite eae. platoy y^ ^eiga el
otco.
Voa da vnv una comida de
fte^, en lug4r.de. un. cem-
bite. de. aiaigck
firjuebe de eaioa alqau^il^ >
Dame ese cuchillo.
£stacarneesKiftia»
Wluilt do you say io ike nad's
tonffue, to tha^viin^m^tf
to ptefrka^s^ef
Shall I k4p you to wnepoT'
tridge, to ^cme mmt to
some ahickm or tveod^
Just fu mt fiea^Pf .
Wi(0i ao. yqu^ kfoe husf, fie
iioingt orikef(3g? .
^ is mm^t^mfi.
Eat s<m9 fu^shfs to sharpen
y9Mr H^lS^eii^
Hunger is the best sauce*
I have eaten too f^tuch kk^afy*
Give us some mustard*
Where is the mwfatdrpei ?
You see xxlhat a table H»e heef*
We have no dainties*
This isno^tohe called (^ing*
f am very thirty.
Give me a glass qf'mite*
Come, &itt I dtini il^ Kmi^e
ieaUi.
Here*s the Army aiwi Nofoy*
^*ll gvo^ y^^ the Duke oi^^rn*
X P3^ pMge you um4U ny
heart.
Let us drink ahm^
That is an exceUim^ P^imp.
Ho^ do you W^ ih.^pigeom
pief.'
B ie 'oery^ good, vefyttejV $tth
soned*
Are you a, good oeffim$ m do
you carv0 vMi
I carxe pretty ^k
J mHi help you,
I knoto achat ymt Wti^. .
I knoto your taste*.
You camejfint enfory^ Mlyk wd
eat.inM9gyowklfi
TakfiMine^Ms dittyimiMkw
Hau giveitiACkXing'^'/eaBk ibp
doSBflqfaJHer^^mti
Eat.amne atiichofytk
Give me.tiat InMti, -i .. ,
This meat is gsmbQfUi^'-i -^
Part V.
Familiar DiALootiEs.
105
RecalftnftJii en el bttraero.
[de morcina.
Hagame el favor de un poco
Esta carne esti ctruda. [vaca*
Cdnetoe vmd. \m pbc6 de
Quiere vm. caroero> Vaca, 6
ternera ?
Lo que gustdre, Sefior.
Asado 6 co^sido?
Coma vnb. zanah6rias, nabos,
chiriviasy y berzas d coles.
Tome S^, tho^skk,
iJs diird brdznelo, $ ^tetna de
Ma^ 6^eiiro iA pdcb d^ loiibo
^e'fehjrilrii. t^dtnesa.
Vaja &^ plito a1 ICetded^r de
Ya ve vm, Sen6r, como nos
tratamos. [mesa.
mje ^ A A^jir ^lato Ae k
A^n no se le ha llegadd.
Vb> 4 prbMr dfe «. /'
Buen provecho h^^ A tmd;
Ut gmtk ii vntd. 1^ iectie cox-
Otrito tAudko de ctiajkdii^ na-
tilla, J queso fresco.
Comft vm. de estb inabjdr-
bllhbo;
Vaya un pdcb del €iltbFadd.
Las iitilijpindddft de edrnb bii-
t^to tn^ qoe las de ^^id-
Que bellos bbibti^ ! [ilas.
Li fhita eoH'^t)bnd« 4 tddd
16 dtoias;
Ha recogidd im. m Mlks,
las .maa exquisitas de la es-
£iM8 pMca. u ittasflt.^ es tntiy li*
gilfB y bien htfHifa';
La torta es muy buetid;
Dame cenreza fuerte.
m an pirn sifiipid am^:
Siei^to no tengamol IS^ m^-
rU A)imd6 ii'Sy brfin.
Dex^mos la mesa.
Quita la m^iiiaSL
S6t*t oh the ihqfifig'dishf and
heat it*
Pray gvOe a plede of pudding.
This meat is fato.
Cut the a Bit of dis^f.
WiUyou have mutton^ 'ieif or
veMf
What you please^ Sir.
Roasted or boded me&t f
Eat some carrotSi tome turnips^
some parsnips^ or cabbage.
T\ike tome fnUstctrd.
ShaU Help yon to soWS of (he
shoulder or tek oftkium't
t had rath^ %aile h ** '^ ihi
t6% tfkiehL (tAle.
L^ this^ di^ go aiiiut the
Sir, yaU set Mao ivejitrt.
This is the te^ dish tii iitble.
They have not yet touchUlS iJ.
fM^ingiomtklt.
Much good mdjf "H do Vdtt.
tio you tctoefiwb!d)/himf
I loxfe ct^rds'f tfeami Wnk rt&a
cheese.
Take thai MSic fkit^e.
Eat some of that stkmt mkdt.
Meat biiei noitrish inbrS ih&ft
dpjpte-pies.
What a v'efyjihe dessiH f
The fruit toi^ponSk htsSh tfS
the reit.
toit hii^e gdtHffrtd thi lAbst
exquisiie fruits the sinson
rff^ry ivb^ is IfiN Uht
mxmfHkdH
thU is hh mt^utt i0t.
Give me some strong beer*
Oioe ft cUhn plati tb the gen*
< iMdn. ^ tmen
I am sorry nUe hlAe W^ter
I Ku9i JSt&i ^k^ im:
tthUt m-y boShhas ddkt.
Let us risefrtmi mle.
Remove tJktdSK.
Let us say grdte.
104
A New Spanish Grammab.
Vamos 4 d&r un pa&6o eq el
jardin.
Van\08 en hora bu^na.
Tengo mucho sueQo.
Soy may amijgo de hac^ la
siesta.
Let us ffo and take a turn
round the garden*
With all my heart.
I am very sleepy.
J like muck to take a nap after
dinner*
Dik]. XII. Para comprar
libros.
Tiene vm. algun libro nuevo ?
Si> SeB6r; que especie de li-
bros quiere vm. ?
lie gustan & vm. libros de
histdria, de mathem&ticas,
de philosophia, de tlieolo-
gia, de medeciDa, de dere-
cho?
Noy Sefior, busco libros de
poesia.
Le puedo prove^r de ellos en
todos lenguages.
Pues ungo todos los po6tas
Gringos, Latinos, Espa&oles,
Jtidiioosi Francisses, k In-
gl6ses.
Mucbos tengo yo de e3tos»
Que p<)6tas necesita vm, pues
compr&r ?
Virgil io en Latin, las com^dias
de Calderdn, y el Theatro
de Feij6o en Espaftol.
Tiene vrod. el Paradiso Per*
dido de Milton, o las obras
dramaticas de Shakespear en
Ingl^s^
Tengo men ester de la Grama-
tica Italiana de Veneroni, de
los Exercicios de Bottarelli,
y de las Comedias de GoIp
doni.
Tiene vmd. la Gramatica Es*
paQola del Sefior Fernandez^
y lade Uelpino?
Tiene vmd^ la Historta de In-
glaterra; de Franpiaf de
Espaga ; de Ualia ?
Todos esos libros tengo*
Jie ^ue tamajao json?
Dial. Xll. To buy books.
Have you any nevo books ?
YeSf iSiV, what sort oj books
would you pease to have f
Willyf/u have books of history^
mathematics, philosophy^ ai^
vinityy j^ysiQ, or law f
Nof Sir, I am looking for books
of poetry.
I can furnish you with them in
all languages.
For I nave aU the Greeks
Latiny Spanish^ ItaUan^
Frenchf aiftd English poets.
I have a great many of them.
What poets have you then a
mind to purchase f
Vir&ly in Latin^ thepktys of
Calderonf and the Theatre of
, FeijSo in Spanish.
Have you miUon^s Paradise
lost; or the Plays of ShaJces^
pear^ in English?
I want Veneroni^s Italian CHram*
mflr, Bottarelli^s Exercises^
and Goldmis Comedies in
Italiam
Have you the Spanish Gram-
mars of Don Femandezy and
Ddpinof
Have you the History of Eng^
Iqnd; of France i ^Sjpams
of Italy?
I have aU those books*
What sizefi ar^they.qft
Part V.
Familiar Dialogues.
105
.liOa tengo eii' Folio, <iuartO|
Octavo, y Duodecimo.
Hagame vm. el favor de en-
seSarnselos.
Lo quiere vm. enquademados,
en badana, becerro, d cor-
dobdn ?
Lp8 quiere vm. dorados k in-
titulddos?
No hay necesidid de esto.
No lus compro para adorno,
sino para le^rlos. [bu6na.
£sta enquadernad6ra ao es
No esti bien cosido este libro.
Ahi tiene vm. otro en su lugftr.
Quanto pide vim. por este li-
bro?
Le costard k vm. dos pesos.
Esto es demasiado.
£s el precio ultimo..
Le dare 4 vm* veinte regies.
Me sale & mas de lo que vmd.
me ofrece por 61.
Es muy caro.
Le aseguro 4 vm. que me
cuesta peso y medio sin la
enquademad^ra.
No querrd vm. que pierda en
mis libros.
Muy al contr4rio/ quiero que
gane algo.
Es preciso pues que me de
veinte y quatro reales.
Ahi los tiene vm. no repdrb
en una corteddd.
No necesita vm. otros libros ?
Por ahora no.
Pero he menester de papll,
plumas, tinta, lacre» y ob-
leas.
No vendo nada de esto.
Pero lo hallard vm. tpdo en
la tienda proxima que es d^
un papelero.
A' Dies Sefior. . /\ flero^
Muy servidor de.,vi|i» cd)aV
Hagame vm. el favor ^6. acor-
darse de mi para ptrfi vez*,;^
Siempre ,experimjBnlSar^.. lavy
Lo espero. £:%^>4rf^(o.
/ have them in FoUOf Quarto^
OctaxjOf and Duodecimo,
Let me see them^ ifyov. ^please.
Will you have them bound in
sheep t calff or Morocco lea*
therf
WiU vou have them gilt on
the iackf and lettered f
Inhere is no occasion for it.
I do not buy them for oma"
meiUf but to read them.
This binding is not good.
This book is not wdl teitned.
There is another for it.
What do you ask for this
book?
It toiU cost you ttoo doUars.
That is too much.
It is a set price.
I will give you twenty rials.
It cost me more than you bid
me for it.
That is very dear.
I assure you it cost me one
dollar and a half mthout the
binding.
You toomd not have me sell my
books at a loss.
Tar from it^ I would have you
get something.
Then you must give mefoMT"
and'twenty riaU.
There they arcy I wHl not stand
on so small a matter.
Do you wantany other books?
Not at present.
But I have occasion for paper ^
penSf inkf sealing»wax!i and
wafers.
I sett nothing ofaU ihati ;
But you wuljind them id the
stationer's^ next door.
f f
'^ »
Farewell, Sir. J^senxint
i^y / am your fffiost humiU
Pray remenAffr pifi on :the ^C"
, mnon. i;,, '.;j> ,i.j.- ... ?• ■."
Iwill dwajfs^sc yf^tM*
Ihopeso* ' y
B
106
A Nea> Spanish Grammar.
Di&I. Xm. Dei alquilar
uh atojamiento.
Seri6ry quiere vm. hacerme
unAvor^
De nor ta€iA gtna, que me
fnanda vm. I
Que Teiifi;* vmd. ooKniigOy
para alqAtlur an alojami-
ento. [siire.
Le acoinpafSar€ adondt qui*
Vamos 4 la calie 4e MiDliiago.
Le voy siguiendo.
Aqui hay una c^duk & aita
Suerta^ qud dice ^piartos d6
Iqmi^r.
Llame vm. k la puerta.
Quien e« ?
Gente de paz. [Uar I
Con quien .qui6re vm. ha*
Con el amo 6 ama de ciosa*
Aqul ettd mi Sefi6ra.
Se!i6ra, tiene vm. quarCoi de
aquilar ?
Sif Sefidt'y quiere vm. ve^
lot? -
Vine con esta intenciaKK '
Quabtos aposentos neeeeiti
▼m.?
Qaiero uh coMedor 6 sala^
una alcoba, ttii gafifi^te,
jpaira mi, y uii demn para
mi criado. *
Han de sir sas quayi6ft Alha*
jado8 ^ nb f
Han de ^y a)hi^iw„
Hagame el fav6r da etfyetir
HO raio €tk «»ta sala main^
mieiilras voy por las llatei.
Muy bien, Sefiora, aguardtfk
Quiere ^m* tafDarsa d traMjo
deeubfr)
SeguireMod k twt^ SeUdfA.^
Esta es la vivienda del primer
aho. :!
Ahft 'liana tfti. Qia cMina laatf
bi^im y Nai]^
Bien ve vm. que h&y tdAp' lo
preelNsr ^M. till ^^utM dy
naj&do.
I>idl. XIII. Of hiring a
lodging.
SWf ioUl you be jdeis$ed to do
Wkh ml my hearty tofto^ loill
you jdease to have f
I vomul hm^e you go ukmg wkh
me to hire a losing.
\jfou please.
I thaU tibdit on you whenever
Let us go into 8t. James's st^*eet.
IJoUefvi) y&k.
Here is n biU at this door,
ABokkh sh&a>s fAtff there ^re
rsiem to let*
Knock at the door.
Whoisihere^
AJriend. \yMh?
Who do y6^ Ma^ fd speak
With the master or ^tstttsk.
Here is my mi^ress.
Madam, have y6u any rooms to
let?
Yei, Sir 9 mil you hejUedsad to
see themf
I am come on purpose.
How many apartnknts inUst
you have?
I kvant a dining-room and a
hed-chamher^ mth a doset to
it, for fhysikfy and a garret
for my fftah.
Mmit your rooms be furnished
or unfurnished f
l%ey must be furnished.
Be so hind as to stAy a moment
■ in this parldury and JwUlgd
and fetch the keys.
Well, madam, Fll stay far you.
Witt ywt idke the pains f&
come up?
We wiUjblheo you. Modem.
This is the apatt^m ikt the
Jffstjhor.
m^ U a itery gdtfd and
' OieHtha.^
AnS^ok'SSei -fhti ihete are dli
iktngi iteiessary in d Jvtt*'
"ittthdi todm.
Pan V.
F4fVfIMA«t PlALOGVES.
10?
C<¥no fpesaj mx^^ih h\Ui^
Fero adonde esta el gavioet^ ?
Aqui ^4, y eft ba^Umto papji^,
Me quadra iDUjr ^w laste (do*
jamiento.
« Me rffgro 09UQhd.
Quanto quiere fio. por semao
na? ,
Nunca alquilq mh qMiirUMy
sino por mes, d por s^o.
Bien los tomare por mes ;
quanto es el . precio de
ellos ?
Jtttiifl tttve menot de' Aiez
guineas, al mevy por estos dos
quartos.
Son demasiado oaroft.
Ha de consfdefir vm. qae
este es ^ mas hcrmtiso bar-
rio de la ciudad.
Y que est& vm. ^ un paso de
la corte.
Para que vea ▼». quie no $6j
ami^o da regatear, le dare
ochaa guineas por alios.
£s diemastado poco, no saba
vm. la renta qtre pago por
esta casa.
Kada me importa saberlow
Pero en una palabra, partirfer
mOs la ^Hlei^en<;ia.
Yo le aseguro que pferdp.
• Pero sientb que rm. se taya.
Y por e! de^vdti' de mi ensfdo,
quanto Re de pagdr por
mes?
Me darS, vm. ctes gniadas.
No dar^ mas de gura^ y media;
No es bastairte, pero M hac^
por vm. sea asl.
No vale la pena de pararse 0JX
semejante ecrrtddad. ' ;
P^ro (jUganie vttr. no ptiSd^Vitr
^raet aquf iMii Vm. .> ^ ^ *'
Si, Se56r, bien pu^ vta^
4$ fa^> hoting'glumst dU^r^
carpets, closeti, fraii», &c«
But where is the dressing, cUieif
jffpTis it is, «w4 large emmgk.
I like this (^urtmeni mery toelL
I am vfty glai cfii^
How much do you ask for it m
week?
I never lc$ mjf apartmeius hu hi
the mmh or year.
Well, I shall take than by the
month I what mil you have
for them f
I never had less than ten gumias
a month, far these two rooms.
They are too dear.
You ought to consider thai this
isthejlimtpattofiheiiamH.
And that you oNwitkiri maepf^
the court.
T& shew you that I do not hvc
haggling, I will gheyou o^
guineae for them.
That is too Uttk, you 4& ik»
know tohat rent I pt^i for this
house.
It is no business of mine to
know it.
But in a word, we shaU divide
the vty^evence.
I assure you that I lost by it.
But I am oorry to turn ytlu
axrnyi,
Ahdjvv my man* 4 gafrei^ haw
mucii Wtit ^ou kooe'' for it a
month t
You uM gibe' mt two guinms.
ioMi give onfy u -guhtea and
a half.
It is rldte^mgh, but 1 tM doU
for you, let it be so. " •
It is not worth while io^kaggl&fbf
so sm a Uam attefV' - - ^ •
But now ItkmH-m U^ mtgr 1 1^
'^bouMaiymimh4dt^P
Yes, Sir, you may.
I I
106
A New Spanish Grammar.
Quanto toma por semaoa de
cada huesp^d ?
A' raz6n de ochos guineas al
Y quanto toma vin. por quarto
y comida juntos ?
Cinco libras por semina.
Pues empezar6 maillana.
Quando gustire.
Bu^nas noches, SeR6ra.
Bu^nas se las d6 Dios, Sefi6r.
Bow much do you take from
each hoarder a^toeek f
At the rate qf eight guineas
Ormonth.
And tohat do you take for board
and lodging together T
Five pounds a-week.
Well, I ahaU begin to-morrow.
When you please.
Good night. Madam*
Good night. Sir.
Di&L XIV. Del iftformarse Dial. XIV. . Of ioquiring
de alguno. after ooe^
Quien es ese caball^o ?
£8 un Ingles.
Le tuve por un Frances.
Se ha engafiado vm. pues.
Sabe vm. adonde.vive ?
Vive en el barrio de la cprle.
Tienecasai, [albajados.
No, Seiuir, vive en quartos
£n casa de quien aloja ^
Vive en casa de fulanOi en la
ci|lle de.
Que edad ti^ne ?
Cr6o que tiene veinte y cinco
aSlos*
No me parece tan vi6jo.
No puede ser mas moso.
Es casado ?
N09 Sendr, es solt^ro.
Est&n sus padres vivos ?
Su knadre a^n vive, pero su
padre muri6 dos ^Hos hd.
Tien6 herman6s y herm&nas ?
Dos herm&nos y una berm&na
tiene.
Esti su herm&na casada i
Si, Sefior.
Con quien j
Con A Conde^4o.
Era pues partidorico.
Tuvo sesenta^ mU pesos de
dote.
Who is that geiukm0^f
He is an EngUshmtm.
I took him for a Frenchman.
Then you mistook.
Do you know tukere he lives?
He lives near the courts
Does he keep tk-house f
No, Sir, he lives in lodgings.
At whose house does he lodge f
He lodgtes at Mr. such a erne's in
the street ■■■
How old is he?
I belkve he is five and twenty
years of age.
He does not appear so old.
He cannot be much younger.
Is he married t .
No, Sir, he is a bachelor.
Are ^father and mother alxoe f
His mother is still alive, but his
father has been dead these two
years.
Has he any brothers and sisters f
He has two brothers and a sister.
Is his sister married t
Yes, Sir,
To Ufhom f
To the Earl of'
It was then a rich match.
She tad sixty thousand dollars for
her portions _.j
Part V.
Familiar Dialogues.
]09
£s hermosa i
No es f6a.
£s bastanie bonita.
£st4 algo picada de Tiruejas.
Pero tiene mucho entendi-
iniento.
£s muy ingeniosa.
Habla este cabsdl^ro la lengua
£spa5ola ?
AuDque es Ingles, habla tan
bien £span6X que los £&-
paooles le cr^en £spafioL
Habla Itali&no como los Ita-
lianos mismos*
£ntre los Alemanes, pasa por
Alemdn.
Como puede sab^r tantos len-
guages differentes ?
Goza de una niein6ria fellz y
ha viaiado mucho.
Hi estado dos alios en Paris,
seis meses en Madrid, aSio
J m6dio en It&lia, j un
a&o en Alem&nia*
Ha visto todas las cortes de la
£ur6pa.
Quanto tiempo ha que le
conoce vm. ?
Al rededor de tres afios h4
que tengo el hon6r de co-
nocerle.
Adonde hizo vm. conocimi-
ento con 61 ?
£n Roma le conocl*
£s de bella estatdra.
Ni demasiado alto* ni dema-
siado chico.
Se puede declr que es hom-
bre garboso.
Siempre anda muy aseado y
bien compuesto*
Se viste muy bien.
£8 bien parecido, tiene buen
aire.
Tiene bu^na presencia, y el
aspecto noble.
Naoa disgusta en sus modes.
Is she handsome f
She U not ugly.
She is pretty enough.
She is a little pitted with the mall
pQX.
But she has a great deal ofvrii.
SiU is very clever, very witty.
The gentleman we talk if, does
he speak Spanish f
Although he is an Englishman, he
speaks Spanish to %oeU, thai
among the Spaniards, they think
him a l^nmiard.
He speaks Italian Uke the Ita*
. Hans themselves.
He passes for a German among
the Germans.
How can he be master of so
many different languages f
He has a happy memory, and has
been a greai traveller.
He has been two years at Paris,
six montks at Madrid, a year
and a half in Itafy, and a year
in Germany,
He has seen all the courts of
Europe,
How long have you known him t
It is about three yean since I
had the honour qf being Jirst
acquainted xvith him.
Where came you acquainted with
him t {Rome,
I got acquainted xvith him at
He is qf a fine proper h^hL
He is neither too tall nor too
short.
One may call him a handsome
man.
He goes always very neat and
very fine.
He dresses very well.
He is very genteel, he has a good
air.
He has a fine presenee, and a
noble gait.
He has nothing disagreeable m
his manners.
110
A Ntfw Sh^/tmsH OraiIi'Mah.
£0 coring, af&bfe> ui^ifo eon
qualqui^ra.
Tiene mucho AiteadiMieDto,
y ev inuy f^ftivo en eoii«
Tersacion.
Daasft Mrannsnte, esgrnnejr
monta muy bien*
Toca la fhrata, ^ date^ la
§aiUirra, 7 otroa nuc^xyB iD-*
trumentoB.
Eft uim pal^re, ea on oaM*^
ttro ci^pUdo y perfeeto.
Par el retraCo que nni hace
de el, me cto gantf ^ co-
nacMe.
Le procurare ao oanoieiifiii-
Selo agradecer6 & vn; lAuebo.
Qaando quiare ynk que ▼ih'
y&moa » viaitarie juntorf
Qnand^ & ▼». le fpimve.
A que bora a»piiadev<6]dfren
au^oaia I
A qi^alquKnillarapaM&Terle,
pnea ea nray annga niio.
Vamos pues & verSe maAana,
per ht maAanm
Sea en bora bu6na«
De todo mi coraz6n.
Quando le convini6re.
A' Dida Gabailero.
Sertid6r de rm.
Soy muy siiyo.
iWnga vaa. ba^aa noches;^
Mi^' bu6nas se las de Dfoa.
He is cwil, couru&mt tomplid^
$ani to every body.
He hoi a gtmi d&til of tuh^
and i$ very ^tprtgfUly in eat^
venation.
Ifr tkmeeii fmts, imi ttdei
very welU
He plays upon ihtfitkW^ ihd Ktirp-
other nutruments, •
Ji-a Mi^' h&Hun^a&soMphhhtd
gmHefnmi
By thffffi^iuref ymfdraw^ of km,
you make me have a mind to
kiumhimi:
Ixtnll bring youmsquamied toiih
kifm
I shall be obliged to yow/or ki.
Whm vMyHs havi m g€han^'
wait upOff km ivgeAarf
Whanyom^pieam*
At what o'datbrnoyimesee him
aSihbvttf
Lotm sve-^kkn^at-a^ timVf Jor he
Let us go oimI «tf( Mm ta^mwfaw
/ wilt.
With oH-my /ieartk
jIt your leisure,
ParetMii^Si^:
L am yaurstmirtii
I am youths,
I'Wisk yova good if%^«
I wish you the samt^
MMdM
Di&l. XV. Delpartir. Dial, XV. Of pattfng*/
Sefidr, vengo 9 despedtraoe
da¥Bk
Porqu6 quiere vm. irsa^\
Se acerca la bora da com^*
No puede vm. com6r con nos-
oteoa?
Se lo estimo mucho^ bo raa^es
possible hoy. [van. ?
Porqu6? que negociofr ti^oe
f
Sir, I come to toko tt^^kave of
you.
Why will you gf^ f
Because it is aUkosi dmUMf*
ttmi.
Can't you dine with us ?
I thank you, I carmot stc^ Monday,
Why? what business have you f
Part V.
FaAIJXIAB ihAJtOOVEA.
Ill
No teDg<^ nmcho que hac^
pero be de ir ^cchmt k oasa.
H4 coQvidado "^m- k alguno k
cpm^r 4&U cafia?*
No, pero he prometido- a un
cabaUero Ingl^ que npaabe
el £spa!nol, Ir con oL d
compr4r alguaas manudanY
cias.
A' que bo.ra le espera vou ?
Le aguairdo 4 las doa.
Estd vm. seguro de que ven-
No la 86 de cierto, pero ha-
viendoselo proDi9tido» espre*
ciso qqe e8t6 eo case*
Tiene vm. razon.
No le quiero pues delener.
Vaja vm. con Dies, soy suyo.
Vaya vm. cpa Dios.
MuchacbQ, abre la puerta al
Se!i6r.
Muy bieo la abi ir4 yo*
Pero no tiene vm. la llave*
Que ! edia vn^. la llave a la
puerta ?
Asi lo acostumbrfimos.
Suplicole me poDga & los pi^
de mi Se!i6ra su herm&na«
No faltar6 4 ello. [ver ?
Quando nos volveremoa 4'
Mafiana, si Dios quiere.
Vendre 4 visitarle.
Kagame este fav6r.
/ hoDd fMt nmch to d^, bm I
must dintat.hcmek
Hm^ you invited' any hody to
dine with youl
No, but I have promised an Eng-
lish ^jiauUman, who den not
understand Spanish, to go and
help hun to buy some things,
ihim f
At. what hosBh do you expect
I expect him ai two €fthok^'
Are you suite he wiU oomisf
I am not sure (^ it ; but' since I
promised him, I nmH- he at
. homcn
You are in the right.
I will nolks^you here then*
Farewell, your servant.
lamyour^s.
Boy, go and open' tkti door to the
gentlommt^
Lean open i$ myself.
But you have not the key.
Howl doyonloekypurdowf
It is our oustomt,
Pray present^ my seroke to your
sister.
Sir,IwUL
Whin shall we meet again?
To-morrow, if it please God.
I jjM come and sec yon.
Pray do.
■•■■■iW
■■"^
Dial. XVI. De noticias.
Que se dice de bu6no ?
Que noticias tenemos?
No se ninguna.
Que se dice de du6vo i
Sabe vm. alguna nov^dad i
Que noticias corren i
No hay ninguna.
No he sabioo nada de nu^vo.
Ha leido vmd. los papeles ?
He visto los Times, la Croni-
ca, el Morning Post.
DiaLXYh Of news.
Wha^s the best news T
What news is there T
I know qfnone.
What news runs t
Did you hear af^ news f
What news did you hear f
There is none at all.
I Iwve heard no news.
Have you rehd the Papers f
I have seen the Times, the Chro-^
nick, the Morning Post.
112
A New Spanish Grammar.
Que se dice en la ciud&d?
No ae habla de nada.
He oido decir, be sabido que.
£sta et bu^oa noticia.
No ha oido vm. habl£r de la
guerra?
No se dice nada de ella.
Se habla de un sltio.
Se dice que— eati sitiada.
Se ha levantado el aitio.
Pero han vuelto 4 ponerle.
Ha habido algun comb^te
nav£l?
Se decia, pero 8ali6 false.
Al contr&rioy hablan de una
batalla.
£sta noveddd requiere con-
finnacion.
Quien se la comunic6 ?
De bu6na parte me viene ?
£1 Sefi6r N .... me la dixo.
Gr6e Ym. que tengamos paces?
Hay mucha apari^ncia.
Para conmigo, cr^o que no.
£q que se funda ym. ?
£n que yee que los inimos de
entrambas partes estan muy
poco inclinados d la paz.
Sin embargo todos necesitan
de la paz.
Sobre todo los mercaderes y
comerciantes.
La guerra hace mucho dafio
al com6rcio.
Sin duda, la p4z es mas ven-
taj6sa al com^rcio.
Que se dice en la corte?
Se habla de arm^r una flota
de veinte navies de guerra.
Hablan de una expedici6n.
Quando se cr^e que la esquadra
saldr4?
No se dice, no se sabe.
Adonde ir& la Princesa?
Unos dicen 4 Windsor, otros
a Kew.
Que dice laGaz6td?
What do ihty talk about ?
There is no talk of , any thing.
I woe told, or / heard^ that.
This is a ixry good piece of
news,
Haiveyou heard any thmg of tfie
war f
I have heard nothing qfit.
There is a talk of a siege.
They say is besieged.
They have raised the siege.
But they laid it again.
Has there been any sea fight f
\ false.
They said so, but it has proved
On the contrary, they taUc of a
battle.
This news wants confirmation^
Who have you it from t
I have it from good hands.
Mr. N . , . . told it me.
Do you think vse shall have a
peace f
There is a probability qfit.
For my part, I believe not.
What grounds have you for it ?
Because I see the minds of both
parties are little inclined that
W(^.
Every body wants peace, ftow-
ever.
Especially merchants, and traders.
War is a great obstruction to
trade.
Without question, peace is more
advantageous to tradcm
What do they say at court ?
They talk of fitting out a fleet of
twenty men of war.
Tfuy talk of an expedition.
When do they suppose the fleet
will saU T
It is not known, they say nothing
qfU.
Where will the Frincesf go f
Some say to Windsor^ others say
to Kew,
What says the Gazette f
Part V.
Familiak Dialogues.
lis
No la li£ leido.
HabUndole sinceramente, los
designios de la corte son
tan aecretos que nadie puede
saberlos.
Poco se me da delos negocios
de estado.
No me meto jamds en arre-
glirelestida
H2>16mo8 de n6ticia8 parti-
culares.
Como est^ el SeHor D • • . ?
Quando Je ha visto vm. ?
Ayer le vt.
£s verd^ lo que dicen de
Que ce dice de ^1 ?
Dicen que rin6 al ju^go.
Con quien ?
Con un caball^ro Frances*
Han peleddo ?
Si, Se!i6r, peledron.
Esti herido ?
Dicen que salio herido mortal-
mente.
liO sientOy es hombre de bien*
Sobre que rifii^ron ?
Lo i^oro enteramente«
Se dice que le desminti6«
No lo puedo cr6er«
Ni yo tampoco.
Sea lo que fuere, presto se
8abr4.
En su casa lo preguntar6«
I have not read Uf
To tjpeak freely wih you, the
designs of the court are kept
so secret, that nobody can
know any thing of them*
I trouble myself very little about
state affairs,
I never take upon me to settle
the nation.
Let us talk of private nevos^
How does Mr. D • . •?
When did you see him f
I saw him yesterday.
Is V)hat ts reported of him
truef
What do they say of him? [play*
They say he haa a quarrel at
With tonom?
With a French gentleman.
Didth^^ht?
Yes, Str, they fought.
Is he tooundedf
They say he is mortally
V)oundea. [nest man*-
I am sorry for it, he is an ho*
Upon vmat account did they
I know nothing of it.
They say he gave him the Ue^
I cannot believe it.
Nor I neither.
Be it v^at it may, it wHl be
^ickly known. [house.
I will enquire about it at his
Di&l. XVII. Entre das
amigos.
Que ! es vm. ?
De donde viene que no me
mira vmd.
Cierto que no repardba en
No le vela. .. [vm,
Pasa vm. cerca de mi, me
toca con el codo, y no^me
ve?
Iba cavilando en algo.
Dial. XVII. Between
two friends.
What! is it you?
How comes it that you do not
look upon mef
Indeed I did not take notice of
I did not see you. [you*
You pass dose by me, you touch
me with your elbow, and yet
you do not see me.
I was thinkins about something*
* H
114
A Nem Sp^anish Grammar.
Pensaba vm. quisd^^ en su
querid9. [<;abeza.
Otm negociofl teogo en tni
Que B^OGIQB I
HailMideiBe etcaso de din^ro,
voy 4 ver d un «uj^to que
Hiedebe.
E iba pensando, aobre si le
mandaria arrester en caso
de no pagarme.
Vive lexos de aqui ?
A quatre pasos de aqui.
£sta vm. <^erto de hallarie
en caBa ?
Cr6o que le hallar6 il estas
• horas.
Se eBtai4 vm. mucho tiempo?
No un quarto de hora.
Despache ¥m. pues, que le
\oy i, esperdr en eete caS€.
£star6 con vm. lu^go.
Y^devuelta?
Comolov^ vm.
Le hal]6 van. ?
Si» Sefi6r.
Le pago d vm. ?
Gracias k Dios*
#
Lo eelebro muciho.
Pero si no le hubi^ra pagado,
yq le prestaria dinero.
No le hubiera faltado diD6ro.
Mi'bolsa estiba d su servicio.
Se lo estimo mucho,
Nos qixedamos aqui ?
No, vamos k beber una bo-
telki para patir media hora
juntos.
£n hora buena, pero quiero
pagarla, yo.
Quando se haya bebido ha-
blar^mos de eso.
Vamonos.
Le voy siguiendo.
Perhaps you toefe thinking about
your mithregs.
I have other business in tny
head*
What business f
Bein^ in w&ni t^f money I am
going to look for &nfi laho tmes
' me seme.
And I tvas thinking "oohether I
ehould arreet hUn^ in ease he
did notjpay me.
Does he hvejar eff^
Four steps from kere.
Are you sure to Jind him at
homef
I believe I shall find him abtnU
this time*
Shall yt>u stay long there f
Not a quarter of an hour*
Make haste then^ VU ge emi
tjoait for you in that oi^Jee*
house.
ItuiU be mth you presently.
Are you returned aireadfff
As you see.
Did you find your maiH ?
Yesy Sir,
Has he paid you f
Yes^ thank God.
I am very glad of it.
But if he had not paid yeUf I
Hjootdd have lent you money.
You should not have toanted
money.
My purse ^mu at your service. '
I am much obliged to you.
Shall toe stay heref
No» let us go and drink a bottle,
to pass half an hour together.
With all my hearty but I wHl
treat you.
We mUtdk ofH; Hxihen toe Aov^
drank it*
Let us go.
L^ii&w you.
Part V.
PAMII.IAU DiALOOVM.
Jl£
Di&L Xyiii. IMiKcribir D/a/. XVIII. Of writitig a
ttwi nsrfee* letter.
No eis Iioy dia de oorr6o/
iVyrque?
For que he de escribir not
carta.
<A quien escribe vm. ? •
A ml hermtoo.
No est& 6n la ciudad ?
No, Se^or, pstd en <ei catiipo.
En t^e campo ^
En laB af^uas de Tmninidge;
Quaoto tiempo faace? -
Quinze dias.
Deme vomI. tma hoja de pap^
dorado, ona pluma y tinta.
Batre vm. en mi |^vin6te> j
hallar4 sob re la jnesa lecado
de escribir.
^o hay plumas*
Ahi wstm en el tmt^.
Nada valen.
ABI hay otras. [mas.
No esi£n oortadas esta's plu-
Adonde estcL su corta pluBms ?
Sabe vm. cortar plumas ?
Xjos vorto a nri modo.
£sta no es mala.
£i i»a8taBteni4hte bu^na.
Mientras acabd eeta carta»
hagam6 vmd. el favor de
Iiac6r un pliego de estos
papeles.
Que sello quiere vm. que le
ponga ?
fieilela vm. ccn mis armaa d
con mi cifra.
Que lacre le he de pon^r ?
}^ga vm. roxo 6 negroy no
nnporta. >^
No bastaran obleds I
Es lo mismo.
Ha puesto vm. la fecha f
Creo que si^ peto no he fi]><
mam.
Qae dia del mes tenemos i
ISA dies, ^ veinte, ^.
Pliegue vm. esta carta.
linai this apoM'dam f
Why?
B^ause I have « deher to
wrike.
Who do you ujrite tof
To my irather,
IshentMim iowm ?
No^ Sir^ he is in the^§mth^
In what part &fikt cmmiry?
Skis at TmJnidgi-'ootUs.
Hotv long since f
AJbrtnighU
€rivt me o skeet cf^ P'P^^ ^
pen, and a lime uA,
Step in my eloset» you mii
Jind open the table nU -tiiai
you haw txxashnfor.
Tnere are no^peks4 [^etimd.
There are same in ime imkr
They are good for neMmg.
Theik are sbme others.
These are mt inmd^
Where is your pen-knife f
Can you make pens ?
This is not a bad one*
It itgeod enough*
WhiU I finish this letter^ be so
kind as make a packet of
%heee papers.
What seal toiU ym Aive me put
toitf
Sealit 'cotthmy omtofmrms er
with mty cypher*
What todx shall I put to it 9
Put either red or Uadkf 9^
wmtter which.
May not I put wafers toitf
It is all oae .
Have you put the date 9
I believe I have^ but I hem nAt
miecribedit.
What day qfthe mwKtk is Ms 9
The teeiX tietmeiftitU^Sfc.
Fold up this letter.
* H 2
!«■
timmn^mm^
116
A New Spanish Graiimar.
Pongalt el sobrescrito*
Cierrela, yoh j sellela^
Adoade esU la arenilla ?
En la Mlvaddra.
Deteque au eMsritura cmi te-
Como cnvia vni.^'8UB cartas ?
Lasremito por el harrierO) 6
por el cori^o.
Ml criado las llarar& k el
eoTxio si vm. gustare con^
fiarsdas,
Ueva las cartas del seli6r al
coryte^ y no te se olvide
d franquearlas.
No tengo diniro.
Ahi le tienes, to presto, y
▼oeWe lu6go.
£star6 de vuelta en menos do
m^dio quilrto de honu
Ha llegado el oorrio ?
Ahora acaba de llep&r.
Hiy cartas para nu >
Creo que rf«
Porque no las has iraido i
Aiin no se entreg&ban.
Put the supeneriptian to it.
Make up the cover, and setiik
Where u the sand f
In the sand-box*
Dry your torUmg wth Uottmg*
paper. \tert^
m/m do you send your let*
I send tliem by the carrier , or
by the post.
Jdy man shall carry them to the
pojsti if you mU trust him
with them.
Qarry the gentleman's letters to
the potP-offiee^ and do not
Jorget to pay the postage.^
I have no money.
There is iomer go quich, and
make haste baac again.
I hmU be back in less than half
m quarter of an hour.
Is the post come in f
It ismst arrived.
Are Mere any letters for me f
I bdieoe there are.
Why did you not bring them f
They have not ddioered themr
yet.
^^e^
Di&L XIX. Del trocar.
Quiere tm. trocfir su relox ?
Conquehades^r?
Con mi espida o espadin.
En hora bu&na, pero qaanto
me dar& vm, de vuelta ?
Quanto me pide vm.?
Me dar& vm* dose pesos.
En qaanto aprecia ^m. su re*
lox?
En trelnta y seis pesos.
No vale tanto.
£s?ic|jo.
Lo conflesO) pero anda bien.
No le volvere yo nada.
Mi espada rale tanto como su
relox.
Dial. XIX. Of making an
exchange.
Wi^ you make an exchange
of your V)atchf
Forvfhat?
For my stoord.
With all my heart, but hovj muck
mil you give me to boot f
How much do you ash f l^larsL
You vM give me twhe doU
What do you value your vxxtch
at?
Thirty 'six doUars.
It is not w>rth so much.
It is an old vjotoh.
lawn Ut but it .goes vteU.
IvtHlgive you notMnz to bod^
My mord is ai gooaas your
watch.
Part V.
Familiar DiAtoouBt.
iir
Ciertmienle fie buria mi.
NoSefior.
I Que esjMlda es esta?
Acabo de compr&rla en la
^ espaderia. rdor&do?
1^ Es fa guarnicion de cobre
Bella pregunta! no v6 tbi.
Sue es de plata aobredora-
a?
Es el pnfio de plata ?
Sin dttda que lo es*
Qmanto le eost6 & twu este
espadin?
A como le sale ?
Me cueata treinta pesos.
Me ba de dar vm. pues sds
pesos de ¥uelta«
No lo bar6 por cierto.
Bien dexese de ello.
¥ea vm. si quiere tr6c&r igual
porigual?
Biwnaestiesta!
No es tan f&cil engaSanne co-
mo le par^ce*
Pnes vaya sin nada de vuelta.
Hedio^ en bora bu^na.
Youjoke^ tun*
Farjfrom it*
WhatmordUUf
I'jtut bought it ai the ittxnrd^
cutler's*
1$ the hilt of it gjU cmer'f
A fine question indeed! do not
you see it is silver gilt 9
Is the hilt real silver f
Without doubt it is.
Haw much did your noord
cost you f
What does it stand you in f
It cost me thirty douars.
You must give me six dollars to
boot then*
I toill do no such thing*
Wdl, do not think tftt.
See vAether wm wU change
even hands f
Likely indeed I
I am not so easily taken in, a$
you think,
frelly IvdUdo it even hands.
DonOf Viith aU my heart*
Di&l. XX. De los juigos
en general; y primero,
del ae los dados*
Juega vm. algunas Teces ?
St, Sefidr, pero jam&s ju6go
sine para oivertirme*
Mas, me parece que el ju^go
€S una divernion muy p^«
gr5sa.
Si, quando se ju6ga mudio
din6ro.
Pero stempre ju^go poco di-
n^ro.
Con que la pfirdida d ganan-
cia es una cortedid ?
Juega vm. & los juigos de su-
erte, 6 de babiudid ?
Que entiende vm, por juigos
desuerte?
Dial. XX. Of gaming in
general; and first, of
playing at dice.
Do you play sometimesf
YeSf Sir^ iut I never play but
Jbr diversion* s sake*
Butt methinkstgamngisa'0ery
dangerous
Yesy V)here one jhys deep, or
high.
But I always play for a small
matter*
And so lossee of vdnninge are
very indonsideraUe*
Do you play at games of
chance, or at games (f skill f
What do you mean by games
. tf chance f
U9
A Hi^ Spanish Qeammar.
Ju6gos de naype^ dados,. Spc^
Y por los de habiJidid£
£1 axedr6z, las diu^» Kis
bolos, d Ir|ia9> S^fi*
Ju6ga vm. mucho 4 los <^-
Muj rara ve&
Porqu^?
Porqu^ hay muchos tramposos
muy astutoa.
Se corre mucht rM^sgp coii
esos raterosi, pues parecen
hombres de forma.
Tienen dado^ fiftlsoa.
Vaya 4 que jue^ ju^oBUkS^?
A ll ^^ y°^ quisi^re.
Jugdmos 4 los naype^ i
Como le g^st4Fe. [eiento^
Jugu^mof al; ; iiqi»brQ> 4 \q^
Yaywk los cjentos.
ES un ju6go mujf de moda*
D6nos dos bas^ta y miboI
tanto«.
Que jugar^mos 4 cfuda jt^ega. ?
Jugvi&tQOif. HO p«t80, par^ pir
sar el ti^mpOf .
.Jug4mo8 partida doble ?
Como qui&ieie..
Quantos roe da vm. ?
Me pid^ vmi} |ant9S y juega
tail hi^ como yo.
£Bt4 cabal est» bar4j,a i
Ko, le falta un naype.
Quite vmd< U^8ajr|N9S ba«QS%
V^funoa qttm d4^
Soy manq^ » ' ,
Vnsk d4 ej na^^B. . ,v
Bar4je v(su Wf^^iwtag^
Todas las figur4s estas juntas.
A mi me falta una carta«
Lerante vm.
Hmm «8u.aus ^«laa^
Cr6o que.talMt MlNiIfli^
Ua 4iiM)fMStaA» vfi^i^
f^0| dexo udiKn
And by garner ofsJciUf \ t
Chess^ draugfitSr, bawht^ : iiHi*
Bg, ^m qften vlay $A dm?^
f
Because there are mang cfex'
terous ihas^pijus.,, . , />
And one h id gi^eai- danger,
pear like gentlemefin
Tney have loaded dit^e*
What jp^y fhaifi^mj^i^ #( ?
Which ym ,piease:
Sh(M tve play t^t sards f.
As you tqjMi . '^. .: .
Lei us play old pi^icf;, ,«< fifike^.
J^t us^^pUy a^fipl^. .fXshim>
It is a game 'oery fl¥^' i^jfa*
Give us two packs qfaMrdf,,^9md
^oitiei fiomterjs. ..■ ,,lmnef
How much shgU Hp^ j^y a
LMit.u^ phyt 9f dg^fi^ ^.JHI^ .
awayihetim^p : « t; .
Do we play lurches f
As yau pUasA^
What odds do you give me f
Yoa ofk m^ Qc^s, afhdMoufk^ .
as well as J» .... .. .
Is this a whole pac^ %f iaxds ?
NOi there wants a card* "
Throw out ^stanJtcaxikm .,
Lti.iis see who shall (faot . ^
I have the kanim ; i,.
Ifou.ai^i0i demit ,. < 1
Sbti0e the cands^ . ^liker.
All the court'-cards asm tege*
I 'want a card*
Dieali^in.
Cut.
HoM^myoiut^riif r
J believ9 imre or* §iL -.
Ji^mi yamducaandedi
Hot» muitydtii yau Uila$ in.f
i^thm aU.
N6, jt leave one*,
Part V.
FaBCIUMI .DfALOOUtfS.
119
TeDgo idal JH^o*
Hi de tener vm. bello ju6go,
fumyo nada teogo.
Ml ju^go me ap^ra*
DigA ym. su ju^»
Quanto de punto ?
CincueDta, selenta, Sfc.
Buenoy buea puoto.
No sirven.
He descartado la jpartida.
Sexta major, qaiDta al Rej,
quarta de cabaUe» terc^ra d
la 8ota, d de diez.
Otro tanto tengo, tgUal.
Tres asesy trea* rejr^ ire* son
bu6nos ?
Noy tengd m e^Adrse.
Tengo cat^rze de caballos.
Vavajugando.
Juego <Bepa^e9pdda» oro» basto.
£1 as, el rey, el caballo, la
sQitay el diea> el Dueve, el
ocho, el si^te* [p6te.
HagOL up> pique, repique, ca*
Gano log naypes*. . . ,
Tenga i^i^te.bnui?^.
H6 perdido*
Ha ganddo vniw
Me debe- viQk uit pe90»
Me lo debia yiik
Est&moapuiBar.eii p^
Vaya otra partida.
En hora buena, con macho
gU6tO^
I haw bad c^trdtm
You must needs June, good
cards, since I have moihinew^
My cards puzde me. ^
:CaU ifwar same. : ' '
Hovo much is your point?
Fifty, siiHy, Ao.
It is goody dr they ar6 good.
They, are not good,
I have laid 'out the game.
A. sixieme major ^ a quint (fr
quairieme, the king or queekf
a tierce to the knave or ten.,'
I have as much, that is equali ■
Are three aeeSf three UngSf &c.
good? ^
N09 Ihavejburteenn '
/ am fourteen by queens.
Play on, [mond or dub.
I fLay a hcairty sftn^ dsifr
The ace, the hng^ the iqtuen,
. thq knave^ the.ten^ ike ninif
the eighty the sevetL [^capot*
I. made a peek, or tepcek^ a
I have wm the cards.'
I hone seven trtcksi .
I have lost.
You have. mon.L'i
You owe fke a dMmr,
You otoediime^ •■-'. :.[
Wearetheneveni- .'
.■.}i
Let us play another game.'
With all my hearty vaiith gr6dt
pieasure. : " >
■«*^*4Mk-
i m *ii
i B i 11 11 1 .. «» nj i ^ m iin " ^
Dial. XXI. Deljtig&r al Dial. XXI. Of playing at
axedriz. chess.
En que emplear^mos la tar-
de?
Vamos jugando al axedr6z.
Jugu6mos enhorabu^na.
Pero ju6ga vm. mejor que yow
Eaviti^ Dili fuerte que yo.
No lo cr6a vm.
Me Ha gan^do vm. siempre.
No jugavS maa 00a vm. ai no
me cui6re algiuift v< '
Hoto shall vse spend the after"
noon ? ' . • ?
Let us play at chefs.
I voiU.
But you play better thast L .
You are am oner^maUh Jhr nf€»
Do not think it.
You akoays beai me.
I 90^ play no more tiMryo^%
unless you give me some odds.
190
A New Spanish Grammar.
Es preciso qae me (16 un alfil
jlainaoo*
En TerdiUl que no pu^do, ju-
6ga vm. tanto como yo.
V6a vm. si quiere jugar i la
pdr.
M uy bieuy lo har6 una vez.
Quanto jugar6mo8 ^
Siempre ju6go poco din6ro«
Vava medio peso cada ju6go.
Juego prim6ro.
Tomo este peon.
Me alesro, pues voy d tomdr
este iufil y darle xaque.
Roque me liamo.
Nana gana vm. en eso, pues
k 8U roque 6 torre me uevo
con mi caballo.
Pero como resguardara vm. d
8u reyna ?
Dandole xaque y mate, con
mi alfil y mi roque.
H6 perdido el ju^go, ya no
pu6do 'mover el rey.
Me debe vm. pues mediopeso.
Asi es.
Pero vm. me lo debii^ antes.
Bien, estamos en pdz.
D6no8 vm. un tablero.
Ju6gue vm. prim^ro.
SopTo este pe6n.
Haga dama este pe^.
Quantas damas tiene vm. ?
Tengo do8»
Coma vm. que lu6go comere
Pierdo elju6go. [tres.
You must give me a bishop and
the move.
Indeed I cannot, you play as
wUtuIdo*
See if you hof^e a mind to pla^
even,
WeUi I mU do it for once*
What shall tioe playjfor ?
/ always ^y for a small
matter.
Let us play for half a dollar a
I have the move, £gnme»
I take this pavm.
I am glad oftt^Jbr I am going
to take this Jnshop and check
J castle, f £you.
You get nothing by thai ; there
is your casUe or tovoer I take
with my knisht.
But how wST you save your
queen f
By checkmating you with my
bishop and my rook,
I have lost the game, J can"
not move the king,^' >
You owe mo half a dollar- then,
I grant it.
But you owed U me before*
Then we are quits, or even,
Xjiive us a board to 'play at
I give you the mow. \draughts,
I huff' this man.
King that man.
How many kings have you 9
I have two.
Take this, after I will take
I have lost the game, [three.
Dial. XXII. Deljugar a
la pelota.
V^ vm. que beUo dia hace.
Aprovech6mono8 de este dia
tan herm6so.
Que bardraos boy i
£1 buen tiempo nos convida
ajugdr^ddpasedr.
Dial. XXII. Of playing
at tennisv
See what a fine day U is,'
Let us make use of> thisfoir
day, ■• ' ■
What shall we do to-day f
The fine xoeather invUcs us to
play or to laoaa. - '■■
Part V.
Familiar Dialooubs.
121
£n que jo^go hemos de en-
treteneraos ?
£1 de pelota as elmejorpara
el exerclcio.
Pero es ju6go mas de invterno
que de verdno.
Sudaremos menosy si jugamos
con raqu6tas.
Vamos al ju^go de pel6ta.
- Jugar^mos con palas.
Hag^mos la partida.
£st4 vni% commigo.
No iinporta como est^mos.
£ste estd con nosotros.
£s vro. mejor jugad6r que yo.
Estese'caida uno en su lugah
Mantengase detr^s de mi; y
coja la pelota.
Paso por encima de mi.
La cogi en el dire*
Rechaze la pelota.
£s vm. mal compafiera.
No ha gan&do ym. a^n.
Aun puede vm. perder.
Tenemos la superiorlddd.
Perdid vm. gandmotf.
Quanto jugamos ?
Dos pesfpfl.
116. puesto ¥m. en el ju6go?
Na, pero ahf estd irii dinero.
£s Id mismo.
Manana jugar^mos otra ves.
iQuando vmd. quisiere.
What play shall tee amuse out'
selves at f
Tennis is the best Jar exercise*
But it is aplai/jtfierjor winter
than summer.
We shaU perspire less, if we
play mtn rackets.
Let us go to the tennis-court.
We fviuplay tmth battledores.
Let us make the match.
You are with me.
It is no matter who and who.
He is on our side.
You are a better player than I.
Let every one stand to his place.
Stand behind me^ and catch the
ball.
Itjlew over me.
I caught it in the air.
Strike the ball bacii
You are a bad second.
You have not beat mt'^et.
You may lose yet.
We have the best of it. '■■ ■
You have lost, we have won.
What didweplayjhr?
Two dollars.
Have you staked^ ' • ''
NOf but there is my money. -
It is all one.
To»morrow we will play again.
When you please. ' '
Dial. XXIir. De lasdiver^
siones del campo^ y partis
cularmente de la caza y
de la pesca.
Scnor, me alegro de v6r k vm*
adonde bd estado tan largo
tiempo i
Adonde se mete vra.?
Dos roeses hi que eM^mos en
una casa de campo.
Hd venido vro. 4 la ciudad
jparA qued&rse ?
Dial. XXIII: Of country
sports, especially of hunt-
lug and nsniDg.
iStV, / am overjoyed io see you;
where have you been this long
whUef
Where have you kept yourtelff
We have been these tw& months
' at a country^kouse.
'iffv you came to ttmn toifayf
IS'i
A New Spanish Grammar.
'So, Se56r, vudvo moftina por
la mafidna.
Comp lo pasa vm. ea el cam-
po i [en estudidr.
Parte de mi tiempo empleo
Fero quales son sos ifbversio-
neS) despueadeauiBBegociot?
Voy tal vez a cazir.
A' que caza Tmd. ?
A' veces 4 la del yenido, a
Teces i la de la li^bre.
Tiene Yin. bu^os perros ?
Ten^mos muchos perros de
muestra.
Dds ga]goss doft galgas^ (jiia-
tro xat^osy y ires perdigu-
ero6«
No caza vm. aves i
Caza vm. k voces con la es-
cop6ta?
Si, Sefi6ry muy i meniido.
Sobre que tira ym. i
Sobre todp senerp^ de , caza,
como perdicesy fata&oesigal-
lin^tas, con£jQ8» SfC.
Tira vm. al vu61o la pieza, o
corriendo ?
De ambas mantras*.
Como coge vm. los conejos ?
A veces coa redes, y & voces
fi escopet^os.
• t
Y las codoi^ices ?
Sol6mos tomarlas con una r^d,
y un perro perdiguero.
Es vra. anriga depwcSr?
Muchlsimo.
Peaci^ ym- & mcQ^^^ con r^^
Muy rajras^ voces. ...
Mas qiiiero petcir con la
cafia.
l<a pesca y la caza son diver-
siones. muy pobles.
£1 !R^ mas rico, y maa pqbre
de Europa no so diverts en
Vn. .4ia . quhSk poDBar4a ans
ministrosx que sua vaiallos
^itt»9\ «i^Mi|dipei4e dan4o' a
8US vecinos ires mSlones
No, Sir, I gp back t<Hnorr(m
morning,
Hono do yaw pois a'way the
time in ike country f
I beitavo jpart of it on books.
Bui which are your AversioTis
after your serious business f.
I go sometimes hunting*,
What do you hunt f
We sometimes huni a stag, some,'
times a hare.
Have you goad dogs?
We have a pack qfliounds.
Tvfogreu'hound dogs, twgrey'
,kaumi bitches, Jbmr terriers,
and three settingHlogs.
Do you never goJb/oMng 9
Do you go shooting some-
times ?
Yes, Sir, very nften.
What do you shoot f .
All manner of game, partridges,
pheasantSf samd^p^s^ rob'
bits, &^ . ,
Do you shoot, Jlying or run"
ningf
I do both.
Horn do.yo^ cqtck rabbiis f
Sometime^ withmmc'*^ and
sometimes iioeTcill them inrith is
gun. ,
Atid quailsf ,..
We catch them most commonly
with a net and a setting-dog.
Do ytiu lovejtshing f
Extremely.
Do youjUh often with -a net f
But seldom.
I like rather JisKing tf^h a
Une and hook.
Fishing and hunting ate very
noble diversions.
One of the^ richest and poorest
Kings of Europe has no other
pleasures.
One^ 4% , ptrhaps his .msttis-
ters will tlfMK of his sub^
j^ets giving away yearly
to their mii^kbcmr^ three
Part V.
Famu^iab Dialogues.
i£d
por peseado salido y he-
diondo.
Tiep^B ap pbstaiv^ ixuiy bu-
6dos peces en sus costas.
Pero no tamaa el trabi^o d«
. curarUs.
EstQ aH€f:ede pw fklta de ani*
mdr la p€^s€a. •
¥ de otr08 m4iQho» mqtivos.
Coge vm. muchos peces en
su ^at^nque ?
Que h^ee vm. quando no caza
^ pesea ? .
Jugimos a lalH>)ai al tnicc^ 6
L los boloi9« .
Segf^ esta no pjued6 vm. estar
cansado de la campii^a ?
Aai Ji# iniP^ce $ ▼»• y es lo con-
trario.
Y& empiezo & de^^v la ciuv
dad, y espero presto pas-
sarme k ella.
Dial. XXIV. Prffr a /a
ebmediu.
(■
Se dice que hoy represenlan
£s com^disr tvag6diai» oper% (5
entrem^ ? '
£a mm trag^iiia^ -
Como la Uamaoi ?
Quien es su autor ?
El Scfior -^ — 1 > \ {tacioB ?
Es estO; la prim^ra, repreaen-
No, Selior, y^ s&lftavrepre-
sentadd Ires TQcesl . . .
£ste es e} dfia de. el.piDQta.
Como se recibi6 . en. las priw
m^ras represenlaciones ?
Con universal aplanacK
£1 aufcdr era y^ c^lebre*
Y esta dltima trag6dio^ hd
auDa«Dtado i&ufiha su &ma.
Lceintia & veck ^
De muy buen&gaw
Voy k aQondAi 2k eochero que
apronte el codieu
miUions for slinking $aUr
They have nctmihsi^nding very
good fish on their coasts
Jmti they do not take the trouU^^
to 4fy and 9alt them.
This arises Jrom not giving eH'*
couragement to fisheries.
And Jrom many other reasons^ :
Do you catch fish in your fi§h'
pandf
What do you do vjhen yot^nei'
ther hunt nor fish ?
We flay at boms, at bHUti^ds,
or mne-pins.
So you eannot be. tu;0d mtk
the country ?
You think sOf andy^ it is quite
otherwise^
I already long for ike Uma^
and I hope shortly to be in
it. ■■.•!■■
> i •KJL,
..»
Dia/.XXIV. Ofgoing.tp
see a play.
They say there is a nm» play
Meted to-night. - .. <
Is it a come^^ a trageti^ di
operator a Jarcei.
It is a tmgedy..
What is its mtmeS . ; 1
The —
■* ' . ■»
Who is the author of it 9 . . •
Mr. --,
Is this.tke first represent^timf
No, Sir, it ha» been uimeady
acted three times* . !
TM^ is> fhe. auibor'.s nights
How was it receioedi on} the first
and second representations*fd
With universid applause* . j
The author mas already fikmastf^
And this last tragedy hasi nmch
increased hisfitme.
ShaU 'negQ and setiif
With all my hearts .
I vymms and: bid the couehnmm
get the coach ready.
IM
A New Spanish Gaammar.
Ir^mot a un aposento?
£d hora buena, ^ pero mas
quisidra ir al patio,
Porqu6 ?
Porque podemos ver y oir me*
jor alk que en los palcos.
Que M le par^ce la ainfonia ?
May btt^na me parece.
« Lot corred6re8 est&n y& lie-
DOA.
T como . vm. lo vi, estimos
muy apretados eu el patio.
No caben las damas en los
aposentos.
Nunca vi la casa tan Uena.
Estas Sefi6r88 estin muy bien
vestidas.
Ve vm, aqiiella sefl<Sira en el
aposento del Rey ?
Jamis he visto rostro tan her-
m680 en mi vida.
Quien es ?
La Duquesa de " »
Y quien es la Sefiora joven que
e8t& con ella ?
Su hermanaila Sefiorade --^*-<
Pero ya se levanta la cortinai
e8cuch6mo8.
Tendremos antes el Prologo.
£1 segundo acto est£ acarado.
Las escenas estan muy bellas.
N. N. es muv buen actor.
Este es el ultimo acto.
Acabose la pieza—- come le
gusta 4 vmd.?
Muchisimo, me parece exce-
lepte tragedia* y muy bien
representada.
Turo grande aplauso.
Ahora tendremos el Epilogo.
Quien lo dice ?
La SeHora ■
La dice con mucho animo.
Quiere vmd. quedar para ver
laPantomina?
N09 ya la he visto, y como es
tarda haremos mejordeirnos.
De todo mi corazon.
Iremos i la Opera maSaim.
Shall toe take a box?
I ^joiU do as you please, but I
had rather go into the pH.
Why?
Because toe can see and hear
better there than in the boxes.
How do you like the aoerture ^
I think it is very fine.
The galleries are aU JuU al'
ready*.
And, as you see, tve are very
much crowded in the pit.
The boxes are asjull of ladies
as they can hold*
I ntfoer saw the house soJtdU
Those ladi^ are very findy
dressed.
Do you obsfrvethat lady in ihe
King^s box?
I never in my Wes$e»40 ieai^
tt
WhotSA
The Duchess qf^
And ioho %$ that young lady
with herf
Her sister,' Lady I »,
But the curtain rises, let us
attend.
We shell first have the Prologue.
The se^nd act is over.
The scenery is very fine*
Mr. -— — is a very good actor •
This is the last act.
The play is over — how do you
like it f
Very much, I think it an exeeU
lent tragedy, and very Wfdl
performed.
It received great applause.
Nowfiar the EvUogue.
Who speaks it f
Mrs. ■■■.
She speaks it with great spirit.
Will you stay and see the Pan^
tominef
No, I have seen it before, and
as it is late we had better go.
With alt my heart.
Wp will go to the Opera tc^
morrow night. .
Part V;
Familiar Dialogues.
125
Di&l. XXV. Del vestirse. Dial XXV. Of Dress.
Sefi6r M aestra, trae vm. mi
vestido ?
Si, SeSior, aqui estL
Le estiba aguardando ; pru§-
bemelo.
Quiere vm. probir la casica ?
Veimos si esta bien hecha.
Creo que le gustari k vm.
Me parece muy larga.
Y4 no se llevan tan cortas
como antes.
Se usan largas ahora.
Abot6neme vm.
Me ajusta demasiado.
Es preciso que ajuste bien.
£ste vestido le coje mti j bien
el talle.
No son las mangas demasiado
largas y anchas ?
N09 Sefior, van muy bien.
Se llevan ahora muy largas y
anchas.
Los calzones son muy estre-
£s la moda. [|chos.
Deme la chupa.
Le v& muy bien este vestido.
Pero las madias no vienen con
este pano. [br^ro ?
Que le parece de mi som-
£s un ca8t6r herm6so.
Que gal6n le pondr& vm. ?
Un ^al6n de oro, con una
hebiUa de diamantes.
Me compr6 vm. las ligas como
le dixe ?
Si, SeSi6r, ahl estdn.
Son estas medias de seda de
Paris 6 de Londres i
Son de Frincia.
Quanto las venden ?
Tres pesos el par.
Es bastante barato, siendo tan
finas. [pat^ro ?
Muchachoi hd venido el za-
N09 Sefidr, no hi venido.
Master^ do vou bring my suit
of clothes f
Yesj Sir, here it is*
I expected you; try it on me.
{coat^
Will you be piqued to try the
Let us see if it is tvdl made.
I hope it ixxiU please ffou.
It is very long^ I thtnk
They do not wear them 110(0 so
short as they didjbrmerly*
They toear them long novo.
Button me.
It is too dose^ or too strait.
It ought to be dose.
That suit Jits you very inell.
Are not the sleeves too long and
tootoidef
N09 Siry they Jit very xoeU.
They ivear them novo very xmde
and very long.
The breeches are very strait.
It is the fashion.
Give me the waistcoat.
This suit becomes you vaeU.
But the stockings do not match
this cloth.
What do you say to my hat f
It is a fine beaver.
What lace do you intend to put
toil?
A gold lace, voith a diamond
buckle.
Did you buy me a pair ijf
garters f as I told you f
YeSf Sir^ there they are.
Aft these sUk stockings made in
Paris or London ?
They are made in France.
How much do they sell themjbrf
Three doUars a pair.
It is cheao enough, since they
are so fine.
Boy, is the shoemaker comet
Nof Sir, he is not come.
tfl6
A Vea Spanish Ghaimmar.
Corre pues k su casa, y dile
que me trahiga mis zapatos.
S^fi/ir, «qQ{ eatiy le eticexitre
en el camino.
Son ettos mtt zapatot ?
Si, Se!X6r.
Pongamelos wi.
Eaten may ajuatmdos.
Me apri^tan un poco.
Pongalos en la horma, para
enaancbarlos.
Bastantemente ae eosaochardn
llevandoloB.
Esta pi^l di de si como un
guante.
I^iento muy bien que me las-
timar&D.
Mis balloa lo padecerin.
Me duelen mucho los pies.
£1 empeyne de este zapato no
vale nada.
El tal6n es demasiado bdxo.
Las suelas no son bastante
fuertes, ni gruesas.
Hagame vm. otro par. [tar.
Es vm. muy dificil de conten-
Quiere vm. probdr otro par,
que traxe per acaso ?
£n bora bo^na.
Creo que le ir4n bien.
Mi pie estd mas descans^o.
Quanto valen estos zapatos ?
A como los vende vm. ?
Dos pesos y medio
Es demasiado caro.
Es precio hecho.
Es un zap4to bien hecho y
bien cosido.
Hagame otro par como este.
Tome mi medida.
AM tiene su din^ro.
Vivavm.muchos afios caballero.
Run then to him^ and bid him
bring my shoes.
Sir^ here he is ^ I mei him <6yihe
'may.
Are these tny shoissf
YeSy Sir.
Try them M me^
They are too strait.
They pinch me a little.
Put them on the last^ to wake
them toider.
They unit gr&t»ndde enough by
uoearing.
This letUher stretdus Uke a
glove.
Ijeel very wll Aat they wilt
hurt me.
My corns will st^erjor it.
^yfi^ ore in the stoda.
The upper-leather of this shoe
is goodjbr nothing.
The heel is too low.
The soles are not strong or thick
enou^.
Make fM€ another pair.
You arey Sir, very kardio please.
Will you try. another pair^
ivhich I brought by chance ?
I 'will.
I believe thiy toiUfit you.
My Jbdt is ^ore at ease.
What are these shoes foorth f
Hcno much do ybu seU them 4gtf
Ttvo dollars and a half.
It is too dear.
It is a set price.
That is a shoe toell made and
vsell stitched.
Make me another pair Hke them.
Take my measure.
There is your money,
i thank you^ Sir.
tm*.
i«*a
Diil.XXVL Ddhabldra
un mozo de cahallos.
Almohaza mi cabalio.
Estriega, y limpiale bien con
Dial.XXYL Of speaking
toagroooi.
Cvrry my horse. . . • J
Rub him toeff rekhuyiMqf of
-strdto^
Part V.
Familiar Dialogues.
m
Mi cabftllo e8t4 sin herrad^ras.
Le faltao dos herrad^irras.
Llevale i casa del herrador.
Mandele herrdr.
Llevale despues al rio.
Le has dado de beber ?
Si, Se&or.
Dale su pienso de cebada.
Paseale esta tarde.
Dale tambien salvddo.
Hi comido su cebdda ?
Echale paja ahora.
Ensilla mi caballo, y traemele.
Tomale por el freno.
No le hagas corr6r*
No le recalientes.
£std cansado ?
Quitale el freno.
Ponle en la caballeriza.
3fy horse is unshod.
He wifUs ixvo shoes.
Take him to the farrier.
Get him shod, ^rioer.
Lead him qfterwtrds to the
Have you xvatered him f
Yesy Sir,
Give him his barley.
Walk him this afternoon i
Give him also some bran.
Has he eaten his barley ?
Give him notn some siratu.
Saddle my horse and bring him
•~ to me.
Take him by the bridle*
Do not make him run.
Do not over^heat him.
Is he voeary f
Unbridle him.
Put him in the stable.
"mi^
m0
Dial. XXyiL De ua
viage.
Vengo & despedlrme de vm.
V 4 receblr sus ordenes.
Adonde yd vm. Sefior ?
Voy a Madrid.
Quando parte vm. ?
£n este instante.
V£ ym. d caballo 6 en coche ?
A' caballo.
Muchacho, traeme mi caballo*
Aqul e8t4> Sefi6r.
£8t4 bien almohazddo ?
May bien, Sefior.
Quantas leguas hay de aqui
dM ?
Diez leguas.
Son leguas largas ?
Noy Sefior, son la mas cortas
de Espafia.
Le parece 4 vm. que podamos
camindr tanto hpy ?
Sin duda, no ea ttn tarde.
Dar4n las doze.
II
Dial. XXVII. Going upon
a journey.
/ come to bid youjaretodlf to
take my leave.
Where are yousoingy Sir?
t am going to Madrid.
When do you set out9
Presently,
Do you go in a coach or on
horseback ?
On horseback.
Boy^ bring my horse.
Here he u^ Sir,
Is he vmU curried^
Very turf/, Sir,
Htm many leagues is U'Jrom
here to M »f
Ten leagues.
Are they long leagues^
Nof Sir^ they are the shortest
in BfKWi.
Do you think me can go so
Jar te^dayf
mthout dottbtf iisnot so late.
It is near txioelve </doek.
\2»
A iVea^ Spanish Grammar.
Tiene vm« bastante tiempp
para Uegir antes de pooerse
el 861.
Hay buen camino ?
Muy herm^MK
Niogun pantano 8e encuantra.
Pero dene vm. bosques que
atravesar, y rios que pasar.
Hay peligro en el camino
r^alr
No se habla de que haya la-
dr6nes en los bosques ?
No se dice nada de esto.
No hay que tem6r nada ni de
dia, ni de noche.
Es un caminoy en que anda
genie siempre.
Que camino n6 de tomirl
Quando e^t^ vm. cerca de la
prim^ra aldda, tomard i
mano dereclia.
H^ de subir el monte ?
N09 Sefior, dexele vm. 4 la
izqmerda.
Es el camino dificultoso en los
bosques ?
No, Senor, vaya vm^ siem-
pre derecho> no se puede
extraviar.
Adonde encontrar^mos el rio ?
A la salida del bosque.
Se puede vadeir, es vadeable I
No, . Se!i6r, se pasa en un
b^rco.
Vamos caballeros, mont^mos.
A' Diosy Sefl6re8.
Dies les d^ buen viage.
Les doy muchas eracias.
No quiere v.m. ecn^r Mix trago?
Como v.md. gust&re.
Vaya h, su buen viage.
You have time enough to reach
that place before me sun sets.
Is there a good road?
Very fine.
You meet mth no quagmire.
But you have V)oods to go
through^ and rivers to cross.
Is there any danger upon the
hightioay f
Do you hear whether there
are am highvcaymen in the
tooodsf
There is no talk of it.
There is nothing to Jcar either
by day or ni^U.
It is a high roadf xjohere you
always meet toith people.
Which toay must I take f
When you come near the next
village^ you must take to the
right.
Must I go up the hill?
Noy Sir^ you must leave it to
the left.
Is there a difficult Viay through
the wood r
Not at allf Sirs go straight
alof^f you cannot miss your
vmy.
Where do Vie come to a river ?
As you come out of the voood.
Can one for d it overf
No, Sir, they Jerry it otw.
Come, gentlemen, let us mounts
Farevoal, Gentlemen.
I vjish you a good journey.
I thank you with all my heart.
WiU you not take the parting
glass f
As you please.
To your good journey.
Dial. XXVIII. En una
posada.
Adonde esta la mejor posddtt
delaciudid?
Dial. XXVIII. In an
Inn.
Where is the. .le$t inn in
totvn?^
Part V.
Familiar Diaiogubs.
]£g
Al signo M Caballo Blaneo.
£n que parage de lariUa esti ?
Cerca de la iglesia mayor.
Fodr^mos alajarnoa dixnji ?
Sf> Se!i6r,teD^oflbellosquar-
losi^ y bueoas camas.
Ape^monos, SeH6res.
Adonde esta d mozo de ca-
ballos?
Aqul est6y, Sefior.
Toma nuestros caballot.
Lleralos i U CabaUeriza*
Cuidalos bien.
Yeamog ah^ra^ que nos darfi
"nn. de eendr ?
Veao ynMu Sefidres, io que
mas gustfiren.
D^noft media doz^a de ]pi-
ch6iie8, dos perdicef , seis
codonuoesi ua bntn capon
y upa ensalada. ) .
Tendrfe cwdada de todo, no
se inquieten muu
No quieren ▼ma. otra^osa?
Np^ basta COD esto; perodi-
nos buen idno, j&uttu
Lei aieguro que ■ lea dar6
^usto. • • '
Quieren ytOB. it & .ier mu
aposeatoif
Si, llMtt A aa camar^ou
AJumlte k ettoa jSe&Ana qae
Buban.^
Haganos cen&r quanto 90MB.
«
Antes que se bayan qnitodo
las botas^ estAri la osoa
proiita.
Aopnde estao nuestros laca-
yos?
Abi fluben oon sus balijas.*
Han traido nuestras pistobs i
8i,^ 8efi6r, aqul est^.
Quitamts boiines y ve des-
pues 4 cuid4r de nuestros
caballos.
Llama para cenir.
SeSorci, la cew tsti pronta^
est& en la mesa.
Ai the sign of ike WhiU Hone.
In tokaipariqfthe to*m is iif
Near ike great church.
Can iva lodge here?
Yest Sir^ loe have good cAam-
bers and good be&.
Let us alight^ Gentlemen,
Where is the ostler t
Here lam^ Sir.
Take our horses.
Lead them to the stables.
Take care of them.
NotOj let ussee^ what ttiU ^ou
give usjur supperf
See yourseUxSi gentlemen, 'schat
you have a rrnnd to.
Give nsf half a doten p^eem^
M braoe of partridges^ six"
quaOti a good capem^ akd
a sdUad.
•ImUtai^eMre of allj do^nat
troMe yourselves*
JVill you have nothing dae ?
Na^ that H enpu^, bmtletisis
have good vnne andfrtuk^
I shM pUase^your i tHtmiuU
Wul yak go and. see ymtr
chamSersfi
YesyCiM yowf^^hambeMm
Lig^ibe GenHemm mp^etaki.
Let us have aetf. s^y^per as soon
Before your boots anpalied
qff\ sufperuill'be^ge^rdmljf.
I
Whun^eiBr94m3r 9er^>mM
Thete ihpy afe^eamivfupHmA
■ yoe» pettmanteofiis.
Have they brought ear pi$kk f
Yes^t SliryhareAeyare*
PidLdfmyboa^ and them go
ana look after our horses*
CaUJor- mpfet.
Qemesaent swemer is readyi k
is on the taw^
* I
150
A New Spanisb Grammar.
Vamos, S^6re8y i cenir, para
poder acostamos tempr&no.
SentemoDOs 4 la mesa.
Vm. no come nada, que tiene ?
No tengo gaoasi estoy can*
•ado.
£8t6y molido.
£star6 mejor en la cama que
en la mesa.
Tome vmd. animo.
Si se stente malo, rayase d
acostar.
Mande calentdr su cama.^
Que no les impida de cen4r,
voy & descansar.
Ha menester vm. algo ?
Nada quiero sino descansar.
Tengan Tms. bu^nas nbches*
Trae loa postres y di H la
patr6na que venga d ha-
Dlamos.
Aqui yieoe.
SefiSrety lea gusta 4 vma. la
cena?
Siy Se56rar pero ahora es me-
nester satisfac^r d vm.
Quanto hemos gastado ?
Que hemos de pagdr ?
£1 e8c6te no sube mucho.
via vm. quanto le deb^mos,
por nosotros, nuestros cri«
ddos y caballos*
Por la cena, la cama^ y el al«
muerzo.
Todo importa diez pesos.
3f a parece que es demasiado.
Al contrarioi es muy barato.
Haga vm. mismo la quenta, y
hallard que no les pido de-
masiado.
Pagar6mosle maSana por la
maSiana de^>ues del almu-
erzo.
Como vms. quisieren.
D^nos sdbanas llmpias.
Las sdbanas, que les envio son
muy bu6nas»
La ui go to supper^ Gentle-
meUf thtU tve may go to bed
eariy.
Let us sit doom at table.
You eat nothings 'oohat ails you ?
I have no appetite^ I am tired,
I ani bruised all aver.
I shall be better in bed than
at table.
You must take courage,
(fvou find yourself iU, go to
Get your bed Hoamted.
Let me not hinder you from
your supper ^ I am going to
try to sleep.
Do you ^ooant any thing f
I wint nothing out rest.
I toish you a good ni^kt.
Bring the dessert^ and go and
bid tie landlady come and
speak 'uMh us.
Here she is coming.
Gentlemen^ are yost eatisfi^
tioith your supper?
Yesy mutresSf out «oe must sa-
tisfyyou.
What have toe- had f
What have toe to pay f
The reckoning is not Atglk.
See tnhat you must have Jbr
oursdves, our men, and our
horses.
For the supper, bed, and breaks
fast.
Ail amount to ten dollars.
I think you ask too much.
On the contrary, ' it is very
cheap.
Reckon yoursdf, and you voSl
find that I do not ask you too
much.
We voUl pay you io^morro^
morning after breakfast.
As you please Gentlemen.
Let us have dean sheets.
The sheets I s^ you are very
good.
Part V.
Familiar Dialog^uxs.
131
Bu^nas nodieSy Seflora.
Bu6iiaa noches les d6 Diofi &
was. cabaI16ro8, 8enrid6ra
de vras.
Kecesitan yiD8.de algo ?
Nada nos hace falta.
Solo que se haga buen fti^go.
Las noches son tnuy frias.
£s meDester cuidarse en vi-
age.
•/
Oood ii^gAfi Misfras.
Good ntghtf Oenilemenf I am
your seroani.
Do you wuU any iiingf
We VMnt noiiingn
Only let us have a good fir e»
The nights are f^efy toli. ' '
Otie must take care qfone^s^self
on a journey. < ;:
•*?■
Dild.XXt:^ Parahabiar
. con los . empleados en las
Traen vnpif. algo co&tra las
' 6rdeneg de su mfltjestad,
.__(del fljpliprranoy. i.de.la re-
pdblitpi?) ::
Npy^ yo np.teiigo contrabando
algiino*
Tengo.solaxnetite aigiinps.ellsG-
. tps qqe pagan impuf»8t06^ y
voy i declararseios. ^. -
Quanto 4^b^'pi^gar por^esto I
■ ' »
X . • , I \ . t ^ \ . -It « •
£s raenefi^er djB^n^e bus Haves.
H61as aqui, hagame. vmd. la
. gracia* de despacbarme lue-
go. porqu& tenga ipucba
priesa.
Se lo estiQ)ar6 mudio. .
Tenga vmcU ,1a Uave del can-
dadfky ,hi aqui la Have de la
cerradura.
•Hagame void. la gracia.de
busqar con precauG^on per-
que^hay mucba^ cows que
pueden quebr^se., . ' >
Ha acabado vmd ?
No emplo^iard viikL ahora el
baul y loa cofres»..para que
no me los busqoen (o regis-
tren^ otra vez^
No poaria vmd, en logar de re-
^istrarme aqui en esta puerta.
Dial, XXIX. On ^p^aking
to the searchcurs of the
customs.
Have you nothing mih yo^,
^ .. dfmtrary to the dearees vfth^
. hing,,sovereignyOr ri!]iftUicf
No^, I have no .corUr^b^nd
goods.. , . V- :■ ;, :. -' .
'iS/Mve ^rdy some goods that
fuy duty^ and, I mil produce
them.
Mm mwih have I to payjbr
. thisi
You must give me your Jceys.
Here they are. Be so kind as
^ to he a little expeditious^ for
I am in great haste. .
great
I sham he muoh obliged to^you
for it.
Here is the h^ to the padlock^
,. and here. U: the key' to the
Pray he earefid in searching^
Jor there is nauehirif^ vaare
therein.
Have you done f
WovCt you put a signature im'^
mediately upon the portmoH"
teau and trunkf that J may
not be searched again f
Pray could not you, instead of
searching me here before the
I 2
1S£
A VeW SPAHfSR GflAMMAR.
▼enir 6 httoerlo cfi h fyodtif
posar?
rmcias, paselo Tind. bien.
gaUf accomfong me io the
titkf or hnut^ tvkere I Mludl
Mgef
I tfumk ^lautjfanwdl.^ Your
mmmim^
mm
■p-'*^'
■ '<■■!
■*«
Di&l . XXX. Pan una per-
una extraoiada en una
Clllffflif-
No me haria Tind. el ftvpr de
dteime al eatoy Kjos dd
batfio de Sellor Fhuieiico,
6 de la calle db SeGor
Pablo?
Hagr on^ Mjoe de amii &•
Buicolapoiiadadd Sellor.
6 ^ la Sefiom — — -•
For que lado debo ir?
Ztapaes dart vudta k k dere-
cha 6 6 la izquierda i
£s amii que vive d SeSor^— 4
^isiera ^md. darue aa direc-
cion?
Podna ?md. aefidame d cft-
mino que debo tomar para
ir 6 easa del SeAor — -»?
Quiere mid. eonducirme dl&,
le pagart Weii^ le dart ^-*— •
Pase THid. ftdelan(e> yo le se-
guir6.
•No tsya tan < priMa.
doiidustanie vmd. por el €a«
mino mat corito.
Bila ddle etl6 emboraaada^
tomeinoa otro camuio*
Uame mid. an coche de al-
qnilen
Codbero, quemt Uenvme ^
More en n caHa de
DiaL XXX, Forapenoa
who has lost his way in a
town.
PrqywUyoii Migs me io far
aeto teume, w ke iKer I&mu
'gmU wojf ^firam^ thd pmrter
— — or street .-^— . f
A ajkrjhm here f(» •^-<^f
J^mhMngJbr thd kmue of
Which CM^ must Igef
*4fua Hum efiefwmb io the
right or l^f
Boas Mr. -^— five keref
IVWI'fmiJtiwmrmewiihkkdi''
rectumf
ll^yembemhbtiaMiofomt
out io me the direetton I
' mitd fake^ m onfer Ip |;o
■ *>i— ?
-fVky fhfm me the way IMM^,
i mil faf yon hemdeamdy.
ItMlgtveyou ■ ■ »
Oobrfore, I vaiUjMem you.
Denet we^ ioihet.
tkmme the worteet «Nly»
There arntdo numjfhimiHmeee
• in thie street j kt ms fake
nnotherwty.
Calljbr a coach.
(kKu^mian will you irhi met
I Uoe in ^-^^^ street.
Part V.
Familiar Pialoouks.
133
Bi&I. XXXI. Vn mUtar
vencedor esiableciendose
en U9ia casa de hs 4enr]
cidos, y hablando d los
dumos de la casa.
No tengais miedo> somos In,-
flesesy AlemaneSy Sumos,
nuieeses, Ac,, nuettro ca-
racter nacional puede aegu-
rarQs de nuestra generM-
d&dy y la obedienda qoe
debemos d nuestro aaheraa*
es un segnndo fiador. Las
^encidorque se soniteii no
son para nosotros aino ami*
g08 desdichados.
Entieffaos con seguddgj &
vuegtras ocupaciones ordi.
nariasi j otprometemps ae-
guridadt ateDcionei(» sosic^
proteodon y ayudi|» ai no-
cesitareis de ella.
Si mi gente os diere algun
motivo de quexa, recorred
& mi oon confianza, jo 410
aufirire que se pase algo qi^
pueda cutros ikgasU^
No le^gaia mfedo, xm foldado
vakroBo no es temiUbaiop
460 4J Qtoaxpo de batalliu
Camacadasj comporteooono?
€0010 homhres de valor, xe^«
{Wfitamoa la desdiohai no
ocGaaionemq8 aquS ni albt-
roto ni detorden.
JDttn* X/£X(« A mlitary
man entering, after the
victor}, the house of a de-
feated enemy, and spealc-
ing to the masters of the
house.
Don t feat any things V9e are
JEnffUnifiKny vfeffMMSf JKiit^
sianif JWncAmfn, tfe. Our
national charader^ and the
submission vie eme to otar
sofnereign^ are a double fle^
of our generodty* A sup'
dtted enemy is considered by
us as an uMopfy/riendf^
CoMtiMue «M(i seeurUy your
customary voorhSf voe promise
yosf sqfidyp mSdness^ iran^
fuHUty^ ffratections and as*
ssstfincet ^ yosi should ivant
any*
J^ my people should give yws
wsy reason of oonydaini,
come and speak openfy tQ me^
X xsani suffer them to dp
any thing thai might jusny
be disagreeable to you*
Do not be afraid, ' a brave solr
dier is dreadful on thejki4
of battle only.
Ckmrades, letusbekaveoarsdvef
mhrane men sAouiddo ; sfisre
the unjkagm, and donatftwe
here my troujUe pr disorder
Part V.
[ 134 ]
FABLES.
Fabula Primera.
Lo$ AnimdUs en consejo
juntos para elegir un
Rejf.
TJ ABIENDO muerto el leon,
todas las aves, y bestias
se coogregaron ^ 8u cueva
para condoler&e con la reyna
▼iuda, que hacia resonar sua
lamentos, y gritos en los mon*
le>i y bosques.
Despues de los acostumbra-
'dofe cumplimientos, procedi-
eroo todos k la eleccion de un
jey : la corona del difunto mo-
narca fue colocada en medio
de la asamblea.
Su aparente heredero era
demasiado j6ven, y endeble
pjara obtener la di^idad real,
i, la que tanjtos animales mas
fuertes que el pusieron su de-
manda.
Dexenme crecer un poco,
dixo 8u alteza, y entonces
experimentar^is que puedo
llenar el trono, y con el
tieropo hacer felices a mis
siibditos. Entretanto estudiar^
I.as acciones her6icas de mi
padre, con la esperanza de
que algun dia podr6 serle
igual en gloria.
For mi parte, dixo el leo-
Eardo, insiBto en mi derecho i,
i corona, por la mayor seme-
janza que tengo al Ultimo rey
entre todos log candidatos.
Yo, por otro lado, grit6
el 080, sostendr^ que se me
hizo injusticia, quando su ma-
j^estad anterior se me prefiri6 :
Fable the First.
The Beasts assembled in
council to elect a
King.
nVE lum being dead^ aU the
birds and beaits fiocked to
his den to condole with the
iioneUf his royal relict^ who
made the mountains ^ and the
Jbreits resound with her loud
ones.
After the usual compliments f
thev proceeded to the dection ^
a Kins : the crown of the de^
ceasea monarch being vlaced in
the midst of the assemblif.
His heir apparetlt was too
young and weak to obtain the
royai dignity f to 'which so many
creatures stronger than himself
put in their cUdm.
Let me grow up a little, said
his highness, and then you shall
find that I can fill the throne,
and make my subjects happy in
Zturn, in the mean ttmef I
U study the heroic actions of
my father, in hopes that one day
I may equal him in ^knry.
For my part, said the leopard,
I insist on my right to the
crown, as I resemble the late
king more than any other can^
didate whomsoever.
I, on the other hand, cried
the bear, wUl maintain that I
had injustice done me when his
late majesty was preferred be^
Part V.
Fables.
135
soy tan fuerte, intrepido, y
8angrieDto> como era ; y ade-
mdsy soy maestro de un arte
que el jam&s pudo adquirir,
qual es, el trepar por los ar*
Doles.
Yo ap^lOy dixo el elefante,
al juicio de esta augusta asam-
blea, si alguno de los presen-
tes puede con algun colorido
jactarse de ser tan alto, de
tan noble presencia, tan ro*
bustOy 6 tan circunspecto co-
mo yo.
10 soy la mas nable> y la
mas hermosa criatura entre
todos 'yo8otros> dixo el ca-
ballo.
Y yo soy la mas political
dixo )a zorra.
Y yo soy el mas ^0162 en
cerrer, dixo el corzo.
£n d6nde encontrareis, dixo
el micoy un rey mas agradable,
mas ingeniosoy y mas divertido
que yp ? Yo divertiria conti-
i^uamente & mis Yasallos, y soy
ademas d mas semejante al
bombre, que es el Seflor .del
Universo.
£1 papagayo interrumpien-
dole, nizo su arenga : supuesto
que vm. se alaba de su seme-
janza al hombre, me parece
que puedo yo alabarme .con
mucba mas justicia. Toda la
semejanza de vm. consiste en
sa hocico feo y algunos ges-
tos ridiculos; pero yo puedo
bablar como un bombre, 6 imi-
iar su lenguage» sefial indica-
tiva de su razon, y su mayor
adomO) u ornamento.
Guardad vuestra maldita sar-
uUa, replic6 la mona : bablaisy
es ciertQy pero no como hom-
bre ; repetis siempre una mis-
ma co8a> sm entender una sola
palid^ra de lo que decis.
Jbre n/te ; lamas strongs and
as undaunted as he toM/ be^
sidesf I am master of an art
'which he cotdd never attain io^
I mean that of dimbing trees.
I appealf said the elephani,
to thejui^nent of this augusi
assembly f if any one here pre"
sent <Mn, toith any colour^ ooad'
of being so tally portly ^ so ro^
oustf or sedate as 1 am*
I am the noblest and the most
beatdiful creature of you allp
said the horse.
And I am the most skilled in
foliticst said thejbx.
And I the swiftest in run*
ningt said the stag.
nhere mil you find^ said
the monkey, a king more agree*
able, more ingenious^ and more
entertaining than I am? I
should each day divert my sub*
jeets: besides f lam the picture
&f many V)ho is Lord of the
Universe.
Thevarrat interrupting him
made nis speech: oince you
boast of your likeness ofman^ I
think I may mth more justice.
AH your resemblance mth him
consuls in your uglyphyxy and
some ridiculous grimaces : but I
can talk like a man^ and imitate
his speechy the indication cf his
reason^ and his greatest oma*
ment.
Hold your m^etcheddack^ re*
j^ied the monkeys you taU, U
tstrueybutnotlikeaman: you
chatter th^ same thing over and
<mer again^ mthout understand*
ing onesin^wrdofvAatyois
say.
lSi>
A New Sp>ni$h Grammar.
Toda la asambKa se reyS
doekiofi doe rivalet imtador&i
dol g^oero huBiano» y confirU
eron la ooroaa al ale&Qte»
porque era Aierte y aabio ; y
no solo era exento del barbarp
natural de las bestias de rapi-
S«, «iDo tambieD de la vanidad,
y amor propio de que muchos
efttan locaoos, aie»pra pare«
ciendoles 6 fineiendo aer lo
que, en la r«alia«d> no sou.
The tokoh auemiUi^ Imtghed
at these iaao rveal inoMors
of mankind^ enuL conferred ^e
crcmm on the elc[^uuif as he
IMS Mk strong aid toiae, mnd
not only free from the crwd
temper ^ the beasts of frey^
hut JroM the vanity and ae|^
coneeit inhick ioo many etre
Udated toithy tf oivoam neenn
ing to be nihat in reality they
are not.
Fabnla Secunda. Fable the Second.
El Dragon y las Dos Zor^ The Dragon and the Two*
ras. Poxes.
Un drag^B guardaba con
finsia un tesaro lomenso en
uaa cuava profunda; annca
dormia de dia ni da nochcy
para aaegtirarlo.
Dos sorras aduladoras, ar*
tifioiosaS) y picaras de profe*
•ioD, ae introduxeron en an
gracia con aua iiaonjas ^Baddi-^
osas, Ambas eran sua ivIiBiaa
amigaa.
Loa que son mas ^^ortesea,
y o^ciosos no aon SMinpre los
maa ainceroa. Le rxndieron
sua obaeqoioa ooa la mevMr
aumision : admiraron aua nm-
taaoiaB QCtoeaa; coanpiniaren con
61 en aua id4a8» y ae burlaron
de stt oriduk l«siteria.
Finalroente, quedo se un dia
dormido entre sua confidentes :
le ahogaron, y tomaron pose*
ak>n de au teacro,
Era preciao reparthr el ph-
l(i#e; un puato may daltca*
d«» y no era facii de ajnstarse,
porque doa viliane^ no con-
vienaoi aino en b tsxecocion*
de SQS delitos.
A dragon sat brooding aver
an immense treasure in a deep
essoe; he never slept by night or
dayy in order to securt it*
ISooJbxes, artfid sycophants,
and rtmtes by profession^ in*
dnuated tkemsebes into kUja^
uotir by their Jidsome ^fi^dteries*
They ttjere his bosom^fHends,
They iioho are the most oeenr*
teous and oUigfbi^t arem&t at*
•mays the most mneare. Ubiy
meiie their addressee ia km
with the utmost submismon mad
respect f they ndmired aB hie
ime Jandes, gave inta oft hie
sentiments^ and laughed in^eir
sleeves at his eredtdity.
At length, be one day JUl
asleep between his €o$^a§n$sc
they strangled him, and ^^ok
possession qfkis treasure:^
The plunder mas to be oK"'
vided: a very tender posnty^sntd^
not easily to be ecfptsied; Jhr
itoo viliains agree in • aniking
but in tl
crimes.
Pari V.
Fables.
137
Una de ellas empez6 k ex-
hortar en estos t^rminos : de
qu6 nos t cr vi rd, todo este di«
nero? Un gazapo nos seria
un botnif 6 presa mas agra-
dable : no podemos hacer una
eomida de estos doblonesy son
may indigestos. Ltn hdmbres
son muy locos, en .dexarse
arrebatar de riqnezas tan hna-
ginarias. No seamos nosotras
criaturas tan insensatas, cdmo
ellos lo son.
La otra pretendio que estas
reflexiones )a habian becho
una impresion faerte, y la ase-
gnT6, que en lo Tenidero esta-
ria contenta de continuar una
▼ida filosophica, y como Bias
Hevar su tesoro todo consigo.
Al parecer, ambas e8tdi>an
dispnestas d abandonar su te-
soro raal adquindo : pero am-
bas se queaaron i la mira^
hasta que se despedazaron.
Al espirar la una ^xo k la
otra, que estaba tan mortai-
mentenerida como elk: qu6
querias hacer con todo aquel
OTO ? Lo mismo que tu te pro-
ponias hacer con el> repUc6 la
otra.
Siendo tnformado un via-
jador de su pendencia, las
dixo, que eran tontas. AA
lo es el mayor numero del g€-
nero humano, replic6 una de
las zorras. Tampoco k voso-
troB puede servir de eomida,
y con todo, of asasinais imos k
otros por el dinero.
Nosotras, las zorras, hemes
sido bastante s^bias, k lo menos
ha«taaqui, paramiraral dinero
como una cosa kiiitil. Lo que
habeis introducido entre voso-
tros oomo ana convenienciai
es Tueitra deagracfa. Dexais
un bien substaneial, solamente
por seguir un bien fantdsCico.
One ff them began io prtaeh
thut: Of what tertfiee tM all
this manejf he to usf A leveret
had been a much more agreeable
booty : toe cannot make a meal qf
the$e pUtoUi, they are too hard, qf
digestion. Mankind are mere
fools to dote on such imaginary
riches. Let us not be such silfy,
thaaghtless creatures as they are.
Tlte otfter pretended thai then
reflections had made a strorig
impression on him, and assured
him, that hs would be contented
for the future to lead a philosophic
life, and like Bias carry au he
had about him.
Both seemed ready to abandon
their Ut^gotten ireoiure : but both
lay in andmscade, until they tore
eadh other to pieces.
One qf them, as he was ex*
piring, said to ike other, who
was as mortally wounded, oi
Mmsdf, what xoould you hmc
with aU thai gold? The very
same as you proposed to haoe done
wiilk %t, replied the other.
A traveller, being informed qf
their quarrel, told them they wert
fools. And soarethetoholeracc.
qf mosMnd^ saii ome of the
foxes ; you can feed upon gold
no more than xocj and yet you
murder one another far tic sake
<fit'
We foxes were wise enang^^
at least until now, to look ein
money as a useless thing. Thai
which you have introduced
amongst you as a convenkace
is your mi^ortune,. You pari
with a stAstantial goqdg omfy
to pursue an empty shadow.
138
A New Spanish Grammar.
Fabula Tercera.
Las Dos Zorras. .
Una noche , eotraron dos
zorras furtivamente en un sa-
Uinero: mataron el gallo^ las
eaUinaSy y los polios : despuea
de esta matanza, empezaron ^
devorar su presa.
Uoa que era joven y sin re-
flezton, propuso comerlos todo
de una vez : la otra vieja y co-
diciosa queria ahorrar para
otrodia.
Hijai dixo la viejay la ex-
periencia me hizo sabia; en
mi tiempo he visto mucho
mundo. No consmnamos k
la vez . prodigamente todo
nuestro caudal : tubimos buen
sucesoy y debemos cuidar de
no mal gastarlo.
Replic6 la joven> estoy re*
suelta & recrearme mientras
lo teneo por delante, y sa-
ciar mi apetito por toda una
semana ; por lo que toca 4 ve«
nhr aqui maflanai es cuento:
eso es exponernos: maSiana
Tendrd aqul el amOy y por
vengar la muerte de sus polios,
DOS darii con una tranca en la
cabeza.
Despues de ^sta replica,
oada una de ellas obra como
le parece mas propio.
La joy6n come hasta que
revienta, sin poder apenas
arrastrarse k su cueya antes
de morir. La vieja que le
pareci6 mucho mas prudento
goberriar su apetito, y ser fru-
gal, fu6 el dia siguiente al
gallinero^ y la mata el labra-
don
Fable the Third/
The Two Foxes.
One night two foxes entered
. h stealth into a fien-roost ; they
mled the cock, the hens, and the
chickens: qfter this slaughter, they
began to devour their prey.
One that was young and
thoughtless, proposed to eat them
tdl at once: the other that was
old and avaricious, uras Jat^
makixkg a reserve for another
day.
Child, said the old one, ex'
perience has made me wise; J
have seen a great deal of the
world in my time. Let us nos
lasoishfy consume our whole stock
at once : we haoe met with good
success, we have found a treasure,
and ougju to be cautious how we
squander it away.
The young one replied, I am
resolved to indulge myself whilst
it is btfare me, and sati^nnf apm
petite for a whole week: for as
to your notion qf returning here,
it is a jest : tO'mamyw wiU not
do at all ; the owner^ to revenge
the death qf his chickens, would
knock us both on the head.
After this reply, each ef them
acts as he thinks proper.
The young one eats untU he
hursts, and has scarce stret^th
enough to crawl to his kennel 6e-
fore he dies. The old one, who
thought it much more prudent
to govern his appetite and he
frugal, went the next day to his
hoards and was killed by ths
former*
Part V.
Fables.
139
Asi cada edad tiene 8u vi-
cio favorite : h>sr jovenes son
fbgosos, 6 insaciables en sus
placeree; y los viejos incor-
regibles en su avaricia.
Thus every age has iu darting
vice: the young are sanguine,
and insatiable in their enjoyments,
the old are ineorrigible in their
avarice^
Fabola Quarta;
Fable the Fourths
El Lobo y el Cordero. The Wolf and the Lamb.
Habifi un rebaSo de ovejas,
que pacian seguras de todo
mal en un cercado ; todos los
perros dormian, y sus amos
tocaban la gayta rural con sus
compaSieros baxo de un alamo
frondoso.
Un lobo hanabriento vino
al redil a registrarlos por las
rendijas.
Un cordero ioexperto, y
que nunca habia estado fu-
era, entr6 en conversacion
con 61.
Y le dixoy que es lo que tu
quieres aqui, lobo ?
Un poco de esta yerba fres-
, ca le respondi6 el lobo. Bien
sabes que no hay cosa mas
agradable, que matar la ham-
bre en un prado verde esmal-
tado con nores, y apagar la
sed en una fuente transpa-
rente« Aqui encuentro copia
de uno y otro, qu6 puede
uno desear mas ? per mi par-
te, yo arao la filosofia que
nos ensefia i contentarnos con
poco.
£s verdad pues, replic6 el
cordero, que tu te abstienes
de la carne de las bestias^ y
que un poco de yerba te sa-
tisface? Si es asi, vivamos
como .hermanos y pastemos
juntos.
A flock of sheep xvere grazing^
secure from harm, in an ench*
sure; the dogs xoere all asleep,
and their master toas playing
wider a shady elm on his rurSl
pipe with his companions.
A wolf, that was half starved,
came to the fence to take a view
of them through the chinks.
A lamb, tfiatwas unexperienced,
and had never been abroad, en-
tcred into conversation wjkh him*
What is it you want here, said
he, to the wojfr
Some of this fresh tender
grass, replied the wolf , You are
sensible that nothing vt more agree*
able than to appease one's hmger
in a verdant meadow^ embroi'
dered with flowers, and slake ont^s
thirst at a transparent fountain*
I find plenty here both of one and^
the other ; what can any one de^
sire more f for my part, I have
philosophy t that teacha us to rest
contented with a little.
Is it then true, rejtlied the
lamb^ that you abstain from the
flesh qf beasts; and that a liiiU
grass will sat^ you f If so, let
us live l^e brothers, and graze
together.
140
A Neui Spahish Grammar.
El cordbro, hiego, t«h6 del
ledil al prado en donde eL
mve €l6sofo le deipedaz^, y
d€ oDft ¥•■ le dertrd.
Pesconfiate sierapre de las
lengtias lisoDgeras de los que
f e jactan de 8U propria virtud.
Forma tu juicio segun sus
accionea, j ao Mgan aus pa-
labras.
Immedi&Ufy ifte lamb leaped
oner the enehiureintoiAe meadow,
where the grave pkUotvpker iare
him ta piecee, and at <mce de*
vowed him*
. Always mistrust the smooth
tongues rf those who boast of
their own virtue. Form your
judgment by their actions, and
not by their sfeeches.
Part V.
[ 141 }
LETTERS.
Vn Comejo prudente a un
joven Comerciante.
Querido Amigo;
CON mudio placer oigo
que has empezade & coiner-
ci&r por ti mismOy y que has
tornado sobre ti una vocaeton
tan grave y pesada como la
de oti comerciante. For tan-*
to yo me he oreido obligado
como aincero am^ tuyo, k
darte el parabien de tu nuevo
cxercicia y.establechmentOi y
i proponerte los mejores con*
sejoB que tne son posibles para
ei^ maii6)o mas acertado de tiis
negocios. .
Ante todas cosasy permi-
teme te amoneste no te ace-
leres por acumular (6 amon-
tonar) riquezas : porque Sdo-
m6n dicoy ^* el que se apre-
sura por ser rico, no 8er& mo-
cente; y aderaas la pobreza
v^4r4 sobse ^1/' En ptuAtt
Itigafy cuida de temev a Dios)
y si^rrtrle ineesantemente no-'
the y dia, y de que hs tuMtL"
dos y afanes que tieties pot
h> de este vida, no te impidan.
cumpMr las obtigacionea qo9
debes & tu Dies. ' Nada pi-
erde 61 que tiene & Dios por
amigo. No andes muy so-
If cite en* aber car, y meterte
el multitud de negocios. Por
que los tratos muy extensos
presto hacen & un hombre 6
pobre 6 rico. Imponte bien
de la incertidumbre y de Iv
caduca condicion de las cesae
exterioresy y mamente fuerte
en la ft; y esperanaade la vida
Advice to a young Mer-
chant.
My dear Friend;
IT is tmk pUamre I hear thai
ys« kaoe h^u» ta tradefotyom*
teff, aiuiikai you have takmtfom
yotf so great and weighi^ a aitf>
ingasiSatqfamerekmU, l%era»
fore I ihougkt myseff bound, or «
sincere frumd rfyow^s, » acngra^
tulate yon in your new suae assd
esiabliskmeni, and to gioeyom the
best advice leanjorthe bctict
management tfyonr qfidre.
(f aU let me admoidsk
you not to be too kas^ qfUr
rkhes : for Solomon says, ** ke
that hastens to bo rick, shaU not
be nrnoeeM; but poverty shaM
come upon him," Be sore, in
the ftrs$ place, that you fear
Ood and serve him irtmsnktiy
night and day; and let nol^yom
carts for this life hinder you 4tf
doing yomr dsiy tcooards GoSL
He Ufsts fMhUi^yho keeps Ood
for hk friends- nt not too greedjy
qffedlvsg into too mmh ba ei ne m f ,
fi^ great dealings soon make a
fnan eitfter rich or poor. Ae*
faaint youtse^ weU toitk <ie
anceriavnty and fading eondStim
ttf ovKfoord Alia^, and be sHrmg
infaitk in hope of etemifi fife;
142
A New Spanish Grammar.
eterna: porque loi comerci-
antes corren muchos acasos^
sucesos, y peligros, y amenu*
do sufren grandes p^rdidas ; y
ti no tienes fondos guardados
para en adelante, acaso en
alffun tiempo, ii ocasiones te
hallar&s con tales accidentes
que hagan estremecer tu co-
razon.
En qualquiera cosa que em-
piendasy 6 hagas, ten cuidado
de tratar equitativamente con
todos lo8 hombres : porque la
i4mlnia 4e bien es la mefor pth
kiica, Cuidado con no hacer
0(mtrabando8, ni robar al prin-
cipe 8U8 derecbos: pues mu-
chas veces un peso adquirido
por este medio cuesta diez.
r^o trates, ni comerci^s en
generos enganosos, invendi-
bles, y falsos. £1 fraude se
jmede hacer por una-vezt pero la
lumradcz prevaUce d largo correr.
Ten justos pesos, iguales ba-
lanzas, y .medidas legales:
porque lo$ Henes mal adquirU
dot pocus vecei prospcran largo
iiempo.
Ten una cuenta ex&;ta de
todo lo que recibes y pagas
en materia de tu cotnercio.
Ten tua libros> y cueptas ex-
^ctasy y en buen orden : por-
2ue en esto conaiste el creidito
e un comerciante. Recorre
mucbaa voces tus libros, 6 in-
formate bien de tu e^tado de
debitos, y creditos; porque
mucbos por su negligencia en
examinar de cerca eaos esen-
cialea puntos, no solo ban sido
arhiinadosi sino tambien en«
teramente desacreditados.
No aventures de una vez
mas de aquello, que si lo
pierdes, lo puedEis sufrir me-
diante Dies. Haz tus aven-
turas en pequeflas partidas.
for fnercAofUt run many hazardt,
chances, and dangers, and qfun
undergo great losses ; and if yoa
have noi a foundation laid up for
the life to come, you may possibly
meet sometimes with such acci^
dents tu may make your heart
tremble.
. Whatsoever you take in hand,
CT do, be sure to deal Justfy tvith
all men; for honesty i» the
best policy. Take heed qfemug*
gling, and rob not the prince of
his customs i since many times one
pound that 'waycosu4en. . Trade
not m decdiful* uwnerchantablc,
and false VHxres^ Knavery may
serve for a turq» but honesty
is b^t at long ran.; .Keep jusi
weights, equal balances, and law*
fill measures^ for ili-gotten goods
seldom prosper long.
■ l:
Keep a good aceouni qf M
you receive and pay \out in ike
way of trade. Keep your hooki
and aecfiunt^ exact and tif good
order i -for therein- stands the
credit of a merchant,' • Pemm
your books often, and mahcyqut'i
satf well acquainted with your
state t^ debtors onof predUorsi
because many through neglect qf
examining closely those e^smtial
points, have not only been mdane^
but also quite disgraced*. .
Venture no more at one time
than what, if you lose, you can
by God's blessing, bear. Make
your adotnture$ in mai^ par*
eels, that if one iAokM faH,
Part V.
Lettbks.
143
pues « alguna falla, la otra
a caso puede compensar la
perdida.
Tea cuidado de las per*
sonas con quienes comercias
y k quienes fias. Hnjf una
gran atfcrencia entre homhre y
hombrc. Por tinto no fies 4
uno sin experimentarlo. No
busques sin rnubha urgencia
que otros te fien. El que tama
prestadoi recibe iasiimas. Quan-
to mas te sostengas sobre tus
propios fondos, menos cuida*
dos, y mas bonor tendras. No
te aceleres en fiar 4 otros:
porque muchos por esto pade-
cen macho dafio. Ni desees
tampoco, que * alguno saiga
fiador por ti : porque una mono
Una la oira» Haz lo que iu qui^
sieras, que hiciescn contigo.
Lo que has prometido una
vezy se cuidadoso en cumplir*
lo, porque los comerciantes
padecen mucho, por no guar-
das su palabra* Por tanto,
quando tengas que bacer al-
gun pago, prevente con tiem-
po para ello ; y ten las sumas
y los dias siempre en la me-
moria. Sanson era un hombre
JuertCt m embargo no pudopagar
dinero ania de tenerle. £n tus
iirgencias no te fies de otro
para tus proprios pu^, por-
que puedes ballarte frustrado,
y peligrar tu credito. Cui-
dado con que tu trafico no ex-
ceda i tus fbndos*
No fies tus negocios dema-
siadamente & otros» mas ten
una continua insj^eceion sobre
ellos: porque el qfo del amo
et^orda el caballo. No per-
dones pena ni trabajo dguno.
£{ eammo de la felicidad no €$
el de la delicadeta^ ni d de la
ocmidad. No ha^ dulzwra m
sudor. No hay gonmiaa mfa*
the oihir, perhofs, ma/ coofeU"
sou far the loss.
Take heed xoith whom you
^ade, and whom you irusi.
There is a great di&rence
between man and man. TAerc-
Jbre trust no man, but try km
first. Seek not without great ne»
cesnty to he credited ly others.
He that goes borrowing goes
' sorrQwing. The more you stand
on your own bottom, the less cara
and the more honor you ■ have*
Be not hasty tobe surety /br wity,
far many thereby suffer great
damage. Neither' desire as^ to
be surety Jbr you : for one good
turn deserves another. Do aa
jrott would be done by.
What you have once promised
be carefut to perform : for mer^
chants suffer much by not keeptng-
their word. When iherrfore you
haoe payment to make, provide
in time for it: and have Ae sumi
and days m eontimial remem*
brance. Samson was a strong
man, yet could not pay money
before he had it. Rtly an no
other man to the last far your awn
payments; at you may be diS'*
' appoinied,' and endanger your awn
credit. Be car^ not to trade
above the compass tffyaur stock.
Leave not your busineis too
much to otherSf but have a eon-
tinwU insight of ityausrself: far
the master's eye maloBa the
horse fat. SWi no pains at alL
The way to bliss lies not on
beds of down. No gains with-
out piuns. No sweet without
some sweat. He (hat labours
and stnves, spins gold* Be^
144
A New Spanish Grammar.
itftf • El qui irabqja y medra
hUa oro. No seas extrava-
gante en cada moda ; no ob-
•lante, portate oi de un modo
superior k tu condicion, ni de
«B modo inferior d ella^ sino
ea on. buen medio, de modo
que tu conciencia no pueda
■er berida, si Uegases a. que*
brar 6 caer. Area el honor
mas que la riqueza. Quando
haa aoquirido gsnancias, alaba
. 4 DioB, J acuerdate de los po-
.bres. No seas prddigo, por-
que- esto es malgastar ; ni tam-
noeo mezquUiOi porque eso es
baxo, Conserva un noble y
generoso 4nimo, guiado per
un buen entendimienio. El
que ahorra^ compra-la casa del
Cloion* No te apures^ demo'
siado para ahorran Los guar'
toi akorradosson quartoiftana'
doi. For el contrario^ H real
Si Uen empleada qwmdo por el
»t dkorran quatro* .
Sei^arate y evita por todos
medios las malas. eompa&ias»
y los jQgadores, y entre otras
.cosat la»aiugerefilo6 naipes'y
,4d vinoy que hamsidokruina
. de muclMs jovenes. .
Ten un cieilo tiempo de
estar £n oasa» y no hagasJ&dta
&. persona algiuli^ si> ea posi-
ble^ en el tiempo . se^ado.
Breqiienta la boIsa» jr, los o-
tros parajes doncle concurren
los comerciantes : porque la
ausencia 4 veees hace % un
bpinbre sospeoboso.'
.. ..fluapdo te cases s6 cificiin-
A|ie^to ^BDi Ja eleopion de «uaB
.iiluger4 qu^ sea dptada de
.p^udencaa^ y. buen moral, sen-
«ill» en su tr^ge^ rigjlante de
JiafiimiUa; de.n^od^.que le
l94MMreDea jpropiattiente: la loa-
Uo apelacton de mi^ger de su
^jsasa, y aii aet4 mas calificada
If
nti tAroioagant in eoerf^ Ja^
thkn; ij/et&epi/ourself neither
akove your rank, nor ioa much
beha Uf bui in a middle wu/, so
. as the canaience may noi be
MMOumded^ if you ahatud Jhil or
JalL Love honour mfire than
lueobh. When you have gained
iif praise Oody and remember
the poor* Be not prodigalf for
that tf wasting > nor yet nig-
garcUy, for that is base* Keep
up a noUe and. generous mind,
pdded h^ a good undofstand'
tng. A sparu^gman bought
the house of the Gluttoa.
No AJcbymbt too savings A
peony saved is a penny got.
On iheconiraryy that penny is
(also J wtii.wfatA which .saves
agroat.
i
Shim and a'ooidf.iy all nieaxSf
bad company ami gamesters:
and among ether thiMfsmametty
the ndm ffsnany young men*
Hone 9 ixrfaintime ofMtig
at hamef. and miss no man if
possiUe at the time appointed*
Freqnenf th^ ettehtrnge- at^
places qfmeetingjbr menhast$p ;
for absence makes a man^SQine^
■times suspected*
: '. t
■•;..
t .
, JVhenev^you martyr itf ctV-
escmspeet in the choke ^a ^»5^*
that she should beend^ivedmth
-prtfdence and goad Hwrok-y san^
.pkqfher dress, mid vifplawtin
herjimuly; so ds te deeerve the
hmUMe appdletHem of a (food
homeuaye; and^ihustkemsUbe
thQ better qualifi^ te educate
Part V.
LtTteAs.
145
para edti<$M loii bijM ^
tiibiese en el vtMt y tfembir ^
Dioi: y despues darles aquellii
liberal educadob propbrdon-
luift & su efitttdo y edndfcioki.
QuantoB hokxibres iAe bfeti ^^
hicieroii on taiidal Wn la
^r2a de Hii hidastrni, y fhi-
gididad en el coitiertk>y nieh>n
redacidm 4 !a miseria pdr la
iigerezft de feus magei^ que k
pesar db sus naridos, mi se-
guido el Mirriebte iel liiJco» y
Itiego to expendielM p^ iu
excesiva condescendencia^ y
p^r vSk nedo anioir ftitXA tnu-
gete^: quiero dedr, viborais
^ son destmbtJvail de fSB
virtudes morsdes, ptivadte, f
p^blicas! Algunosmaridosmo-
vi^ de defiei^peradbtry cay eron
^ !o8 mistbos excesos: de
modo que quando los dos ex-
tremoB de la casa.arden, no
tardard ella en redudrse 4
cenizas.
Nada digo de hs inqihietii-
des que reynan en las fami-
liaSy y algunas veces toman
M or^en de cliushs liil^olas,
6 de malidosas dom^sticas in-
sinuadonesy para introducir-se
*ell68 ikiisinos ela las bii^nas
^t^ias de sus ilinoiSy y ihas
po^ iliterefeadofe &tt6k : titi piin-
to qia^ se deberia Mriftbdentie
mirar.
Si doibercias para otrds, haz
para ellos ccMno piira t1 niismo :
td pat eate medio jg^nitt and-
goBy f repmadon. S^ dide
tMttfltimeDte, que tth am^ol^
la amns e^ftiide d dhtero eH la
toto.
Quando d4s, 6 recibieiiB coin-
il^}iif as^gurate que s^ bue-
liOf 6 Inftidalo ; y quatiffb i^s
]u»IO| si^de putotcuimatol^9 y
dk ^iraoHlB al AsA&t. Ajtma
ta0 dMibU^4 wmOb ^ IBs
tht aSUhtn ake ntOf kamftt *t
the tvi^ and fiar ^^od : and
aftervoards to give them ^hed
KberiU edueatMhf prtmrti&nable
io their Mate ana eimditkm»
Ho^ Many vMrthy men in
husinissSf that mtide aJbrMie
by dint of their industry ennd
J^gaUty, have "been trm^
to a lotjo ebb by the ^^«% ^
0iiir vjJheSf 'daho moduli Jhuovj
^ forrent in aR^ortsqflittiay^
in tpite tf ihtir husbands, and
torn spent it by iheittdo ittuiSi
condescension^ or Jbolishjbnd"
ness far lMt toroes : I Utean
vipers that ate destructive io
p^nhafe mctrals and puVHc tnt'
tue» Some husbands ottt of
despair f Jail into the same ex*
cesses; sothdt^hi^ both ends
of ihSe house are on fre^ it
cannot be long before burning ta
ashes.
I wy fioiking yr ihe <Ur-
sensions thai tv^ in families^
and sometimes take their source
J^afn frivfious causes^ orfiSm^
malicious domestic insinuationst
to work themselves into the
^od grdces of their intisters
or mistresses frm intere^t^
vieUfS > a point ihdt should be
s^eriously eminined into.
If you deal for dthers^ do
fbr tMcm As for yottfsAf: you
thereby gain friends and r ej«-
iation. It is cofnmonly stHSf
that a iHend in the way h as
good a^ a p^tayin the poti^.
When you gioe or receive
advice^ be sure it bej^oodf-or
%Mb it dHerii; and^hi^tt
is rigKt fblbfm it mn^itd^y^
wa thank ihejjhittr! I^me
ydiir diBcimiffs men noith yoiir
♦ K
146
A New Spanish Grammar.
amofy y parroquianof ; porque
cuenias oreoes oonservan amur
tad.
HftT otrof muchos puntos
etenciales, que requieren cui-
dado> y ex&men ; pero ahora
me et impotible tocarloi; lo
que el tiempo> y la experiencia
te eD8eIiar& ; y no tengas por
extrafio, si aprendes algo &
.cdsta de vergueiiza*^ y de per-
dida, cuya observancia te puede
servir de la mayor importancia ;
porque el ingenio comprado es
a mejor*
St estos mis amistosos con-
sejos hallan una favorable a-
cogida, seri el mayor placer de
tu fiel amigOy
a T. M. B.
N. Servicial.
nuuters and cusiamurs : Jbr
sbort redconings make long
friends.
. There are many other eS'
emtial points that require care
and examinationf but it is noxv
impossible Jbr me to touch on
them: time and experience ViHl
teach yc9h and think it not
strange^ if you leam some
things through shame and loss ;
t^ may be of the greatest im-
Cance to the observer^ as
ght wit (or sense) is the
best*
Should these Jriendly hints
of mine meet mth ajavourable
reception, it xaiU be the greatest
pleasure Uh
Sir,
Yourjiuth/uljriend,
if. Serviceable-
Ol !•■
Una Propuesta para una A Proposal for a Corres-
Correspondencia* pondence.
Madridy 1 de Enero de 1818. Madridi January 1, 1818.
Sefior Don N.
Muy Sefior mio> como esta
es la primera vez que tengo
el honor de suplicar & vm. es-
Gro que me perdonar£ la li-
rtad que me he tornado.
£1 ventajoso caracter que mi
buen amigo el Sefior Don N.
me ha dado de su persona, y
easa de vm. me ha animado &
pensar en una correspondencia
mercantil que pueda ser ven-
tajosa & vm. como a mi.
^ Pero ante todas cosas nece-
sito me iranquce vm. el favor
de darme una relacion de los
pesos y me^idas que comun-
mente se usan en Inglaterra»
Sir:
As this is the first time I
have had the honor qf ad--
dressing you, you toill I hope
excuse the liberty I have nau)
taken.
The very honorable Aa*
racier my voorfhy Jriend Mr*
N. has given me qf your per*
son ana house, encourages me
in a hope that a commercial
cdrrespondence may be settled
between us to our nnutual ad--
vantage*
But before this can be ae*
compUshed, I must beg iheja*
!QOur you pnU give me a short
but^ explicit account, qf the
^ooeighs and meawres iaohich are
Pan V.
Letters.
147
porque creo que se diferencian
mucno de los de este pais.
Yo estimar^ esta relacion
cbmo un favor particular, y
▼m. puede cdnfiar en mi sin-
ceridad, y prontitud que le
servir^ en quanto dependa de
mis facultadea.
Esperando que vm. roe honre
con su favorable repuesta que-
do rogando 4 Dios me guarde
su vida muchos alios.
B. L. M. de vm.
s. s. s*
commcml^ used in England, ds
you are weU informed they
differ very materioSUyfrom those
used in this /Country*
I shall esteem this as a par*
ticalar obligation^ and, you may
rely upon my sincerity and
readiness to serve you in this or
any thing else in my p&uaer.
In the expectation of your
honoring me with an answer
in course,
Xrerriain,
Sir,
Your obedient and humble
servant,
N.N.
Londres, Febriro, 1818^. londoD, February, 181&
Sir;
lam most agreeably fiivoured
by yours of the first m«% where;*
in ym desire to commence a
commercial correspondence with
me ; I shall think myself happy
if I can answer your expecta^
tionSf and the flattering picture
you were pleased lo draw of my
house ana family.
Muy Sefior mio, me es rauy
fl(.reciable el favor que he re-
cibido de vm. en la del l, del
ult**, en la que me manmesta;
los deseos.que tiene de entab-
lar conmigo una corresponden-
cia mercantil ; yo me tendr^
por dichoso si puedo corres-
ponder a las esperanzas de vm.
y 4 la id^a lisonjera que se ha
servido tomar de mi casa y
faroilia.
Vm. no ignora, que noso-
tros los comerciantes debemos
vivir.de nuestr^ profesion, y
promover nuestros intereses,
en quanto sea compatible coa
el honor, y la equidad.
Yo admito la proposicion de
vm. y en prueba de mi recono-
cimiento, remitir6 4 vm. por
t\ primet buque que saiga de
esfe puerto ^ para ese, v4ria8
partidas fabricddas en 0ste pais,
y al precto mas baxo que ae
puedend4r; laaonunadeelha
You well inow thai we nter'»
chants must live by our pro-
fessum^ and promote our tntC"
rest as Jar as is consistent with
honor and equity.
I accept your proposal, and
as a proof of my acknoW"
ledgmetit, I will send you, hy
the first tesset that sails from
this port to Cadiz, sundry
parcels qfthechoicestjgoodsma'
nufacturet here, ana at as kfw
a price as can be afforded, the
148
A New Spanish 6rammar.
jUbtdmiftDle con Ids pi^dii iria
ib^rtas tn IiU factoras.
Espero ierin del gusto de
vail, y qae sfervir&n de ttiddvo.
pdTA huestrb mityor conoci-
mrentO) y tt^tO ; y est^ Vni.
B^gutO, de one ^iidl^uierik cosa
que confie a tni cuidado» seri
executada, y manejada coo el
maybr candor, yjidelidad: ysi
esUkS itiercadenas ootno lUS oue
puede vm. necesitar )en lide-
umte, al tlempto de enfardar-
las, 6 de qualquier otro modo,
sufiriesen algona averta, se hard
la correspondlente rebaja» dan-
do me vm. el aviso.
Ynduyo 6 vm. muestras de
otras producdones que pueden
tener despacho en ese mer-
cikdo: y en e^te twi6, podr6
proveerfe de todo quaato ne-
cesite.
Si vm. pu^e hactobe Ve-
tornos c6modoi coO suS vinos
e^quisitosy Hgoardlente, y firtt^
tos; como tambien dos 2ur«
rones de cocUnilla, y iO qoin-
tales de barilla, sd le d&r& 4
vOi. 8u comtsion ; el corretide,
almazena^go, y todos los de-
m4« gastos de puerto se paga«
r4n k parte.
En conseqiienda de las or-
denes de vm. le envio un es-
tado de los pesAs, y medidas
de Inglaterra; y ademis la
diferencia de las monedas de
Espafla, y las nuestras. To-
cante & la subida> y bilxa do
los cambiosy y fondos se infor-
niar& vm. por uoestros papeles
pfiblicos.
Quedo rogando & Dios me
guarde su vida muchos
afiog.
pafikuiars ihertcfitogether with
the pfidetf wM be inserted in a
hiU of parcels.
I hope they mU prove to
ytmr entire iatisfaction, and be
the Jbunddildn (^ my faHher
acquaintance ana dealing with
yoUf afnd (assure yourseyl that
•oAatMeiryou ttust to my chdrge,
shaU be performed and managed
^riih the greatest candour and
JidMtp imajdnable; and if the
gdddi ehouGt siuffer any average
tn the pdcMng or atherimse^
proper alloivance tvtfl be made
upon notice*
I heremth send you a sample
of our other staple commodities
pjhich may answer your market :
in that case ytm may bejux'^
nished with every article you
want.
Ify^U dan tonveniently make
tehtrHs ii^kdme (tfyour exquisite
tcitieSf tritndyf andjrtdts; as
idso had serons of cochineal^ and
(^kdp*^ enitntah: an ti^ick
you (Ms io Mve your eotnmis^
slon; brdhefage^ porterage, e'd*
Idrage, H^d m other port"
charge WSU be paid apart.
Purtuatrt to your orders^ I
send you a state qf the weights
tiiid ikeasures used in England^
as also the difference qf the
Value of ccin between Spam and
us. Of the rise andJuO qfour
estdumte and stocks, you may he
mintdHy informed by aurpuolie
papers.
I shall idways remain your
most stedfastfirienaand
assured hwmle servants
iMMAMi
* Ktljf se llama tamHen VariVia en Ingl^i.
Jj^TTSBS.
Vna PoHta, 6 Coaocimieato. A Bill of Lading.
Londra, Fehrere, 18IS>
Yo N. N. vecino de N- N.
Maestre qua %qj do) bv«)i
Navjo (que Dioa ealve) qqw-
brado M. N. que a| pr^seqte
eiti ^urio, y ancUdg es «1 rju
TsmesU, puerto de Lon^r^^i
para coa U buena ventura
segiur este presente vi&ge al
Euerto de Cadiz : conozca ba-
er recibido, y tengo cargado
4«a(ri> del dkbo iqi Navfo de-
baxo de cubierta, de Vos N. N.
ceia fardoB de baquetp At Mob-
eovja, Biete dicbqg dst V^%1 Iq-
gl^, oQho de eEtofati, uver? <je
bayetAB, dipi de jw^sc^te* ▼
mtgm quitiienMw pi»i(B 4e
\Ww> luperfiaQ ds \ (%t)rica
d^ Irlap^, aeienta dichas de
b»ti;t«l. cinqijenta tibial 4e
t»aiit«l«> adainB>c«4(if< y i^-
qu«qta d<N)pi)a« da fprvfll«l;4F>
itp iwcon (la bqja <]e !»(«> ^9^
ds latoti 4 a«ofkr. ir^ d« K<;w?>
qgairo auintaleB de cphra, a^jb
<:aM» d« mye»tra§ 4e f»ltfi-
Juera, jr diges, p«iB cauati
e quififlvillenit- <i bubiQiiertf)
^«t« do nirramiQutu op w(tr>
todatfuutoi y bisafwa^ifW-
aada, ; iWF(g{u]«if qiW:)ftin««a
al margen. Con 1o qual pro-
tPBtd, y SM .(4dige>.\lte*an-
dome Dios en buen Balvamen-
to con el dicho mi Kavio al
expresado pvaito, dp Jlfi^i^r,
y entregM. JW ^Wi y en Tu-
eEtro nombre dichog ggneraa
igualraente enjutos, y biea
ecoddicionadog (saWo los pe-
ligro) del mar) & D. N. N.
(o k loB Sefiores, Ac.) 6 k
quien alii par ^1 fu6re parte ;
pagandome de flete & razon
de quarenta BhelioeB eateriines
Irfindon, Pebruary, 1816.
Shiyprd by the Grace of God
a gMd order an4 neU cotuH-
tioned, !^ Jtfr. (or Mettrs.)
^. N, in and vpon the good
thip called the — • whJere^
M matter under God, Jitr ttitt
present vo^^e, — now ridtng
at anchor tn the river Thames
at London, and by Go^t aid
bound Jiir Cadis : to say, six
balei of Russia leofher, seven
ditto of English cloths, eight
diUo ofstuffi, nine ditto of bays,
tea ditlQ '^sai^s and terget,3ye
hfniired piecfi ^ superfine Irith
fi«m, seventy 3it(o ^ camMf,
My diaper table chh, Vflth
^iyioun of napkins, onethest
ft^ tin, ixuo diltu of latfeii or
' RvHi three diUi §/ J'tfi, fo^^
quintals qf cop^, fix bates of
XugtcAft and trinlrets, sir chests
qf IvP'dfare, seven ditto qfedge
to^, nil in good order and
e^aiditifmt Marked and n^«^-
Iftrfd at i^ the margin, (tnd
f^rp'to be ^^vered in 'the Hie
ffporf order am cbndiliort (the
dvpeeri df th ^eas only ep-
amt^}, W ^h9 itfpretqid sort nf
\(^^ Hn*p Mr. nr Messrs.
• , or his or their assims, he
W,WU fyi^gfrrightJvr the
said 'goods, tffthe rtftf fif forty
thiUings per ton, nith'the usual
150
A New Spanish Grammar.
por cada tonelada de 4 veinte.
quintalesy peso limpio de In-
Slaterra, con diez por ciento
e capa, j averla. Y en fe
de que asi me obJigo 4 cum-
plir, 08 doy tres conocimien-
tos de un tenor, firraados de
mi Dombre, por mi, 6 mi es-
cribano ; el uno cumplido, los
otros no valgan. Fecha en
Londres & primero de Febrero
de 1818.
primage and average* In tvit'
ness fohereqf^ the said Com'
mander has signed three biUs
cf ladings all qf this tenor
and date ; the one qf 'oohick
three bills being accomplished^
the other two to stand void.
And so God send the good ship
to her desired port $n "sttfety.
Dated in London^ the 1st day
qf February f 1818*
CadiZi MarxOf 1818*
MuT Se&or mio. He reci-
bido la estimada de vm. del
primero de Febr6ro con el co-
Docimiento de diversas mer*
paderJas embarcadag abordo
del Navio llamado el — ,
todo lo qual ha sido debida-
mente recihido en buena orden
y contlicion : los generos son
Codes de mi satisfaccion, y
espero que tendr&n pronto des-
pacho. Ynclusa va una letra
de cambio pontra los Sefiores
, de esa ciudad. que
monta — i—.*— & uso, y medio,
que vm. se serviri cargar &
mi cuenta, el saldo que aun
resta se remitir& sin diiacion &
su tiempo,
Quedo rogando &Dios guarde
& vm« muchos aQos.
Cadiz, March, 1818.
TTie favour of your' s^ of the
1st F^ruary qf this year^ came
st^fe to hand^ mth the indosed
bUl qf lading of sundries^ sMp"
ped on board the ship called the
■ " , all of which are duly
' received in good order and con"
'dititM, having Jound the goods
to my mind, and v^ich Thqpe
toill suit our market. You xoiU
receive hereonth a Bill of Ex^
change on Messrs* ■ ■, qf
your dtyt to the amount qf
■ ■, at one and a htdf
usance^ vahich he pleased to place
to my credit ; the balance tohick
' remains due shaU be punctuaUy
remitted to you in its time.
Ihaoe^ hemor io he, tfc
AD.
B* L* de vm«
S«S«S*
To Mr.
Merchant in Londen,
Del Comercio de
Londres.
/
Part V.
Letters*
151
Letra de Cambio.
La Primera.
Londres, 1818.
Por,£.iM esierlinas.
A do» U80S (6 duso y mediOf
6 d echo dias vista) ne serviri
ym. mandar pagar por esta mi
primera de cambio & la 6rdea
de D. N. N. quatrodentas li-
braa esterlinaa, vdor recibido
de D. N. N. que sentar^ vm,
como por aviso : yChnstocon
todos.
M, N.
A* D. N. N.
Comerciante en Cadiz*
A Bill of Exchange.
The Fira.
London, 1818.
9
For £. 400 sterling.
Ai double tuance (or at
usance and a half, or at eiffht
days sight) pay this myfirzt
biU of exchange to Mr. ,
or order^ the sum of Jour Aim-
dred pounds sterlhigf value re*
ceivea of him^ for of Mr.
N. N.J and place it to account
as per advice.
N.N.
To Mr.
Merchant in Cadiz.
Primera.
Aviso de una Letra de
Cambio.
Londres, I de Enero de 1818.
May Sefior mio. Hoymismo
he librado contra vm. una
letra de cambio & uso y medio
4 la orden de Don ■ ^ - ^ d
su poder, por la cantidad de
quatrocientas libras esterlinas
que me har& vm. la fineza de
honrar, y cargar & mi cuenta.
Quedo rogando & Dios me
guarde su vida muchos afios.
B. L. M. de vm.
s.s.s.
Prima.
Advice of a Bill of Ex-
change.
London, January 1, 1818.
Sin
I have this day dromon on
you a bill of exchange, at one
and a half usance^ in Jdxonsr
of Mr. — — , or his order^
fir Jour hundred pounds ster*
ling, Vfhich I beg you to ho*
nor, and place to my ac*
count.
I have the honor to be*
To Mr.
Merchant at Cadiz.
La Segunda.
Londres, 1818.
Por £. 400 esterlinas.
A dos US08 le serviri vm.
pagar por esta mi segunda
The Second.
lAmAon, 1818.
FoTi(i.¥X> sterling.
At double usance pay this
my second bUt of E^ihange
158.
A New Spakish Grammar.
de cambio (no habiendolo
hecl^Qi por U prinera) 4 la
orden de D. N. N. quatro-
dentas libras caterluas, Sfc.
El Endoso.
IfiigufMt- & la ^rden de
It N. ]b^ ?a)os eD
refi^^ 0e) ^4^0.
()ir.rf not paid) to Mr. J^. N.
or ordsr.^ ibg mn qffout huu"
dred pounds sterlings &c.
The Endorsement.
Pay to^Mr, N. N. OP his
^ ^dfTf, voht^ m Meouut,
^n. Cot ncnmi faomi
<^^^
Londres, 1 de Enero, 1818.
A' U80 y medio coptada
desde la presente data^^. pro«
meto pagar i^ Don — -— , iS a 6u
orden, la cantidid de ,
por valor recibidp en dinero
conUdo, oett gtneros 4 mi
8ati|faccio]|«
A. B.
£.
Iffomiatory HoU^
I^don, January 1, 1818*
' At one gnd a haff usance
after dflte^ J promise to pay
to Mr. ■ ■■, or his order ^ ike
mm of — — , for rmlue re^
ceived^ in ready, money or in
goods. •'• •
£.
A.B.
Carta de OreHto.' ''
Muy Selior mto. Vm4 r^-
cibii^ ^%^ 4^ la ^9^^ .^^^
SeHor Don — ^, 'fque pasa 4
viajar por diversas partes de
Europa) y me har4 li| ^n$^a
de prox^|;,ls ^ cart^^e re-
comendacion para las princi-
pales ciudades de EspaSa : su
objecto €S .l^r ^ aqul in-
mediatamente |^ra esa. Creo
gift leqdiA'HW. mucho gusto
en traj^rie pqi? iei: m, fabal- ybrhi^parso
lero iji»Tmeme dl^trnguia9 por be soltttiai
8u Qieij^o penooDi^ J E^ ^^ *' ' *
aacn^entoi porioqtieesperoy
Letteir of Ore4it.
1ji«>iiM»L'JMPtagy.3U :
upmiH tmv^s tnio, d^verti p^rts
of Europe) and I beg you wSt
provide him vii^i rqpommenda*
toru Ift^srs to theprtncipal cities
in Spam : his design being to
set out from hence for wnir
city immed^idjj, ^ thoupit J
could not ao oett'ert as he is a
gapitmaM iiqstaUy distinguished
for hiip^scmahiii^ andiirth ;
be SQiKtiafthere/bref to five
^'m the iest reuptum^ and to
serve mm as ef^ctutMy ae in
Part V.
LETtBRB.
U3
(fae vm. le franqu^e la mas ge-
nerosa reoepeion, y durante an
estada en esa ciudad le sirva
con todo el acatamiento, que
est6 en su poder. Al mismo
dempo me hdra vm. el favor
de franquearle spbre doblQ
re^ibo el dkiero que nece»lte
hasta la siima de '■ que
poddl ym. reembolsar eargan-
dole i mi cuenia, 6 enviap**
dome uno de sus reeSbos. ^8-
pero queVm. me desempefiari
como amigo en este asunto, y
mientras.
Quedo rogando 4 Dios me
^uurde su vida muchos alios.
B. L. M. de vm.
o. S. S.
i^r pcftMT during his ahode
in ycur cih^ ; and yeu wittsup^
ply km on his double recc^'
xioUh tohtU money he may have
occasion Jbr^ to the amdunt of
' ■ fj^ vchich you may reim*
burse yomrsey^from my account ^
on transmitHng enef of his rf-
ceipts to me. I hope as ajriend
you HJoUl grant my request.
I have the honor to he toith
the most perfect regard.
To Mr.
Cadiz.
A Don
Confirmacion de la anterior Coi^rmatloQ of the pre-
enviada por el Correo. ceding sent by the Post.
,Londres, I de Enero^ ISlS.
Muv Se&or mio. Con ^$ta
data be escrito & vm. oira
^(|e Je entr^gari el Senor
— ^^— - cav^Heiro Ingles oiiii
cyya casa X&igo la major fni-
tijpidad; y de^eando servik'te
jjfaif su cuenta lie toma4o co;ii
gustd 0sta ocasTon '^uq so !e
olireca: partantQconelmaYoir
empflip ^Kco & vmk le pro-
cnte todaii la^ fKverslone^i 6
ihibrmi^ll de ibrnu^ aue se h^fe
giistOBo en esa ciiid^^. T^tn'
6ien sie s^rvir^ vni. de JRran-
miearle todo el. (iii\en) ^ue
{[idfere basta la cantfdad de
■ _j i ' ' t9mand(ddi;ecib9 dobt^
or la que if cacitrigue ; upfl (Iq
8 quaiea be eoSiliiura; y fo
L'
London, January 1, 1818.
I vorote to you this day a
ietter tobi^h mm be dMoered
to you by Mr. •^-^^^ ah
Enmsh gentleman, ^^te/*^^
siroiis (jjTobU^ng his jmmiiyi
toitk %Snom i am ixkimdtei
and 07\ Xiifiose account I have
embraced voHh tleasi(r& an op*
portifnity o/ bert^ of sfitviceib
nim. Ifher^fbre most edrnestty
request qf you to procure fyr
btm all such divers^tis and in*
/brmation 'as' nifn/ render his
stay in yojit my a^eeabh:
fou vo^ also plcf^^ ^^.,^PP^
im toith money for hiii neces*
' igry og^asionSy ' to the nmouid
if — -—y' andi(f%e qfhim0
dtmbk acquittance for me same^
154
A New Spanish Grammar.
Garg«r4 k mi cuenta: incliisa
Ta su firma para que vm. la
oonozca, y la honre como co«
retponde. Yo me lisonjeo de
que Tm« tendr& mucho guito
en loerar el conocimiento de
uu bello joren, cabailero que
ha recibido la mejor educa-
cion.
Quedo rogando a Dios me
guarde su vida muchos a5o8.
B. L. M. de Tm.
s* s* s«
one qf tjhich you toill send to
met and reimburse yourseifjrom
my account ijohat you have so
advanced to hinf. I have added
hereto his signature^ that you
may hnmn it on occasion^ and
conduct yourself accordingly. I
JUUter myse^ you wU apprffoe
qf my having procured you the
acquaintance cfa sensible young
gentleman, who has had an ex*
cdient education.
I have the honor to, be, 4cc»
EXTRACTS,
EXTRACTOS.
ORACION DE CORTEg A SUS S0LDAD08*
^^QvANDo coDsiderOy Amigoa y Compafieros miosi como nos
iia juntado en esta Isla nuestra felicidad ; qoantoa estonros, y
fienecucione8 dexamos atrfis; (I) y como te nos han dethecho
m dificultades ; conozco la mano de Dios en esta obra> que em-
prendemos : y entiendo, que en su altisima proyidencia es lo
mismo fayorecer los principios oue prometer los sucesos. Su
causa nos ]leya» y la de nuestro Key (que tambien es suya) &
oonquistar regiones no conocidas ; y ella misma bolyer& per si,
mirando por nosotros. No es mi foimo facilltaros la empresa
que acometemos; cembates nos esperan sangrientos^ (SjfBc^
clones increiblesv bataUas desiguales, en que habr^is menester
socorreros de todo yuestro yalor ; miserias de la necesidad, in-
demendas del tiempo, y asperesaa de la tierra : en que os seri
necesario d sufrimiento; que es el segundo yalor de los hom-
bres, y tan hijo de d corazon como el primeroi que en la
guerra, mas vexes sinre la padenck^ quelasmanos; y quia&
Sor esta raaon tuvo Hercules d nombre de inyencible» y se
amaron trabqos sus haaaSas. (S) Hecboe eataw 4 padecer, j
8
Part V.
EXTBACTS.
155
hechoB 4 pelear en esas islas, que dexais conquistadas : mayor es
nuestra empresa, y debemos ir prevenidos de mayor osadia ; que
fiiempre son las dificultades del (4) tamafio de los intentos. La
Antiguedad pint6 en lo mas alto de los Montes el Templo de la
Fama, y su (5) Simulacro en lo mas alto del Templo: dando &
entender, que para hallarla, aun despues de vencida la cumbre,
era menester el trabajo de los ojos. Pocos somos, pero la union
roultiplica los cxercitos, y en nuestra conformidad estd nuestra
mayor fortaleza : uno, Amigos, ha de ser el cons^jo en quanto
se resolviere : una la mano en la execucioo : comun la utilidad,
J comun la gloria en lo que se conquistare. Del valor de qual-
quiera de nosotros se ha de fabricar, y componer la seguridad de
todos. Vuestro Cdudillo soy ; y sere el primero en aventurar la
vida ppr el menor de los soldados : mas tendreis que obedecer
en mi exemplo, que en mis 6rdenes : y puedo aseguraros de mi,
que me basta el £nimo 4 conquistar un mundo entero ; y aun me
lo promete el corazon, con no s6 que movimiento cxtraordinario,
que suele ser el roejor de los presagios. (6) Alto, pues, & con-
vert ir en obras las palabras ; y no os parezca temeridad esta
confianza mia, pues se funda en que os tengo k mi lado, y
(7) dexb de fiar en mi, todo lo que espero de vosotros."
Don Antonio de SolU^^^Lib. 1, Cap» 14h
(1) Y como se nos han deshecho las dificultades— aite? haa
dimculties have disappeared. (2) Facciones increibles — incr^-
dible engagements. (3) Hechos— accu^tome^f. (4) Tamafio—
greatness. (5) Simulacro — image, (6) Alto, pues, & convertir
en obras las palabras — fiotv, / will stop^ io convert loords into
deeds. (7) Dexo de fiar en mi, todo lo que espero de vosotros
— the less I trust to m^seff, the more I hope in you*
FA'BULA (DeYriarte).
EL (1) BURRO DEL (2) ACBTTBRO.
£n cierta ocasion un cuero
Lleno de aceyte llevaba
Un Borrico, que ayudaba
£n 8u oficio a un Aceytero.
A paso un poco iigero
De noche en su quadra entraba ;
Y de una puertaen la (S ) aldaba
Se di6 el golpazo mas nero»
Ay I clam6 : No es cosa don
Que tanto aceyte acanr6e»
Y tenga la quadra obscura ?
Me temo que se mosqute
De este cuento quien procura
Juntar libros que no lee*
Se mosqu6a ? Bien est4«
Pero este tal por ventura
Mis F&bulas leeri?
{\\ Burro— on. (2) Aceytero— ^j/ merchant. (S) Aldaba
156
A ^aw Spanish Grammar.
F A' B U L A (De YRiARa:E)»
LA qONTIENDA DE LOS ( 1 ) MOSQUITOS.
Diabo'lica refriega
Dentro de una bodega
Se trab4 entre infioitos
Bebedores Mos^uitos.
iPero extraSio una oosa t
iu^ el buen Villavioiosa
No hioieae en su MesquSa
Mencion de esta pel^a,^
Era el caae que mucnos-
Expertos y (@) machuchos
Cob teSQD defendlan
Que ya no se coglan
Aquellos vinof purofjt
Generosos, mliduros,
Gu»t0808 y fragantes
Que se ooglan dotes.
En aentir de otros varies,
A esta opinion contraries,
Los viaos exeelentes
£raB los mas recioBtea ;
Y del opu^ato bando
8e.burlaban» ciilpando
Tales poocUu'aciQnea
Qdxoq dedainaciones
De apasionadoa Juecea,
Amigos de vejeces.
Al agudo (3) zurobido
De uhd y otrb par tide
Se bundia la bodega :
Quando h^teme que Ilag^i
Un anciano Mosquito,
(4) Catador muy pmto;
Y dice, echando un (5) taco :
Fer vida del ($) Dios fiaoo
rBalPe ellos ye ae sabe
Que es juramentp grave :}
Donde ye est^y, ninguno'
Dar& «iaa ^poFtuno,
Ni mas funaade i^oto.
Cese ya el alboroto.
A fef oe buen Navairo,
Que en tonel, beta, 6 jarro,
Barril, (7) tinaja 6 cuba
£1 kttgd fie la u«a
Dificilmente evita
...a
Mi cumplida visita ;
Y en esto de cantarle^
Distinguirle, y jusgarle,
Puedo poner eacuela
De Xerez 4 Tudela,
De M41aga 4 Peralta,
De Cananas & Malta,
De Oporto 4 Valdepeiias.
Sabed, por estas seSas,
Que es un gran desatino
Peosar que todo vine
Que desde au cosecba
Cuenta larga la fecha,
Fu6 sleippre aventajado.
Con el tiempp ba ganado
Bn bondad : bo Io niego ;
Fero si 61 desde luego
Mai vino hubiera side,
¥a «e bubi^rfi toroido :
Y, a) fin, t^BQbiei^ b^f^,
to niifipo qufi en el diii,
{ji lea fo^w. p999doi^
Yinos avinAgr^dofU
Al cofttrariQ, y^ pn^fbo,
A yeces, vihq im^t(>
Que apostarlas pudiera
Al major de otra era :
Y si muchos Agostos
Pasan por ciertos (8)n}Ostos •
Jj|e Iqs quj^ hpy se repnieban,
Puede ser que los bdiaA
Por yinqs cpcqi^isitos
Los futures Mosquitos.
Basta ya de pendenela ;
Y por final sentencta
El mal vine co^deno ;
Le chupo quande es bueno,
Y jamas averiguo
Si es moderne, ii aniigue,
Mi] Qoeles importunos>
Por lo antiguo los vaesy
Otros por lo moderno,
Sigan titigio eterno.
Mi tex^o favoritQ
Serd siempre— el Mosg^llo.
Part V. SxtRActs. U7
(n Moiqinion—gnaii. (2) MacfaUdhoi— tozie. (3) Zufhbi-
do'^nummine noise. ( 4 ) Gatadof -^a Judge of tmke. ( 5 ) TaeD
— fl glass. (6) Dios Baco--Go^ Bacchus. (7 ) Tinaja— d terg^
far. (8) Mostos^sxx^et bdnes.
FA' BUI. A (De YniAkTE).
LA VIBORA Y LA SA^GUIJUELA.
AuNQUE las dots picamos, (dixo un dia
La Vibora k la simple Sanguijuela)
De tu boca reparo que se fia
£1 hombre, y de la mia se rezela.
La Chupona responde : Ya querida ;
Mas no picamos de la misma suerte *
Yo, si pico 4 un enfermo^ le doy vida :
T(i, picando al mas sanO| ]e das muerte.
Vaya ahora de paso una advertencia ;
Muchos censuran, si, Lector benigno ;
Fero & fe que hay bastante diferencia
De un Censor (kill & un Censor maligno.
I
OESCRIPCION DE LA ESPANTABLE AVENTURA DE LOS
MOLINOS DE VIENTO*
En esto se descubrieron treititH 6 quatent^ molinos de Teiiito
ue hay en aquel canipb : y asi cbmo Don Quixote los vi6, dixd
su escudero : la veuturd va guiando nuestras cosas inejur de \o
que acertiramos a desear. Porque v6s alii, amigo Sanchtf Panza^
donde se descubren treinta 6 poco mas desaforados gigantes, con
quien peinso hacer batalla, y qnitarles k todos las vidas, con
cuyos despojos comenzaremOs i enriquecer y que esta es buena
guerra, y es gran servicio de Dios quitar tltn mala simiente de
sobre la faz de la tierra.
Que gigantes I Dixo Sancho Panza. Aquellos que all! f€s,
respondi6 su amo, de los brazes largod, que los suelen tener algo-
nos de casi dos leguas.
Mire vuestra mercedi respondi6 Sancho, que aquellos que alii
He parecen no son gigantes, sino molinos de viento, y lo que en
ellos parecen brazos, son las aspas, que bolteadas del yeintOf
hac^n andar la piedra del moKno.
Bieh parece, respbndi6 Don Quixote, que no est&s cilrsado en
^to de las aventuras: estos sdn gigaotes^ y si tienee tinedo
158 A New Spanish Grammar.
quitate de ahi, y ponte en oracion en el espacio que jro voy it
entrar con ellot en fiera y desigual batalla.
Diciendo eato, di6 de espuelas & su cavallo Rozinante, sin
atender & las voces que su escudero Sancho le daba, advirtien*
dole que sip duda alguna eran molinos de viento, y no gigantes
aquellos que iba 4 acometer.
Pero ^1 iba tan puesto en que eran gigantes, que ni oia las
Toces de su escudero Sancho, ni echaba de ver, auhque estaba
▼& bien cerca, lo que eran ; antes iba diciendo en voces altas :
Non fiiyades cobardes y viles criaturas, que un solo caballero ea
^ que OS acoraete. .
Levant^se en esto un poco de viento, y las grandes aspas
comenzaron i moverse ; lo qua! visto por Don Quixote, dixo ;
pues aunque movais mas brazos que los del gigante Briareo, me
10 habeis de pagar.
£n diciendo esto, y encomendandose de todo corazon k su
seGora Dulcinea, pidiendole que en tal trance le socorriese, bien
cubierto de su rodela, con la lanza en el ristre, arremeti6 4 todo
el galope de Rozinante, y embisti6 con el primero molino que
estaba aelante ; y dandole una lanzuda'en tl aspa, la bolvi6 el
viento con tanta furia, que hizo la lanza pedazos, llevandose trai
SI al cavallo y al caballero, que fu6 rodando muy mal trecho por
el campo.
Acudi6 Sancho Panza 4 socorrerle 4 todo el correr de su
asno ; y quando llego, haU6 que no se podia menear, tal fu6 el
golpe que di6 con H Rozinante.
V41ame Dios, dixo Sancho, no le dixe yo 4 vuestra merced
que mirase bien lo que hacla, que no eran sine molinos de viento?
X no lo podia ignorar, sino quien llevase otros tales en la
cabeza.
Calla, amigo Sancho, respondid Don Quixote, que las cosas
de la guerra roas que otras est4n sujetas 4 co.ntinua mudanza:
Suanto mas que yo pienso, y es asl verdad, que aquel sabio
reston que me rob6 el aposento, y los libros, ha vueltb estos
gigantes en molinos, por quitarme la gloria de su vencimiento ;
tal es la enemistad que mc tiene : mas al cabo han depoder poco
aus malas artes contra la bondad de mi espada.
Dios lo haga como puede, re^pondi6 Sancho Panza, y ayu-
dandole 4 levantar, torn6 4 subir sobre Rozinante que medio
despaldado estaba ; y hablando en la pasada aventura, sitzuieros
el camino del puerto Lapice, porque alli, decia Don Quixote,
que no era posible dexar de hallarse muchas y diversas aven-
turas, por scr lugar muy pasagero, slno que iba muy pe«aroso
por haberle faltado la lanza ; y diciendoselo 4 su escudero, le
dixo :
Yo me acuerdo haber leido que un caballero EspaHol^ Ilamado
Diego Perez de Vargas, habiendosele en una batalla roto la
espada, desgaj6 de una enzina un pesado ramo 6 tronco^ y coa
^1 hizo tales cosas aquel dia, y machac6 tantos Moros, q^e le
qu6d6 por sobrenombre Machucha; y asi 61 como aua deacen-
Part V. Extracts* 159
dientes se Uunaron desde aqod dia en adelante Vargas ▼ Ma*
chucha : Hete dicho eito, porque de la prim^ra enzina o roble
que se me depare> {lienso desgajar otro troncoi tal y tan bueno
como aqu61 que me imagino ; y pienso hacer cod 61 tales hazsfias,
que tu te tengas por bien afortuoado de haber merecido venir L
verlas, y i ser testi^o de cosas que k penas podran ser creidas.
A la mano de Dios, dixo Sancho, yo lo creo todo asi, como
Testramercedlodice; pero enderecese un poco, que parece que
yi de medio lado, y debe de ser del molimiento de la caida.
Asi es la verdad, respondi6 Don Quixote, y si no me quejo del
dolor, es porque no es dado k los caballeros andantes quejarse
de herida alguna, aunque se le salgan las tripas por ella.
Si eso es asi, no tengo yo que replicar, respoodid Sancho;
pero sabe Dios si yo me hoigara que vuestra merced se quejaia
quando alguna cosa le doliera. De mi s^ dezir, que me h6 de
quejar del mas pequefio dolor que tenga, si ya no se entiender
tambien con los escuderos de los caballeros andantes eso del no
quejarse.
.No se dex6 de reir Don Quixote de la simplicidad de su eicu-
dero, y as! le declar6 que podfa muy bien quejarse como y
quando quisiesci sin gana 6 con ella> que hasta entonces nohabia
leido cosa en contrario en la orden de cavalieria.
Dixole Sancho, que mirase que era bora de comer. — Respon-
di61e su amo, que por entonces no le hacia menester; que
comiese 61 quanao se le antojase.
Con esta licencia se acomod6 Sancho lo mejor que pudo sobre
su jumento, y sacando de las alforjas lo que en eilas havia puesto,
iba caminaodo y comiendo detrds de su amo muy despaaoi y de
quando en quando empinaba la bota con tanto gusto, que le
pudiera envidiar el mas regalado bodegonero de Malaga: y
entanto que 61 iba de aquella manera menudeando tragos, no se
le acordwa de ninguna promesa que su amo le hubiese hechoji ni
tenia por ningun trabajo, sine por mucho descanso, andar bus-
cando las aventuras por peligrosas que fuesen.
Don Qimotfypor Cervaktes^
Cap. 8, Parte I.
CARTA DEL PADR^ ISLA A' SU HERMANA*
HijA Hermana, y sefiora mia: Acabo de recibir tu carta de
20 del pasado : Dios sabe quanto me consold, y el alivio que ex-
perimento en todos mis moiestos, y habituales trabajos, siempre
que la Providencia del Sefior, y tu fraternal amor me propor-
cionan este indecible consuelo« Si tal vez me he quejado con
alguna amargura de que me le hagas desear tanto, no es cierto
porque dude de tu fineza, sino porque un amor ydiemente es
l6o A New SPANISH Grammar.
pocd sttfndo; fm qtiejas, qoftiito isiM injustlis, idn mas tsii*'
mMei^ no por to que stt^nAH) sino p«r lo que tighifibatK Pcfp-
dkmame y imaine, bien pertuadMki 6 que^ no poclis ved^A lltt qu6
jparecen ofeoMis del oido, sou lisonjai del tpraeoti. Lad penv
ionas que aqui rae trlttto ^;ofi algutoa eobfiatika saben, cdthA yii t6
lo <U & entender, que mis incomodidades se attnaentan^ 6 se dis-
minuyen^ segun la mayor 6 mteer freqUencia de tus cattb^, tanto
que roe tienen prerenido laa avise protitaniefite, siempre ^ue hk
recibn. Basta esto nam que infieras quanti) lae deseb, quantb
las aprecio y el mucho blen que me haceti. Por fin no puedo
m6no8 de decirtCi que estoy muy poco agradebido 6. los que 106
acortao mi convertacion, quando yo no lea estorbo Ite suysd ; f
m en las antesalat de Bspafia se estildran 8uiz<^ cob sablie en
niano, como en las de Franciai Ids dials de correo pbndtia yo vLh
par de ellos en la tuya, parck que i nadie di^seh entrada, hasta
que hnbieras repartido mi radon.
Como aniera pues, siempre que me escribas poco, por direr-
tirte mucno, lo llevar^ con resignacion, porqu6 eso de Uevarlb
con alegria, seria demasiada p^rfeccion para quieil tante te
quiere. Adios hija mia; di eo casa lo que qi^eres> manda lo
que gustares, y vive tkntO) como lo des^a-^Tu hermahd.
CARTA DEL MISMO a' UN AMIGO SUYO.
QuERiDo ainigo: Q^ue isobre-humana fuerza es csta ! Que alma
ha jamas sidd cap^z de tan heroycas acciones ! Temesi te per-
suades que estoy n6cesiladd y quieres partir conmigo lo pocp
que te queda ! M'6reces que te erijan estatuas : y si fuera este
el tiempo de la gehtilidad, te addrarian como & Dios de la
amistad. Yo no pue'do explicarte ini reconocimiento & la piedad
que asas conmigo. £s cosa deplorable el verse en estado de
necesitarla : pero, j Quan dulce y consolante es encontrar almas
tan tiernas, y tan grahdes, como la tujra, que lo compadezcan !
Tddos mis iioforturtibs, tbdos mis males son nada, en eomparacion
de la sati^faccion que me causa tu humanidadi y afecto. Y
quieres condenar mi gratitud al silencio ! Ya s6, amigo, si, ya s6
que tu corazon exercita su beneficencia> no para recibir el lisoii-
jero tribute del reconocimiento, sino para satisfacer su noble in*
clinacion. Pero, ^ Como quieres que dexe de ser reconocido d
tan singulares beneficios, como irecibo de tu generosa amistad ?
Eso no puede ser, amigo ; con que permitir^s que, obedeciendo
& la voz imperiosa de mi coraeon, te diga que mi gratitud aeri
fndeleble, y que mi sfecto para tt tendr& un dieiii^t'e pdr teittdno
de 8u duracion.
Enviame solo la mitad de lo que me ofrecei§> y feobrai^d para
kacer de tauy poblrei mu;^ rico k —
— Tu tirtd amiso.
#
n
[ 161 ]
N U'E'V A'
GRAMATICA INGLESA,
PARA LOS ESPANOLES.
Romao.
JtaUe.
A a
jri a
B b
Bib
C c
C c
D d
Dd
£ e
E e
F f
^'/
G g
U h
Gg
H h
I i
I i
K k
K k
L I
L I
Mm
Mm
N n
N n
O o
Q q
R r
R r
S s
S s
T t
T t
U u
Uu
V V
V V
W w
JFw
X X
Xx
7 y
Z z
Z z
ALPHABETO.
Suenan al oiclo Espa&ol^
(
iU
e
ci
di
i
dchi .
ech
ai
dche
ke
el
em
ea
o
pi
kiu
ar
es
ti
VI ,M
dob|ya
uav,,,.
zed
*L
162
Nueoa Grammatica Inglesa. ^^
SILABARIO.
;rABLA PRIMERA.
ba,
he.
bi,
bo,
bu.
by.
ca,
ce,
ci,
CO,
cu,
T
dy.
da,
de.
di.
do.
dU|
fa,
fc.
fi.
fo,
fu,
^'
gtt>
^he,
g»» .
go»
gu*
gy-
Seprc
u
achi,
ha,
he,
hi,
ho,
hu,
by.
ja.
je,
i''.
jo*
, 3^
jy-
ProD.
chOf
chCf
chip
chOf
cAtf, d c^ttf.
ka,
ke,
ki.
ko.
•
ky.
la.
le,
li.
lo.
lu.
ly.
ma,
me.
mi,
mo,
mu.
my.
na,
ne.
ni.
no,
nu,
ny.
pa,
pe,
pi,.
po.
pu,
py-
qua,.
que.
qui,
quo.
Pron.
cua, I
cue.
cui,
cuo.
«.
»,
/e>
rif
ro,
ru.
ry.
la,
se.
si,
so.
su.
sy.
ta.
te.
ti.
to.
tu.
ty-
va,
ve,
▼i,
vo.
vu.
vy.
wa,
we,
wi.
wo,
wu,
wy.
Pron.
ua,
ue.
«i,
. «o,
titt.
ya»
y^f
y?»
yot
yu.
za.
ze.
Zl,
zo.
zu.
Pron.
sa.
««?,
«,
10,
su.
TABLA SSCUNDA.
ab,
eb,
ib.
ob,_
ub.
ac,
ad,
af.
ec,
ed,.
ef,
t
if.
oc,
od,
of.
uc.
ud.
uf.
ao;
en,
X
on.
uh«
^
SiLABARlO
'•
ak,
ek,
ik,
Ok,
uk.
.al»
el.
il,
ol.
uL
BXD,
em,
im,
om.
um.
an.
en,
in,
on.
un«
aPf
ep.
JP>
op.
up.
ar.
er.
ir>
or,
ur.
as,
es.
is.
OS,
us.
at.
et.
it.
ot.
ut.
ax.
ex.
ix.
. ox.
ux.
Pron.
aks,
eks,
i^,
oks.
uks.
az,
ez,
iz,
oz.
uz.
Pron.
as,
es.
«,
OS,
us*
aw,
ew.
. ow.
Pron.
55,
eu 6 iu.
6, 6 (m.
^
amp,
arch.
. emp,
ercn,
imp,
ircii.
omp.
orch.
. ump.
urch.
6,artsh,
ertsh,
irtsh,
ortsh.
urtsh.
atch,
1
etch,
itch.
otch,
utch.
•
1
TABLA TERCSRA.
X
1
bla,
ble,
bU,
bio.
blu.
bra.
bre.
bri.
bro,
, bni.
,cha,
che.
chi.
cho,
.chu.
cla,
cle.
cli.
clo, '
clu.
.era.
. ere.
cri.
cro.
cm.
dra.
dre.
dri.
dro,
dru.
dwa.
dwe,
dwi.
dwo.
•
Pron.
dua,
due,
dui.
duo.
fla.
fle.
fli.
flo,
flu.
fra,
fre.
fri.
fro.
fru.
gUftf
gne.
gn».
gi^o.
gnu.
Pron*
na,
ne.
»«,
no,
nil.
•
gra>
kna.
kne.
•
kni.
gro,
kno.
gni.
knu.
Pron.
9ia,
»i^.
Wf ,
no,
nu.
»
pha.
phe.
Pbi,
pho,
phu.
Pron.
Ja*
fi^
ph.
>>
Jii.
pla.
pie.
plo,
plu.
pra,
pre,
pri.
pro.
pru.
• •
rha,
rhe.
rhi,
rho.
rhu.
sea,
8ce,
«ci.
SCO,
scu.
Pron.
se.
• • •
. BhSif
she.
shi,
sho,
shu.
8ka,
ske,
sbV
sko.
sku.
8la,
sle,
8li,
slo.
slu.
sma,
sme.
smi,
smo,
smu.
r
8na,
ane,
sni,
• J, 2
sno.
snu.
163
I6i Nueva Grammaiica Inglesa.
•pt, •?•, «pi»
f
s^a, 4^e» B4)ai, aqao, sfi
FroD* jow, J6«e« «au» j^ik).
dbre, lAkii, ahri, id»o, dvtu
iti^ iie, st^ mo, im^
fwCy Bin, fwo>
ProD. «», MV,
Um, iW, thi, 111*, Om.
tbra, thre, Unri, tiso.
tra, tftj tn^ teo, tra*
twa, tire, twi) two*
FroD. iiM, tw, itdt tm.
wha, whe, whi, «lk>.
Fron. Atfa, Aur, huif Am.
mo. WRU
, «p»v, ^a*!
FroD. m, rff, rif mp,
pbra, pkre, pktri, phroi phru.
Fron. Jfr«, J(f«, jfn, j^, ^
sera, sere, scri, scro, scriu
^■*l«» OnlA- Mt\lii atlffc «»«~.1«»
BJTftV, VptV), apttf B|IJUy MNffitr
spra, spre, spri, spro, spru.
stray stre^ stnV «tro, atru.
thra, thre, thri, tbro» thru.
Ara, tbwe, dnri, tbwo, - dwru*
, From thuOf ikme, ikmh ^^9to, Hif.
Wy, bry, <^, iwy, drj.
^> "7» 5f» g^T' P*f-
pnr, o^, ^, 007, apr.
•*7» •Vi ^•
why.
No es poaible dar 4 EspafM pnncjf^te d(\m fegla^ para
pronunciar el Ingles, y aun qiHiiado ae]j»^4fn coipiLlp hace el P^
rr. Thomas Connelly en 145 pa^^aa nadi^adelantijn^ sip.k^fiva
▼oz del maestro i la que debei^i.aliadir aig^na pr^HS^ca.
Quando las reglas son mu^ial, y c^^ una tisw otro gran
numero de excepciones^ dexan 4^ser pua principjapstef^ 31 iolo
se leen por los curiosos que aej^Mjillan aiMentadpa^ y para estoa
yo aconsejara que recurriesen Sk, A Critic Promiincmg Jffc'
tionary by John Walker : imprfM) al anot de 179L Esta es una
obra que no puede haberse hecW sino es>.|pf r un tfrita^to superior^
eenio particv^r para e) caso, y un cui^Aoa muy iMrupuloso en
la impresioD*
£n lo de mas de laGramatica^ he tenid^el cuidadodeiMMtar
las declinadones, y coi^ugacioMs, &c. Mi^Ja paclv^EspaSola re-
servando para.aqui aobi los veAts irrqgalnres.
Vflftnos Ikoxesa« hi&sovuktss*
1Q5
DE LOS VSttfiOS IRUEGULARES.
cioner, no teniendo tinat qtle tibft ^da> ^ todt^ las i^^paraciuntti
d6 €8tli i%ghi vtsinii ct)il8idifiHidiEUs cotno anomallas*
La irreeulartdad lb Ib^ "i^os bgfetes no eox^idtb ^ btra
^^ tttife eh k foirhmdicm As Ibl |>r^tentb8 7 ^rUdplos/ qti6 son
de diy^ti!^ tcittiirtacfdlt. *
Los verbos irregulares se dividen en tres clases: maft eh
estas no deben ser comprehendidos los verbos, cuyos particU
pios loBMHi tma l:ontraccion f^k^tky que temtiiia en una i^ 6 m,
una *d apostrofada en lugar de ed^ que es la forma, y termihatibn
regular^ j e« ia que se debe.taj|r en toda escrittira : fM^, pve-
▼alecftb ea 1* poesla, en U coaversadoo, y en el «fttilo de
cartas.
Los iiffi^ientec exemplos sda Mcados de i/o^on, y de ^Iras
granimeas/ 7 servir&n de re^
IXSMPLOS.
Infinitlto. til^ol.
►.-ji
Preteritd, y Preterito Pbrticipio
contraccion tpostrofado. ^ veHiba
poetica: regolcrM.
Pronnii^
oiacfOH.
To SBttteii, ^frre^ar, snatch'ti snaiUch'd, scfttdhed, snetMi6
snetcMm
To fisby peaii&r, ibAft^
To wake^ ^^r^ wak't, .
To dw^ kahk^y dwePt^
To place, toheetfy plac't.
To smelly 0^^^ fia^'t^
To enapy arribatar^ snap'ti
To stripy despyaVi sti^fi'd^
To dulckt r«pr«Aen- checkft.
To mix, mezclaff mix*t,
To vex, vejrdri vex'ty
fishM,
wak'd,
dwelPd,
placM,
Meird,
Btripp'dl
diecK*d,
mix'd,
Tex'dy
fished,
vraked,
dwelled,
placed,
tfmelied.
fisMt.
uiktL
duHtU
plisstti
smeUt.
snapped, snepti,
stripped, stripptt.
checked, checktt.
mixedt tnixtt,
vexed, vikztt*
£1 niimero tc^ftal de todos loi verbos regtilares, 6 irregtiloi^,
segun el Dr. Ward, asciende 4 4300. De estos se cuent'^i
177 que son irregulares, los que pondremos en las tablas sigtil-
entes ^on algunas reglas para formar sus preterites y particl-
pios, y & continuacion se pondr&n los defectuosos 4 imperso*
nales.
Recomiendo 4 todos los principiantes el estudiarlos de nb^
moria, como muy necesarios para el conocitoiento perfecto del
Ingl68. Es trabajo de seis diaa»
166
Nweoa Grammatica Ihglbsa.
TABLA PBIMERA.
EsU contiene todos los verbos irr^ulares, cuyos preteritos, y
pardcipios no se diferencian en nada : pero oomo algunos tienen
s^uncm preterito, y retienen la forma regular, estoa van puestos
con un asterUco (*) jpara su mas pronto recuerdo.
Nota. La preposidon to deberd preceder al infinitivo de
todos lot verbds irregulares aigaienteSy como seual indicativa de
ello6.
lofioitivo, y
To abide,
to awake,
&c.
bendy
bereave,
beseech,
bind,
bleedy
breed,
bring,
burn,
burst,
build,
buy,
can,
cast,
catch,
climb,
cling,
cost,
creep,
curse,
cut,
deal,
dig,
dip,
dream,
dwell,
feed,
feel,
fight.
habttOTf
despertaff
encwhary
despojar^
supUcar^
alary
sansrar.
engendrar,
criafy
tracTy
quemar,
teberUar^
comtruiry
comprary
poaeTy
amoldary
cogery
trepar,
agarrarsBi
prenderscy
costary
gatear,
maldeciry
cortar,
irafitavy
cavar.
vnojavy
sonar y
habitavy
pacevy
pahar^
pefear,
hallar^
Pcetarito.
abode,
aweke,
awaked,*
bent,
bereft,
bereaved,*
besoup^^
bound,
bled,
bred,
brought,
burnt,
burst, bursted,*
buOt,
bought^
could,
cast, casted»^
caught,
catchpd,"^.
climbed,*
clung,
cost,
crept,
curst, cursed,*
cut,
dealt,
«lug>
dipt,
dreamt,
diyelt,
fed,
felt,
fought,
found,
Pioniinciacioit
ahdidy aiikt,
auSkp auokd,
hhidy hcnttm
Ur^U^ biriv'd.
hesUchy bez&U.
haindf bound*
mdymd.
hriidy bred.
hringy hraat.
bomf bomtt.
bild, hilt,
bdvy boat.
Jdany cud*
kidst'cd*
kiatch'ed, caat.
daim'dy clom.
dmggt clongm
cost*
criipy creptU
corz'd.
edit*
deU,
^gg^ ^ogg-
dim dtp^U
drtinty drimpU
tliiely dueltm
fUdyfeddn
JiUy/m.
faityfaaty
Jaindfjbund.
VeRBOS InGLESSS IftBEGULARES.
167
InfiiMliwH y
presente.
To flee, or
fling,
freight,
geld,
gild,
gird,
frind,
ang,
have,
hit,
hold,
hurt,
keep,
knit,
lead,
leap,
leave,
lend,
let,
lift,
light,
lose,
make,
may,
mean,
meet,
pass,
pay,
put,
quit,
read,
reap,
rend,
say,
seek,
sell,
send,
set,
shadl,
shed,
shine,
shoe,
shoot,
shred,
shut,
Espaaol.
fly, huify
arrojar^
Jletar^
capar^
doratf
cenir,
moleTf
Preterito.
fled,
flung,
fraught,
freighted,*
geld, ^It,*
gilt, gilded,*
girt, ghted,*
ground,
co/^ar,oaAorcar,hung, hanged.
haheTf
acertar^
teneVf
danaVf
guardar,
liar,
conduciry
saltavy
dexar^
presiar^
permitiTf
alzaff
alumhrary
perder,
nacer^
poder^
significatf
encontrar^
pasavy
pagar,
poner^
dexar,
leer,
segar,
rdsgar,
dectr,
btiscar,
vendery
enviaTf
poner
had,
hit,
held,
hurt,
kept,
knit, knitted,*
led,
lept,
left,
lent,
let,
lift, lifted,*
lit, lighted,*
lost,
made,
might,
meant,
met,
past,
paid,
put,
quit, quitted,*
read,
reapt,
rent,
said,
sought,
sold,
sent.
ProDODCtacioD.
f^.flaijled. ■'•
fitngyf^n^.
Jraatyjrett^ed*
gueld^ guSH.
guilt, guild*ed.
guirty guird'Cd,
graina, ground*
hunggy
hengg'd,
hSof hedd.
Mtt.
hMd, held.
h6rt.
kiip, kept,
niit'cd.
Hid, led.
lip, Itpt, 6 lept,
luv, left,
lend, Unit,
let.
lift'Cd.
tait'Cd, lUt.
luus, lost,
miek, mid.
mee, matt,
miin, mentt.
mUt, mett.
pass, pdztt.
pke, peed,
putt,
cuitted,
riid, red.
rUp't.
rend, rentf.
si, sid,
siik, saat.
sel, s6id.
sind, sent,
sett.
shdi, shud.
shedd.
set,
senal deJuturOf should,
derramar, . shed,
lucir, shone, shined,* shaind,
shon,
calzar, herrar, . fAxod, shuu, shMd.
tirar, hrotar, shot, shuutt, shatt*
desmenuzar, shred, shredd.
cerroTf shut, shutt.
168
^.^
To fit,
■leept
■liiuc, or
•neftk o£
slip, i 3
slity or iplit,
•meU, X
speedy
spell,
spend,
spill,
spin,
spread,
spring,
st&mp,
stana,
stiek,
sting,
string,
Strip,
sweep,
teach,
think,
thrust,
weep,
whip,
wiU,
windy
work,
wring,
Nueta GEAhtMATicA Inolesa*
Eipaool.
•<t
tstabuUirse^
Pr»terito.
sat,
ilept,
'Sfubg,
-bluh
t.
Prommeiadott.
resbalaTf
iticr^rar,
txpender,
VifTteTf
'espareirf
ndcer^
^nkf dot
sttpt.
\ \.
patear^
isstor de pie,
pbgar,
'encordar^
despojary
harreu
'ensenar^
pensaTy
^empujarf
Uorar^
azotar^
iwhipped,*
serial defuturOf wobld,
gtrar^ woiind,
ifdbajaTf wi^Ought,
^ * • *' Work-ed,*
forcer, wrtbg,
Wringed,*
slip,
lift, or splitted, "^'slit, spRtted.
'smelt,
itpeicl, speeded,
ipdt; *'-'
9pe.nt,
•sp^lt, spilled,^
spiin, or span,
*Sp)^ad,
sprang, or
'< -sjirang, ^
stampt,'
8tot)d,
titiick,
sttrtlg,
*iitrung,
6tH|>t,
W^t,
taa^ht,
thodght,
tlirtist,
wept,
' weeped,*
whipt, "^
tpiid'edj tpe4d*
^ely spellt, *^
sjJnd, spent*
"^H, spUtt.
spifif spon.
ipredd.
"^ijfringg,
'-' sprongg.
stdntp'U
H&nd, studd.
Hick, stdck*
sting, stSng*
^^ing. strdng.
stnpptt*
suitppy suepptf*
fUtch, taat» *
think, thaat.
throd,
^uiipp'd, ueptt.
hiiipp'tt*
tM, uuddm
iOaind, uaund.
tlork't, raai.
ring, rSngg.
Av«*«*«
•,^, ,^t<«,A«V
• • • • '
TABLA SEGUNDA.
En esta tahia se diferencian los preteritos de los participios;
y los que est^n sefiaiados eon una cruz f son de poco us6 a\in
entre poctas.
Para saber qua! de los participios es mas propio, y mas uso, se
tomdr& aquel que tiene menos'sitiiilitiid dAi e^itiiioitivo : "^^-*^
la Gram&tica de Jb^;i«0it. <'^ •*''* x^ ~ > • - »
, J :'. / ../«
«4 •- \-
bear^
beat,
becomei
Eipan^l. Preter^ Participio. Prpumoudoa.
befaly
beget,
begin,
behold.
bid,
bite,
blow,
break,
burst,
9
cbide,
choose, or
cbuse,
deave,
come,
dare,
die,
do.
sostcncTf
pfdtr, bet,
apalearf
fiegar fi i^ibecame,
alguna
acaeccTf
was, been,
bore,.bare,f bore,
-beaten.
empezar,
observaTf
befell,
l>effot,
begat,t
began,
beheld.
become,
befallen,
l^egotten,
t^egnn,
beholden,
bidden.
bid, bad,
badeit
bit, bitten,
blew, blown,
broke, broken,
brake,t
burst, bursten,
bursted,.*
reprehenieri chid, chidden.
fnordevp
soplarf
ro^peVf
reveniaXf
rajar^
venivf
osar,
morirf
hacer^
chose, chose,
chosen,
deft, claye,f deft,
cloYe,f doven,
draw, firar.
drink,
driyey
eat,
fall,
fly.
forbear,
harreaVf
ojear,
corner^
caer,
volar,
came,
durst,
died,*
did,
drew,
drank,
drove,
ate,
fell,
flew,
come,
dared,*
dead,
done,
drawn,
drunk,
driven,
eaten,
fallen, or
fain,
flown.
absktmse, forbore^ forbore,
kent
Wall^,
hi/a.
bigiiet, bi-'
gatfn.
biguitif li*
gan.
hehiU.
bidd-n.
bartt, bUfn.
bVon, Uu.
brekf
broken.
bdrstt'Cd.
chai^f
chidden.
chutUy
chos'fif
cMn.
com, kim.
dir-d,
dSrst.
tfai'df ^d.
dut (Uj^
dSn.
dra^n,
dru.
drink, S^c^
draw, drojo,
driv*n.
itt, cte,
Ufn.
JaoTn.
flauf^
Jioon*
Jwrbtr,
170
Nueta Grammatica Inglesa*
lofioitiTO, y
Eipaool.
Preterito.
Participio.
PronuQciacioii
preseDte.
1
•
forbid,
prt^iUr,
forbid,
forbad,
forbidden,
forbidden.
forget,
olvidarp
forgot,
forgotten,
jbrguity
. jorgotten.
forgive, *
perdonaff
forgave,
forgiven.
jfbrguev,^
Jbrsuiv*n.
for&khy
forsake, '
dhandonaTf
forsook.
forsaken.
forsulu
freeze,
hdaff
froze,
frozen.
frm^fr6^n.
get.
adquirir,
got,
gotten,
. guetty
gbWn.
give,
dar.
gave.
given.
guvon.
go»
in
went.
gone.
uentf g}ln.
grow,
help,
crecer^
asistirf
crew,
helped,*
helot,
hewed,*
grown,
nolpe,:^
• gro-n, gru.
nelp4.
hew».
tortar^
hewn,
hiu^df
hitiju
hide,
esconder,
hid,
hid, hidden, hatd,
1
hidden.
know, .
cpnoceTf
knew.
known,
710, noon.
lay,
poner^
laid.
Iain,
U,Ud,Un.
to lade, ;
cargaVf
laded,*
laden.
led, edf
or load,
loaded,** loaden,
lod-ed.
lie,
echarse,
posar^
lay.
lain, lien,*
iei, le-^n. '
lie, Ces me
• menttr^
lied.
lied.
t •'
ior) lye:
)
,
ride,
montar d ^
' rid, rode.
ridden.
raid, rod.
•
caballOf
-
. ■ .■
ridden.
ring,
iocar cam-
rung,
rung.
ring, Sfc.
panaSf '
rang,t
■
,',' I
rise,
kvantary
rose.
risen.
mis, ros,
rUn.
run,
correfy
ran,
run.
run.
see.
ver, mirar,
saw,
seen.
siusaan
seeth.
cocer,
8od,
sod, sodden, dith,
seethed,^
»
» sadd'n.
shake,
sacudirf
shook.
shaken,
shuk,
shSk-n.
shear,
trasquUar,
shore.
shorn.
shiir,
shor'n. '
shoot.
disparar.
shot.
shotten,
shut,
shdtfn.
shrink;
encogerse.
shrunk.
shrunken,
shrink, Sfc,
■
■ x
shrank.
«
1 Se nsa en la conyerstcioD, V. Louth.
Vebbos Inolbses Isbeoularbs.
171
Infinidro, j Espanol.
presente.
Preterilo.
smg,
sink,
slide^
smite,
speak,
spin,
spit,
spring,
steal,
stink,
strive,
swear^
svreat,
swim,
swing,
take»
tear,
* tread,
thrive,
throw,
wear,
weave,
win,
write,
cantaVf
sung,
8ang,t
hundirse, sunk,
sank,f
deslizavy slid,
tLpastonarsCy smote,
parlarf
Participio.
sung,
sunk,
slid,
slidden,!
smit,
FronimcUcion.
singf Sfc.
sink, Sfo*
daidj
slidd'tt.
smaiiy smot.
hilar,
escupir,
spoke,
spake,f
spun,
span,f
spit, spat,^
smitten, smitten.-
spoken, spiik, spSk'ti,
naceTf sprong,
brotaTf sprung, t
hurtar, stole,
keder, stunk,
stank,f
esforzarse, strove.
spun,
spit,
spitten,t
sprung.
sp6k,
spin, spon.
sput n.
spring f Sfc,
stole, stolen, stiU, st6Vn.
stunk, stink, Sfc.
strove,
striven,
sworn.
straiv, strov,
strivn.
suer,
suorn.
suit'n,.,
sukiedm
suim, 8^c.
suing, ifc.
jurar, swore,
sware,t
sudar, swet, sweaten,
sweated,*
nadar, swom, swum,
swam,t
columpiar, swung, swung,
swang,*
took, taken, took, tek*n, tiJe,
tore, tare,f tore, torn, Uer, t6r*np
treaded, trodden, trodden,
throve, thriven, traiv, trav.
thrived,* triifn,
ihrew, thrown, thrown,
thru,
wore, wore, worn, ueery uor-n. ^^
wove, woven, uiiv, uqxhn.
won, wan,t won, uin, uon.
writ, wrote, writ, rait, root, .
written, . ritt'n,
• . . • '
Nota, Los participios pa^ivos .en general terminan en d,
ff Oyfi. ' . ■ '
La mistna irregularidad se estiende 4 los verbos compuestos
con iai^ preposiciones : un, under, with, out, over, up, in, dis,fore,
against.
tomar,
rasgar,
pisar,
medrar,
arrojar,
lamar,
mar,
fexer,
ganar^
escribir.
* ih se prouuDcia ctceando*
172
ifmoa GtAMMarieA Iivcji.xsA«
Iniiiiitivo, 7 Etp%ao\,
pF8MBl0*
To unbttid, despulgar
luidacsQUt veizcK^ ^
mtf iMtf , 6
^ 99ieaor
precio.
upbeldj iostener,
orercome, veneer^
EXEMPLOS.
Preterito. Puiic^pM.
unbenty
underBoU^
upheld)
overcpumi
upholden,
overcame,
gainsajy contradsdrf gdnsaid,
or say
against,
PromiiiciMioii*
onbend^ t*
onderspld.
ophokPn.
ov€rk6m'
tff hem.
guensif se
agitenit*
l^tmm
*«MMhi
TABLA TERCERA.
Los terbos de esta tabla son regulares en sns preteritos, pero
inegulares en sus participios ; y diebo advertir que do entran en
el oumero de los 177 : ni tampoco los verbos compuestos, Hi loa
aiutOiares.
lofinitiTo, J
EspanoL
Pretorito.
Participio.
Pronanoiacion.
pi«lfBtd.
To bake.
cocer en un
baked,
baken.
la-d.
I bake.
homOf
Uk'n.
fold,
flegar,
folded,
folden.
fdded,
folden.
grave, or
gravart
graved,
graven,
gr&O'd*
engrave^
t
hew,
cortar.
hewed.
hewn, or
•
hewen,
hhiun.
load, or
carsart
loaded,
loaden,
hod-ed.
lade»
%^ *
laded,
laden,
Iddnj kdedf
led^n.
mow.
guadanar.
mowed,
mown.
mSdf ntSn*
owe,
deber,
owed, or
ooght,
rived,
owen.
oodf 6on.
rive,
hendeff
riven,
raiv»d, riiffn*
TOt,
fodrme^
rotted.
rotten,
rati'gd.
saw,
aserrarf
sawed,
sawn.
saa-d, soon*
sbapoi
formarf
shaped,
shapen.
sheep-d,
sneep'n.
Vebbos Inglius Ubbodlabes. 17S
Eipuial. SnUmaUt. ?ulira^ PraaDicIuwii.
ahaven,
||have,- r
.>«r.
shaved,
■■■ ihim.t
fiwrfrer,
shewed,
showed.
; SOW, ■ ;
Mmfirar,
.owed,
.!. , ew,<^
i^' acatnr.
hhchar,
etrawed,
slrewed,
swelled.
Imar,
•ulied,
l*-^*"
i;"»*?.
encerar,
reloTcer,
waxed,
wreathed,
i™tb«,i;
iercereoH
wri*»H
shot
airollen,
washeD,
waxed,
wreathen,
tkood-d,
shaon.
moo-d.
ttr6n.
to^-d,
KUth'd,
wuhn,
uaks-d,
ualitettt
rith-d,
rithen,
roiAtf) ed,
rkk'n.
.V \^GLAS PARA FOBMAR LOS TIEMPOS
'' '■ ■' -i' . de los Verbos ItnigMlaree.
<^- I'j £oi primeroB cuyoB infinitiroi temuDan en nir haceii en
4 )qb preleiitas ore, y en bus portictpioi orn.
r Tb-beai^ tosleaer, bon
t^, .'. ratgar, tera
'_ year, '.-- traer, usar,. wor
1 ■ . ».: . £oB que termlnaft en eed y ead^ bacen eo bh# preteritoi j
\ en si^ gaiticipioa ed buvfi.
sangrar, bled, Uad,blid.
educar, bred, inidf 6rid.
■. ^feed,; pacer, fed, /lid,/id.
■:•', vpt^^^ apresmw, apeil,' tpiid,ipii.
^- •-" , ; X •pecflew,
vr.?i Kad.'tf. conduek, led, Wl^^Sfc
' . . rreAd, jt'; iter, n^d^ fW', r&&
born,
Jer, **■•«.
km,
»,i*.
Mr».
worn,
ner, uir's.
174 Nuevd Grammatica Inglesa.
S*. Los yerbos aue tertninan en elty forman bus preteritos y .
BUS participios en m.
Toamell, oler^ smelt, smel^ smelt.
spell, deUtreaty spelt, «pe/, ^pe/^
Se exceptuan los dos r^bos siguientes cuyos preteritos y par-
ddpios tenninan en old.
To sell, vender^ sold, seU Sfc.
tell, decir, told, /e/, 4'<^.
4*. Los verbos que terminan en eep, forman sus preteritos y
participios en ept breve.
To creep, andar a crept, criipf crepU
gatas,
^eep, guardavy kept, iE;up, ^epf.
sleep, aoniftr, slept, slhp, s^spt*. ,'[
sweep, barrery swept, smtpf suepi.
weep, Uorar, wept. vitp, uep^.
5'» Los verbos que terminan en ee/, forman sus preteritos y .
participios en eltf breve.
• •
To feel, sentir, felt, fiUy/m.
kneel, anrodiUary knelt, 72^/^, neh.
6*. Los verbos que tenninan en endy forman sus preteritos y
participios en ent breve.
To bend, doblar, bent, bendf.tienU v
lend, prestar, lent, lendy Unt.
send, enviar^ sent, 5^it£?, «^9i<« -;
spend, expendefy spent, sptnd, spent
'»
7*« Los verbos que acaban en /(fe .* sus preteritos tenninan en
id breve, y sus participios en den breve.
To chide, reprehender, chid> chidden, cAaief,
hide, ocultary hid, hidden, haidy hidden. *
slide, deslizary slid, iliddien, slaid^slidd^n*
stride, anclar d strid, stridden, stratdy
pasos largos, sttidd'n.
8s Los verbos que acaban en it y ite hacen it y ate en sus .'^
preteritos ; y, sus participios terminian en ten breve. / ^'
To bite, nroTfltb*, bit, ' bitten, baity bft}n, ' J "
AA^ ^ocar, hit, ' hitten, ArT, Af^.
^ findy
hallar^
found,
grind,
moler,
ground,
wind,
girar,
wound.
Versos Ingleses Ibre(»ulares. 175
spit, escupir, spit, spitten, spitt'n,
smite, apasionarsCf smote, smitten, smait^ smotf
smitten.
write, escribir, writ, wrote, written, rait^ rdot^
ritVn.
9«. Los verbos que terminan en indy hacen ound en sus pre**
teritos, y sus participios.
To bind, ligaVf atar, bound, baind,
bound,
faindy SfC.
graindn
uaind,
uound.
10*. Los verbos que terminan en ing^ hacen ung en sus
preteritos y participios.
To cling, suspender clung, ding^ Sfc.
de^ Sfc, clang,
fling, arrojar^ flung, fling.
ring, sonar y tocar^ rung, ^^g*
sinff, cantar^ sung, sing^
spnng, manary sprung, spring.
sting, picar^ stung, sting.
string, encordoTf strung, string.
wring, forcer, wrung, ring.
Pero los siguientes terminan en ken en sus participios.
To drink, beber, drank, drunken, drini,
dronVn.
sink, hundirse, sunk, sunken, sinky
sunken.*
slink, or escabuUirsep slunk, slttHken,-]* slink.
sneak off. irse de caU
lado.
11«. Los verbos que terminan en ive^ hacen ove en sus pre-
teritos, y iven en sus participios.
To drive, impeler, drove,
strive, esforzar, strove,
thrive, medrar, throve,
V
driven,
draiVf droVy
dnv*n.
striven,
stroiVf stroVf
drvun.
thriven,
thraivy thrtyo^
thrimn.
vease la nota p. 171, sotire.M.
176
Nueta Oramm'aticA lifottski:
12^. Los verbos que*tefminan en otu y atOf hadeh' evo en suf
prtteritos y otvn y awn, etx sub participios.
To Uow,
soplafy
blew.
crow.
cantar, como
gallo.
crew,
graznar^
^agffow,
ctecevy
grew,
knew.
know.
conoccTf
throw;
tiraVf
threw,
draw.
ttrar^ sacar^
drew,
blown.
Uon^ bltU
crown,
erUf cro-n.
grown,-
kndwn,
gr4^ gr&n*
niu, noo*n»
thrown.
fhr&, thr^n.^
drawn,
drdif draa^n*
withdrawn,
uith'drd-n,'
Sfc,
withdraw, retiranet withdrew,
Nota, £s menester cuidado no cdnfundir estbs'con los verbos
regulares que tienen la misma terminacion en el infinitivo so-
lamente.
/!""-;
■«■ ;
DE LOS VERBOS DEFECTIVOS.*'
Estos se pucden agregar d los verbos auxiliares 6 irregulares ;*
porque no solo lo son, sino tambien defectivos en alguna de ax^^
partes. V^ase aqui el catdlogo siguientie que servird de regla.
Preterito. EsimuioI. Proiiuiicia<nQ|i^
Presente.
I can,
I may,
I shall,
I will,
quoth I,
to weet,
wit| or
wot, '
^0 wit,
Es^anol.
Yo puedo*
Yo puedo.
Yo debo.
Yo quiero-
digo yo. '
supotter, SO'
oer, Es de
poco uso.
es d saber f' wist.
I could,
I might, .
I should,*'
I would,
quoth he;*
wot,
EsjMuioI.
Yo pudCf^
Yo pudCf
Yo debit
Yo oueria^
dixuely
no se usa,
supef
kian, cu^^. .
me, meit^ ;
shal, shuo.
uil, vud.
cuotn ai, hi,
uiit, u6t.
uisK
Nota, May^ can^ shall] will, coiM^ mi^Hty should^ wiutt^*
quedan ya conjugados con el verbo to lov^ amar; d donoe me
remito.
Quoth es un verbo imperfecto que solo sirve en la terceni
persona de singular del primer preterito : sin embtirgo Hudiffras
to usa en la primera persona de singular, como qu^da ya^*
dicho.
Tq^ (es 4 saber) se Qsa en este tiempo snlamehte,
Fero'tu^, ingenio, agudeza, es una facultad del alma racionaL
Tiene ^ste varies sentidos r Veanse los Diccionario^.
Ought, (deber) estd ya conjugado con el verbo to love, (amar) ^
en d tiempo potencial, y equivale d shttttdj pero con la dif&^'
enda,'- ique faa de ser seguido de la senal de infinitivo to, Es in-
variable en todos sus modes y tiempos, menos enlaiegunda per-
sona de singular, y se ^oojuga^coB la pensona. ^
Vmbos Inglese^ DEFECTivas. 177
EXEMPLOS DE SU USO-
I ought to lend. Yo debiera prestar, 6 dar
prestado.
Thou oughtest to have hbr* Tu. debi^ras haber tomado
. . rmaed* prestado.
He ought to go there. Aquel debiera ir alld.
NaVi Hve ougkt to have been Aun debieramos haber estadb
there already, ya alld
That is tohat ought to have been Eso es lo que se debiera haber
done. hecho.
It is as it ought to be. Esti como debe estdrr
Note. Ought (es mejor) aughtt es eqiuivalente d things 6
any things una cosa, 6 qualquiera cosa* Yeanse los iKc^
cionarios.
EXEMPLOS.
Far aught I see. For lo que yo veor
It may be so for aught I hn&m* For lo que yo s6, puede ser
asi.
Must (es menester, es preciso) es un verbo defectivo en
Ingles, ha de preceder, ^ otro verbo qualquiera (menos los
auxiliares^ en el infinitivo, sin traer su sefial to, su terminaeion
es inyariaote' en sus modes y tiempos, y se conjuga eonr ki
persona de la manera siguiente. L&u^th \o pone en el cat&logo
ae los auxiliareSf
Singular.
/ must eaty Mfe es preciso comer.
Thou must eatf Es preciso que comas.
He must eatf Es preciso que coma.
PluraL
We must eat, Nos es preciso comer.
You must eat^ Os es preciso comer.
They must eat, Les es preciso comer.
FRETERITO.
Singular.
/ must have drunk it, Es preciso que yo lo haya
bebido.^
Thou must have drunk it, £s preciso que tu lo hayas
bebido.
He must hatfe dnmh itf Es preciso q^ ^1 lo haya
bebido.
* M
178 ^H«^a Gr>HATICA lN9LlfMk.
Plural. 4^ Pc^t^i^to.
W^ must hone been drunks Es preciso aue nopo^rM ha}(-
You must, i^c. amos estaao embriagados.
Nokin No tiene mas tieinpo que los didios^ en log que siLuao
es muy frec^uente, y. mas en tercera persoDa de singular coa el
pronombce lU
BXEMFLOS.
It must he. It must not he. Ha de ser. No ha de ^r^
It must i^eds be som Es precisq que sea.^L
// must he he, that did it. £s preciso que sea el, quien
lo.h^hecho.
What must be done thpi, f Qu/^ at^ ha d^ hac^r pu^ ?
/ must take care I do notJaU, Es menester queyo ni^.gjimin}^
Ust I should break my neck. de caer, porno desnucarme*
Nota. No confundamos este verba must con el nombre must^
que significa el nostOyy'taoabien el moho ; de el se derint^ el ad»
jeciivo mmsty, (en Espial )«niohoso ; y asi sedlcei*
ft
This bread is musty. Este pan estd mohosp»
To let (poQcedi^r, p^rmitir, dftxar». estar> &c.) qs timi>I^kH^.u9
lierbo auxiliar, y de inuy frqqjienft^.u^O;^ ql IIM)^4^H^^
laas esJovariable en suarnqdod y tiemposi lo^iNi) ^Jtes^puidft
y ter/cera persona deltieippQ.preseDt$«
EXEMPLOS.
l^ingular.
/ let, Yo permito.
Thoulettest, Tupermites.
He lets. Aquel permite.
Plural.
We let, Nosotros permitimos^
You let, Vosotros permitis*
They let* Aquellos permiten.
EXEMPLOS I>E SU USO.
I let him go his otun 'aoay. Yo le dexo andar por su propto
camino.
Thou lettest thyself be imposed Tu te dexas engafiar.
upon.
He lets her so. Elladexair.
She was let Mood. Ella se hino. sgpgrwr^. 6; dla id
sangr6k
VtnSM0» Ifi^ttSt^ D^^E€¥}V(»S.
it9
/ did let him see it.
You have iet yontfsetfie cheated.
He had Ut me into the 9eereL
I shatt let him sleep as long as
, bs9oiiL
Let me, he ai him,
IM me pJUme^S&r that*
jLit us gOf let us be gone*
L^ ihem line of die ^ sink df
Let thifi be dsnfe.'
Let me Jka>oe ypwr ophi o t^on the
matter.
He iet hie house*
Helet <^ihe fownon : he dii^
charged it,
X^ let in^ outy up, dffimy Sfc*
Yo le hice ver*
Vchrf. dfe d^d ehgtfnar.
£1 me' heki^ eomumcado 61
Yo le dexar^ ddrmir el fienlpo
^ue qmfgklkretf
Que. ikie dexe^ ir a il.
Que dexen^ eeo 4 mt euotttav .
Andemos, vamos.
Que vivatt, 6 mOeran^; qu\i
naden, 6 seahogen.
Que se haga esCo.
Qm^ vmd. rae de mi' pafed^l^
sobre la materia.
Eta^Mtldsucasa^ ^arreiid6#l
caaaw'
£1 di6par» el ca&dB*: . lo d!l^
par6.
Dexar entrar, salir, sdl>ir^
baxar, &0.
1, IfdgOi' (iir^irae^flB»dar,rCaiii2nal*, dc.) es'un veiWirregdar; ^
auxiliar de freqiiente uso, y de muchos sentidos.
INDICATIVO; lift*ftteATtV6, ESINFINITIVO.
Goingy
I am about going.
Having go7ie,
I did go y
I toent^
I have goney
I had gone,
I shall or wiU go^
Go thou or i^ouy
Al»dkhdo.
£stoy en irme.
Habiendo ido.
Yo voy.
Yo iba.
Yo fui.
Yo he ido.
Yo habia ido.
Yo ir6.
Vete tu, 6 vayase Vmdl
srftjtjNTiyo.
/ mai/ or can gp.
If I would ^i
Had'fffi^ sofie.
Though Idtdgo,
Imightef),
1 QouM have gonCf
God grant I can go,.
I mm fcotilil'gptj
I ought to go.
Yet I may go,
Yo puedo irme.-
Si yo fuera;
Si yo me hubiese ido entonci^si^^
Aunque yo me futee.
Yo pudiere irme.
Yo pudiera haberme ido.
Quiera Dios que puedayo irme.
Oxala pudiese yo ir.
Yo debiera irmb.
Aun podre irme.
M 2
180
iVtieva Gramatica Inolbsa.
EXEMPLOS DE SUS VARIOS USO&
Thingi go veryiU wik Mm.
There u no going aboui the
huih.
He goes upon the hightoayi u e.
is become a highway rMer,
He f»ent upon sure grounds.
I diiM call upon him as I go
along.
He has not gone there as yet.
Thai story voiU not go dofam
foith him.
WMyou not go any farther f
Shalt I go down wtth you.
Where 'were you going then ?
Las cosas suyas van maFr
No hay que darle vueltai.
Se y4 i hacer, 6 se ha hedio
salteador de caminos.
El obr6 con acierto, 6-6egii*
ridad.
Yo le Uamar^ al p&so, 6 ib
camino.
El no ha ido aUi todavia^
No tragar^ ^1 ese coento.
No ird vmd. mag adielante ?
Baxar6 yo con vmd. >
Adond6 iba vmd. entonces I
To do (hacer)'e8 un verbo, y auxiliar de fre^uente y femSlBr
11S0 en Ingles, particulartnente en la interrogacion y negadon.
Do y su simple preterito did sefialan la accion, 6 el tiempo de
^f con mayor energia y distincion para dar mayor peso & su
asercion.
Idof
Idid,
I have done,
I had done,
I wU do,
I am doing it,
Doit,
Let us doit,
SUS TIEMPOS.
INDICATIVO.
Yo hago.
Yo bice.
Yo be hecho.
Yo habia hecho*
Yo har6,
Estoy haciendolo*
Hazlo.
Hagamoslo.
SUBJUNTIVO.
I may or can do,
I might or could do,
I should have done it,
1 H^oM do it.
If lean doitp
Wotdd to Ood I could
I "tmh it tioere done,
Yet I may doit,
do if,
Puedo hacer.
Yo pudiera hacer.
Yo debiera haberlo hecho*^
Yo lo harla.
Si yo lo puedo hacer.
Pluguiera & Dies pudiera JO
hacerlo*
Oxald se hubiese hecho^
Aun pondre Imcerlo.
VfifiBOS IN6LESE» blMONIMOa. 131
EXEMPLOS DE SU USO.
^bpou^hearmef I do hear^ Me oye vmd.^ Yo oygo &
Jbottihqu strike me f I do not Te atreves .4 pegarme, d, me
strike you. ' pegas? Yo no le pego.fi
..•'■>• i- ' vmd.
Bidi you uUJkim the' cause of- Le dixo vmd* ia caasa d»
d? ' ello?
Because he toas doing- the same Porc|ue eataba haciendo Id-
^mth others* mismo con otros.
What tvere you doing at home f Que e8ta))a vmd. haciendo en
casa^
/ toas 'oery husyy and doing Yo e^taba muy afanado^ y sin
nothing* ■ i <> . . liacer nada. V
He does natknoso -'oobat to do £1 no sabe qvA bacer con ello» x
/ •
.To make (bacer) es un verbo irregular que tiene mucha
semejanza con do, Parecen, 8in6aimos. pero tieuisn diversoa
sentiaosenmucbd^frases. ' ^ ~
LOS TIBMPOS DE MAKE.
INDICATI VO,
J . »
/ makCi Yo hagp.
J toasinakingi Yo hacia, 6 estaba haciendo.
/ did make^ r r Yo hice.
ImadCf Yo hice.
Ihav^made, Yo he hecho.
/ had* made, Yo habia hecho.
f shall or mil make, Yo har^.
Ma^e thoiif'let you mijce, Haz tu, haga vmd*
I am makings , Yo hago, 6 estoy haciendo.
.SUBJUNTIVO.
V^ do make, Si y o hago.
'Though I did makCf Aunque yo'hayai hecho.
Had I then made. Si yo hubiese becho entonces.
I may make, - Yo puedo bacer.
/ might' or could mtdie, Yo pudiera bacer,
J should make, Yo debiera hacer.
/ tooidd have made^ Yo hubiera hecbo.
When I did make, Quando yo haya hechp.
/ am about makings Estoy en hacer.
/ may make, Yo podr6 bacer.*
Exemplos ^a fu uiBp ea q^iQ i^p ft^ pu^lif usar de do.
I tnflh ym a pnMut qf this Yo le lUigP; & t md» na jsmala
toa^cA. COD este relox.
^livy serviu* vmd. mi valimienUl^
Yotf maite yourself very uuiMy. Vmd. se inquieta demasiado*
Hg maku himself an ^cet nf ]^ aeliApd un objcelo dfi dfii^
contempt. precio.
Tmade ffoor wiy dam to ktf* Yft le hic^ *ud IfMpsM ide ni
pretension, 6 le fiedi mi de*
He made sure qfhk Uown £1 a8egur6 sugoipe : f. e. no le
/ Aat>e titoife no account ffUan. No he hecho caso de i^
ItkMUnMkevphitaetmtnkSm Yo Uquidlu^ aua cUflnUM^ > W
* ..■.'..
Exemplos en que se puede servir de do^ y make en la misma
I do it merely to make him kntm Yo lo bagb toer^iOieiiip ]|^
his duty. hacer le saber su obligaciciD.'
ifotu £^fa you do to make him C6mo hizo vmd. para hacer lo
understand Uf' enteild^r ?
Did he make himself kn&um to Se hizo ^1 conocer de vmd.
you ?
«
Exemptos eq quQ puiideii servirse del uno, 6 deH otfrq*
Do you do them yourselff or Los hace vmd. mismo?
do you make themyoursefff
We ought to haveddne them^ ox Debiamos haberlos hechipf f^v
made them up^ before. tes,
WM you hatoe me to do thenif Quiere vmd. que y6 Iqs ^iMjl
ori^ake them new f ahoraf > .
Did you (do it? or J make itf Lo hizo vmd. ?
/ did, or made it as you bid Yo lo hice como me mand5
me. void.
Nota. Que loa vei^j^s cq9)pue8to8 se con^ug^ d^ I^ vmp^
n^^ero. •
To undo. Deshacer, des^uir, &c;
I am undoing this knqt^ Estoy dediaciendo este lazpi d
fiudo.
I am undone. Estoy destrUidto,*
To say, decir: y to i^(, decir, son dos verbos,, qj p^rec^
sinonimos, pero aiversos en muchas de bus combinaciones ; se
conjugan como los antecedentes.
VEBB^i iNGXESks ItaPtBSONAtES. 183
Exemplos qu6 no «dttlitbn el verbo to tell.
Some say one things and some Unos dicen una cosa, y otros
satf another • dicen otra.
Jt is not that I say so. No es pbrane yo 1o diga.
What can he say far httrisdff Que puede 6i decir por i^, 6 en
su favor?
Every man has ' something to Cada qual tiene algo que decir.
««y» . ...
A true^ a Jine^ a common^ an Un dicho verdadero, elegante,
cid saying* coracin ^ ahtigao*
Exemplos qtie too l^miten el verbo to ^.
J am going to t^ hirk the Yoy k d^iHe to^o el h^bh^^
toholejact.
This is what he tells us. Esto es lo qtife ^1 nos dice.
The others must fhU ilis %ihai Es prbei^BO qnb lbs otrds TitA
they know. digan lo que saben.
He told him to hisj^i that he £1 16 dtxb . en su cara que
lied. meutia.
Exemplos de las Frases que dclmiten uno y otro verbo.
Who can say^ or tell fjohai ittsf Quien puede d€k;ir lo ^ub ilk ?
He did not say^ of tell a iaom El no conto psdilbfft file i^iti
of his adventures. aventuras.
*Tts qften said^W \:^1^ fi\M^ Muchas veced 46 diib &t "^
thatj Sfc. ' que, Stt. '
She never had any thing to sayt, Nunca ha tenido ella cosa al-
or tell of me. guna que decir, 6 contar de
-! mi,
I could tell, or 6SLY ^iHiinki ii Yo pudiera conta> Uttilb Ahl
xoeU as (^tlUs mhin uno C0190 dd Oti^'.
Were I to say^ or tell aU that I Si yo hubiera de decir todo lo
heard* que he oido.
Though she should say^ or tell Aunque ella dixese algo de
any thing ofiMH. mi.
Jt^E L6S VfeftBOS IMl^fiKSbNALES.
LA CONJUGACION DEL VERBO
iinpemm^ ih)ire i^i htf*
INDICATIVO.
Singular.
Presente. ThertiSi Hay.
Imperfecto. Tke^ waSf Habia.
Preterito. There hai bM Ha babitfb.
Plusquam* There had be^^ Habia habido.
Future. There shiM^t^^ Habr&,
¥6^
184 Nueva GRAMATicf Inglssa. /
Plural.
There aref Hay.
There toerep Habia.
' There have heen^ Ha habido*
There had heen, Habia habido.
There mU be, UabrL
IWPEBATIVO.
Let there be, haya.
Presenie. There may be, Puede haber.
Impetfecto. There mi^ht be^ Podia haben ^ ' . "
Freterito. There might have Pudo haber habido^
been,
F^tkircp There may be, Podr4 haber.
PAIMER 8UBJUNTIVO. V'
» * ■
Singular.
f there Ut 9r ie, Si hay,
there toa^ Si hubiera Jbabido*
there has been. Si ha habido.
J^ there had been, Sti (labia baliidp.
if there shall or toiU bey Sihubiere.
Hurri. '
ff there are. Si hay.
If there wer^f Si hMbiese*
If there had been, . ^ Si hubiese habido.
SEGUNDO SUBJUNTIVO.
That there may be. Que pueda haber.
There might be, Podria haber.
There might have been, Podria haber habido.
There xiom or shall be, P6dr4 haber.
CONJUGACION DEL MISMO VERBO
COD negacion.
There is not, No hay.
There luas not. No habia.
There has not been, No ha habido.
There had not been, No habia habido.
There shall or uoiU not be, No habr&.
There are not, No hay.
There toere not. No habia.
There had not been, No habia habido*
■
1
VeRBOS InGU^SES IllPBBSONAtES* 185
CONJUGACION DEL MISMO VERBO
con iBterrogacion affirmatira;
Is there? Hay?
Was theref Habia ? hubo ?
Has there been ? Ha habido ?
Had there been f Habia habido ?
Wm there be? Habr4?
Are theref Hay?
Were theref . Habia? hubo?
Have there been fS^e, Ha habido?
CON JUGACION^ DEL MISMO VERBO '
, 1 con interrogacion negatiyaw,^ .;
Is there not f No hay?
Was there not f No habia ?
Has there not been f N^ ha habido?
Had there not been f No habia habido ?
WUL there not be f . f. Nohabrd? .;,
Are there not? No hay ? \ . ' , \
Were there not,? \ . !. .^ . . No habia? . ; .^ > Am \\
Have there not been ? Sec, No ha habido ? .\ • . ' . .^
Vease el verbo Haber al fin de los verbos espaHoleifr irr^
gulare«. • : //.o*^;(^i;' f.-. ; \:- ^ '■ .'... ■>:,..:
CONJUGACION DiiL VERBO IMPERSONAL
. tits, es. .
■''■•.'•■ ■■ >
I Nm (iA T I V o^il
-J*
CON AFIRMACION.
-ft ^aSf Era.
/jf ^ dtf«i, ' . Ha sido. '• ^ • -'" » >
Xf had been, Habia sido. ■ -^^^^^
It shall, or will be, • ' Serd. • ^ o 'V
CON KEOACIOK.
It is not, vv. • :.i ... Nojci. •/
It toas notf Norori^
It has not beefi, . ijo hasido.
It mil or shall not be, ^ - No serd, '
HffKPBATIVO. ^
Let it be, . ^ " Sea. . ^
Let it not be, • . .,. i^,. No sea. /
im N^tetu GtivkMAticA lH^Lfii^A:
PRIMSR gONJUNTlVO.
JfU iSfOr be, Si es.
ffit U)as, or toer^, Si era.
IfU has beerif Si ha. sido.
If it had been^ Si habia sido.
Jfii shall, or taiU be^ < ^ ' Si seii.
1 #
SEGUNDO COStJftlNTlVO, Y POTBNTIiUL
Though U may be, Aunque pueda ser.
ItiiiMthei P^dia^.
Itm^thaothe^, P6dria haber sido.
Itumbef Podr&fier«
PdTftNCIAL.
It may he, , Puedescr.
It might be, ^ Podia ser.
It might have been, ■ '^ Podria haber sidky.
UshaUU, . c PodriAtt.
• ^ • • .... ' ■ f •
SE CONJUGA CON? INTERROGACION
afinnativa.
' *-^-'> ».■■ ,'" #-■». «
Isitf £s?
Hasitbeenf m^ . Ha^o?
fVillitbef ^ *et4^
CON INTERBOGACION NEGATIVA.
Is it not? No es ?
Was it not? No era?
Has it not been f • No ha sido i .
Willitnotbef Noserd?
CONJUGACION DBtr VERBO IMPERSONAL
it rains, Uuev^. "SAte, y los que seguiran so .
pueden consi^crar como actiYOS*
It rains, or it does rain, ,. r ; XlUevey
It loas rainin^^ tXfMtU
It rained, orU did rain, . . LIovi6b
It has rained, / Hallovido.
..»-'..
YeEBOS InOLESES iMPfiftSOllALSS.
187
It had rained^
It mil raitip
Let it rain^
It may rainy
It might rain,
It might have rained^
It mu raiUf
If it rains^ or dott rtdn,
If it ravatd^ or did ndfr,
Jfit has rainedi ' '
if it had' rained; ' .
If it luill raifif , ^' '
Though it rmnj rain»
Thx>u^ it might f tan,
Though it might have rained^
Though it ntay. rirrfc,
Though it be rairdng^
*Tis going to rain^
Habia Iloviclo.
Llover&.
LIueva.
Puede Hover.
Podria Hover*
Podria haber Hovido.
Podra Hover.
Si Hu6ve.
Si Uovi6. \
Si ha Hovido*
Si hubiese Hovido. ^
Si querrd Hover* '
Aunque pueda Hover.
Aooqtte podia Hover.
Aunque podria haber Uovi^^
Aunque podri Hover.
Aunque esC^ HoyipBdo*.
Va4 Hover.
GONJUGACION CON INTERROGACION
afirinativa.
Does it rain f
Did it rain f
Hits it rained f
Will it rain f
Llueve ?
L1ovi6 ?
Ha Hovido?
Uoverd i
€ONJUGACIO» CON INTfiRROGACTON
negativa.
_ 1
Doe^ it not tarhf
Did it not- rtdn.f
Has it not rdinedf
Had it not rained f
Will it not rttin f
iJo Hueve ?
No Novio ?
No ha Hovido ? '
No habia Hovido .^ '
No Hover^ ?
i.v.
Los siguientes, y los demas de esta clase secoDJugaftd^
tt blotcSf '
Itjreezes^
It thaooSf
It sno^s^
It hails.
It thunders^
It UgfttenSf
Hace ayre.
Yela.
Se derrilala nieive*
Nieva.
Graniza.
Truena.
'*' Refiukipagu&u
168
Nueva Ghamatica Inglesa.
DE LOS VJERBOS IMPERSONALES PASIVOS-
Estof 86 apreoden mas bien por costumbre de habtar quc^
por regla: para dirigir su uso se ponen los exemplos at-/
goientes. ^
EXEMPLOS.
> .1
Se dice.
JU is said.
*Tu talked of.
' Tis tohispered about.
I am tola.
They told me so.
It wU be seen.
It can*t be kepi silent.
People had Seen talking qftoar.
M^^ta^ed strangdy.
Many liesiibere t(da.
It toould'it found out.
It ioovld come to pais.
It toas the toant of care.
hliadnotbeenmyJauU.
Horn did it'hdppen ?' '
It had happened thus.
Could it not be remedied f
It xioould be a hard task.
It Moos the fate qfvsar. . ■',."■
Such things must be'. /
It toas necessary Jbr him to he
on his guard.
That mml,have beetk a great
misfortune. '
It happened so and so.
It has been an unhappy disaster.
He must have been bereft of
ali sensation. .
It tvere to be imhed he ivas
guarded against it.
It inas a gross mistake to have
permitted him to act for him^
It Kas^b6en the effect of bad
government.
It cannot be attribv/ted to any
thing elsef
Se habla de eDo*.
Corre uii rumor secreta.
Me han' dicho.
Me lo ban contado asL
Se dexard ver.
No se puede callar.
La gente habia estado habhndo
£ guerta. .
Se hablo de ua modo estr^o.
Mucho se minti6.
Se sabria, o se descubririiu
Aconteceria.
Ha sido la falta de cuidado.
No ha sido caJ«i mia. .
Como ha suceaido ?
Habia sucedido de este modo.
No se pudo remediar ? ;
£sa serii obra de empefio*
Tal fue el suceso de la gueriii*
Tales cosas se veran.
Le fue preciso vivir con cui-
dado.
Aqudllo pudo baber sido una
desj^racia gnmde.
fiucedio asl y asi.
Ello ha sido un desastre infeliE.
£s preciso que fqese privado de
todos los sentido^.
Seria de desear bue el se guar-
dase contra eQo.
Fu6 un error craso haberle
permitido obrar por si.
Ha sido efecto del mal go-
viemo.
No so puede atribuir a otra
cosa.
N. B. Quando el aficionado haya anrendido la antecedente
iostruccion como tambito el Vocabulario, dialogos, Ac. de
esta obra, ver4 que ' este trabajo le ha servido de mucho
para su mayor adfelantamiento en la acquisieion de la lengua
inglesa. *^
■an
(189)
ALPHABETICAL LIST
OF 9ucn
NAMES OF COUNTRIES, PROVINCES, TOWNS, NATIONS,
SEASr RIVERS, &c.
AS ARE NOT THE SAME IN THE
ENGLISH AND SPANISH LANGUAGES.
EngGik.
Spanish.
EngHsh,
I^Minish.
Aaland,
Alanda.
Avesnes,
Avetias.
Aalburgh,
Alborga.
ATila (a natiTe
Aboledse.
AbbeTille,
Abevila.
of).
Aberdeea,
Aberdona*
Augsbnrgh,
Angsborgo.
Aderborn,
Adefboma.
ATignon,
Avinon*
Adorf,
Adorfa
Atiracby
Auraco.
Adriatic Gulph,
Mar Adri4tico.
Azores,
Tcrceras.
Ajaccio,
Ajazo.
Aigle,
A'goila.
Baltic,
B41tico.
Aigue-morte,
Agua-muerta.
Barbadoes,
Barbada.
Aigaillon,
EgoiiloD.
Barbary.
Barbaria 6
Aire,
Altura.
Berberia.
Aix>la-Cbapelle^
Aqnisgrana.
Barbary (a native
Barberisco 6
AlaU,
Alesia.
of).
Berberisco.
Alenches,
Aleoca.
Basil or Basle,
Basil^a.
Alct,
Aleta.
BaTaria>
Baviera.
Algerine,
Argelino.
' Bavariao,
B&varo.
Algiers,
Ai^.
Bayeux,
Bacho.
Alkmaer,
Alcmar.
Beaamont,
Bomon.
Alp*.
Afpes.
Beauvais,
Boves.
Alsace,
Alsacia.
Bedford,
Bedforte.
Amak,
Amaco.
Belgium, or Low
Praises- Baxos*
Amberg,
Amberga.
Conntries,
Amelaad,
Amelaudta.
Belleisle,
Bela-Isla.
America, (the
JBltados Unidos.
Belt,
Belt«.
United States
Bengal,
Bengala.
of),
Bergen,
BergueH.
Amersfort,
Amersforte:
Biberach,
Biberaque.
Andemach,
Andemaqne.
Bielefeldt,
Bilefelte.
Anjou,
Anj6.
Bilboa,
Bilb&o.
Antibes,
Antibia.
Biscay,
Bizcaya.
Aotillesy
Antilas.
Black Sea,
Mar Negro.
Antwerp,
Ambires.
Bois-le-duc,
Boldnqne.
Arab,
A'rabe,
Bourdeaux,
Burd^os.
Archipelago,
Archipi^lago.
Botany Bay,
Babia Bot^nica.
Armagh,
Annago.
Bouchain, -
Bojan.
Amay-le-^ac,
Areay-el-dnque.
Bouillon,
Bullon.
Amstadt,
. Amsdadio.
Boulogne^
Bolojia.
Atroux,
Arrojo.
Bremen,
Breroa.
Ars,
Arsa;
Brest,
Breste.
Anatlc,
Asi&ttco*
Britany,
Br^aoa.
Asperen,
Aspera«
Brisach, -
Brisaca. *
Atb,
Ata.
Brisgaw,.
Brisgao. .
Athlooe,
Atalooa*
Bruges^
Brujas.
Aubignjr,
AubiSa.
Brussels, *
Bruselas.
190
NAMES OF COUNTRIES, &c.
Englidu
Bargundy,
Cklau,
Canaries,
Cape Francois,
Chpe af Good.
Hope,
Carlisle,
CasUle (New),
Castile (Old),
Catalooian
Channel,
Champagne,
Chaumont,
Chester,
Cologne,
Compiegne,
Constance,
Constantinople,
Copenhagen^
Cork,
Cornwall,
Corsica,
Coninna,
Coventry,
Cumberland^
Cotttances,,
Dane,
Danube,
Dauphiny,
Denmark,
Deux-ponts,,
Dieppe,
Dover,
The Dowos„
Dresden, *
Dunkirk,.
Dutchman,
East-Indies,,
Edinburgh^.
Egypt,
Elbe,
Ely,
Elseneor,.
Enghieh, .
England,
EnglishHUUt,.
Europe,
Finland,
Finisterre,
Flanders,
Florence,
Flushing,
Foix,
Fontainbleai^.
Praoce,
Borg<
S[nmiah,
Cales.
Canarias.
Cabo Frances.
Caba de Boeaa
Esperanaa.,
Carlila.
Cagtillft la NoaR^ak
Castilla la Vieja.
Catalana.
Mancba.
Champaua.
Chomon.
Cesteiv
Colonia.
Gompiena«
Constanza.
Constantinoptk.
Copenhaga 6
Copenhague.
Corco.
Comualla.
Corcega.
Coruna.
Coventra.
Cumberlandk.
Cutanza.
Dinaraarqu£i;
Pandbio.
Delphinadh..
Dinamarca*.
Do6-Puent6s^
Diepa.
Dovre 6 Douy<re&.
Dunas.
Dresda..
Dunkerque.
Holand^s.
Indias Orientales*
Edimborgp.
Egipto.
Elba.
Elia.
Elsenor.
Anguien..
Inglaterra.
Ingles.
Europa.
Finlanda.
Finistierra*.
Flandes.
Florencia«
Flesinga.
Foes.
Fonteneb]6L
Francia*
EngUth.
, Franehe Coiat^
Fcmaalilbfe upMi
Oder,
Franckfort upon
Main»
:
; Qallowarfy-
Gascony,
I Getmymy
Genoa,
Germany,
I Ghenty
Gotenburgh,
GraveKnes,
Great Britain^
Greece,
Grenoble,
Groningen,.
Guernsey,
Hague,
Hamburgh,
Hanse-towna*
Havannah,
Holland,
Hungary,
Hungarian,
Inverness, .
Ireland,
Irishman,
Isle de France^y
Juliers,
Kaiserslauteo,)
Kingsale,
Koningsberg^.
Lancaster,
Landau,
Langue^Uia,,
Lausaone,
Leghorn,
Leiptic,
Levant,
Leyden,
Liege,
Lincoln,,
Lindau,
lisbea,.
Lisle,
.Loire,
Lombardy,
London,
Lorrain,
Loovain,
Lucem,
Loneville^
Sptim$h,
Franco Condado.
Fraocfort del
Oder.
Francfort del
Maino. . .
Galnva.
Gascuna.
Ginebra.
Geneva.
Aiedmbi.
Alemauia.
Gante.
Gotembnrgo*.
Gravelines^
Gran-Breth&b^
Grecia.
Grenobla^
Groninga.
Gamesey..
Hagiak
Hamburgo.
Anseaticas.
Havana.
Holanda.
HungrSa.
.HuagaiOr
Invernesa.
Irlanda.
Irlandes.
Isla de Fraueiik
Julieres.
Kaiserslautrea
Kinsala.
Koninsbergue.
LancaotKM
Landao.
licnguadoqiie.
Lausana..
Liorna 6 Livoma*
Lipsia.
Levante.
Leida.
Lieja.
Lilcoloak-
Lindao.
Lisboa*
Lila.
Loera.
Lombardia*
L6ndres.
Lorena.
Lovaina*
Lucema.
Xvneyilla.
NAMB$ Q? COVNtRJES^ &e.
W
Lyons,
Madeira*
Maestricht^
Magdcburghy
MataoD,
Malaga (a najLivO'
Malines,
Maltese,
Marseilles)
Martinico,
Maurititis,
Mayenne,
Meaux,
Me4ei«fb)lok,
Mediterran^f^a
Sea,
Medoc,
Mentz,
Meuse,
Middelbnrghy
Morocco.
Moselle,
Narbonne,
Naples,
Neofchatel,
Newfoundland,
New-York,
Nieuport,
Nile,
Nivemois,
Normandy,
North Sea,
Norway,
Narembargb,
Offenbarg,
Oi'se,
Oldenburg,
Osnaburg,
Paci6c Ocean,
Paderbom,
Palatinate,
Passau,
Perche,
Peterborough,
Petersburgh,
i^hiladelphia,
Picardy,
Piedmont,
Piedmontese,
Poland,
Poiton,
Pyrenees,
Portuguese,
Sptfnifh,
Leon.
Madenu
Mastrique,
Magdeburgo.
Maon.
Malages.
Malinas. .
Maltes.
Marsella.
Martinica.
Isla de Remioq*
Mayena.
Meos>
Medenblike*
Mar Mediter-
raneo.
MedoQO.
Maguncia.
Mosa.
Midelburgp.
Marru6cos.
Mosela.
Narbona.
N4poles.
Neucastel.
Tierra-Nueva.
Nueva-York.
Nioporte.
Nilo.
Nivernoes.
Normandia.
Mar Septen-
trional.
Norvegia.
Nuremberga.
Ofenburgo.
Oise.
Oldenburgo.
Osnabrugue.
Mar Pacifico.
Paderboma.
Palatinado.
Pasao 6 Posa.
Percha.
Peterborugo.
Petersburgo.
Filadelfia.
Picardia.
Piamonte.
Piamontes.
Polonia.
Poet&.
Perinios 6 Py-
Portugues.
Presburgb,
Provence,
Quebec,
Quesnoy,
RagosiAiH
Ratisboo,
Red Sea,
Rhine,
Rhone,
Rhodes,
Rochejle,
Rosetto,
Rostrab,
Rouen,
Russia;
Russian,
Saintonge,
Salins,
Sambre,
St. Chaumont,
St. Gennaio,,
Presbiii^O.
ProTenza.
Qoebeca.
Quenoe.
Raguses.
Ratisbona*.
MarBennt^
Rhin.
Rh6fl890.
Rodas.
Rochela*.
Roseta.
Rostroko..
Ruan.
Rusia.
Ruso.
Xantonje.
Salinas.
Sambra.
San Chamondf.
San GermwMi...
St. Jean do. I«HZ, Sao Juandje* I«ii;9»
St. Malo,
St. Domingo,
Sardinia,
Saulve,
Savoy,
Saxony,
Scheldt,
Scania,
Schaffhausen,
Schiedam,
Scotland,
Scotchman,
Scutari,
Seine,
Sevsille,
Sicily,
Sligo Bay,
Soest,
Soleure,
Somersetshire,
Soubise,
Sound,
Southampton,
South Sea,
Spain,
Sterling,
Stockholm,
Strasburgh,
Strasburgh,
San Malq.
San Domingo.
Cerdena.
Saulva.
Savoya.
Saxonia.
Escalda.
Escania.
Eschasme.
Escbiedam*
£sc6cia.
Escoc^s.
Escodra.
Sena.
Sevilla.
Sicilia.
Bahia de Sligo.
Soesta..
Solora.
Somersete.
Subisa.
Sunda.
Suthampton.
Mar del Sud.
Espana.
Esterlinga.
Stockolmo.
Strasburgo.
Argentina.
Stulweissenburgh, Alba-Real.
Suabia, Suebia 6 Suavia.
The Sublime Porte, La Sublime Puerta.
Sweden, Suecia.
S^e,, Sueoo.
Swiff, Suizo.-
192
NAMES OF COUNTRIES, &c
Englidi.
Spanisk,
Englith.
SpmM.
Svitierbind,
Suiza.
Venice,
Venecia. ^
Versailles,
Versalla.
Table-Bay,
Babia de Tabla.
Vienna,
Viena.
Tturtajy,
Taitaria.
Vivaraii,
Vivarei.
Thames,
TamiMi. '
w
Toul,
TuU
Ukraine,
Ukrania.
Touloo,
Tulon 6 ToloD.
Ulm,
Ulma.
Touloofle,
Tolosa.
The United Pro-
Proyincias Unldas.
Trimulla.
vinces,
1
Trent,
Treota.
Upsal,
Upsalia.
Treret or Tners,
Tr^veris,
Utrecht,
Utrequtf.
Triest,
Trieste.
TtmeamtLH,
Trinquima16.
Walcheren,
Valeheren.
TatuMf
Tunez.
Wales,
G4le8.
Tanetine^
Tonesioo.
West-Friesland,
Wes-Frisa.
Touraioe,
Turena.
West-Indies,
Indias Occiden-
Turk,
Turco.
tales.
Turkey,
TurquSa. '
Wetzlar,
Wezlaria.
Tmcany,
. Toscana.
Westmioster,
Wesminster.
Twer,
Tuver.
Widdin,
Vidin.
Valaii,
Galesa.
Yarmouth,
Yarmnth.
Valette,
Valeta.
York,
Yorka.
ValogBe.
Valona,
Y>res,
Ypre.
Vattelhie Coantry.ValUdioa. |
Varennes,
Varenas.
Zealand,
Zelanda.
FINIS.
"' :•'
T. c. HAHSAan, Priiittr,reteibofM|lh€Mrt, r^eMUeet^
T-^
0*^
ni^ .
THE NEW YORK. PUBLIC LIBRARY
REFERENCE DEPARTMENT
Thia book ■• under no oiroumatancei to be
taken trom the Buildini
'"■"■
r
\
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11